Proceedings and Transact Ons - Forgotten Books
590
-
Upload
khangminh22 -
Category
Documents
-
view
0 -
download
0
Transcript of Proceedings and Transact Ons - Forgotten Books
PROCE E D INGS
AND
TR A N S A C T O N S
OF THE
R OYAl, SOC I ETY
CA NAD A
F OR TH E Y E A R 1 8 8 9 .
VO L U M E V I I .
MONTREALDAWSON BROTHERS, PUBLISHERS .
1 89 0 .
E NTERED accord ing to Act of Parl iamen t in the year 1890 in the Oth ee of the M in ister of Agr icul tureby DAWSON BROTHERS, for the ROYAL SOCIETY.
PRI NTED BY THE GAZ ETTE PRINTING COMPANY, MONTRE AL.
TABLE OF CONTE NTS .
PROCE E D I NGS .
PAGE
Proceedings for 1 889
TRANSACTI ONS .
SECTION I .
I . Mon tcalmpein t par lui-me‘
me d’
aprés ( Zes p z’
éces z'
nédttes. Par L ’
ABB I’
EH .
-R . CASGRAIN . 3
I I . Le Golfe Saint-Lam'
ent ( 1 625 Par BENJAMIN SULTE 29
I I I . Paralle‘
le histort'
que entre le comte de la Galissomz z’
e‘
re ( 1747-9 ) et te comte deD ufierz’
n
(1 872 Par J .
-M . LEMOINE :
IV. Maximilien ,vo
‘z/ageur, écrivaz
‘
n, crit ique d
’
w'
t , poete, ma/rin ,observa
'
teu r , philosophe,biblz
‘
ophz‘
le et chre’
t z'
eh. Par FAUCHER DE SAINT-MAURICE
SECTION I I .
The Study of Polit icalS cience in Canadian Universit ies. By JOHN GEORGE
BOUR INOT.
The Cartography of the Gulf of St . Lawrence, f r om Cafrt 't'
er to Champlain . By W .
F . GANONGTrade and Commerce in the Sto
_
7t e Age. By SIR DAN IE L
E xpeditions to the Pacific. With a brief refet ence to the Voyages of D iscovery in seas
contiguous to Canada , in connect ion with a Westem Passage fr om E urope toAsia . By SANDFORD FLEMING
SECTION I II.
The Maximum Shear and Bending Jlloment produced by a Live Load at dzfleren t points
of Horiz ontalGi’rder AB of span 1. By H. T. BOVEY
N otes on MathematicalPhysics. By J'
. LOUDON
A NationalS tandard of Pitch. By J . LOUDON
N o tes On some Unexplained An omalies in the Flame Reactions of certain M inerals and
ChemicalB odies. By E . J . CHAPMANCruces Mathematicce . By N . F . DUPU IS
On the Variation of the D ensity with the Concen to'
at z'
on of Weak Aqueous Solutions ofCertain Salts. By J . Gr. MACGREGOR
A Problem in PoliticalScience. By SANDFORD FLEMING
II TABLE OF CONTENTS.
SECTION I I I .— Con tinued.
Oh the Hygo'
oscopicity c efrtaz'
n Canadian FossilFuels. By‘
Gr. 0 . HOFFMANN
IX. Computation of Occultalton and E clipses for a g iven'
locality by Go'
aph-t’
e Construction .
By N. F .
X. Anno tated L ist of Minerals Occurrtfi -zg in Canada. By Gr. 0 . HOFFMANN
SECTION IV
I . Presiden tialAddress Oh the Prog ress of GeologicalI nvestigation in New Brunswick.
By L . W . BA ILEY
I I . No tes on D evonian Plants. By D . P. PE NHALLOW
Oh New Species of FossilSponges f r om, the Situro-Cambrtmt at Little Metz‘
s on the
Lower S t . Lawrence. By SI R J . WILL IAM DAWSON . (I ncluding Notes“
oh the
Specimens, by Gr. J . HIND E )IV. Oh some Relat ions between the Geology of E astern M aine and New B runswick. By L .
V. Oh F ossilPlants collected by 13112 R . A . M cConnell, on Macken z ie R iver, and by 111 7:
T. C. Weston ,on Bow River. By SI R J . WILL IAM DAW SON
VI . D esc riptions of eight New Species of Fossils f mm the Cambm-S tlm'tan Rocks of
Man itoba . By J . F . WH ITEAVE S
Fa‘esh-water Sponges of Canada and Newfoundland. By A . H. MACKAYNotes on the Geography and Geology of the B ig Bend of the Columbia . By A . P.
IX. The Yield of Spring Wheat , Ba rley and Oats, grown as S inglePlants. By W I LLI AM
X. Some Rema rks on the Classificat ion of Trilobites, as influenced by S tratigraphical
Relations with Outline of a New Grouping of these Forms. By E . J
CHAPMAN
XI . The I roquois Beach : a Chapter in the Geologi calHistory of L ake On tario . By J W
On Cambrian Org anisms in Acadia . By G . F . MATTHEW .
TABLE OF CONTENTS. II I
LI STOF ILLUSTRATI ONS .
SECTION I I .
Cuts (8) t o il lustrate Mr. GANONG’
S paper 0 11 the Cartography 0 1'
t he Gulf of St .
Law ren ce, pp . 2 9 t o 44 .
Cuts pp. 95 and 9G, and map to illustrate Mr. SANDFORD FLEMING’
S paper on
Exped ition s to th e Pacific .
SECTION III.
Cuts (2 ) to i llustrate Prof. LOUDON’
S paper on Mathematical Physics , 9 .
Plate ( 1 ) t o il lustrate Prof. DU PU IS’
paper 0 11 Computation of Oc cu ltation , et c .
SECTION IV.
Plates ( I and I I ) to il lustrate Prof. PENHALLOW’
S paper on Dev on ian Plan ts .
Map, p . 32,cuts pp . 37 to 54, an d plate ( I I I ) t o i llustrate SI R W . DAW SON
’
S
paper on Fossil Sponges from Little Metis .
Plate ( IV) to i llustrate Mr. MACKAY ’
S paper on Fresh-Water Sponges .
Cfits pp . 1 39 t o 142 , and plates ( V to IX ) il lustrate M1‘
. MATTHEW’
S paper onCambrian Organ i sm s .
Plates ( X and X1 ) t o i l lustrate SI R W . DAW SON’
S paper on Northw est Fo ssil Plan ts .
Plates ( XI I t o XVI I ) to i l lustrate Mr. WHITE AVE S’
paper 0 11 Man i toban Fossils .
Cuts pp . 9 8 and 1 0 3 , and plate ( XVI I I ) to i llustrate Prof. COLEMAN’
S paper 0 11the Big Bend of th e Columb ia .
Map, p. 1 23 , and cuts pp . 1 2 5 t o 1 27 , to i llustrate Prof. SPENCE R’
S paper on the
Iroquois Beach .
P R O C E E D I N G S F O R 1 8 9 .
E IGHTH GENERAL ME ETI NG, MAY , 1 889 .
SESSION I . (May 7 th. )
The RoyalSociety of Canada he l d it s e igh th gene ral meeti ng i n the Rai lway Comm i ttee Roomof the House of Common s , on Tuesday, May 7 th . The Pr esiden t
,D r. Sandf
‘
o r d F lemi ng , took
the chai r at 10 o ’clock mm. and fo rmally cal led the meet ing to o rde r .The Hono ra ry Sec r eta r y then r ead the fol l owing
REPORT OF COUNC IL .
The Ceunc ilo f the RoyalSoc ie ty have the honou r to submi t the fo l low ing Repo r tWe are glad to be able to state that Vol . VI
,of the ‘Transactions
,
’ Wh ich compr ises thepr oceed ings and pape rs of t he meeti ng in May las t, i s n ow r eady fo r d i s t r i bution . The de lay i nappea rance, though the volume i s smal le r in size
,is explai ned i n t he fol low ing repo r t from the
Pr in t ing Comm i ttee
Report of the Print ing Committee.
MONTREAL,May 4 th , 188 9 .
The Committee b eg to repo r t that the volume of'
Transac tion s fo r 1 888 is comple te and theynow p resen t copies to the Soc iety .
The volume i s smal le r than the prev ious volumes , but the matte r is exceptional ly difficultand costly to set
,and the co r rect ion of t he proof has been ted ious .
G r eat and unusual delay occu r red i n send ing in the MSS . The Soc iety has made a rule that allMSS . should be sen t in befo r e August lst , and that the Sec reta r ies of t he Sec tions should fu rn ishbefo re that date a l ist of allpape r s to be pr in ted . In Sec tio n I
,t he MSS . and the l is t we r e r ece i ved
i n July . In Section II , the l is t was no t r ece i ved un t i l Oc tobe r ; the MSS . we r e al so ve ry late,and
i n any even t noth ing could be set un t il the autho r i zed l is t was r ece ived . In Sec tion I I I , the l is t and
Free. 1889 . A
I I ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA .
some of t he MSS . we re sen t in June . I n Section 1V,the l i s t and some of the MSS . we r e sen t i n June .
“ You r Commi ttee at i ts meet ing on Oc t . 4th found that allthe MSS. fo r wh ich any autho r i ty
existed to prin t we re i n t he pr in te r’s hands and n ea r ly alli n type . They found al so that a la rge
numbe r of MSS wh ich had been r epo r ted fo r publ i cat i on , had no t been r ece ived . A c i r cular wasthen sen t to auth o rs of pape rs d i rec t ing thei r atten tion to the rule of t he Soc ie ty and to t he necess i tyfo r immed iate t ran smi ss i on of pape rs. In r esponse to th is, t he mis sing pape r s began to come iht he last of' them a r r iv i ng on D ec . 3 rd.
I t happened , h oweve r , that some of t he pape r s wh ich we r e late we r e very difficult to pr in t, andthat one of them had to be in the h ands of t he pr i nte r befo re beg i nn i ng Sec tion IV. Muchi nconven ien ce a r ose f r om th i s cause.
“ The Commi ttee t rus t that no s imi la r h i nd rances w i l l be placed i n t he way of t he i ssue of then ex t volume, and that t he Soc ie ty wi l l au th o r ize i ts Commi ttee to postpone allpape rs delayed beyond
the prepe r t ime, whateve r excuse may be offe red .
“ The accoun ts are subm i tted he r ew i th .
“ Copies o f the volume have been sen t to Ottawa fo r the use of t he membe r s of t he Society .
The Comm i ttee have to expr ess it s obl igation s to Mr. S . E . Dawson fo r h i s ca re and atten t ion
in t he matte r of col lec ting MSS . and supe r in tend ing t he p r in ting ,and al so to Mr. Bood le fo r the ca re
bes towed upon some unusua l ly d iffi cul t pape r s.
Allof wh ich is r espectful ly subm i tted .
J. W DAWSO N ,Acting Chairman .
MONTREAL,May 4th, 1889 .
The RoyalSociety of Canada,
To D awson Brothers, D r.
For Balance fr om las t accoun tEditing . Q C .
Statione r y
Postages, Pr oofs , ete .
Pape rI l lus t rat ion sComposi t iPress wo r k .
A l te rationsInsu rance and sto rage .
Cases, packing, sh ipping expenses .
Fo r eign and domesti c freigh t, expr ess cha rges
ext ra copiesi
78
Sales of volumes
5 0
8 28
PROCEED INGS FOR 188 9 . II I
S in ce las t May t he Hono ra ry Sec r eta ry has endeavo red to ob tain an express ion of'
Opin i on fr omallthe membe r s of the Soc iety as to the most conven ien t time fo r ensu r ing a la rge r at tendan ce at the
gene ra l meet ing by i ssuing a c i r cula r dated Feb rua ry 15 th . I t w i l l be seen fr om t he tabulatedstatemen t appended to the c i r cula r that the r e i s a g reat va r iety o f sen timen t on th i s subjec t. Thefol low ing i s the c i r cula r i ssued
Circular.
— The AnnualGeneralMeeting.
DEAR s — Wi l l you at your ea r l iest conven ience send me definite r epl ies to the fo l low ingque r ies fo r t he info rmat ion of t he Coun c i l of the Roya l Soc iety When
,in your opi n i on , is t he
most conven ien t time fo r ho ld ing the Annual Gene ral Meet ing of the Roya l Soc iety ? ( 2 ) What date
and mon t h wi l l sui t you bes t as a rule, and pr obably ensu re you r pe r sonal attendan ce ( 3 ) Are you
i n favou r of’ hav ing t he Gen e r al Meeting th is yea r in Ottawa at the end of May o r t he beg inn ingof June ?
Yours,et c .,
J G. BOURI NOT, Hon . Sec.
Replies to Circular tabulated.
SE CTI ON 1 . QuEs. 1 . QUES. 2. QuEs. 3. PLACE.
Spr ing o r Autumn . . Sept. 19 May ( end)
D e Cazes , Paul
Fauche r de Sain t-Mau r ice,N .
F rechette, Louis . No cho ice
Legend re , Napoleon
LeMay , Pamphi le
LeMoine, J . M
Lusignan , A Any time except Sept June (end)
Ma rchand, l’hon . F .-G Summe r
Marmet te, Joseph
Autumn ( late)
May o r June .
lV ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA .
SE CTI ON I I. QUES. 1 . Quss. 2 . QUES. 3 . PLACE.
Bucke, R . Maur ice
Dawson , Rev . JE neasMacdone l l .
Den ison, Lt -Co
'
l. T Montreal.
G rant,Ve ry Rev . G. M
K i rby,W i ll iam
Lespe rance , John Talon Mont real .
Lya ll , Rev . W August. No choice
Murray , Geo .
Mur ray , Rev . J. Cla rk
McColl,Evan
Reade, Joh n
Smith,Goldwin
Stewa r t, Geo rge, Jun Sept. (middle) May (end) .
Wa tSOD , J O O Q Q C U
W i l son,Sir Dan ie]
With row, Rev . W . H
SE CTI ON I II.
Baillargé, C
Bovey , H . J
Carpmael, C
Chapman , E . J June 1-5 or Sept. 25 June (beginn ing) .
Cherriman , J. B
Devil le, E
F leming, Sandfo rd
Gi rdwood, G. P
Gisbo rne, F . N
Haanel, E .
Hamel , Monsigno r
Ha r r ington , B. J
Hofimann , G . C
Hunt,T. Ste r ry
Johnson,A
London,J. T
Macfa rlane, T As usual Ottawa.
MacGregor, J. G May 1 -7
PROCEED INGS FOR 1889 . V
SE CTI ON I V. QUES. 1 . QUES. 2 . QUES . 3 . PLACE .
Bai ley, L. W June 1-15 May .
Bel l , D r. Robe r t May. May 7 .
Bu rgess, T. J Spr ing o r Summe r . May o r June
Dawson , G .M Dec . to Ma rch May (early) .
Dawson, Sir J W . Sept No choice
F letche r,James . May (end) May 24
Gi lpin , Edwin . May o r June
Grant, Sir James Session of Parliam'
n t Apr i l o r May
Honeyman , Rev . D
Laflamme, Abbé J. C. K
o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
Macoun , J
MacKay , A . H
Matthew,G . F
Penhallow,D . P
Provancher, Abbé
saunde rs, W
Selwyn , A . R. C
Wh iteaves, J. F
W r ight, R . Ramsay
Th is spr ing ,howeve r
,i t was dec ided afte r consul tation between t he Sec r eta ry, t he Pr es ident and
a numbe r of pr om inen t membe r s w i th in easy reach , to hol d the gene ral meet ing a fo r tn igh t ea r l ie r ,with the v iew of hav ing the advantage of the p resen ce of His E xce l lency the Gove rno r-Gene ral , who
has taken eve r y Oppo r tun i ty, when he has met our membe r s , to expr ess his ea r nes t desi r e to d o allinh is powe r to p r omote the objects of the Soc iety . One of
"
the first th ings that the Soc iety wi l l becal led upon te do to-mo r r ow wi l l be t he presen tati on of t he fol lowing add ress
,ask ing H is E xce l len cy
to become our Hono ra r y Pres iden t i n success ion to his p r edecesso rs, th e Ma rquis of L o r ne and t he
Ma rqu is of Lansdowne.
Address to the Governor-General.
To His E xce l len cy the R igh t Honou rable Sir F r ede r ick A r thur Stan ley , Bar on Stan ley of Pr eston
,in the Coun ty of Lancaste r , in the Pee rage of G r eat B r i tain ; Kn igh t G rand Cr oss of the Most
Honou rab le Or de r of the Bath , Gove rno r -Gene ral of Canada and V i ce-Aclmiralof the same .
May i t please You r E xce l lencyWe
,the Fel lows of the Royal Soc iety of Canada, take th is oppo r tun i ty, t he first we have had
since You r E xcel lency became t he Gove rno r -Gene ral of th is po r t ion of the Empi r e, to expr ess theh0 pe that you w i l l be pleased to accept t he pos i t i on wh ich your predecesso rs have he retofo r e filled
,
and to become our Hono ra r y Presiden t.
VI ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA .
As You r E xcel len cy i s awa re,the RoyalSoc iety was founded by the Ma r qu i s of Lo rne du r ing
h is admin i s t rat ion in Canada, wi th the object of'
en cou rag ing Sc ience and L i te ratu re,and of
"
ass istingin the in tel lectual developmen t of th is coun t ry .
A l though the membe r sh ip of the Royal Society is l im i ted , ye t i t r ests on no na r r ow basi s , anditsTran sac ti ons are open t o the l i te ra ry effo r ts of eve ry pe rson who has good wo r k to offe r . I t i saffiliat ed at the same t ime wi th allt he lead ing Scien t ific and L i te ra ry assoc iat ion s of the D om in i on ,who send delegates to its annual meet ings , and othe rw ise assist i n the p r omo tion of t he wo r k fo rwh ich i t has been establ ished .
I ts membe r sh ip r ecogn izes no d istincti ons of r ace o r c r eed , but is based on the same princ iplesof l i be ral i ty and un i ty on wh ich the Con fede rat ion i s founded . As the F r ench Canad ian has comb inedW i th the E ng l ish Canad ian to bui ld up a g reat D omin ion , studded W i th p r ov in ces fr om t he A tlan ti cto t he Pacific
,t he r epresen tatives of t he two nati onal i ties have un i ted i n th is Soc iety to p r ove to the
wo r ld that in the walks of Lette r s and Sc ience,as in t he sphe r e ofPol i ti cs, the r e are many oppo r tun i
t ies fo r emulat ion and usefulness.
We are confiden t that You r E xcel len cy , l ike the two d istinguished n oblemen who immed iately
preceded you in the elevated pos i t ion you n ow occupy, wi l l extend to the Socie ty that co rd ial sym
pathy wh ich is essen tial to its success,and wh ich wi l l be no t t he leas t g rat ify ing eviden ce that i ts
membe r s can rece ive of the value of the objects wh i ch they have at hea r t . I n a coun t ry l ike th i s,
whe r e the r e is so much to do in t he way oi' mate r ial devel opmen t, L i te ratu r e and Sc ience mus t
necessa r i ly eng r oss the t ime and ab i l i ty of a r elati ve ly l im ited numbe r of pe rsons. Th is Soc iety ,howeve r
,has eve r y r eason to b e grat ified wi th t he encou ragemen t wh i ch its labou r s have r ece i ved i n
eve ry coun t r y whe r e its Transac tions are c i r culated ; but n o one fact is mo r e sat i sfacto ry,o r bette r
cal culated to st imulate exe r t ion,than the r ead iness wi th wh ich the Gove r nmen t and Pa r l iamen t o f
Canada have come to its ass istan ce since i ts foundat ion,and enabled i t to g ive its Pr oceed ings to t he
wo r ld in a fo rm i n eve ry way wo r thy of the coun t ry .
We feel that a Soc iety wh ich has t he cul t i vat ion of L i te ratu re as one of“
its pr inc ipa l objects,has a spec ial c laim on You r Excel lency ’
s atten t ion . Allof us r emembe r w i th t he deepes t in te r es tthat you r i l lust r i ous fathe r in h is youth won many academic honou rs in the study of t he g reat poetsof an c ien t days. I n the noted o rato r i cal effo r ts of h is b r i l l ian t ca ree r he d isplayed that fire and
ene rgy wh ich we r e cha racte r ist i c of t he he r oes of t he immo r tal epi c he had maste r ed so wel l . Whi le
the h isto r ian of pol i t ics wi l l r eco r d h is t r iumphs as t he ‘Rupe r t of Debate,’ men of lette rs wi ll l i ke
best to l inge r on h is success in r ende r ing the‘ I l iad ’ into match less Eng l i sh ve r se.
I n conclus ion we can on ly repeat the nume r ous express ions of k ind ly w ishes wh ich Your E xeel
lency has al ready r eceived since you r assumption of oth ee . We are qui te su r e that both You r E xce l
lency and Lady Stan ley of P reston al r eady know ful l we l l , how much r espec t the people of Canada
en te r tain fo r the r epr esen tat ive of the Sove reign they r eve r e, and how deeply they are an imated by
the des i re that you r r es iden ce in th i s l oyal dependen cy of the Cr own w i l l be made enjoyable i n eve r y
sense, and that when you are cal led upon to reti r e fr om you r h igh posi t ion in th is coun t ry you w i l l
fee l that you have left anothe r Eng land beh ind .
”
I t is pr oposed that th i s add ress shal l be signedlby allthe membe rs in attendance and pr esented at
Gove r nmen t House at o’c lock to -mo r r ow . We may add that i t has been eng r ossed and a r t i st ic
ally executed unde r the d i r ection of t he Hono ra r y Sec r eta r y , so that H is E xcel lency may havealways in a pe r manen t fo r m th is express ion of the k ind ly w ishes of t he membe r s of theRoyal Soc iety.
PROCEED INGS FOR 1889 . VI I
Accommodation for the Society.
The Counc i l do no t t h ink i t necessa ry to cal l atten t i on at any leng th on the pr esen t occasion tothe necess i ty of hav ing soone r o r later more pe rmanen t accommodat ion fo r the wo rk of the Society ;but they con ten t t hemselv es
'
with di r ect ing you r no t i ce to th e i r pr ev ious r epo r ts, whe re the wholesubjec t has been sufficien tly emphasi zed . They may add that the books and pamph lets recei ved fr omothe r in st i tut ions con t inue to accumu late
,and are n ow sto red away i n the vaul ts of the Pa r l iamen t
Bui ld ing ,whe r e th ey are necessa r i ly inaccess i b le to those pe r son s who migh t w ish to see and consul t
them . Thei r va lue as wo rks of r efe rence, h oweve r , is g r eatly impai red by the fac t that t he g reate r
pa r t of them are st i l l unbound .
Afiliated Societies.
The Counc i l have much pleasu re in ex tend ing a co r d ia l we l come once mo r e to a numbe r of de le
gates fr om the lead ing sc ient ific and l i te ra r y soc iet ies th r oughout Canada, who w i l l b e ab le to presen ta summa r y of the impo r tan t wo r k that they have been pe r fo r m ing in thei r r espect ive sphe r es oflabour du r ing the pas t twelve mon th s . No pa r t of the Transacti ons i s of g r eate r uti l i ty than th i sev idence of the l i te rary and scient ific p r og ress of Canada. I t w i l l be of much value to the futu reh is to r ian of th is coun t ry . The follow ing i s a l ist of the de legates whose names have been so far
r ece ived by the Hono ra ry Sec r eta ry
SOCIETY. PLACE . DELEGATE .
Society of Canadian L i te rature Mont real
Natural Hi sto ry Society
Soeiété Hi sto r ique
Numismatic and Antiqua r ian
Society of Histo r ical Studies
Ce rcle L i tté rai re Fraueais
Canadian Society of Civi l Enginee r s
L ite ra ry and Hi sto r ical Society
Geog raphical Society
In stitut Canadien
Lite ra ry and Scien t ific Society
F ield-Natu ral is ts’ Club Dr. R.W. E lls.
Inst i tut Canadien-frangais Stan islas D rapeau.
Hamil ton Association Hamilton . James F letche r .
Wentwo r th H isto r ical Society
Mu rchison Scient ific Society
E ntomological Society of Onta r io
Canadian I nstitute
Natural H isto ry Society of N E.
N. S. Institute ofNaturalScience
N. S. Histo r ical Society J M. Oxley.
VII I ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA .
E lection to Vacancies.
D ur ing the pas t yea r i t became necessa r y, i n acco rdan ce w ith the Rules oi‘
the Society,to take
steps to fillup t h r ee vacanc ies in Sec tion I I devoted to E ng l ish L i te ratu r e , and one vacancy i n Secti onI I I devoted to t he Mathemat ical and Phys ica l Sc ien ces . A cc o rd ing ly , t he Hono ra ry Sec r eta ry , i nt he firs t place, t ran sm i tted to the membe r s of these Sect ions c i r cula r s n o ti fying them of t he vacan c ies,and then hav ing duly r ece i ved the n omi nat ion pape rs he r eto appended , b e mai led the names of thecand idates w i th voting pape rs to each memb er o t
’
the Sect ion s i n ques t i on i n compl ian ce w i th t heRules
C'optes of Nomination Papers.
SECT IO N I I .
Nominations to fillvacanc ies i n Sec tion I I.The unde r s igned membe r s of Sect ion I I of the Royal Socie ty of Canada beg leave to n om inate
Mr. Ho rat io Ha le as a gent leman eminently fi tted to fillthe vacan cy in that Section . Mr. Haleoecupies a h igh rank among the ph ilolog i s ts of th is con tinen t ; has g i ven special atten t ion to the
native languages of Canada ; i s the auth o r of nume r ous valuab le pape rs on that subjec t, as we llas ont he languages ofPolynes ia ; and o n impo r tan t depa r tmen ts of the Sc ience of Language. He i s one
of th ree membe rs of' the Bri t i sh Associati on spec ial ly n om inated to repo r t on t he phys ical cha rac te r s ,language, and soc ial cond i t ion of t he Northwestern t r i bes of Canada.
Jan ,1889 . DAN IE L WI L SON . GEORGE T. DEN I SON .
J. G. BOURI NOT. GEORGE STEWART,Jun .
W . H . W ITHROW .
Mr. Geo rge Pat te rson , of N ew Glasgow ,Nova Sco tia, has devo ted much atten ti on to t heH isto ry
and A r chaeol ogy of that Prov i nce ; and to i ts nat ive Ind ian tri bes . We bel ieve he would be a usefulmembe r of t he Sec tion of E ng l i sh L i te ratu re, H isto ry and A r chaeo logy, and devote h imse lf to thee luc idat ion of the e th nology and a r chaeology of t he Ma r i t ime Pr ov inces. We beg leave to r ecommend
h im as a membe r of Sec tion I I .
D AN IE L WI L SO N,GEORGE STEWART, Jun ,
J. G. BOURINo'r .
”
(3 )
We,the unde rsigned membe r s of the Eng l ish L i te ratu r e Sec tion of the Royal Soc iety of Canada,
he reby nominate as a m embe r to fillthe p resen t vacan cy i n t he Sec tion caused by the r eti remen t ofCha r les L indsey
,Esq .
,Mr. Cha r les Mai r , of
‘
P r in ce A l be r t,in the No r thwes t Te r r i to r ies, on accoun t
of h is h igh l i te ra r y abi l i ty and h is hav ing publ ished two complete books , v iz .
1 .
‘ D r eamland,and o the r Poems
,
’
1868 .
2 .
‘Tecumseh,a D rama
,
’1886 .
W . KI RBY ,GEORGE T. D E N ISON ,
J. T. L E SPERA NCE , [EmMcD . D AWSON ,J . G. BOUR INOT, GEORGE MURRAY,
GEORGE STEWART, Jun .,
JOHN WATSON .
”
PROCE EDINGS FOR 188 9 . IX
SE CTION III .
( 1 0 )
The unde r signed mem be rs of Sec tio n 11 1 of t he Roya l Soc iety o f Canada r ecommend W . H .
E l l is M .D .,as a fit and p r opo r pe r son to fillt he vacan cy i n th i s Sec tion .
D r . E l l i s was Pr ofesso r of Chemist ry i n t he To r on to Medical Schoo l fr om 18 7 1 to 1879 . He
acted as Ass is tan t Pr ofesso r i n the Schoo l of Practical Sc ience,To r on to
,f r om 187 9 to 18 82 ; and he
has been Pr ofesso r of Appl ied Chemistry i n that inst i tution fr om 188 2 t o the presen t t ime . He has
also been t he Publ i c Analys t fo r To r on to s in ce 187 8 .
D r . E l l i s i s wel l know n th r oughout the Domin i on as an eminen t tox icolog ical chemist . He has
publ ished i n t he Canad ian Journalf the‘Analy ist ,
’
and othe r sou r ces,valuable pape r s on Canad ian
wate r s,on t he Occu r r ence o f
'
Tellurium i n Canada,De te r minat ion ofTann in in Spi ces , Tea Analys is
e tc .
,and he has lately i ssued an e labo rate r epo r t on the wate r supply of To r on to . A commun i
cation on Mi lk A na lysi s was a lso r ead by him a t t he r ecen t meet ing oi“
t he Roya l Soc ie ty of Canada
(May ,
Enwn . J. CHAPMAN .
THOMAS MACFARLANE .
E . DEVI LL E .
”
JULY 27 t h, 1887 .
OTTAWA,Janua r y 2 5 t h
,18 89 .
J. G. BOURI No'
r,E SQ.
,LL.D .,
Seeretaryfl
of the Royal Soc iety of Canada.
DEAR SI R, —The re being a vacan cy in t he membe r sh ip of Sec t ion I I I of t he Royal Soc ie ty oi‘
Canada, in consequen ce of the death of the Hon . D r . Fo r ti n,of Mon t real
,we
,t he unde rs igned mem
be rs of said Sec ti on , do he r e by r ecommend fo r n ominat ion as a cand idate fo r membe r sh ipMr . Thomas
C. Keefe r,
an emi nen t E ng inee r and E ssayis t, whose l ife is close ly in te rwoven W i th t he in te rnalh is to ry of Canada
,as wi l l be r ecogn ized in t he accompanyi ng reco rd .
F . N . GISBORNE ,
HE NRY T. BOVEYB . J . HARRINGTON
,
[T. C. KEEFER,ESQ,
1838 -45— Empl oyed on the Er ie and \Vellan tlCanal s .
1885 -88— Ch ief' E ng inee r Ottawa R ive r wo r ks .1849— Gai ned L o rd E lg in
’s pr i ze fo r best essay on The Influence of Canals of Canada on her Ag r icul tu re. Publ i shed Ph i l osophy of Rai lways.
1850— Employed upon su r veys fo r the navigat ion of the r apids of t he S t . L aw r ence, et c . ,and was sen t
by the Canad ian Gove rnmen t to ass ist the U S . Con sul to r epo r t upon Canad ian t rade, wi th theUn i ted S tates ; and i n t he yea r 1852 wen t to N ew Yo r k at r equest of same Consul to assi s t i na second repo r t on same subject . These two r epo r ts led to t he Rec ipr oc i ty Treaty of 1854 .
185 1 ~ Made pr elim ina ry su rveys fo r the G rand Trunk Ra i lway and fo r the r ai lway b r idge ove r theS t . Law r en ce at Mon t r eal . In same yea r was appo in ted one of the Canad ian Commiss ione r sfo r the In te rnat ional Exh ibi tion at London .
1853— Eng i nee r to Mon t real Ha r bou r Comm iss ioners .
1862— Commiss ione r to In te r nati onal Exh i bi t ion at London .
1 869 -70— Publ i shed a se r ies of le t te rs advocating the Canad ian Pacific Rai lway, wh ich was commeneedi n 187 1 .
Proc. 1889 . 13
X ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA .
1 878 — E xecutive Comm iss ione r fo r Pa r i s E xh i b i ti on and membe r of In te rnati onal Ju ry fo r Architec
tu r e . C reated C.M .G. and appo i n ted Officer of'
Leg ion of Hono r .
1887— Pr esiden t of Canad ian Society of Civ i l E ng inee r s .
18 88— Pres iden t of Ame r i can I ns t i tute ofCiv i l Eng in ee r s .I s al so a memberof the Insti tute of Ci v i l E ng inee r s, London . Has const r ucted wate rwo r ks fo r t he
Ci t ies of Mon t r eal , Ham i l ton and Ottawa, and been la rge ly engaged in h a r bou r and bridge
eng i nee r ing ,and was sometime Ch ief E ng i nee r of Rai lways in Uppe r and L owe r Canada.
Results of the Voting.
Subsequen tly a meet ing of t he Coun ci l was duly h eld , and the vo tes counted w i th t he fol low ingresul t , as set fo r th i n t he second c i rcula r ma i led to the membe rs of
'
the Socie ty at large :
SlR,
—I have the honour to i nfo rm you that the th r ee fol low ing gen tlemen have r eceived t hetWO' t hil'LlS vote necessa r y to e lec t them to fillt he th ree vacan c ies i n Section I I :
MR . CHARLE S MA IRMR . HORATIO HAL E .
MR . GEORGE PATTERS ON
The Coun c i l the refo re r ecommend that these th r ee gen tlemen be e lec ted to hllthe vacanc ies inquest ion .
No elect ion has been made to Sec t ion III unde r the Rule.
I t i s now t he duty of the Counc i l simply to repo r t to the Society at la rge t he action they havetaken i n compl ian ce wi th the Rules .
ImperialS cient ific Afiilia t ion .
The Coun c i l deem it adv isable to d i rec t you r at ten t ion to a subjec t of conside rable impo r tance,r espec ting wh i ch the Hono ra r y Sec r eta ry has r ece i ved commun icati ons fr om Mr. Macf'a r lane and
o the r membe r s . I t w i llbe r emembe r ed that a Commi ttee was appo in ted in 1887 to cons ide r pr oposalsfo r an Impe r ial U n ion of Geolog ical Su r veys and Soc iet ies. The Coun c i l would now cal l upon the
Soc iety to con s ide r t he r epo r t wh ich t he Comm i ttee made on t he subjec t , and the c i r cumstances wh ichseem to be favo rable to a ce r tain cou r se o f aet ion by the Royal Soc iety of Canada i n t he i mmed iatefutu r e as r ega r d s th is matte r . Seve ral membe r s of the Soc ie ty objected to the r ecommendat ion o ft he Comm i ttee
,at t he t ime i t was made
,fo r t he r eason that i t th reatened to i n te r fe r e somewhat
w i th the meeti ng of the In te r na tiona l Geo l og ical Cong ress , and because i t was incons isten t w i th t heidea of scient ific fede rat ion to l im i t i ts scope to Geology . The c i r cumstances are now changed . TheGeolog i cal Cong ress met las t yea r in London
,and does n o t come toge the r again un t i l 189 1
,i n
Ph i lade lph ia, and, fu r the r , one of'
the r esul ts oi' t he celeb rat ion of Her Majes ty’s Jubi lee has been t he
estab l ishmen t of t he Impe r ia l Ins ti tute , t he objec t of wh ich is to i l lus t rate t he r esou r ces and
capabi l i ties of eve r y sec ti on of Her Majes ty ’s Dom in i on s,
”and to supply a foundat i on fo r that
scien t ific o rgan izati on of our i ndus t r ies wh ich t he changed cond i t ions oi"
t he t imes r ende r i nd i s
pen sable to the i r p r ospe r i ty .
”A bui ld ing fo r t he Inst i tute i s now i n cour se of e r ectio n i n London
wh i ch w i l l,no doubt
,be wel l ut i l ized fo r i ts purboses.
Mr. Macfa r lane r ep r esen ts to the Counc i l that, unde r these c i r cumstan ces , i t would Seem wellfo rthe Royal Society of
'
Canada to sugges t to the manage r s of the Impe r ia l Ins ti tute that t he fo l lowingwould be advan tageous methods of pr omo ting i ts objects
X II ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA .
Prof. D upuis, Sandl‘
ord F leming ,D r. Gi rdwood
,Mon sig no r Hamel
,F . N . Gi sbo rne , Prof. Ha r r ington ,
G. C. I Io tTmann,Pr ofs . John son and L
'
oudon,T. Macfa r lane
,Pr of. Ba i ley
,D r. Robe r t Bel l , Pr of.
Chapman , G. M . Dawson,Sir W . Dawson
,James F letch e r , S ir Jam es G ran t , Pro f. Penhallow A bbé
Prov ancher, W'
. Saunde r s,A . R. C. F . W
’
hi teaves .
The minutes of the seven th gene ral Meet ing , May 18 88 , as pr in ted inVol. VI of t he Transac tion s ,we re con s ide r ed as read and appr oved .
The Repo r t of Counci l and t he recomm endations con ta ined the r e i n we re then taken in to conside ra
AD D RE SS TO Hrs EXCELLE NCY THE GOVERNOR—GENERAL .
The d raft oi“
t he add r ess to H is Exce l len cy L o rd Stan ley of Pr es ton was fo r mal ly adopted , ando rde red to b e p resen ted at Gove rnmen t House at pm . th is day by t he Pr es iden t i n companywi th allthe membe r s of t he Society pr esen t, i n acco rdan ce w i th t he wishes of t he Gove r no r -Gene ral .
MISCELLANE OUS BUS I NE S S .
The fol low ing r esolutions we r e adopted
( L ) Resolved,That Mess r s . Cha r les Mai r
, Ho r atio Hale and Geo rge Pat te r son be duly electedFe l l ows of the Society .
”
(Ou moti on of D r . G. A . Gran t, seconded by Mr . G. T.D en ison . )
“ Resolved, That the matte r of e lect ing a fe l low to fill the vacan cy i n Section III , b erefe r r ed back to that Section fo r fur the r con s id e rati on .
”
(Oh motion of Mr. Carpmael, seconded by
Mr . Gisbo r ne. )Resolved, That t he Commi ttee appoin ted to con s ide r the quest ion of a Geolog i cal Un ion
be d ischa rged .
”
(On motion of Sir W . D awson,seconded by D r. Selwyn. )
Resolved, That t he recommendat ion of the Counc i l w i th r espec t to the Impe r ial In s ti tutebe adopted , and a Comm i ttee be appoi n ted , t o be n om inated by the Pres iden t, to commun icate w i ththe autho r i ties of the Inst i tute as soon as poss i ble, assi s t in pr omoting i ts objec ts in Canada, and repo r tat t he nex t meeting of the Soc iety . (Ou mot ion of Mr . Macfa r lane
,seconded by Mr. G.
Stewa r t, j un .)
“ Resolved,That i t is desi rable that a Conve r saz ione be h eld on the fi r s t even ing of each
Annual Meeting , at wh ich the r e may be an exh i bit i on of scien t ific appa ratus and objec ts of in te res t i ncon nect ion wi th t he wo r k of t he Soc iety .
”
(On motion of Pr of JohnsonJ seconded by D r. Gi r dwood .)
REPORTS FROM AFF IL IATED SOC IETIE S .
The Hono ra r y Sec reta r y then aga in r ead the l ist of Affiliat ed Soc ieties, and the fo l low ing Repo r tswere subm i tted by the i r respect ive de legates
I .
— F r om The Ottawa L iterary and Scientific Society, th r ough Mr. H . B . SMALL .
The Pr es iden t and Coun c i l of the Ottawa L i te ra r y and Scien t ific Society have to r epo r t , thatdu r ing the pas t yea r th is inst i tut ion has mai n tai ned i ts r eputation f or usefulness , bo th as r egar ds i tsr ead ing r oom ,
wh ich i s wel l s tocked w i th n ewspape r s and pe r i od ical s , and i n r espec t to i ts l i b ra ry ,which now con tains volumes . The r ead ing r oom is always wel l hlled fr om early mo rn ing ti l llate at n igh t, an ev idence of the good serv ice rende r ed to its frequen te r s .The c i ti zen s of t he Capi tal are beg inn ing to app rec iate mo re la rgely, and to make a g reate r use of
PROCEED INGS FOR 188 9 . XIII
th is l i b ra r y than fo r me r ly , a fact pr obab ly due to t he r est r i c t ion s now in fo r ce i n the Pa r l iamen ta ry
L i b ra r y, fr om wh ich books are n o t as eas i ly taken ou t by t he publ ic , as i n fo rme r yea r s . Con s ide rable
add i tion s we r e made by t he Soc iety to the wo rks on its she l ves du r ing 1888 , and i t is h oped fu r the r
add i tions wi l l b e made th is yea r .
An add r ess of wel come to Lo r d Stan ley of Pr eston was p resen ted to h im by the Coun c i l soon after
h i s a r r ival he r e as Gove r n o r -Gen e ral , and His Excel len cy was g rac ious ly pleased to become Pat r onof the Society .
A most successful cou rse of lectu res was de l ive r ed las t w in te r,some of wh ich we r e i l lus t rated
with l ime- l igh t v iews , o r w i th exper imen ts , as the occas ion r equi r ed .
The subjects of th ese lectu r es , and the lec tur e r s,we r e as fol l ows :
1888 . Nov . 8 . Inaugura l A tltll‘eSS Z N otes by the Waysid e of L ife, by Mr . H . 13. Smal l,Pr es iden t .
22 . The Wo r lds A r ound us : i l lust rated w i th Lan te rn and S l ides,by Mr. W . H . Smith .
D ec . 6 . Lessing’
s Nathan the Wise , by Mr. Thos . Cr oss .2 0 . The Wate r Supply of Ottawa Ci ty , i l lust rated W i th Expe r imen ts , by Mr . F . T.
Shul tz ,1 889 . Jan . 1 0 . Conve r saz ione.
24 . A Yo r ksh i re He r o ine,by Mr. J. T. Wate r s
,M .A .
Feb . 8 . Weathe r Pr ed i ct ion ,by Mr . C. Carpmael,
22 . Cl imato l ogy, by L ieut . Go rdon , R N .
Mar . 28 . The Moon,by Mr. H . B . Wi tton .
The two ast r onom ical lectu r es,
“ The Wo r lds A r ound Us, and “ The Moon , we r e espec iallyin st ruc tive
,and as a r esul t of the influence exe r ted by them
,s teps are bei ng taken fo r t he fo rmat ion
of an A s t r onomical Society h e r e . I t i s pr oposed to make the lec tu res n ex t wi n te r st i l l mo r e at t raet ive
,and
,if practicable, to const i tute a con secut ive cou r se .
I t is a matte r of r eg ret that t he aud iences we r e no t as la rge as the subjects migh t have been
expected to d raw togethe r . Th is may b e at t r i buted,no t to a wan t of i n te r es t on the pa r t of the
publ ic , but to t he va r i ous att rac tions of a s im i la r natu re wh ich almost eve r y publ i c in sti tut i on o rsoc ie ty now affo r d
,and to the en te r tainmen t cou rses p r ov ided , in many cases weekly , by almost eve ry
chu r ch cong r egation , fo r i ts membe r s .Afte r noon lectu res
,o r classes of inst ruc tion on Natural H isto ry and Sc ience
,we re h eld i n t he
Soc iety’s ro t zms dur ing the winte r by the Ottawa F ield-Natu ral i s ts ’ Club,an o rgan i zati on affi l iated
w i th the L i te ra ry and Sc ien t ific Socie ty, to wh ich i ts membe r s we r e adm i tted, and these classes we r e
wel l attended .
And he re,wh i ls t Speak ing of lectu r es , the Pr esiden t of the Ottawa L i te ra ry and Sc ien t ific Soc iety
st r ong ly u rges upon allsoc iet ies of a s im ila r l ocal cha racte r , t he des i rabi l i ty of gathe r ing toge the r ,and making publ i c i n lectu r e fo r m o r othe r w ise
,any i nc iden t bea r ing on the ea r ly h i sto ry of thei r
l ocal i ty,and even ts in any way influen cing its ca reer . The r e are matte r s fo rgotten fo r wan t of
r eco r d at the t ime,o r wh i ch m igh t have been gathe r ed fr om olde r r es iden ts who have since passed
away,that migh t fo rm impo r tan t l inks in h is to ry, a wan t al r eady we l l k nown as rega r d s our abor ig
inal races. The even ts of to day become the h isto ry of the futu re,and l ocal h i story i s gene ral ly t he
most impe r fect of all. Wi t h one lectu r e i n each cou r se devoted to some pa r t icula r b ranch of the sur
r ound ings of a place, its ea r ly h isto ry, i ts fauna, i ts flo ra,i ts geo logy , its t rade, and so fo r th
,the re
would be a r eco r d fo r r efe rence .
A t the Annual Meet ing of t he Soc iety , h eld on Apr i l 26th , 188 9 , Mr . H . 8 . Smal l was r ee lectedPr es iden t fo r the yea r 1889
,and i t i s h oped that the ope rat ion s of the Ottawa L i te ra r y and Scien t ific
Soc iety wi l l con t inue t o foste r the objec t fo r wh i ch that Soc iety was fo rmed,i n tel lectual p r og r ess .
XIV ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA .
I I— F r om L ’
I nst itut Canadien de Québec, th r ough Mr. J . J. T. FREMONT.
La posi tion cle l’
I nst itut au po i n t d c v ue l i tté rai r e c t au po in t de vue financ ier es t auss i bon ne
que par le passe.
Nos sal les de lec tu r e son t fréquen t ées.
N o t r e bi bl io theque n’
a pas pe r du de sa popula r i té . E l le s’
es t augmen tée dans ls cou r s de l’
an nec
qui Vien t (le s’
é couler de plus de 30 0 vo lumes .Les conferen ces de l’
I nst itut on t atti r é de b r i l lan ts aud i to i res dans nos sal les . Pa r m i les con fer oncie rs
,ilme se ra pe r m is cle c i te r les n oms de Mgr Beg in , depu i s eveque de Ch icoutim i , de MM.
Fauch e r de Sain t -Mau r i ce , Joseph Tu r co tte, Edoua r d Tasche r eau, Ludov i c B runet et B . L ippcns.
E nfin,le 15 oc tob re de r n ie r
,dans une seance des plus solenne l les , au m i l ieu d
’
un aud i to i r e t res
n omb reux,l ’au tour
,s i populai re pa r m i n ous, de La F rance aw: Colonies nous donna i t une con fe
r en ce sur la col on isation du No r d .
L e meme so i r,M. Adolphe Po isson nous fai sai t goute r les pr imeu rs d
'
une poé s ie in éd ite, L eNavire allemand
,accompagn ée d
’
un cha r man t envoi a M Barn eau.
M . Leon D essane et le sextuo r vo cal de Qué bec s’
é taien t cha rges de la pa r'
t ie mus i cale du pro
g ramme.
Cette so i r ée a é té 1a de r n iere de l’année. L’
incendie qu i est venu d évaste r not re edifice, ls 7janv ie r , n ous a fai t in te r r ompr e nos conferences de l’h iver
, qui ne pou r r on t é tre repr i ses que l’
au tomne
p r ochain .
Tr o is nouveaux memb r es hon o rai r es on t é té adm is . Ce son t1° M. Leon Lal lemand
,de Pa r i s
,nu é c r i vain dist ingue qui fe ra honn eu r a not re inst i tut ion ,
l’
auteur du l i v r e L es enfantspauvres et déla issés, et d’
aut res ouv rages ph i lan th r opiques .2°L
’
honorable -A .
-E . Gagnon , qui a fai t beaucoup pou r classifier et r éun i r n os a r ch ives
pr ov i n c iales .3° Enfin l
’
honorable M . A . Tur co tte, qui a rendu de nomb reux se r v i ces anot r e soc ié té .
Nous avons publ ié dans l o cou r s de l’
année l’A nnuaire No 12, qui est , n ous l
’
espe’
rons,auss i inté
ressan t que les publ icat ion s anal ogues qui l’on t pr écédé , — e t n ous avon s dec ide de con t inue r cette
publ icat ion clan s le cour s de l’
ete qui commen ce.
III .
— F r om The Society of Canadian L iteratu re, th r ough Mr. W . D . L IGHTHALL .
The Soc iety of Canad ian L i te ratu re,th ough a n ew o rgan izat ion , has been found to filla wan t
,and
al ready exh ibi ts the v igou r oi‘
an i nst i tution wh ich,to allappea rance, has taken r oot . The almost com
plet e igno ran ce by our peolile of the l i tera tu r e pr oduced among them was the cause wh ich led to i tsfo r mation— t he aim be ing mutual i nst ruc ti on . Ou Janua ry 17 th
,188 9
,a c i r cu la r was d rawn up by
seve ral of those i n te rested,announc ing a first meet ing to b e he ld i n the F rase r Inst i tute , on t he
23rd,and g iv i ng t he names of a pr ov is ional Presiden t, Joh n Reade, V i ce-Pr es iden t,
Joh n Talon -Lespe rance, and Sec reta ry , A r thu r We i r . The objects of t he Society we r e to bean examination of our nat ional l i te ratur e, Eng l is h and F r ench ; the acqui r emen t and d iffus ion of a
knowledge of our bes t poe t ry, r omance, h isto r ic wo r ks, and o the r w r i t ing ; t he p r ov is ion of a cen tre
fo r local l i te ra r y l ife and fo r t he int r oduction of v is i ting lit te’
m teurs ; and t he encou ragemen t of all
p r ope r l i te ra ry wo r ks and movemen ts th r oughout t he coun t ry .
”
The c i r cula r wen t on to say :
I t i s not as gene ra l ly known as i t sh oul d be, that a considerable quan t i ty of beaut iful andinte res ting w r i t ing has been pr oduced in Canada, an acqua in tance wi th wh i ch would add to our
in te rest, pr ide and hope i n our coun t ry . By th i s Soc iety i t i s h oped to affo r d an oppo r tun i ty of
d iscuss ing and lea r n ing someth ing about such w r i t ing and the auth o r s con ce r ned .
PROCEED INGS FOR 188 9 . XV
The method preposed at pr esen t is that of hav ing a leade r fo r t he even ing , who shal l g ive an
accoun t, wi th copious ex t rac ts , of whateve r i s then to be examined , the mee ting afte rwards to be Openfo r r ema r ks by othe r s , who w i l l be a l so expected to i l lus t rate by ext rac ts . The ch ief littérateurs of
the coun t ry wi l l b e named h on o ra ry m embers fr om time to t ime .
Lad ies and Gen tlemen we re inv i ted to send in the i r names fo r membe rs h ip ,t he affo rd ing of an
Opportun i ty fo r impr ovemen t to lad ies being cons ide red specia l ly desi rable .
Th is pr og ramme was ca r r ied out wi th success far beyond the an t ic ipati ons of the pr ojec to r s .F r om th i r ty to s i x ty membe r s attend ed the meet ings , wh ich g rew in in te res t and pat r onage ; loca l
atten t ion to native autho r s was r epo r ted fr om a numbe r of outside sou r ces as g reatly in c reased and
seve ra l side movemen ts have e i the r a r i sen fr om,o r exh ib i ted the impul se of, t he Society . The cou r se
of even ings opened w ith the Pr es iden t’s add ress on The Devel opmen t of Canad ian L i te ratu re . A
fo r tn igh t late r , fol lowed Mrs. Mood ie ( Susan na St r ick land ) , by Mr . Ha r ry B ragg ; then cameHal i bu r ton
,
” by Mr . J . F rase r To r rance ; F rechette,
” by Mr. Leigh R. G rego r ;“ Heav ysege,
” by
Mr. Geo rge I I . F l i n t ; Crémaz ie ,” by ancl Wi l l iam K i r by
,
” by the undersignedThe lectu res we r e in nea r ly allcases i l lust rated amply , somet imes pr ofusely, and cal led fo r th
m uch r a re info r mat i on from those i n a ttendance.
A numbe r of names of men known in our l i te ratu re was placed on a r o l l of hono ra ry membe rs,but as t he r o l l is not ye t i n complete shape I fo r bea r to men t ion them .
I t is t rus ted that o the r cen t r es bes ides Mon t rea l w i l l fo l low the example , and that a un ion o t'
such
soc ie t ies may b e an influence i n mat te r s affect ing Canad ian men tal impr ovemen t, togeth e r w i th whateve r else depends the reon .
IV~ F r om The GeographicalSociety of Quebec, th r ough Mr. N . L EVA ssEUR .
La Socié té de GéOgraphie de Québec , es timan t bien haut l’
honn eur d et r e assoc iée aux t ravauxannuel s de la Socié té Royale du Canada, s
’
es t empressée d’
aceept er la g rac ieuse inv i tat i on de cettesoc ié té
,on me pr ian t de voulo i r b ien la r epr ésen te r dans cet impo r tan t cong res l i tté ra i r e et sc ient ifique .
Not r e soc ié té de Geog r aph i c a dfi,depu is t r o i s ou quat r e ans
,se ten i r nu pen al
’
écar t dumouv ement des sc iences et des lett r es au pays, l
’
agen t galvan isateur o rd i nai re de toute en t repr ise humainelui faisan t défaut .
Le fai t est cl’autan t plus r eg rettable que la Soeié té venai t el le-meme de p r ovoque r des expl o rat ion sdans un pays bien vaste , mai s apen pres inconnu ; expl o rat ions qu
’
e l le au rai t pu fai r e con ti nue r c tvo i r cou r onnées de r ésul tats plus sati sfa i san ts qu
’
ils n e l ’on t é t é .
D an s un pays auss i jeune et auss i étendu que celui- c i , et cl ou t l'
organ isat ion pol i tique definit iv en
’
a aujou r d ’hu i que quat r e lus t res, ila fal lu d’
abord se pr éoccupe r de l’
out illage ind ispensab le a son
p r og ressmater iel , et , ce r tes, iltaut ls reconnai t re, le Canada, en v ing t ans , a me r ve i l leusemen t changedc physionorn ie ; mai s son a r matu r e da cfité des sc iences abst ra i tes et phys iques , du cete des a r ts e t dela l i tté ratu re
,a dfi et r e con s idé rablemen t n égligee. U ne soc ié té cle Geog raph ic devai t d one e t do i t
s’
at t endre a subi r la fo r tune commune,a quel ques except ions p res, aux aut r es assoc iat ions scient ifiques
e t l i tté rai r es .Cependan t, malg r é tout, nous devons con state r que le Canada est né v iab le au monde l i tté ra i re et
scient ifique. N ous cue i l l on s 9 -91 et la, de temps a aut res,(les lau r ie r s a l ’et range r ; la science de quelques
uns des not r es fa i t auto r i té'
; nos poetes rempo r ten t des cou r onnes ; nos a r t i s tes se fon t applaud i r surles premie r s theat r es du monde.
Nous sommes toutefo is b ien eloignés d’
av o ir donné toute no t r e mesurc,et la geog raph i c au Canada
n’a pas en co re d’
illustrat ions. Lo champ d’
é tudes ne lui manque ce r tainemen t pas ; e l le en a un a
pr oxim i té , ls g rand pays qui s’
é tend au no r d et a l 'est de Qué bec , depui s la baie d’
Hudson d’
un ceté,
Jusqu’
a l’A tlan t ique , de l’
aut re . Les ca r tes qui (lonnen t la configurat ion de ce te r r i to i r e ne n ousappr en nen t que fo r t peu de choses sur ses p r in c ipaux t ra i ts géog raph iques, sa compos i t ion géolog ique
XVI ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA .
et ses r essou r ces explo i tables ; clles me se raien t meme pas plus exac tes qu’
el les no son t é loquen tes. Ou
ne connai tra v ra imen t les pa r t icula r i té s de ce pays , que l o rsque scs d ivi s ions pol i tiques et admi n ist rat iv es se r on t dé tin ies
,rég lé es et acceptees .
lei 8 0 presen ts natu rel lemen t la quest ion des fro n t iercs en t r e On ta r io e t Quebec , et au no r d deces ( leux pr ov in ces r espect ivemen t, e t cette quest i on tombe d
’
e l le-méme dans le cad re (les é tudes,daus
le champd’
opérat ions d’
une soci é té tle geog raph ic . 11 y a d ix ans,la soc ié té de Geog raph ic de Québec
at ti rai t l’at ten t ion de nos gouve r nan ts sur les fron t ié rcs d es deux pr ov in ces ; aujou r d ’hui en co r e el le
s’
occupe d’
amener la solut ion pr ompte et defin it iv e de cette g rave ques ti on. L e poin t en l i t ige est le
ch o ix d ’
une fr on tier e t racée se ien t iflquemen t , o u d’
uue fr on tiere dess inée par la l igne des cou r s d’
eau
qui pa r tagen t lo te r r i to i r e d c l’
ouest a l ’est .
En 1 886,une comm iss ion spéc iale de la leg i s latu re deQué bec fut cha rgée d
’
é tudier la quest i on et
(le fai r e és-matier e un r appo r t ala Leg i slatu re. La comm issi on en a r r iva aux conclus ion s sui van tes“ Vot re comi te est d’
Opin ion que les lini ites ouest, ne r d e t est de la pr o v ince son t et (loiv en t et rereconnues , fixées c t d é te r m i nées comme sui t : Tout le pays compr is, ve rs l
’
ouest, par la pr o longation
cle Ia l igne fron t ié re actue l le en t r e On ta r i o et Québec, j usqu’
a la r en con t r e de la r i ve sud de la baie
James, par le l itto ra l de cette meme baie jusqu
’
a 1’
emb buchure de la r iv ier e E as t -Main ; ve r s le n o r d ,
par la r ive d r o ite de cette meme r iv ier e, de son embouchu re j usqu’
a sa sou r ce ; de 0 0 poin t, en co r e
vers lo n o rd , par une l igne a l lan t t r appe r les eaux les plus septen t r ionales du g rand fieuv e (les E squimaux
,Ashuan ipi 0 11 Hami l ton , et par la r i ve gauche du meme fleuv e j usqu
’
a son en t ree dans la baie
(lu Rigo let (Hami l ton Inlet) ve r s l'
es t et le n o r d - est, par le mé r id ien da poin t le plus o r ien tal (les
sou r ces de la r iv iere Sain t Paulou peti te E squimaux , e t , par cette meme r iv iere, ve r s l’
es t, j usqu
’
au
52e deg r é de lat i tude n o rd , et suivant cc paralléle, jusqu'
ala r encon t re du m é r id ien de l ’anse au B lancSablon ,
fr on tiere ac tuel lemen t r econnue de la pr ov in ce de Quebec .
”
11 n’
eut re pas dans le rele qui m’
es t ass igné de d iscute r i c i l’
argumentation pro et contra la l ignesc ien t ifique ou la fr on tiers natu r e l le. Qu
’i l me suffise de men ti onne r ces po in ts-la pou r démon t r e r acette reun i on d is ti nguée que la Soc iété de GéOgraphie de Québec a la
,en t r e au t res
,un i n té ressan t
suje t d’
é tudes,e t qu’
el le peut i n te r ven i r d’
une man ier e t res uti le dan s le débat.‘
C'
es t avec ces quel ques rema r ques que j e c r o is devoi r presen te r le rappo r t dcs t ravaux de la
Soc ié té de Geog raph ic de Quebec depui s quat r e ans ; cc rappo r t, uh peu plus volumineux que ses pré
décesseurs , est le cinquieme e t (lern ier fasc icule da ler vo lume (les t ravaux de la Soc ié té . Ilcont ien ten g rande pa r t ie cc qui a é té publ ié j usqu
’
a cc jou r sur le lac M is tass i n i et lo pays env i r onnan t ;une let t re sur la premiere te r r e apergue par Sebastien Cabot en Amé rique ; nu a r t i c le sur les sauvages
de la r i v iere de Cuiv re, par lo l ieutenan t H en ry T. A l len , de l’
a r mes amé rieaine ; dos n o tes sur le
Lab rado r canad ien , par lo co in te Hen r i de Puyj alon ; des notes pou r se r v i r au d éve loppemen t de la
col on isa tion e t da comme r ce, des r i ves du Sain t—Lau ren t ala fr on t iere du Maine, par M . Fauchcr de
Sain t Maurice ; une é tude sur les r aces p r im i t i ves de l’
Amé rique du No r d , par M. A lph on se Gagn on ;une compi lat ion de tous les témoignages qui on t é té don nés devan t (les comm iss ion s pa r lemen tai r es,des l ett res publ ié es dan s des jou rnaux e t des b r ochu res sur la navigat ion du Sain t-Lau ren t cu h ive r
par N . LeVasseur ; un éc r i t sur Bel le-Is le, par M . ( Jhs H . Fa rnham .
Le tout humblemen t soumis au nom de la Socié té de Géog raph ie cle Quebec .
V— From The Numisma tic and Antiqua r ian Society of Mont real,th r ough Mr. R. W McLACHLAN.
D ur ing the pas t yea r t en meet ings we r e he ld , a t wh ich ques tions bearing ‘on the An t iqua r ian s ide
oi'
Canad ian H is to ry we re d iscussed . Cons iderable pr og ress has been made in t he study of Canad ianNumismati cs and the ea r ly in s ti tutions o t’ the coun t ry .
A t a Hi s to r ical Exh ib i tion,held at D eerfield
,Mass . , our Socie ty was r epr esen ted by a de legate
wh o was able to commun i cate some i n te rest ing fac ts bearing on the h is to ry of that town , wh ich fac tswe r e r eco r ded i n ancien t Canad ian documen ts .
PROCEEDINGS FOR 1889 . XVI I
A se r ies of '
orig inaleng rav ings of g r eat va lue , i l lust rative of ea r ly Canad ian H isto r y , has beenadded to t he Socie ty ’
s col lec tion th r ough the k ind ness ofMr. R. B . A ngus .The fol low ing pape r s we re r ead
1 . The Hudson ’s Bay Company Beave r -Tokens , by R . \V. McLachlan .
2 . Fo r t Callieres,Mon t real
,by A . C. BeLery Macdonald .
3 . The Geneal ogy of some N ew Eng land Capti ves i n Canada, by H . J. Kavanagh .
The firs t numbe r of a new se r ies of The Canad ian An tiqua r ian ,’
t he r esumption of the publ icationof wh ich has been a r ranged fo r , i s expec ted to be r eady about July lst n ext.
VI . F r om The Ottawa F ield—Natm'
altsts’
Club , th r ough D r . R. W . EL Ls .
I have the h ono r to subm i t the fol lowing repo r t of the tran saction s of t he Ottawa F ield -Na tu ral ists ’
Cl ub fo r the past yea r .The r outine wo r k of t he Club has been ca r r ied on as usual . The excu r s ion s to poi n ts of in te res t
i n t he n eighbo r hood du r ing t he summe r season have been we l l attended , and much in te r es t has beend isplayed by many membe r s i n t he study of t he va r ious b ranch es of Natu ral H i s to ry wh i ch havebeen taken up. The membe r sh ip is s tead i ly i nc reas ing and now numbe rs 230
,and on the whole the
Club may be said to be i n a ve ry sat isfac to r y cond i ti on . His E xcel lency L o rd Stan ley has k ind lycon sen ted to ac t as i ts pat r on .
As r ega r d s the Club’
s publ i cat ion s , t he depa r tu re i naugu rated two yea r s ago, by wh ich the Tran sac t ions we r e i ssued in mon th ly pa r ts i nstead of in an annual vo lume has been r econside red
,and a
change i n th is r espect has been though t des i rable . A l th ough t he mon thly was found to possessseve ral advan tages, these we re no t hel d to be sufficien t to coun te r balance ce r tain i nconven iencesand difficult ies
,mo re par t icula r ly pe r ta in ing to the ed ito rsh ip, and i t has th e refo r e been r eso lved to
change the i ssue to a qua r te r ly of n o t less than 48 pages.
S ince the pe r i od oi' i ts o rgan i zation i n 1879 , t he membe rs of the Club have done a ve ry la rge
amoun t of and most exce l len t wo r k i n E n tomol ogy , Botany , Con cho logy, Geology, etc . Th is wo rkhas of
'
necessity ,fr om the o r ig inal con s ti tution of the Club , been almost en ti r e ly of a l oca l charac te r ;
and wh i le the membe rs r ecogn ize that ve ry much yet r emain s to be done in th is d i r ec tion about Ottawa ,
the feel ing has been g rowing ,tha t t he t ime has now arr i ved wh en the scope of the Society
’s pub l i cat ion s can , with much profit , b e so extended as to emb race pape r s and notes on Natu ral H i sto ry bymembe r s of the Socie ty in any po r t ion of the Dom i n i on . Th is change was h eld to b e pa r t i cula r lydes i rable in o rde r to inc lude many items of gene ra l sc ien ti fi c in te r est co l lected by the la rge s tati
“
oi'
the Geolog ical and Natu ra l H i sto ry Su r vey of Canada, the membe rs of wh i ch have h e retofore, ow ingt o the l ocal cha racte r of the o rgan izat ion , been al mos t en t i r ely deba r r ed fr om con t r i buting to any considerable exten t to the we lfa re of the Soc iety
,s in ce the i r fields of wo r k are fo r the most pa r t at po in ts
remote from Ottawa. The r eso lution to en la rge the field of the Society ’s ope r ation s was unan imouslyadopted at t he last Gene ral Meeting and th i s Club can n ow cong ratulate i tse lf, n ot on ly upon numbe r .
ing i n i ts l i s t of membe r s one of the la rges t bod ies of scien t ific men in Canada, b ut upon hav ingen te red upon a much w ide r sphe re of useful ness .The win te r cou r se of meet i ngs compr ised n ine afte r noon lectu res and s i x so i r ees . Of the fo rme r
,
wh ich are supposed to be large ly of an elemen ta r y cha racte r,two we r e g i ven on Con chol ogy by
Mess r s . F . R . Latch f‘o r d and Rev . G. IV. Tayl o r ; two on Geology, by Mess r s . R . W . Ji l l s and H . M .
Ami ; two on E n tomo l ogy, by Mess rs . Jas. F letche r andW . H . Ha r r ing ton ; two on Botany, by Mess r s .
James F letche r and R . B . Whyte, and one on Z oology, by t he Rev . G. W . Tay l o r .A t t he even ing so i rees t he fol low ing pape r s we re r ead and d iscussed
1 . The Pres iden t’s Inaugu ral Add ress , by Mr. R. B . Whyte.
Proc. 1889 . c
XVIII ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA .
2 . Con t r ibuti on s to the Geology and Palae on tol ogy oi‘
the Townsh ips of Camb r idge and Russel l , i n
Russe l l,On t . ; ( 1 ) Physi og raphy and Gene ral Geology, by Mr. W . Cra ig , Dun canv il le ; ( 2 ) Palaeow
tology ,by Mr. H . M. Ami.
3 . Rev is ion of t he P ost Tert iary Fo r mat ion s about Ottawa wi th thei r foss i l s,by Mr. H . M . Ami .
4 . Note on Onclea senstbth’
s v ar. obtusitobata,by Mr . H . M . Ami .
'
5 . Notes on t he Durat i on of t he Leaves of some of t he Con iferze , by Mr . J . Bal lan tyn e .
6 . N otes on Bog Plants , by Mr . R . B . Whyte .
7 . Poi sonous pr ope r t ies of Agaricus Rodmam’
,by Pr of. Macoun .
8 . An accoun t of t he first lec tu r es de l ive r ed i n Ame r ica on Bo tany at Ha r va rd U niv ersitv,by
D r . H . B . Smal l .
9 . N otes on the Cerambyc idfe , by Mr. W . H . Ha r r ington .
10 . N otes on O r n i th ol ogy, wi th spec ia l refe ren ce to B i r ds obse r ved i n t he V i c in i ty of Ren fr ew,
by Rev . C. J. Young .
1 1 . B i rd Cal l s , by Mr . J. M . Macoun .
12 . Wh at you See when out Without you r Gun ,by Mr. IV. A . D . Lees .
1 3 . Notes on the Skunk , Mephit t’
s mephitica, by Mr. W . P. Lett .
The ofificers of the Soc iety fo r the pr esen t yea r , are
Pres iden t— D r. R . W . E l ls.
V i ce-Pr es iden ts— I st J . Bal lan tyne ; 2nd, H . M. Ami .
Secre tarw . J. MacLaughlin .
Tr easu r e r — James F letche r
L i b ra r ian— W . A . D . Lees.
Comm i ttee of Counc i l— Mess r s . R . B . Whyte,A . P. Low, Rev . G. W. Tayl o r .
The leade r s of the va r i ous sec tions fo r the pr esen t yea r are
Geo logy— H . M. Ami,A . P. Low
,W. R . B i l l i ngs , F . D . Adams .
Botany— James F letche r,R . B . Whyte
,Wm. Sco tt .
Conchology— Rev . G. W . Taylo r , F . R. Latch fo rd .
E n tomology— T. J . MacL aughlin ,J. F letche r
,W . H . Ha r r ing ton .
O rn i th o logy— W . A . D . Lees,Pr of. J . Macoun and G. R . Whi te .
Z oology— J. Bal lan tyne, J. B . Ty r r el l
, W. P. Lett .E d i to r— James F letche r .
I beg to subm i t he rewith Vol. I I of t he Pub l i cat ion of the Ot tawa'
Field Nat. Club,being the
Tran sactions of t he past yea r
VI I .— F r om the Socwté L ittéraire et Musicale de Montreal
,th r ough REV. A . B . CRUCHET.
La socw té que j’
ai l’
honneur de r epr ésen te r au mi l ieu de vous,Mess ieu r s
,s
’
appelle la Societe'
L it te’
ratre et hfustcalede Mon t real . E l le a é té fondée en 18 85 par MM. Coussirat , p r ofesseur de langueso r ien tales al’un iv ersité McGill
,Da r cy
, pr ofesseu r de l i tté ratu re frangaise dans la meme un‘i ve r s i té ,
Lafleur,D oudie t
,D uc los
,Cruche t
, pas teu r s ; He r d t,Amos
,G rego r ; et Mmes Coussirat , Co r nu ,
He r d t,
D uc los,Gruch et
,Amos e t D a r cy. M in e Co r nu
, pr ofesseu r de franca is a l’
ecole no r male McGill,ag i t
en qual i té de sec r é tai r e.
Les séan ces on t l ieu deux fo is par in ois dan s les sal ons des soc ié tai r es . La dame qui recoit rem
pl i t les fonct ions de pr és idente . Le eercle est fe r mé,ma is les memb res peuven t y i nv i te r leu r s amis .
I 1 compte auj ou r d’hu i env i r on t r en te-c inq memb res
, qui son t tous m is a Con t r i bution .
Cul t i ve r la d ic tion,la mus ique et la l i tté ratu r e francaise, t elest le t r iple but que la socié té s
’
esttoujou r s p r opose. Lo de rn ie r su r tout ct avant tout.
XX ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA .
the Rev . Dr . Bethune, ofPo r t Hope, first claims atten t ion on accoun t of t he impo r tan t posi t ion wh ichi t h old s among the scient ific pub l icat ions of t he con ti nen t . The volume fo r 1888 , Vol. XX ,
con s i s tsof 240 pages oi
'
r ead ing matte r , t he con t r i buto rs numbe r ing 33 , and many of the a r t ic les be ing ofmuch in te rest . In add i t ion to t hose of our own Canad ian membe r s
,th e re we r e a r ti c les sen t in fr om
ac tive wo rke r s in fou r teen States of the Am e r i can Un ion,fr om F lo r ida i n the south to Mich igan in
t he no r th , and fr om Massachusetts i n the east to Cal ifo r n ia in the west . Among the most impo r tan t
pape rs publ ished in the volume we r e seve ral on t he pr epa rato ry s tages of va r ious i nsects , in clud ingt he complete l ife- h i s to r ies of twelve spec ies of Lepid opte ra, besi des pa r tial desc r ipti ons of those ofseve ral oth e rs. The volume al so con tai n s t he desc r iption s of fou r n ew gen e ra and fifty
-six n ew
spec ies of va r ious o r de r s . In Vol. XX I now publ ish ing , a se r ies of pape r s i s appea r ing upon Popula rand E conom ic E n tomology, wh ich the Counc i l be l ieve w i l l be of value to the Pr ui t-g r owe rs, fa r me r sand ga r dene r s of the coun t ry .
The Annual Repo r t of the Society to the Min iste r of Ag r i cultu r e of On ta r i o, fo r 1888 , has been
publ i shed , and con tai n s , in add i ti on to the usual r epo r t of t h e Annual Meeting of the Soc iety , manyin te r es t ing pape rs. One of t he most impo r tan t of these is the accoun t by our Pr esiden t
,Mr.
F letch e r,of h i s last yea r ’s t r ip to N epigon , wh i the r he wen t fo r a week at the beg inn ing of July ,
accompan ied by Mr . S. H . Scudde r,an assoc iate membe r of the Society
,and one of the most eminen t
en tomolog is ts of Ame r i ca, fo r the expr ess pu rpose of obtain ing the eggs of va r ious spec ies of butte rflies. The expedi t ion was ve ry successful
,eggs be ing obtained fr om no less than seven teen spec ies
and va r iet ies .A t the Annua l Meeting of the Soc iety it was found that the finances we r e i n such a satisfac to ry
s tate as to r ende r poss i b le the voting of the handsom e sum o f $2 00 to the l i b ra r y fund fo r the purchase of books and the b ind ing of pe r i od ical s and pamph lets .The li b ra r y now con ta ins upwa r ds of a th ousand volumes , ch iefly on En tomology, but also many
on the o th e r depa r tmen ts of Z oo l ogy and on Botany .
An impo r tan t move has r ecen tly been made i n open ing t he r ooms of the Society to v isi to rs at
r egula r s tated times i n o rd e r to popula r i ze the wo r k of the Society as much as possi ble.
The Soc iety’s collec tions of Co leopte ra and L epidopte ra have been ca r eful ly r ea r ranged ( lu r ingt he yea r by Mr. J. A l s ton Mofl
'
at,of Hami l ton
,a membe r of the Coun c i l
,and now fo r m standa r d
r efe r en ce co llec tions of these insec ts of On ta r i o.The Mon t real B r an ch , I am happy to say , con t inues in act ive ex istence ; regula r mon th ly meet
ings are he ld and in c r eased in te r est is being taken in t he s tudy of th is sc ience .
Du r ing the pas t yea r g reat activ i ty has also been sh own by many of the assoc iate membe r s of
the Soc iety,and seve ral ve ry impo r tan t and useful wo r ks have been issued by them . The mos t
impo r tan t of' these is Mr . Scudde r ’s sumptuous wo rk on The But terflies of t he Eas te r n Un i ted States
and Canada, w i th spec ial r efe r en ce to New E ng land, the first pa r t of wh ich was i ssued on Novembe rlst , and wi l l be completed du r ing t he presen t yea r . Mr. W . H . E dwa r ds i s also ca r ry ing on h is
magn ificen t wo r k on the but terflies of N o r th Ame r i ca. Th r ee pa r ts con ta in ing n ine beautiful plateswe r e issued du r ing las t yea r . Seve ralwo r ks of a ve r y d iffe r en t scope fr om e i the r of the above
,but
sti l l ve ry useful and issued at a mode rate p r i ce, have been publ ished by othe r assoc iate membe rs ofour Society during the pas t yea r . Among these, spec ial men tion should be made of “ E n tomologyfo r Beg inne r s , fo r the use of Young Folks, F rui t-G r owe r s, Fa r me r s and Ga r dene r s, by D r . A . S .
Packa r d,and An In t r oduction to E n tomology ,
”Pa r t I .
,by P r of. J. H . Comstock . A second ed i tion
ofMr . Wi ll iam Saunde r s ‘ impo r tan t wo r k on I nsec ts Injur ious to F rui ts has al so been i ssued .
PROCEED INGS FOR 1889 . XXI
IX .—F r om The Canadian I nstitute of Toronto, th r ough SIR DAN IE L WI L SON .
The past yea r has been one of g rat ifying success a ma r ked i n c r ease i n t he influence of the Inst itute i s no ti ceable .
The adopt ion of cosmic time b ids fai r to come in to gen e ral use in the cou r se o i’
a few yea r s , all
ove r t he wo r ld . The I ns t i tute has posses sed fo r ove r a yea r a c lock w i th a movable d ial t o r eco rdcosm ic t ime.
Th r ough t he gene r ous aid of the Pr ov in c ia l Governm en t, the archteologicalr esea r ch has beenextended , and many valuable spec imens added to the museum .
The biol og ical sec tion has i n te r es ted i tsel f wi th success in t he pr ese r vation of the natural beautiesofH igh Pa r k .
The co l lecti on of' mine ral s obtained by the mi n ing commiss ion i s now on View in the Insti tute .
The re we r e twen ty-fou r o rd ina ry meet ings , at wh ich twen ty-e igh t pape rs we r e r ead
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Pape r s r ead i n Sec tion
B i o l og ical Sect ion Geolog ica l and M in ing 5
A r ch i tectu ral Sec ti on . Ph i lo log i cal Sect ion 9
The meet ings of the A r ch i tec tu ral Sec tion are ch icfly devo ted to techn i cal d i scuss ion s , preparat ion and judg ing of compet i tions among the membe r s , of po i n ts of detai l occu r r ing i n thei r dai ly
practice.
The appeal s of the Commi ttee on Soc io l ogy have r ece ived favo rab le con s ide r at ion fr om t he Hon .
Min is te r of the In teri o r ; and the Canad ian Pacific Ra i lway has k ind ly offe r ed to ca r ry fr ee of cha rgespec imen s sen t to the Insti tute on ce r tai n cond i tions.
A memo r ial is being prepa r ed to lay befo r e t he On ta r i o Gove r nmen t on the sub jec t of setti ngas ide a r ese r vat ion fo r the pr otec tion of t he fo r ests and w i ld an imal s .
AD JOURNMENT .
The Soc ie ty then adjou r ned at un ti l o ’cl ock i n the afte r n oon of the sam e day when theusualannual add r esses would be de l ive r ed .
PRE SENTATIO N or A D DRE SS TO HI S E XCE LLE NCY THE GOVERNOR~GE NERAL .
A t o’clock the membe r s of the Soc iety assembled , in acco rdance w i th a r rangemen t, at Governmen t House
,whe re the P r es iden t r ead t he Add r ess to His Exce l lency
,t he Lo r d Stan ley ofPr eston ,
who was pleased to accept the posi t ion ofHono ra r y Pr es iden t, and to eXpress at conside rable lengthh is des i re t o pr omote the objects of the Soc iety .
XXI I ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA .
SESSION II . (PublicMeeting. )
I n pu r suan ce of no tice a publ ic meeting was he ld at o ’c lock,on Tuesday
,in the Rai lway
Comm i ttee Room,and His Exce l len cy the Gove r no r -Gene ral was pleased to occupy t he chai r as
H ono ra ry Pr es iden t .The Pr es iden t of t he Soc iety , Mr. SAND FORD FLE M ING
,then de l ive red the fol low ing add ress
MAY IT PLEASE YOUR EXCELLENCY .
— I t i s my ag reeable duty on behalf of th is Society to ofi‘
er
you our un i ted thanks fo r accept ing to day t he pos i ti on of Hono ra ry Pr es iden t . I t is espec ial ly myduty r espectful ly to thank you r E xce l lency fo r pres id ing at th i s m eet ing on the Open ing day oi
'
t he
pr esen t sess i on .
The Roya l Soc ie ty of Canada sin ce i ts es tabl ishmen t,has enjoyed the fr iendsh ip and coun tenance
of each success ive Gove r no r -Gene ra l . We have g r eat sat isfaction i n knowi ng that you r Excel lency,takes an i n te r est in our pr oceed ings as you r pr edecesso r s have d on e .
In ful fi l l ing the dut ies of my oth ee, i t would , und e r o rd ina ry c i r cumstances , be my h igh pr iv i legeto add r ess the An nual Meet ing at some leng th . Ou th is occas ion I have the d i st inguished hono r tospeak by pe r m issi on of you r E xcel len cy .
FE L L OWS or THE ROYAL SOCI ETY z— A t the c los ing meeting of last yea r I was impel led by a
sense of duty to add r ess you on the subjec t of t he cho ice ofPr es iden t . Sensi ble of my own deficiencies
i n many r espects in rega r d to those qualificat ions wh ich the Pr es iden t of‘ th is Soc iety should possess,
I desi r ed to r el ieve my fe l low-membe rs fr om any emba r rassmen t wh ich m igh t a r ise fr om obse r van ceo f the rule fo l l owed o n p r ev ious occas ions . I do no t feel myself cal led upon to r epeat the opi n ionsI then expr essed and Wh i ch I s t i l l ho ld . They are r eco rded i n my let te r of May 2 18 t
,1888
,wh ich
appea rs in t he last volume of t he Pr oceed ings . The v i ews I subm itted we re ove r ruled , and i t consequen tly
'
cbecame my duty to bow to you r dec is ion . I can,the refo r e
,on ly r enew my sin ce r e thanks
to my fe l low -membe rs who saw fit to place me i n th is exal ted pos i ti on .
In add ressing t he Soc iety o n t he open ing of the eigh th session , a pr i ma ry duty exacts my attent ion . Wr
o cann ot r efe r to the o r ig ina l l is t oi’
eighty membe rs, no r can we examine, even in a curso rymanne r
,our publ ished p r oceed ings , wi thout obse r v ing how many of our body, by the i r labo r s and t he
d ist inct ion s they have gained , have j ust ified thei r appo in tmen t as Fellows by t he founde r of the
assoc ia tion on i ts es tabl ishmen t . I feel wa r ran ted in saying that weallfee l gratified by t he knowledge,that not a few of our Fe l l ows have d isti ngui shed themse lves i n the i r seve ra l walks of l ife, and thatthe se r vices of a numbe r have ga ined publ ic r ecogn i ti on . Among t he latte r I poin t w i th unal loyed
sat isfac t ion to those who have obtain ed posi t i ons of impor tance i n t he D epa r tmen ts of State to thoseon whom have been confe r r ed hono ra ry academical deg rees ; to othe r s who have r ece i ved h igh
eccles iasti cal prefe r men t ; and to seve ra l who have been d i r ec tly d is t inguished by the favo r of Her
Majesty the Queen . I am su r e I on l y expr ess the gene ral feel ing ,when I say that every membe r
r ega rd s these wel l me r i ted d is t in ctions as hon ou r s wh ich reflec t upon the whole Soc iety.
Whi le r efe r en ce to the b r igh te r s ide of the pi c tu r e can on ly be a mat te r oi‘ common satisfac ti on
,
on the othe r hand i t i s my sad duty to a l lud e to those whose deaths have left blanks in our midst .A l though the yea rs are few s in ce t he names of the eigh ty o r ig inal membe r s of the Soc iety we ren scribed on the cha r te r r o l l
,no less than seven oi
‘
our Fel l ows have been r emoved fr om our ranks .The last name to be added to the l ist i s that of D r. Geo rge Paxton Young , late Pr ofesso r of Meta
physi cs and Mo ral Ph i l osophy in To r on to Un i ve rsi ty, who has d ied s i nce our las t meeting . D r. Youngwas a man eminen t fo r h is va r ied attainmen ts, a mathemat i cian of no common o r de r , d is tinguishedby pr ofound schola r sh ip and as a s i nce r e and ea r nes t seeke r afte r t r uth . I t fal ls to my lo t to pe r fo r mthe sad duty of r eco rd ing h is l oss and to pay my humble t r i bute of r espect to h is memo ry.
I t is on ly n ecessa r y to po i n t to the six vo lumes of publ ish ed Pr oceed ings i n o rde r to pr ove thats ince the fo r mat ion of the Soc iety i ts membe r s have no t been unmindful of thei r obl igat i ons, and tha ti n no way have they fa i led to attai n a fai r measu r e of success. The vo lumes d ist r ibuted among the
PROCEED INGS FOR 1889 . XXI I I
pr in cipal lea r ned soc ieties,l ib ra r ies and educat ional i n s ti tuti on s th r oughout the c iv i l ized wo r ld have
been accepted as ev idence of the in te l lectual advan cemen t of t he Domi n ion,and i t i s sat i sfacto ry to
obtain test imony fr om many qua r te rs that t he good fame of Canada has thus been widely extended .
My d is t inguished p redecesso r s in t he office I have the hono r to hold have r efe r r ed in some detai lto the objects of the Royal Society and the pos i t ion i t i s des t ined to occupy in t he D om in i on . Theyh ave r ev iewed luc id ly and at leng th t he in tel lectual act iv i ty wh ich has cha rac te r i zed the i nves tiga
t i ons of l ite ra r y and scien t ific men th r oughout t he wo r ld in r ecen t years , and they have dwe l t uponthe r esea r ches of our own membe rs as they have been subm i tted at our An nual Meet ing s .
I t woul d in n o way be profitable if I attempted to pass ove r the same g r ound as they havedone ; I could n o t hope to glean much of any r ea l value, n o r could I expec t to add anyth ing oi
"
in te res t to th ose lea r ned expos i tion s wh ich have been subm i tted to you. I t rust I may coun t uponyou r indulgence if I ask you kind ly to g ran t you r a tten ti on t o my humble efi
’
ort s in anothe r d i rection .
The r e i s on e subjec t in conn ec tion wi th our Soc iety wh ich,I cons id e r s may wi th pr opr ie ty be
examined . I t i s one of wide ramificat ions,an dI may fa i l to a la rge exten t i n the inves t igat ion wh ich
I pu rpose to attempt. Allenqui ry,howeve r
,i s conduc ive to t ruth
,espec ial ly when h onestly made .
I t rust, the refo r e, that my examinat ion of the ques tion,howeve r i mpe r fec t, w i l l not be out of acco rd
wi th the spi r i t that should an imate us. If I should be so fo r tunate as to succeed in awaken ing t he
at ten t ion of my fel l ow-membe r s to t he subjec t, pa r t icula r ly those of the H i s to r ica l Sec tion s , I shal l
be g reatly grat ified of th is much I feel confident,that t he topi c I p r opose to b r ing befo r e you, can not
be whol ly ba r ren of i n te r est to us as Canad ian s .In open ing the volumes of our Pr oceed ings , the r eade r in any pa r t of the wo r ld mus t be st ruck
w i th one pecul ia r i ty man ifes t i n thei r pages I r efe r to t he use of two languages.
The d iv is i on of the Soc iety in to F r ench and Eng l ish Section s cann ot but a r r est atten ti on , so thatthe que ry natu ral ly arises , Who, ethn olog ical ly , are t he F r en ch and who th e Eng l ish ? Whence a r osethose peoples thus r epr esen ted ? How came th ey to assume a posi ti on so d is t in cti vely t raceable noton ly in th is Soc ie ty but i n th i s coun t ry ?
I h ope that I shal l not b e cons ide r ed a t respasse r in en te r ing in to th is field of r esea r ch,and i n
attempt ing an enqu i ry wh i ch does not appe r tain to t he Sec ti on wi th wh ich I am d i r ectly connected .
I have to - ask the fo r bea rance of those to whom the h isto r ical fac ts I may al lude to are fami l ia r,
al th ough pe r haps no t so wel l known to the o rd ina r y r eade r . E qual ly I sol i c i t the cons ide rati on ofmembe r s of Section s I and II
,ii
’ I attach , what may seem to t hem ,undue impo r tance to ce r tain
reco rds and t rad i t i ons of h isto r y wh ich have att racted my notice ; and I ask each of my fel l owmembe r s k ind ly to ove r l ook any impe r fec ti on s appa r en t i n my a rgumen t .We cannot fa i l to b e awa r e that at n o r emote pe r i od i n the wo r ld
’
s annal s the names of F ranceand E ng land hadno place on the map ofEu r ope . I t i s n ot necessa r y to r eve r t to the geolog i cal pe r iod ,when E u r ope and the B r i t ish Islands we re geog raph ical ly connected to fo r m one land . The r e wasa t ime l ong afte r t he first w r i tten memo r ials of h i sto r y when the peoples whom we cal l P1 ench and
E ng l ish we r e unknow n among the races of mankind . Wri te r s ag ree that at one time Gaul and B r i tai nwe re inhab i ted by t r ibes of a common o r ig in . On excel len t autho r i ty i t i s hel d that in t he extens ive r eg ion of the A lps , i n the South of F rance and i n Spai n and Po r tugal , the r e su r v i ves in the namesof s t r eams and head lands and moun tai n passes , impe r i shable ev idence that in the far off pas t
”Cel ts
who spoke Gae l i c occupied that po r t i on of Eu r ope .
“ The r e i s much i n the topog raphy of B r i t tanyto sustai n the theo ry that Cel ts who spoke t he language now hea rd i n t he High lands of Scotland
gave t he names wh ich t he r ive r s and head lands and i s lands of B r i ttany st i l l bea r . I n t he south ofEngland we have the same ev idences . The nomen clatu re of the topog raphy of D evonsh i re and Co r nwal l i s h e ld to be fundamental lyGae l ic . I n th is pa r t of B r i ta in on ce known by the name D umnonia
,
”
al so in A r mo r ica,now B r it tany
,Gael i c appea r s to have been succeeded by anoth e r Ce l t i c id iom
r esembl ing the Welsh . Th is language was i n use in D umnon ia un ti l the c lose of t he last cen tu ry .
The language of t he Ce l t is sti l l spoken in Wa les . I t is a l i v ing language in B r i tta ny ; so late as 1838
XXIV ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA .
i t was s tated by Le ( to nidec that no less than two m i l l i on s oi'B r etons spoke the Ce l t i c language ofth e i r nat ive p r ov ince . The r e i s abundan t ev idence that a Ce l t i c people occupied the whole of F ran ceand t he B r i t ish Islands
,and we have in po r t ions of these coun t r ies to—ilav as a common ve r nacula r the
descendan t of t he speech of t he un r oman ized and unsaxon iz ed Cclt— a speech wh i ch has su r v ived
Roman,Saxon and Dan i sh sway t 'e r many long cen tu r ies .
The r eco r ds and t radit iOns wh i ch have r eached us es tab l ish tha t t he Ce l t i c peoples who occupied\Vest ern Eu r ope gene ral ly we re nume r ous , r i ch and pr ospe r ous. Th ere can b e n o d oubt that an c ien tGaul and an c ien t B r i tai n we r e inhabi ted by races iden ti cal in b lood
,and w i th but l i ttle d i ffe rence i n
language. The language of the Cel t i s n o t on ly pr ese r ved but spoken as a l iv ing t ongue in Scotland ,I r eland , \Vales and B r i ttany . The seve ral d ialec ts to some exten t may va ry , but the language is i nallprobabi l i ty gene ra l ly t he same, as when i t was t he ve r nacula r o i
’
t he ea r ly i nhabi tan ts of GaulandB r i tain .
S ince the days when Gaul and Bri ta in we re wh o l ly Ce l ti c,both coun tr ies have passed th r ough
many vi ciss i tudes— v i ci ss i tudes wh i ch in thei r lead ing cha rac te r i s t i cs have been r ema r kable in s im i
larity . The first even ts to exe r c i se a d is tu r bing influence on the p revai l ing Cel ti c occupat ion , l ife and
customs we re invas i ons by t he Romans. The Roman s we r e fol l owed by Teuton i c t r ibes fr om that
po r ti on of Eu r ope wh ich mode r n geog raphy desc r i bes as Ge r many . These invade r s bold ly madei ncu rsi ons i n to the cul t ivated lands of t he Roman ized Cel ts to become thei r mas te r s . I n cou r se oftime the Teutons we r e succeeded by ho rdes of Scand inav ian s fr om the sho r es of the Bal t i c
,who
,i n
the i r tu rn, gained powe r and possession of the so i l in bo th coun t r ies .
Gaul fi rst att rac ted t he atten tion oi"
the Romans a cen tu ry and a hal f befo re t he Ch r i s t ian era.
With the v iew of obtain ing add i tionallands and extend ing the i r powe r , th ey seized on the te r r i to rybo r de r ing on the Med i te r ranean
,and t ran sfo r med i t in to a Roman P r ov ince. I t was no t un ti l a
cen tu ry late r that Jul ius Caesa r completed the conques t of Gaul . Caesa r fo l lowed up h i s conquest byt he i nvas ion of B r ita in
,BC . 55
,wh ich became a Roman Pr ov ince unde r the Empe r o r Claud ius i n A .D .
43 , and so r emained fo r nea r ly fou r hund r ed yea r s . The Roman rule p reva i led un ti l th e Empi r eappr oached i t d isso luti on , and i n A .D . 4 10 , the l eg i on s we re wi thd raw n . B r i tai n was then r eleasedfr om i ts al leg iance, and about the same t ime t he A r mo r i can Pr ov in ces in Gaul revol ted fr om t he
Roman yoke .
Un t ilth i s date both coun t r ies had been h eld i n the i r on g r asp of the i r c i v i l ized and d is c ipl in edconque r o r s. For fiv e cen tu r ies in Gaul
,and fo r fou r cen tu r ies i n B r i tain the con ti nued presence of the
leg ions of the Empi re exe r ted an all-powe r f'
u l influence on t he conque red Ce l ts,in many r espec ts to
mod ify thei r habi ts and cus toms, and by the laws of he r ed i ty thei r physique and cha racte r . Th r ough
out the g reater pa r t of Gaul , the Ce l ti c id i om was c rushed out . The same r esul t was not attainedin Bri tain i t was left fo r conque r o r s of a d iffe ren t race, i n the fo l low ing cen tu r ies, to a l te r the pr im i t iveform of speech . W hateve r the influence on the language, the pr o longed presen ce of the Roman leg ion s ,and l i kew ise the ma r r iage of t he so ld ie rs w i th the nat ive women when the i r te r m of se r v ice was ended ,mus t have si len tly wo rked typical changes i n the people . These changes we r e less no ticeable i nB r i tain than i n Gaul
,b ut the influence of the Roman s i n both coun t r ies mus t have left them mo re o r
less latin i zed . As the Roman powe r passed away , Gauland B r i tain we re exposed to n ew d is tu r b ingth rees . In r oads we re made i n both coun t r ies by ba r ba r ous o r se in i -bar ba r ous Teuton ic t r i bes knownby the va r ious names of F rank
,F r is ian
,L omba rd , Sueve , Burgund ian , F leming , Jute, Saxon and
A ngle . The i r cha rac te r,r el ig i on and fo rm of wo r sh ip d iffe r ed l i ttle ; al th ough on occas ion s they acted
in conce r t,fo r the mos t pa r t they engaged i n independen t exped i t ion s . Afte r unnumbe red wa r s and
s t rugg les fo r the mast crv extend ing ove r yea r s of su tIering to the peopl e they attacked , these fo re ign
i nvade r s obta i ned possess i on of the so i l . I n B r i tain the Cel t in some d is t r i c ts was d isplaced and appa ren tly exte r m inated by the in t r ud ing t r i bes ; but a conque red race d oes not whol ly become exti n c t .I ts wa r r i o r s may be k i l led i n battle, every man may be d ispe r sed o r enslaved o r des t r oyed , bu t t he
subjec t women and ch i ld ren are la rgely spa r ed, to en te r in cour se of t ime into new r elati on s w i th the
PROCEED INGS FOR 1889 . XXV
conque r o r s. Thus,a Ce lt i c elemen t mus t have r ema ined
,even it‘ it s name and language in ce r tai n
d i stri c ts d isappea red .
The i nvas i on s of some of the t r i bes even tua l ly assum ed the cha racte r of emig rat i ons and colon iz a t io ns, no tably those of the Saxons and the Ang les
" the latte r gave thei r name to Southe r n B r i ta in andt he language wh ich they used
,i n common with o the r Teuton i c t r i bes, preva i led i n the inv ade lte r r i
to ry . The Franks,on t he othe r hand
, gave th ei r name to pa r t of Gau l to be ex tended even tual ly f r om.
t he Atlan t i c to t heMed i te r ranean ; but y ie ld ing to t he i rres ist i b le influence of ove rwhe lm ing numberwho gene ral ly possessed the Ch r is t ian rel ig ion an da h ighe r c iv i l ization t han the i r conquero r s , theFranks g radual ly assumed the language o i
'
t he lat in i zed Gaul .I n thus b r ing ing befo r e our v iew t he nat ional c rad les
,wh ence in the succeed ing cen tu r ies , F rance
ind Eng land have sp rung ,we fa i l to pe r ce ivean i nd ependen t eth no log i cal o r ig i n on the one pa r t o r the
othe r . The people of both coun t r ies , o r ig inal ly of a comm on stock , have been moulded in an impo r tan tmanne r by add i tiona l elemen ts of g r eat fo r ce . They we r e unde r Roman influence un ti l t he fifth
cen tury ; Teuton i c races became domi nan t un ti l the n in th cen tu ry , at wh ich pe r i od bands of Scand inav ian adven ture r s fr om the Ba l ti c began to make descen ts on t he coas ts access i ble to th em . Thesea-kings and v iki ngs oi
'
t he North,who r ega rded pi racy and plund e r as t he most h ono rable of all
ca ree r s , commen ced a se r ies of expl o i ts wh ich we re con t inued for many gene rat ions . I h F rancethese adven tu re rs r ece ived t he name of Norman s . I n E ng l i s h h is to ry they are desc r i bed as Dane s .
A l ike i n E ng land and in F rance these Scand inav ian t r i bes firmly es tabl ished themse lves i n the
mos t att ractive pa r ts of the te r r i to ry i nvaded . As the Vic tOrieus F r an ks at an ea r l ie r date,so i n
F rance the new conque r ors g radual ly adopted the language and manne r s of the people they hadove rpowe red .
I n explanation of the compa ra t ive r apid i ty wi th wh ich the conque r o r s became ass im i lated and
abso r bed in t he gene ral populat ion , we have to r emembe r that the invade r s cons isted on ly of men,
and that t he wo rk of conques t being completed they en te red i n to the ord ina ry pur sui ts of l ife ; i nestabl ish ing themsel ves in t he t err itorv they formed ties and r e lationsh ips w i th t he nat i ve women .
They had power in th e i r hands to enfo r ce compl iance, and acco rd i ng to t he cus toms of those days ,possessi on fo l lowed cho ice, when some r i te of marriage i n acco r dance wi th t he manne r s of the no r the r nt r i bes was pe rfo rmed . Tha t w i l l ingness o r unwi l l ing ness on t he pa r t of t he nati ve womanhoodwas not i n t he cha rac te r of t he t imes we find an i l lust rati on in t he conque r o r Ro l lo . A t the s iege ofBayeau i n 89 0
,he captu red and ca r r ied away a F r ench damse l whom he ma r r ied accord i ng to t he
Dan i sh usage . The un ion pr oved a happy one . The wi fe of t he Dane Ro l lo became the mothe r ofWil l iam Longswo rd , who in h is tu rn fol lowed the example wh ich h i s fathe r had se t him. R icha rdthe Fea r less
,was the son o f IVilliam and as descen t. i s no t exc lusi ve ly th r ough t he s i re, in two gene ra
ti ons t he offsp r ing of the Scand inav ian became th r ee-
qua r te r s F r ench i n blood . That th is cha racte ris t ic featur e pr evai led is obvi ous fr om r esul ts wh ich show con c lus ive ly the newr elationsh ips wh ichsprung up in a compa rat ively few yea r s . Whateve r cou r se was fol lowed
,the fact i s r eco r ded by h is
torians that i n t he t ime oi'
R i cha rd, g randson of Rol lo , N o rmandy had become as th o r ough ly F rench
as any pa r t of F rance. To accoun t fo r the fac t that t he Dan i sh language sh ould soon be l os t, we haveon ly to conside r tha t as ch i ld ren are b r ough t up by th ei r mothe rs, and fo r t he first y ea r s oi
' thei r l ifeare con tinual ly wi th th em
,i t i s not su rpr i s ing that th ey should come to speak on ly the i r mothe r
tongue. If the descendan ts of the No r th men i n No r mandy became so typical ly changed i n two
gene rati on s , i t i s obv i ous that t he same in te r ming l i ng of genealogy , co n t inued th r ough succeed inggene rat ion s . would r esul t i n t he F r ench elemen t in allrespec ts becom ing mo r e and mo re predominan t,un ti l the l i ne of sepa ra tion between t he in t rud ing race and the people of the te r r i to ry would prac tical lycease to ex ist .The No rman i nvas ion of F r ance commenced i n the n i n th cen tury ; Richa r d t he Fea r less
r e igned i n the ten th cen tu ry ; by t he midd le of the e leven th centu ry t he descendan ts of the Scandinav ian adventure r s had become F r enchmen . They had adopted t he Ch r i s t ian fai th , and l ived acco r d ing
Proc. 1889 . n.
XXVI ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA .
to t he customs and hab its of th ei r mate rnal an cesto r s ; w i th sca r cely an excepti on , no language was
spoken th r oughout No rmandy but Roman ce o r F r en ch .
I f'
, i n the m idd le of t he eleven th cen tu r y , an attempt had been made to define t he ethnolog ica ldificrence between t he F r ench and E ng l i sh peeples the gene ra l an swe r mus t have been that i n po in tof o r ig in there was n o d iffe r en ce . Va r iet ies the r e we r e in the compon en t pa r ts of each ; even at the
pr esen t day we meet such va r ieties equal ly in F rance and the B r i t i sh Islands . South of the Channelwe find the Cel ts
,the F r anks , t he Lat ins and t he Ge r man s compounded i n an infin i te numbe r of
d iffe r en t p r epo r t i on s ; in t he B r i t ish Islands we have d iffe r en ces between t he H igh lande r s and Low
lande rs , between t he I r i shmen and E ng l i shm en between t he Wel shm en and Yo r ksh i r emen,between
the men of Co r nwal l and the men of Ken t ; but tak ing t he people of F rance as a whole and the peopleof the Un i ted K ingdom as a whole
,at t he period of wh ich we speak , i t would n o t b e possi ble to say
that i n poin t of ances t ry th e r e we r e any s t r ik ing d istin c ti ons between them . The re undoub ted ly wasless eth nol og i cal d iffe r en ce between the two commun i t ies sepa rated by the Channel , tak ing them as
un i ties,than between many of t he mi no r d ivi s ions i n ei the r coun t ry . I n the midd le oi
'
t he eleven thcentu ry n o one of t he two peoples cou ld be named as a pu r e race ; both we re of m ixed blood ; theywe r e compounded substan tial ly of the same o r ig inal elemen ts . The r e we re mino r d iffe ren ces in theadm ixtu r e
,i n the comb inati on and fus ion of t he e lemen ts ; poss i bly the r e we r e modificat ions a r is ing
fr om cl imate and geog raph ical pos i t ion ; but t he two peoples had o r ig i nated i n t he same p r im i t iverace ; th ey had been subjec ted to l ike influences and exposed to t he same v i ci ss i tudes, d iffe r ing on ly indeg ree.
I n the Cel t i c. race, wh ich fo rmed the bas is in both cases , had been i nfused Roman , Teuton i c and
Sandinav ian s tocks . The in t rud ing r aces, on the i r a r r i val in the new coun t r ies,we can wel l imag i ne ,
we r e i n the flower of manh ood , bo ld and dete r m i ned i n spi r i t, the most da r ing of the t r i bes whenceth ey sp rang . We are wa r ran ted in the bel ief that among them th ere we re th ose who would take
pr eem inen t posi t io n i n the adven tu r ous type of man . F r om such as these a heal thy v igo r ous pr ogenywould pr oceed . The Roman s would i n t r oduce the i r c iv i l izat i on
,thei r cul tu r e and the i r powe r s of
o rgan i zation , t o elevate and refin e the commun i ties wh i ch they subdued . I t was the p r ide of theRoman conque r o r s to t r eat thei r subjec t States with con s ide rat ion so long as t he cen t ral powe r on thebanks of the Ti be r was duly r ecogn ized . The No r the r n t r i bes wh i ch subsequen tly ove r ran the mo r ecu l t ivated pr ov inces of Gaul and B r i tai n , we r e un l ette r ed , savage ba r ba r ian s , wo rsh ippe rs ofTho r andWoden
,who l ooked on the slaugh te r of an enemy as a r igh teous sacrifice to the i r gods . U nde r the i r
savage exte r i o r and ruth less natu r es th e r e we r e,howeve r
,the ge r ms of gene r ous impul ses and nob le
endowmen ts . They had v igo r , va l o r and r eso lut ion , and many of the r ude r v i r tues they r equi redon ly con tac t and i n te r course w i th a mo r e cult ivated race to be devel oped in to a h igh e r and mo r ees timable cond i tion . I n cou r se of yea rs t he bes t qual i t ies of the conque r ing races becom ing g radual lyabso r bed i n the populat ion s of Gau l and B r i ta in , could not fai l to exe r c ise powe r ful influences on thecha r acte r of bo th nations. To th ese ea r ly influen ces we may att r i bute many of the pr om inen tcha racte r ist ics of t he F r en ch and E ng l ish as they are seen at t he p resen t day .
A t the pe r i od r efe r r ed to , the language of the two peoples had d ive rged i n to d iffe r en t d i rect ion s .I n F ran ce the d ia lec t wh ich came i n to use was the legacy of one set of conque r o rs ; in E ng land o the rinfluences led to d iffe r en t r esul ts
,and t he id i om of ano the r set of conque r o rs pr evai led . Th is d i ffe r en ce
i n language has been con tinued to t he pr esen t day ; and if othe r ev iden ce we r e wan ting , i t m igh t bea rgued that the F r en ch and E ng l i sh peoples had spr ung fr om en t i r ely d ifferen t pr im it ive stocks.
Language, howeve r , is but an ind iffe r en t tes t of race . The re are ample pr oofs th r oughout thewo r ld that people n ea r ly r elated may speak w idely difieren t d ialects ; wh i le o the r commun i t ies, between whom the re is n o affinity of r ace, may conve r se i n t he same id iom . Amongs t ou r selves ,in s tances are n o t unknown whe re an in t r ud ing stock , i n t he m idst of a people g r eat ly exceed ing i t innumbe r
,has i n two o r th ree gene rat ions y ie lded to t he influence su r r ound ing it , and lost the language
of the i r ancest ry .
XXVI II ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA .
un i ve rsal h is to ry a sub jugat ion so complete , a h ost i l i t y so in tense , becom ing the ul t imate means of somuch national p r ospe r i ty .
In a remarkable lectu r e d el i ve red las t yea r by S ir Wi l l iam G r oves at the Re '
alIn s ti tution,
London,he subm i tted t hcp rop0 siti0 n th at antagon i sm i s n o t t he banef
’
u l th ing wh ich many cons ide ri t that i t i s often the p recur so r of good : that i t is a necessi ty of ex is ten ce and of the o rgan i sm of
the un i ve rse as far as we unde r stand it ; that mot ion and l ife can n o t go o n wi th out i t ; that i t i s no t ame r e casual adjunc t oi' natu r e, bu t that w i th out i t the re
‘would be n o. natu re,a t alleven ts as we con
ceiv e i t ; and that i t i s i nevi tably assoc iated w ith matte r and sen t ien t beings ; The lec tur e r showedthat , th ough i tself an r ev il
,an tagon i sm i s a n ecessa ry ev i l . I shal l no t. ven tu r e to al lude to t he
ev ulen ces of an tagon i sm fu rn i sh ed by h im i n the phys ical wo r ld , in vegetable l ife, i n the exte r na ll ife of an imals and i n human soc iety . He po i nted out that i n what is euph emisti ca l ly cal led a l ife of
peace, buye r and se l le r , mas te r and se r van t , land lord and tenan t,debto r and c red i to r
,are alli n a
s tate of s imme r ing an tagon ism ; that in t ranqui l comme r ce and in the school s we have the an tagon i smof compet i ti on ; t hat in n ea r ly allour games and amusemen ts we have an tagon ism ; that i n dai ly l ife
we have c lass an tagon ism , r el ig i ous an tagon i sm , pol i t i cal an tagon ism and i nd ividual an tagon ism ,and
that the re is mo r e o r l ess an tagon i sm in eve ry cond i t ion of society . S ir Wi ll iam Gr oves d id no t
attempt to expla in t he cause of th is un i ve r sal an tagon ism . He on ly gave ev idence of t he fac t tha ti t is not l im i ted to t ime o r space, and stated h is be l ief that some day i t wi l l b e conside r ed as much a
law as t he law of g rav i tation .
If an tagon ism come to be cons ide r ed a law ,i t w i l l b e necessa r y
,I th ink
,to r ecogn ize anothe r
pr i nc iple wi th tenden c ies t he ve ry oppos i te The two pr inc iples may b e l i kened to t he r esul tan t oftwo fo r ces ; i n on e case the fo r ces ac t i n con t ra ry d i r ec tion s ; i n t he o the r case the fo r ces ope rate inthe same d i rect ion . As act ion i s fo l lowed by r eac ti on
,so al so i t i s poss ib le that as t he two fo r ces
r evo lve w ith ti me,an tagon i sm may b e fo l lowed by th e oppos ite p r i nc iple . When th is takes place i t
i s ev iden t that,the s t r onge r the fo r ces i n an tagon ism ,
the g reate r w i l l be the r esul tan t when thesefo r ces come to ac t as coope r at ive fo r ces .
A change of th i s cha racte r is exempl ified i n the h is to ry of E ng land . The reve rsal of the fo r ceswas n o t sudden
,i t took two o r th r ee cen tu r ies compl etely to effec t the change . For a numbe r of
gen e rat ions afte r the F r ench i nvas ion , the l ine between t he descendan ts of t he conque r o r s and t heconque r ed
,was sharply d raw n . The re was the con t rast of manners and of th ough t ; the re was t he
pr ima ryd iffe r en ce of language ; F rench , be ing th e token of powe r and weal th and influence,estab l ish ed
a defined l ine of sepa rat ion between t he two peoples . By d eg r ees t he fee l ing of hat r ed and di s l i ketoned down
,an tagon i sm and an t ipathy y ielded to o ther influences . In 13 62
,i n the r eign of Edwa r d
I II,a s tatute was passed o rdain ing that t h e r eafte r allpleas in the cou r ts should b e pleaded i n t he
E ngl i sh language . The first bi l l of' the House of Commons w r i tten i n the E ng l i sh language bea r sdate 1485
,but l ong befo re this ~t he Eng l i sh language b egan to gain g r ound . The F r ench and E ng l ish
had commen ced to in te r m ing l e and i nte rma r ry,fr iendsh ips and nea r r e latio nsh ips we r e devel oped ,
and,as a consequence, by t he fom tecn th ceri t urv a new r ace had -sprung up pa r taking by descen t
the qua l i ties of its F r en ch and E ng l i sh ancestors .The admi xtu r e of race has often p r oved advan tageous i n c r eat ing t he tendency to devel op t he
g r ow th of n ew qual i t ies . I t has been known to b r i ng ou t a type of cha r acte r supe r i o r to e i the r pa ren trace
,to pr oduce a composi te race to dominate ove r bo th the pa r en t stems . Th is r esul t may n ot be
attained i n allcases,but i t cann o t b e den ied tha t t he blend ing togethe r of the F r en ch and E ng l i sh
s tocks st reng th ened the in tel lec t of t he n ew nati onal i ty, great ly in c reased i ts powe r , and gave an
impul se to its pr ospe r i ty and g l o ry . As t he name of E ng l ishman takes in allnatives of t he coun t ry,
of whateve r descen t t he descendants of the F r en ch invade rs became E ng l ishmen,i ndeed t he t ruest of
E ng l ishmen . Pa r adoxi ca l as i t may appea r , i t i s ma in ly owing to F r ench influences inc iden t to theConquest that the E ng l i sh nat ion has been moulded to the nat i ona l cha rac te r i t possesses . I t is owingto t he in t roducti on of t he F r ench e lemen t that Engl i shmen have become what we n ow find them .
PROCI‘LICIHNGS FOR 1889 . XXIX
The invade r s tool: firm r oo t i n E ng land they eng rafted upon t he nat ion the best qual i ties of the i rown natur es . Many of the men who from va r ious pa r ts oi
’
F rance accompan ied W i l l iam , became the
founde r s of g reat E ng l ish fami l ies. Fo r eigh t cen turies t hei r des cendants h ave he ld a domin an t placei n the nationa l coun ci ls ; ther have assumed h igh command on land and sea
,and they have been pr om i
n en t in the r o l l of statesmen who have con t r o l led t he dest in ies o i‘
t he k ingdom .
IVilliani h im s el f let't a las ting impr ess on t he t he dynas ty wh ich he es tabl i shed has
con t inued th r ough to our own t ime, al thoug h no t in t he d i r ec t l ineage fr om fathe r to son . Si nce the
death ofWil l iam i n 1087 . t he blood of t hel
l’reneh conquero r has flewed i n the veins of eve ry mona r chof E ng land . I n t he wo r d s of Palg rave . Magnificen t was W .lliam’
s tlest iny can we av oid acceptingh im as t he founde r o i
'
t he predomine n t e now ex ist i ng in t he c iv i l i zed wo r ld N ay , t he s t r ipes
and sta rs of the 'l‘rans-A t lan t i c Republ ic would neve r have been ho ist ed , no r t he Ganges flow as a
B r i ti sh st ream , b at fo r the No r man -
gaun tle ted hand:
The F rench conques t is w i thout a pa r a l le l i n h is to ry . I t i s t he most momen tous even t wh i ch our
annals recertl. I t humbled t he nat ion t o the last de f
j t ee, and wi th e th e r ‘ reat chang es i t effec ted a
vas t te rr i to r ia l and soc ial l'OYHlllllOll. Wh i le allth is was bei ng aec t nnplishetlwi th much pai n and suffe ring for the t ime be ing ,
i t must n ow be l’
l'COglllZ Ctlthat t he land ing of the Fren ch and t he settlemen tof t he k ingdom by t he F ren ch , and the ul t imate fus io n of the Conque r o r s w i th t he conque r ed , was conduciv e of the greates t poss i ble good . The F r ench elemen t thus th rown i n to E ng land unde r thec i r cumstan ces in wh ich i t was i nt r oduced migh t be expec ted to p r oduce g r eat and last ing effec ts .The ethn olog ical r es ul t has been t o ce tn tn inn
‘le t he blood of t he two commun it ies,a l ready possessing
the affin i ty of ances t ry,and to a new nat ional t vpc . By whateve r name it may be k nown ,
i t is a F r en ch—E ng l i sh type . The pol i t ica l e tt'
ect has tleen to weld togethe r the componen t pa r tsfo rm ing t he B ait ish nation i n so compact a cha racte r as to wi ths tand eve ry shock to wh i ch i t hass in ce been exposed . J
'
i’
a lt e r the lapse of eigh t hun dred y ea r s we d ispass i onate ly v iew th e effects oft he h isto r ical even t , i t i s imposs i ble to escape t he eonw c t ion that the d i rec t influen ces spr ing ingfr om the Conquest have been of last ing advantage t o t he wo r ld .
The genera l r esul t of t he enqui ry i n to wh ich I have been led may be b riefly summa r i zed . “re
may t race back the r elations of the two peoples as they are repr esen ted in th is Society to a pe r i od longan te r i o r to t he date when they we r e firs t know n as F r ench and F eelish . We lea rn that they sprango r ig inal ly fr om a g reat pr imi t ive race wh ich , befo re t he Ch r ist ian era, S pread ove r weste r n E u r ope and
flourished unde r a half-deve loped c iv i l i zation . In bo th cases t he Orignal stock had been modified byfo reign influences s im i la r i n cha racte r
,unt i l t he eleven th centu ry
,when a powe r ful F ren ch e lemen t
became in te r m ixed wi th the E ng l i sh people and pen etrated the h ighes t and lowes t g rades of socie tv .
A t t hat pe r iod the po r tion of Eu r ope wh ich i s named F rance cont r ibuted t he rul i ng c las s and the
men to fo r m the B r i t i sh a r istoc racy . To th i s day the prominen t fami l ies of E ng land , wi th fewexcept i ons , t race to F ran ce t he foundation s of the i r name ' F r om Fr ench sou r ces have come th osewho have he lped so much to make G reat Bri ta in s t r ong and i nd isso lub le .
Thus i t was that the descendan t s of arc ien t Gaul , modified by t he Roman s,the F ranks and the
D anes, have been abso r bed and ass im i lated i n the grea t mass of t he ting l i sh people . The blood of theF r ench i n termi ng led with t he blood of t he E ng l i sh has s ince been ca r r ie d in the veins of co lon i sts toAmeri ca
,to Aus t ral ia
,and to eve r y B r i t ish col ony
,and by B r i t i s h sai l o r s to eve ry po r t in t he two
hemisph e res ; and th us . th r ough the i n te rm ixtu re of t he races an Empi r e has been raised up to g i r d let he g lobe .
These impe r fec t r emarks w ill I, t rust,be found to fu rn ish an answe r to t he que ry, Who are
the F r en ch,and who are t he E ng l i sh ? The r eco rd s of h isto ry establ ish that they are not. a l ien i n
blood,that they have often met i n con fl ict, and that they have frequen tly coope r a ted in am ity .
The cha racte r of the r elat i onsh ip wh ich sprung up e igh t cen tu r ies back connected E ng land and
F rance by domest i c t ies , and the same l i neages spread ove r both lands . The h isto r ies of t he twonation s have been mo re o r less in te rwoven eve r s ince the F rench and E ng l i sh people had an existence
,
and fo r pa r t of t he time t he two peoples have had one and t he same h isto ry .
XXX ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA .
My r ema r ks go to show that those whom I have the h on o r to add ress, w ith the people i n theD om in ion whom they r epresen t, are equal ly the descendan ts of the races who lai d the foundat ion ofweste r n Eur ope. E ve ry ind i v idual man i s mo r e o r less moulded by fo r ces wh ich date fr om a r emote
pas t . The subtle influences of ancest ry and the cond i t ion s due to he red i ta ry t ran smiss i on affec t us all.If t he ind iv idual be t he r esul tan t of r emote and occul t fo r ces
,so al so to a g r eat ex ten t i s the fami ly
and the nati on .
The populat ion of Canada presen ts the spectacle of two peoples possessing ea r ly k in sh ips andaffin ity of ancest ry , subsequen t ly sepa rated fo r cen tu r ies, again fo rm ing a r eunion i n pol i ti cal andsoc ia l l ife. A cen tu ry and a qua r te r ago , a F r ench populat io n numbe r ing some souls
,came
unde r the B r i ti sh flag . I t is a somewhat s ingula r coinc idence that seven cen tu r ies ea r l ie r the samenumbe r of F r enchmen c r ossed the Chann el
,even tual ly to become E ng l i shmen , and to g ive to the
B r i t ish nat ion the st r eng th and influence and d istinc tive cha racte r isti cs we now find i t possessing .
I t i s said that h isto ry r epeats i tself ; are we wa r ran ted i n assuming that i t w i l l do so in th i sinstan ce ? If the fusi on of the F r en ch and E ng l i s h afte r Wi l l iam ’s conques t was pr oduct ive of ther esul ts I have specified ; if the d iffe rence of language fiv e to e igh t cen tu r ies back fa i led to impede
t he vas tly impo r tan t conseqen ces now t raceable ; if the absence of' complete homogene i ty was i n n o
way a h i nd rance,but on the con t ra ry
, pr oved a so l id and subs tan tia l advan tage by th e d ive rsi ty of
talen t and s t r eng th wh ich i t b r ough t ; i f l i ke causes p r oduce l i ke eti’
ec ts— are we n ot wa r ranted i nl ook ing fo rwa r d to our futu r e wi th confiden ce ? I t is su r ely a happy augu r y that we have become
a ful ly -o rgan ized po l i t i cal commun i ty, inhe r i ting in common allthat i s to be che r ished in F r enchand Eng l ish h isto ry . To my m ind t he re is the bes t g r ound fo r hepe that in com ing year s the
successive gene rations of Canad ian s w i l l be d is t ingui shed by the bes t qual i ties they inhe r i t fr om thei rcompound an cest ry , devel oped unde r the fr ee in st i tut ions wh ich i t w i llbe our happiness to bequeath
to them .
I t is indeed t rue that in the pas t F rance and Eng land have fr equen tly been in conflict,but th ose
conflict s have been much less frequen t and no t m o re fierce than t he domes ti c st rugg les in e i the rcoun t ry . Happi ly a state of open wa r fa r e i s n o longe r the no r mal cond i t ion of soc iety, and allmustacknow ledge that h os ti l i ty of race is en t i r ely out of place i n th i s age i n th is D om i n ion . We have
now r eached a s tage in our count ry’s pr og ress when an tagon ism in i ts s t r ongest and wo r s t aspect has
passed away . Whateve r thei r o r ig in o r c r eed o r col o r , allwho l ive wi th in t he l im i ts of the b r oaddomain of Canada canno t f ai l to b e conv inced that they have in te r ests in common . As t he inhab i tan ts of E ng land d iscove r ed in t he r e ign of K ing John i n t he th i r teen th cen tu ry , so the populat ion oft he Dom in i on mus t pe r ce ive, that no i n te rests of r ea l and lasting impo r tance can exis t wh i ch are not
common to all. Th is feel ing ful ly deve l oped , the complete iden t ificat ion of gene ral sent imen t w i l l be
the pledge of last ing fr iendsh ip, t he Magna Cha r ta of a un i ted commun i ty . I t w i llelevate our aims
and pr omote aspi ration s wo r thy of our common ancest ry and our common i nhe r itance— an i nhe r i tance wh ich t h r ows upon as weigh ty r esponsi b i l i ties and the duty of empl oy ing our best effo r ts i nwo rk ing out our des t iny . I f we do wel l our pa r t, i t w i l l be fo r the h is to r ian of the futu re to ch r on ic lethe resul ts, wh ich we an t i cipate wi l l follow the r eun ion and comixt ure of t he F r ench and E ng l ish o nt he so i l of Canada.
Pe r haps I have dwel t at too g reat length on th i s topi c , and I should not ven tu r e fur th e r to t res
pass on you r k ind i ndulgence. In c l osi ng the r ema r ks wh ich I have the h ono r to make on th i soccas ion
,I shal l on ly ask you r pe rm iss i on to add a ve ry fewwo rds on o the r matte r s. L ook ing at the
fou r Section s in to wh ich the Soc iety i s d iv ided and th e defin i te objects fo r wh ich they are o rgan i sed ,i t is obv ious that the scope of our r esea r ch es as an assoc iation is b r oad and deep. The r emarks
I have subm i tted come wi th in t he cogn izan ce of the H i s to r i cal Sec tions . The re is anoth e r Section
wh i ch emb races subjects r elating to pas t t ime . Whi le h is to ry takes as back to t he ea r l iest dates of
existing r eco r ds , the Sect ion wh ich in cludes t he sc ien ce of geo logy ca r r ies us to pe r i ods in the wo r ld’
s
annals a thousandfo ld mo r e remote,and in to fields of r esea r ch immeasu rably w ide r than t he chron i
PROCEEDINGS FOR 1889 . XXXI
c les of the human race . Un l i ke t he h is to r ian and a r chaeolog i s t, the studen t of geology can l ook ton o aid fr om human reco r ds
,h i s r esea r ch es go beyond allc lassi cal l i te ratur e ; he can find no guide in
insc r iptions , howeve r an c ien t, wh ich t he hand of man has made.
Geology, to some exten t,may b e desc r i bed as a new sc ience
,it.was wi th in the second decade of the
cen tu ry that i t became a r ecogn i zed s tudy , ye t w i th t he aid of' subsid ia ry sc ien ces i t has already g iv en
to as pa r t of t he sto ry of t he ea r th . The l i b ra ry of t he geo log ist is found in t he r ecesses of the r ocks .He dec iphe r s t he w r i tings wh ich have the r ein been insc r i bed and wh ich fo r unknow n pe r iods havebeen secu red fr om the pr ocess of d ecay . Necessa r i ly h i s r esea r ches mus t be pat ien t and labo r ious ,and i t i s on ly by the s low accumulation of fac ts that he i s r ewa r ded by b r ing ing to l igh t r emains ofman ifo ld o rgan i sm s wh i ch in success ive epochs have an i mated t he g l obe coun tless cen tu r ies befo reman was cal led in to being . The geolog i s t i n his inves t igat ion s appr oach es nea r e r to what we cal l thebeg inn ing ; he has r evealed t o h im t races of t he natu ral fo r ces wh ich have Ope r ated in mould i ng t heea r th to i ts presen t fo r m . He is pr iv i leged to fol low the mutation s i n the s t ruc tu re o f t he wo r ld ,wh ich
,i i' the elemen t of t ime b e no t taken in to accoun t
,are whol ly i nexpl icable, and wh ich can on ly
be accoun ted fo r by a slow and gradual devel opmen t, by the con tinui ty of’ fo r ces exe r ted ove r pe r iod s ,
compa r ed w ith wh ich t he du rat ion of human l ife on t he g lobe as r eco r ded i n h isto ry can g ive but t hefai n tes t con ception .
Howeve r much th is sc ience has advan ced,and howeve r g r eatly our knowledge has in c reased
du r ing t he las t si x ty yea r s,we are made to feel that we are on ly on the th r eshold of g reate r r eve la
t ion s . I n the wide te r r i to ry of the Dom i n i on we have a bound less field fo r pu rsu ing geol og i calr esea r ch . The Canad ian Geol og i cal Sur vey has done excel len t wo r k i n many d i rec tion s , n o t simplyi n fo r m ing a vas t accumulat ion of scient ific facts
,but in pe r fo r m ing t he g r eat se r v i ce of establ ish ing
the i mmen se value of some of our h idden mine ral t reasu r es .In the r emain ing Sect ions of the Society t he subjects fo r con s ide rati on are n ot special ly r elated
to t he past ; t he sphe r e of the i r investigation s have to some exten t a bea r ing i n t he opposi te d i r ec ti on .
I r efe r to the Sect ion devoted to mathemat i cs and physical and chemical sc ien ces. The aims and
hopes of th is d iv is ion of the Soc iety rathe r lie i n t he futu r e ; no t that we sh ould fo rget our obl igat ionsto those who have to i led in pas t yea r s and to whose reseaches i n sc ien ce we main ly owe much wh ichi s a st r ik ing featu r e in the dai ly l i fe of mode r n c iv i l ization .
These sc iences cannot b e spoken of as mode rn . We have but to men ti on the names ofPythago ras ,A r isto t le, A r ch imedes, Pto lemy and oth e r s , to tes ti fy to the effo r ts of two thousand yea r s back . Theseven teen th and e igh teenth cen tu r ies we r e made i l lust r i ous by men whose names w i l l always be hono rab ly assoc iated wi th science . Without dep r eciating , howeve r , the labo r s of the pr ecur so rs of what weallr ecogn ize as mod e r n t imes, i t may b e said that i t i s t he n in eteen th cen tu ry wh i ch has wi tnessedthe g reates t t r iumphs in sc ien ce. Indeed i t i s w i th in l i t tle mo r e than t he las t half- cen tu ry thatthe r e has taken place a r ema r kable r evo lutio n in human affai r s th r ough the g r owth and influence ofthe physi ca l sc ien ces and t he appl i cati on of sc ien ce to the dai ly l ife and t he mu l t ifa r ious ope rati on sof man .
No one fo r a momen t can suppose that sc ien ce has exhausted eve ry field of enqui r y . Judg i ngfr om the in tel lectual activ i ty wh i ch eve rywhe r e pr evai l s, the though t fo r ces i tself upon us that muchwi l l b e d iscove red to as ton i sh and bewi lde r the human fam i ly even i n the compa rat ively sho r t pe r iodof anoth e r fifty yea rs. Who can fo r etel l what our ch i ld ren may w i tness and expe r ien ce i n the m idd leof the twen t ieth cen tu ry ? Some of us may y e t l i ve to see the exten t of the influences exe r ted byscience i n d i r ection s n ot h i the r to d r eamed of
,and in fielde wh ich to many m inds appea r to set
scien t ific investigati on at defiance. Even i n t he complex domain of'
pol i ti cs t he w ise and prac ti calstatesman may benefi t h i s coun t ry by the appl i cation of scien t ific p r inc iples and methods t o t heso lution of d iffi cul t pr oblems.
Six yea r s ago one of t he most eminen t of our co l leagues , the late D r . Todd , add ressed t he mem
be r s at length on the relati ons of th is Soc iety to the State. He dwe l t upon the b enefits wh ich may be
XXXI I ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA .
an ticipated f r om t he es tabl ishmen t in the D omi n ion of a body con s ti tuted as we are . By way ofi l lus t rat i on he r efe r red to t he pub l i c se r v i ces rende red du r ing the las t two hund red yea r s by the Roya lSoc ie ty o i
'
E ng land ; se r v ic es r epeated ly acknowl edg ed b v the Impe r ia l Gove r nmen t and confirmed
by pa r l iamen ta ry vo tes o i‘
money . Fo r many yea r s an nua l s tuns have been g ran ted to defray the costof
'
sc ien t ific i nvest igat ions reconmnemled by tha t. Society as wo r thy o t'
assis tance .
The Home Go v ermn en t has found that i t is of un doubted publ i c advan tage to have r ecou r se to theti t l and adv i ce 0 1
'
t he Royal Soc iety o f G reat B r i tai n . Our own (”ro v ernmcn t . too , has g i ven ev idenceo f a w i se l i be ral i ty
,wh ich w e. co r d ial ly ackn owledge . 1 um cen tulen t that I expr ess t he fee l i ngs of
eve ry membe r of our body ,wh en I say that i t wi l l be the co n stan t. aim o f
'
the Roya l Soc iety of Canadat o con tinue to command the respec t and confidence of the li e iple and Pa r l iamen t of t he Domi n io n .
The ice-J.
’i-
esitlcn t,ABm
'
: CAse aA t N then a dd ressed t he m eet i ng as fo l l ows
MONS I E UR LE PRES ID E NT , Mnsnanns ETMEss tnuas Apres lo rappo r t s i savan t c t s i soig neusemen t élalio re que v ien t dc li r e 31 . lo p res iden t , vous no \ ous attendez pas que j e vous fasse un l ongd iscou r s sur les t ravaux de la Sec ié té . Jc no fera is (lu
’
amo indrir en l’
alt'
a iblissan t cc qu’i l a s i b ien ( l i t .
Je no puis que join tlre in es
‘
f'
elicit at ions aux vetrcs c t. enc0 1 e cst - cc lc temps d’
appliqner l’
ax iome l i tterai r e : g l issez, n
’
appnyez pas ; car on est i c i en presence ( l’
une t ces ra res modest ies qui n’
a. ( l 'ega le
que lo mé r i te d c ce lui qui la p(JSsetlc .
C’
est,au res te
,lo p r iv i lege dc la. ver i table sc ien ce dc s igno r e r so i—meme .
Quand les reun ions la Societé Royale n’
o tt'
riraien t pas d’
aut re avan tage que ce lui dc n ous mett reeh r elat ion avec de tel les natu r es
,cc se ra i t deja nn motif sufiisant pou r nous les fai r e appt
'
e’
cier et
nous y r end re fideles .
Lo r sque les é t r ange r s v isi ten t n ot r e pays , i l s s’
etonnen t clc vo i r le sincer e et pr ofond attachement(les Canad ien s -francais pou r la. couronne d Angle terrc . C
’
es t que: de tout temps (lepnis la cess i on deCanada, i l s on t etc on con tac t avec d c semblab les ca rac teres . Chacnn de ces d ignes r epr é sentan ts de laG rande-B retagne est desen a comme uh an neau de cette chatnc q ui n ous tien t attaches a not r e seconde
pat r ie i Vous av cz nommé , avan t que j e von s les men t ionne, les plus illttst res d’
en t r e eux : les
D o r ches te r,les Gosfo r d , les E lg in , e t
'
Jclans un la ng pl us modeste , les Ne i lson , les Baldwin , sans pa r le r
des v ivan ts . C’
es t a leu r ecele que nos generat i on s o n t appr i s a connai t re le gen ie angla is , et , en loconnaissan t, al
’
admircr ; el les l’on t é tud ié et el les on t tach é tle s’
approPrier su r tout cc qui lo d istingueJ
éminemmen t : la p ratique de la v raie l i berté et l'u. age da selrlgouermnent , sou r ce d c tant d c progres.
E l les che r chen t auj ourd’
h t t i as in i t le r , aus s i b ien que leur s inodelcs,ala sc i ence (les afi
’
aires ; el les sevo ient meme dans l ’aven i r p r end re pa r t 51 cos hautes speculat ions q ui emb rassen t le monde en t ie r .
11 y a ( leux s iecles 11 11 de n os plus celeb res pionn ie rs , Cav elier de La Sal le , rev ait (l’
é tablir nn
comme r ce avec la Ch ine eh 5 0 f'
rayan t un passage a t rave r s les solitncles da Norcl-Ouest . Cc passageest ouve r t auj on rtl
’
hni on pen t se r end r e par lo Paeitique canatlien ,en passan t par Lach ine, p res cle
Mon t real, jusqu
’
au Celeste Empi r e . Ne sommes- nons pas autori sé s a espé re r pou r nos nev et t x la
seconde pa r t ie da reve en trevu par La Sa l le ?
A quo i n e peut-on pas flSl'
Ol‘
quantlon l'
ai t pa r t ie «t un empi re sur leqnello sole i l no so couch e
jamaisMats
,treve a ces rev cs (l
'
amb it ion plus on me in s ch imé r iques ; j e me con t en te d c cons tate r queles r appo r ts de la SocieteRoya le son t lus an Jape n, en Aus t ral
’
i e,en meme temps q t t
’
en E ur ope et eu
Amé rique .
D’ i c i a cc qn
’
on a r r ive -‘
t d'
at t t res J'esulta ts
,iles t in té ressan t (lC suiv r e 10 double couran t d’
idées
qui se fai t jour a t ravers tla co l lec tion (les Rappo rts de la Soc ieté Reyale . Je ne sn is pas eh mesu redc juge r tlu mouvemen t sc ien t ifiqne q ui s
’
v man i festo ; auss i me. bo r nera i -j e a é tud ie r les tlellX section sr ése r vé es aux le t t res.
11 y au ra i t unc «Etude ala fo is ph i los oph ique e t l i tté rai re t res cu r ieuse a f ai re
,en examinan t les
PROCEED INGS FOR 1889 . XXXII I
t ravaux de ces ( leux secti on s : deux gé n ies nat ionaux , represen tees par deux langues difiél'
eli tes,y
son t eu presence e t pré ten t ad’
ingén ieuses compa raison s . Ilf‘aud ra i t i ci avoi r la plume de Plutarque
pou r fai r e ce pa ral lele . Quand on songe su r tout aux t rai ts (le r essemblan ce qu’i l y a en t r e nos deuxraces et cel l os t l es Gr ees e t des Remai n s
,on se pren t
'lapen se r que le v ie i l auteu r au ra i t a i tue é c r i r ece pa ral lele. Ilne manque rai t pas d
’
en r ema rque r un des t rai ts les plus pi quan ts : ce lui de voi r cesdet tx races t ranspo r tées sous t
'l’autres c ieux clans une r e’g ion nouvel le, bien é lo ignée de cel le on e l leson t pr is leu r o r ig ine, et s
’
y t r ouvan t toutes deux (le nouveau en presence . Illes mon t re rai t luttan td
’
abord l ’epee ala main ,l ’une cen t r e l ’aut r e
, pui s se r écon c i l ian t et se l iv ran t de nos jou r s ades luttes
pac ifiqnes sur le te r ra in de la c iv i l i sation et da progres.
Quel spectacle plus d igne de la pensée d’
un ph i l osophe ? llt'
erai t voi r que, clan s lll1 s iec le delumier e comme lo not r e
,les pr éjugés d
’
un aut r e age n’
on t plus leu r ra i sen d’
et r e, que l
’
harmon ie e t
l’
enten te co rd iales sen t compat i b les avec les d ive rgences t‘
l’opin ion , que, pa r venus a ces sommets (lol’in t elligenee et de la libe i t é
,les peuples do iven t etre comme ces hautes c imes qui domi nen t les
nuages , et ga r de r toujou r s comme el les le calme et la sé r én i té .
Vous se r iez les pr em ie r s asou r i r e s i j e prononeais le met de chefs -d ’
oeuv r e eu pa rlan t de nos t ravauxl i tté rai r es et h isto r iques ilne peut gnére et r e ques ti on que d
’
essais,mais en l isan t ces essai s si ( l i ve r s
de natu r e et de valeu r , on n’
a pas l’
impression de la banal i té on épronve, au con t rai r e, cc j e no sais
quo i dc frai s et de séduisan t qn’
inspire le pr in temps en la jeunesse, c t qui vous met sur leslev res cettes t r ophe i tal ienne, Ei an cienne e t toujou r s nouve l le
Oh pr imave ra gioventu del l’ anno.
Oh gioventu pr imave ra del la vita.
C’
est que lque chose qui r essemble a l’o iseau apei ne so r ti da n id , on a l ‘en fan t
,en co r e vo is in de son
be r ceau , qui se sen t heu r eux de Vi v re .
D a momen t que l’on compa re les t ravaux do la sect ion anglaise avec eeux de la section f'rangaise,
on sai s i t snr le fai t les apt i tudes part iculieres aux tleux races .
Ne r ema r quez-vous pas , eu effet,chez n os auteu rs ang lais une tou r nu r e d ’
espr i t plus sé r ieuse, une
preferen ce ma r quee pou r les sujets uti les ? La poé s ie ch ez eux b r i l le par son absence. Ilse g l issememe pa r m i leu r s essais des é tudes ph i l olog iques et eth no log iques. Oh sen t un peuple qui, tout eus
’
occupant volon t ie rs da passe, préfére évidemmen t le presen t, e t qui a fai t son ch oi x en t re le reveet la r éal i té .
Tout aut re est la phys i onom ie de la section r ivale . La pen te natu r el le de l’esprit frangais estv i s i ble ala s imple lectu re da sommai re cles é tudes cho is ies par les é c r ivains la pa r t fa i te al
’
idéalest
excess ive,da moi n s le parai trait -el le aux yeux de la c r i tique mode rne sur les so ixan te-deux a r t ic les
con tenus dan s les c inq pr emie r s rappo r ts de la soc ié té , on ne compte pas moin s de v ingt-six piecesde poés ie : épitres, poemes, chan son s , fables ou comed ies .
Oh d i t que les muses son t n ées sous les t iedes cl imats , mai s en presen ce de tan t d’
élans poé ti ques,on se rai t ten té de c r o i r e qu ’
e l les on t dése r té le Pa rnasse,et qu
’ i l faut d éso rmais les che r che r sur nos
fr o ides Lau ren tides . On songe aux mé tamo rphoses d’
Ov ide,et on se demande s i les immo r tel les soeu r s
n’
on t pas p r i s la fo r me de nos oiseaux de neige .
Je ne f’
ais pas i c i de la c r i tique, j’
analyse une s i tuat ion . Cette analyse pou r rai t et re poussée pluslo in, mais devan t un aud i toi re comme lo vot r e, on ind ique, on n
’
insiste pas.
Je te r m ine par une réfiex ion qui s’
impose apres l’
examen des Rappo r ts de la Soeié t é , soi t au poin tcle v ue scien t ifique, soi t an po in t cle v ue h is to r i que ou l i tté rai re : c ’
est que la Soc ié té Royale, toute
jeune qu’
el le est , a assez vécu pou r mett r e he r s de doute la raison de son existence .
A t the con c lusi on of the V i ce-Pr esiden t ’s add ress,a vote of thanks was fo r mal ly moved to His
E xcel len cy fo r hav ing g iven t he Soc iety the benefit of h is presence on th is occas ion . The meet ingthen adjourned un t i l Th ur sday
,at 10 o ’clock a .m . ,
fo r the t ransact ion of gene ral business, wh i le the
membe rs in the mean time wen t to wo r k in thei r r espective Sec tions .
Proc. 1889 . E .
XXXIV ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA .
SESSION I I I . (May 9 th.)
The membe r s of the Soc iety assembled at 10 o’c lock a m ,and the P residen t cal led the meeting
to o r de r .
REPORTS FROM AFF IL IATE D SOC IE TIE S (Continued)
The Societies wh i ch had no t h i th e r to r epo r ted , p r esented the follow ing repo r ts
X .— F r om The L iterary and Histor icalSociety of Quebec, th r ough Mr . WILL IAM W0 0 1) .
The repo r t wh ich I have the hono r to subm i t th is yea r i s more encourag ing th an that of last
The Pr ov inc ialGove r nmen t has again g iven an annua l g ran t, th i s t ime of $500 , wh ich enables
t he Soc iety to fulfilone of i ts most impo r tan t funct ions, t he publ i cation of its Transact ions and ofo r ig ina l documen ts.
The membe r sh ip has been sl igh t ly inc reased . The ac ti ve membe rsh ip is 190 . His E xcel len cy
the Gove r n o r-Gene ralhas accepted the pat r onsh ip of the Society .
The'
Librarian’
s r epo r t shows an inc r ease of 45 1 volumes du r ing 1888 . Among t he most valuab leof these are the r epo r ts of the Gove rnmen t Geo log ica l and ArchaelogicalSu r veys of Ind ia, wh ich we r eobtained th r ough the k indness of the Ma rquis of D uffe r in . Th i r ty-e igh t vo lumes of MSS . we r edel ive r ed to the Pr ov inc ial Gove rnmen t, t he Soc iety bei ng satisfied that i t was on ly the custod ian
,
not the owne r of them . The re we re among them t en vo lumes of o r ig i nal pape rs— mat ieres c r im in
e l les, c ivi les, de po l i ce, de v oieries— extend ing fr om 1 665 to 175 9 . The to tal numbe r of vo lumes inthe lib ra r y at p r esen t is about of wh ich about we r e taken out i n the yea r .
D u r ing t he win te r the re we re fiv e lec tur es del i ve red to ve r y fair aud iences
1 . The Me r chan t of Ven i ce,by t he Ve r y Rev . D ean No r man
,D .D . ,
D .C.L .
2 . Pre-Columbian D i scove r ies of Ame r i ca, by J. E . Pr owe r .
3 . John Keats, by Wi l l iam Wood .
4 . Impe r ial Fede rati on , by Casim i r D ickson .
5 . The Moon and the Weathe r,by W. A . Ashe
,
the Annual Meeting in Janua r y of th is yea r , t he fol low ing we r e elec ted to office
Pres iden t Geo rge Stewa r t, D .L it .,
C. Tessie r .
V ice-Pres iden ts .
W' HOSSM IL
J. M. Ha rpe r , Ph .D .,
D ean No r man,D .D .
,D .C.L .
Treasu r e r . E . Pope.
Lib ra r ian F . C. Wurt ele.
Reco r d ing Sec reta r y J. E . Pr owe r .Co r r espond ing Sec retar y W . A . Ashe
,
Coun c i l Sec r eta r y A . Robe r tson .
Cu rato r of Museum . . W . Cl in t.Cu rato r of Appa ratus Wi l l iam Wood .
J. M. LeMoine.
Add i t i onalMembe r s of Couneil ACampbel l .
H M. Pr ice.
P. Johnson.
XXXVI ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA .
These Lec tu res we r e wel l attended,and exc i ted deep in te r es t among those con ce r ned w ith the
subjects of wh ich th ey t reated .
In add i ti on to th i s Cou r se of Lectu res,the Soc iety h eld a Conve r saz ione on Feb rua r y 28 th ,
unde rt he d istingui shed pat r onage ofH is E xce l len cy t he Gove r no r -Geueraland Lady Stan ley, who g raced i tw i th the i r p resence . A bout 400 guests attend ed the Conve r saz ion e, wh i ch thus became a mean s ofspread ing a taste fo r scien t ific knowledge and r esea r ch . The Museum was th r ow n open o n the occasi on
,and the Soc iety had the k ind coope rat ion of
“
the membe r s of t he Mic r oscopi cal Society , whoexh ibi ted spec imens of g reat in te r es t .The Soc iety al so h eld two field days
,excu r s i on s to t he coun t ry
, one i n the ea r ly summe r and the
othe r i n t he autumn,on wh ich they we re accompan i ed by many f r iends , especial ly those who are in
t imately con nec ted w i th t he educational i nsti tut ions of the c i ty, among whom the Soc iety con s ide r s i toi
“
g reat impo r tance to pr omote scien t ific tastes .D u r ing the past yea r a numbe r of al te r at ions and imp r ovemen ts we re made in the Museum
,
wh ich i s unde r the ca r e of Mr . J . S. B r own, g r eat ly in c r easing t he accommodat i on
,and enabl ing the
Soc iety to d isplay i ts valuable spec imens to bette r advan tage.
The r e we r e nume r ous donations to the Museum,but th ose most wo r thy of n o te we r e t he
fol low ing
1 . A ve ry fin e spec imen of sea-basket,Astrophyton Agassz
’
z ii l ocal i ty,Lab rado r ; dono r , J. S .
Shear e r .2 . A Spec imen of Balanus Hamen
’
d iscove r ed at R ive r Beaudette ,P.Q.
,by Mess r s . H . G. S tan ton
,
GE,and A . W. McNown .
3 . Whi te Ch ipmunk , Tamz’
as striatus ; l ocal ity , Hun t i ngdon Co.,P.Q. ; dono r , W. H . Ri n toul .
4 . A magn ificent spec imen of the Woodland Ca r i bou, p resen ted to the Society by \V. C. VanHo r ne.
A la rge amoun t of wo r k was done amongs t the spec imens, nea r ly allth ose in the uppe r ga l le ryhav i ng been r ea r ranged , co r r ec tly named , and relabeled . The la rge co l lection fr om the SamoanIslands
, pr esen ted last yea r , has been appr opr iately placed , t he whole pr esen t ing a ve ry at t rac ti veappea ran ce. A new in te rest has been awakened i n t he Museum among the c i t izen s and st range r sv i s i ting the c ity, as is ev in ced by the la rge numbe r of pe r son s adm i tted to i n spec t i ts con ten ts , in1 88 8— an inc rease of 30 0 per cen t . upon the pr ev i ous yea r . Neve r has t he re been a yea r i n the h is to ryof the Society i n wh ich so many sch ola rs and s tuden ts have t aken advan tage of the pr iv i leges of theMuseum as du r ing the yea r now cl osed . I n th ese c i r cumstan ces
,the Soc iety unan i mous ly r esol ved to
i nv i te t he pupi l s and studen ts attend ing the va r ious sch ool s and col leges of the c i ty to v i s i t th ei rMuseum eve ry Satu r day
,fr ee of cha rge, wh en accompan ied by a teache r . I n th is way ,
i t is hopedthat the educat ional influence of the Soc iety w i l l b e g r eat ly ex tended .
The L i b ra ry,wh ich i s unde r the ca r e ofMr . E . T. Chambe r s
,con tains upwa r d s of volumes ,
many of wh i ch are ra r e,and are to b e found i n no o the r l i b ra ry i n Canada.
D u r ing the yea r fou r numbe r s of The Canad ian Reco r d of Sc ien ce’ we re issued by a commi ttee
of the Soc iety,in wh ich the d iscove r ies and obse r vat ions made by membe rs have been publ ished , and
thus prese r ved and put w ith in the r each of futur e s tuden ts of sc ience.
The r e we re th i r ty-e igh t add i ti ons to t he membe r sh ip du r i ng t he past year, b r ing ing up the num
b er now on t he l i s t to 264 . The on ly sou r ces of in come possessed by the Soc iety, bes ides the fees ofmembe r s
,i s t he r en tal de r i ved f r om the hal l and o th e r po r tion s of the i r bu i ld ings . The Gove rnmen t
of the Pr ov in ce ofQuebec has, h oweve r , made a g ran t to the Soc iety o f $40 0 , and th is t ime ly donat i onhas enabled i t to ca r ry on i ts wo r k i n the modes t manne r that cha racte r izes i t .The Royal Soc iety
,as the pat r on oi
‘
the Scien ce as wel l as of the L i te ratu r e of the Dom in i on,may
b e d isposed to l i sten patien tly to these detai l s r ega r d ing the wo r k of oneof the oldest of t he Soc ietiesto wh ich i t has been pleased to extend it s coun tenance. The Natu ral H isto ry Soc iety of Mon t r eal is
PROCEED I NGS FOR 1889 .XXXVII
doing its sha r e in p r omoting the advance of knowledge in Canada. I t i s a hopeful sign when mer
chan ts and manufactu re r s pause i n the midst of the i r pu r sui t of gain to occupy themse lves w i th the
wholesome task of s tudy ing God’
s wo r ks i n natu r e, by the help of the m ic r oscope o r c ruc i ble . Th isi s no uncommon phenomenon i n Mon t real , and to the Natu ral Hi s to ry Soc ie ty a la rge sha re of t he
c red i t is duo of foste r ing so en l igh tened a taste ; wh i le the success of t he Soc ie ty i tself i s , i n tu rn ,la rge ly due to the hea r ty coope rati on and countenance of the scien t ific expe r ts be long ing to t he staffofMcGillUn i ve r s i ty . The field fo r obse r vation and invest igat ion pr esen ted by our coun t ry is la rgeand va r ied ; but t he band of scien t ific expl o r e rs i s s t i l l v e r y l im i ted . This, howeve r , i s a state ofth ings wh ich may be expected eve r y yea r to impr ove, and the Royal Soc iety , whose fun c tion i t is totake the lead in allmatte r s pe r tain ing to t he p r og r ess of knowledge i n t he D omi n i on , may , in retur nfo r its coun tenan ce and en cou ragemen t, coun t upon the con t inued zea l and ea r nestness of t he Natu ral
H i sto ry Society ofMon t real,i n advanc ing that spec ial depa r tmen t of knowledge wi th wh ich its name
i s assoc iated .
I t i s unde rstood that the quest ion of ho ld ing t he meet ings of the Royal Soc iety i n d iffe ren t pa r tsof t he D omin i on i s moo ted . If i t shal l be th ough t advan tageous to assemb le occas ional ly el sewhe r ethan at the Capital , I fee l that I may take i t upon me to say , that should i t be you r pleasur e to fix
upon Mon t r eal as you r nex t place of meeting , the Soc iety wh i ch I have the hono r to r epr esen t h e r eto-day wi l l extend to you a co rd ial wel come, and I am su r e I may say al so on beha lf of t he o the raffiliat ed soc iet ies, t hat they w i l l joi n hea r t i ly in the endeavou r to make your stay in the c i ty pleasan tand profitable.
XII .
— F r om The NaturalH istory Society of New Brunswick, th r ough PROF . BAILEY .
I have the hono r to'
r epo r t, on behalf of the Natu ral H is to ry Soc iety of’
New B runswick,that i n
Janua ry, 1889 , the Soc iety completed the twen ty~sev en th yea r of its exis tence,unde r the p res idency of
Mr. G. F . Matthew,appoin ted in successi on to the late D r . LeB . Botsfo r d
,who fo r a numbe r of yea rs
pas t has hono rab ly occupied t he presiden t ialchai r .Dur ing the yea r now closed the Society has made a fai r deg ree oi
'
p r og ress, and has been ass is tedby the usual g ran t fr om the Pr ov inc ial Leg i slatu r e . Consi de rable add i ti ons have been made to thel i b ra r y by donat ion s
,by pu r chase, and by exchange of publ i cat ion s ; among them the re i s a donation
of books on E ng l ish archseology , p r esented by the coadjuto r B i sh op, the Righ t-Rev . D r. K ingdon .
The museum also has r ece ived con s ide rable accessions du r ing the pas t yea r , and affo r d s a sou r ceof pleasu re and inst ruct ion to nume r ous v is i to r s .
N ine r egula r m eetings have been held dur ing t he pas t yea r , at wh ich the fol low ing pape r s we r e
E ch inode r mata of New B run sw i ck,by W. F . Ganong .
Oyste r beds of New B run sw ick,by Rev . H. W . Winkley .
D oes our Ind igenous F lo ra g i ve Ev iden ce of a recen t Change Cl imate ?V r oom.
The Hab i ts of B i r ds,by M. Chambe r la in .
H i s to ry of Fossi l Plan ts,by G. F . Matthew .
Weeds,by G. U . Hay .
Me teo r o log i cal Inst r umen ts and the i r Uses, by W. F . Bes t.Ea r l iest D en izen s of t he Land and A ir
,by G. F . Matth ew .
Z oolog ical no tes , by W. F . Ganong .
Some Cha racte r ist i cs of‘Mol luscs, by G. F. Mat thew .
XXXVII I ROYAL SOCIETY OF CAN ADA .
A se r ies of elemen ta r y l ectures i n natu ralh i s to ry, et c .
,spec ial ly designed fo r inst ruction of
teache rs,was g i ven i n t he cou rse of the win te r , and was wel l attended .
The Society took advan tage of“
the pr esen ce he r e du r ing the summe r of Sir Wm. D awson,to
tende r h im a r eception . Th is was due to h im not on ly on accoun t of the emi nen t pos i ti on wh ich hehas attained in th e sc ien t ifi c wo rld
,but al so because b e
,many yea r s ago, sugges ted t he fo rmat ion of
t he Natu ral H isto r y Soc ie ty o f New B runswick,of wh ich he was the first h ono ra ry membe r . On
th i s occas ion a ve ry pleasan t and enjoyable hou r was Spen t by t he membe rs of t he Soc iety and
the i r guests .
The Seven th An nual Bul let in of the Soc iety (wh i ch accompan ies th is r epo r t) contain s Mr. Gan ong’
s
pape r on th e E ch inode r mata of New B run sw ick and t he pape rs r ead by Mess r s . Wi nkley and V r oom .
I t al so con ta ins a h isto r i cal sketch of t he Soc iety fr om the pen of our late pres iden t, D r. LeB . Bo tsf‘o r d
X III .
—F r om The Society for H istoricalS tudies, Montreal, th r ough Mr. J P. E DWARD S .
Ou behal f of the Soc iety fo r H i s to r i cal Stud ies ofMon t real , I have the hono r to repo r t that dur ingt he pas t season r egula r meet ings of the Soc ie ty have been held , and its membe r sh iphas shown a steadyin c rease. The pape r s r ead have, with one
'
except ion , been devoted to Canad ian h isto ry and bi og raphy ;they compr ise
1888 . Nov . 2 1 . The Fami ly Compact , by Mr. John Fa i r , Jun .
D ec. 5 . Canad ian H i s t o r ies,by Mr. John Reade.
19 . Ma rquette, by Mr . John L espe ran ce.
188 9 . Jan . 30 . Ea r ly Leg i s lat i ve Pr oceed ings in Canada, by Mr . R . C. Smith .
Feb . 13 . Sir James Kempt, by Mr. W. W. L . Ch ipman .
2 7 . The Psych ol ogy ofReal ism in r ecen t F r ench F i ct ion , by Mr. Thos . McDougall.
Ma r ch 13 . The Battle of Chateauguay, by Mr . W D . L igh thal l .2 7 . S idel igh ts i n Canad ian h is to r y , by Mx . Hen ry Mott.
Apr i l 24 . The Jesui ts Estates in Canada, by Mr. R . S . Wh i te, M. P.
The wan t of a publ i cation connected w ith the Soc iety has l ong been fel t, but I am happy tor epo r t that th is has been r emed ied by our V i ce-Pr es iden t
,Mr . W . J. Wh ite
,who commenced in Jan
ua ry last a mon th ly magaz ine cal led‘Canad iana
,
’ devoted exclus i vely to Canad ian h isto ry,and
iden t ified w i th the in te r ests of th is Society .
I may be pe r m i t ted to state that spec ial atten t ion is be ing g iven by many of our membe r s to theacqui s i t i on of r a r e books, lette r s, etc .
,bea r ing on the ea r ly h is to ry of th is coun t ry
,and that du r ing
t he past season many such have been added to the i r co l lect ions ; these w i l l bea r fr ui t in comingpape r s. To a la rge deg ree th is is due to the inte r est in Canad ian h isto r i cal matte rs awakened byth is and sim i la r soc iet ies .
XIV.—F r om The Nova S cotia HistoricalSociety, th r ough Mr. J. M. OXLEY.
L ist of pape rs r ead befo r e th is Soc iety dur i ng t he season of 1888—9
1 888 . N 0 17 . Pic tog raphs on Books at Fai r y Lake, by Geo rge Cr eed .
D ec . 20 . The No r thwest Te r r i to ry and Red R ive r E xped i tion , by L t .-Col. Geo rge Waine
w r igh t .188 9 . Jan . 15 . E a r ly Settle rs of Sunbury Coun ty, by Jas. Hannay.
Ma r ch 12 . Memoi r of Gove rno r Paul Masca r ene, by J M. Hubba r d .
Ap r i l 19 . Fables andTrad i t ions of the Mi cmac I nd ians, by Rev . S . T. Rand .
PROCEED INGS FOR 188 9 . XXXIX
XV .
— From The Hamilton Association, Hamilton,Ont
,th r ough Mr. JAME S FLETCHER .
The Session just clos ing has been ,on the whole, a successful one, whethe r the cha racte r of the
wo r k done,o r the in te r es t of t he membe rs the re i n
,be con s ide red .
Six gene ra l meetings of t he Assoc iation have been he ld dur ing the season , at wh ich the fol lowing
pape rs we re read
The H i tt i tes,by t he Pr es iden t, Rev . Samue l Lyle
,B .D .
Notes on Pr im i t ive Man,by Mr. Wil l iam Kennedy .
N o tes on the Wave r ley N ovel s, (Pa r t. II ) , by Rev . C. H . Mockridge, D .D .
H i s to ry ofPo tte r y and Ce ram ic Art,by S. J. I re land
,Pr inc ipal of the Hami l ton Art Schoo l .
Selenog raphy , w i th ph otog raph ic i l lust rat ions of the Moon’s Su r face
,by Mr. H . B. Wi l ton .
N otes o n the L ingulae of the Si lu r ian Rocks, by Col. 0 . 0 . G ran t .N otes on the Or ig in of Che r t ( F l in t) in our local N iaga ra Rocks , by Col. 0 . C. G ran t .
I n add i tion to these meet ings the B iolog i cal Section has he ld b i-mon th ly meetings, and has donea conside rab le amoun t of field-wo rk .
In Botany,th i s Sec tion is engaged in getting togethe r a complete co l lection to r ep resen t the
F lo ra of the d ist r i c t. A l ready six plan ts have been n oted wh i ch have not been in cluded in any pre
v iously publ ished l ist of the Fl o ra Hamilt onensis .
I n En tomology, Mr. J. A ls ton Mofi‘
at r epo r ts that du r ing the past season he has found twen ty-fiv espec imens new to h im ,
and some of them possi b ly new to Canada.
I n Con chology , Mr. A . W. Hanham has don e excel len t wo r k i n the col lection of s ixty-fou r spec iesof shells
,one of whi ch Pomat z
’
opsz'
s lapidaria , is a te r r es t r ial spec imen of a fr esh wate r genus new tothe D om in ion .
The fol low ing pape rs, some of wh ich w i l l be p r in ted in ful l in the Transactions of the Soc iety ,we r e r ead befo r e the Sect ion
1 . Is Spec ies a Natural o r an Art ificialD i v ision i n Natu re by Mr . J. A l s ton Mofl‘
at .
2 . Notes of aTr ip to the West Ind ies,by Mr . B. E . Char l ton .
3 . The Lake E r ie Sho r e as a Botan iz ing F ield , by Mr. T. J. W . Bu rgess, M.E .
,F .R S C.
4 . Notes of aTr ip t o South Ca r ol ina, in Feb r ua ry, 1889 , by Mr. T. W. Reynolds, MD .
5 . Plan t Colo r,by Mr. A . A lexande r .
6 . The Land and F r esh Wate r Shel ls of the Hami l ton D ist r i c t,by Mr. A . W. Hanham .
Many valuable notes on B iolog i ca l subjects have been con t r i buted by Mr.Wm. Yates, ofHatch ley,
Out,a com'
esponding membe r of the A ssoc iati on , g iv ing ev iden ce of much o r ig ina l though t and cl oseand minute invest igat ion .
Th i r teen new membe rs have been added to the r o l l du r ing the sess ion , mak ing the presen t mem
he rsh ip 1 53 .
Many valuable add i tions to the Museum and L i b ra ry have been made .
As t he AnnualGene ral Meeting is not held unt ilthe second Thu rsday in May the l i s t of Officersfo r the ensu ing yea r , w i th s tatemen t of r ece ipts and expend i tu r e, can no t be fur n i shed , but wi l l be fo rwa r ded to the Sec r eta ry of you r Hon ou rable Body as soon as the e lections take place, fo r in co rpo rationi n our repo r t.
XL ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA .
REPORTS or SECTIONS .
The Sec reta r ies of t he fou r Sect ions then in due o rde r p resen ted the i r Repo r ts, as fo l lows
Rapport de la Section I .
Nous avons l’honneur de vous presen te r le rappo r t su ivan t'
Onze memb r es on t assit é aux séanees (les 7 , 8 et 9 de ce mois . 11 a é té 111 hui t é tudes, et plusieu rsd iscuss ion s sur des mat ieres h is to r iques e t l i tté ra i r es on t occupé les memb r es .
Nos elect ions on t eu le r ésul tat qui su i t
President , JOS EPH
Vz’
ce-Présiden t,NAPOLEON LEGE ND RE .
Secre’
taz’
re, ALPHONSE LUSIGNAN .
La section r ecommande qu’ i l so i t acco r dé un d iplome d’
honneur aM. Edmond La reau,depute,
pou r ses t ravaux h is to r iques du ran t l’
annee 1 889 .
Le tout r espectueusemen t soumis.
A . LUS IGNAN, prészdent .
BENJAM IN SULTE,secrétaire.
Report of Section 1 1 .
I have the h onou r to repo r t that Sec tion II has e lec ted as ofifiee-bea re r s fo r the en suing yea r
JOHN WATSON,M.A . ,
LL .D .
,President .
GEORGE STEWART, Jun .,
LL .D .,D . L i tt
, Vice-President .J CLARK MURRAY
,LL .D .
,Secretary.
The comm i ttee on pub l i cat ions is composed of Ve ry Rev . Pr in c ipal G ran t, D D , and D r . Geo rge
Stewa r t.The fol low ing pape r s we re r ead
I . Ou the S tudy ofPo li t ical Sc ience in Canad ian U n ive r s i t ies. By J. G. BOURINOT,LL .D .
11 . Trade and Comme r ce i n t he Stone Ages . By Sir D AN IE L WI L SON , LL .D .
III . The H isto r i cal I nfluence of Physical Geog raphy . By the Same.
IV . The Ca r tog raphy oi'
the Gu lf of St . Law r ence , fr om Ca r tie r to Champlain . By W . F .
GANONG, M.A . ( Submi tted by D R. STEWART. )V. Exped i ti ons to the Pacific . By SAND FORD FLEMING, LL .D .
Excuses fo r non -at tendan ce we re r ece i ved fr om D r . Watson , and Mess r s . Geo. Mu r ray,Joh n
Lespe rance and John Reade .
GEORGE STEWART,Jun ., Secreta ry.
Report of Section I I I .
The numbe r of membe rs in attendan ce was fou r teen out of a poss i ble n ineteen . The absen t membe r s we r e : Pr of. Cherriman
,Mess r s . C. Baillargé , E . Haanel
,T. S. Hun t, and J. G. McGregor . Oi
‘
these,the first and th r ee last -men t ioned we r e k now n to be absen t fr om unavo idable causes
,and one
of them,Mr. McGregor, con t r i buted two pape rs, leav ing but one whose absence was unexplai ned .
The pape r s laid befo re the Section amounted to eigh teen ; of these the fol low ing we re r ead i nful l
,in abst ract
,o r by ti tle
PROCEED INGS FOR 1889 . XLI
I . Tr i l in ea r coo r d inates on t he Sphe r e and Obl ique Coo r d inates iu Geomet ry of Th r eeD imen s ion s . By PROF . AL EXANDE R JOHNSON
,LL .D .
II . Ou the Expan s ion of Sin 0 ,Cos O.
,andTan Without the U se
“ of L im i ts. By PROF .
N . F . D UPUI S,MA .
I I I . Ou the E xpan s ion of An; Wi thout t he U se of L i mi ts . By PROF . N . F . D UPUIS,M.A .
IV. On the Expr ess ion of the Gene ra l Be r noul l ian Numbe r as a Combinat ional Dete r m inan t .By PROF . N . F . D UPUI S
JM.A .
V. On an E lemen ta r y Way of Obta in i ng t he D isc r im i nan t of the Gen e ral Quad rat ic . By
PROF . N F . D UPUIS,M.A .
VI . On the Shea r ing Fo r ces and Bending Movemen ts Pr oduced at the D iffe ren t Po in ts of theCh o rds of
’
a B r idge Tr uss by the Passage of an A r bi t ra r i ]y D i s t r ibuted L ive Load . ByPROF . H T. BOVEY
,M.A .
,OE .
VI I . On the Va r iat ion of the D en s i ty w ith the Con cen t ration of Weak Aqueous Solut ion s ofCe r tai n Sal ts . By
‘
PRoF . J . G. MCGRE GOR,M.A .
,
VIII . Oh the Con t ract ion of Weak Aqueous Solut ions of Ce r ta in Sulphates. By PROF . J. G.
MCGRE GOR,M.A .
,
IX . A P r ob lem i n Po l i ti cal Science. B v SAN D FORD FLE MIN G, CE .
X . An notated L ist ofMine ral s Occu r r ing i n Canada. By G. C. HOFFMANN,F .Inst . Chem .
XI . Ou the Hyg r oscopi c i ty of Ce r ta in Canad ian Foss i l Fuel s . By G. C. HOFFMANN,F.In s t
.
Chem .
XII . Refraction Through'
a Pr ism . By PROF . J . LOUDON, MA .
XIII . Relation s Between t he Sum of t he Mom en ts (G) and the V i r ial V) of a Set of Coplana rFo r ces befo r e and afte r Rotat ion th r ough an Ang le 0 . By PROF . J. LOUD ON
,M.A .
X IV. Rec ipr ocal L in es of Fo r ce . By PROF . J. LOUD ON,M.A .
XV . On a Nat ionalStanda r d of Pi tch . By PROF. J. LOUDON,M.A.
XVI . Oh Some Unexplai ned Anomal ies in the FlameoReact ions of ce r tain Mine rals and Ch emica lBod ies . By PROF . E . J. CHAPMAN
,Ph . D .
,LLD .
XVII . Oh a G raph i c Const ructi on fo r Occul tations and E c l ipses. By PROF . N . F . D UPU1s,M.A.
The fol l owing resolut ion s we re adopted
I t was moved by Pr of. A . John son,LL .D .
,seconded by D r . G. P. Gi r dwood
,and ca r r ied That
th i s Sect ion i s of opin i on that i t i s desi r able that a Conve rsaz ion e be held on the first even ing of'
each
An nual Meet ing , at wh ich the r e may b e an exh ib i tion of sc ien t ific appa ratus and objects of in te r es t i nconueegon wi th the wo rk of the Society .
”
I t was moved by Pr of. A . Johnson,LL .D .
,second ed by Mr. F . N . Gisbo r ne
,and ca r r ied That a
r ecomme ndat ion b e submi tted to t he Society,that t he fo l l ow ing b e appoi n ted a commi ttee to suppo r t
and con t inue t he act ion in i t iated by t he B r i t i sh A ssoc iati on fo r the pr omotion ofTida l Obse r vat ions inCanad ian wate rs : Mr. Sandfo r d F lem ing ,
Pr es id en t ; Sir Wi l l iam Dawson,Sir James G ran t
,
Mr . C. Carpmael, Pr of. H . T. Bovey, Mr . E . D ev i l le and Pr of. A . Joh nson,with powe r to add to th e i r
numbe r .”
The con s ide ration of the e lection of a n ew membe r,r efe r r ed back fr om the Gene ral Meet ing to
t he-Section,r esul ted i n i ts be ing moved by Mr. F . N . Gisbo r ne
,seconded b y Mr . T. Macfa r lan e
,and
ca r r ied “ That th i s Sect ion i s of opin i on that the election fo r t he pr esen t vacan cy be commen cedde novo.
The officers elected fo r the ensuing Session we re
SAND FORD FLEMI NG C.E . ,President.
MONS IGN OR T. E . HAMEL,M.A . , Vz
'
ce-Preside-nt .G. C. HOFFMANN , F . Ins t . Chem ., Secretary.
(Signed ) SAND FORD FLEMING, c -President .G. C. HOFFMA NN
,Secretary.
Proc. 18 89 . F .
XL I I ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA .
Repor t of Section I V.
The numbe r of membe r s of t he Sec ti on pr esen t was eleven , but two who we re no t able to come
sen t pape rs wh ich we r e duly r ead .
The numbe r of pape r s r ead , e i the r in ful l o r by ti tle, was si x teen .
The elect ion oi‘
officers r esul ted as fo l lows
President,G. M . DAWSON .
Vice—Presz’
dent , PROF . W. SAUNDERS .
Secretary, J F . WHITEAVE S .
I t was reso lved
That the Commi ttee on Publ icat ion be the Reti r ing Pr es iden t, thePr esiden t and V ice-Pr es iden tof the com ing yea r , the Sec r etary, Sir James G ran t, D r. R. Bel l and Pr of. Saunde r s.
”
J. F . WHITEAVE S,Secretary.
E LECTION or OFF ICERS,ETC.
The meeting nex t pr oceeded to the e lec tion of officers fo r the ensui ng yea r , and the fol low ing
gen t lemen we r e unan imously e lec ted
President , ABBE CASGRAI N, LL .D .
Vice-President, PR I NC IPAL GRANT, D D .
Honorary Secreta ry, J. G. Bounmo'
r . LL .D .,D .C.L .
Honorary Treasurer, A . R. SELWYN,LL .D .
,C.M.G.
MI SCE LLANE O US BUSINE SS .
The fol l ow ing resolut ions we re then adopted'
1 . Resolved— That the second pa r ag raph of Rule 5 be amended so as to r ead as fol lows ‘TheCoun c i l of the Soc iety shal l cons ist of the officers so elected
,and of ex—Pr es iden ts
,du r ing th r ee yea r s
fr om the date of thei r r eti remen t fr om the office ofPr es iden t,and of such ex -membe rs of Counc i l
,not
exceed ing fou r i n numbe r , as may be selec ted by the Coun c i l i tself. The ex—membe rs,so eleowd, sha l l
con t inue i n oth ee fo r th r ee yea rs, and afte r wa r d s un t i l successo rs are (On motion ofPr of. John son
,seconded by D r . Stewa r t . )
2 . Resolved— That the matte r of e lec ting the Pr esiden t of the Socie ty fo r a l onge r te r m than oneyea r , as by the p resen t rule, be r efe r r ed fo r con side rat i on to the Coun c i l , who shal l r epo r t the reon at
the nex t gene ral An nual Meeting of t he Soc iety . (On motion of Sir Dan iel Wi l son, seconded byPr inc ipal G ran t .)
3 . Resolved— That the fo l low ing gen tlemen be appoi n ted membe r s of a comm i ttee to suppo r tand con ti nue the acti on in i t iated by the B r i t i sh Association fo r the pr omotion of Tidal Obse r vationsin Canad ian Wate r s — Dr . Sand fo r d F leming , S ir W . Dawson
,S ir James G ran t
,Mr . Carpmael
,Pr of“.
Bovey,Mr . Dev i l le
,Pr of. Joh nson
,w i th powe r to add to the i r numbe r s.
”
(Oh motion of Pr of.Johnson ,
seconded by Mr. Gi sbo r ne.)4 .
“ Resolved— That the fol l owing gen tlemen be appo in ted a delegation to the meeting of theAme r ican Assoc iat i on fo r t he advan cemen t of Sc ience, i n To r on to, on Augus t 26 th next :— Pr of.Laflamme
,D r Se lwyn , Pr of. Bai ley , Mr . W. Saunde r s , and D r . Ha r r ing ton , w i th powe r to add to
thei r numbe r . (Ou motion of D r. Selwyn,seconded by Sir James G ran t . )
5 .
“ Resolved— That the thanks of the Soc iety be tendered to the Speake r s of t he Senate and
TH E ROYA L SOC I ETY OF CA N A D A .
FOUNDER :THE RIGHTHONOURABLE THE MARQUIS OF LORNE .
O F F I C E R S F O R 1 8 8 9 — 9 0
H ON O R A R Y P R E S I D E N T A N D PA TR O N
HIS EXCELLENCYTHE RIGHT'
HONOURABLE THE LORD STANLEYOF PRESTON, G.C.B.
P R E S ID E N T A B E IC: H . R . CA S G R A I N , L L .D .
VIC E - P R E S I D E N T VE R Y R E V. G E O . M . G R A N T,D .D .
E X -PR E S I D E N T S
MONSIGNOR HAMEL,M .A .
G. LAWSON ,PH. D .
,LL.D .
SANDFORD FLEMING,
LL.D .
O F F IC E R S O F S E CTI ON S .
SE C. I .
— French Literature, History , and Allied Subj ects.
PRES ID ENT JOSEPH MARM'
ETTE .
v xm rm m m NAPOLEON LEGENDRE .
SECRETARY A . LUSIGNAN.
SE C. I I .
— E nglz'
sh Literature, History , and Allied Subj ects .
PRES IDENT J WATSON,LL.D.
V ICE-PRES IDENT GEO. STEWART, JUN., D .C.L
SECRETARY REV. J. CLARK MURRAY .
SE C. I I I .
— Mathematical, Physical, and ChemicalScieeiees.
PRESID ENT SANDFORD FLEMI NG,C.M .G.
V ICE-PRESIDENT MONSIGNOR HAMEL.
SECRETARY G. C. HOFFMANN,F . Inst. Chem .
SE C. IV.
— Geolog z°
caland B iologicalSciences.
PRES IDENT G. M. D AWSON,D . Se.
Vx'
cn-PRESID ENT W. SAUNDERS.
SECRETARY J F . WHITEAVES, F.G.S.
HONORARY SECRETARY J. G. BOURI NOT, LL.D .
,D .C.L .
HONORARY TREASURER A. R. C. SELWYN, C.M .G ,
LL.D.
The Counci l for 1889-90 compr ises the Pres ident and V ice-Presiden t of the Society, the Presidents, VicePresidents and Secretaries of Sections, t he Hono ra ry Secreta ry , and the Hono rary Treasure r , bes ides ex-Presidentsof the Society (Rule 7) du r ing th ree yea rs from the date of the i r reti rement.
TH E ROYA L S OC I ETY O F CA NA D A .
L I ST O F M E M B E R S,1 8 8 9 9 0 .
I .— LITTERATURE FRANQAISE ,
HISTOIRE ,ARCHEOLOGIE
,ETC.
BEG IN,s. G. MGR L . N Eveque de Chicoutimi. LEMAY
,PAMPHILE
, Quebec.
CASGRAIN, L’AnnnH .
-R.,LL.D .
, Quebec. LEMOINE , J. M., Québec.
CHAUVEAU, P. J O.,LL.D.
,L.D . ,Monlréal( ex-President) LUSIGNAN, A.
,Ot tawa.
CUOQ, 1211 1313113
,Mont real. MARCHAND , L’
I-ION. F.-G.
,Saint-Jean , P.Q.
DE CAZ ES, PAUL, Quebec. MARME I‘TE,Josnrn
,Ottawa.
DE CELLES,A . D . , Ottawa. ROUTHIER
,A . B.
,LL.D .
, Québec.
FABRE,HECTOR, Pam
'
s, F rance. SULTE , BENJAM IN, Ottawa.
FAUCHER D E SAINT—MAURICE, N., Québec. TANGUAY
,MGR CYPRIE N
,L .D .,
Ottawa.
Fancnnrrn, LoU1s, LL.D .
,Montreal. TAsss
,JOSEPH
,Montreal.
LEGENDRE , NAPOLEON, Québec. VERREAU, L’ABBEHosrten,LL D ., Montreal.
II.— ENGLISH LITERATURE,HISTORY,
ARCHJEOLOGY,ETC.
BonmNor,JOHN GEORGE
,LLD .,
D .C.L,Ottawa. MURRAY, REV. J. CLARK, LL .D .,
McGillUn ive rs i ty,M a t l.
BUCKE , R. MAUR ICE, M .D ., London, 0 .
0 rea
Dawson, a . JENnAs MACDONELL, LL.D Ottawa.
MCCOLL’EVAN
) n ston .
DEN ISON,L'r.
-COL. G. T., Toronto. PATTERSON , REV. GEORGE, D .D .,New Glasgow.
GRANT, VERY REV. G. M .
,D .D .
,Pr incipal of Queen
’s READE:JOHN
»Montreal.
Un iversit K ”rt sty l g on
SM ITH, GOLDW IN, Toronto.
HALE , HORA'I‘
IO, Clin ton .
S G J bKIRBY
,W1LLIAM
,Niaga ra.
TEWART’ EORGE ’
0 “1 Que 60
LESPERANCE , JOHN TM ON, Montreal. WATSON,J M.A .
,LL.D.
, Queen’s Un ive r sity, Kingston .
LYALL , REV.W .
,LL-D .
,Da lhousie Un ive rs ity , Ifalifax . W ILSON , SI R DAN IEL, LL.D .
,F .E .S.E Pres ident Of Un i
MA IR CHARLES Prince Albert N . W. T.
ver sity ofTo ron to, To ronto (ex-Presiden t) .
MURRAY, GEORGE , B.A H igh Sch ool, Mon t real. Wrrnnow, a .W . H.,D .D .
,Toronto.
THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA . XLVII
I II .— MATHEMATICAL
,PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL SCIENCES.
BAI LLARGE,C.
, C.E ., Quebec.
Bovm'
, H . J., M .A., C.E ., McGillUn ive rs ity, Montreal.
CARPMAEL,G.
, of Meteo rologicalSe rvice, Toronto.
CHAPMAN, E . J.,Ph .D .
,LL.D . , Un ive r si ty of To ronto
,
To ron to.
CHERRIMAN , J B .,M.A .
,Ottawa .
D EVILLE, E ,Su rveyo r Gene ral , Ottawa.
DUPU I S,N . F .
,M.A.
, Queen’s Un ive r s i ty ,Kingston .
FLEMING, SANDFORD , LL.D.,C.E .
,Ottawa. (ex
President) .
Gmnwoon ,G. P.
,M.D .
,McGillUn ive r s ity , Montreal.
Grsnonnn, F. N.,
C.E O ttawa.
HAA NEL, E . , Ph .D ., V icto r ia Un ive rs ity , Cobourg.
HAMEL,Monsiesos
,M.A.
,Lava l Un ive rs ity , Quebec
(ex -President) .
HARRINGTON, B . J.
,B .A.
,Ph .D .,
McGillUn ive rs ity ,Mon t real.
HOFFMANN, G. G., F. Inst. Chem .
, Geological Su rvey,Ottawa.
HUNT, T. STERRY , M .A.,LL.D.
, Washington ,
D C. (ex-Pres ident) .
Jons sorz , A.,LL.D.
,McGillUn ive rsity , Montreal.
LOUDON,J T.
, M .A.,Un ive rs ity ofTo ronto, Toronto.
MACFARLANI,T.
,M .E .
,Ottawa.
MACGREGOR, J. G.,M .A .
,D .Sc.
, DalhousieUn ive r s ity , Halifax.
IV.—GEOLOGICAL AND BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES.
BAILEY, L. W.,M.A.,
Ph .D ., Un ive r sity of New B runs
wick,F redericton.
BELL, ROBERT, Geological Survey,Ottawa.
BURGESS,T. J W.,
M.D .,Hamilton .
DAWSON, G. M .
,D .Sc.
,Geological Sur
vey , Ottawa.
DAWSON, Sm J W ILLIAM, C.M G.
, LL .D Pr incipalof McGillUn ivers ity, Montreal(ex-Pres ident) .
FLETCHER,JAMES, the Entomologist, Ottawa.
G1L1>1N. Enwm, M .A .,
I nspecto r of M ines,
GRANT, Sm J. A.,
M.D .,
Ottawa.
LAFLAMME, Anni: J. C. K.,D .D .
,M.A., Lava l Un i
ve rs i ty, Quebec.
LAWSON, G.,Ph .D LL.D .
,Dalhousie Un iversity,Halifax
(ex-President) .
MAOOUN,J M .A.
, Geological Survey , Ottawa.
MATTHEW,G. F ., M.A., St . John , ME .
MACKAY,A . H . , B .A.,
B.Sc .
,Pictou.
PENHALLOW,D . P.
,B.Sc.,
McGillUn iversi ty, Montreal.
PROVANCHER, ABBE, Cap Rouge, Quebec .
SAUND ERS, W .,Di recto r of the Expe r imen tal Fa rm ,
Ottawa.
SELWYN, A . R. C., C.M .G. LL.D.,
Di recto rof the Geological Survey, Ottawa.
Wa n navns, J F.,
Geological Survey, Ottawa.
Wmcn 'r, R. RAMSAY
,M.A.
,B .Sc.
,Un ive rsi ty ofTo ron to,
Toron to.
CORRESPOND ING MEMBERS.
THE MARQUIS or LORNE .
BONNEY,T. G.
,D .Sc.
,LL.D .
,London
,England.
Doecnr,CAM ILLE
,secrétai re pe rpétuel de l
’Académie
francaise, Pa ris, France.
Ln ROY, ALPHONSE , professeu r de phi losophie a l’un iv ersité de Liege , et memb re de l’Académie royalede Belgique, Liege, Belgium.
MARMI ER, XAVIER, de l’Académie frangaise, Pa r is,France.
PARKMAN,FRANCIS, LL.D.
,Boston, Mass.
RAMEAU D E SAINT Pas s , Enn is, Aden, Loi ret, F rance.
RETIRED MEMBERS. (See Rm :
BOUR ASSA, NAPOLEON, Montebello.
G1LP1N,J BERNARD ,
M .D .
,H alifax .
Osman, W.,M .D .,
Johns Hopk ins Un ive rs ity, Baltimo re, Md.
lS82
18833 84
1884
1885
1886
1 887
1 888
1889
L I S T O F P R E S I D E N TS .
SIR J. W. Dawson.
Hos . P. J. O. CHAUVEAU.
DR. T. STERRY HUNT.
S1I1 DAN IEL W I LSON .
MONSIGNOR HAMEL.
DR. G. LAWSON.
SANDFORD FLEM ING , C.M.G.
Anni: CASGRAI N.
SOC I ETF. ROYAL E D U CANA D A
MEMOIRES
S E CTIO N I
L ITTERATU R E F R A NCA I SE , H I STOI RE , A RCHEOLOG I E ,ETC .
A N N EE 1 8 8 9
See. I,1889 . 1
4 L’ABBE H.-R. CASGRAIN
On le sait, ilétai t merid ional ; son temperamen t avait la chaleur da c ie l de Proven ce ;ils’
emportait fac ilemen t , mais reven ait avec la meme fac il ité . Un j our — e’
é tait avan t sescampagnes d
’
Amérique—~ ilc omman dai t aune grande revue qui avait l ieu dan s un e des
v il les da Mid i un de ses ofiiciers , qu’il ea t a réprimander pour sa tenue, hasarda quelques
remarques nu peu v ives . Mon t calm fut sufl'
oqué de colere, et a ccabla le malheureuxoifieier d
’
un t elflot d’
in v ect iv es que t ou te sa sui te en fut c onstern ée. Ils’
en apereut et
en éprouva de la c on fusi on . Peu de temps apres, dan s une c irc on stan ce tout aussi solennelle, ayan t v u venir le
'
meme officier,ilc ourut alui, l
’
emb rassa en 18 serran t dan s sesbras , et en lui disan t :
“ Je vous aime c omme mon fils , v o i la pourqu o i j e vous repren dsl”
comme un pereCe trait pein t Mon t calm au n aturel : carac tere impétueux, irasc ible, mais b on en fan t .
C’
est dan s ces qualités et ces défauts qu’i l faut chercher l’explieat ion des sucees et des
revers da general .
Sa correspondan ee se partage presque exclusivemen t en tre tro is personnes sa mere,sa femme et son am i Levis . Sa mere , la marqu ise de Sain t-Veran , femme supérieure, Véritable romain e , qui avait sur son fils une influen ce souveraine sa femme, caractere tim ide,nu peu effac é, plus 5 1a hauteu r de son mar i par le cceur que par l
’
in t elligence ; Lev is,esprit male, fro id , cal cu lateur, en qui Mon tcalm rec onn aissait 11 11 maitre dans l’art m il itaire . Ses lettres porten t un e forte emprein te des sen t imen ts que lui inspirait ch aeune
de ces personn es . Avec sa mere , elles son t ple ines de respec t ; avec sa femme, el lesrespiren t la tendresse ; avec Lev is, elles sen t toutes d’
ab andon ,d
’
amit ié fraternelle et de
confiance, meme excessive .
Le style en est rapide, c on c is , souven t el lipt ique et meme haehé quand le temps en
la besogne le pressen t alors sa peti te écriture en pattes de mouches est presque illisible .
11 en fait ses excuses a Lev is et 111 1 promet d’
etre plus so ign é la pro chain e fois .
Partout on recon nait un homme nourri des clas5 1ques et d’
une lec tu re v arlee e t
assidue . Ilavait eu pour précepteu r son on c le de la main gauche, M . Dumas,un hellé
n iste remarqué dans ce siecle le grec et le latin étaien t en si gran d h onn eur. Illaissec ourir sa plume a l
’
aven ture, sachan t b ien que ses lettres ne sortiron t pas du cercle dela famille et de l ’am itie. C
’
est la un des grands charmes de sa c orrespondan ce. Iln e
songeait pas que son 11 0m allait deven ir imm ortel su r cette terre d’
Amérique 0 11 11 s’
en
Venait mour ir, et qu’
un j our la curiosité publ ique chercherai t le secret de ses pen sées surces feu illes jaun ies laissées apres lui .
Aussi le revelen t-elles tout en t ier dans ses plus nobles aspirations comme dans sespetits défau ts , dans ses imperfection s memes .
C’
é tait un dél icat ilaimait les choses de l’esprit , ildégu stait un b on mo t , une fine
rail lerie . I I dégustait aussi les b ons pruneaux et les o l ives de Cand iac e’
é tait un g ourmet .
Ilfaisait gran d cas des plaisirs de la table ; ce péeh é mign on de l’
age mur . Ilsefélieite d’
av oir emmen é avec lui 11 11 excellen t cuisin ier . Ilc ompl imen te sa femme sur le
dél ic ieux Vin muscat qu’
elle lui a en voyé .
Apres vous avo ir parlé de n os peines et de nos soufi‘
ran ces , é crit-ilen rem on tan tle Sain t-Lauren t aherd de la Licome, ilfaut
’
vous dire un me t de nos plaisirs c’
a été de
1 Cette anecdote est de t rad ition dans la fami lle du géné ral et m’a é té racontée par son a r r iere-
petit-fils , 18 marquis V icto r de Montcalm.
MONTCALM PE INTPAR LU I—MEME 5
pecher de la morue et d’
en manger ; el le a 11 11 gout exquis la tete, la langue et le fo ie,qu
’on n’
en voie jamais eu Europe paree qu’il faudrait t r0 p de selpour les c onserver, sen t
des m orceaux dignes de nos fr iands ; cependan t j e me conseil le a aucun de faire expres levoyage. Ou fait avec le fo ie un e sauce 5 la m orue c omme on la fait au rouget . Les tetes
de morue fon t de tres b onn es soupesDan s nu endroit de son j ournal
,ilaj oute : “ La Viande de b oucherie m ’
a paru tresbonne, de meme que la vo lail le . Les bécassin es, canards, sarcel les aussi b onn es qu
’
en
Fran ce, les perdrix excel len tes, avec beauc oup de fumet . Malgre ce qu’
en dit le P.
de Charlev o ix, j e n’
ai pas fait cas de l’
outarde .
”
Le marqu is était extrémemen t soign eux de sa person ne, ilavai t meme 11n faible pourles parfums et les eaux de sen teur. Dans ses lettres a sa femme, illui recomman de itérat iv emen t de lui env oyer des sachets, de l
’
eau de lavande, et c .,etc .
Mon tcalm était d ’
un e act iv ité infatigable ; ilpouvait passer autan t d’
heures a son
bureau qu’
a cheval le plus souven t ildic tait ses secrétaires eu étaien t parfo is érein t és .
J’
ai recu , j e cro is, tro is cen ts let tres écr i t-ilaLevis et 11 y répond san s désem
parer.
La Lz'
come était venue mouiller non l o in da cap Tourmen te, elle attendait le b onven t , qui ne s
’
élev ait pas . Le general s’
impat ien t e les pieds lui b rfilen t dan s cette prisonflot tan te 0 11 11 est enfermé depu is six semaines . Ilven t débarquer . Le rivage de Sain tJoachim est si pro che la plage est si bel le, e t 11 n
’
y a que d ix lieues de la5 Quebec . Ou
lui représen te qu’
a cette saison les chemins sen t presque imprat icables . N’import’e, il
essayera. Ilorcionne de descendre le can ot , et se met en frais d ’
aller a terre.
Je c ite son JournalDa 1 0 may 1 75 6 . Le temps étan t touj ours c on traire, j
’
ai V0 11111 me rendre 5Quebec par terre en abordan t en chaloupe a nu en droit appelé la Pet ite-Ferme, 0 11 l
’
on
m’
av ait assure que j e trouverais des caleches ; mais n’
ayan t pi1 y aborder, malgré lesin d icat ion s qu
’on n ous avai t donn ées, faute de conna1 tre un e petite riv iere qui y mene ,j
’
ai été jusqu’
ela Gran de-Ferme . Je n’
y ai trouvé que des charrettes on m’
a assure que
je ne pourraisl
m’
y rendre dan s le j our , et qu’i l y aurait d11 danger a passer le Saul t de
Mon tmoren cy , qu i a grossi par la. fon te des neiges . J’
ai pris men parti de rej o in dre lafrégate, qui avait appareil lé sur les on ze heures, pou r, en louvoyan t et profitan t da flot ,
ven ir a11 pied de la traverse, elle a mouillé sur les deux heures , apres avo ir fait tro isl ieues .
”
Da 12 may 1 756 . Les ven ts c on t inuan t d ’
etre touj ours con traires, j’
ai pris men
parti pour'
déb arquer anu petit endro it appelé la Pet ite-Ferme , et me ren dre par terre 5.Quebec avec des pet ites v o itu res du pays , charrettes 0 11 caleches, qui sen t , c omme nos
cabriolets, c onduites par nu seu l cheval . L’
espece de chevaux est dans le gout de ceuxdes Ardennes pour la force ,
la fatigue, et meme la tournure . Le chem in de la Pet iteFerme 5 Quebec est beau ; on le fait dans la bel le saison en six heures ; on change aehaque paro isse de v oiture, ce qui retarde , amo ins qu
’on n’
en ait fait préven ir . On paye
ces v o itures anu cheval a raison de Vingt sols par l ieue . Les l ieues son t détermin ées surcelles de l’Ile-de-Fran ce . Je fus obl ige de eoueher en chemin chez M . de Buron , curéde la paroisse da Chateau . Les cures s on t ordinairemen t possédées par des gen s de con
1 A Madamela marouise de Mon tcalm,d Mon tpellier , ce 11 may 1 756 .
2 Lettre eu chewh'
er de Levis, datée de Québec, le 25 mai 1 759 .
6 L’ABBE H .-R. CASGRAI N
d ition 0 11 de bonne fam il le da pays ; ils son t plus con sidérés qu’
en Fran ce, m ieux l ogés,et c omme ils on t la d ime de tous grains, les mo in dres cures valen t douze cen ts l ivres, etcommun émen t deux m il le l ivres .
”
“
Da 1 3 may 1 756 . Les ven ts étan t hier devenus nord-est , Le He’ros est en tre
dans la rade de Québec et a débarqué cc matin neuf c ompagn ies da regimen t de La Sarre .
La Licome a profit é da meme ven t p our en trer cc matin dan s la rade, au m oyen de qu o i
j e ne suis arrive que quelques heures apres, et , eu voulan t me presser, j’
y ai été pour de la
plu ie, de la fatigue et de la dépense.
”
Mon t calm ac compagne ce réc it d’
ob serv at ions qui mériten t d’
etre c i téesLa cote, depu is l
’
endroit j’
ai débarqué j usqu’
aQuebec,m
’
a paru b ien cult iv ée,les paysans tres a leur aise, V ivan t comme de petits gen ti lshommes de Fran ce, ayan t
chacun deux 0 11 tro is arpen ts de terre sur tren te de profon deur . Les habitations 11 e son t
pas con tigu’
e‘
s, chaque hab itan t ayan t vou lu avo ir son domaine aportée de sa maison .
“
J’
ai observe que les paysans canadien s parlen t tres b ien fran cais , et c omme san s
doute ils son t plus ac c outumés a al ler par eau que par terre, ils emploien t v ol on t iers lesexpression s pr ises de la marin e .
“
Le Canada do it etre nu b on pays pour y Vivre ahen marehé en temps de paix ;mais tou t est hers de prix depu is la guerre . Les marchan d ises qu
’on t ire de Fran ceViennen t difii cilemen t ; et , c omme tout hab itan t est m i l ic ien
,et qu
’on eu tire beauc ouppour aller ala guerre, le peu qui reste me suffit pas pour cultiver les terres, élever lesbest iaux et aller ala chasse ; cc qui o ccasionne un e grande rareté pour la Vie .
“ Le seu l gouvernemen t de Quebec a fait mareher depu is le premier de mai tro ismil le m il ic ien s, den t d ix-neuf cen ts guerriers et on ze cen ts hommes pour le serv ice, et lero i qui n e leur d onn e au cune so lde est obligede les n ou rrir .
M . Bigo t , in tendan t, m’
a donnea diner avec quaran te personn es . La magn ificence
et la b onne chere ann on cen t quela place est b onne , qu’i l s’
en fai t honn eur, et 11 11 hab itan tde Paris aurait été surpris de la profusi on des b on nes choses eu tout gen re .
L’
eveque, M . de Pon tbriand , prélat respectab le, vou lut me donn er a souper, et Mle Cheval ier de Longuei l , c omman dan t la place en l’ab sen ce de M . de Vaudreuil , gouv ern eur general , que les operat ions de la campagne ret ienn en t aMon treal .
”
Mon t calm n’
aurait pas été 11 11 homme da d ix-huit ieme s iec le, s
’
iln ’
av ait pas aimé leplaisir ; mais ilsavait le c on c il ier avec le t ravai l . La soeié t é de b on t on était pour 111 i nubeso in . Avan t meme son depart pour le Can ada, 11 s
’
en quiert de cel le qu’i l y ren con trera .
.Te lis avec grand plaisir, écr it-ilde Ly on ,l’hist oire de la Nouvel le-Fran ce par le P. de
Charlev o ix . Ilfait 11 11 e description agréable de Québec : compagn ie choisie . Cependan trassurez-y ous, j
’
en rev iendrai toujours avec plaisirApres a n an de séj our au Can ada, quand ila eonnu cette somet é , ilaj oute
Mon tréal vaut Alais dans les temps de paix et m ieux par le séj our de la gén éral ité ,car 18 marqu is de Vaudreu il 11
’
a aussi passe qu’
un m o is a Quebec . Pou r Quebec , e ’
est
c omme les mei l leures v illes da royaume, quand en eu a é t é une dizaine mo in s queMon tpell ier , m ieux que Beziers, Nimes
,et c . le c l imat sain ,
le c iel pur, 11 11 beau soleil,ui
prin temps, n i automn e,hiver 0 11 été . Ju i llet , aofit e t septembre c omme en Languedo c
et au camp de Cari l lon , l’ou est plus vers le sud, comme aNaples . D es j ours de pou
A Lyon , cc 8 ma rs, 1 756 , aMme de Saint-Véran .
MONTCALM FE IN‘I‘PAR LU I-MEME
drerie, l’
hiv er, insupportable , ilfaut rester ren fermés . Les dames spirituelles, galan tes ,devotes 5 Quebec , j oueuses aMon treal , c onversat ion et dan se
Six mo is apres, ilrac on te a son ami la Vie qu’il mene 5 Quebec
Nous al lons avo ir des c on certs. J’
aimerais mieux causer avec M . le Cheval ier deLevis que tous les plaisirs de Québec . Aussi, laissez ven i r les g laces , j e gagne ma pet itechambre de Mon treal . Ma maison cepen dan t fume moins, et 11 faut conven ir qu
’il y a
b onn e c ompagn ie ici et plus de ressources qu’
a Mon treal pour les so irees . Nous av on sdeux bonn es maison s : l’h6te1 Péan et Mme de la Naudiere ; de loin en lo in l ’eveque, etparfois ma chambre l’in tendan ce , deux j ours de la semaine. Vo i lama Vie
Le marquis se repandait v o l on tiers dan s la so c iété,on 11 était recherchea cause de sa
haute posit ion , mais aussi a cause des graces de son esprit , de sa gaieté et des charmes desa c onversat ion .
La v ie douee et tran quille qu’il men ait l’hiv er était eh éremen t achetée duran t le
reste de l ’an nec . L’
act iv it é de Mon tcalm pouvait a pein e y sa th re. 11 eu faisait 1lile
maladie ala fin de chaque expedition .
Tro is mois apres son en trée eu campagne , en 1756 , 11 s etait déj asign alé parla priseda fort Chouaguen (Oswego) , 1 4 aout . Ilavait d’
ab ord paru tres satisfait des preparatifs de cette expedition ,
ordonn ée par le marqu is de Vaudreui l ilavait meme loué sonact iv ité mais, ay an t la fin de cette campagne, apparaissen t déja dans sa c orrespon den celes prem iers indices de ces tristes querel les en tre lui et le gouvern eur, qui devaien t t on.
j ours aller en s’
env en iman t et deven ir une des causes de la perte da Canada.
11 était dilficile de trouver deux hommes mo in s faits pou r se c omprendre et pour agirde con cert e
’
é t aien t deux n atures abso lumen t in c ompatibles . Mon t calm ,boui llan t
,impe
rat if, orguei lleux de sa supérior ité , soufii'an t malla con tradicti on et . humilié de recev o irdes ordres qu
’i l méprisait ; Vaudreu il , espr it b ienveil lan t mais faible, peu é clairé , j alo11x
de son aut orité et en touré d’
hommes corrompus qu’i l était in capable de dom iner .
Des confiits me pouvaien t manquer de s’
élev er en tre ces deux c ommandan ts, et cesconflit s , ren ouvelés san s cesse, aggrav eren t leurs d ivisions et fin iren t par les rendre insupportables Fun 51 l’autre.
Une autre cause de mésin telligen ce n aissai t del’an t ipathie profon de qui existait en treles troupes régulieres et les m il ices canadienn es cette an tipathie était en c oreplus v io len teen tre les officiers de chaque corps, qui exc itaien t san s cesse la mauvaise humeur des deuxcommandan ts .
Trois j ours apres la pr ise d’
Oswego , Mon t calm ann on ce cc brillan t succes a son ami
Lev is, qui opérait alors ala tete du lac Champlain . Illui donn e en confidence son juge
men t s11 r quelques-uns des oflieiers fran cais et canad iens c ’
est une b outade origin ale et
satiriqueBourlamaque s
’
est tres b ien c on du it , et , pour y ous le prouver, Bougainvil le eu
conv ien t . Je ne saurais trop me louer de mes aides de camp , de La Pause, de Malartic
j’
eusse suecomb é ala besogne san s eux, et La Pause est nu homme d iv in qui m’
a b iensoulagé. Cela n
’
empeehe pas que j e so is exeédé . D ites a'
v otre camp que j’
ai été tresc on ten t de Messieurs de la eolon ie . Souvenez-vous que Merc ier est a n ign oran t et a n
1 A Montréal , ce 16 av r i l, 1 75 7. Dans une aut re lett re, citée par M. Pa rkman , Montcalm fait une desc r iptionsemblable, mais moins détai llée .
2 AQuebec, le 7 novemb re 175 7.
8 L’ABBE 11 -3 . CASGRAIN
homme faible Sain t-Luc , un fanfaron et 11 11 bavard ; Mon tigny admirable , mais 11n
pi llard Lign eries, Vill iers, Léry, bons Langy , ex cellen t Mar in ,brave mais sot tout le
reste me vaut pas la peine d’
en parler , meme mon prem ier l ieuten an t-gén éral RigaudL
’
approv isionnemen t de l ’armes avait été un e grave question pour cette expedit ion ;mais el le le fut b ien plus en core pour celle de l
’
an n ée su ivan te c on tre le fort Wil liamHen ry.
A son retour 5 Quebec , en septembre 175 7 , Mon t calm se trouva eu face d’
un enn em iplus redoutable que celu i qu
’il ven ait de vain cre ; eet ennemi , e’
é tait la disette . E lle était
gén érale dan s toute la c olon ie et devait s’
agrav er duran t les ann ées su ivan tes , car la
guerre en levait presque tous les bras a la culture . Le cri d’
alarme , que fait en tendreMon tcalm dans la lettre qu
’on v a lire , se c on t inue a travers toute sa c orrespon dan ce , j us
qu’
au dern ier petit bi llet, eu quatre l ign es, qu’il adresse a Levis , l
’
avan t-Veille d’
Ab raham .
“14 septembre 1757 . Nous allons n ous trouver , Mon sieur, dans les c ircon stan ces
les plus crit iques par le défaut de v ivres . Nous manquon s de pain ,cet te ann ée les
m oyens que l’
on v a prendre pour y suppléer nous feron t manquer de v iande 1a pro chain e .
Quelques difli cultés que les troupes qui son t dans les cfites éprouven t pour v ivre chezl’hab itan t , leurs soldats seron t en core mo in s a plaindre qu e ceux qui seron t eu garn isondans les villes . Les temps ven t etre plus durs, a certains égards, qu
’
aPrague. Je suisen meme temps persuade que _
ce y a etre le beau momen t de glo ire pour les troupes deterre
,sur d’
avan ce qu’
el les se p ré teron t a t out avec le mei lleur t on et que n ous n’
en t en
dren s aucun es plain tes ui jérém iades surla raret é des Viv res , puisq11’
iln ’
y a aucun remede .
Aussi , n ous allon s donner l’exemple de la frugal ité n écessaire par le retran chemen t des
tables et de la dépen se, et qu’
au l ien de se piquer de bonn e chere, de dépen se, et de serégaler, comme fait l’oflicier fran cais , acc outumé apen ser avec au tan t de n oblesse que
‘
de
gén érosité , celu i qui v ivra, si j’
ose le d ire, le plus mesquinemen t et qui parla c on sommera
le mo in s, donn era les marques les plus sures de sen amour pour la patr ie, pour le serv iceda ro i , et sera dign e des plus gran ds é loges .
“ Le reg imen t de la Rein e, que j’
ay ais eru b ien traiter eu lui donnan t la v i lle deQuébec , éprouvera, ain si que celu i de Béarn , que le séj our des v i lles n
’
est pas adésirer .
Ac c outumé ase preter a tout et en ayan t déj a donne des preuves 11 Prague, j e n’
at teuds
pas mo in s d’
eux dan s les c irc on stan ces den t j e vais y ous informer .
Ou espere que les hab itan ts n ourriron t les batail lon s qui seron t dan sles cotes ain siiln ’
y a rien aprescr ire a eet égard, que d’
exhort er les so ldats a se c on ten ter da gen re den ourriture de son hab itan t . Pour dan s les v i l les, a commen cer da ler novembre, suivan tce qui v ien t d
’
etre arrete apres 11 11 examen da pen de ressources que n ous avon s dans le
pays, la ration du sol dat sera de
Un e dem i-l ivre de painUm quarteron de po isSix l ivres boeuf fraisDeux l ivres de morue
par j our.
pour huit j ours.
E t.
ilest a c raindre que n ous me puissions souten ir ce taux et qu’on ne so it oblige, avec
le temps, de donner 11 11 peu de cheval . Ou me donn era pas de lard actuel lemen t , parce
1 Au chevalier de Levis, au camp de Chouaguen , 1 7 aott t 1 756 .
MONTCALM PEINTPAR LU I -MFJME 9
que cette ressource me peut manquer, que les boeufs sen t ac tuellemen t dans le temps del’ann ée 0 11 ils son t les meilleu rs et renden t le plus .
“ M . le marqu is de Vaudreuil et M . l’
Iutendan t , avec qui n ous sommes c onvenusde cc que j
’
ai l’honn eur de vou s é cr ire, envo ien t leurs ordres a eet efie t ; le mun ition
n a i re general en écri t aM . Pén issau, et j e y ous prie de v oulo ir bien y faire con former les
troupes .
“
Les habitan ts de Québec et les Acad ien s , plus a plaindre, seron t rédu its au quarteron
Au retour d ’
un e excurs i on , Mon t calm trouva la vi l le de Qué b ec t out alarmée desmauvaises n ouvelles recues de Lou isbourg . I llse m oque eu style de Rabelais de ces
frayeurs qui me devaien t é t re que trop Vite réal iséesLe 1 5 septembre 1 75 7 .
—.I e me su is arrive que d
’
h ier au so ir, men eher Cheval ier j en
’
ai en c o re v u personn e . De v ou s amoi, et n e c i tez pas tout ls monde fait ici c . c . dans
ses cu lottes pou r Lou isbourg‘; pour moi , qui n e suis pas n aturel lemen t peu reux, j
’
at t endrai
tranqu illemen t les éVén emen t s .
’
I I c on tinue : “
Ge 20 septembre .
— Ou c ourt , mou cher Cheval ier, avec v os paquets et
ceux de M . le general , apres les deux vaisseaux qui sen t partis ee mat in ; 0 11 lesattrapera. J
’
ai écrit c omme sain t Augustin ,ct j
’
ai taut travai llé que j’
ai gagn é malde
gorge , hem orro'
ides, et 0 10 11 ala j oue . J’
aimis hier c ou teaux su r table quato rze c onvertsc in q j ours de la semaine, 11 11 quarteron de pain par Je c rois que j e m e plais aQuebec . C
’
est pour vous seul . Je mén age les deux au tels . .Te n’
ai en c ore é té qu’
une
fo is avec assez d’
indifféren ce a celu i 0 11 j e voulais b rttler de l’
en een s l’
ann ée dern iere“ A Mon treal , le 24 septembre 1 75 7 . “
éJ
’
ai des elous, men cher Cheval ier ; la pituiteme
'
suffoque ; l’
asthme tue Bougainv ille . Je n e mange qu’
uu quarteron de pain ; j e me
purge demain ,et me trouve b ien ici ; c
’
est une capitale . J ’
ay ais résolu de n e jamais ten ird
’
en fan t au b apteme apres l’
hon n eur d’
en avo ir tenu un avec Mme la marqu ise deVaudreui l ; cependan t Arn oux m ’
y force avec Mme de la Naudiere pour c ommere . J’
altern e
en tre el le et Mme Péan, parfo is Mmes Marin e t Sa in t-Ours.
”
“ A Quebec , 18 1 4 octobre 1 757 . J’
ai ouvert hier l ’avis da retran chemen t des tables .
M . de Vaud reu i l l’a adopté et a promis de don n er l’
exemple ; toute la c olon ie a applaud il’Iutendan t , pas trop. Ilaime le faste, et ce n
’
est pas le cas. J’
ai été d ’
av is d’
un seu lservice , c on formémen t 5 Part icle seize de l’
ordonn anee . J’
ai été d’
avis qu’il n e fal lai t de
t out l’
h iv er n i bal s, n i 1 ' iolon s , n i fé tes, n i assemblées . J’
ai donne hier mon dern ier grandrepas, 0 1
‘
1 j’
av ais n os pu issan ces et c inq dames . Ila é t é splendide par le gout , la profusionet un double servi ce d’
en t remet s . J’
aurai demain dix personn es avec nu potage, quatre
grosses en trees, une épau le de veau ,un e piece d’
cn tremet s fro id ; le t ou t servi ensemble ,le bouill i relevan t la soupe . E t vo ila mon plan fai t pour t out l
’
h iv er. Je vous exhorte,c omme votre ami, an
’
av oir qu’
un gros diner bourgeo is a 11 11 seu l service pour les officiersarrivan t des quartiers , n i v iolon s , n i bals , n i
0 11 0 1 18 beauc oup cen tre l’
In tendan t et la grande soe1et é , et j e cro is en tre n ous
qu’
on n’
a pas to rt . Moi, j e me tais, mais j
’
ai 11 11 petit am i qui est homme a écrire la. vér itéet ala faire parven ir .
J’
ai été tro is j ou rs dehors pour faire la tourn ée dela cote da nerd c omme 11 11 maréchal
Lett re eu Chevalie r dc Lev is, datée de Québec le 14 sept. 1 75 7.A l lus ion au palais de l’I n tendan t .
See. I,1889 . 2 .
1 0 L'ABBE 11 -3 . CASGRAIN
de logis j e l’
ai faite par ea11 e11 allan t et par terre en reven an t avec Mon tbel iard , Bougainv i lle et Pel legrin .
“ M . de Vaudreu il n’
est qu e d’
avan t-hier ici. Je lui ai déj a laehé quatre mémo ires .
Heureu semen t j e les ai donn és a lire a Sain t -Sauveur ; l’écriture m ’
ab sorb e et Marcelaussi .”
“
Le 24 octobre 1757 .
— L’
I n tendan t a, d’
avan t-hier , c ommen ce a serv ir a 11 11 seu ldomestique , et supprimé la patisserie , a cause de la farine .
Des qu’on c ommen cera en dé cembre a don n er da cheval a11 so ldat , j
’
en fais ma pro
v ision pour l’
hiv er, et 11 y en aura touj ours chez mo i nuM0 11 valet de chambre vous d ira ma Vie : ain si toute la j ourn ée, lun d i , mardi ,
mercred i , douze personn es jeudi, l’
In t endant ven dred i , quatre personnes samedi , douzediman che, l
’
I n t endan t . Mes compl imen ts aLa Roche 1. On me peut vous aimer plus que
j e n e le fais . Ou me saurait m oins v o ir les dames .
”
Le 2 n ovembre 1 75 7 . 11me semble que n otre ami Roquemaure est touj ours lememe et de plus en plus in supportable par son t on et ses
. P0 ulharié s est
Le 26 o c t obre , Mon t calm s’
inquletait de la malad ie de M. de Vil l iers, attaqué de lapetite Vérole . M . Coulon de Vill iers , frere de Jumonv ille, é tait un des officiers les plusest imés de la c o lon ie . I 1 s
’
é tait d ist ingué dan s plusieurs expeditions , en tre autres ala priseda fort Nécessité 0 11 11 c omman dait , et an c ombat des Min es en Acad ie .
Le 2 n ovembre . Je suis in c onso lable de la perte da pauvre Vill iers . Je n eeris
pas a sa veuve ; mais (11126 84 11 1 c omb ien j e regrette son mari et qu’
indépendammen t de
tout ce qu’
elle mérite par elle-méme, j e serai
’t ouj ours fort aise de lui tém o igner e11 t ou te
o ccasion l’est ime sin guliere que j’
av ais pour Vi ll iers .
M de Vaudreu i l m ’
a fait l’hon n eur de d in er chez m o i auj ourd’hu i , et part demain0 11
Le 7 n ovembre . J’
ai été d’
au tan t plus c on ten t da t on des so ldats d ’iei (en tren ous ) qu
’
ils on t été sol l i c i tés par le peuple a se mut in er et cela V ien t de ee que ce meme
peuple n’
a p oin t de confian ee dans le g ouvernemen t . Ilcro it, quo ique cela me so it pasvrai , que c
’
est un e famine art ificielle pour c on ten ter l’av idité d
’
aueun s . 11 a tort, maisl’exemple da passe et da presen t l
’
autorise a cette opin ion . .
Que t ous v os propos , mon cher Cheval ier. tenden t touj ours a in spirer 11 11 e d iminut ion dans le luxe et la dépen se an os officiers car le pays s
’
épuisera, et ils laisseron t desdettes , d
’
autan t plus que les Can ad ien s out 11 11 e grande fac i l ité a leur preter .
Commen t diable lv otre ami Roquemaure et le mien , est-iltouj ours le meme ?
aussi , ilpasse dan s l’
esprit de tout le m on de, sans excepter le maréchal de Mirepo ix , pourune tete bru lee . J
’
ai e11 beau lui rompre en v is iere , al lan t son train ,11 sen tien t que
Chev ert est un Jean -Fou tre , 11 11 homme san s talen ts et un pi llard . Je cro is que , hers lemaréehalde Mirepo ix , le c omte de Lau trec , 18 duc de Brogl ie et M . deMon eon seil, quo iquecc dern ier soi t ha‘
i et peu estimé, iln
’
y a guere d’
officier general qu’il ne blame . L’
autre
j our, ilvou lait qu e sa c ompagn ie de gren adiers, qui a fait tro is campagnes , n e fit pas fondala formation de la n on v elle et me fit époumonner.
E t j’
ai beau l’in terrompre, ilcro it fairel’
éloge de d’
Héb ecourt e t des officiers fran cais ,
1 M. de La Roeheb eaucourt , 2d a ide de camp (Te Mon tcalm.
1 2 L’ABBE CASGRAIN
tandis que leurs terres restaien t san s culture, le prin ce fain éan t qui siégeait aVersai lles,leur en voyait a peine de quoi me pas m ou rir de faint . Le peu de
-
grains en semen cés
par les V ieil lards , les femmes e t les en fan ts, res tés presque seuls dan s les champs ,étaien t en levés al’automne au 11 0m da ro i , qui les payait e11 assignat s dépréc iés, que ce
meme ro i devait ren ier plu s tard , e t qu’on retrouve auj ou rd’hu i par l iasses dan s n os cam
pagnes .
L’
In t endan t poussait la tyrann ie jusqu a faire poser les scel lés S11 1 les m ou l in s , afind
’
empé cher les habitan ts de mettre leur grain en farin e .
D’
autre part les ofii ciers de l’armée regul iere semblaien t ten ir peu de c ompte des sacr ifices de tou t gen re imposes au peuple . Ils exigeaien t des mil ices les plus du rs travaux , etles faisaien t servir aux p ostes les plus ‘ dangereux , so it comme é claireurs
,so it c omme par
t isan s dan s les exped ition s avec les sauvages . Aj outez a cela que, su iv'
an t l’hab itude des
m i litaires daus tous les pays, ilsles méprisaien t et. traitaien t t ou t haut de laeh et é leur m odede faire la guerre , mode qui leur avait pourtan t valu taut de su c ces . Ce .11 e fut qu
’
aux
dern ieres campagnes que l’
on c omprit l’
u t ilit é de c ombin er en semble les deux tactiques .
Presque tous ees officiers étaien t san s fortun e 1etmen aien t la Vie dissipée de leur
s1ecle . Un trop grand n ombre aimaien t le j eu ,
-
et proli t aien t de l’
imprév oyan ee et de la
libéral ité des Can adiens pour leu r emprun ter de l’
argen t , qu’
ils prodiguaien t ensu ite a ten thasard . C
’
é tait un e n ouvel le cause de mésin te ll igen ce en tre les mi l itaires et les c o lon s .
A11 reste, t 0 11 t em c ombattan t en semble pour la F1 ance, ils avaien t des vues particulieres b ien différen tes . Les sol dats fran cais , étrangers an pays, n
’
y avaien t pas d’
at tache ;
ils me songeaien t a se battre que daus l’
esperan ce d’
av oir de l’
av aneemen t et d’
aller eu
j ouir en Fran ce . Les Can adiens, au c on traire, défendaien t leurs propres foyers, c ombat
taien t pro ar t'
s et focz'
s . Ils craign aien t avec trop de raison que le 1 0 1 de Fran ce , qu i leurdonn ait si peu de secours , 11 e fin it par les aban donn er c ompletemen t , apres avo ir tautc on tribué ales ru iner . Ils s
’
inquié taicn t de savo ir si , ala fin de la lutte , on laisserait11 11 e b ou chée de pain a leurs fam i lles .
Ces d ivergen ces dev ienn en t de plus en plus sensibles amesure que les événemen ts
s’
av ancen t ; mais elles é c laten t surtout pendan t les dern iers m o is de la guerre . Apres lam ort de Mon t calm ,
les comman dan ts fran cais euren t le dessein de faire sauter la v il le deQuébec , s ’ils n e pouvaien t la garder, et de faire 11 11 desert de ses env iron s . Les habitan tsfuren t eon st ern és et protesteren t én ergiquemen t .
Bourlamaque, daus sa correspondan ce avec Lév is , l’
a11 n ée su ivan te, au momen t 0 11
tout était désespéré , tro is armées avaien t envahi le pays, 0 11 t oute resistan ce devenaitin sen sée
,s
’
indigne c on tre les Can ad ien s parce qu’
ils l’ab andonnen t e t ren tren t dansleurs foyers ; ilrage c on tre la faiblesse de Vaudreu il , qui me les fai t pas fusiller . Or,
le general Murray avait lan ce 11 11 e pro clamat ion déclaran t qu’i l inoendierait les maison s
de tous les habitan ts qui n e seraien t pas trouvés chez 0 11 11 , et 11 ten ait parole . Les Cana
dien s avaien t fait pour l’
honn eur de la Fran ce plus qu’
ils me devaien t ; mais cela ne
faisa i t pas l’
afl‘
aire de Bou rlamaque et de ses c ompagn on s d’
armes, qui auraien t v ou lu
term in er la guerre avec plus de d istin c tion , afin de pouvo ir demander des g races 5 1a. courde Versail les . Les Can adien s n
’
espéraien t plus rien de ce cote ; et 11 é tai t t out n ature]
qu’
ils cherchassen t a sauver le peu d’épaves qui restaien t de leur naufrage.
Journalde Montcalm
MONTCALM PE INTPAR LU I-MEME 1 8
Mon tcalm était le type (111 so ldat fran cais : gai, en t rain an t , pren an t les choses par leb on cote, supportan t facilemen t la fatigue et les privat ion s . Ilbad in e avec Levis sur la
ma igre pitan ce que la disette l’
oblige de faire, et sur les d ivers plats de cheval , appré t és atoute sau ce , que lui sert son cu isin ier .
Le 4 décembre . M . l’In t endan t m ’
a dit , hier an 8 0 11 , écrire a M . le general pou r
que l’on mit la garn ison de Mon treal an cheval c omme cel le d’iei. e t de y ous empréven ir .
Nos troupes s’
y pré t en t ici de b onn e grace, et j e me dou te pas qu’i l en soit de meme de
cel les qui sen t sous v os ordres . Cet article me regarde que la Vil le de Mon treal . C’
est
nu 8 1 petit objet que le fort de Chambly que j e doute qu’
il faille l’y étendre, d’
aut an t
m ieux que les soldats n’
en t pas déja é t é t r op con ten ts d’
une d ifferen ce en tre eux et ceux(111 fort Sain t -Jean , sur le fait da pain . Cepen dan t , si l
’
on v oulait qu’
ils fussen t aussi ala chair de cheval
,ilfaudrait b ien gu
’ils y passassen t c omme les autres . Ils ne son t pas
de meilleure mais on , 11 1 plus difli ciles a men er . Observez que n ous sommes c onvenus( 111 an lien de donner t ou te 11 11 e distribut ion en cheval et toute 11 118 distribut ion en b ceuf,
0 11 donne m o iti é l’un , m o itié l ’au tre . Nos s oldats l ’on t m ieux aime c omme cela . Si les
V6tres l’
aimaien t m ieux au tremen t , 0 11 peut leur donn er cette douceur . Au reste 0 11
mange chez m o i da cheval de toute facon , hers ala soupe :
Pet its pat és de cheval al’
espagn ole,Cheval ala mode
,
E sealoppe de cheval ,Filet de cheval ala b roehe avec une po ivrade bien h ee,Semelles de cheval a11 grat in ,
Langue de cheval en miroton ,
Frigousse de cheval ,Langue de cheval b ouean ée, mei lleure que cel le d
’
orignal,Gateau de cheval , comme les gateaux de lievres ,Cet an imal est fort au-dessus de l ’orignal , da caribou et da caster .
Le 1 6 décembre . Je répon ds par celle-ei, men cher Cheval ier , av otre épitre da 1 0 .
J’
ai 111 avec plaisir votre detail , et j e v o is que votre presen ce est aussi utile aMon tréal quela m ienn e ici . Tout y v a b ien sur le fait da cheval . Les grenad iers de la Rein e avaien tnu peu tortillé mais Bras-de-fer, e
’
est-a-dire d’Hert , a tortillé le prem ier caporal e t celan
’
est pas meme su . Ilfaut meme vous d ire que les so ldats de la Rein e qui sen t casern és,avan tage que v ous n
’
av ez pas a Mon treal , sen t c on ten ts . Le so ir, ils metten t cu ire le
cheval , l’écumen t bien ,jetten t la premiere eau
,le retiren t , en fon t le len demain de la
bonn e soupe en le remettan t an pot avec le boeuf, mangen t le boeu f qui a serv i a faire lasoupe, b ouill i le mat in
,et le soir le cheval en frigousse . La c ol on ie fai t de
Rien n’
est mieux qu e votre cenduite an sujet des jeux de hasard . Vo ic i le detai lde cc qui se passe a cette oc casion 5 Quebec , que v ous p ouvez n e pas la isser ignorer anos officiers . 0 11 n
’
a jamais j oué chez Mme Cheval ier, mais bien chez 11 11 e madame d11
regimen t de Guyenn e, 11 y a 11 11 m o is ; le mari pun i par mo i defen se nul le rec idi ve .
Chez M . l’In tendan t,11 a ouvert lui-méme par 11 11 beau tope-et -tin gue , 0 11 11 a gagué
cen t lon is ; beauc oup de qu in ze aux douze fran cs la fiche ; de gros passe-di x,de gros tris
aux Vingt fran cs la fich e, six fran cs pour spadille et denx louis de queue. D iman che, il
14 L’ABBE 11 -11 . CASGRAIN
y aura gran d souper a quatre-V ingts c on v erts, beauc oup de dames, c on cert , lan squen et an euf eoupeurs, qui seron t : M . l’In tendan t , Mme Péan ,
MM. de Béran ,de Sain t-Fél ix ,
capitaines dans Berry L’
Estang ,de Sel les, de la Sarre Belo t , de Guyenn e La Naudiere,
Sain t-Vincen t , Merc ier,de la colon ie .
D emain , MM . de Roquemaure , d’
Aigueb elle, de Mann ev ille , deVillemon t ée fon t
lecture d ’
un e lettre que j e leur ai é cr ite pour an n on cer : lo que, si j oue partou tailleurs que dan s les maison s priv ilégiées par des c on sideration s qu i leur son t dues , j epun irai ; 20 que j
’
exh orte aj ouer , s’
ilest possible, avec sagesse. Je rem on tre la differen cede n otre positi on avec cel le des eolon s, mes regrets de v o ir qu itter le serv ice a 11 11 ofli eier
pour derangemen t , et celu i de laisser pour gage t1u o ificier, a11 départ des batai llons , qu iaurai t des créan c iers qui se plaindraien t . D
’
Hert a ordre de s’
in former sil’on j oue ail leurs,de m
’
en rendre c ompte, d’
ordonn er pun it ion si c’
est chez n ous, et de m’
av ert ir si l’on joue
chez des officiers de la co lon ie 0 11 des b ourgeois . Le j eu chez LaVeranderie a dfi etreo ccasionne par 11 11 M . des Aun iers, gran d j oueu r, qu i y est loge. Bougainv il le, que j ev o is, 0 11 n e saurait m o in s, perd ; ce sen t ses affaires, ain si que La Ro chebeau c our t ; cedern ier a mo ins de ressou rce que le prem ier .
Rien de m ieux, ce me semble, que ce que fait actuel lemen t M . de Vaudreu il , et la
seule chose afaire eet hiver .
L’
I n tendan t aura le malheur de fin ir par etre détesté , et cela do it etre pour qui memet aueun ordre dans les c ommen cemen ts .
L’
In t endan t supprime auj ou rd’hu i,demain
, samedi et d iman che mat in,sa table , en
ten t on partie °
et m o i , j’
augmen te 11 11 peu la m ienn e ; ille fait pour avo ir des petitspain s qui ne pesen t pas tro is on ces.
Bourlamaque a c ommen ce a donn er amanger tro is fois la semain e. Ilest triste , ceme semble, s
’
ennuyan t . I I a fai t l’z’namomto de‘ ma commere ; iln’
a pas réussi , pour m o i .Mme Péan , ma commere, de lo in en lo in l ’eveque voilam es vei llées . Je su is b ien avecnos dames , comme j e veux etre.
“
Je su is b ien aise que v ous ayez Péan° d ites-le lui . De tout ce qui appro che le
general , c’
est le plus sage , le m o ins sujet apreten t ious et préven t i ons, et le plus capablede lui faire pren dre 11 11 b on parti sage et ferme clan s
La pet ite rue da Parl o ir était un des prin c ipaux cen tres 0 11 se réun issait le beaum on de de Quebec deux salons surtout y étaien t recherchés : celui de Mme de la Naudiere
et celui de Mme de Beaub assin ,t outes deux ren ommées pour leur é légan ce e t leur esprit .
Mon tcalm s’
y plaisai t si b ien , qu’i l pren d la peine d
’
indiquer l’
endroit pré c is qu’
occupait
chacune de ces deux maison s : l ’une , d it-il, au tournan t de la rue pres des ursul ines ;l ’autre, al
’
eneoignure de la rue du Parloir et de la rue Sain t-Louis . Mme de la Naudiere,nee Gen evieve de Boish éb ert
,étai t fille da seign eur de la Riv iere-Ouel le, et Mme Her tel
de Beaubassin ,nee Catherin e Jarret de Vereheres, était fille du se ign eur de Vercheres .
Leu rs maris servaien t t ous deux en qualité d’
o fficiers de la m i l ice can ad ien n e. C’
est aussidan s la rue da Parl o ir que demeu rait Mme Péan , n ée Dav ennes des Meloises, den t ilestsouven t question dan s les lettres de Mon tcalm .
MONTCALM PE INTPAR LU I-MEME 1 5
Les charmes de la c onversat ion de Mme de Beaubassin semblen t avo ir eu part ieu
lleremen t de l’at t rait pour Mon tcalm , car son salon était celu i qu’i l fréquen tait le plus
souven t . Ail leurs, c omme chez l’I n tendan t , ou chez Mme Péan , ilse désennuyait ,quelquefois ils
’
é tourdissait ; chez Mme de la Naudiere, ils’
in téressait ; mais chez Mme
de Beaub assin ,ils ’
at tachait . La c on descendan ce en la po l itesse l’en train aien t ai lleurs ;ici, c
’
é tait‘
l ’am itie.
A l ’aide de la c orrespondan ce de Mon t calm on ressusc ite apen pres t oute la so c iét é
qui an imait eet elegan t salon . Le plus assidu etait ce grand officier ingambe , que Mon tcalm croyait c ourageux , mais qu
’il n’
aimait pas : c’
é tai t M . de Boish éb ert , frere de Mmede la Naudiere, qui revenait chaque hiver de l
’
Acadie, ilexereait le c ommandemen t et
encore plus le pi llage. Um autre personnage bien plus importan t y apparaissait aussi ,mais raremen t . Quand son équ ipage s
’
arré tait dans la rue da Parl o ir e t que ses gen s
lui ouvraien t la portiere , les domest iques de la maison se précipitaien t a sa ren c on tre et
le c ondu isait au salon , son arrivée suspendait pour 11 11 momen t la c onversation . A
l’
éléganee de son hab it , aux fines den tel les de son jabot , a ses man chettes r ichemen t
brodées,a ses cheveux roux, poudrés , musqués, 0 11 rec onn aissait l
’
in t endan t Bigo t . Péan
et sa femme l’
accompagn aien t souven t . Pu is ven aien t les Longueil , les Sain t-Ours, lesLa Naudiere, les Baby,
les Vi ll iers,le do cteu r Arn oux avec sa femme, plusieurs des ofli ciers
de l’armée de terre, — c ’
est ainsi qu’on n ommait les troupes régulieres. Bourlamaque y
portait sa figure triste et m élan c olique ; Bougainville s’
y faisait remarquer par son esp r it
jansén iste, ses crit iques m ordan tes , quelquefo is par son humeur maussade ; Roquemaure,par ses excen tr ic ités .
En v isagée dan s son en semble, la haute somete canadien n e offrait alors 11 11 spectaclen avran t . L
’
exemple de cel le qui arrivait de Fran ce lui avait été fun este , et les
désordres de la guerre, la presen ce des troupes, achevaien t de la perdre, da moin s en
grande partie .
0 11 était témo in d’
un état de choses qui me pouvait durer : l’
anarehie da haut e11 b asde l ’echelle so ciale . On pressen tait la fin d
’
un regn e ; on voyait ven ir 11 11 o rage terrible .
Cet o rage allait-iltou t en glout ir ? O11 me le savai t pas 0 11 en dét ourn ait la tete 0 11 ne
vou lait pas y pen ser, et tachai t de s’
é tourdir sur le danger . Pour y m ieux réussir,on se plon geait dan s le plaisir ; 0 11 s
’
y l ivrait avec fureur . Toute cette so c iété aveug léedan sait sur 11 11 volcan .
“ Le 26 décembre . On n e parle ici , écrit Mon tcalm , que de cen t l ou is gagn és ,perdu cen t c in quan te l ou is, des momon s de mi l le éeus . Les tetes sen t totalemen t tourn ées .
La nuit dern iere, Mercier a perdu tro is m ille tro is cen ts l ivres . M . de Cadillac , aquatreheures apres midi , hier , avait perdu cen t soixan te l ouis avan t minu it
,ilen gagn ait cen t .
Ou d it que cc sera le j our des Ro is que cela sera beau . Pour 111 0 1, j e j oue aux c in q solsle tri aux tren te sols le piquet , aux petits écus a tourn er
De tout ce qui se m éle de gouvern emen t, Péan est le plus seusé . Pol i , honnete,obl igean t , b on usage de son bien la tete n e lui t ourne pas . Ilsaisira 11 11 b on av is quevous ou mo i ouvr iron s, et le fera passer , s
’
ilpen t . Parlez-lui d’
avan ce des mauvaisespeaux de chevreu i l .
Un e lettre n’
est jamais longue, men cher Cheval ier , que par les inutilités . Iln ’
y e11
a po in t dans les v 6tres . .I e regrette fort Mme de
1 6 L ’ABBE CASGRAI N
V o tre pet it Johan ne 1
, hard i j oueu r , gagn e de trois a quatre cen ts lou is 11 j oue des
cen t lou is par c oup de dés
Vous pourriez trouver mes lettres longues, d’
apres ma defin it ion ,v u les inut il ités
b ien etrangeres au serv ice mais men bavardage vous prouve ma satisfact ion 5 m ’
en treten ir avec quelqu
’
un sur 1 amitié duquel j e c ompte autan t .
”
Le 30 décembre . Touj ours gros j eu . L’
I n t endan t hier et avan t-hier ayait perdu
quatre cen t c inquan te 10 11 18 . 11 a t an t6t fa1t nu seu l c oup 0 11 11 y avai t six cen t c in quan telou is de la perte a11 gain . Johann e a perdu cc 8 0 11 tro is cen ts 10 11 1s . E nfin
, l’
In tendan t ,
ayan t le carn et 0 11 les cartes ala main,est quelquefo is effrayé et refuse . M . de Sel les
gagne O
de c in q a six cen ts 10 11 18 , mais 11 combat en c ore .
”
Le 4 janvier 1 75 8 . Je n‘
ai rien av ous écrire,men cher Cheval ier , et Roquemaure
est en état de y ous ren dre c ompte de ma v ie 11nie , des plaisirs de Québec e t de ceux quise préparen t pour diman che . Jamais la rue Quincampois n
’
a produit autan t de chan
gemen t dan s les fortunes. Bougain vflle se rattrape, de Sel les dec l in e, l’
Iutendan t perd ,Cadillac repren d le ton , de Bréau est n oyé (ce 11 0 111 est heureux pour aimer 1e j eu ) , Marinc on t inue aj ouer et perd les pet its pon tes se remplumaien t hier ; Sain t-Vincen t et Belo tperden t
,Bonn eau real ise . Vo tre pet it ami, J ohann e , avait gagn é c inq cen ts 10 11 15 , mais 11
voulait en av o ir mi lle ; 1e po t a11 lait a verse. Le ton de décence , de po l itesse de so c iété ,est bann i de la maison 0 11 11 devai t etre. .Te crain s d ’
etre oblige, ay an t 1a fin da carnaval ,de pun ir quelque j oueur qui aura onblié que son camarade a11 j eu est l ’homme da ro i .Auss1, j e 11 e vais plus chez 1
’
I n t enda11 t que le matin 0 11 a n j our de la semain e avec lesdames , 0 11 dans des grandes o c casions . C
’
est vous écr ire pour avo ir oc casion de vousren ouveler les assuran ces de la ten dre am i tié que j e v ous ai vouée pour t ouj ou rs , mon
cher Cheval ier .
Toute la correspondan ce de Mon tcalm avec Levis témoigne d’
une amitié vraimen t
extraordinaire en tre ces deux hommes celle de Mon tcalm allai t j usqu’
a 1a ten dresse . Il
avait beso in de 1’expr1me1 , et 11 trouvait des tournu res ingén ieuses et Charman tes pour la
d ire, c omme dan s ces fin s de lettres par exempleOu n e peut vous aimer plus tendremen t , men cher Cheval ier .
.I e suis eloquen t quand j e parle de quelqu’
un que j’
est ime et que j’
aime autan t que
vousOh n o peut y ous etre plus dévoué et plus ten dremen t que le meil leur de v os amisA imez -mo i autan t que j e v ous aime, men cher cheval ier , et j e n
’
aa rai rien a désirer .
Les répon ses da Cheval ier de Levis, que celu i-ci a c onservées , me ren fermen t pas
d’
expression s aussi chaleureuses . Son am it ié était peut-etre aussi sol ide,"
mais mo insexpan sive . C
’
é tait 11 11 esprit plus froid , plus réfléch i, qui s’
ob serv ait davan tage , et qui n ese l ivrait pas avec autan t d’
ab andon .
Place en tre Vaudreu il et Mon tcalm ,11 savait mén ager sa position avec une singuli ere
hab i leté . Des les prem iers temps , 11 avait dev in é que Mon tcalm jalousait le gouverneur ,et 11 mettait 11 11 tact rare ame pas blesser sa susceptibi lité , sans toutefois se compromettreVis-a-Vis de Vaudreu i l
,avec qui 11 fut touj ours e1 1 bon s termes .
.I e dois me pas y ous la isser 1g11 0 1 er,'
écrit -ila11 maréchal de Mirepo ix, la c ondu iteque j
’
ob serv e. .I e su is fort bien avec M. le marqu is de Vaudreu il j’
y serais en c ore m ieu x
1 Joannés, aide-maj o r du regiment de Languedoc.
MONTCALM PE INTPAR LUI-MEME 1 7
si j e voulais, mais j e me me soueie pas d’
av oir plus de part que j e n’
en ai a sa confian ce,
parce que M . de Mon tcalm eu serait jal oux, et que cela ferai t des tracasseries , chose que
j’
év it erai toute ma v ie avec grand so inCe fu t 11 11 grand malheur que Mon t calm me c ompri t pas cet te 10 90 11 in direc te si del i
cat emen t donn ée par celui qu’i l regardait c omme son me illeur ami . L111 qu i répétait sans
cesse a cet ami qu’
ils 11 e devaien t touj ours avo ir 11 em: deux qu’
un seul et meme avis,pou rquo i n e su ivait-ilpo in t celu i-la
,le plus importan t de tous ? Qui peu t dire les
consequen ces qui en seraien t résultéesLe sage Levis avait taut 5 0 11 311 1 la fin de ces querelles qu
’i l aurait 17 0 11 111 y vo irin terven ir 1e 1 0 1. I I 1
’
1n sin 11 e avec son tact ordinaire dan s un e lettre a11 marqu is dePaulmy , seerét aire d
’
E tat a11 m in ist ere de la guerre. Quan d 0 11 est aussi é loign é , d i t-il,ilfaut touj ours etre d’
ac co rd avec tout 1e m onde , lever les difficult és et n’
a.v oir a cceur
que le bien da maitre.
“
Je me condu is sur ces prin c ipes, d on t j e ne m’
écarterai jamais . Je vous suppl ied
’
en etre bien persuade et d’
en assurer Se Maj este’
En adm iran t cette grande sagesse, ilme fau t pas cro ire cependan t que Levis ait
échappé en t iéremen t a 1’
esprit frivo le de son s1eele . 11 é crit a sa pro tectri ce la maré ohale
de Mirepo ixA l ’egard da mariage que le Cheval ier de Mesn on y ous a propose, y ous savez que
je n’
ai jamais e11 beaucoup de gout pour me mar ier, dan s la crain te de prendre 11 n e femme
qu i n e v ous fut pas agréab le , ce qui ferait le malheur de ma v ie .
“
S’
ils’
en trouvait un e don t vous fissiez cho ix , j e la prendrais v olon tiers , des que
j e serais assure qu’
el le v ous c onv ien drait . A in si vous pouvez faire la répon se que vousdésirez aM . 1e cheval ier de Mesnon , a qui j e su is touj ours b ien oblige de son souven ir etde 1
’
amitié qu’
il me témo ign e . Si cette afiaire n’
a pas l ieu et que v ous trouviez quelqueau tre parti qui y ous c onvienn e, v 0 11 s pourrez en disposer de meme j e t iendrai t ous lesengagemen ts que vous aurez pris .
C’
est tout ce que j e peux av oir'
l’honn eur de vous mander a ce sujet , e11 v ous prian tde faire atten t ion que j e voudrais trouver 11 11 e femme qui v ous fut aussi attachée que jeVous 1e
I 1 parait que n ous al lons etre V ivemen t attaqu és. Mon av is sera de n ous battre
j n squ a extinct i on 3
Singul ier mélange de fol ie et d’
h éro1sme ! 11 croit marcher ala mort’
mais eu atten
dan t , mariez-mo i a qui y ou s v oudrez 1Mon tcalm lui é crit i “
Le 9 janv ier 1 75 8 . Gran d souper au palais , j’
y eus c omme
de raison la feve , et Mme Péan fut ma rein e . A11 reste j e me suis retirea t1 11 e heu re, 10 11de vo ir autan t j ouer et b erlander. J
’
igne1°
e les destin s des j oueu rs . Je c ompte (in ter nos)y etre pour un e qu in zaine de 10 11 18 ; 11 y a des so c iétés qn
’
on me peut refuser . Le souper
(pou r y ous seul ) de quatre-vingts personn es , fro id ala glace , serv i amei lleure heure la
gaieté de la fin du repas da t on de la tavern e, et le gros j eu 1’o c cupati on ,
le métierVous voyez que, si j
’
é cris ma] , j’
écris beau c oup
1 Lett re au maréchalde Mi repoix, le 4 sept. 1 75 7 .
2 Lett re de M. le ma rquis dePaulmy, le 20 j uin 1 75 73 Lett re d Mmela maréchale d
_e Mi repoix, le 17 mai 1 759 .
See. I , 1889 . 3.
1 8 L’ABBE CASGRAIN
Le 1 1 j anv18 1 . Touj ours du j eu J ohanne perd gros da sien et s’
arré te Be lotet Sain t-Vin cen t s ’
écrasen t ; Marin me trouve plus de préteurs Bougain ville pou rrait biense remb ourb er de cc 8 0 11 ; les Berry remon ten t et gagn en t ; l
’
In tendan t c ourt apres sonargen t , et m o i aprés 18 sommei l , que j e n
’
ai pas 1 men ordin aire . Je mange trop, j e digeremalet j e n e fais au cun exerc ice d’
aucun e espece , j e vous jure . Bourlamaque passe sa Vie
dan s la rue da Parl o ir , a11 fond du cul-de-sac . J’
en fais au tan t,mais c ’
est al’en trée .
Mme Péan in quiete de sa petite fille j e pense que ce n’
est r ien , au m o in s hier 11 n ’
y avait
qu’
a ne fiév ro te de
L8 13 janv ier . Je vous renvo ie 11 11 8 lettre de M. 18 marquis de Vaudreu il , quiy ous prouvera que vous me serez pas c onsu lté da ten t
,on j e serais b ien su rpris . Vous
pouvez me la renv oyer on me la garder . Quan t a 1110 1, 0 11 111 8 la c ommun iquera parman iere d’
acquit , 0 11 po in t da t out . B isogna dz'
compatire, camJe su is touj ou rs b ien aise d’
av oir écrit aM . de Vaudreui l . Ilau ra v u qu’
au m o in s
j e m’
apereois des man quemen ts da sieur Merc ier , qui cro it faire sa 0 0 11 1 8 11 111 8 manquan t .
Quelles dames chez M . 18 marqu is de Vaudreuil ? Voyon s S1 38 devin erai .Quatre Desch amb eau ,
Mme Baran te et Mme de Vaudreuil , six eu tout et tren te-quatrehommes .
Longueil a 8 11 11 11 coup de sang man que ; mais 11 v a bienD e la facon don t l’In tendan t m ’
a parle, n ous auron s bals et , j e pense, pharaon ;11 s
’
autorisera de Montreal .L8 1 6 janv ier. —
.Te me su is fait saigner avan t -hier, mon cher Cheval ier ; hier l emet ique, deux lavemen ts et de l’hu ile d
’
amande deu ce. Oela s’
appelle done 11 11 8 earene
Adieu ,mon cher cheval ier, n e doutez pas de ma sin cere am itié .
P. S. Tous écrasés , meme Lestang ,de Sel les ; 18 sea l Cad i llac gagne mi lle 10 1118 .
L8 1 8 janv ier .
—.Te do is quelques répon ses de bonn e ann ée, men cher Cheval ier
,
ne fut -ce qu’
aMme de Vil l iers, que j’
honore fort , aVil lars , Corm ier, Bellec ombe ; meis jeme trouve trop fatigue pour leur repondre, ce c ourrier . Mes fortes evacuation s m ’on t
fat igue; j’
en avais gran d besoin . Je digere 11181 et j e suis dan s 11 11 pays 8 maldigérer ;ear tout impat ien te quand on est
L8 2 0 janvier .— Le retour des Hurons qui out men é Schuyler et Martin don n e l ieu
ade gran ds raison nemen ts dan s 11 11 8 v il le 0 11 les plus pet ites n ouvel les s’
amplifien t , 0 11
1’
0 n passe de la plus gran de confiance ala plus grande crain te , et 0 111 tout 18 monde est
general d’
armée . Pour mo i , j’
at tends de v os nouvelles , (18 0 8 118 8 da marquis de Vaudreu ilet (111 réeit que Langy v ous aura
L8 22 janv ier . J ’
ai été hier v o ir 8 11 gran de cérémon ie 1a gen t huronn e aLorette .
L8 j our était b ien beau . I I a fal lu se rendre a l’
empressemen t des m iss ionn aires et des
sauvages ; et dites, men cher Cheval ier, que j e vous ai charge de remerc ier 18 P. Sain t-Pédes pol itesses que _j
’
a1 recues a Lorette des j ésuites.
Grand b al0 8 8 0 11 chez I ’
In t endan t ; gros j eu ,cela v a san s dire . Ma san té
P. S Les n ouvelles de la 11 t1 it sen t mauvaises pour l’
In tendan t . Mme Péan ,
Lestang, J ohan n e b on n es pour Cad il lac , Bougainvil le , de Braux ; 18 reste 11 8 vaut pas lapein e d ’
etre 11 0mmé , quoiqu’
ily ait des ac teurs qu i gagnen t 0 11 perden t cen t on cen tc inquan te lou is ; mais, pour qu
’on parle de y ous, 11 faut etre homme aperdre trois 0 11
quatre cents lou is .
”
2 0 L ’ABBE 11 -11. CASGRAI N
Mon t calm et ses officiers eussen t expose leur v ie pour arret er le désordre, illui étaitimpossible de faire arriver la v érité al’oreille de 8 8 8 adversaires . Le trag ique évén emen t
était trop réeen t pour qu’il pnt etre jugé avec sang fro id .
Mon tcalm y fait al lusi on dan s la lettre suivan te adressée a sa femme
L8 1 9 fév r18 1 . Je 11 8 puis vous rien pron ostiquer sur la campagne, les v ivres ,18 b ien ou 18 malj oué des enn emis qui peuven t et do iven t n ous pr imer . J8 8 11 18 10 1
depuis 18 1 5 septembre j e pars demain p our Mon treal , et j usqu’
a ee que j e me porte 8 11 1
quelque fron t iere . J ’
augure de ma bonne fortun e que la campagn e tournera b ien .
Quand n ous 11 8 feri ons qu’
an e defen sive, pou rvu qu’
elle arrete 1’
8 nn emy, elle n e sera passan s mérite ; n ous n ous 8 0mmes é crit avec Mylord Lon don 8 11 1 la capitu lat ion da F ortGeorges . C
’
est nu pre ces qui se traite a coups de plume,en atten dan t de tra iter quelque
in c iden t a c oup d’
épée, de fusi l .”
Ce coup d’
épée. ce fut celu i de Carillon .
Mon t calm con tinue dans la meme lettreJ
’
av ais été oe pr in temps chan ter 1a guerre , et fest in er mes en fan s, les I roquois, lesAlgonqu in s et les Nipissings . J
’
ai été eet hiver faire meme cérémon ie chez les Huron s ,et 8 8 prin temps j
’irai chez les Aben ak is . Ces sauvages m’
aimen t beau c oup 8 11 Vér ité j eleur trouve plus de vérité, de fran chise souven t qu
’
a cenx qui se piquen t de po l ices.
Malgré la m isere publ ique , des bals 81: an j euAd ieu ,
men cceur, j e t’
adore . Je soupire apres la paix et t oi . M1118 choses ama
mere . J ’
e111b rasse mes en fan ts, et 11 me tarde de ret ourn er dan s 18 sein de la
Apres la bri l lan te campagne de 1 75 8 , Mon t calm V in t repren dre 8 8 8 quartiers d’hiver
1 Quebec . I 1 occupait , 8 11 1 18 8 remparts, 11 11 8 maison faisan t face ala Can ard iere . Cette
residen ce lui plaisai t , parce qu’i l y j ou issait d
’
un e magn ifique V11 8 de la yallée du Sain tCharles 8 1:de la eé te de Beaupré .
Sa c orresp on dan ce avec Levis se con t inueL8 2 1 décembre. affaires, 0 11 , pour m ieux d ire, pet ites tracasseries cou
ran tes son t1 — A ltercati on en tre 18 P. Roub aud et M . de Mat t issart 1 8 11 1 des graces achetées
par les Jesu ites , et les habitan ts refusen t de remettre par 1’obl igati on de n ourrir 18 so ldat .
Le fon d de la questi on regarde M . 18 marqu is de Vaudreu i l .J
’
ai é crit au pere pour l’
apaiser sur la forme, et aMat issart 8 11 1 18 8 égards dus.
2 — Les plain tes de 1’
h6tesse de M . de Bo isset , su ite da petit in t éré t de la b o issono c casionn ée par un e v isite da Cheval ier de La Corn e , qui 8 11 a été tém o in ,
et qui se plaitassez dan s le désordre pour s
’
en etreLes prem iers j ours de l
’
ann ée 1 759 , furen t s ign alés par 11 1 1 soulev emen t populaire qu in
’
at tendait qu’
un e o c casion pou r éc later . La patien ce da peuple étai t ab out . D éj a 0 11 a
en ten du Mon t calm j ust ifier la defiance publ iq ue dan s un e autre o c casion : cel le 0 11 18 8
soldats avaien t été 8 11 0 1188 1 l’in sub ordinat ion . L’
irritat ion da peuple avait t ouj ours été
1 Capi taine au regimen t de Languedoc.
MONTCALM FE IN'I ‘PAR LU I -MEME 2 1
depu is 8 11 s’
accroissan t , et ent dit qu e l’
aristoerat ie 0 117118 et m i l itaire avai t pris atachedela fomen ter 8 11 1111 donn an t j ournellemen t 18 spectac le des réj ou issan ces s can daleuses , d11
j eu effroyable et (18 8 8 11 0 88 de t ou t gen re auxquels 8 118 8 8 livrait . A 11 18 8 11 1 8 que la m isere
publ ique augmen tai t , ces plaisirs e t ces désordres deven aien t plus effrén és . E 11 vain 1aVoix de I ’
Eglise s’
é tait fait en tendre,8 11 vain l ’eveque de Québec avait ton ne du haut de
la ehaire et publié des man demen ts pour exho rter tout le mon de adétourn er la 8 0 181 8 da
cie l par nu retour ade 111 8 1118 11 1 8 sen timen ts . Sa vo i x s’
était perdue dan s le tourbillondes fetes . D 11 m oin s, 8 8 8 exhortation s avaien t-elles 8 11 pour effet d
’
enhardir le peuple .
Une ordon n an ce de l’In t endan t , an n oncan t 11 11 8 n ouvelle reduction dan s la distrib u '
tion des V ivres, acheva d’
exaspérer 1a popu lation . Les hommes n’
osan t 8 8 mettre eu
émeute dan s 18 8 1 11 8 8 0 11 118 au raien t été immédiatemen t balayés par les troupes qui rem
pl issaien t la v i lle, engageren t leurs femmes a faire 11 11 8 demon stration publique ; quatrecen ts de ces femmes V in ren t 8 11 tumu lte assiéger le palais de 1
’
In tendan t , et lui firen t
en tendre des men aces 8 1 form idables qu’il 8 11 fut in timidé et ret ira 8 0 11 ordonn an ce.
Mon tcalm 8 11 d it 11 11 met a 8 0 11 ami dan s le passage su ivan t :L8 4 janvier 1 75 9 . D ieu fait bien tou t ce qu
’il fait, le c on traire de Mon treal ;nullité dan s ma personn e, tan t m ieux .
La m isere excessive ici ; l’In t endan t v oulait n ous mettre a11 quarteron ; quatrecen ts femmes 1
’
on t fait trembler hier 11 a eédé ala dem i - l ivre.
Eu en tran t dan s cette ann ée de 1 75 9 , q 111 8’
ann 0 nea1t 8 1 men aeau te , Mon tcalm fu t prisd’
une immense t ristesse, c omme avait 8 11 18 pressen timen t de sa m ort prochain e .
Ah ! s’
éerie-t -ildan s l’extrai t qu’on v a lire , que j e v o is 11 0 11 !
La su ite de sa c orrespondan ce c on t ien t d’
autres expressi ons qui indiquen t les sombrespen sées den t 8 0 11 esprit était obsédé .
Souvenez-v ous que , faute de V ivres , t rois aquatre mi lle hommes aCaril lon a11 plusala fin de may La paix , ou tout ira mal. 1 75 9 sera pis que 1 75 8 . Je me sais c ommen t
n ous feron s . Ah ! que j e 17 0 18 110 11 ! M . de Vaudreuil, et 11 11 peu l’
I n t endan t , attenden tdes miracles . 11 8 vous écrirai exactemen t . M8 8 v ceux, mes sen t imen ts 8 0 11 t et seron ttouj ours san s b ornes , men cher chevalier, dan s cette n ouvelle ann ée et su ivan te .
”
L8 6 janv ier . Bougainv ille s’
est raeeroch é , gagne et croit av o ir plus de c on duite
que Sain t-Vin cen t , Belo t , J ohann e, Marin,et c . Je n e le pense pas ; avec de l
’
esprit et da
talen t , c’
est , c omme vous le d ites, quelquefo is 11 118 tete .
Demain , grand souper et dames .
Mardi, l’
In t endan t , chez m o i jeud i , m on seign eur . Je soutiens n oblesse et d ign ité ;mais j e mange mon b ien , et j e frémis pour l
’
aven ir . D 11 1 8 1 avr il 175 6 an 1 8 1 janv ier 1 75 8 ,c in quante sept m il le l ivres d
’
argen t see dépen se. Rt 8 1 j ’
ay ais 8 11 quelques prov isions .
Que faire 0 8 1111 qui est dan s ma place do it faire ainsi . Nous 8 11 faison s tous trop pourles c irc onstan ces .
Rigaud n ous a é crit des lettres 8 11 style bad in et n oble , capable de faire 0 1 0 11 8 a
qui les l irai t que e’
est 11 11 homme de beauc oup d’
esprit .
N8 doutez pas, mon cher Chevalier, de ma tendre et inv io lable am i tié .
”
L8 8 jan v ier . Hier grand b al; j’
y ai resté j usqu’
a 11 11 8 heu re . Je suis beau c oupplus cette ann ée de la c our de Mme Péan ; cela prouve le déseeuv remen t . Ma san té a.
beso in de mén agemen t .
L8 1 2 janv ier . L’
aven ture de la Bel le-R1V1ere me fache nu peu ; j e n e la vou lais
2 2 L’ABBE 11 -11 . CASGRAIN
qu’au printemps . E118 n ’a pas 8 111p80 118 11 18 1 11 11 8 j ol ie fé te dol1 t j 8 11 etais pas prié ; et , 8 1
1’
0 n di t 8 Mon tréalq 11 8 j’
y 8 1 818 0 11 masque , di tes que j e 11 8 111 8 masque jamais . 0 epel1
dan t j’
y étai s avec 18 plus 30 11 0 1110 18 1 de 18 8 8 1 1 8 q 11 8 p11 i sse VO11 . J8 vo11 s jure que
VO11 S lui donneriez 18 13 1 8181 8 11 0 8 8 11 1 18 N8 11d181 8 . M8 18
L8 m18 81 8 est g1 8 nd8 . Je sui s de votre 8V18 : nourri r 18 p8 11p18 8 v an t de songer
8 8 11 t 1 8 1 8 11 campagne . 11 8 11 1 8 11 11 qu ’on 11 8 nous consulte pas ! D 8 VO11 S 8 moi , 8V8 11 t
mon d8p8 1 t , j 8 0 0 11 0 1u1 8 1 8V8 0 0 adet po11 r 18 V111 pour nos 0 1110 18 1 8 ; 111 8 18 mot 8 p8 1 8 0 11 11 8 .
0 8 8 8 1 8 11 11 bon service 8 nos troupes .
Nous 111 8d1to11 8 11 11 8 grande f8 t 8,pour je11di p1 0 0 11 8 1n ,
8V8 0 R0 q 11 8 111 8 u1 8 , qu1 8 8 1 8
8 11 1 8 0 11 compte , 0 11 18 8 8 1 8 1 (18 h 8 8 8 1d . M8 8 8 1118 11 18 1 8p 1 8 nd . 1 8 suis 1nq1118 t pour
d11 Verny .
Adieu ,1110 11 0 118 1 0 11 8V8 118 1 ; 8 111 11 8 8 2 -1 portez-v o11 s bien , aimez -moi 8 11 t 8 11 t que
j e VO11 S aime . M8 18 0 0 1110 118 Vient de 0 8 que j’
8 1 trop de let tres 8 8 0 1 11 8
L8 1 7 j 8 11V18 1 .— Bo11 1 18 11 18 q11 8 est tri ste . 138 1118 111 , g1 8 11d8 partie de 0 8mp8 g11 8 ,
c in quante -deux p8 1 8 0 11 11 8 8 piq 11 8-l1 iq 11 e ; Roquemaure , Mme Gauthier
,Mme de L8 Nau
d181 8 0 11 t tout 8 1 1 8 11 gé . J ’en 8 11 18 0 11 8 mis, 0 11 8 0 0mpt8 8 11 1 moi ; 38 11 8 puis 38 111 8 18
8 t 1 8 u 11 homme 0 10 111 8 11 8 . A.ussi j 8 f0 11 1 n 18 1’
11111 111 111 8 t 10 11 , V10 10 n s orgeat , b 181 8 , partie
da V111 8 t (18 quoi faire vingt- six plats 8 11 1 soixante-six qu ’i l y 8 11 1 8 a deux tables servies
8g8 18m8n t 8 11 ambigu . 0 8 détai l pour 1 0 11 8 8 8 11 1 '
111 8 18 , comme M0 11 t 1 88 1 est 1’
80 11 0 d8
Québec,0 11 1111 8 : M . de Montcalm donne 18 1818 . L8 0 11 8V8 118 1 1 8po11 d1 8 : Non
, c’est
11 11 pi que-nique ; c’est 18 répéti tion (18 0 8 111 1 de 18 S8 i11 t e-0 8 th 8 1 1118 ; 0 11 y 8 111 18 M . de
Montcalm . J8 0 1 0 18 10 18 11 que , noble et g8 18 11 t comme 11 est , 11 8 11 1 8 8 11pp188 8 tout 0 8 qui
aurait p11 8mb 8 1 1 8 8 8 8 1 18 soci été q 11 1 P8 11 8 111 18 , 8 t f0 11 1 n 1 par 18 p111 8 que les 8 11 tres .”
L’
In tendan t 8 11 8 11 8 11 fa i t 11 11 , 111 0 111 8 8 1 1 8 11g8 que 0 8 111 1 de demain,j eudi d8 1 1118 1 . Les
dames de 18 SoCié t é P88 11 , 8 11 8 0 q 11 1 j e suis trés intimement , 8 11 méditent 11 11 pour jeudi
d’
8 11 8 11 1t 8 .
Dites 8 Poucho t 8 1; f8 ites 80 1 11 8 par 0 ormier 8 Fontbonne et 18 Pause qu ’i l me
pre11 d 11 11 ennui d ’écrire lettres de bonne 8 11 11 88 . 0 8 so11 t tous trois 111 8 8 8mis ; j e suis
18 l eur ; j’aime 11118 11 11 11 8 pas 1 8p0 11 d1 8 8 111 8 8 8 111 18 que manquer aux indifférents . D
’
8 11
18 1118 , (1138 8 11 0 11 8 8 8 fai te s par VO11 S , 1110 11 cher cheval ier, Vale11 t 111 18 11 1: qu’
un e 1118 11V8 18 8
lettre. Soyez 8 11 t8 nt de mes amis que j e suis des V6t1 8 8 , 8 t j
’
y
L8 22 j anvier . J8 0 h 8 1 0 h 8 8 111 8 1 18 temps et 8 m ’
8mu 8 8 1 . L8 p8 1'
t18 de 0 8mp8 gn8
8 été 8 11 111 18 11 1: 38 10 11 8 88 . 0 11 8 fort approuvé 18 refus to t 8 1 des momon s . H ier 8 11 8 0 11 ,grand (1111 8 1 8 1; souper 8 1
’
111 18 11d8 11 0 8 ; j’
y donn 8 1, 18 j ournée , 8 8 8 8 1 d’un 0 8V8 gn0 18 18 8 0 1-1 ,
0 11 0 adil lac 8 t moi
11 8 pen t VO11 S 8 1111 8 1 plus Véritablement et plus tendrement , 111 0 11 cher
0 11 8V8 118 1 .
”
J8 0 1 0 18 p8 1 111 18 3 111 8 1 8 . P8rt ir plus 161 n ’
efit pas 0 0 11V8 11 11 ; m 8 is , 0 11 18 8 0 110 8 8 8
0 h 8 11g8 1 8 18 n t bien ,0 11 38 11 8 0 1 0 18 pas que Québec me p0 8 8 8d8 l
’
hiv er prochain , 8 1 18 malheur
8’
0 b 8 11n8 8 nous 1 8 158 11 11 8 11 Canada. 0 11 8 8 divertit,on 11 8 songe 8 rien , t 0 11 t V8 8 t 11 8
an di able .
MO11 8mi t1 8 pour VO11 8 est 8 8 11 8 hom es .
L8 30 j 8 nV18 1 .
— VO11 S 8t 8 8 fai t pour plaire , po11 r aimer , 811 8 aimé 8 t 8t 1 8 heureux ;1118 18 V0 u8 11 8 18 8 8 1 8 2 jamais 8 11 t 8 11 t de personne que d11 meill eur de vos 8 11118 , 8 t votre
amitié me dédommager8 C18 - to11 t . Que fero11 s-11 0 11 8 , 18 0 8mp 8 gn8 proc11 aine E118 8 8 1 8
MONTCALM PE INTPAR LUI-MEME 2 8
ép1n 8 11 8 8 . Nous 8 g11 0 11 8 d’
8 0 0 0 1 d, pour 18 m18 11 1 ,8 13
,(18 11 8 un 1118 1118 11 1 g8n81 8 1 qu
’il 18 11 1
8viter, 11 0 11 8 nous 111 8 1 0 11 8 d’
8 fl8 11 8 .
L8 2 fév rier . Qui diable 8 8 11; 0 11 tout 8 11 8 8 1 8 8 11 1 8 1 11 0V8 111b 1 8 1 75 9 ? Sans
111 8 (180 0 11 1 8 g8 1 , j 8 redoute ce tte 0 8 1np8 g11 8 .
”
L8 5 février . Quand est- ce que 18 p1ece que nous j ouons 8 11 Can ada 111111 8
L8 9 févr ier . Je prév ois 8 17 8 0 do11 le 11 r 18 8 (111110 1111388 de 18 0 8mp8 g11 8 p1 0 0 h 8 111 8 ,8 t 38 0 1 0 18 qu ’on y 8 11 51 8 1 8 8 11 0 0 1 8 18 rd. Dieu 8 11 1 tout 10 1 j 8 v égé te , et so it ennui , 11180 0 11
t en t emen t , difficultés de 18 0 8mp8 gn 8 p1 0 0 11 8 111 8 , j e n’
y 8 1 pas 8 11 18 11 1: de sati sfaction que
1’
11 1V8 1 d8 1 11 18 1 . A11 plais ir prés de VO11 8 17 0 11 , m0 11 0 h 8 1 0 11 8 11 8 118 1 , 38 0 1 0 18 que j e m’en
nu18 1 8 18 a11 t8 11 t 8
B0 11 1 18 1118 q 11 8 reprend bien 0 8 11 18 8 6 1111318 , et 8 8 13 plus 51 8 1 ; po11 r lui , 8’
8 11 t 8 11d, qui
est naturel lement t1i ste . Aimez -moi 8 utan t que j e VO11 S 8 1111 8 , 8 t 38 18 1 1181 118 p8 1 1’
8 111 1t18
111V10 18 b 18 (111 8 j 8 VOU S 8 1 Vouée pour toujours
D1m 8 n 0 11 8 , b 8 1 8 1’
1n t end8 11 0 8 , 8 t de gros 111 0 111 0 11 8 sfiremen t .
L8 1 5 18V1 18 1 .
— R18 n (18 n 0 11V88 11 , 1110 11 0 118 1 0 11 8V8 118 1 ; 18 8 1118 18 11 8 8 1’
0 1‘d1n 8 11 8 ;
(18 11 1 b 8 18 encore ; 111 8 v ie accoutumée entre les m8 18 0 11 8 P88 11 et L8 N8 11d181 8 ; b 8 8 11 0 0 11p
(18 tr8 nq11 1111t8 d8l1 s 18 t é t e et 18
L8 1 7 1817 1 18 1 . 0 0 1111118 0 8 1 18 111 8 1118 111, 1110 11 0 h 8 1 0 11 8V8 118 1 , mes de11 x 8 ides de 0 8 111pvous font leur 0 0 11 1 , j e vous prie leur (111 8 q 11 8 j
’
ai 1 8 011 leurs de11 x 18 t 11 8 8 , q 11’
11 11 8
gr8 ude p8 resse 110 11 1 80 111 8 pris , que 38 18 8 8 11 1 8 111 8 1 0 18 8 1 que j e n e leur 1 8p0 n (18 pas .
M8 8 1 8118 1 10 11 8 8 11 1 18 8 (18 1 11 181 8 8 nouvelles sont : 18 8 p8 ys h 8 11 t perd11 s . 0 h 0 11 8 gu8 11
rétabl i, M. de Vaudreuil 8 11110 1 111 1 par 18 d8 0 18 1 8 t 10 11 V1 8 18 0 11 18 11 8 8 8 (18 8 H0 118 11d8 18 8 11 1 18
parti e de Québec , 8 t 8 8 11 8 17 117 1 8 8 pour 8 118 1 8 0 8 1 1110 11
L8 24 fév rier. D’
8 p1 88 18 8 conseil s 8 8 11V8 g8 8 , 38 18 8 VO18 accommodés, 8 1 18 8 pays
d ’en haut perd11 s , mais (18 8 millions dépensés , soit 18 , 8 11 Détroit , 0 11 8 11 A0 8 d18, 8 8 11 8
1180 8 8 8118 .
N11 18 v iv res po11 r entrer 8 11 0 8mp 8 gn8 . L’
8 11 11 88 d8 1 1118 1 8, 11 11 tiers (18 8 terres n 8 fut
pas 8 11 8 8 111 8 110 8 ; cette 8 11 11 88 -0 1, 11 y 8 11 8 11 1 8 moitié . Les bmufs 8 18 0 h 8 1 1'11 8 enl evés ;
qu8 tre 8 cinq cents quarts de b 08 11 f q 11’
0 n 8 8 18 pour atten dre 18 lard de France . L8 0 0 10 1118
est perdue,8 1 18 paix 11
’
8 1 1 1V8 pas ; 38 11 8 VO18 1 18 11 qui p11 iss e 18 8 8 11 17 8 1 . 0 8 11 1 (111 1 18
gouvernent ont de 111 1 18 11 1 reproches 8 8 8 18 11 8 ; pour moi , j e 8 1 point 8 111 8 18 11 8 ;
j’
8 t t8 11d8 8 17 8 0 bien de 1’
1mp8 t18 n 0 8 18 8 n 0 11V8 118 8 de notre patrie ; Dieu Veuille qu’el les
8 0 18 11 t satisfaisantes
Nous 8VO11 S 8 11 11 18 1 11 11 bal , 11 1ardi 18 d8 1 1118 1 ; 8 1 11 8 croyez p8 8 que j e m’ama se
0 8 8 11 0 0 11p .
”
Les derniers bruits de f8t 8 8 , 80 h8 pp8 8 (111 pal8 is (18 1’
In t 8 11d8 n t,furent 0 0 11V8 1 t 8 p8 1 18
bruit (111 canon . 0 ette société insensée , qui , j 11 8 q11’
8 11 (18 1 11 18 1 moment,8V8 1t j eté 11 11
insolent défi 8 18 m18 81 8 publique , 8 118 1t 8 11 0 11 u11 terrible 1 8V8 11. Une bonne p8 1 t18 8 8
trouvait p8 11 de temps 8 p1 88 8 bord (18 l’
Augusle, 0 11 8 118 8 8 1ivrait 8 11 111 8 111 8 dévergondage,
10 1 8 q 11 8 18 navire fut j eté 8 18 0 6t 8 sur d11 0 8 p-Breton . L
’
un (18 8 sept survivants, 18
0 11 8V8 118 1 de 18 0 0 1 11 8,8 raconté 18 8 d8 1 11181 8 8 8 0 811 8 8 de cet épouvantable 11 8 11 11 8 g 8 Que
de v ceux 8 11 0 18 1, -1-11,que (18 promesses 18 dir8 i-j 8 combien de p8 1j 11 1 8 8
L8 fio t te de Wolfe 1 8 111 0 11 t 8 1t 18 S8 1n t -L8 11 1 8 n t , 10 1 8 q 11 8 M0 11 t 0 8 1111 écrivait 8 L8V18
L8 25 may .
— J’
8 1 8 110 0 1 8 moin s de temps , 1110 11 cher 0 h 8V8 118 1 , pour 80 1 11 8 , depuis
1’
8 1 1 1v 88 (18 M . 18 marqui s (18 Vaud1 8 11 11 0 8 1 11 f8 ut 1111 18 11 8 j ouer 18 1 618 de général . 1 8
2 4 L’ABBE CASGRAIN
111 1 8 8 1 8 de 8 8 0 1 818 11 8 8 1 de major . 11 1118 tarde (111 8 nous vous ayo11 s 8 1 de VO11 S
emb1 8 8 8 8 1 .
J8 17
0 11 8 embrasse . J’
8 1 1 8 011 , 38 0 1 0 18 , 11 0 18 cents 18 111 8 8 .
11 poin t d8 l1 s 18 cadre de 0 8 118 étude de 8 11 1V1‘8 MO11 10 8 111 1 (18 11 8 18 8 0 p81 8 110 11 8
d11 (18 Québec . 1 8 11 0 18 8 8 11 18 111 8 n 1 qu8 1q11 8 8 -11 11 8 8 de 8 8 8 d8 1 11 181 8 8 impressions .
L8 18 1 ju1118 t . Depuis 17 0 11 8 8 17 0 11 (111 1118 , 1 110 11 cher 0 h 8V8 118 1 , j e suis 8 che 17 al 8 1 38
0 0 11 1 8, 8 1 18 suis 8 111 8 17 8 de notre positi on , 8 11 1 18 q 11 8 118 38 17 0 11 8 conjure de réflé chir, 8 8 11 8
0 p1n 18 11 8 18 pour une p1 8m 18 1 8 opinion
J8 su i s Sfil’ que d8 111 8 111 VO11 8 serez 18 plume 8 18 m8 ir1 , 8 111 8 378 d11 d818 11 (18 8 gardes .11 f8 11 1 18 11 8 11 11 h 8 b 11 8 111V8 11 1 qui 8 8 1 0 0 11 1 18 . .1 8 17 0 11 8 80 1 18 8 17 8 0 0 11V8 1'111 1 8 ; j e
défére 17
010 11 118 1 8 8 17 0 11 8 8 17 18 ; mais t8 0 h 0 n 8 de avoir qu’
un ,mon cher chevalier .
L’
8m1118 et nous y doivent“ L8 5 j 11 i llet . 0 8 que VO11 S 18 118 8 , 111 0 11 cher 0 h 8V8 118 1 , 10 11j 0 11 18 11 88
bien . S’
il11 8 18 118 11 q 11 8 VO11 8 Vigil an ce pour 8 8 11V8 1 18 p 8 ys , 18 besogne 8 8 1 8 11 8 11 1 8 m 8 i s
11 18 11 1 8 11 11 8
A11 camp de Beauport, 18 9 j 11 1118 1 . Je suis pe1'8 11 8 d8, mon cher 0 h 8V8 118 1 , que 18
plus gr8 11d8 p8 1 118 de (18 8 ennemis 8 81 de 1 8 11 11 8 0 618 da 8 8 1111 . Nous n ’
8V0 n 8
que 11 0 18 11 8 1 118 8 prendre, 8 1 pourvu que 17 0 11 8 8 1 1110 1 soyons d ’accord , j e d818 1’
1111n 8 1 8 1 M.
18 111 8 11 111 18 de V8 11d1 8 11 11 8 celui que nous voudrons . Aprés quoi , 11 8 11 8 1 1 117 8 1 8 0 8 qu ’i l
p18 11 8 8 Dieu .
”
L8 1 1 j u1118 1 .
— M . 18 marquis de V8 11d1 8 11 11, 1110 11 cher 0 h 8 1 7 8 118 1 , 8 (111 amen 8 11 111 0 11
17 8 111 8 111 projeté, d’a11 tant que , (188 q 11
’
0 11 111 1 p8 1 18 de d818 1m111 8 110 11 8 lui
18 11 8 110 11 11111 da 18 11 . 11 n’
y 8 8 1 8 pas, 8 1 18 p180 8 8 11 8 8 1 8 plus 101 111118 8 11 bien on 8 11 111 8 1.
En c onséquence de 0 8 , tons 18 8 ordres 8 0 11 1 (10 11 11 88
L8 1 6 j uillet . — Ainsi que j e prévu , mo11 cher Chevalier, 11 18 1g1'8 18 8 1 8 18 0 11
n emen t s canadiens (18 Pouchot , 18 8 ennemis on t d8b 8 1 q 11 8 , 18 6 , 11 0 18 11 11118 hommes , 8 8 11 8
qu ’i l 8 0 11 (10 11 18 . 11 8 envoyé (18 8 courriers pour rappeler 8 0 11 8 1 111 88 (111 10 1 1 B 111
Quesne . V8 -1-8 11 1 7 0 11 , Jean , Viennent . 11 818 11 plus simple de 11 8 pas 18 8 y 18 11 8 8 118 1 .
J8 VO18 18 Canada 8 118 q 118 p8 1 8 111 endroits 18 8 8 1111 de Montmorency , 18 pointe de L817 1,0 8 1 1110 11 , 18 1818 (18 8 rapides , Ni8 gara, 18 fort M8 0h 8 u11. L8 b 8 1 ex-veto 8 1 11 0 11 8 8 11 Sa11v on s
11 118 partie 0 8 118 0 8 111p8 g11 8 .
”
L8 8 0 11 de 18 b 8 18 1118 de Montmorency (31 juil let ) , M0 n 10 8 1111 8 0 1 11
1 8 doute c1’
11ue 8 t t 8 qu8 pour 0 8 8 0 11 , 111 0 11 cher cheval ier . VO11 8 8 17 8 z R0 y8l-R0 u 8
8 1110 11 8 portée de vous ; Guyenne 17 8 b 18 n161 8’
8b 1 8 n18 1 pour 1 8 18 17 8 1 18 tranchée 8 111 8 1
VO11 S 8 11 1 18 2 d8 n 8 18 moment assez de troupes sous 18 main . VOS 17
0 10 11 18 11 8 8 8 8 1 0 11 1 8 11g
111 8 11188 dem8 111 8 17 8 0 P1118 8 11 . VO11 S 18 118 8 18 guerre 8 l’CBfl, 8 1 11 n’
y 8 1 18 11 de 11118 11 11 .
A 1 8 11 11 88 (18 18 11 11 11, nous 8 8 1 0 11 8 10 11 8 8 0 11 8 18 8 8 1 111 8 8 8 notre poste . 11 y 8 (1 11
mouvem en t (18 11 8 1’8 8 0 8 d1 8 V18 -8-V18 (18 nous . L8 d8m 0 11 811 8 110 11 qu’
118 ont 18 118 8 11 plein
j our 111 8 persuade que 0 8 8 8 1 8 18 18 11 8 8 8 8 118 q11 8 . Vous 8 vez 18 coup bon 8 1 0 8 qui
1 7 0 11 8 0 0 0 11 11 8 1 8 11 11 8 17 0 11 8 11 8 1 8 18 8 8 11 pas 0 0 11 8 1d81 8 b 18 , 11 f8 11d1 8 11, mon cher 0 h 8V8 118 1 , nous
18 11 8 8 1111 11 17 8 1 .
L8 8 0 1 8 111 18 8 qu’
inspirait 1’
8 nn emi (111 0 618 (111 18 0 0 11 18 1 10 , depuis 18 prise da fort
Niagar8 , 8 17 8 18 111 obl igé d’
en v oyer 18 Chevalier de L817 18 (18 n 8 18 gouvernement de M0 11 11 88 1.
Mon tc8 1m 111 1 80 1 11 de 18 maison de Salaberry, 0 11 11 V8 11 8 11 de 8’
818 b 111 de 8 8 personne (3
septembre ) ,“
11 0 11 1 811 8 , dit-il8 11 belle V11 8 8 1 8 portée de 10 11 1 .
MONTCALM PE INT PAR LULMEME 2 5
Le 8 septembre .
— Je garderai , mon cher Chevali er , votre lettre et in struction . Bene .Ils ’en faut bien que la campagne soit fin ie ici , depuis le départ da Sault . A in si au con
traire augmentation de batterie et de fen sur l a ville . Une petite escadre de vin gtb z
‘
at imen ts , cinquan te ou soixante berges , depuis trois jours , v is-é -v is Si ll ery et le cap
Rouge , Bougainvil le cétoyan t ; l a Iigne . ( tré s longue) H ier,sur les dix heure s du soir
,
démonstration d’
at taque cen t berges en batai lle é mi-chenal . J’
av oue que j e vous vou
drais i ci , et que j e voulais que M . le marquis de Vaudreui l vou s en en v oyé t un ordre con
dit ion nel, s’i l n ’
y avait r ien é craindre et que tout ffit bienJe vous v oudmis ic i pour cette épineuse queue j e crois £1 un e tentative quelque
Le 9 septembre . Voici un travai l $1 faire oilLa Pause peut vous servir d ’avance ,au cas 0 11 la colonie soit sauvée ; car elle me l est pas encore . N ’en écrivez rien au
marqui s de Vaudreuil , mai s £1 moi
En vérité, s’
iln ’
y a rien é crain dre pour votre partie , j’
aVoue mon cher Chevalier,que j e vous désirerais bien pour eelle- ci
,tout n ’est pas encore dit .
Enfin , le 1 1 septembre , l’avant-veillé d’
Ab rah am , Montcalm écrit é son cher ami ce
petit bil let qui renferme les derniers mots qu’il devai t lui adresser
Je réponds par celle-ci,mon cher Chevalier
, 5 1a lettre que vous m’
av ez écrite le 7 .
Je manquai le courrier par l a faute de M . de Sain t-Sauveur . Ri en de nouveau ici . L’
ar
tiole des Vivres , pain et Viande maism’
importe, l’
Anglois rest é t -ilj usqu’
au 1er novembre ,nous
Hélas ! le b réwe Montcalm n e s outin t pas . C’est s on frére d ’armes lui-méme qui v a
nous con ter ce désastre . Avec le tact et l a réserve qui le distinguaient , ils’est donn é
bien garde de blfimer son ami . Ils ’est conten té d’
exposer le s faits mai s ily a mis habi
lemen t son appréci ation s an s qu’el le y paraisse trop .
. . M. de Bougainvill e avait environ (leurs mille trois cents hommes non compris le ssauvages , et les meilleures troupes del’arme
’
e.
Pour 1a garnison de l a vi lle, on n
’
enfit aucz musage, de sorte que , l orsque tout fut
assemblé, ilme se trouva que trois mi lle cinq 5 six cents hommes pour combattre,dont
t rés peu de troupes réglées .— M . le marqui s de Montcalm ,
qui n ’
av ait pas eu Ie temps d’
av ert ir M. de Bougain
Ville , qui était au cap Rouge , comptait qu’i l l’aurait été par ses postes . Ilattendai t d ’ap
prendre qu’il étai t é portée pour attaquer les ennemi s dans le temps qu’i l em ferai t de
méme . film’
s iln’
ut tendz’
t que j usqu’
c‘
o dig; hew es , et , voyant alors que l es troupes montraientbeaucoup de fe rmeté et de z éle, 1ui disan t continuel lement que les enn emis fai saient
arriver da canon et prenaient poste en 5 6 retranchant, ilrésolu t de tout tenter, malgré la
di sproportion des forces“
Notre armée se mit en mouvemen t, me consultan t que son ardeur et con nais
san t peu l’
ordre , la plus grandee partie de ce qui la composaz'
l étan t des habitan ts. Les
bataillons mémes étaient farois d ’un nombre d’
hab itan t s qu’on avait incorporés parmil es soldats
I I est aisé de concevo i r par l’exposé ci—dessus que cette armée me fit pas gran d
chemin san s é tre en désordre . Ou commenqa 51 tirer de lo in , ce qui acheva d’
y me ttre lacon fusmn , de sor te que ,lorsqu
’
elle arriva a l a demi-portée du fusi l des enn emis , ell e n’eut
nul le
Sec. I, _
1889 . 4.
2 6 L’A’
BBE H.-R. CASGRAIN
Ilest t rés-curieux de placer 51 cét é de ce récit ceux de Vaudreuil et de Bigot . Voici
ce qu’
écriv ait Vaudreui l é Lév is , immédiatemen t aprés l a bataille .
Au quart ier général , ce 1 8 septembre 1 75 9 ,A 4 heures 32x da soir .
Monsieur,
Nous venons d’
av oir une t rés malheureuse affaire . Dés l ’aurore , les ennemis ont
surpris M .de Vergor
,qui comman dait é Fam e (111 Foulon . lls se sont bien Vite emparés
des hauteurs .
16 marquis de Montcalm est arrivé avec le premier détachement . Je faisais
l’arn ere-garde et faisai s hate r le pas aux troupes de mil ice qui étaient sur ma route .
J’
av ais fait prévenir M . de Bougainvil le , qui , dans l’
in st an t,s’est mis en marche au cap
Rouge avec les cinq compagnies de grenadiers , deux piéces de campagne , l a cavalerie et
tout ce qu’i l avait de mei lleur . Quoique l’en n emi nous efit prévenus , sa posit i on étai t
t rés critique . I I n e nous fall ait qu’
at tendre l’arriv ée de M . de Bougainvi l le , parce que ,tandis que nou s l’at taquerion s avec toutes nos forces ilserait pris par les derriéres, m aisle malheur nous en a Vbnlu , au point que l
’
affaire s est engagée avec trop de vivacité .
L’
enn emi , qui était sur une éminence , nous a repoussés , et malgré notre opin ié t ret é , nous
a contraints é faire notre
Nous avons eu beaucoup de monde de tué et de blessé . Le temps na saurait me
permettre de vous faire aucun détail £1 ce suj et ; d’
ailleurs j e n’en suis pas encore bien
in struit . Ce qu ’i l y a (18 certain et de plus fé cheux,c ’est que M. 16 marquis de Montcalm
a regu plusieurs blessures égalemen t dangereuses ; on crain t beaucoup pour lui . Per
sonne me désire plus que moi que ce n e soi t
De son cé t é , Bigot écrivait £1 Lév is, le 1 5 septembre
. N’
auriez -vous pas pen sé , Monsieur, comme moi , qu’i l aurai t été mieux de ras
sembler tous les corps de M . de Bougainvil le,qui étaien t l’élite des troupes et des mil ices ,
faire sortir tout de la Vi lle,5 la réserve de l’art illerie et des éclopés , et donne r sur
l’enn emi ?
L’
an n ée suivante , aprés l a victoire de Sainte-Foye , le méme Bigot apprenant les
difficult és qu’
av ait le général de Lév is £1 ouv rlr l a tranchée devant Québec 51 cause da
roc , lui faisait cette réflexion
Ce n ’est pas la faute de l’armée, si le terrain est s i
. Nous voyons bien clairement que vous auriez bien eu le temps de secourir
Québec , l’
ann ée dermere, avant que l’
enn em i efit pu se retrancher par derriére , et former
s es batterie s et prolonger sa
Enfin“
voici venir 11 11 témoin plus humble qui n e songe pas aux m ouvements mil i
t aires, mai s un iquement a l a douleur qu’
éprou v era Lév is en apprenant l a perte de son
ami c’est Marcel , le secrétaire de Montcalm ,
qui écrit da l i t de mort ilVien t de recevoir
le dem i er soupir da général .
Marcel s’
é t ait trouvé auprés de 1ui, lorsqu’
ilavait été blessé,et l ’avai t soutenu sur
son cheval pour l’aider é rentrer emville et se rendre 23 sa, mai son . C’est alors qu ’on ci te
du général ce derni er trait . Apercevant de s femmes qui le suivaien t en se lam entant et
criant : Monsieur le marqui s est tué ! Monsieur le marqu i s e st tué ! ”ilse tourna Vers
elles et les calma en leur disant Ce n ’es t rien , mes enfants , ce n’est rien ,
”
SECTION I , 1889 .2 9 MEMOI RE S S. R . CANADA .
I I L e Golf e Sain t-Law efn t ( 1 625
Par BENJAMIN SULTE .
( Ln le 8 mai
Pour faire suite au petit t ravail que la Somet é Royale 3 bien voulu imprimer dans
son quatriéme volume, j e me propose de vous lire aujourd’hui des notes et renseigne
ments,que j ’ai groupés dans le but de rendre plus con trfilables les événements qui se
sont passés depuis la formation de la compagnie des Cent Associés j usqu’
é l a prise
de Québec et de 151 j usqu’
é 1a reddit ion de ce poste 5 la France Ou aura
ainsi l’en semble des faits sous les yeux .
C’
é tait plutfit par gloriole qu’
autremen t :que le duc de Montmorency awai t accept é le
t itre de V ice-roi de la Nouvelle-Fran ee, le 1 0 février 1 620 ; mais ilse figurait peut-é tre
aussi que le‘
commerce des pelleteries lui rapporterait des revenus , puisqu’
ilavait versé z‘
a
son beau-frére, pére da grand Condé, l a somme ronde de onze mi ll e écus pour l’
ob ten ir
de lui “. Champlain , son lieutenant é Québec , continua de travai ller seul , pour ainsi
dire,car le duo, tout a son penchan t pour la carriére des armes , et san s cesse mélé aux
in trigues de la haute pol itique , était p lus souvent cheval que dan s son cab in et 21 l ire les
papiers de sa colonie . Vers 1624, ildi sait é qui voulait l’
en tendre que la charge de v ice
roi lu i rompait l a t é te,plus que les afi
'
aires importantes da royaume . En écoutant les
récits malheureusement si vrais de Champlain , ilsentit s’
év anouir le reste de son en thou
siasme $1 l’égard du Saint-Laurent , et , le 1 5 février 1 625 , passa le titre £1 son neveu , Henri
de Lévy ,
2 duo de Ventadour , lequel confirma Champlain dans le poste de l i eutenant au
Canada, par lettres en date da méme jour .
En ce moment , le s Basques donnaient le cauchemar 5 l a compagnie du Canada en
allant traiter et pécher dans le fleuv e j usqu’
é llle Verte . Leur quartier général était l ’il e
Saint-Jean , aujourd’hui i le dix Prince-Edouard . Le vaisseau de péche de Guers
,l ’un des
subordonnés de Champlain — le seul vaisseau que possédfit ce dernier pour l a péche du
golfe — avait été capturé par les Basques en 1623, et amené sous les canons de l’i le Saint
Jean , car ces hardi s coureurs de mer avaient S11 8 9 fort ifier (1623) eu toute régle pour mepas é tre pris
'
é leur tour dans le chef-l ieu de leurs opérations . Il s ne reconnaissaient pas
1 Voir Soéiété Historique de Mon tréal, I Ie l iv raison , p. 10 7 .
2 Mon tmorency a. la issé son 11 0 111 5 13. b el le chute d’eau qui est prés de Québec, et Lé vy 5. 1a Poin te-Lévy, 0 1) est
la v i l le de Lév is, ains i nommée en 1 861 , al’inst igat ion de notre poéte Louis Fréchet te, en souven i r du Cheval ier deLévis, qui servai t sous Mon tcalm, et qui appar tenai t ala fam i l le de Henri de Lévy.
3 O BENJAMIN SULTE
le s ordres da roi qui accordait le priv ilége de la traite et de l a, péche uniquement 5 1acompagnie da Canada . Umde leurs principaux capitaines , nommé Guérard avait méme
été j usqu’
é Tadoussac en 1622 . Celu i-ci s ’
é t ait associé avec un Holl andais ou Flamand ,comme 0 11 disait alors . I ls étaient armés de quatre pié ces de canon d
’
env iron sept ou huit
cents l ivres pesant chacune , et de deux b ret euils le navire portait Vingt- quatre hommes .
Um bfit imen t espagnol , de deux cents tonneaux rédait dans ces parages . Plusieurs
Flamands fai saien t la péche dans le bas Saint-Laurent . Um vaisseau de la Rochelle ,commandé par 11 11 homme masqué , tra itai t au Bic ave c les sauvages . LeBaillif, commis
£1 Tadoussac , vivait dans des inquiétudes continuel les . Ce port , 5 1 commode pour les
Frangais , n’
efit pas suffi é contenir tous l es aventuriers qui le recherchaien t , et par conséquen t , LeBaillif comprenait qu
’on l ’en chas serait pour prendre sa place . Dans un récent
travai l sur Tadoussac , dfi 5 l a plume de M . Joseph-Edmond Roy , nous lisons Les
anciens écrivains ont répété tour 51 tour que c ’
était 11 11 bon port que celui de Tadoussac ,Vingt- cinq vai sseaux de guerre pouvai ent se tenir é l ’abri de tous les vents . Cette
capacité a été grandement exagérée . C’est tout au plus $ 1 cinq on six vaiss eaux de moyenne
tail le y pourraient mouiller .
”Champlain
,t rés- alarmé aussi
,me 5 9 voyait pas en mesure
de braver le péril , car 11 n’
av ait pas méme une quinzaine d’
hommes pour faire au moins
la patrouill e aux environs da Saguenay .
Guérard partit de Tadoussac presque en méme temps que Raymond de l a, Balde ,l ieutenant d’
Emeric de Caen . De la Ralde s e trouvait done avoir le comman dement
maritime et avait ainsi pour premier devoir de chasser les intrus,Basques
,E spagnol s et
Flamands, da fleuv e et du go lfe Sain t-Laurent . Ilétai t é Mi scon en 1 623 lors que les
Basques se fort ifiéren t 5 Pike Saint -Jean . Sa s ituation devenai t embarrassante . Catholique ,toutefois trés attaché é ses maitres protestants
,les de Caen , ilexerqait son pouvoir sur les
suje ts des deux religions , mais que pouvait-ilfaire contre les étrangers nombreux qui
rés is taient é ses ordres Ce personnage devait s ’
iden t ifier b ien t ét avec l’hist oire da golfe
Saint-Lauren t , et rendre de bons services 51 la cause du Canada . En 1623 done , 11 envoya
£1 Québec le pilo te Doublet informer de Caen de ce qui se passait vers Miscon . Le 23
aofit , de Caen et Pon tg‘
rav é s’
emb arquéren t pour la France , et prirén t chemin fai sant . é
Gaspé , des renseignements nécessaires £1 19, politique qu’
ils auraient é suivre pour parer
aux circonstances du moment . Voyons ce qui se passait £1 Québec .
Voyan t que le Vice-roi était changé , Louis Héb ert demanda la rect ificat ion da droit
de propriété que le duc de Montmorency lui avait accordé en 1623 . Le 28 févri er 1626
0 11 lui fit cette concession .
La situation de la colonie 11 etait guére enviable . Si d’un cété Champlain parvenait
£1 faire comprendre aux marchands la nécessité de certain s petits travaux de défen se ou
de l ogement, 11 me gagnait absolument rien du moment qu
’i l parlait d’
établir des famill e s
sur les terres é t itre de simples cultivateurs . E 11 dix an s, de 1 61 7 51 1 627 , 0 11 D e voit que
Louis Héb ert j ardinant 11 11 peu , et semant quelques poignées de blé , aprés avoir b éché le
sol . Iln’
y avait pas de charrue aux mains 0 0 10 11 5 . Marsolet , Hertel , Nicolet , Le Tardi f,les troi s Godefroy étaient encore in t erpré t es ou employés de la t refite . Peut-é tre Couillard ,Martin , P ivert , Desportes , Duchesne cultivai
’
en t-i ls,mais rien n e l’at t este, et tout nou s fait
supposer le con traire . La cause de l’agriculture a toujours été mal vue des compagnies
qui se succédéren t 21 Québec , de 1 60 8 a 1627 . Les premiéres tentatives de culture dans
la Nouv elle-France avai ent eu l ieu $1 1a baie de Fundy, sur l’i le Sain te-Croix et 51
LE GOLFE SAINT-LAURENT 8 1
Québec Ces travaux me dépassaient pas ceux d’
un jardin potager leur obj et
n’
é tait point de nourri r les é 111 1g 1'és
,mais de procurer 51 de Monts et 51 Champlain des
échantil lons de ce que le nouveau sol pouvait produire . En 1 6 13 et en 161 5 , Champlain ,
é Québec , agran dit cet te peti te exploitation . Louis Héb ert , qui arriva en 1 6 1 7 , avait dfi
faire comme en A cadie , o’est- é -dire at taquer 1a terre avec la b é che pour t é cher de la con
mai tre . I I possédai t 11 11 l abourage en 1620 , mais 11 n'
av ait pas les outil s essentiel s £1 ces
sortes de travaux , puisque Champlain di t posi t ivement que la veuve Héb ert fit usage de
la charrue , pour la prem iére foi s , le 26 avri l 1628 . Héb ert était mort le 2 5 janvier 1627 .
Ou élevait des vaches et des moutons . Quant aux chev a11x ,i]s me vin ren t ici qu ’en 1 665 .
E n 1 622, sur l
’
in v it at ion de Champlain,quelques sauvages s ’
ét aien t mis £1 défricher et 51
semer da blé -d’
I nde, 5 la Can ardiére , j oli endroi t englobé , quatre an s plus tard , dans l es
limites de la seigneurie de Notre -Dame -des-Anges,prés Québec .
Le P. Charles Lalleman t, écrivan t de Québec , le 1er aofit 1 626 , dit :
“ Nous sommes
si éloignés’
de la mer que nous me sommes vi sités par les vai s seaux frangais qu’
ane fois
par an née , e t seulement pa'
r ceux qui en ou t 19 droit, car cette navigation est in terdite
aux autres . Ce qui fait que , si par hasard , ces vaisseaux marchands périssaien t , 0 11 s’il s
étaient pri s par les pirates , nou s me pourrion s compter que 8 11 1‘ la Providence de Dieu
pour pouvoir 11 0 11 5 n ourrir En effet,nous n ’
av on s rien $1 attendre des sauvages qui 0 111:
51 peine le stri ct nécessaire . L ’un des capitaines (111 1 Visit éren t ain si le poste de Québec
en 1624 8 6 11 0 111 111 2111: Charles Daniel,de Dieppe ; c
’est probablement sur son bord que
Champlain et sa. femme s’
emb arquéren t ,le 1 5 aofit de cette ann ée,pour repasser en France
Les vaisseaux des capit aines Pon tgrav é et Gérard 0 11 Gu érard étaient alors é Miscon .
La sieur de la Balde était resté £1 Miscou et 5 Gaspé . Au commencemen t de septembre
1624, 11 accompagna Champlain eu France ainsi que Pon tgrav é et le pilote Cauan ée .
Emeric de Caen é t aft resté é. Québec l’h iv er de 1 624-25 on qual ité de commandan t .Cinquante et une personnes , taut hommes que femmes et enfants
,composaient toute la
populati on bl anche du poste . Emeric retourna en France,l’é t é de 1 625
,avec son oncle
Guillaume de Caen . Comme celui- ci étai t huguen o t,11 $ 6 v it refuser la direction de la
flot t e du Canada, l aquelle passa au s ie11 1' de l a. Ral de,ayan t Emeric de Caen sou s ses
ordres . La. Catherine, de cen t cinquan te ton n eaux, commandée par l a. Ralde , et la. Fléque,de deux cent soixante tonneaux , commandée par Emeric de Caen l’Allouet te, de quatre
vingts ton n eaux , appartenan t aux j ésuites °
11 11 b é t imen t de doux cent s tonneaux, 11 11
autre de deux cen t Vingt , .miren t $1 121 voile a Dieppe,e t arriv éren t £1 Québec le 5 jui ll et
1 626 , mmen an t Champlain avec Eustache Boulé , so 11 beau-frére, et le si eur Destouches ,
enseigne de Champlain , qui retourna en Fran ce 2111 bout d’
un an . Champl ain rencontra
( 1626) des pécheurs basques dont le nav i re avait été b rfilé par acciden t . De Caen et dela Rald" s
’
occupéren t da golfe , tandis que Champlain se ren dai t £1 Québec . Pon tgrav é
avai t commandé £1 Québec durant l’h iv er de 1625 -26 . 0 11 souffrait tellement du manque
de provisions qu ’on avait envoyé une chaloupe £1 Gaspé pour en obtenir ; la plupart
des hivernants vou l ai ent abandonner Québec . Le P. Ch s Lalleman t écrivai t le 1er aofit
1 626“ Iln ’
y a que troi s 0 11 quatre familles (de sauvages) qui out défriché deux 0 11 troi s
arpen ts de terre , elle s sémen t da blé-d’
Inde, et ce depuis peu . On m ’a di t que c ’
é taien t
le s RR . PP. récol lets qui le leur avaien t persuadé . Ce qui a été cultivé en ce l ieu par
les Fran qais est peu de chose s’i l y a dix-huit ou vingt arpent s de terre
,c ’est tout le bout
da m onde .
”
8 2 BENJAMIN SULTE
Le 25 3 0 11 1 1626 , di t Champlain , Pon t grav é se dél ibéra de repasser en France
Cornaille de Vendremur, d’
An v ers , demeura, en sa place , pour avoir soi n de l a traite et
des marchandises du magasin,avec un j eune homme appel é Ol ivier Le Tardif, de Hon
fleur, sous-commis qui servait de truchement ,
Le premier soin de Champlain fut de re staurer les b é t imen t s de Québec . Voulant
auss i tirer avantage des prairies naturel les situées prés (111 cap Tourmente , l ’on fai sait
des foin s depu i s deux ou troi s an s, et l ’on élevait da bétail,11 y fit construire sans
retard une habi tation , et y en voya le sieur Foucher avec cinq on six hommes , une femme
(Mme Pivert et une jeune fille .
“
Les réco l tes , écrivait plus tard le P. Leclerq ,
al laient un e petite missi on formée au cap de Tourmente , 21 sept l ieues au -dessous de
Québec , ava it construi t 11 11 fort avancé, non seulement contre les sauvages , mais
principalement contre les enn emis (venant) de l’
Europe .
”
En 1625 étaient arrivés l es premi ers péres j ésuites . L’
ann ée suivante , ceux qui étaient
dam s 1a col onie se nommaient En emond Masse , Jean de Breb euf, Ann e de Noue et Charl es
Lalleman t , san s compter les fréres Gilbert Burrel , Jean Gofi’
estre et Frangois Charreton .
Le P. Lalleman t disait , le ler aofit 1 626“
Pour nos Frangais , qui son t ici au n ombre de
quaran te-trois,nous me nous sommes pas épargnés n ous avons enten du leur confession
générale .
Aprés avoir dit que , da temps de Henri I I I , Henri“
IV et Louis XI I I (de 1 5 75 £1
la l ittérature frangaise n e daigna point s’
occuper de l’
idée coloniale , M . Léon
Deschamps fait observer que,pourtant
,Montluc et Montaigne , sous Hen ri I I I , avaient
formulé des arguments, pluté t contre que pour la coloni sati on , et 11 ajoute :
“ A11 XVI I esiécle, l
’
un an imit é est absolue aucune voix discordante me se fait entendre et ne produit
d’
écho dans la l ittérature . Un e seule question provoque une courte discussion et deux ou
trois l ivres c ’est cel le del’origine des Américains, soulevée par Hugo Gro t ius en 1642 . E ll e
est importante, puisqu
’
elle recéle la question de l’esclav age, que nous retrouverons plus
tard mai s ell e n e crée pas en ce moment 1m courant l ittéraire . Notons ce point important
A11 début , et j usqu’
é Champlain , l’
act ion s ’est manifestée surtout par des voyages d’
explo
ration , qu’i l n ’
était pas besoin de taire , qu’on divulguait bien plut ét par orgueil national
chacun voulait avoir sa part dans cette oeuvre surtout scien t ifique . Mai s quand 0 11 eut
compri s le profit qu’on pouvait tirer de ces terres vierges , quand la question d
’
é con omie
eut été soulevée — et nous avon s vu que ce fut en France,aux temps de Bodi n e t de
Lescarb o t — ou changea de sentiment et de méthode . L’
act ion devin t commerci al e et
politique , c’est-é -dire qu ’el le se cacha l. 0 11 n e l a retrouve que dans le fai t accompli 0 11
daus les documents d’
Et at . Oela, explique le silen ce des littérateurs au XVI I e siéole, et
trop souvent depuis,on a l aissé en France , gou Jernemen t
,au roi , le soin des choses
d’
E tat c’
efit été crime,et un crime promptement puni, d
’en rai sonner 2
Les dispos itions que montrait Richelieu 51 l’égard des entreprises coloniales furent
Note de M . D eschamps : Raz illy d i t expressémen t, dans ummémo ire remarquab le adressé é. R ichel ieu, en1626 :Fayre des conquestes et t raficqs . lo tout avec prudence et secret.”
2 Revue dc Géographie, Par is, 1885 , p. 364.
LE GOLFE SAINT-LAURENT 8 3
b ien té t connues . Dan s la seule ann ée 1626 , 11 lui fut adressé cinq mémoires ou lettres sur
le fai t du commerce de la marine lui -méme est I ’
aut eur ou le promoteur d’
un tré s
grand nombre de contrats,le t tres
,rapports et stat is tiques ayan t le méme obj et . De ces
documen ts , les plus in térossan t s sont le mémoire de Richel ieu touchan t la marine , et le s
mémoires que le Chevalier de Rasilly e t 11 11 anonyme ad ressent £1 Richeli eu eu 1626 . Le
premier a été publié dan s l a co llec t ion des documents in édits , et 11 suffit d’un mot pour
l’an alyser. Riche lieu y dit eu subs tance qu ’i l es t nécessaire que le rclév e la puissance
mari time , san s l aquel le“
iln e fallait plus faire est ast d ’ancun t rafficq ,
”et qu ’i l est pré t é
consacrer l ivres par an 21 l’
eu tre ticn de lren te vaisseaux de guerre pour tenir
les cé tes nettesSous l
’
influeuce bienfaisante de ce minist re , naquirent un e dizaine de compagnies
destin’
ee s £1 exploiter le s pays loin t-ain s et a y transporter le nom de 13. France : LaNacelle do sain t Pierre
,1 625 la compagn ie da Morbihan ,
1 626 les Cen t A ssoc iés , 1 627 ;111 compagnie des I les d’
Amerique, 16 27 la c ompagnie de l’
Ile Saiut-Chri stophe , 1635
l a compagnie da Cap-Nord,1638 nouvelle compagnie de l
’
Ile Saint-Christophe , 1642
l a compagnie de Madagascar, 1 642 .
Ci tons encore M . Deschamps, puisque son étude représente une page toute faite pour
les annales can adiennes . Les commergan ts , dit-il, n’
on t pas été les seu ls £1 prendre
in t éré t aux con qué t es col oniales . Toutes les classes do 111 s o ciété , depuis le roi j usqu’
au
public oisifi. y ont pris part ac tefirs , auteurs 0 11 l ecteurs se t rou vent £1 la cour comme 51
la ville , 0 11 province comme a Paris 2111 cloi tre comme dans les Ilest remar
quable que presque tous les capitaine s chargés de conduire le s expéditions sont de petite
noblesse , £1 commencer par le sieur de Champlain , écuyer . A in si , 10 cheval ier de Rasilly,
qui appartenai t £1 11 11 6 famille de Touraine , apparentée é Richel ieu , et qui fut commandeur
dc l’ordre des hospitaliers de Saint-Jean ains i le sire de Lauson qui devien t seigneur deMontréal ain si Pierre de Blain,éc11yer, sire de Desn ambuo .
”
Dan s la. l i ste des Cent A ssociés , les nom s de noblesse et de hauts fonctionnaires sont
des plus nombreux . Citons-en quelques-uns le marquis d’
E ffiat, surintendant des
fin an ces, Isaac Martin dc Mauv oy,i n tendant de la marin e , Cl aude de Roquemon t
, écuyer,sieur de Brisson
,Isaac de Rasilly,
Cheval ier de l’
ordre de Sain t-Jean de Jérusalem , Jean
de Tayo t , trésorier de Fran ce , Ythier Holner, secrétaire du roi , Claude Bragelon n e, surin
tendant et commissaire général des Vivres , des camps et armées de France .
Jo relé v e é dessein daus cette l iste les noms des associés appartenant a la Normandie
,parce que , en 1 629 prin cipalement , nous rencontrerons leurs navires dan s la
golfe Sain t -Laurent z — David Duchesne,con sei l ler, échevin (111 Havre-de-Gré ce ; noble
homme Simon Da-blon syn dic de Dieppe Jean Rosée,marchand de Rouen , qui fut le
premier seigneur de llle d’
Orléan s prés Québec ; Simon Lemai tre , marchand de Rouen ,
qui fut le premier seigneur de la cé te de Lauson Adam Man nessier, bourgeois et mar
chand da Havre-de-Grfice ; maitre André Daniel , docteur en médecin e , demeuran t rue
d’
E cosse , £1 Dieppe Ch arles Dan iel , capitaine pour le roi en l a marine , frére da précédent ,marié $1 Dieppe ; maitre Pierre Boulan ger , consei l ler da ro i et élu £1 Montivill iers maitre
1 Léon Deschamps Revue dc Géographie, Par is, 1885 , p. 366 .
2 Prob ab lemen t 19 P. de Charles D ablon , j ésui te , qui, de 1642 $1 109 4 an mains, fut m iss ionna i re au Can ada,che z l es I roquo is
,dans l’ouest , et dev in t recteur du collége de Québec et supérieur des miss ions de la. Nouvel le
France.Sec. 1
,1889 . 5 .
8 4 BENJAMIN SULTE
Jean Féron , conseil ler da roi et payeur des espéces de messieurs de la. 0 0 11 1 d11 parlemen t
de Rouen Henry Cav elier, mercier gro ssier , de R ouen , fré re de Jean Cav elier, marchand ,
qui fut le pére da découvreur René-Rober t Cav elier de la Salle Jean Papav oin e, mar
chand,de Rouen ; Jean Guen et
1
, marchand , de Rouen ; maitre M ichel Jean , avocat £1Dieppe Jean Vin cen t conseil ler et échevin de Dieppe Nicole Langlai s , veuve de Ni col as
Blondel,conseil ler et echevin de D ieppe ; Claude Girardin ,
marchand,de Rouen , An toine
Nov ereau ,marchand
,de Rouen Frangois Monet , marohand
,de Rouen Jacques Duhamel ,
marchand,de Rouen . J
’
e11 conclus que la Normandie comptait pour le quart, 0 11 bien
prés de cc chiffre, dans le nombre des Cen t Associés ; le principal groupe se trouvaitn éamoin s 51 Paris . La midi de 13. France figure pour 11 11 petit nombre de membres . A ce
sujet,ilest b on de noter que les protestants s’
é taien t soulevés dans le midi et avaient été
écrasés par Richel ieu ,en 1625 de plu s
, q ue le s chefs de ce soulév emen t avaient péri sur
l’échafaud en 1 626 . C’est aussi d11 camp devant l a Rochel l e , dern ie r boulevard des pro
t estan ts , que fut sign é , le 6 mai 1 627 , l’acte d’
é tablissemen t des Cen t A ssociés . Les
circon stances connues d11 moment , et peut - é tre d’
au tres encore , expliquen t l’
ab sten t ion
des gens du Midi , car M . Deschamps observe que deux sys témes de commerce divisaien t
alors le royaume au n ord,protection ; 2111 Midi , l ibre échange . La compagnie des Cent
Associés était Vi siblement 11 11 6 création protectionn i ste , et 11 13 devait pas trop plaire aux
commergan t s de Marseille , par exemple , qui demandaient qu ’on tienne la main $1 ce que
les étrangers soient bien traités .
”
La. nouvelle da changement dans les affaires da Canada trouva Champlain occupé£1 régler une querelle survenue entre les sauvages . Les Iroquois
,voul ant tire r vengeance
d ’une nation appelée le s Loups 0 11 Mah ingan s ( les Mohicans de Fenimore Cooper) avaien t
massacré plusieurs de ceux-ci , sans épargner cinq Hollandai s d’
Orange (A lbany ) qui
t rafiquaien t daus ces endroi t s . L’
h iv er de 1626 -27 , 11 11 certain nombre d’
Algonquin s dos
bords d11 Sain t-Lauren t s ’
é tan t rencontrés avec les L oups,promirent £1 ces derniers de les
seconder dans la guerre qu’
ils alla ient en treprendre contre les Iroquoi s . Champlain
déploya toute son adresse pour conjurer Forage , car les Iroquois me devaient pas manquer
de porter leurs armes j usqu’
é Québec,si les sauvages amis des Francais al lai ent les atta
quer chez eux . Malgré les précautions qu ’i l prit,la guerre menagait d
’
éclater sur toute
la l igne , lorsque l es navires anglais se mon tréren t sur le fleuv e, en 1628 .
Le cardinal de Ri chel ieu et le maréchal d’
E ffiat devinrent les chefs de la compagnie
des Cen t Associé s ; 111ais Raz illy , Champlain ,l’ab b é de la Madele in e
, M . de Lausou en
furent les Véritables t é t es et le s instruments acti fs . Dans sa rel at ion de 1627 , Champlainme fai t pas la moindre allusion aux Cen t A ssoc iés . Ilest vrai que la compagnie 11 1: 3 9
proposait de commencer ses opérations dans la Nouvel le -Frauce qu ’en 16 28 , et , en attendant, les sieurs de Caen étaient encore regardés comme les principaux officiers de l’aucieuordre de choses . Emeric de Cae11 , rev e11 11 de France le 30 mai 1 627 , avait assisté aux
1 E tait-i] paren t de Mar ie Guenet , d i te la mé re de Sain t-Ignace , prem iere supérieure des hospitaheres deQuébec, em1639 E l le v ena i t du monas tere de D ieppe.
2 Pour 1a l is te de 8 8 5 memb res voy ez D ocumen ts publiés z) , Qué bec en 1883,I,8 0 , et Histoirc d(as Canadiens
frangais, I I , 3 1.
8 6 BENJAMIN SULTE
L’
hiv er de 1628 -2 9 fut trés-dur $1 Québec . Mme Héb ert avait quelques provisions
qu ’el le partagea avec les récoll ets . O11 comptait réun ies soixante -seiz e personnes, parmi
lesquelles Vingt Franqais et 11 11 missi onna ire revenus da pays des Hurons . Le printemps
arrivé,tout ce monde se j eta dans la foré t pour y Vivre de racines . Champlain et les chefs
de famille s parlaient de se réfugier chez les sauvages . Pon tgrav é , souffrant de la. goutte,songeait 21 partir pour Graspé . mai s 11 changea d’
avis . D‘
aut res mon téren t sur une cha
loupe et se dirigéren t da 0 6té da golfe . Ceci avait l i eu au commencement de l’
é té 1629 .
La paix en tre 121 France et l’Angleterre avai t é té s ignée 51 Suze le 24 avri l 0 11 n ’en
savait rien S 11 1 le Sain t-Laurent . Deux b é t imenfs de la compagn ie‘
des Cen t A ssociés firen t
voi le de Dieppe le 2 2 avri l pour Québec, méme temps que deux navires sous l es ordres
d11 capitaine Charles Dan i e] , et dont ilsera parl é bient6t . Troi s autres expéditions eurentl ieu , le méme printemps , pour la No11v elle-France
,savoir : l ’une dirigée par 11 11 capitaine
d11 nom de Joubert ; la seconde préparée par l e s j ésuites , et portant les PP. Charles
Lalleman t , A lexandre Godefroy de Vieuxpon t et Philibert Noyro t . Ce navire fut capturé
avec quatre autres appartenan t aux Cent As soci és . Le t roisiéme convoi étai t équipé par
les de Caen .
Umnommé Jacques Michel , huguenot , de Dieppe , servai t de guide aux Anglai s . A
1 lle Percée ilcaptura 11 11 navire basque , puis se rendit é Tadoussac d’o1
‘
1 sa. présence fut
signalée £1 Champlain . 11 y avai t £1 Québec 11 11 j eune ifit erpré t e de national i té grecque0 11 l
’
en v oya. £1 Tadoussac pren dre connais sance de ce qui s’
é t ait passé. E 11 méme temps le
gros des n avires des Kertk s’
av anqa comme pour tou t emport er j usqu’
é Québec, aprés
avoir pris quelques bfit imen ts basques . Le golfe n’
é tait plus qu’
un vaste champ de
batail le .
Enfin , le 2 0 j 11 il let l es Angl ai s parurent devan t Québec , qui se rendit 91 Louis Kertk .
Iln’
y avait pas de nouvel l e de la conclusion de l a paix . Louis Kertk comprit qu ’i l serai t
sage de me pas alarmer les familles établ ies, et 11 leur fit en tendre dés l’ab ord qu ’elles me
seraien t aucunement in quiétées . Champlain , jugeant que tout espoir n’
é tait pas encore
perdu pour l a col onie,consei ll a aux habitants de demeurer j usqu
’
é plus ample in for
mati on , et , en atten dant , de fai re la récolte des grain s , puis de s’en tenir é leurs res sources
part iculiéres autant que po ssible,{ Wis aussi prudent que patriotique , et qui fut suivi a l a
lettre .
“ Ils me remerciéren t , racon t e-t -il
, espéra11 t nous revoir l a prochaine année avec
l ’aide de Dieu .
”
Champl ain s’
emb arqua le 24 5 11 1 le n avire de Thomas Kertk pour se rendre , prisonnier,e11 An glet erre . Par le travers de la Malbaie , d11 cfit é da nord , 0 11 apergut le vaisse au
d’
Emeric de Caen qui tfichait de gagner le vent pour échapper, mais Kertk le serra de si
prés q11’i l dut engager le combat et fut pri s . De Caen aussitét sur le pout de Kertk remit
£1 Champlain des lettres annongan t des Vivres et des renforts d’
hommes , et dit qu’i l croyai t
la paix conclue entre les deux~
couronn es . Plus 10 111 , rade de Tadoussac , se présent éren t Louis Kertk et Jacques M i chel qu i commandaient cinq vaisseaux de trois é quatrecents tonn eaux , de plus de cent Vingt hommes chacun . Eustache Boullé , beau-frére de
Champlain , était prisonn ier 0 11 cet endro i t . Celui-ci avait V11 , vers Gaspé , le capitaine
Joubert su r 11 11 navire de soixante-dix tonn eaux destiné é ravitail ler Q11 éb ec , et q 11 i luiavait dit qu ’il croyait bi en la paix faite , puisque les Fraugais n
’
av aien t plus 121 permission
LE GOLFE SAINT-LAURENT 8 7
d’
at t aquer 10 s Anglai s . Ilaj outait que des navires,notamment 0 0 11 11 d11 capitaine Danie] ,
étaient 0 11 route po11 r 10 Saint-Laurent .
L0 fondateur de Québec passa douze jours $1 Tadoussac , chassan t avec Kertk, et tuant
plus de vin gt m1110 piéces de gibier . E nsui te 11 fut conduit 0 11 Anglet erre, 11 0 11 sans
avoir appris 0 11 route q 11’
ily awai t des vaisseaux frangais prés de Gaspé , 0 t que 0’
é t 11 10 n t
0 0 11 11 q11’
i l avai t Vain emen t attendus é Québec .
Suivon s maintenant 10 capitaine Charle s Daniel daus son voyage , aprés avoir dit 11 11
mot de sa famil le 0 1 de 1ui-m0m0 . Son pére , An toin e Dan ie l , bourgeois de Dieppe , mar
chan d mercier,grossier
,
”exerqait 11 11 0 charge municipale importante 0 11 1 620 ; 11 avait
épousé Marguerite Martin . L0 11 1 fils 0 111 0,André
,fut 0 11 1
’ 0yé 11 Lo11d1'es , 0 11 1629 , 0 11
sujet des affaires du Canada ; 11 111 0 11 1 11 1: 0 11 1637 . Charl es , 10 second fils, est notre capi
taine ; 111 0 1 10 51 Dieppe , 10 4 octobre 1 620 , 21 11 0 0 Hélén e L0mar0,11 est men t ionné 0 11 1 624
comme ayant commandé 11 11 11 0 17 11 0 de Dieppe pour 10 Canada , 0 t soutenu sans désavantage
nu rude combat contre les b é t imen t s anglai s 1 0 111 211 10 0 11 s econdes 11 0 0 0 8 ( 1632 ) avec
Loui se Duplix ,11 0 13 15 5 0 11 11 0 descendance qui exi ste (10 nos jours prés de R0 11 0 11 ; anobl i
0 11 1648 pour ses services , 11 était encore employé daus 111 marine 51 sa m0 1 t S11 1V0 11 11 0 0 11
1 66 1 . A cette époque,0 11 10 regardait comme 10 plus ancien capitaine (10 111 0 1 d0 toute 1a
France . Adrien , son frére, fut avocat Dieppe . An toin e , quatriéme gargon ,devin t 10
p01 0 j és11 1t 0 , mis sionnaire des Huron s , tué par les I roquois 0 11 1 648 .
La société des Bib l iophi les de Rouen a tiré 0 soixante exemplaires, 0 11 1 88 1 , 11 11 0 bro
ch11 r0 élégante (111 1 porte pour titre Voyage 61laNouvelle-E'
cmce du capitaz'
ne Charles D aniel, et
qui 1 0 11 f0 1 11 1 0 des ren seignements préci eux S11 1 0 0 qui s ’est passé dans notre gol fe 0 11
l’ann ée 1 629 . Je dois £1 l’
amit ié (10 M . 1 11110 11 Félix , 0 0 11 5 0 1110 1 (10 l a 0 0 11 1 d’appel de
R0 11 0 n , 11 n 0 x0mp1ai1'
0 de 0 0 beau t 1'av ail, d0 11 t v oici 11 11 extrait
La prise d’
un 3 0 1230 7 20 211 0 31 0 330 128 0 ! de ses g ens ” . par monsieur Daniel de D ieppe , capitain e
pour 10 my 0 11 la. marine, génémlde la fio t te de la. Nouvelle-France
,dédié 1 11 0 11 310 11 1
10 président de Lauzon,intendant de la 0 0 111pag11 10 d11 dit pais , par 10 si eur Malapart ,
Parisien , soldat du dit 8 10 11 1 Daniel . Publié é Rouen, 1630 .
Malapart commence ainsi : “L
’
exploit dern ier (111 capitain e Dan iel 0 11 10 Nouvel le
France, est avantageux £1 trop de gens pour estre cogmen 91 S1 peu de j’
ai 0 1 0 11
que comme 111 0 11 espée av oit 5 0 1 11 1 au combat, de mesme aprés la Vict oire , ma plume dev oi t
rendre 0 0 t esmoign age 51 l a, gen erosit é de 111 0 11 O11 verra. daus 0 0 1121 1 1 0
de la. pesche assuré pour nos Fran00 15 , 1’
hé résie qui 0 0 mm0 n00 1t , 0 1 1 21 0 11 0 0 dés sa. nai ssan ce ,la sain ct e foy de 1’Eg115 0 Romaine insta llée , & umpetit tyranneau débusqué aussi h 0 11 t 0 11
sement , q 11’
11 av oit inj ustement usurpé 0 0 nouveau paj'
s, 81 trai té iniquement 10 s sujets dede
'
n ot re
Récit da capitaine Daniel L0 22 10 11 1 d ’avri l de la présente an n ée 1629 , 10 suis
party (10 Dieppe soulz 10 congé de monsieur 10 cardinal (10 Richeli eu ,conduisant 10 8
navires 110111 11100 5 10 Grand S . André 85-
13. Marguerile, pour (suivant 1’
0 1d1 0 de messieurs les
Intendant , Directeurs da 13. compagnie de 13. Nouvel le-France) 0 110 1 trouver monsieur
1 Cette n arrat ion se trouv e auss i ala page 1283 (10 8 lE uvres de Champ la in,av ec quelques var ian tes.
8 8 BENJAMIN SULTE
10 Commandeur de R0 8111y 0 11 Brouage , 0 11 0 10 Rochel le , 85 de 10 0 110 1 so11 l z 8 0 11 0 8 0 0 1 10
secourir 85 enuitailler 10 s ieur de Champlain , 85 10 8 Frangois qui estoien t 0 11 fort de Québec
0 11 10 N0 11V0 110 -F1'0 11 0 0 , 85 0 8 10 11 1 arrivé 0 11 chef de 130 51 01 10 1 7 de may , on pub110 10 lende
111 0 111 10 p0 i}: f0 ic1e 0V0 0 10 1 0 1 de 10 G1 0 11d0 -B1 0 10 g 11 0 , 85 0 p1 0 8 8 0j 0 11 1'
n é 0 11 di t chef
de B0 y0 1’0 8p 0 0 0 de 39 10 11 1 8 0 11 at tendant 10 d10 t 8 10 11 1 de 110 8 11157 , 85 voyant 0 nfi11 qu’i l
8’
0 du0 11 00 11 de parti r 0 1 0 18 0 11 (10 8 mandements 2 n 0 11V0 0 ux de 10 part (111 roy,85 q 11 e la
8 0 18 0 11 8 0 perdoit pour 10 d10 t voyage 8 11 1 l ’ad11 i s de mesdit s 8 10 11 1 8 10 8 Intendan t 0 t Direc
teurs 8 0 11 8 plus 0 1t 0 11d1 0 10 dit 8 10 11 1 de Rasilly , 10 p0 rtis de 10 rade du dit chef (10 B0 y0 1026 de juin 0 V0 0 q 11 0 1:1 0 V0 18 8 0 0 ux 85 11 11 0 b 0 1 q 11 0 0 pp0 1 10 11 0 n t 0 Compagnie , 85 con
t inuan t 11 1 0 11 voyage insque 8 11 1 10 Grand Bane 8 11 1p1 18 que 10 fus de b 1 11 111 0 8 et m 0 uV0 18
temps , 10 perdi s 10 0 0mp 0 gn10 de mes 0 11 131 0 8 vais seaux 85 f11 8 con traint de poursuivre m 0
route,111 8q 11 0 0 0 0 qu ’estant environ deux 110 11 0 8 proche de terre 1’app 0 1 00 11 8 V11 mav i1
'
e qui
arriv oit 8 11 1 moy portant 0 11 grand mast V11 p0 v 1110 n an glai s , 10 q 11 0 1 11 0 11 1 0 voyant 0 11 0 11 11
canon 11 1’
0 pp1 0 0 ha 0 10 portée d11 pi stolet , 0 0 qui m’
0 b11g0 0 de 111 0 111 0 tou t mon canol1
110 1 8, dequoy 8
’
0 8 10 11 t ledit Anglai s 0 pp0 1 00 11 11 (l’
e11 ader, 85 moy (10 10 poursu ivre
111 y fai sant commandement de 111 0 111 0 8 0 11 p0 v illon bas comme 0 8 10 11 1 8 11 1 10 8 0 0 8 10 8 appar
t 0 11 0 11 t 0 8 an my de Fran ce , 0 1 111 1 (118 q11 e l 0 p0 1x esta-it 10 10 103
, 0 1: qu ’i l 11 0 devait rien
c rain dre , 85 8 11 1 10 1 0 1118 qu’i l fit de 11 1 0 monstrer 8 0 commission
,0 1 0 57 0 11 1; que 0 0 fust
quelque forb 0 11 , 10 fis 111 0 1 q 11 0 1q 11 0 8 coups (10 canon,l’ab orday et 10 pris . Ce 10 10 1. ayant
1 0 0 0 g11 11 que 8 0 commission 0 8 10 11 cap deM0 110 b 0 1 1 0 11 0 11 17 0 1 quelques 8 10 11 8
compatriotes , qu’i l y portoit (10 8 1 7 0 0 11 0 8 85 0 111 1 0 8 choses , 10 10 10 18 8 0 57 0 110 1
,0 1 0 8 10 11 10 28
iour d ’
aoust 0 11 11 0 d0 us 10 riv iére nommée p0 1 10 8 Sa11 v ages Chyb ou 1’
0 11 11 0 y 0 y 10 10 111
d’
aprés (10 11 8 1 11 0 11 b 0 8 10 0 u (1111 de mes hommes 10 long (10 8 costes pour chercher quelques
sauvages , 85 apprendre 0 11 q11 el 0 8 130 1 estait 1’
h 0 b 110 110 11 de Québec, 0 1 1 11’
0 n 8 mes dix
hommes 0 11 port 0 11 11 B0 10 111 0 8‘1 y t rouuéren t v n 11 0 11 11 0 de B0 1d0 0 ux, 10 mai stre (luquel
8 0 11 0mmait Chamb reau qui leur dit que 10 8 10 11 1 J0 0 q 11 0 8 St11 0 1 d7111 110 1 t 0 8 0 0 8 8 0 18 0 8 t 0 1t
0 rriv é audit 110 11 environ deux 111 0 18 0 11p0 1 0V0 n t avec deux grands 11 0 v i1 0 8 85 V11 0 11 0 10 0 11 0
0 11g10 18 0 , et qu’
0 y0 11 t trouvé audit 110 11 Michel D ihourse de S . 10 0 11 de L11 8 3 qui faisai t 8 0
pescherie 85 8 0 0 11 0 1 10 (10 111 0 1111 0 8’
0 stoit 10 dit milort 8 0 18 1 da 11 0 11 11 0 85 11 10 1111 0 dudit
D ihourse, 85 permi s que 0 0 8 dix hommes 111 8 8 0 11 1 pil lés , 85 p0 11 0 p1'
08 0 11 0 11 10 dit 111 110 1 t
envoyé 10 8 deux plus grands de 8 0 8 17 0 18 8 0 0 11 11 avec 10 11 0 11 11 0 dudit Michel D ihourse 85
partie (10 8 0 8 hommes V0 1 8 10 Port Royal po11 r Y10 11 0 habitation ,comme aussi iceluy 111 110 1 1
depuis 8 0 11 0 1 1 1Vée 0 11 0 11 10 10 1 0 0 n st1 11 11 0 11 11 fort audi t port aux B0 10 111 0 8 0 11 0 11.
enl evé de forc e 10 8 troi s piéces (10 canon q11’
i l 0 11 0 1t da11 s 8 0 11 11 0 11 11 0 pour 10 8 mettre (10 11 8
ledit fort,mesme luy donna V11 0 8 0 1 1t signé de 8 0 111 0 111 , par 10 q 11 0 1 11 prot est oit de n e 111 y
1 Cap 0 11 chef de baie,0 l’ex trémité nord-ouest de 10 grande rade de 10 Rochel le .
2 Ras illy av ai t ordre (10 partir av ec Dan iel pour Québec, 111 0 18 0 111 08 10 s ignature (10 10 paix (24 avril) , L0 11isX I I I 10 di rigea av ec 8 0 8 v aisseanx 8 11 1 10 Maroc con tre les p i rates barbaresques.
3 Ou étai t au m i l ieu du 111 0 18 (1 aofit , et cependan t mi 10 pa ix de Suz e 11 1 10 pr ise de Québec 11 eta ien t connues 0 11cap B reton .
4 Au large de Bos ton .
5 L’i le S ib ou 0 11 Ch ihou est 0 11 face de 10 rade du port Dauph in , capB reton . Dans ce tte 110 0 8 1: 11 110 ba ie , 0 1)Dan ie l b 0 t it 1m fort (Sa in te-Anne) du 0 0 té du nord-oues t.
‘1 Petite ba ie qui avo is ine Louisbourg.
Jacques Stuart, lord d’Ochiltrie, du 110m d ’une b aronn i e 8 11110 0 0 11 E cosse.
8 Golfe de B iscaye .
LE GOLFE SAINT-LAURENT 8 9
permettr'
e,11 1 0 0 11 0 11 11 0 11 11 0 151 0 1 100 18 de pescher d0 1 0 11 0 11 0 n 1 0 10 (1110 11 0 10 10 1
0 17 0 0 10 8 8 0 11 17 0 g0 8 11 0 luy 111 8 1 100 17 0 10 dixiesme (111 10 11 1, 85 que 8 0 commission d11 1 0 11de 10 G1
'
0 11d0 -131 0 10 g11 0 11ly p0 1m0 110 11 de 10 11 0 1 quinze pour cent 85 de confisquer tous 10 8
17 0 18 8 0 0 ux qui y1 0 10 n 1 audit l ieu 8 0 11 8 8 0 11 congé . Lesquelles choses m’
estan t rapport ées ,
111g 0 0 n t 0 811 0 de 1 11 0 11 d0 11 0 11 d’
empescher (111 0 ledit 11 1110 1 1 11 0 0 0 n11nu 0 8 1 1’
1 7 8 11 1 p0 110 11 d’
17
n
pa‘
1'
s 0 pp0 1 10 11 0 11 1 0 11 my 111 0 11 maist re , 85 n’
exigeast de 8 0 8 subjects 10 11 1b 11 1 qu’i l 8 0 pro
m0 110 11,10 fis p1 0p0 1 0 1 5 3 de 111 0 8 hommes 0 11 armes , 85 me p0 11 1 v 0 11 d
’
eschelles 0 1 0 1111 0 8
choses 11 00 0 8 8 0 11 0 8 pour 10 1 1,118 10 11 0 10 8 EXCI
‘
0 1CGS 0 111 0 8 gens , 8 11 111 0 11 1
8 10 110 du 10 1 1 10 110 11 10 1 0 0 1 , 87; 0 8 10 11 1 0 1 1 1u0 10 8 de septembre 0 11d11 p0 1 1 0 11 11 B0 10 1n 0 8
0 11 0 8 10 11 0 0 11 8 11 1111 10 dit fort 8 11 1 17 11 1 0 0 11 0 1 0 11 17 11 0 11 11 0 (1 0 0 11 11 (10 8 deux 0 0 8 108 , sur l’ad17 i s
qui me 1111 (10 11 11 0 , (111 0 10 8 Anglais 0 11 0 10 11 1 0 pp0 1 00u , q 111110 11 1 10 dessein que de 10
p1 0 11d1 0 0 10 di0 11 e , 10 mis pied 0 10 1 1 0 85 fis 0 du 0 11 0 0 1 8 111 10 8 deux h 0 11 1 0 8 0 p1 08 midi 10 11 8
mes hommes 17 0 1 8 l edit for t 8 0 10 11 1’
0 1d1 0 (111 0 10 10 11 1 0 1 7 0 18 (10 11 11 0 , 85 10 0 111 17 0 110 q 11 0 1 par
(11V0 1 8 0 nd1 0 10 18 0 17 0 0 10 1 0 0 gren ades , pots 0 10 11 , 85 0 11 11 0 8 0 1 11110 0 8 , nonobstant 10 1 0818 10 n 0 0
85 10 8 m0 u sq 11 0 10 d0 8 (10 8 ennemis , 10 8 q 11 0 18 0 8p0 11 170 n t ez (10 1 7 0 11 comme nou s 10 11 1 respon
dions 85 0 11 0 n 8 10 n 8 , 8 0 p1 0 8 0 11 101 0 11 1 sur 10 11 1 re11 1part 0 17 0 0 11 11 1110 11 0 11 0 11 b 10 11 0 d0m 0 11 d0 n1
10 1710 85 (111 0 1 110 1 0 11 sieur 10 T0 11 1 n 0 11 1 mol1 110u10 11 0 n1 cependant que j’
0 810 18 0 10 porte
dudit 10 1 1 10 18 0 11 1 enfoncer 10 0 110 , p0 1 10 q 11 0 110 0 8 10 n 1 0 11 11 0 10 111 0 8 0 18 18 (1 11 (111 111110 1 1 (111 0
10 11 0 11 11 0 17 armé d’un0 0 8p00 85 d
’un p18 10 10 1 85 quinze de 8 0 8 hommes 0 1m0 z (10 0 11 11 0 8 8 0 8 ,
b rassarts, 85 b ourguignot es, t en an t chaou1l 11 11 0 0 1 (111 0 b 11 z 0 0 fuzi l 0 11 m 0 in, 0 1 10 11 1 10 1 0 8 10
(10 8 dits hommes 0 1 11 108 de mousquets 85 picques seulement , 10 8q 11 0 18 10 118 10 11 8 désarmer
85 0 17 0 11 1 0 810 10 8 0 8 10 11 d0 1 18 d11 1 0 17 d’
An glct erre , 10 fis mettre 0 11 110 11 d’
iceux , p0 1 10 810 11 1
0 0 8 11110 11 1111 0 11 11 0 1 10 enseigne , 0 0 11 11 d11 roy 111 0 11 maistre puis 1 7 18 110 11 1 0 0 qui 0 8 10 11 au
dit 10 1 1 1’y 11 0 11 11 0 17 11 11 Pran 00 18 natif de Brest d0 10 11 11 p1 18 0 11 n 10 1 111 8q 11 0 8 0 0 0 que 8 0 11
1 11 0 1811 0 qui 0 810 11 0 1 1 11 7 0 deux 10 11 1 8 0 11p0 1 0 17 0 n1 0 11 11 11 port 0 810 1gn 0 de deux 110 110 8 de 0 0
port aux B0 10 111 0 8 , 0 11 8 1 apporté 11 11 0 piece (10 canon qu ’i l 0 11 0 11 0 11 8 0 11 11 0 17 11 0 , 0 1 payé 10
d1x10 8m0 de 10 11 1 0 0 p0 8 0h 0 1 0 11, 0 1 10 10 11 1 8 11 117 0 11 1 10 fis equipper 11 110 0 0 1 0 17 0 110 espa
gn0 110 que 11 0 11 17 0 0 0 8 0h 0 11 00 de11 a11 t 10 dit 10 1 1, 85 charger 10 8 17 117 1 0 8 85 muni tions qui
0 8 10 10 11 1 0 11 iceluy , 850 131 08 10 11 raz er 85 démolir, 10 10 11 1 porter 0 10 1 1V101 0 de
Chihou 10 118 0 17 0 0 10 11 10 diligence 11 0 17 0 1110 1 5 0 de mes hommes 0 1 20 d0 8d118 An g10 18 0 10
construction (1’
17n 1'
0 11 0 11 0 h 0 111 0 11 1 0 11 10 1 1 8 11 1 ladit e 1 117 101 0 , pour 0mp0 8 0 h 0 1 10 8 ennemis
d’
y 0 11 11 0 1,(10 118 10 q 11 0 1 0 17 10 18 8 0 40 hommes compris 10 8 PP. V1n 0 0 n 1 0 1 V10 11 1p0 111 10
suites 3 0 1 8 p100 0 8 de 0 0 11 0 11 , 1 8 cents de po11 dre , 8 1x cents (10 mescl1 es , 40 mousquets , 1 8
p10 q 11 0 8 , 0 1 11110 0 8 , b 0 110 8 0 canon 85 m ousquets , 17 111 1 0 8 0 1 0 11 11 0 8 choses 11 00 0 8 8 0 11 0 8, 0 17 0 0
10 11 1 0 0 q 11 1 011 0 11 0 8 10 11 0 11 110 (10 11 8 10 (1110 h 0 b 110 110 11 85 fort (10 8 Anglois , 85 0 17 0 111 10 10 1
dresser 10 8 0 1 111 0 8 d11 my 85 de monseigneur 10 cardinal , 10 10 1 10 11 0 v n 0 111 0 18 0 11 , 0 h 0 pp0 110 ,85 magasi11 , pris 8 0 1 111 0 11 1 de fidélité d11 810 11 1 G0 u1d0
'
4 nati f (10 130 0 11 11 0 18 , 10 18 8 0 par moy
po11 r commander 0 11 dit fort 85 11 0 b 110 110 11 po11 r 10 8 0 1 17 10 0 d11 roy, 0 1 pareil lement d11 1 0 8 10
(10 8 hommes (10 1110 11 1 08 0 11 0 0 ledit s ieur Go11 lde , 10 8 11 18 party dudit lien 10 5 de novembre ,85 0 17 amen é 10 8 (1118 Anglois 10 111111 0 8 85 0 11 10 11 18 desquels 0 11 0 y mis q11 0 1 0 1110 85 deux 0
10 1 1 0 prés F 0 1m11 0 (Felmouth ) port d’
Ang10 10 1 1 0 0 17 0 0 10 11 1 8 h 0 1 d0 8 , &7 amené dix-huit ou
1 Dans 10 118 10 (10 8 Cent Associ és 0 11 v o i t Frangois Cast i l lon 0 1 Jacques Casti l lon .
2 Le texte (1 0 8 ( 1511 0 170 3 (10 Champla in 10 11 0 111 111 0 Dav id C0 0 110 0 n.
3 C0 8 rel igieux, accompagnés d11 P. Noy rot , avaient fai t naufrage 8 111 l’i le (10 Sab le, 10 24 0 0 111 1629 .
4Claude (10 118 10 texte de Champla in .
4 O BENJAMIN SULTE
Vingt é Dieppe avec le dit milort atten dant le commandement de mondit seigneur le
cardinal ce que ie certifie estre v ray . Fait 53 Pari s le 1 2 décembre 1 629 . (Signé) Charles
Daniel .”
Malapart ajoute : Tela esté le rapport qu’a signé an Con'
sei l notre général ; mai s
quoy que pour ce deuoir, iln’ayt esté beso i n de marquer d’
au tres circon stances , ilsera
bon ,méme importan t , d
’en mettre icy quelques-v nes qu’i ] a obmises
La premiére , que nostre capitain e estan t en grande perplexi té de sgav oir que l’en
n emy se fort ifiait pui ssamment , et que ce pendant ilme pouuait l’
aller visiter pour m’anoir
point de chaloupes prestes , D ieu luy envoya des sauvages qui luy eu presteren t trois , 85mesmes quelques v us d ’eux le voulurent accompagner .
La seconde , que le mesme capitain e remon stra efficacemen t é ses soldats, tous les
maux qui pourroien t n aistre de"
cet te usurpation des E scossois, que tous d’
v n commun
accord dresseren t v ue requeste pour le supplier de les mener é l’
enn emy, protestan s tous
par escrit , qu’au cas que quelqu
’
v n d ’eux mourut an combat il s v ouloien t que la reques te
qu’
ils 111i presen toien t , luy sera i t de response aux demandes de tous ceux de leurs paren ts
qui pretendroien t estre par luy dédommagez de leur mort, attendu qu’
ils auro ien t voulu
mouri r , 83 tenu leur v ie bien employée é restablir par leur sang, et maintenir £1 quelque
cent mille Fran gais l a l iberté de gaigner leur Vie . J’
ay dit cent mille , mais c’es t pour le
moins , car ilv a tous les an s en ce pais quelques deux cents grands navires 5 l a pesche
tan t de mollué de saulmon , que de peti tes baleines du l ard desquelle s on fai t de l’
huylle .
Or daus chaque n au ire combien de matelots y a-t -ilqui ont leur famille 21 entreten ir ?
Combi en faut -ilde charpentiers de manires ? combien de calfutreurs ? combien de tail
l andiers combien de forgerons pour les clous et pour les aucres Combien de gens
employez pour les chables et le s cordages, pour les voi le s , une infin it é d’
autres aggrée
ments nécessaires ie me dis mot des pi stol es qu ’on ti re'
tous les ans d’
Espagn e pour la
mollué , ie me parle point de tout plain de marchands , _qui l a ven den t main ten ant é bon
marché, qu i eussent. esté contraints de l
’
acheter bien cher des Anglois, et ainsi v uider
insensib lement l ’argent da Royaume , et nous 1a reuendre encore plus cher , mais l aissant
tout cel a £1 part , 8 1 0 11 ea st l ai ssé I’
Escossois continuer comme ilavai t commencé , 85 comme11 $ 6 promettai t de faire , con traignant n
'
os pauvres pescheurs fran qais é luy payerle dixiéme
(disan t que"
c’
estait une grace parti cul iere qu ’i l leur fai sai t, en ce que par sa commission
illuy estoit permis de leuer quinze pour cen t ) 83 (qui pis est ) de confisquer le s Vai sseaux
qui n ’
auraien t congé da roy d’
Anglet erre . Quelle servitude ea st-ce esté 51 l a France
cathol ique de garder les abst inences , 83 le s j eusn es de 1"Eglise
,21 l a di scretion de eelay
qui es t d’
Vne profess ion toute contraire Quelle somme n’
eust ilpoin t tiré tant de ses
congez que da poisson qu’
il eust mui par (16 15 $1 nos Fran qois Oar l a. commission de ce
beau seigneur portoit pouvoir comme dit est de prendre quinze pour cent des estrangers
cinq des v aisseaulx d’
Angleterre .
La Se circon stance est , que le capit aine 83 tous ses hommes , excepté trois , s’
estoien t
confessez communie z auan t que d'aller att aquer l’enn emy .
La 4e, qu’i l y auait dix ou douze puissants 85 furieux dogues selon le jugement de
beaucoup de personnes aussi £1 eraindre'
que des hommes san s peur et bien armez ; 85n éan tmoin s (comme s
’i l s eu ssent eu 18 sentiment 825 respect pour les armes du my 85 lacapitaine Daniel
,parei l £1 eela y qu
’
euren t autre - fois les lyons pour V11 autre Dan iel ) ils
n e nous ont faict aucune peine ; 85 (chose merveilleuse) pas v n de tous les coups qui
LE GOLFE SAINT-LAURENT 4 1
furent tirez par les Anglms n e porta sur un seul de nos Franca is , quoy que ce fut en
plein'
iour, et que l’
enn emi nous v oist venir ily avai t fort long temps, 8: qu
’il en fut plus
grand h ombre que nous , qu’i l nous ous t v eu auparavan t prendre deux de. leurs chaloupes
six de leurs pescheurs, quoy qu’
ils fussen t, £1 con v ert de l eur fort et de leurs armures,au contraire nous a descouuert en but té 5 tons taut qu
’
ils es to ien t,bref quoy que les
troi s pieces de canon , gu’il s auaien t os t ées £1 V11 Fran gais , fussent capables de nous rompre
par le rejail lis s emen t des bail loux dessu s lesquels nous marchions . Tant ilest v ray quecc que Dieu garde est bien gardé . La sain c t e Euchari s tie que n os soldats frangais auaien t
requé , leur estait v n ferme bouclier, V11 charme puissant Sc assuré , v n_
charact ére é
l’
espreuv e aussi bien contre Iges armes des hommes , que contre les dents des b estes .
La 5 9, que les soldat s ont esté s i ob éi ssants é leur capi taine qui leur auait deffen du de
s’
amuser au but in , qu’
i] n’
y en a pas v n s eul de tou s ceux qui ont esté prist qui ayt perdul a valeur d
’
un sold de ce qu ’i l auait en son particul ier . En quoy iles t é douter loqueldes deux est plus admirable ou le pq oir qu ’a sur les s oldats le capi taine , ou l
’obeissance
respect des soldats envers leur chef.La Ge , qu
’i l y auait vingt-cinq l ieue s da fort que commen qo ien t nos Franqois 21 celuides Anglois , de 121 ii appert de l a dil igence de ceux qui cherchoien t le s vaisseaux de l eur
cap i taine 83 les nov uelles de Québec , v en qu’
ils n’
est oien t que dans un petit batteau de
nef, 8: cependant s ’
esloignoien t si fort . Ilappert auss i de cette distance , quel estoit le
zele 85 18 courage de ceux qui furen t comb atre les Anglois . C’es t beaucoup de se defendre
quand on se trovne attaqué par des'
ennemis plus forts , c’est plus de les attaquer quand
on les rencontre ; mais de les aller chercher s i loing 83 an eo si pen d’avantage
,o’est un
faict sans aucun exemple,ou pour le moins extrememen t rare , lors part iculiéremen t qu’on
n’
y est point enuoyé , n i gagé pour cet effect .
La 76 , que le fort que nous auon s commencé , 82: doi t estre parfaic t au retour de monsieur Daniel , est £1 l
’
en trée du port , le plus asseuré , le plus capable 83 commode qu’on
puisse souhaiter . Pr’
emieremen t ilest au c ommencement dés terres de l a Nouvel le
France , 85 partant est trés-propre é receuoir les navires de France s’
iI fallait relascher
auan t que de monter le fieuue S. Lauren s . Secondemen t , ilest en tre l’
Acadie le Canada,
0 11 est l’hab itat ion de Québec, 85 partant t rés-propre pour la communication ,
de Fun 81;
l ’autre pais,mesme pour y faire assembler le s manires s
’i l estoit besoin de le s voir .
Tiercemen t , ilest en VI1 l ieu ou ily a quan t it é de beaux e t gros arbl'
es, des eaux douces
en"
abondance . Outre cela ileut dans 16 port plus de tro i s milles man ires , 85 cependan tne laisse point d ’estre fort tranquille assuré oar l’emb ouchure est an t si estroit te, qu
’i l
n’
y peut entre r plus d’
v u navire 5, l a fois , l’eau 37 est tranquil le comme en un estang qui
est 51 l 'abry d’
v n e haute forest d’
ailleurs,le fort est tellement placé qu ’il n ’
y a mauire qui
me pu i sse estre crevé dll canon qui donne dessus ce dest roit au cas qu ’i l voulu t entrer
san s le congé dll di t fort,ainsi peut seruir d
’
az ile assuré aux Francoi s s’il s est oien t
attaquez . Ils’
y rencontre encor beaucoup d’
au tres commodi tez , mai s ie serois trop long
51 l es deduire : comme aussi si ie voulais marquer par le meme le soin amoureux qu ’a eude nou s n‘
o stre b on Dieu , comme ilnous deliv ra du poison de nos captifs escossois, commeilnous obligea tous é. nous confesser enuoyan t une tempeste qui choquoit £1 chaque vague
notre vaisseau , £1 chaq ue coup le brisait et creuait contre v n rocher ; 85 puis nous ayan tcon trainets de nous abandonner 21 sa mercy , ilporta v n Pere Jesuit te £1 mettre dans cette mer
enragée v n rel iquaire garni d’
vu morceau de la sainete Oroix , ce qui nou s donna le calme .
See. I , 1889 . 6 .
4 2 BENJAMIN SULTE
I e ne puis non plus m’
arrest er é descrire comment s ’est faic t , qu’
v n petit Sauuage
ayant recen en la teste de grands coups de hache fut guari quand v n Pere Jesuit t e l ’eutben i 85 faict quelque V( Bu pour luy . Aussi peu comme V11 vieux sorcier aag é d
’
en v iron
9 0 ans , qui estoit comme le grand Prestre de ces misérables Sauvages , se convertit , 85 de
son propre mouvement se mi t 51 b rusler tous les outils dont ilse servait au culte da
diable ie pourrois estre ennuyeux si ie disois t out ce que ie sgay, n ean tmoin s ie me peux
que ie n e regouste en cor v n e foi s le t raict de douceur que la divine bonté nous fit sen tir
em allant .
La trauerse de Dieppe en ce nouveau pals tirant en si grande longueur,que quelque
cinq mois se sont passez é l a faire (ce qui se faict d’
ordin aire en un mois ) nostre général
estoit con trainct de faire ten ir les Viures fort courts 85 comme si Dieu nous emst voulu
faire la mesme faneur qu ’i l fit autre-foi s au peuple d’
I sraéllors qu ’i l le tenait dans le
desert, 85 1’
empeschait d’
auancer deuers l a, terre promi se , voyant qu’on me distribuait
quasi plus de pa in 51 manger, fit veni r une grosse t rouppe d’
excellen t s poi ssons , qui suiuit
iour et nuit le n au ire 85 ce en si grande affluen ce qu ’on les prenait comme eu v n reseruoir
é mesure qu ’i l fallai t disner ou souper . Je dis 5 chaque iour ou repas,car comme la
mann e se cueill ai t tous les iours , 85 me se gardai t point , de mesme cette mann e nov uelle
se cueillai t tous les iours 85 me se gardait point, 85 estoit ce poisson nommé la boni te 1 ougrande aureille
,51 cause d’un gran d aisleron ,
qui s’
esleue vers sa teste lors qu ’i l nage il
est plus gros que no s grosses carpes . Or comme s i cette benite t rouppe eust senti qu’i l
n’
est oit plus de besoin que sa mort soutint notre vie , aussi tost que nou s fusmes prez daGrand Ban e , ou l
’on pesche la mollué, el le commen ga, é nous quitter, nous l aiss ant un
sentiment de la bonté de nostre Seigueur auss i doux que ce dél icieux secours nou s auaitesté necessaire . Ce souvenir m ’est si agréable que ie serois content de faire un recuei l de
tous les discours que nos gens t en oien t sur ces poissons , comme ils disoien t allons au
Viuier que Dieu nous a donné , al lons prendre le disuer que Dieu n ous a préparé,al lons
receuoir ce qu ’i l nous enuoye. Toute-foi s i] y a encore plus de plaisir,plus de douceur 85
de consolation é considérer V11 peu la prudence de D ieu sur l a conduite de notre voyage .
“ Le dessein de l a Compagnie 85 de nostre général estoit d ’aller 2] Quebec 85 0 6
pendant, si Dieu par l a contrariété des vents me l’
eust empesché ; comme ilestoi tdemeuré seul san s l’escorte des n auires du roy
,mesme de tous ses vai sseaux
, il
estoit presque impossibl e qu’i l n e fut prins des An glois, qui auoieu t dans S . Laurens
huiet fort navires , 85 quand ilne les eust point rencontrez ayant atten du si long temps 51l a Rochell e , iln
’
eust sceu secourir l e s Franpais de ce quar t ie r ; 85 qui pis est , l’
Escossois
se fut tel lement fort ifié le reste de l’ann ée, que j e me sgay pas si 0 11 l’
eust pu auoir par
aprés , v en qu’i l estoit desie
‘
t en tel estat , que 13 canon me l’
eust peu endommager du costé
de l ’eau tant ils’
es toit bien cov uert de gazon ; 85 pour ce qui est da cost é de terre ses
retranchements s ’
é toien t tellement haussez en huiet ou dix iours qu ’on avait tardé de le s
venir reno ir , que nos tre capitaine les ayant esté reconnaistre luy-mesme auan t que d’en faire
les approches iugea que l es eschelles qu’il avai t fait faire su iuan t le rapport de ses gens ,
est oien t desormais t r0 p courtes de 3 0 11 4 pieds , 85 partant fut con train c t d ’en faire des
pecher quan ti té d’
au tres d’
en uiron dix é douze pieds . Je vous laisse 21 penser ce qu’i l
eust fait tout le long de cet hyuer iusqu’
é ce qu ’ou ea st en l a commodité de l’aller Vis iter,
1 La bon i te. Sarda Mediterranea . Umpen plus gros que la morue . D a genre des t b ous.
4 4 BENJAMIN SULTE
Mais le l ord Ochilt rie a l a parole a son tour . Voici sa réponse“ La barbare et perfide conduite des Frampais envers 16 lord Ochiltrie daus llle da
Cap-Bre tou
,prouvée en la cour d’
amiraut é de Dieppe . Vers le 1 0 septembre ou
environ,un capitaine Daniel , habitant de Dieppe , accompagné de trois Vingtaines de sol
dats e t d ’un certain nombre de sauvages en six chaloupes , Vin t 91 la cé t e de Cap-Breton et
surprit deux chaloupes e t six pécheurs qui les montaien t , qui étaien t é pécher pour l anourri ture dlldit l ord Oohiltrie et de sa colon ie , clan s l aquel le ila été envoyé en vertu dela commission da roi d
’
Anglet erre . Ayant surpri s les chaloupes , ils’
empara des pécheurs
et les en ferma dans une i le de.
l’
ouest , san s Viande , san s b o i sson ,sans feu
,san s mai son ,
san s aucun abri contre la plui e ou le froid . Puis,avec ses soldat s et six chaloupes
,il
entra dans 19 port,le di t lord Ochiltrie et l a maj eure part ie de ses hommes étant éloignés
par l eurs occupation s . Le dit lord Ochiltrie, l es voyant arriver ason fort e t pensan t avec lepeu de monde qui s ’
y trouvait que le di t capitaine Daniel et ses gens étaient des sauvages ,fit décharger quelques mousquets sur les chaloupes pour leur faire déclarer qui il s étai ent .
Comme ils me s’
approchaien t pas immédiatemen t du fort et que lord Och iltrie trouvai t é
leur extérieur qu’
ils n’
é taien t pas des sauvages , illeur demanda qui il s étai ent . I ls
répondirent qu’
ils étai en t Frangaié, i l s dirent que les Fraugais et eux étaient amis,51 cause
de lei paix entre les deux ro is il s répliquéren t qu’
ils étaient FranQais, qu’
ils connaissaient
l a paix et étaient leurs amis ; ildit alors qu’en ces termes i ls étaient b ienvenus . Aussit é t
qu’
ils en t réren t (l’on n
’
at t endai t pas de procédés nuisibles aprés l es paroles qui s’
é taien t
échangée s) ils’
emparéren t d’eux tous
,les dé sarméren t , les rassembléren t avec toutes leurs
marchandises,chasséren t les pauvres gens da fort et les exposéren t sans abri n i convert ,
et san s Vé t emen t 51 l a merci de l a pluie et da vent froi d qu i étaient excessifs é cette
époque , de sorte que ces malheureux (parmi lesquel s des Viei ll ards , des femmes , des méres
avec leurs enfants et de jeunes elifan t s é leur sein ) ces malheureux , dis-j e, furent forcés de
renverser l a carcasse d ’
une vieill e chaloupe et de s’
y blottir en rampant pour sauver leurs
vies de l a rigueur da froid et de la pluie qui était ext réme. é cette place . En suite,le dit
capitain e Daniel et s'
on monde en t réren t dans le fiib ot que le dit l ord Och iltrie avait 151 ,s
’
emparéren t de toutes les marchandises et immédiatement il s v idéren t avec gloutonnerie
tro is barriques de Vin ,deux barriques de cidre fort et toute la b iére que l ’on avait con
serv ée, n’en réservant pas assez pour faire Vivre le dit lord Ochiltrie et ses gens pendant
leur voyage en France , de sorte qu’
ils furent forcés de bo i re de l ’eau puante au grand
détriment de lord Ochilfrie qui en tomba malade et de beaucoup de ses gens , sujets de Sa
Majesté , qui perdirent la Vie . I ls enlev éren t du vai sseau da dit lord Och iltlie les couleurs
de Sa Maj es té , les fouléren t aux pieds et h isséren t les couleurs du roi de France avec 11 11tel dédain que chose semblable n ’a j amai s été vue n i lue dans le cours d ’une paix exis
tan t entre deux rois . Aprés peu de j ours , il s expédié ren t l a majeure partie des gens du
dit lord Ochilt rie dan s de s chaloupes , environ trente lieues par mer , é Sch ib o mouillait
le navire da dit capitaine Daniel et pendant ces trent‘
e l ieues,i ls firen t travailler les
pauvres gens aux avirons comme s’il s eussent été des esclaves
,m
’ayant pour Vivre pendant tout ce temps que du pain et de l ’eau et beaucoup d ’en tre eux m’
ayan t pas de v é te
ment pour couvri r l eur nudité on se préserver da froid . De quel le plus grande barbarie
le Turc pourrait-iluser contre des chrétiens Peu de jours aprés, le dit lord Ochiltrie ,avec deux ou troi s genti lshommes anglais et leurs femmes furent emmenés eu chaloupe
au dit Schib o , et , l a t empé te le s ayant forcés d’
at t érir la nuit , i ls couchéren t sur l a terre
LE GOLFE SAINT-LAURENT 4 5
fro ide sans abri , l a pluie tomban t 21 torrents sur eux , ce qui causa une maladie extraor
din aire au dit lord Och iltrie qui contracta un flux de sang dont iln ’est pas probable qu ’i l
soi t bien t6t dél ivré . Dés son arrivée é Sch ib o et dés que le capitain e Daniel Vin t a son
vaisseau,ily hissa les couleurs da roi d’
Anglet erre comme sur une prise , acte inusité en
temps de pai x . A Sohibo , pendan t l’
espace de six on sept semaines , tous les malheureux
furent forcés comme des esclaves £1 travail ler péniblement,é tant au pain et £1 l ’eau seule
men t, et beaucoup é talit nus et sans Vé temen t s
,de sorte que
,par pi tié pour ces pauvres
gens,le dit lord Ochiltrie fut contraint de leur donner les couvertures de son l it pour
couvrir leur nudité et l es garantir eu part ie de la rigueur da froid, et de leur partager les
draps de son l it . Quand le dit lord Ochiltrie et ses gens eurent enduré ces injus t i ce s etces miséres pendan t l’espace de deux moi s, i l s furent tous embarqués dans le vaisseau da
dit capitaine Dani el , cinquante hommes , femmes et en fants étaient enfermés dans la cale
dllvaisseau dans un réduit si étroit qu’
ils étaient forcés de coucher les uns sur l es autres
comme s ’il s eussent été des poissons , couchant daus leurs propres immondices et nourri s
au pain et a l ’eau ,de sorte que par la faim et par l’odeur pest i férée de leurs propres
ordures beaucoup d’entre eux furent j etés 5 1a mer ; l a famine fai sant perdre le l ait de
leurs méres, l es pauvres peti t s enfants perdirent la Vie et furent j etés 5 1a mer. En ce
temps,le dit lord Ochiltrie , afi
’
ect é d ’un flux de sang, fu t alors qu’i l réclamait contre le
trai tement infligé é ses gens , menacé d’
av oir la gorge coupée et de recevo ir un coup de
pisto let le domestique qui le soignait dan s sa maladie fut empé ché de venir lui donnerum verre d ’eau ; ses cofi
'
res, avec ses Vé t emen t s et ses papiers , qui seuls h’avaient pas
encore été fouill és et saisi s , furen t pris et ouverts et ses quit tances de grandes sommesd’argent qu’il avait payées
,les reconnaiss ances de sommes pré t ées, ses ti tres de créances
sur les terres de ses amis furent pri s par le dit capitaine Dan iel et j etés 5 la mer . E t
pdur couronner le reste des in solences da dit capitaine Daniel , devant le sergent-m q jor
de Dieppe,monsieur Schob n ell1, ila appel é le roi d
’
Anglet erre un usurpateur . Dan s
cette action,le dit lord Ochiltrie a prouvé que , partie pour les marchandises qui lui ont
é té prises,pour ses pertes pendant son voyage, et pour la valeur des quit tances préc itée s
qui ont été j etées 51 l a mer , iléprouve u n préjudice d’
en v iron“Vingt mille l ivres sterl ing .
Le di t lord Oohilt rie a prouvé cette relation dau s son entier devant la cour de l’
am iraut é
de Dieppe a obtenu sentence sur 0 9 et étant gardé prisonnier enfermé £1 Dieppe pendant
ummois,ila été appelé devant ses juges par l
’
en tremise de l’amb assadeur de Sa Majesté .
Ou lu i a objecté ses offenses contre le roi de France ; ils’est défendu en invoquant la
mission 5 lui donnée par Sa Majesté , qu’i l n ’a j amai s transgressée pour rien de contraire ;
et comme on n’
av ait rien de plus 51 dire contre lui ila été remis é l’
amb assade de Sa
Majesté . H a présenté au Con sei l sa relat ion (les torts et pertes qu ’i l a éprouvés , avec
leur v érificat ion £1 la cour d’
amiraut é de Dieppe , en y joignan t 1a sentence des juges .Mais iln ’a pu encore avoir réparation de ses griefs , paiements de ses pertes , ou punition
de son agresseur ; au cop traire , le di t capitaine Daniel est employé par une nouvellecommiss ion pour aller en Amérique sur un vaisseau da roi de France avec deux autres ,pour assurer 1a possession d11 .Cap
-Breton,et l ’i le de Cap-Breton lui a été donnée pour les
inj ures qu’i l a faites au roi d’
Angleterre et 21 ses sujets . E t, ce qui est plus barbare et
plus injuste encore, 1a sentence de la cour d
’
amiraut é qu ’i l a présentée au Consei l de
1 Ou cro i t qu’i l s’ag i t de Channel , d’une fam i l le b ourgeoise de D ieppe.
4 6 BENJAMIN SULTE
France , 0 11 refuse de la lui rendre , par un procédé aussi odieux qu’on puisse le consigner .
Aussi,lord Ochiltrie est forcé d’
av o ir recours 51 Sa Maj esté , et son humble désir est
Qu’i l plai se 21 Sa Majesté prendre ses griefs et pertes en sa princiére et royale considération
et qu ’i l lui plaise y pourvoir par telreméde qui , daus son j ugement souverain , se trouvera
la plus oonvenable . Et pour la vérité de sa relation , ilest pré t 21 en répondre sur sa vie
et en méme temps ils ’en remet pour le prouver 51 l a rel ation da capitain e ConstanceFerrer
,
1dv l i eutenant Thomas 2 Stewart , de Henry Pew , genti lhomme, et de tels autres
qu’on trouvera et qui étaien t témoins des dits fait s — et qu ’i l plai se £1 Sa Grac ieuse
Majesté de les faire appeler pour v érifier ce réc it , en témoignage de la. Vérité duquel le
dit lord Oohiltrie a signé ces présentes . (Signé) J . L . Ochiltrie .
Dan s l’Histoim des Canadz’
ens-B '
anpais (I I , j’
ai taché de fai re la l i ste des Frangaisdemeurés £1 Québec durant 1’occupation de Kertk. La voici : Des Vingt personnes da
sexe mascu l in don t la présence est constatée , daus l’
in terv alle de 1 60 8 51 1 628 , cinq repas
séren t en France , mais devaient revenir ; ce son t : Samuel de Champlain , 0 1iv ierleTardif,Thierry Desdames , Jean-Paul Godefroy et Robert Griffard . Héb ert et Jon quest étaient
décédés . Les treize qui restaien t au Can ada étaient : Nicolas Marsolet , in t erpré te non
encore marié, E t ienne Brulé , in t erprét e et célibataire , Gui l laume Couil lard , artisan et
cult ivateur , Guilleme tte Héb ert , sa femme et l eurs enfants : Louise , Marguerite , Louise 3 ;Abraham Mar t in ,
pi lote,Marguerite Langloi s
, sa femme et leurs enfants Ann e , Eustache ,Marguerite , Hélén e Nicolas Piv ertflMarguerite Lesag e , sa femme avec leur n iéce et un
j eune homme ; Pi erre Desportes , Francoise Langlois , sa femme et leur fille Hélén e ; Jac
ques Herte l , in t erpré te resté chez les sauvages , n on encore marié ; Jean Nicolet , inter
pré t e resté chez les A lgonquins de l’
Ot tawa,non encore marié Adrien Duchesne
,chirurgien
et sa femme de nom inconnu ; Jean Godefroy , in t erpré te res té chez les sauvages , non
encore marié Thomas Godefroy, iuterpré te et célibatai re Guill aume Hub ou
,cul t ivateur
marié 91 Marie Rol let veuve de Louis Héb er t , et um enfant Gui llaume Héb ert Francois
Marguerie , in t erpré te resté chez les sauvages et non encore marié . Eu tout,trente
et -un e personnes 5 . Ceux qui restaient daus le pays formaient déj é depui s quelques années
la part ie stable de l a population . 11 est donc faux de dire que le Canada ffit abandonné
de ses habitan ts . D’
aut res Fran qais, qui me devaient pas faire souche ici , con t inuéren t ay
résider sous les Kertk. Ce son t : Gros-Jean ,de Dieppe , in terprét e des Algonquins , ami
de s Anglais Le Baill i f, natif d’
Amien s, arrivé en 1622 en qualité de sous-commis et chassé
par de Caen pour é tre grandement vicieux ilse donna, aux Kertk, qui en firen t leur
commis et lui confiéren t les clefs d11 magasin des Franqais , qu’i l avait eu la précaution
de se faire remett re afin de s e venger de de Caen . Ou l ’aceuse d’
av oir enlevé £1 Cornei l le ,sous-commis , cent l iv res en or et em argent outre certains efi
'
et s ; c’est lui , dit-on , qui
s’
empara des vases sacrés de l’
église de Québec ; les Anglais fin iren t par s ’
indigner de sa
1 I I ex iste une pé ti tion de lui demandan t une indemn i té pour les pertes sub ies eu cette occas ion .
2 F i ls de lord Och iltrie.
3 E l isabeth fut baptisée la 9 février4 Ramen é z} Québec parles Angla is, apres av o i r été pri s au capTourmente.
5 Vo ir Société Royale , 1882 , p. 5 1, 131 .
4 8 BENJAMIN SULTE
Laurent . Le 7 avri l , ordre était donn é de mettre six navires sous voiles dans six semaines,et de les diriger vers le Can ada, savo i r : l
’un commandé par le Cheval ier de Montigny,
amiral de cette. fiotte , et les autres par le Chevali er de Sain t-Clair (ou Mon tclair) , le sieur
de Nest de Fé camp , le s ieur de Lombards , le capitaine Daniel et le capitaine Armand . Je
ne sai s ce qui résulta de ces préparatifs ; mais en l’ann ée 1 630 H n ’est fait men t ion que dedeux navires frangais qui parvinrent en Acadi e . Les Basques et les autres batimen t s
pécheurs qui , de temps immémorial, fréquentaient le s eaux dll gol fe sans trop s’
occuper
des la ttes entre les couronnes , continuaient l eurs opérations en dépit des Anglai s .
D ’une part , la, compagnie des Cen t Associés a vait £1 caeur de se refaire de ses perte s
d’argent Champlain appuya it dans ce sen s afin de reprendre le travai l de l a colon is ation
,
qui é tait le grand but de 8 3 v ia ; R ichelieu etait engagé d’
hon n eur 21 11 6 point laisb
ser j eter
au panier le traité de Suze , s i expli ci te £1 l’
endroit des prises faites aprés le 24 avri l 1 629 .
Hum autre cét é , le sentim ent hos ti le aux co lon ies, dont le ministre de Henri IV, Sully ,avai t ét é I’expression en son temps exi stai t touj ours on discutait en France , en l
’
ann ée
1 630 , pour savoir s’i l fallait garder le Canada, tout comme emnotre siécle le peuple anglais
s e pose l a question de souteni r ses é tablissamen t s loin tain s 0 11 de les abandonner . -De
Caen deman dai t que les Anglai s lui vendissent les pel leteries qu’
ils avaient enlevées 21 l a
faveur des troubles et de la prise de Québec . Se croyant bien certain da prompt retour
de cette place 51 16. Fran ce , et voulant eu fin ir avec les réclamations de ce marchand ,
Richelieu permit 5 de a n d’
exploiter le gol fe et le fleuv e durant une année , ce que les
Angl ais empéchérefit , comme on le verra . Les Kertk fai saien t un commerce profitable, et
se montraient disposés é ten ir bon daus leurs postes,méme é résister aux ordres de se
retirer,s ’i l leur en venait de la cour de Londres . Charles I reprochait a l a France l
’at
taque da capi taine Dan iel contre lord Stuart , et voyan t Richelieu fort occupé en Europe ,fe ignait de me pas vouloir céder un pouce de terrain u i un bal lot de marchandises . A in si
s’
écoula l’an n ée 1 630 .
Attendant toujours la l ettre écrite qui devait leur rendre le Saiut-Lauren t , les Cen t
As sociés se décidéren t n éanmoms 21 faire acte d’
occupat ion . Le 25 mars 1 631 , 19 capitaineHubert Anse lme parti t de Dieppe en destination de Tadoussac , et relé cha é Mi scon pourévi ter les Anglai s , car ilvenait d
’
appren dre de quel le man iére ilserai t regu par eux dans
le fieuv e. Ilne parait pas avoir dépassé Miscon . Au mois d ’
avril , le capi taine Lauren t
Ferchaud mit 25 la voile , de Bordeaux , et cingla Wars l’
Acadie , ilretourna trois fo i s dans
le cours de cette année,ravitai llant chaque foi s le pos t e francais (111 cap Sable , y trans
portant des colon s et des rel igieux . Ce fut lé seul succ és des Cent Associés en 1631 .
Le capi taine Danielavait pris la mer le 26 avril pour se ren dre é Sain te-An n e da capBreton . Arrivé prés de Terre-Neuve
,ileut connaissance d ’un pirate turc et voulut lui
donner la chasse mais celui-ci,me se voyant pas de force 51 résister, vira de bord et all a se
j e ter sur un b é t imen t basque,0 11 ilperdit son drapeau , san s toutefois s e faire prendre lu i
méme . Daniel s’
arré ta é Sain te-Aune et envoya Michel Galloi s 5 1a traite de M iscon sur son
propre navire . G alloi s ren éon t ra dan s ces parages 11 11 frére du capitaine Dumay, qui
montait une barque de trente-cinq tonneaux seul ement , équipée au Havre -de-Grfwe . Tous
deux s’
en tendiren t pour in timider les Basques qui exploitaient les pé cheries sans l’
auto
LE GOLFE SAINT—LAURENT 4 9
risat ion des Cent Assocnes , et i l s mirent d’
ab ord l a main sur le capitaine Joannis Arnaudel,de Saint-Jean-de-Lu z dans le golfe de Biscaye ; mai s l es Basques reven ant sur eux lesforcéren t de prendre Ia fuite, tandis que le capti f s
’
é vadait eu plongeémt dans l a mer,d ’oil ses gens le ret iréren t en peu dt} temps .
Emeric.de Caen était parti de Dieppe sur un navire appar tenant £1 son oncle Guil
laume . A. Québec , les Anglai s lui défendirent de t rafiquer en dehors des mois d’
hiv el‘
ilrepri t le chemin de la France .
Tan dis que ces événements avaient l ieu am Canada, Charles I écrivait de Greenw ich
£1 sir Isaac Wake , son ambassadeur prés l a cour de France , une dépéche en date du 1 2
juin 163 1 , qui expose , ilme semble, tous les cé tés e t aspects de l a si tuat ion en tre les deuxpouvoirs , et surtou t cette curieuse affai re da 11 0 11 payemen t d ’une partie de la dot de
Henriette-Marie , sceur de Louis XI II,mariée en 1 625 51 Charles I . Celui-ci s
’
explique
nettement payez la dot , on pas de Québec n i de Port -Royal ! Ou y voit aussi plus d’un
point qu’i l est £1 propos de con nait re au sujet des n avires capturés en 1 629 . Cette curieuse
piéce a été mise an j om'
en 1 884 par M . Douglas Brymner,archivi ste du gouvernement
canadien . La voici en son entier :
Par vos difi'
é ren tes dépé ches am Vicomte Dorchester,depui s que vous é tes arrivé £1
votre l ieu de résiden ce en cette c ou r (de France ) nous avons part iculiéremen t remarqué
les retards qu ’on vous a fait éprouver avan t dc vous présenter d’
ab ord au roi et 51 ses
principaux ministres,ain si que les man ié res et le l angage dont 0 11 s ’est servi votre égard ,
lors de votre premiére audience . E t de méme que n ous me pouvons nous empécher d’
é tre
surpris que vous n’
ayiez pas ét é admis plus t6t en la présence da roi , sur v os instancesréitérées , et aprés l a soll ici tation d
’une audience fai te par d’
Angier, ain si d’un autre cé té ,
n ous estimons avo ir l i eu suffisammen t d’
é t re sati sfaits de l a réparation qui vous a été faite
par l a déclaration si sign ificat iv e d’
amit ié fra ternel le et la déclaration d ’un ferme propos
d’
en t reten ir exactement avec nous des relati ons amicales , qui vous ou t été faite s de la
bouche méme da roi . Quan t au bon accuei l dont vous avez été l’obj et de la part de
quelques -uns cl es ministres de ce roi et 5 la réserve que d’
au tres ont observée avec vous,au sujet du cardinal de Richel ieu , v ous avez bien fai t de vous conformer £1 v os in st ruc
tion s,et pour le reste nous devons vous lai sser agir avec em: 21 votre discrétion . E t
comme nous voyons par votre conduite que vous n’
é tes pas novice dans les ambassades ,ainsi nous n ’
av on s pas besoin de vous donner de nouvelles instructi ons sur l es égards £1
avoi r pour ce ux avec qu i vous avez é négocier en cette cour, s i 0 6 n’est de con t ip uer
comme vous avez bien commen cé,en ce qui regarde le cérémonial de votre emplo i . Cette
dépé che vous en apprendra la partie essentiel le , qui est de mettre fin é tous les différends
entre les deux couron n es,et d
’établir les bases d ’une plus ferme amitié que celle des
ann ées dern iéres ; ce n ’est pas 121 11 11 9 ceuv re nouvel le ; ilna s’agit, en réal ité, que de
renouveler d’
anciennes al l iances , en mét tan t d’accord les faits avec l es promesses . O
’est
ce que comportait 1’
0 bj et principal , et le premier arti cle méme da dernier traité , conclu il
y a deux an s, aprés une rupture malheureuse et ce qu’il embrassait on 0 9 qu ’on pouvait
prétendre en ver tu de ce traité a été ponctuellement exécuté de notre part : sauf seul ement ce qui exigeait dans le temps , e t ce qui exige n écessziiremen t une exécution mutuel le .
Nous av on s , conformément an traité (comme vou s le verrez spécifié au troisiéme article)admis une modificat ion dans la maison de votre digne épouse , en augmentant la nombré
des ecclésiastiques attachés 51 sa personne , comme on l’a jugé convenable , de gré £1 gré ; et
See. I , 1889 . 7 .
5 0 BENJAMIN SULTE
nous avons fai t faire £1 cette nation (frangaise) diverses restitutions de n avires avec l eurs
chargements d ’une t ré s—grande valeur, san s avoir rien pris n i gardé de cc genre , attendu
que la remise en était exigée de nous par droit d’
arré t ou de représai lles . La méme sati s
faction me nous a pas été donn ée , non plus qu’
é nos sujets,sous ce double rappor t car
bien quele t roisiéme articl e déj a‘
lmentionné requiere expressément la confirmat ion de tous
les articles et s tipul at ions de n otre con trat de mariage , eu n’
exceptan t que la particu l ari térelative £1 lamai son de n otre chére ép ouse
,objet d ’une clause part iculiére dan s ce dernier
traité , et que la dot soi t cl airement stipulée , et quant au mon tan t , et quant £1 l’
époque du
paiement précis é daus ces ar t i cles et conventions matrimoniales, et que promesse de paie
men t nous ait été souvent fai te en con séquence,spéci al emen t par M . de Ché teaun eu f,
mainten ant garde des sceaux , lorsqu’
ilétait ici en ambassade,cependant l a moi tié u
’
en
es t pas encore payée , et non seulement trois riches b é t imen ts appartenant £1 nos suj et s’
capturés et gardés sans aucune raison légi time , n i méme l ’ombre d’un prétexte , sont
encore reten us,malgré des demandes réitérées de rest itut ion ; mai s aussi ila été prat iqué
dans ce pays (en France) diverses s aisi es de draps et de t i ssus fabriqués en notre royaume ,
en contradiction directe avec les st ipulations et le traité . Le paiement de l a, balance (18
l a dot a été depuis promis de rechef, {a nou s de méme qu’
aux personnes que nous avons
employées dans cette cour, et par les ministres de ce roi et par l’amb assadeur de France
résidant -
aupré s de nou s . Nous me pouvons accorder plus de délai pour ce paiement et
nous l ’avons en conséquence joint aux autre s conditions d ’une en t iére et parfaite récon
ci l iation . L’
amb assadeur fran gais, persist ant encore dan s sa promess e de paiement , dési re
néanmoins que les affaires en question soient séparées,em 8 6 fai sant 11 11 point d
’
honn eur
d’
é tre tenue par un nouveau traité , de payer la dette déj é reconnue par une convention
an térieure , ce 5 quoi nous avons consenti vo lont iers , parce qu’
une formal ité me doit pas
interrompre les n égociation s —mais comme nou s sommes plus part iculiéremen t tenu en
honneur de faire prudemment des convention s qui,si el les n ’
on t pas été exécutées aupa
rav an t daus l’ordre des temps , devrai ent l’
é tre au moms simultanément et effectivemen t
avec des choses d’une grande importance qu ’on nous demande d’
accomplir, nous me
pouvons nullement consentir é le s s éparer de fagon que l’une pourrai t é tre presérit e et
accomplie san s l ’autre . Ce que nou s entendons prin cipalement devoir é tre employé pour
amener le paiement de la balance de la dot , est l a reddit ion de Québec , en Can ada, vil le
prise , en vertu d’une commission donnée sous notre grand sceau
,p endan t 'la dern iére
guerre,par un e compagnie de suj ets de notre royaume d’
Angleterre, et l'év acuat ion de
Port-Roya],s i tué prés de l a Nouvelle-Angleterre , et 0 131 11 11 9 compagnie de nos suj ets de
not re royaume d’
Ecosse étai t fixée et é tabl ie en vertu de l a méme commission , sous le
sceau de notre royaume,également donnée pendant 1a guerre pour donner sui te é une
autre antérieurement accordée par le roi notre péi‘
e d’
heureuse mémdire . 11 es t vrai qu ’
ane
de ces v illes a été pris e et que l’é tablissemen t s ’est effectué dans l ’autre aprés l a, paix , et
pour cette considérat ion (afin d’
accommoder tous les différends) nous avons formellemen tconsenti , et nous persi stons daus notre desse in et rés o lution
,que l ’un e
,o’est-e
‘
i -dire Québec ,soit rendue , e t que ceux de nos suj e ts qui sont établ is daus l ’autre s ’en retirent , eu leslai ssant toutes deux dans le méme état el les étaient avant Ia conclusion de l a paix ce
que nous me fais ons point par ignoran ce , comme s i nous ne comprenions point 51 combienpeu nous oblige sous ce rapport Ie derni er traité (le sept iéme article de ce t raité ,rel atif aux resti tutions me mentionne que les navires qui étaien t alors £1 l’é tranger avec
5 2 BENJAMIN SULTE LE GOLFE SAINT' LAURENT
L’
ann ée 1632 s’
ouv rit sans réglemen t de comptes . Ilfallut attendre au 29 mars pour
voir signer le trai té dit de Sain t-Germain -en -Laye , qui fit cesser toutes les difficult és . Le
13 juil let , Thomas Kertk rendi t Québec é Emeric de 0 3 6 11 , et parti t emportant une richecargai son de fourrure s ; l es années 1 629 -32 lui procuréren t des sommes énormes . Les dc
Caen avaient obt enu le droi t de l a traite pour l’
ann ée 1632 . Les Cent A ssociés envoyaien t
quelques colons . L’
ann ée su ivante Champlain arrive. de France c’
é tait le commencement
réel du régime des Cent A ssociés . Mal heureusement des circons tances multiples entraVéren t son action . Les guerres que soutenai t continuel lement la France ; 11 11 penchant
nouveau chez les armateurs 5 se porter vers l’Amérique centrale ; l a mort de Champlain
( 1635 ) e t les guerres des Iroquois qui suivi rent b ien té t tout se conj ura pour paralyser
Ie développement du Canada. A Port-Royal, en Acadie , méme chose Raz illy n
’eut pas
assez de secours mi assez de temps 21 sa disposition pour exécuter l’cxauv re qu’i l avai t ré vée
ilmourut , lui aussi , l ai ssant de pet i ts groupes frangais, isol és les uns cles autres , Végétan t ,peu rassurés et nullement aidés dau s leurs entreprises . I ls se maintinrent néanmoins cl ans
ces vastes contrées, et poséren t , avec pat ien ce e t longueur de temps , les assises d
’un empire
frangzais dont Colbert compri t la. valeur en 1663 .
SECTION I , 1889 . MEMOIRE S S. R . CANADA .
I I I Pa ralle‘le hislorique ent re 16 0 0 77 116 de [a Galissomziére ( 1 747 - 9 ) et 16 comte ( Je
D uferin ( 1 8 72 par J.
-M . LEMOINE .
( Ln le 7 mai
Je me propose d’
appeler votre attention sm' l’adm in istrat ion de deux des plus remar
quables vice-roi s que la France e t l’
Angleterre nous aien t env oyés , depuis l a fondation de
Québec j usqu’
é ces derniers temps ; j e veux dire le. comte de la Galissonn ié re e t le comte
de Dufl'
erin . La. carriére de ces deux hommes présen te, 5 mon sens , de singul iers con
trastes,de fort curieux rapprochemen ts .
Le 1 9 septembre 1 747 , le JWN'
tlmmbea'laml, mouill é dans la rade de Québec , y déposai tle remplagan t da marquis de l a Jon quiére , nommé gouverneur en 1 746 , et fai t pri sonnierde guerre , le 3 mai 1 747 , par les Anglais , 51 l a suite d
’
un c ombat naval , prés dl1 cap Finis
t ére . Le méme navire mmen ait en France , 16 1 8 octobre de l a méme ann ée , le gouverneur
sor tant de charge,16 marquis de Beauharnoi s . Le nouveau titul aire se nommait Rol l and
Michel Barrin , comte de la Galisson n iére . C e tait 11 11 marin franqais distingué , um érudit ,un n atural iste
, uu fin observateur, voire méme un diplomate . Sou premier soin en pre
nant les rénes da gouvernement fut de connaitre le pays , son climat , sa popul at ion , ses
ressources et son commerce ,” comme l ’a remarqué l’h ist orien Ferland .
Le comte de la Galissonn iére débarquait sur n os rives daus un temps fort cri t ique .
Restaurer le prestige affaibli de la. Vieille France , u ti l iser la posit i on exceptionnel le de l aFrance nouvel le
,Vis-é -Vis de la mére patrie , tels furent les problémes qu ’i l se posa d’
ab ord.
A cet te époque , 1a marine frangaise , négl ig‘ée
,osait £1 peine se montrer sur l’Océan ,
l’Angleterre , battue sur terre , étai t toute puissante par son énorme flotte . Un avenir
prochain, ilest vrai , réservai t encore aux armes franqaises d
’
é clat an ts triomphes en
Amérique ,mai sW il l iam Pi tt devai t changer la face des choses da tou t au tout . Heureuse
ment pour l a Galissonn iére, Pitt n’
arriv a au pouvoir qu ’en 1 75 6 , année de la mort de
l'
illustre comte , — ce qui épargna £1 celui -ci le chagrin de voir accompli r la prédiction da
célébra min i stre anglais, qui avait juré de chasser l es Frangais de l
’
Amérique .
Deux sujets d’
importance premiére semblent avoir préoccupé le nouveau gouverneur :
l’
in termin able quest ion des fron t iéres de l’Acadie , cédée 21 l’
Angleterre en 1 7 13 par le
traité d’
Ut rech t , et cel les de la Nouvell e-Ecosse . La Grande-Bretagne prétendai t que les
Véritables fron t iéres de l a. Nouvelle-E cosse ou de l’Acadie, suivant ses anciennes limites ,étaient 1 0 Une ligne droi t e tirée depui sl’
emb ouchure dela, ri‘
v iére Penobscot j usqu’
au
fleuv e Saint-Laurent 20 Ce fieuv e ehle gol fe Saint-Laurent j usqu’
é l’
océan au sud-ouest
da Cap-Breton 30 — L
’
océan ,de ce poin t , Al
’
emb ouchure de la. riv iére Penobscot . Elle
di sai t méme que le fleuv e Saint-Laurent étai t l a l igne de démarcation la plus naturelle et
l a plus vraie,entre le s posses sions des deux peupl es . Le pays ainsi réclamé hors de la
pén in sule acadienne avait plus de trois foi s l’é téndue de l a N ouvel le-E cosse , et com
mandai t Ie golfe,et l’emb ouchure du Saint-Laurent . C
’
é tait l a. porte da Can ada, et l a
seule par l ’on pfit y entrer du cé t é de 1’océan en hiver, c’est-é -dire
,pendant cinq mois
de l’ann ée .
”
5 4 J.
-M. LEMOINE
Cette prétention parut excessive,et , comme l
’a remarqu é l’h istorien Ban croft , n e
pouvai t prévaloir d’
aprés le droit des gens car la France n’
av ait j amai s cédé l’Angle
t erre la rive sud dll Saint-Laurent , n i aucun territoire au nord du 4 1e degré de latitude .
La prétent ion de la Grande-Bretagne , da cé t é de l‘
Ohio , était encore plus outrée , et si
el le efit prévalu,e lle lui efit al ors assuré l’immen se contrée qui forme maintenant les E tats
de New -York , de la Pen sylv an ie, de l’
Oh io , du Kentucky , de l’
Indiana et de l’IlIin ois ,outre les terres si tuées £1 l
’est et 5 l’ou est du l ac M ichigan Le Canada se serait trouvé
séparé de l a Louisiane par de longues distances , et complé temen t mutil é Des murs de
Québec et de Montréal , comme le remarque Garneau , on aurait pu voir flot ter le drapeau
angl ai s sur la rive droite da Saint-Lauren t . De parei ls sacrifices équival aient $1 11 11 aban
don to tal de l a Nouvel le-Fran oe .
”
Bien que le traité d’
Aix-l a-Chapel le 1745 ) efit rendu 51 l a, France ses anciennes pos ~
session s,Louisbourg et le Cap-Breton ,
ce fameux traité était loin de sat isfaire les Franqais
0 11 awai t négl igé d’
y désigner le s bornes de la Nouvelle-Ecosse .
“ Entre l a, péninsule et
l a riv iére Saint-Jean ,dit Ferland , s
’
é tendait un terri toire réclamé depuis longtemps,par
l a France et I’
Angleterre . Pour maintenir l e s droits de son maitre , 1a Galisson n iére fit
investir Misagouch e (Fort Lawrence ) , Beaub assin et quelques autres postes du cé t é de
l’
Acadie . Dans ce dernier en droit résidai t l’
ab b é Le Loutre , qui avai t acquis beaucoupd
’
ascendan t sur les Acadiens , aussi bien que S li r le s Micmacs . Tré s attaché a13. France , ilvoulait engager les A cadien s des M ines e t de Port-Royal £1 quitter leurs terres pour se
retirer dan s l a partie assurée ala France . Le gouverneur général approuva les proj ets
de L'
e Loutre en peuplant d’
Acadien s le territoire réclamé par la France,ilfortifiait l es
fron t iéres de ce cét é , et enlevai t é l’
ennemi ceux qui pouvaient , par l a suite , le favoriser .
En méme temps que M . de la Galisson n iére travai ll ai t é fort ifier l’influen ce frangaise
dans l’Acadie, ilcherchait 51 assurer les l imites de l a colon ie vers l’
Ouest , opération d’au
tan t plus importan te qu ’ il s ’
agissait de cons)erver ou de perdre une des bran ches les plus
fructueuses du commerce in térieur da Canada. 11 importait de conserver la possess ion
da cours de l’Ohio ,afin d
’
en tret en ir des communications faci les avec la Lou isiane , et de
restreindre les colonies angl ai ses aux Apalaches . M. Celoron de Blainville (Bienville) fut
chargé de se rendre au Détroit , 531 la t é te de trois cents hommes .
L’
expédit ion de Celoron et des trois cents soldats, en Vingt-trois canots, n’eut cepen
dant qu’
un demi-succés .
Au rapport da j ésuite Bonn ecamp, qui accompagnait Celoron comme aumén ier, le
parti avai t parcouru, au mil ieu de péril s sans nombre , douze cents l ieues , depuis s on
départ de Montréal j usqu’
é son retour em cette vi lle . Dans son mégn ifique récit des
in cidents de l a route,Parkman fait remarquer que l’influen ce des traiteurs angl ais dans
la val lée de l’Oh io s’
acoroissait de jour en j our, et men aqait t ét ou tard d’
isoler 13. Louisi ane
da gouvernement central de Québec , auquel el le n’
é tait rel iée que par une série de peti ts
forts,trés faible s pour la. plupart . Restreindre l’expansion des colonies anglaises , l es
reléguer entre l’Atlan t ique et l es Allégan ies , remplir de colons francai s l’
Acadie contestée ,ains i que le vaste territoi re de l’Ouest , voila ce qui s
’
imposait 51 la Galissonn iére , et ,
comme ille disait daus son mémoi re 2 : Si nous permetton s aux Anglais d’
é tre les
maitres emAmérique , leur commerce et leur prestige sur mer prendront de s propo rtions
1 Histoire du Canada, 4e éd.,Garn eau, vol. I I , p. 194.
Mémo ire sur les colon ies de 19. France dans l’Amérique septen tr ionale.
5 6 1 -11 . LEMOINE
L’
h istoire 111 1 conférera 11 11 dipléme plus glorieux que ceux qui vienn en t des rois .
Voici comment parle 11 11 s avant c on temp o rain,1e céléb re natural iste suédois , Pierre
Kalm , qui fu t l’
hé te da comte de l a. Galissonn ié re, au chfiteau Saint -Louis , £1 Québec ,durant quarante-cinq j ours : C
’
é tait uu homme d’
en v irou cinquante ans , dit-il; de petite
stature, un peu difforme méme, mai s d’
un ex térieur agréable quand j e pen se £1 toutes lesbel les qual ités qui bri ll aien t é n 1ui
,je 11 e puis en fai re asse z d ’éloges . 11 a des com mi s
sances étonnante s daus tou tes les scien ces,mais surtout dans les sciences naturel le s , 0 11 11
es t tellemen t versé que , quand 11 commen gait 51 me parler sur ce sujet , j e m’
imag‘inais voir
n otre grand Lin n é e sous une nouvelle forme . Jamai s l’hist o ire naturel le n ’a eu, en ce
pays , un plus grand protecteur, et 11 est douteux qu’on 11 9. revoie ic i son pareil .”
LE COMTE D E DUFFER IN ( 1 872
Frederick Temple Hamilton Blackw ood , comte de Dufi‘
erin et baron de Clandeboye ,est de t rés-noble et t rés ~an cien n e famil le d’
ex tract ion écos sai se . Ou trouve l ’un de ses
ancé tres 21 la 0 0 11 1 de l a reine Marie Stuart . 11 est né £1 Floren ce , 1e 2 1 jui11 1 826 . En 1 841 ,
11 hérit a du t itre nobil iaire et des domaines , en I rlande, de son pére , 1e capitaine Price
Blackw ood , qui avait été anobl i . Sa mére appartenai t £1 1’111ustre lignée des Sheridan .
E ll e semble avoi r transmis £1 son fils le s apti tudes l i ttéraires et le beau parler de cette
famil le privilégié e . Ayan t fai t ses clas ses 21 E ton , le j eune Blackwood fut gradué par
1’
uuiv ersité d’
Oxford. Umde ses premiers souci s fut de s’
occuper des afi‘
aires de l’I rlande ,qu ’i l Vi sita en 1 847 , lorsque ce malheureu x pays étai t en proie aux horreurs de 13. famine .
De retour,11 publia 1e résul tat de ses observation s , e t suggéra des réformes . A l
’
age d
Vingt-deux an s,11 fut nommé chambellan de la reine
,et remplit ces hautes fonct ion s
presque sans interruption, j usqu
’
en 1 858 .
C’est vers méme époque qu
’i l explora daus sou yacht , 1e Foam, de temps en temps
remorqué,comme 11 le dit
,par l a frégate frangaise 1a Reine Hortense, portant le prince
Napoléon , — 1es Geysers de 1’
I slande et da Spitzberg . Son volume : Lelters from. High
La t itudes contien t 1e réc it de son voyage . Ce l ivre fit sensation daus le monde l i ttéraire et
scien t ifique . 11 fou rnit d’
u t iles Tenseignements sou s une forme fort attrayante . A peine
de retour des glaces da péle n ord,
“ 11 partai t pour les régions que b rfile le solei l ,” chargé
d'une importante mi ssion politique . 11 all ait en 1 860 , comme haut commissaire , faire
une en qué t e sur les massacrés des chrét iens en Syrie . Les résul tats de sa mission furent
tel s qu’
ils lui valurent l’
honn eur d’
é tre nommé Cheval i er da bain . Lord Dufferiu avai t
réussi £1 rétablir 121 bonne entente entre l es chrét iens et l es D ruses 11 se rev élait p our
premiére 10 15 comme diplomate . Son mariag e avec Harriet , fille d’
Arch ib ald Hamil ton ,
de Killyleah Cast le , I rlan de, pet1te fille de Hamil ton Rowan , date da 23 o ctobre 1862 .
Qui de n ous n ’a V11 et admiré la. spiri tuel le et séduisan te comtesseDe 1 864 $1 1 866 , lord Dufferin remplit 1a charge de sous -secrétai re pour les In des . En
1 866 , 0 11 la retmuv e sous- secrétai re au minist ére de 13. guerre . Deux an s plus tard , 11
devient chancelier du duché de Lan caster ,' poste honorifique e t lucrati f qui avai t été
offert é notre ancien gouverneur lord E lgin, 91 son retour da Canada, en 1 854 .
Lord Duffe rin avai t,en 1 8 67 , présidé le congrés des Sciences é Belfast , 0 11 11 fit , en
termes émus et avec une éloquence en train an t e l’
éloge de si r Walter Scott , 31 l’
occasion
PARALLELE HISTORIQUE 5 7
du centenaire (16 naissance de 1’
A1‘1ost 6 d11 Nord . On 111 1 offrit vers 0 6 temps 16 gou
Vernemen t de Bombay, mais l a. faible santé de sa mére 111 1 fit refuser Ge pro-consulat
l o intain . E 11 1 866,11 avait publi é 11 11 1116 111 0 11 6 remarquable S 11 1 l
’
é t at (16 l’Irlande , héri ssé
de ch ifi’
res,d
’
argumen t s , saupoudré d’
11 l1 e 1111 6 11 0 11 16 6 t (16 mille graces de style .
L6 comte de Duff6 1'111,dés 16 début
,marcha dans les rangs d11 part i l ibéral de la.
Grande -Bretagn e . C’es t 21 11 Grand V iei l l ard
,£1 1
’
111ust1'6 M . Gladsto11 6 , que 16 Canada
est redevable des services (16 1’6m111 6 11 t homme d’
E tat,d11 sympathique 6 t puissant pro
tecteur des Can adiens,dont 16 dépar t 11 6 6 11 3 6 de 5 1 j ustes regrets .
Sa souverain e 11 6 111 1 a pas marchandé les hon n eurs , 6 11 récompense des services inap
préciables qu’
ila rendus é 1’6mp1r6 . 11 es t du peti t 11 0 11111 1 6 (16 8 nob1es ayan t dro it aux
cordons des tro i s ordres de cheval erie . 11 devint'
pair (111 royaume-un i (16 la Gran de
Bretagne et d ’
11'1and6,6 11 1 87 1 . 11 Vie11 t d’
é t re créé marquis .
Inv ité £1 répondre au discouré d11 T-rén e daus 16 par16m6 11 t impérial , p6 11 de temps
aprés la mort regrettable (111 prince A lbert , 10 11 1 11 11 111
6 1 111 pron onga ,16 6 févrie r 1 86 2 , 11 11 6
chaleureuse haran gue,qui semble avo i r l
’
auditoire 6 t q 11 1 fit v e1'
ser d’
ab ondan t es
121 1 11 16 5, par 121 pei11 t11 1
'
e q 11’
ilfit des vertus domes t iques et de 1’6 X6 6 116 11 t 0 0 6 11 1 d11 royal
époux de 8 3 Majesté la 1 6 111 6 . Ce fut 121, pour ainsi dire , 8 0 11 premier , 6 1: 1’
11 n de ses plus
beaux triomphes oratoires . L6 nobl e lord répondi t a11 ssi, pa1'
11 11 di s cours qui est res télégendaire, é l
’
adresse qui lu i fut présentée daus 11 11 banque t publ ic 51 Belfast , 16. 1 9 juin
1 872 , 91 la. V6 1116 de son départ pour son gouvernemen t d11 Can ada . Apré s avoir admira
blemen t défin i les attributs d ’un gouvernemen t con st itut ion n e] , 11 rappela avec cette
magie de dicti on qui 16 distingue, 6 11 parl ant (16 nos voisins , la. sage in spirat ion ,
1’esprit
d’
ordre , 16 culte de l a patrie , qui dict éren t 16 chef-d’
ceuv re (16 Washington 6 t (16 Frankl in
13. constitution de 121 république de 1 775 . P11 15 , 2111 moment (16 faire ses adieux £1 ses bons
amis (16 la Verte-E rin ,11 résuma. 6 11 quelques mots “ les progrés de notre j en 11 e et Viri le
nationalit é c anadienn e,
”6 1: termin a par 11 11 6 pérorai son plein e (16 noblesse , dan s 1aq 11 6 116
11 prédit pour 16 Canada les plus mervei lleuses destinées .
“ C'
est 11 11 6 j eune et chaste
déesse . s’
é cria-t -il, errant a travers 11 11 monde n ouveau ,encore 111 0 0 11 SC1en t e de ses charmes ,
perdue dans des bois radieux tout 5 1110 11 11 68 (16 l impides 1 117 161 6 8 . D 6 temps é autre, 6 116
se retourne pour sai sir a11 miroir (16 16 11 1 5 ondes crystal l ines quelques traits furti fs de sa
rayonnante majesté , san s 5 6 douter des splendeurs qui l’
at t enden t £1 l’olympe des nat ion s .
”
Son di scours prononcé £1 W inn ipeg, par son amp16 11 1
'
,ses aperqus frappants, sa pre s
cience de l ’avenir, est 11 11 chef—d’
o6 11 v re — u11 6 vraie révélation .
111 11 t116 d’
assayer, daus 0 6 cadre étroit , 11 11 6 analyse 1'66 116
'
des innombmbles 6 t éblouis
sants tabl eaux que présente cette galerie oratoire commencée par 16 comte de Dufferin , 6 11
1 872 , que son départ de Québec , Vin t 111 t 6 1'1'ompre em 1 878 . A Hal ifax,51 P116 d11
Prince-Edouard , 51 Ottawa, 51 Sain t -J6 6 11 , Nouveau -Brunsw ick , 51 Chicago , 51 W indsor, au
Détroit , é Guelph , $1 Brantford , é Oshewaken , 5 Woodst ock , 91 Toron to , 6 11 Canada Club
de Londres, aux juges de la (30 11 1‘
supréme d’
Ot tawa, 51 V ict oria, Colombie Ang1aise , aux
Mennonites , aux Islandais , £1 Grimli , £1 Win n ipeg , é New-York , 6 Boston , 6 Granby , él’un iv ersité Laval , 5 la sociét é Saint-Jean -Baptiste
,é Québec
,sans o11bl ier 11 11 6 réponse
élab orée , de se. part, 6 11 l atin , 11 11 6 autre 6 11 grec , aux adresses q 11 6 1u1 présenta. 1’
u 11 1v ersité
M6G111, £1 Mon tréal , — 6’
6 s t 11 11 6 série de chefs -d’
oeuvre .
Ou 11 6 sai t ce qu’i l faut admirer davantage,dans cette in terminabl e nomenclature
d eloquen t es harangues ? Sous combien de formes toutes plus attrayantes les 11 11 6 5 q11 6
See. I , 1889 . 8 .
5 8 J .
~M. LEMOINE
les autres 5 6 présente 0 6 mervei lleux Protée de la tribune , 0 6 1: habile prest idigitateur dela phrase Tan tfit votre é cout 6 , rav 16 , l
’
ingén ieux apé tre d11 progrés n at ion a1, 16
voyant,16 proph é te, arrachant
“21 l ’avenir 5 6 5 insondables myst éres , t an t é t l’homme d’
E tat
consommé,pl anant bien au -dessus de 121 sphére agi tée des parti s , 6q 11111b 1
'
a11 t , $111 5 6 111
d’une 0 0 10 5 5 2116 0 1 15 6 politique , 16 5 attributs , 16 5 l imites de 1211 con stitu t i on . Aujourd’hui
vous suivez pas £1 pas l’
h ab ile public iste , 60 111 11 2111 1, dans 11me d6p60 11 6 0 1110 16 116 , 18. métro
pole 5 11 1' 16 qui 111 1 incombe pour consol ider 16 10115 0 6 6 11 (16 5 diverses national i tés dont
5 6 compose notre p6 11p16 , 111 1 signalant 16 5 60 11 6 115 don t la. pl age 0 0 10 11 12116 es t 5 6 11166 .
Demain , vous entendrez tout 6111 11 5 , la voix Vibr'
ante d11 professeur d’
h istoire ou de 11 6 116 5
lettres, 0 11 dl1 docteur emdroit 0 0 11 5 t1t11 t10 n11 6 1, vous retragzan t avec enth
'
ousiasme 16 5 fastes
aimés de notre passé , 0 11 bien commentant 16 5 traités qui sauvegardent nos l ibertés ,arborant vaillammen t l’é tendard de la t 0 16ra110 6 , de la confratern ité , parmi 16 5 0 u1t 6 5 divers
qui divisent nos rangs , et conviant 16 5 n at ion a1it65 aux différente s croyances 5 6 réfugier
6 11 toute Sécurité so11 s l’égide dl1 Vieux drapeau bri tannique , 16 5 exhortant £1 fuir 16 5 dis
cordes et £1 111 5 1 0 116 1 dans 16 droi t chemin , comme 16 dit 5 21 nobl e devise Per v z’
as r ectasC est surtout quand , nous 0 11 V1'ant intimement 5 0 11 coeur
,11 fai t appel $1 11 0 5 sen t i
ments comme hommes, notre patriotisme comme citoyens d ’une nai ssan te national ité , 6 t
nos implore 5 Vivre paix sous nos institut ions 11b 1'6 5 , sans oubl ier 11 1 Dieu ,mi n o s
semblables , que 5 a voix prend 16 5 accents de 1’
111 5p11'
at 10 n . Aujourd ’hui 11 dérobera. é
Parkman une de 5 6 5 pages 6mouvantes , 5 11 1' l’
h éro isme des premiers missionnaire s de la
Nouvel le-France , et 5 6 complaira 51 rendre 11 11 hommage écl atant aux mar tyrs Breb ceuf 6 t
Lalleman t . Demain,11 redira. aux Canadiens-frangais qu
’
ils sont de bonne 11gn66 , qu’
€1
l’6 xemp16 de leurs péres, 115 doivent savoir de q 11 6 116 man iére accueil l ir 1’6 n v ah15 5 6 u r de
leurs foyers,16 cas échéant .
L6 s oir,présidan t £1 0 6t6 de sa. spi1'1t11 6 116 6 t aimable 6p0 11 5 6 , 11 11 banquet d
’
amis 0 11 de
savants,lord Dufferin l ancera nu f6 11 roul ant de b 0 11 5 mots et de fin es allusions
,qu ’il
clow , 51 5 21 man iére, par un ingénieux trait d ’espri t,11 11 compl iment aux dames
,avan t
d’
ab order l a di scussion (16 quelque grave mesure d’
u tilité pub 11q 11 6 , 0 11 d’
un probléme
social , auquel 5 6 5 agréables propos on t servi d’
in t roduct ion . N’
oublion s pas surtout 16
généreux patron de 1’6ducat ion ,qui , pour encourager notre j eunesse de nos un iversités ,
nos lycées,e t de nos convents , a taxé 5 1 10 11 1'd6m6 11 t 5 0 11 patrimoine , d6j z
‘
1 en tamé , pour
faire frapper cinq cents médaille s d’or 6 t d ’argent .
L’
6rudit comte de Dufferin , 1’
1n star de 5 0 11 (16 17 5111 0 16 1 , 16 Savant comte de la ( 1 21115
sonn iére, 6tait dévoré de la soif de la 5 0 16 11 0 6 et des lettres . Comme l’ami d11 professeur
suédoi'
s, Kalm , 6 11 1 749 , lord Dufferin 6t 0 11 11 a1t 5 0 11 entourage par 5 6 5 connaiss ances
variées 6 t 16 charme de 5 21 con versation . O11 n’est pas surpri s de 16 trouver prét £1 répondre ,
dans 16 méme idiome , aux fél icit ations que l’
un iv ersit é M0G111 111i adressa. u11 j our,la langue de Cicéron 6 t daus 0 6 116 (16 D émosthén es . Un e de nos
'
v illes surtout avait t outes
5 6 5 complai san ces : 1a. V16 1116 cité de Champlain . 11 y venait chaque 21 11 11 66 51 1a b 6 116
saison, s
’
y 1'
6 p0 5 6 1'
. 11 traversait £1 tou te s l es heures 5 6 5 quartiers 16 5 plus popul eux,5 6 11 1
on avec 11 11 aide-de-camp ; 16 peuple 5 6 pres5ait 5 11 1'
5 6 5 pas pour 5 21111 6 1 16 comte D ufresne,5 0 11 b 0 11 ami . Qu6b6 0 1111 dait 11 11 6 6t 6 1'11 6 116 reconnai ssan ce pour 16 5 amél iorations dont
11 grat ifia l’
an t ique capitale .
A idé de 1’6 Xp61‘ 16 11 0 6 de 1’111g611 16 11 1
' de la 11 116 , M . Charles Baillargé , 6 1: 60 10 11 6 par 11 11
savan t architecte, M . Wynn , qu’i l avait fai t ven ir expressément d’
Europe, 10 1'd Dufl
’
erin,
SECTION I,1889 . 6 1 MEMOI RES S . R. CANADA .
IV— Maximilien voyageur , écrivain , critique d’
art , pOéte, marin , observateur, philo
sophe, bibliOphi Ze et chréiieln, pa
’r FAUCHER DE SAINT-MAURICE , docteur és-lettres .
( Conférence lue devan t 16 Soci été Royale da Canada, 16 24 mai
MAXIMIL IEN VOYAGEUR ET ECRIVAIN .
L6 30 juil let 1 85 1 , Maximilien quittait 5 0 11 pal ais de Mi1‘
6m6 1 .
L6 5 0 16 11 é tait 6 5 0 11 lever, nous dit-11. J6 fi5 6 16 hate 11 11 tour (16 j ardin, j e
cueil li s 16 5 dernleres Violettes , j 6 promenai mes regards de tou s 0 6165 ; 6 11fin j 6 descendi s
de marbre de 1’6mb6 1 0 6 d61 6 , 6 t j 6 m’
éloignai avec 16 chaloupe, 16 ccBur oppressé
d’une mélancol i e profonde . L6 monde est ains i fai t . Posséde-t -ou 16 5 plus beaux, 16 5
plus admirables site s,0 6 11 11 -16 méme que vous envien t 16 5 riches de 16 terre , 0 11 fa i t .”
E t pourtant 11 5 0 11 0 11 6 16 6 11 de M11 6m 6 1 , 5 15 sur un des bords 16 5 plus en cham
tea rs de l’Adriat ique 11 l’aimait autant que l’Océan ,0 6 qui n ’est pas p6 11 dire pour 11 11
marin .
Plus tard, (16 115 11 11 jour d’
6 xp6 n 510 11 , n’est-ce pas 6 111 5 1 qu
’i l 6 11 p6 1 16 1t
L6 mer vibre , 6 t chante des l égendes mervei ll euses ; 6116 1 0 11 16 1 6 0 11 111 6 b 16 n 0h 6
des vapeurs, 6 t dépose 6 11 pied dllchateau 16 5 frais baisers des nymphes . E t quand 6 116
1 6 0 11 16 bruyante , un frisson agite (16 5 5 6 116 5 : c ’est 16 réponse qui s’
échappe de 16 1161 6deme11 re de Miramar
, p6 1 f11m de fieurs bercées p6 1 16 ven t d11 5 0 11 emporté V6 1 5 16 mer
ble 11 e . Les rayon s dll 5 0 16 11 couchant embrasent 16 barque 16 crépuscule enveloppe
encore l’Occiden t , 6 t déj 6 16 111 11 6 60 16 11 6 16 Levan t ; 6 116 (312111 0 6 116 trembl ante sur l’onde .
L6 silence 5 6 fai t 5 11 1 16 vaste 1 11 6 1 ; 0 11 n’
en tend que 16 bruissemen t de la barqu
qui, 5 11 1 16 5 fiot s phosphorescen ts glisse V6 1 5 16 5 bords 116 11 1 15 . E 116 V0 16 V6 1 5 6 11 11
,guidée
par 16 l ampe qu’on voi t bril ler 6 11 b 6 10 0 n comme 11 11 phare l ointain .
L’
esquif 5’
6 rré t 6 prés dll 0 h6t 6 6 11 . Un e 1 0 5 6 tombe dll b 6 10 0 n . Alors 16 vague
bruit 6 t chante de nouveau ; d’
el16 s’
élév e un chant d ’amour ; 6 t , chancelante , 6 116 atteint
16 1 0 5 6 , 16 1 0 5 6 , div in gage (16 0 6 116 qui porte 1110 11
M6 15 , trév e de souvenirs . Hélas I 0 11 1, 16 30 juillet 1 85 1 , Maximil ien fuyait Miramar .Maximil ien fuyait 5 11 1 5 6 b 6 116 frégate 16 Novam 16 Novam 5 11 1 laquel le 11 allai t 16 11 6
11 11 6 parti e da tour du monde , 16 Novam qui devai t 16 conduire 6 u Mex ique commeempereur , 6 1 qui d6V6 1t 1
’
6 n ramener mort 6 t défiguré par 16 5 b 6 116 5 mexicaines . E st -ce
que les n av ires seraient comme des l ivres ? Auraient- i l s 16 11 1 5 destinée s ? Habeni sua
fata libellz‘
.
Ses p1 6m16 1 6 5 impressions de voyage sont 5 11 1 Naples 6 t 5 11 1 16 Vé suv eA 1116 5 11 1 6 que 5 6 fait d11 volcan , 16 b 6 116 V16 terrestre 11 6 5 6 1110 11 11 6 plus
que par de 1 6 1 6 5 échappées ; on 5 6 voit entouré de l ’image 111 0 0 10 1 6 (16 1’
un iV6 1 5 6 1 n éan t .D 6 sombres 11111 1 5
,d
’
énormes blocs grisfitres de noires 111 6 5 5 6 5 , des montagnes de cendres
6 2 FAUCHER DE SAINT-MAURICE
mouvantes et de 16V6 5 0 6 10 111 66 5 5 6 dressent de toutes parts, et enveloppen t 16 groupe (16 5
p6 11V1 6 5 Voyageurs qui s’
av en turen t 6 11 mil ieu de 0 6 1 0 y6um6 de 16 mort, 1mm6 n 5 6 , 1ugub 1 6 ,
6 11 mil ieu de cette dévastation de 16 nature,(16 11 5 cette V6 1166 (16 16 111616 11 0 0 116 . L6 5
deux pointes de M onte Somma da’ V65 11V6 616 16 11 1: 6 11 t 1 6 f0 15 1 611 11 16 5 ; 1116 15 16 5 entrail le s
d11 globe 5 6 rév olt éren t'
16 montagne s’
en t rouv rit , et par 16 goufi'
re b éant 5 6 répandirent
de s fiot s de lave qui 5 6 refroidissaient 6 16 Iongue et forméren t 16 11 16 1 1n 6 n 1m66 , pétrifiée,
incolore , 6 nt0 u1 66 d ’un 5 6 b 16 de 0 6 11d1 6 5 mouvante s qui sépare les deux sommets . L6
regard 5 6 proméne 6V6 0 angoisse 5 11 1 0 6 5 masses monotones qu’
on t enfantées 16 mon tagne,
6 t devant lesquel les toute Vie s ’est enfuie . P6 1 intervalles 5 6 u16 111 6 nt , 0 11 6p6 1 00 1t 6 u 10 111 ,
0 0 111 1116 de 1 6 1 6 5 0 16 1 165 (16 11 5 11 11 6 nuit t 6n 6b 1 6 11 5 6 , quelques fragmen t s de paysage , 16 vill ede 16 10 16 , 16 5 flot s 6 1
'
g6 11 t 65 de 16 1116 1 , 16 rian te 6 t ferti le plaine . A in si enveloppé par 16
mort , 16 voyageur songe involontairement 6 0 6 5 6 111 6 5 meurtries auxquelle s 11 11 6 1 6 5 16
plus que de b6 6 ux souvenirs . N6 gu61 6 6 116 5 6t6 16 nt , comme les autres , verdoyantes ;mais éloignées de 16 foi , privées (16 5 5 6 0 0 11 1 5 d
’une religion con solatrice, 6 116 5 5 6 5 0 111 ab imées
(16 11 5 11 11 6 111616 11 0 0 116 profonde . Leur observation peut avoir quelque 6 t t1 6 1t pour 16
psychologue,1116 15 6 116 nous 1 6 111p11t 16 0 0 311 1 d ’une tristesse 1nfin16 .
Nous VO116 arrivés 016 11 5 1’
6 n f0 n 0 6men t qui sépare 1’
6 xt 1 6mit 6 (16 5 deux points du
Vésuv e. Quel coup quelle sensation inexprimable Les escarpemen ts 6t 6 16n t
rev é tus de soufre blanc ; 16 5 0 1 (16 16 16 é tait tout 11 0 11 , 16 cendre g1 15 6 t 1 6 , (16 5 morceaux
(16 solle j aune et rouge gisaient 6 terre 06 et 16 . D 6 5 vapeurs b 0 11 1116 n t 6 5 5’
60 h 6pp6 16 11 t
de dessous 16 5 grands b10 0 5 de 16 16 16 panorama de Naples et de 16 111 6 1 nous était 0 6 0 h 6
par 16 0 611 6 de 16 montagne . L6 Vapeur et 16 brou il l ard 17 0 116 16 11 1: 16 firmamen t était
t an té t froid et 6pre , tan t ét d’une 10 u1 d6 ur étouffante 6 1 surchargée de 5 0 11f1 6 . Tout 1 6 5
p11 6 1t 16 mort 6 t 16 destruct ion . On devinait 5 0 11 5 5 6 5 pieds 1’6 0 t 10 n de forces puissantes
et 111 0 0 11 11 11 6 5 ; on voyait (16 5 0 0 11 16 11 1 5 comme 0 11 V o it j amais on 5 6 sen t ait enveloppé
d ’une 6 tm0 5ph61 6 toute nouvel le on n 6 croyait plus Vivre 5 11 1 no tre bel le terre , mais 6 11se in d11 chaos , 6 11 milieu (16 5 6161116 n t 5 primordi aux 6 1
1
6 0 lesquel s Dieu 0 1 66 16 monde ,parmi 16 5 vapeurs empoisonnées qui p16 11 6 16 n t 5 11 1 l ’abime , . avant que et
6 11 5 5 6 11 1: ét é séparés, 6 v an t (111 6 16 5 0 16 11 efit 5 60 116 et 6 11 11116 toutes choses . C’
é tait nu de
0 6 5 aspects qui 11 6 peuven t 5 6 décrire , 6 t qu’i l faut avoir contemplés pour 5 6 16 11 6 une idée
d11 t 1 6V6 11 d6 16 nature , 6 t comprendre combien l’homme est pet it , et peti te est 5 6 sc ience
Nous n ’
é t ions pas encore 6 11 bord (111 0 1 6 t61 6 , que j’
6t 6 15 impressionné par 16 V11 6 de 0 6 qui
m’
en t ourait , comme 36 11 6 1’
6V6 15 été par 6 11 0 11 n 6 6 11 11 6 chose (16 115 16 cours de 111 6 V16 .
L6 0 1 6 t 61 6 6 1 66 116 111 6 11 t quelque chose d’une gueule,(16 16 gueule (16 5 dragons
l égendaires 0 6 sont bien 16 16 5 0 0 11 16 11 1 5 dont 1’
1m6 g1n 6 t 10 n 5 6 plait 6 1 6V6t 11 0 6 5 monstres
fabuleux . L’1n t 61 16 ur d1l 0 1 6 161 6 exhale 0 6 5 11161116 5 vapeurs empo i sonnées 6 t humides qui
enveloppaient jadi s (16 terreur et de mort 16 5 Cheval iers 0 h 6 5 5 6 11 1 5 d1l dragon .
“ A 16 hauteur j’
é t ais, 5 11 1 16 b 0 1 d de l ’abime , j e me sen tai s comme perdu j 6
croyai s sur les 0 0 11 1111 5 d ’une 6 ut 1 6 plan é te, 5 11 1 16 5 6 11 11 mystérieux d ’un monde
6t 1 6 n g6 et nouveau .16 me sentais abandonné 6 u 111 1116 11 de cette solitude, au sein de 0 6chaos 5 116 11 0 16 11 11 ; j 6 16 15 comme environné d11 frisson (16 5 mondes légendaires ; 5 6 11 5 mes
amis qui 6t 6 16 11 t 16 , 11 11 6 indic ible 6p0 11V6 n t 6 m’
efit chassé de 0 6 5 116 11 11 , et j’
6 11 1 6 15 fui
devant 16 5 forces muettes 6 1: assoupies de 16 nature . J 6 11 6 me sentai s pas assez fort pour
résister 6 de pareil les impressions j’
6t 6 is comme subjugué par 16 charme mystérieux et
souverain de 0 6 5 pu15 5 6 n0 6 5 souterraines . D 6j 6 (16 5 spectacles moins 6t1 6 ng6 5 font fris
6 4 FAUCHER DE SAINT-MAURICE
coins de rue pour ain si dire,on voi t des caisses de boi s aux couleurs Vives sur lesquel le s
s’
élév e un berceau é colonnes,orné d ’oranges et de feuillage eh entouran t l ’image de l a
Madone . Derriére ces colonnes se trouvent de peti t s bari ls allongés, posés horizontalemen t on vert icalement , selon 1a circonstance , et versant de l
’
eau fraiche .
La so i r arriva calme et pur ; le sol ei ] s’
ab aissait 21 l’
horizon . Nous avions devant
nous l a vi lle et sa monda-ine mun ificen ce , ses palais , s es musées , ses v i llas couronnées de
verdure,de fieurs , sa physionomie sensuel le et j oyeuse les flo ts dorés da gol fe baignaient
les rives enchantée s de Castellamare,e t au milieu des boi s d’
orangers apparaiss ait 1a
poétique Sorren t e , l a Vil le aux belles femmes . Une vapeur Violette enveloppait le Vésuv e ;l a riche et fertile campana se déroulai t 5 nos pieds , et tout autour dc nous , au milieu da
parfum des fleurs, du b ruissemenf des cypré s e t des lauriers,des voluptueuses caresses de
la brise da soi r, parmi ces monuments de marbre , l a mort é tendait son empire .
“ A quoi tend votre agi tation ,j oyeux Napol itains 0 11 allez-vous ainsi en dansant
Vous all ez au tombeau et l es mar tyrs ont beau répandre leur parfum,l a rose épanouir
ses brillantes couleurs,le n érium et le l aurier frémir harmonieusement
,le marbre res
plendir et é taler des inscript ions orgueil leuses la tombe,l a froide t omb e est le
sinistre t ermé da pélerin age terrestre .”
Naples pour Max imil ien est l a Vi lle da plais ir et du printemps de l a vie ; Florence
cell e des émes fatiguées et ré v euses . . G‘raé te es t 18 port dans lequel la barque de Pierre
j eta l’ancre pour se mettre £1 l ’abri des tempé tes da monde .
Déj é , écri t-ildans son l ivre de bord , l e s portes toutes béantes de l’enfer se flat taien t
d’
av oir vaincu Ia tiare trois fois sainte ; déj é el les croyaient le chef de l a, chré t ien té tombépour n e plus se rel ever . Tout £1 coup, parmi de sombres nuages, d
’
efi'
rayan t s écl ai rs , le
tonnerre retentit . Ilébranl a les c ieux , et les réel s supports da prince de ce monde enten
dirent en t remblant une voix qui criait-Tu es P ierre
,et sur cette pi erre j e bfit irai mon -Egl ise
, et le s portes de l’en fer n e
prévaudront pas cont re el le
La pasteur des émes trouva dans sa fuite un refuge assuré sur les rochers de Graete,et les portes de l ’enfer durent engloutir de nouveau l a tourbe écumante , et retomber sur
elles-mémes devant la force da Tout-Puissant . Une plaque de marbre placée au haut dela citadel le indique l’endroit 0 11 l’illustre fugit if donna un j ourle seul bien que lui eussent
laissé l es orages da monde , et que taut de créatures humaines voulaient en core recevoi r
malgré l a fureur de ses ennemis , la bénédiction apos tol ique . Pie IX apparut sur ce
rocher, et prononQa é haut e voix sa tou te puiss ante bénédiction . Des témoins occulaires
m’ont affirmé que ce fut um spectacle singuliéremen t imposant de voir le prince de I ’
Eglise
se dressant au -dessus des remparts , daus son simple habit blanc , et pron ongan t d’une voix
calme et ferme les paroles sacrées sur l a foule des fidéles qui, ab imés dans un muet recueil
lemen t . courbaient la t é te devant lui . Le l ieu semblait mervei lleusement choisi pour unacte au s si subl ime et auss i solennel . ”
De Graé te l es hasards du voyage conduisent Maximil ien 51 l a grotte de Capri . E l le lui
arrache ce cri d’
en thousiasme
“ Le bateau nous déposa prés d’un mur de rochers ; de pe t ite s barques miniaturesnous emport éren t plus rapides glue le vent ; c
’
é t ait £1 croi re que, comme au temps de la
fable , une baguette magique all ai t nous en t r’ouvrir ces retrai tes mystérieuses , et nousdonner acc és dan s um temple de fée .
MAXIMILIEN 6 5
Ce 11 etait point u11 rév e ; une ouverture étroite pergait l’
escarpemen t encore
quelques coups de rames et nou s vogu ions légéremen t , comme poussé s par le souffle des
el fes , sous la v ofite de pierre derrié re 11 0 11 5 se fermait le monde habité avec ses agitations
terrestres et l a lumié re de son so lei ], e t , soulevés par les; ailes dll z éph ir, nous glissions sur
les lames d ’azur entre des profondeurs sc int ill antes , sous les vapeurs irisées d’un déme
féerique . Des reflets argentés pareil s é ceux des rayons fantast iques de la lune se jouaien t
dans l a pénombre bleufit re, tein taien t le cristal des s talzw t ites , et caressaient 1a transparencedl1 marbre . Nous nous trouvions daus 111 retraite de l a nymphe de Capri . De peti tescré tes d ’
argent couronnaient les vagues lég‘éres, 1
’eau murmurai t doucemen t , une fraicheurdél ici euse étai t partout répan due . Mais l a nympho était absente , et pour notre bonheur !
Le monde est ain si fai t aussi longtemps que les déesses o 11 t hanté cet asi le , aucun mortel
n ’a p11 les découvrir, et quand les hommes y pé n é t ré ren t , elles avaient disparu ; et 121
111 6 11 1 mystérieuse de la grotte est seule restée comme 11 11 charmant reflet , comme 11 11 poé
tique souveni r des naiades qui se b erpaien t mo llement Slll‘ les flo ts argentés . ”
Gibraltar fascine Maximilien
C’est 11 11 rocher monstrueux qui s’
élév e comme 11 11 Titan gigantesque au-dessus de
l’
Océan et de la Méditerrann ée . De quelque point qu ’on le contemple ilprésente aux
regards 11 11 aspect toujours nouveau . G ibral tar a la puissance et l’
att ract ion $1 121 foi s
sédui sante et horrible,que me manque jamais d’
exercer l a grandeur écrasante . E 11 ell e
résiden t la beauté et_1
’
at t rait de Gibral tar, ce rocher chauve , dé 11 11dé , calciné par les
rayons da soleil,image toujours changeante , mai s u 11 e image de l’é ternelrepos et de la
force majestueuse .
”
Mahon,l a capitale de 1 116 Min orque est pour 111 1 l
’image de l a mélancolie sans fin“Le pays tout enti er me parut désolant , sans 11 11 e ombre de poésie . Les moulins £1
vent jouent ici un grand de toutes parts on v o i t leurs ai l es tourner,de toutes part s
on les entend gémir . Semblables é des arbres desséchés 0 11 51 des fan témes gigan tcsques ,
il s se dressent au mil ieu d ’une con t rée 11 11 0,et augmentent l’en nui qu ’on y éprouve .
Autant 11 11 moul in £1 eau ,avec son écume et son brui t cadencé parai t beau , animé et poé
tique,autant 11 11 moul in £1 1fe11 t , avec sa masse grisé tre et ses grands bras, semble laid ,
en dormant , insipide . Le premier annonce l’
an imat ion et la fraicheur de 1’eau ; 16 second a
Pair d’un tél égraphe destiné é nous écarter d’
11 11 pays aride et désert et c ’est bien 151 , en
effet le carac t ére de cette contrée .
”
Li sbonne ne 111 i plait pas
C’est 11 11 immense amas de moisons sur le bord d ’un fleuv e , san s rien de caract é
rist ique 11 1 de pittoresque . Pour é tre caractéristique illui manque des édifices sail l ants
et originaux ; pour é t re pittoresque 11 111 i manque 1a campagne . La Ville s’
élév e sur une.
coll ine , et se {ermin e brusquement £1 l’hori z on
,san s avo i r cet arriére plan 5 1 nécess aire £1
l’harmon ie de l a perspec t iv ez Tout cela est si étendu , si large , et 8 6 détache tel lemen tsur le bleu d1l ciel que l
’on cherche involontairement une chaine de montagnes 0 11 la v ue
puisse repos’
er . 0 11 se représente Lisbonne comme un e Vi ll e riche eu monuments historiques, située dan s l a contrée la plus ri an te , sous le cl imat le plus doux . Ou 1
’embel l it
de tout l’éclat des tein tes méridionales,de toute 1a magn ificen ce d
’une Végétation tropical e ; on s
’
imagin e que Ie Tage coule sou s 11 11 cie l d’azur , m1 pied d
’
an t iques palais dc
marbres , portant sur ses ondes argen iées des cen t aines de gondoles dorées e t de gall ionschargé s de métaux précieux . Sur ces bords , on se figure um peuple gai, chantant des
Sec. I, 1889 . 9 .
6 6 FAUCHER DE SAINT-MAURICE
stances mélodieuses aux accords de la guitare . Pure fantaisie que tout cela ! La vill e
est grande,mais di sséminée san s aucun plan . 11 n ’est pas rare de rencontrer des champs
parmi les maisons,6 t le s 1116 15 0 11 3 sont d’une architecture vulgaire et monotone .
”
Madére 16 console de Li sbonne
L6 4 jui llet , au lever da jour, quand j e mon tai S11 1 16 pout , 11 semblait qu’
une ceuv re
magique se ffit accomplie pendant 16 11 11 113. Sous les rayons dorés d11 8 0 16 11 des tropiques ,au se in d ’u11 e 1116 1 étincelante et azurée
,baignée d ’un air l impide
, 11 11 6 116 majestueuse se
dressait devant 111 0 1,11 11 6 116 de basalte , aux te intes Violettes , rev é tue de la verdure la plus
fraiche da printemps . C’
é tait une image saisissante 6 t bien faite pour transporter
do 121 remplir d’
allégresse. Une sérénité céleste régnait dans 6 6 tableau ,6 t cependant 11
était saturé d’une légére vapeur. La 111 111161 6 étai t d ’une Clal‘t é su rnaturelle , comme 11 11 6
éme qui se man ifeste dans des y6 11x in spirés . Um air délicieux pénétrai t £1 flot dans l a
poitrine al légée on pressentai t 11 11 monde nouveau,11 11 paradis terres tre .
“ J ’ai beaucoup parcouru 16 monde , 6 t j 6 puis dire que j e n’ai rien V11 d’
aussi beau .
J ’ai 6 11 6 1111 16 rose des Alpes S11 1 les gl aciers étincelants j ’ai traversé, 8 11 1
‘ 16 fier 6 0 11 1 5 16 1
arabe , les bois de cyprés de Smyrn e ; j’ai 1 6 17 1 16 1161 111 111 aux rives enchantées da golfe de
Lépan te j e me suis bercé sur les flot s 6 2 11 1 68 (16 l a grotte de Capri j ’ai dérobé des fleurs
aux j ardins féeriques de l’Alhamb ra ; mais 16 1 j e trouvais réunis tous ces trésors de l a
nature,6 t j e 116 sai s quoi encore d’
inexplicable qui fai t pour moi de Madére u11 paradis
terrestre . Est -ce l’air transparent comme 16 cristal
,respirer est 1lue volupté ? Est -ce
la variété 111 1111 16 6 t enchanteresse des fleurs 0 11 16 11 1' parfum pénétrant E t C6 printemps
éternel qui fait que juillet 111 6111 6 6 plus de 6 11 6 1 1116 16 1 q 11 6 notre mois de mai ? E st -ce
6 nfi11 6 6 cl imat toujours égal , touj ours frai s et Viv ifian t , aussi beau dans l a nuit que dans
l a journée, toujours cares sant , toujours doux Je ne pu i s 16 dire , mais j 6 sais d1l moins
que j ’ai vécu 16 1 doublement , toujours heureux , touj ours ravi , et que 6 6 serai t pour moi
11 11 6 fél icité sans égale de posséder 11 116 maison de campagne 6 11 6 6 pays .
La Végétation de l’un ivers 6 11 1516 1 est 16 prése11 t ée £1 Madére de la fagon l a plus gran ~
diose . Les plantes da Nord , ch énes vigoureux, fougéres touff’
ues , ch év rofeuilles odorifé
rants ; celles de l’
I talie, chataigniers 6 t oranges ; les superbes camél i as de l a Chin e ; 16
caféier d’
Arab ie,que j e n
’avai s pas encore V11 ai l leurs aussi fécond , aussi répandu 16 pré
cieux ananas d’
Amérique , que j e voyais aussi pour la premiére fois 6 11 plein air ; 16 bana
11 16 1' toujours chargé de fruits cent autres plantes rares qui 11 6 se voient chez nous que
dans les serres des pal ai s , el les sont’
étiolées , et cepen dant on les admire , sont 16 1
comme chez 6 119 8 , daus leu r éclat , daus leur £16 11 1 ; puis ajoutez l es vignes les plus pré
cieuses da monde .
La ville de Bahia 1 emerv eille. Quant nouveau monde, 0 11 l a mort l
’
at tendait sept
ans plus tard , illui 6 6 11 5 6 11 11 6 6 11 1 16 11 3 6 sensation
Dés les premiers j ours passés S11 1 16 sol d’Amérique , j
’ai senti 16 fardeau qu i
m eorasait .
Et comme s ’i l avait 6 11 11 11 presssen t imen t , 11 parle 16 1 pour l a prem1ere fois duMexique .
“ Mon digne hate nous montra un V16 11 ouvrage des plus intéressants sur 16
Mexique . 0 11 y voyait dessi né,avec (16 5 6 1 111 6 5 et des costumes , 11 11 zodiaque des anciens
Mexi cain s . Encore 11 11 pays que j e vis iterai , si Dieu me pré te vie .
”
Les pages qu’i l 6 0 11 8 6 6 16 51 Alger? £1 Blidah ?
aux gorges (16 la Ohifiah ,aux paysages de
6 8 FAUCHER DE SAINT-MAURICE
D6 11 5 11 11 6 6 11 11 6 5 6 116 0 11 11 0 115 6 11 t 1'6m6 5,de 11 0 111b 1 6 11 x
“
6 1 115 t6 5 616 16 11 1; 6 11 11 6 111
11 e tudier 16 Vz'
m'
ge u‘
111, Chaise. 0 0 111 1116 6 6 5 11 6 11 17 1 6 5 111 6 110 11 6 5 doiven t 5’
6 n 1111 y6 1'
( it 6 111 6 116m6 11 1 6 0 p16 6 5 p6 1 16 fo11 le in in t elligen tu 116 5 b 6 1 b 0 11 1116 11 1 5 ! H6 11 1'6 11 5 6m6 11 t que
6 6 5 0 11 1 de 5 6 111 tes femmes que 16 V6 11 1t6 11 6 10 11 1 111 6 11 16 g1161 6 . P0 11 1 qu 0 1 110 11 6 fal lai t-11
q 11’
6 11 contemplant 6 6 t 6 b 16 6 11 116 Rapha'
él,16 111 6 110 11 6 de saint Sixte me 1 6 Vint toujours 6
16 mémoire ? 0 6 16 t 6 11 6 11 5 6 11 5 doute 6 16 1 6 5 5 6 111 b 16 11 6 6 116 5 visages ; toutes deux out 16
m61116 6 0 1p5 , m6 15 6 116 5 11’
0 11 t poin t 16 méme esprit , 16 111 6 1116 expression , 16 m6 111 6 fago11
66 16 11 66 5 p6 1 16 111 11 1161 6 . P0 11 1 6’
6 5 t 16 111m161 6 céleste ; pour l’au tre , 16 111 111 161 6
(16 16 16 1 1 6 . 1 6 8 111 157211 est 11 11 6 1115 10 11 q 11 1 p16 11 6 , 11 11 6 1m6 g6 t 1 6 11 5 11g 11 1 66 6 p1 65 1’
6p1 6 11V6
d11 6 0mb 6 t 6 1: d6 16 douleur 16 madone 6 16 0 11 6 15 6 est 11 11 6 femme 116 16 terre p0 11 1 qui
1’
b e11 re de la 5 0 11 11 1 6 11 6 6 pas encore 5 0 1111 66 ; 6 116 est 6 5 5 15 6 t 1 6 11 q 11 1116m6 11 t 6 t , si j’ose
m’
exprimer 6 111 51, 6 l’
az'
se 5 11 1 6 6 que 16 g10 11'
6 6 V6 11 11 pas encore transformé 6 11
t 1'611 6 . Les pli s d
’un lu1b 6 11 1111 tombent 5 11 1 1’
6p6 11 16 5 6 5 v é temen t s so11 t choisi s . E 116
5 6 pe11 che doucement 5 11 1 5 0 11 6 11 f6 11 ’c 6 116 16 5 6 1 1 6 d6 1ls 5 6 5 bras 6 116 1 6 g6 1d6 16 spectateur
6 17 6 6 de grands y eux 1 61166 1115 , comme R6ph 6 61 5 6 111 p0 11V6 1t 16 5 peindre , et qui , te ls que 16
111 11 6 dans 11 11 6 11 1111: calme 6 1: 5 6 1 6 111 6 , 1 6p6 11 116 11 t 116 11 5 16 6 0 311 1 m 6 16 d6 116 5 r6 yons d ’une
110 11 6 6 11 1 in eff6 b16 et d’un profond apaisement .
Rapha'
el6 peint 16 111 6 11 0 11 6 de 5 6 111 t Sixte 6V6 6 116 5 intentions Segg z'
ola
6V6 6 (16 5 inspirations d ’un p1'
0 f0 11 d 6 111 0 11 1 , 16 madone d11 Grand-Duc 6 1 6 6 11 11 sentimen t
de p11 1 6 t 6 6n f6 n t in 6 . Cette d6 1 11 161 6 est 11 11 6 6 6 1111 6 et 5 116 11 6 16 11 5 6 p1 161 6 , 16 11d15 que la
Sixtina est une extase , 6 t q 11 6 16 Segg z'
olu 6 xp1 111 1 6 116 5 116 11 17 1 6 5 d11 0 1 66 te11 1
6 111 6 5 5 66 6 lui-méme 116 11 5 16 p6 1 5 0 11 11 6 de 5 0 11 F115 . Dans 16 S z'
xlz’
na, j 6 vois sous 11 11 6 5 6 1116
et méme 10 1 111 6 16 m61 6 auguste dl1 0 h 1 15 t et 16 servante d11 Seigneur dans 16 madone 6
16 0 h 6 15 6 j e 11 6 VO15 1111 6 16 111 61 6 h6u1 6 11 5 6 6 t fl0 1 15 5 6 11 t 6 ; dal1 s 6 6 116 d11 Grand-Duc que
1’
11 11 111b 16 et p16 11 5 6 5 6 1 17 6 11 16 .
.1’
6 11 1 6 15 VO11 111 po11 voir m ’
arré ter (16 5 h 6 11 1 6 5 6 11116 1 6 5 116V6 11 t 16 Vision d’
E z échz‘
el. 0’
6 5 t
11 11 petit cadre doré d ’un pied 6 t de111 i de 11 6 11 1; sur 11 11 de 16 1g 6 , 6 t qu1 1 6 11 16 1 1116 16 6 161
116 11 5 5 6 magn ificence et 5 0 11 1m111 6 1'
1 5 1t 6 . 0 11 1, c’est bien Dieu 16 P61 6 que nous voyons 16 1,
16 Dieu 6 1 66 t 6 11 1 et SOLIVQl'aill maitre da 111 0 11 11 6 . L6 1 0 1 de 1’11 11 1V6 1 5 est 5 11 1 5 0 11 11 6116 de
11 11 6 31 6 5 , porté par 16 5 mystérieux symboles 116 5 6V6 11g6115 16 5 , 16 Dieu de I’
Ancien Testament . 0
’est bien 16 Jéhov a d6V6 n t 16 f6 6 6 de qui l ’on tremblant 116 11 5 16 pous
5 161 6 , 6 b 11116 116 11 5 1'
6 d0 1 6 110 11 6 t 6 11 méme temps 1 6 16 11 6 p6 1 16 pensée 6 0 n 5 0 16 11 t 6 q11 6 c11 6 6 u11
de nous 6 été 6 1 66 6 5 0 11 image , et que 1’
6m6 1mm0 1't 6 116 empri sonnée dans cette.
6 11V6 10 pp6
6ph611161 6 , 6111 6 11 6 116 0 6 111 1 qui 616 1t , qui est 6 t qui 5 6 1 6 . L6 6 h 6V6111 1 6 gri se ondoie majes
tueusemen t ; 16 b 6 1 b 6 imposante flot te 6 11 to11 r d11 visage tout 1 6 y0 11 n 6 11 t de grandeur
divine 6 t de [111 15 5 6 11 6 6 6 1 66 11 16 6 ; 16 5 bras 6t 6 nd11 5 pour b 611 11 5’
616V6 11 t 6 u -d6 5 5 11 5 11 6 5
11 11 ages qui 11 6 5 0 11 1 point 16 1 6 5 5 6 111b 165 pour former 11 11 point d’
appui 6 1 de repos , mai s 11 11
t 1 611 6 glori eux . 0 6 5 15 11 11 6 volupté 6 616 5 16 de méditer devant 6 6 tableau 6 t d’
ab imer 5 0 11
6 1116 116 11 5 ce t te con t empl at ion subl ime . O11 Cl‘oi t 6 11 11 6 110 11 1’
111 5 tan t 5up1 6m 6 1’
0 n
V6 1‘
1 6 u11 j our 16 Maitre face 6 face . L ’
art d ’un Raphaélé tai t 5 6 111 capable de produire 11 11
pareil effe t et 116 11 0 11 11 6 1 5 6 1 66 0 111p6 11 5 6 116 11 5 5 6 prop'
re 6 1 66 110 11 .
Je 1 6 t 1 0 11V6 1 16 1V6 11 Dyck d6 11 5 5 0 11 111 6 1116 16 plus admirable , 16 royal et 1n f0 1 t 11 116
couple d’
A11g16 t 6 1 1 6 . 0 6 11 6 so 11 t que deux bustes ; j 6 1 6 6 0 11 11 11 5 6V6 6 b0 11 h6 u1 1’
11116 g 6
V6p0 1 6 11 5 6 et p0 611q11 6 de 16 11 0 b16 1 6 111 6,11 11 p6 11 différente de 6 6 116 que p0 5 5 6d6 16 musée
de Dresde,mais remplie d ’un 6 11 6 1 1116 0 1 151 111 6 1 6 t d ’une S11 6V6 111 616 11 6 0 116 . 0 11 voit
0 h 6 1 16 5 et Henriette 6 11 v 6t 6 1116 11 t 5 de
MAXIMILIEN 6 9
E t M6 x1m1116 11 6j 0 11 16 (Tan 10 11 presque prophétique
L’
6V6 11 11 6 1'6p6 11d11 comme 11 11 5 11 1 16 5 11 6 115 5 61 16 11 11 (16 0 h 6 1 16 5 ; 11 111 1 11 116
victime de l’ordre 16 plus 616 116 , 6 1 11’
6 ut (111 6 16 10 1 1 de 5 6 soumettre 6 5 6 destinée trop
( 16 résignation 6 1 (16 douce 11 1' . 11 p66 11 6 p6 1 1'
6 1b16 5 5 6 ; 11 6 d1i 611 6 infin imen t plus g1 6 6 16 11 x
6 1 moin s roide que LO1115 XVI . I 1 6 616 donné 6 10 11 5 (16 11 11 , 5 111 0 11 (16 vivre , d11 1110 111 5 de
mourir 611 6 1giq11 6m6 111. P0 11 1 q 11 0 1 f6 11 1-11 que 16 11 1 5 femmes 6 16 11 1 616 5 1 séduisantes et 5 1
bell es ? P0 11 1 q 11 0 1 f6 ut-11 q 11 6 6 6 q 111 6 5 1 tendre 6 1 exquis soit 10 1110 11 1 5 11 0 15 5 6 et brisé ?
-16 , M6 xim1116 11 6 -1-11 V11 d6 11 5 1’
6 V6 n 11 ? Ne 115 0 11 5 -11 0 11 5 pas entre 6 6 5 11g11 6 5
p0 1g11 6 11 16 5 5 0 11 1lom 6 1 celui (16 16 111 6 111 6 11 1 6 11 5 6 1111p61 6 11 16 6 0 h 6 1 10 116
L6 chapelle de Michel-Ange , 6 San Lorenzo , 1111 (16p16 11 5 0 11V6 1 6 111 6 1116 11 1 . E116 111 1
produit 11 11 6 impression (16 5 p1us d65 6 g1 66 b16 5 , 11 n 6 116 1 glacial 6 1 1'6p0 11 5 5 6 11 1
16 1 reposent (16 11 5 16 5 0 111111 6 11 de 16 111 0 1 1, (111-11 6 5 0 11 entourage , (16 5 6 0 6 11 1 5 6 36 111 6 15
perdus, 6 1 16 11 1 17 6 111 6 phi losophie 6 11 5
’
616V6 11 1 6 6 116 -m6m6 6 6 tomb6 6 11 parvenue
q 11’
6 exprimer 16 malai s e de 16 consci ence . Si Michel -Ange 6 6 11 de 5 0 11 6p0 q 11 6 une 6 0 n
116 15 5 6 n 6 6 6 116 6 16 6 1 profonde , 6 6 monument lui 6 m6 1V6 1116 11 5 6 1116 n 1 réussi , 6 1: 16 5 5 16 111 6 5
indécentes qui 1’
6 11 10 11 1 6 n t,dépourvues de g1 6 6 6 6 1 (1
’
6me , 5 1 36 puis 16 (111 6 , 11 6 montren t
que t rop 6 16 11 6 1116 11 1 (1 0 11 5 0 11 1116 11 1’
6 5p1 11 q 11 1 6 hanté 6 6 5 lie11 x . L6 posi tion demi-6 5 5 15 6 ,demi-couchée (16 5 g1 6 nd5 Médicis exprime , 5 0 11 5 11 11 6 10 1 111 6 5 6 11 5 11116 6 1 111 6 161 16 116 , 1
’
6 116 1 5 10 n
d’une philosophie 0 1g11 6 1116 u 5 6 6 1 11 11 0 16 pour 16 repos de 16 111 0 1 1. 115 5 6 111b 16 11 1 5 6 débattre
6 1 11 6 v 0 1110 11 point d11 11n 6 6 11 1,'
q 11’
6 11 6 11 116 6 1 66 111 1 6 h 11 111 6 1n 6 6 11 6 0 1 6 5 0 11 16 1 6 mais qui
I'
eCOUVI'e (16 11 5“16 13 6 111 16 d6p0 11 1116 d11 croyant . 0 6 5 11 10 11 11 111 6 11 15 p 0 1 16 111 1
’
6 111p1 6 1n 16 d’une
lut te 111 6 16 d1v e de 16 g1 6 nd6 11 1 16 1 1 6 5 11 6 6 0 11 11 6 16 5 0 1- (1is6 11 t 11 66 n t 16 111 6 1 b 1 6 1 6 5 16 froid ,6 1 sous 6 6 116 enveloppe (16 p ierre 16 mort 5 6 111 b 16 1 16 6 n 6 1 6 1 5 6 111 0 q 11 6 1 de 16 V16 . L6 mot
p 6 i ): 11 6 5 6 11 1 6 11: 1 6 16 11111 5 11 1 6 6 5 11 15 16 5 parvi s q 11’
6 11 6 11 11 5 0 11 1116 . chrétien 11 6 1 66h 6 11 11‘
6 .
”
En l i sant 6 6 116 page 66 1 116 par Maximil ien , 0 11 songe 1n v 0 10 n 16 11 6 111 6 111: 6 6 6 5 lignes
d11 chapel ain Burchard . P6 1 16 11 1; d ’un Médicis , 11 d15 6 11— Ilmou1 11 1: sine luce, sine cruce, sine D eo .
TO11 1 6 10 11 1 16 groupe de Niob é 6 176 6 5 6 5 6 1116 11 15,16 Vase (16 111 6112613 , 16 Flore (1 11 Titien ,
16 M éduse d11 0 6 1 1 6 6 h 6 , de 16 Tr ibune, 16 Ve’
nus de Médicis , 16 1 6V6u 5 6 6 1
5 11pe1'b 6 Foo'nam
'
na, 16 Jean de Monfov’
t et 16 Charles-Quin t deVan Dyck , l’
Hercule de Rubens ,l’Adomlz
'
on ales M (Lges de D 11 1 6 1 , 1’
Adam 66 E ve de 0 ran 6 ch 111 1 6 1 1 6 6 11 6 11 1; (16 5 critiques 6 1:
(16 5 descriptions pleines de 10 g1q 11 6 et de Vie .
Raphaél, Rubens 6 1 V6 11 Dyck lui font 16 11 6 16 5 1 6116 1110 11 5 5 11 1V6 n 16 5
8 61 16 11 11 6 1 1 6V6 11 1 , 6 0 11 5 11 111 6 par 11 11 6 ardeur profonde, 5 6 11 5 énergie 17 11 116 , 111 6 15 5 6 n 5
faiblesse féminine, 5 0 1 16 d
’
6 tre intermédiaire 6 1 111616 11 6 0 11q 11 6 , n’
6 pp6 1 16 n 6 n1 6 16 16 1 1 6 que
par 11 116 enveloppe 11 616 6 1 nerveuse , 111 0 1116 chérubin , 111 0 1116 gén ie , avec un 1 6g6 1d profond
, pleir1 d’une douce langueur
,16 1 nou s 6 pp6 1 6 11 R6 ph 6 61 (16 115 11 11 portrai t 6 11 6 1m6 n t .
bien 16 16 j eune homme q 11 1 6 V11 plus h 6 11 1 que 10 11 5 16 5 6 11 11 6 5 , qui d6 ns de
16 plus 11 1 1116 11 1 6 exprimé p6 1 16 peint11 re 11 11 6 philosophie profondémen t 1 6 11
gieuse, et qui d6 11 5 m6m6 d11 sentiment n ’
6 rien perdu (16 16 5 111 6 61116 intell igente
6 1 de 16 force .
Van Dyck 6 5 1 grand 6 1 beau comme 5 6 5 6 d11111 6 b16 5 p6 1 5 0 11 11 6 g‘
6 5 16 pein tre (16 5
prin ces 6 1 (1 6 5 grands de 6 6 monde , un 6 1 115 16 6 115 10 6 1 6 11q 11 6 , 6 1 5 0 11 portrait nous 16 pré5 6 1116 bien ainsi
,plein de dignité
,de noblesse 6 1 de génie .
Ruben s nous 6 16 15 5 6 5 0 11 Visage , 11 11 Visage voluptueux 6 1 presque 6 111 0 11 16, avec
7 0 FAUCHER DE SAI NT-MAURICE
un regard entreprenant qui a savouré déj é bien des cho ses , une moustache finemen t
retroussée,un e expansion sain e et vigoureuse . Ilpeignait avec humour ilaimait l a
plénitude des formes et l a fraicheur des chairs enlacées de guirlandes bachiques , et ce
méme homme étai t capable de créer avec une foi énergique un Fraqois-Xavier subl ime ,
um imposant Loyola . Tout cela est exprimé et s e l i t sur les t rai ts du Visage . Raphael
succomba £1 l’ardeur qui le consumait lentement , Ruben s fiorissait an. sein des joui ssances
et des j oies de la Vie . I ] y puisai t sa force pour enfanter de grandes ceuv res.
”
La col l ection des chefs-d'
oeuvre de la Tribune de Florence l ai sse é Maximi lien l ’im
pression que cause une société appartenan t aux conditions et aux spécialités l e s plus
diverses,aux ages les plus différents , aux croyances les plus opposéés .
”
“ Ici, Adam et E v e , monarques et madones , Vénus et Apollon
,bacchantes, enfants
Jésus, faunes plongés daus l’
iv resse , les temps de Raphaélet ceux de Praxit éle, tout cel a
es t confondu et mis en harmonie par le sentiment Véritable et le gofit de l’art . La Tribune
51 el le toute seule mérite que 1’on fasse un grand voyage 21 Florence .
”
L’
Espagne, Sév ille , l’
Andalousie, Grenade vont maintenan t accaparer l’esprit de ce
poé te . La cathédrale de Sév ille est une mervei l le .“ C
’est,di t-il, un des plus beaux monuments de I
’
art chrétien . La gravité du style
gothique régne ic i sous ces v ofites mystérieuses et immenses , surchargées d’
orn emen t s et
de grac ieuses dentelle s frémissantes da souffle de l a foi les él égants arceaux courent de
pil ier en pilier comme autant de fieuron s d ’un superbe diadéme le s hautes fené tres qui
s’
élan cen t vers le ciel et leurs sombres Vitraux qui me répandent qu’
un'
e lumiére adouci e et
mystérieuse achév en t cet ensemble vraimen t incomparable . A l’ext rémit é de la nef n ous
franchissons 1a grille d ’une chapel le assez grande . lei reposaient les ossements de celui ,sous le nom duquel j
’
ai été baptisé, celui de qui j’ai l’honneur de descendre et que l
’
Eglise
a constitué mon principal défenseur devant le tréne de Dieu . On cél ébra la grand’
messe
derriére l e s gril le s dorées da choaur. La cathédrale se montrait dans son impos ante
majesté . La momen t supréme de l’élév at ion arriva l es sons graves et touchants de
l ’orgne retentiren t sous les v ofites gothiques ; l es t é t es des fidéles s’
in clin éren t au son des
cloche s ; une colonne d’
encen s monta comme un nuage vaporeux au-dessus de l ’autel pour
saluer le sacrifice auguste qui fai sai t descendre parmi nous le maitre da monde, le fils de
Dieu . C’
était un de ces moments subl imes, émouvants , solennels qui n’
appart ienn en t
qu’
é l a vraie religion catholique , et rav i ssent en adoration et en extase le caaur de
l ’homme . Je me senti s tout £1 fai t transporté , et j’
in v oquai pour ma famille absente l’in
t ercession de saint Ferdinand , qui a joint le s exploits de l’
épée aux pieux élan s de l a priére .
Je me l evai fier d’
é tre chrétien . Je me sen ti s affermi dans ma foi, j e me. sen
‘ ti s rassuré £1
1'
0 mbre toute puissante de l’E ternel.”
Nommez-moi un prince catholique qui ait su parler d’une mamere plus sublime .
Pour Maximil ien , l’
Alcaz ar est l’oeuv re d ’un peuple croyant , mais pour qui n’a pas
bril lé l a véritable lumiére . La sensual ité qui j oue 11 11 s i grand rale dan s l a Vie musul
mane a marqué de son sceau cet édifice merveil leux . Ou s’
é ton ne, on admire et cepen
dan t on ne ressent autre chose qu’
une excitation agréable de l’imagination ; 1a gravité
supérieure fait en t iéremen t défaut . L’
Alcaz ar est une tente royale et magn ifique dont les
colonnes élégantes soutiennent de superbes brocards de Damas,des tapis de l’I nde et des
voiles de dentelle s aux merveill eux ti ssus . Ou regarde et l ’on se demande s i les t iédes
haleines da vent n e vont pas soul ever le voile de dentelle , si les tapis dorés me vont point
7 2 FAUCHER DE SA INT—MAURICE
un climat auquel on puisse se fier. Notre ai r est épre, rude comme notre Vie . Ce n’est
que dans le Midi qu’on retrouve encore l’écho des bons Vieux temps classiques . Les
anciens Arabes on t semé en quelques sortes des oassis dans l a suite des ages ; nous
voyons encore les restes de leurs rév es pé trifiés et comme cristalisés , é Sév ille, é Grenade ,au Caire , é Damas .
L’
harmon ie des jouis sances entendues dans um sen s é levé , suppose l a fleur de tous
les arts,les l ignes heureuses de l’architec ture, les riches couleurs de la peinture , les nobles
formes de la sculpture , les plus doux accents de l a musique . E lle fond tout cel a avec les
parfums de la n ature,avec les avantages d‘
un climat et d’
un siécle privi légiés , avec tout
ce qui flat te les sens san s l es troubler,avec tout ce qui embell it l
’
existen ce et rafiine
l’esprit . O’est ainsi que se forment le s talen ts
,que l’esprit devient créateur et que le
C( Bur sait trouver la poésie et les chants .
”
Voilé en peu de mots quel les sont l es pensées de l’empereur sur le vrai et sur le beau .
E tudion s maintenan t ses idées en général sur les hommes et sur les choses:
MAX IM ILIEN : MAR IN ,OBSERVATEUR , PH ’ILOSOPHE , B IBL IOPHILE ET CHRETIEN .
Je vous ai parl é de Maximilien voyageur , homme de lettres et critique (1 art .
Causons da marin , de l’
ob serv at eur, da philosophe , da poé t e, du bibliophi le et du
chrétien .
L’empereur aimai t £1 citer souvent ces mots anglai s
Take it coolly .
11 en avai t fai t sa devise part icuh ere . Eu aucune circonstance il11 6 Pa démentie .
11 $ 3 plaisait £1 les répéter é son équipage , quand ilétait dan s la marin e autrichienne . Les
loups de mer étaien t ses hommes . Ille s aimait comme on aime sa fami lle .
Umj our, en parl ant d’eux , ildisai t
Le vrai matelot a raison d’
é trc fier . Le monde lui appartient , l’
Ooéan est sa patrie
son esprit me conn ait d ’auti' es bornes que cel les da vaste globe . 11 a droit de cite
dan s tous les pays de la terre, ilest regu partout eu ami et pourtant ilest partout dan s
sa patrie , car son vais seau en est une por t i on et lui sert j usqu’
aux antipodes de forteresse
pui ssante et redoutée . En la tte incessante avec les éléments , env-ironn é de dangers con
t inuels , ilacquiert le sérieux et l’
énerg ie da caract ére ; élevé au s ein des priv at ion s, i1
reste enfant en quelque sor te, et ilj ouit des moindres choses avec candeur et n aiv eté .
”
Le capi taine de vai sseau anglais est pour cet amiral autrichien le modéle da marin
Dans les petites marines,principalement daus cel les qui sont encore eu voie de
format ion , on se fai t une idée tout £1 fai t fausse .da capitaine tel qu ’i l se comporte en
réal it é dans les grandes marines. Le capitain e anglais est le souverain de son vais seau .
C’est lui qui le conduit en mer, le fai t rentrer dan s le port , ou le mén e au combat ; il
regarde ses sujets d ’un ( B ilde maitre . Pour les affaires secondaires, il3 ses organes, ses
mandataires , qu’i l laisse agir selon son grade et ilreste souvent des j ours en ti ers san s se
montrer sur le pont un long apprentissage et une Iongue pratique lu i donnent l a ferme
assuran ce que le service 5 9 fai t ponctuellement et sév éremen t , comme ildoit é tre fait . Il
MAXIMILIEN 7 8
n’
apparait que dans les grandes circonstances , pour fonder la réputation da vaisseau par
de bril lantes manoeuvres ou pour l a Victoire , ou encore , comme 11 11 Jupiter tonnans, pour
répandre autour de lui l a terreur et le respect . Les autres out 91 s’
occuper des choses
moins importan tD ans les marin es en Vo ie de formati on
,au con trai re , le c apitain e est tout ilest le
génie universe] , le secours indispensable dans les moments difficiles , le factotum en
activité perpétuel le . Ild o i t commander et exé cufer 91 l a foi s ildo i t monter le quart lu im éme
, bien qu’i l ai t sous ses ordres de nombreux officiers, sans quoi sa propre V i e et cel l e
de l’
équipage me seraient pas en sfiret é . Ildo i t faire le maitre d’
école pour l a j eunesse et le
geélier pour_
les mutins ildoi t faire lui-m éme l a ronde , et s’
assurer q ue _se s ordres son tréell ement exécutés . I I doit en personne envoyer de tous les co ins da vaisseau l’équigage21 l a mauceuv re ildoi t é tre le survei l lant
, et 5 la place des cadets hisser les s ignaux de
sa propre main . Mai s le pi re inconvénient d’un tel é tat de chose est , que, avec le temps ,
capitaine et ofli ciers s’
y accoutument , que le capitaine n’a jamai s confiauce en ses officiers,
é t que ceux-ci naturel lement n ’
acquiérent j amais cette confiance en soi -méme si nécessaire
au marin . I ls se lai ssent b ien t é t aller 5 1a paresse inhérente é l’humain e nature , et se
trouvent heureux de se décharger da fardeau de la responsabi lité sur les épaules de leur
chef. Insensiblement , celui-ci de son oé té , trouvera plaisir £1 s’
occuper des détail s insigni
fian t s, et toujours pré t 5 se l ouer lui -m éme, iln’aura que des paroles chagrines sur l
’im
périt ie des officiers et des cadets . Mai s comment ceux- ci peuven t-il s apprendre quelquechose , quand on 11 6 l aisse aucun jeu au développement de leur spontanéi té , et qu
’on 11 6 he
mesure pas aux progrés de l eur éducation ? C’est une n é oessit é désolante que , chez les
petits , tout so it pe t i t fatal ement .”
Maximil ien aimai t son équipage et ilsavai t s’en faire aimer . E 11 1 8 53 , ilcommandai t
l a M inerve, sur les cétes de l’Alb an ie . Umde ses matelots,Marco Rugger, tomba tou t £1
coup £1 l’extrémité .
Que disent :‘
a 0 6 propos le s mémoires dllfu tur empereurL
’
équipage s’
é t ait groupé, par un mouveme‘nt de sympathie , autour du moribond .
Je demandai que quelqu’
un commen gé t les priéres des agonisants ; mais personne n’en
ea t 16 courage . Dans no tre siéolepon se sent aux heure-s solennelles pri s d’un embarras
étrange . La, religion est devenue 11 11 objet incommode c ’es t un feu qui b rfile encore , mais
qui me réchaufie plus . Je Vi s le eercle demeurer muet et honteux autour de moi . Le
moment important d’
ofi dépend Ie salut peut é tre perdu par légéret é . Je me réfléchis pas‘l onguement ; en um instant j e descendi s daus ma cabine et j e rapportai un fragmen t
_de
l a vraie cm ix avec mon l ivre de priéres . Je fis assujettir la, précieuse rel ique‘ sur le
hamac ; moi-méme j e m’
agenouillai auprés da moribond Cet acte rompit le charme jeté
par le mauvais esprit , et b ien t é t un chwur de pieuses prleres s’
élev a pour le salut de l a
pauvre ame . Au mcmen t les derniers rayons da solei l nous éclaimien t par les ouv ertures de l’av an t
,1n on j eune matelot expira . La cloche da vaisseau fit entendre un glas
fun éb re, et l a nuit qui tombait étendit paisiblement son l in ceul sur celui qui n’
é tait plus .
Je n ’avais encore V11 mourir personne . 11 me fal lut faire a n effort e xtraordinaire>our res ter j usqu
’
au dernier moment . Mourir me sembla alors beaucoup plu s faci le que
j e n e me l’é tais figm’é . La mort de Rugger fu t solennelle , et grace £1 Dieu ,
édifian te. Je
Vi s des larmes dans les yeux de nos j eunes ofiiciers . D’
ordinaire i l s n e pen sen t guére é
ées choses-lé . Cette grave legon fu t salutaire £1 moi -méme et 21 tous . Dan s le cours de la
Sec. I,1889 . 10 .
7 4 FAUCHER DE SAINT-MAURICE
soirée,l es matelots me demandéren t encore — ce qui me causa un v if pl aisir — l a per
mission de dire le chapelet en commun auprés da défun t . Avant minuit , le cercueil fut
pré t on le descendit lentement daus ma b alein iére ; l es rames se mirent en mouvemen t .
Appuyé sur la li sse de p1at -b o rd, j’
en t endis Iongtemps dans le silen ce'
de la n uit 1a cha
loupe ramer vers l a falaise . Le corps fut déposé dans une petite chapelle ilfut confié
21 l a g arde de la population cathol ique de l a c6te .
Je pri'
ai encore , car ilconvient é celui q ui vo i t sa famill e éprouvée de se tourner
vers son Dieu . Ce D ieu n’es t pas sourd aux priéres de ceux qui ont une foi inébranlable
en sa toute puissance , e t une suppl ic ation filiale a toujours s oul agé l’éme da fardeau qui
l’oppressait . Iln’
y a que le l ibre penseur don t l’
orgueilrefuse de s’
inclin er
j usqu’
a‘
l l a mort ; mai s ce momen t supréme apprend méme £1 11 11 Voltaire £1 bégayer des
priéres et 5 chercher en tremblant des con sol ations .”
Maximi lien pratiquai t depui s 8 3 plus tendre enfance les idées saines e t pieuses .
Mai s remettons-nous en route . Nous sommes au Brési l . L’
illustre voyageur voit un
j our la foule se ranger respectueu sement devan t le passage rapide d ’un palanquin .
Ecout ez ceci
Chacun se demande Qu ’est-ce 7
C’est un riche Brésil ien qui s
’en v a faire la si este . Um instan t aprés, ilrepose au
mil ieu de ses trésors, et s’
endort daus son hamac élégant,sous sa froide Véranda péné t re
l a bri se de mer. De fidéles es claves l’en v iron n en t ilsommeil le doucement et san s
mauvai s rév e . Si vous voulez savoi r comment ilest parvenu £1 l a r ichesse , comment il3.rassemblé les mil lions qui lui font un oreil le r s i commode , vous avez faci lement l a, réponseen pleine rue . C
’est par le commerce de la chair humaine,par le t rafic des noirs fai t sur
une échell e gigantesque,on par l a fabricati on de l a fausse monnaie . Cet homme n ’
en est
pas moins un personnage trés honorable ilaura, quelques beaux titres de noblesse ilv a
£1 la cour . Ildort au s si paisiblement que les saints au paradis . E t pourquoi n e dormimit-il
pas La notion de l a conscience est tout £1 fai t ab son te s ous le cie l des tropiques sous
ce cl imat d’une éternel l e douceur
,ce degré de sensibilité morale parait é tre inconnu . La
conscience faisant défaut , ilme saurait y avoir de rel igion Véritable , et naturel lemen t le
besoin n e s ’en fait pas sen tir . Mai s ce que ces nababs da Brési l me peuven t supprimer,c’est l’expression féroce de leurs yeux noirs , sombres , toujours en qu é te de quelque chose
on me peut les regarder sans éprouver un sentiment d’
horreur, une sorte de frisson .
11 y a proprement quatre facteurs t rois d ’entre eux sont négatifs dont les
influences div erses e t combinées concourent £1 détruire , au Bré z il, le l ien domest ique -et
social
L’
ab sen ce de l a maison patri arcale,héréditaire
,sol idement consti tuée et cohérente ,
daus laquelle le s génération s successives poursuivent l eur exi stence avec les mémes prin
cipes et les mémes moeurs — l’ab sence complé te de l’
idée et da sentiment de l a conscience ,effet inévitable d’un c l imat toujours égal
,de l a richesse d ’une nature exubérante , ce
qui en train e é son tour le t roisiéme point — l’ab sen ce absolue de cette base religieuse quifait que l
’homme aspire é quelque chose de Supérieur 51 la simple nature mai s justemen t
le malheur a voulu qu’ici 1a nature ffit trop bell e —quatriémemen t enfin l a plai e h ideuse
eh a j amais flé trissable de l’
esclav age ,cette plaie qu ’il est du devoir de tou t honn é te
homme de combattre par l a parole et par les actes , é quel que condition sociale et é quelque
pays qu’i l appartienne .
7 6 FAUCHER DE SAINT-MAURICE
Ou commence les révolutions avec dc belles paro les ; on l es achieve avec du sang .
L’
amb it ion es t un bal lon . Jusqu’
é une certaine hau teur pour l’ué ron aute l’
as .
( tension est agréable elle lui fai t j ouir d’une v ue splendide et d
‘
un panorama immense
Mai s quand ilmonte plus haut , le vertige survien t le tableau est convert de brouillard
ilest confus ; l’ai r se raréfie , ct finalemen t ilrisque de faire une chute at de se cas ser
le cou .
“ Les n ations qui exercent 1’empire n’
apprenn en t pas les l angues ét rangéres, mais
el les forcen t les nations plus faibles é apprendre l a l eur . C’est seulement lorsqu
’
uue
nation commence {a décl iner qu’el le se me t 51 b abult ier des idiomes étrangers témoin s l esRomain s £1 l’égard du grec .
Les choses bien réussie s'
son t cel l es qui,une fois faites , semblent exi ster ain si
depuis longtemps .“
Le corps met plus de t emps 5 se décomposer que la mémoire da mort £1 s’
efi‘
acer.
La note poétique e t Viri le est la prédominante de Maximil ien . 11 écrit alors des
pages d ’un colori s chaud,en levé
,Vibran t . Lisez ce qu ’i l dit sur les combats de taureaux
“ Je me cherche pas £1 le nier, écrit-il, j’
aime
'
les ancien s temps ; non pas ceux d11
Slecle dernier,
dans le nimbe de la poudre et (111 fard , au milien de fo lles et l angou
reuses idylles , é travers le s prés fleuris, on s’
av angait en roucoul ant vers le béant ab ime
non , mai s l es temps de nos Vieux an cé t res , 1'
e8prit chevaleresque se développai t dans
les tournois ; l es femmes étaient fortes, me demandaient pas 1
'
1n flacon d’
odeurs et me
feignaient pas de s’
émouv oir pour une gou tte de sang répandu l ’on chas sait Ie sangl ier
et l ’ours en pleine foré t , et non comme aujourd ’hui derriére des barricades ! Cos temps
ont enfanté une race énergique . E t nous,que nous e st-ilrest é des divertissements viril s
de nos péres La chasse peut-é tre Hélas I pas méme l a chasse Nous nous appelons
chasseurs,mai s nous n e faisons e.ll somme autre chose que fusi ller 5 distance respectueuse
et en parfaite sécurité de pauvres b é t es apprivoisées . La guerre seule subsis te , l a guerreque depui s trente ans les efforts de nos modernes philosophes n ’out pas réussi £1 sup
primer — et avec el le on t survécu deux plaisirs chers é certaines nations . Le premie r est
la chasse au renard en Angleterre, l ’homme s’
expose £1 des dangers vraiment dignes de
lui,et n e redoute aucun obstacl e pour arriver é son but . Ou a beau dire que c’est une
chose vaine de mettre sa Vie en péri l pour un objet insign ifian t j e Grains for t que ceux
qui reculent devant les dangers inuti le s me retrouvent pas leur courage au moment de l a
nécessi té . L’autre plaisi r est l a corm
’
da espagnole,Véritable fé te popul aire des an c iens
temps . E l le surexcite , ilest vrai , les passions Violentes et sauvages qui sont au fond. de
la nature humaine , mai s ell e dével oppe aussi le courage et l’én ergie. Celui qui prend £1
ce spectacle un plais ir enthousiaste me manquera pas de caaur pour d'
autres choses plus
importantes , et tout au moin s ilme s’
én erv era pas dans une mortel le apathie . 11 y a encore
chez ce peuple un fier et noble esprit chevaleresque et en dépit de ces j eux sanglants que
leur ont légués leurs an cé tres , l es E spagnol s de'
nos j ours sont pieux et bienfaisants .
Chaque chose a son caract ére , et le cache t de son époque ; la variété cn ce monde est leplu s grand charme de l’existence .
Causant de la force , ne disai t-ilpas un j our en parcouran t l a fl '
ibune de Florence
La groupe des Dut teurs me frappe par sa véri té , par sa Vie . C’
e st une image fidéle
éf' hardiment congue de la Viril ité et de la beauté antiques el le nous reporte aux temps
des jeux Ol ympiques , vers cette j eunesse du monde 0 11 16 corps he sxiccomb ait pascomme
MAXIMILI EN 7 7
aujourd’hui sons 10 débordement maladif ( l es forces in tel lectuelles , ily avai t harmonie
entre le physique et le moral,l ’homme n
’
é tait comple t qu’
a la condition d’
é tre sain c t
Vigour'
eux . Ou voi t les athlé tes se sourire aux applaudissements d’une foule en thou
siast e ; la lu tte est indécise , l’
assis t an ce haletante les contemple et se demande que] sera, levainqueur. Tous deux sont d ’une force herculéenne ; les yeux bril lent , les muscles se
tendent , on dirait deux l ions en n u combat acharné ; un moment i ls s’
ab at telit dans le
sable de l’arén e ; un l éger nuage de poussiére les dérobe aux regards ; mai s b ien t é t il s repa
raissen t . Le vaincu veu t se relever ; l’autre l ’a déj z
‘
l sais i par l’épaule, et lu i appuyant sur
le flauc son genou nerveux , rend inutiles tous les efforts de. son bras . Au mil ieu de
l’en thousiasme univers e] , ilattend ain s i triomphan t l a couronne da vainqueur. La Gréce
tou t en t ié re a assisté au combat ; voila sa récompense . C’est ce moment le plus émou
vant de la lutte — quand le vainqueur enlace son adversaire étendu sous lui que l’ar
t iste a fixé dans le marbre et conservé 51 la postérité .
”
Admirateur de la Vie puissante que l ’art antique savai t donner 51 l a pierre , Maximilienpréférait, cependan t , con t emplef l a magnificen ce plus sere ine (les couleurs . Ses études
sur les grands mai tres que vous venez de l ire , en font foi .Vous avez eu la note Virile étudions maintenant l a note poétique .
Nous sommes au Brésil , en pleine foré t Vierge .
“ Nous nous dirigefimes vers une foré t magn ifiq'
ue. Um long sifiiemen t aigu,sem
blable £1 celui qu ’en entend sur les chemin s de fer,se mit 51 retentir dans l a, profondeur
des bois. Ce brui t singul ier s’
élév e trois fois par j our dans les foré t s de la zone tropicale ,le matin , le midi , et 51 l a chute du jour . L
’
au teur de cc long soupir, plein d’
angoisse, est
une cigale , l a cicada mum'
fem . Ou me peut n i la voir u i l a découvrir mais son cri donne
le s ignal régul ier et infaill ible de ce brui t étrange , indescriptible , qui retentit é certainsmoments sous les tropiques . C
’est comme umvaste concert de voix invisibles , accordées
sur tous les tons , qui résonne. daus l’
atmosph ére paisible des foré ts . Vous n’
apercev ez
ri en , vous n’
ob serv ez aucun mouvement pas une branche agi tée , pas un murmure dans
le feuillage . Soudain retentit be long siffiemen t , tan t é t tout prés de v os oreil les , t an tfit $3
une grande distance c ’est comme l ’appel da veilleur . Avan t l’heure du midi tout n
’
é tait
que si lence ; £1 peine entendait-ou bourdonner un insecte : ce signal annonce que le silence
est arrivé é son terme . Aussité t s’
élév e sur tous les tons , un chant de joie universell e pour
saluer l ’astre fécondant,parvenu au zén ith
,D
’
ab ord ce long appel est suivi de quelques
accen ts i solés,semblables au prélude des instruments ; puis les voix se multipl ien t et ce
sont des murmures,des cris
,des tintement s , des roulades la mesure s
’
in t roduit dans la
mélodie,et le grand unisson de l a v ie retentit avec de plein s accords sous les v ofit es de
l’immense cathédrale de verdure . L’
impressiou est.
souveraine . Ou se sentait isolé sou sl’éclat sév ére des plante s muettes on marchait en si lence sous le poids de la chaleur du
jour,au mil ieu de ces splendeurs féeriques mais inan imées ; tout a coup on se sent salué
de tous cfités, par 11 11 con cert invisible . Cette foré t pénétrée d’un puissant souffle de Vie ,
cette ombrc mystérieuse,sous l aquelle des mill iers de plantes inconnues gofiten t le repos
du midi, et enfin ce merveilleux concert exalt éren t en moi cette admiration enthousiaste ,
ces transports de jo ie,dont mon fime étai t remplie depui s mes premiers pas su
'
r ce sol
nouveau .
“ En maréhan t sous la v ofite épaisse de lei foré t , j e passai en revue les souvenirs demes nombreux vo
'
yages, et j
’
arriv ai é cet te conc lusion : L’homme qui a le sentiment de
'
la
7 8 FAUCHER DE SAINT—MAURICE
nature d o i t voir trois grands spectacles pour con naitre ce que la terre ofi'
re de plus
sublime . D‘
ab ord, u-me matinée dans les Alpes , sur un sommet élevé dans l’air pur
,loin
da mouvement du monde . L5,environné des richesses de l a flore alpestre
,comme d’
uu
magp ifique émail nature] , gentianes azurées , roses souriantes , pensées , myosotis , oeil lets et
Violettes , baignés dans la fraiche vapeur da matin que percen t pen apen les rayons de la
lumié re,ilvoi t le s éto i les s’
é teindre dan s le firmamen t argenté . Une haleine puis sante
semble soulever le se in de l a terre qui se révei l le . Les flocon s de nuages se di ssipen t
dan s les val lées l’Orien t se couvre d’une teinte de pourpre qui devi ent de plus en plus
éclatante les . cimes e t leurs champs de neige , sous l a lumiére dorée , s’
éclairen t de plus en
plus ; les sapin s secouent la rosée de leurs branches . Soudain le sole ilfranchissant les
dentelures des monts gigantesques s’
élév e daus tout son éclat , envoyant ses rayonscomme des messagers de joie aux vertes val lées et aux lacs étincelants et de toutes les
profondeurs montent, en signe de grat itude , le chant des oi seaux e t le son harmonieux des
cloches .
Telest le premier tableau . Le deumeme est celui du mil ieu da j our dans le paradi s
des tropiques , avec cette exubérance de parfum et de fleurs , de v ie et de sons, avec ce
sentiment d’
allégresse qu’
év eille le soleil é son apogée , voluptés que mon caaur savourait
emce moment avec une admirat ion ple ine de reconnaissance .
“Le t roisiéme tableau est celui da soir dans le désert
,quand le disque enflammé ,
voil é d ’une teinte de sang,s ’abaisse dan s les vapeurs se j oue le mirage , au moment de
disparaitre é l’horizon lointain dans l a mer de sable . Le firmamen t devient pourpre la
vaste pl aine se couvre d’une poussiére d’or et d ’argent peu 91 peu les couleurs s
’
efih cen t ,
le ciel se constel l e de diaman ts . Les vautours planent , et semblable s 5 de noirs fan t émes,
décrivent leurs cercles sur l’arriére plan , 0 11 régn e uue blancheur de fournaise ; le cha
mean comme une ombre en voyage poursuit si lencieusement sa route . Les croyants
prient tournés vers l a Mecque , tandis que les étoiles da Couchant al lument leurs flam
beaux sur l a v ofit e au sombre azur. Um souffle frai s et Viv ifian t , qui est le baume de
un it,passe comme une douce haleine sur le sol argenté l a lune dans son plein , et deux
foi s plus grande au début de sa carriére , s’
élév e calme et pure da cété de l’Orien t .
’
Quiconque a recueil l i ces troi s tableaux dans son ame es t nu in i t i é . Le culte de l a
n ature non seulement lu i est permis , ilest pour lui obligatoi re .
.Te marchais entre deux murai lles de feuillage . Tout é coup un objet passa devantmoi
,rapide comme la pensée . Mes sen s étaient tellement éveillés que rien n e m
’
é chap
pai t,n i um son , ui um mouvement . Je Vis de nouveau cet objet passer comme l’é clair,
s'
élev er et s’
ab aisser. Ce mouv ement se con centra devant une liane tout prés de moi ;c
’
é tait une vibration incessante,un bourdonnement , une oscill ation mil le fois répétée .
Ou efit dit une pensée saisie au vol et en fermée dans un battement d’ailes , pensée flot
t ante et suspendue dans le s airs . J’
é tais en présence d 'un colibri . Les Brés il iens l’ap
pellen t Bq’
iaflm'
,baise-fieur. Ic i la réali té dépass e toute description , toute attente . Ce
petit é tre est insaisissable on me saurai t reproduire ses mouvements , ui le garder eu cap
t iv ité . Semblab le £1 une image apparue en songe , ilse trouve 151 san s é t re attendu , et
fuit au moment le plus intéres sant . Ce n’
eSt que mort qu ’i l tombe entre les mains de
l ’homme .
Le col ibri n e se l aisse pas plus analyser que l’
arome des fleurs. Ilest si petit , si
gracieux, si rapide , qu’i l se soustrait en quelque sorte 21 l a défin it ion commune de l a subs
8 0 FAUCHER DE SAlNT-MAURICE
excepté l ’homme et sa race . Loin de ses semblables,dans une foré t qui n ’a. j amais été
profanée , qui s’
é tend sur le quart d ’un continent , le voyageur, au moment 0 131 le j our le
quitte , sen t son coeur sai s i d’une anxiété inexprimable ; 11 $ 8 trouve comme perdu , ilest
incertain entre le sen t iment joyeux d ’une l iberté sans limites et une inquiétude qu ’i l ne
saurai t réprimer .
”
Mai s t rév e de ces ci tat ions vous connaissez maintenant Maximilien auss i bien que
moi . Cette plume fine, aisée , t ouj ours pré te £1 sai si r la nature dans ce qu
’el le a de plus
noble,de plus grand , de plus po ét ique , ce penseur délicat et profond , cette ame d ’él ite Ya
b ien té t voir devant lui se fermer é jamai s les portes d’ivoire des doux rév es , des pensée s
élevées . Le Mex ique l’at t eud ave c ses adulation s , ses triomphes éphéméres, ses trahison s
terribles,ses lé ches abandons . Le martyre v a couronner cette Vie bien remplie mais trop
courte .
Maximilien a-t -ilen un pressentiment , quand , é Grenade , ilcontempl ai t dans l a
Capellafrealeles images de pierre de ses an cé tres , s i bel les dans la physionomie de la mort ?
C’
é taien t de grands hommes , di sait-il, qui ont fai t des morceaux d’
histo ire ,qui
ou t joué leur réle sur la vaste sc-én e du monde . I ls ont produi t une race puissante et qui
a régné au loin . Maintenant i ls reposent délaissés dan s une chapel le sol itaire vani tédes vanités ! Jadis uue cour somptueuse les environnait de son éclat ; auj ourd
’hui n u
sacristain misérablement Vé tu prend une torche , ouvre l a pet ite porte de fer, e t me conduit
par uu étroi t e scal ier dans un caveau sombre e t bas , sans ornement n i parure , 0 11 l a vérité
se montre tris te , nue , et m’
accueille avec un ricanement sinistre . Lz‘
a, me péné tren t j amais
le ‘
regard d’
oublieux héritiers . Le C( Bul’ se serre en voyant ces couples royaux
,autrefois
s i puissants , Si fiers,emprisonnés dans leurs étroits cercuei ls
, et l’
afl‘
reux memen/o morz'
re tentit comme umglas au fond de l’fime e t nous fait fri ssonner .
”
Rel isez dans Vienna et les Vz’
ennoz’
ses, par Victor Ti s sot, l a, description da caveau dela chapel le des capucins dort main ten ant eet empereur dans une caisse d
’
acaj ou
placée daus 1111 sarcophage en bronze , avec quatre griffons et quatre t é tes d’
auges déployant
leurs ailes . Vous n ’
aurez pas une l igne é changer aux l ignes que vous venez de l ire .
En l aissant Madére, Maximi l ien avai t in scrit ce qui sui t daus son liv rc de bord
Tenant 51 l a main une rose cueill ie au cim et iére , ct respirant son parfum , j e quittai
cette il e inoubliable sept mois plus tard, s
’
é teignait une vie qui m’
é t ait chére .
”
Or cette personne chérie appartenait 51 la maison d’
Au triche.
Curieux retour des choses d’ic i-bas
,celui qui uu j our cueil lai t £1 Madére l a rose da
cime t iére repose mainten ant £1 cé té de cette princesse , daus l’
église des capucins de Vienne
Poé te, savant , philosophe , Maximil ien était aussi bibliophile .
Son t act , ses pat ientes recherches lui avaient permis de se former, au Mexique , uneriche b iblioth éque .
Lé , dan s son chateau de Chapul tepec se coudoyaient péle-méle l es splendides édi ti on s
des Alde , des Estienne , des Plantin , des E lzevir, le s heures de Notre-Dame aux splendides
enluminures , une foule de manuscrit s in troui' ables sur l’
h istoire d’
Am érique, et les in cu
n ables de la typographie américaine,six volumes gothiques imprimés en 1 5 43 et en 1 547 ,
restés complé temen t inconnus aux bibl iophiles .Sep t mille volumes consacrés exclusivement au Mexi que étaient lei réunis £1 grands
frai s , et les rayons en b ois de fer de la b ibliothéque . I ls ployaient sous les l ivres de
la l i ttérature frangaise, anglai se , espagnole , sous les travaux d’
éoonomie pol i t i que , de
MAXIMILIEN 8 1
théologie , (1 education , d’
histoire ecclésiastique , de droit , de géographie , de sciences exactese t physiques, de philosophie , de monographies sur l
’
Asie , l’
Afrique, l’
Amérique.
Dans sa soif de savo ir, l’empereur s ’
ab reuv ait £1 toutes sources .
Le Canada assistai t 53 0 6 rendez-vous un iverse ],et s ous les yeux du visiteur toujours
bien regu dans l a b ibliothéque, défilaien t le s Voyages cle Carlie) aufc ( ewes Neuf ves da
Canada, La nouvelle découverle d’
un grand pays siéués ent r e le N ouveau-Mexique et la mer
Glacia le, par Hennepin , les ouvrag es du baron de la Houtan ,l’Hisloiv'e de la Nouvelle
F rance, par Lescarbot , l’
Hz'
stoz'
re da Canada et le g rand voyage au. pays des Huron s , situé en
Amérique, 1169'
s la mer douce, és-derm’
ers confins de la Nouv elle—a ce flu Canada, par Gabriel
Sagard Théodat .
Maximilian recherch ait l es (edit ions canadiennes . Dans le catalogue dressé par ses
soins et sous ses yeux,figuraien t 1a relation da P. Bressan i
,éditée par 16 P. Mart in , et_
imprimée par Lovel l , de Montréal , les biographies de Mme d’
Youv ille et de Ml le Mance ,ainsi que les Relations cles Jésuites. Ce dernier travail , classé sous le numéro d
’
ordre 1 982 ,
était ain s i con signé dans le guide de l a b ibliothéque impériale .
Je l ’ai noté moi-meme’
.
Relations des Jésuites , contenan t ce qui s ’est passé de plus remarquable dan s les
missions des Péres de l a, Compagnie de Jésus dan s l a Nouvel l e-France , ouvrage publié
sous les auspi ces du gouvernement canadien,3 vol s . ; Québec chez A . Cé té , 1 85 8 , trés
grand in -8 , £1 3 colonnes, demierreliure, maroquin vert , non rayee, t é te dorée .
”
Puis venaient le s remarques du bibliophile . I I avait fai t écri re daus son catalogue
Exemplaire d’une col lection importante devenue rare . O’est une réimpres sion de la
collection in -8 en 48 vol s . imprimée aParis au commencement da XVI I e siécle et devenue
introuvable .
”
Aprés l a catastrophe de Queretaro, ces trésors d erudition déposés en tre les main s d’un
fidéle ami de l ’empereur, don José Maria Andrade , furen t précipitamment arrachés du
pal ais , emball és furtivement dan s plus de deux cents cais ses , chargés £1 dos de mulets et
conduits hors de Mex ico . Aprés un mo is d’
in croyables pérégrinations , il s arriv éren t
heureusement {1 l a Vera Cruz , et‘
de 12] en Europe .
Cette précieuse b ibliothéque , j oyeuse amie de l’empereur
,l orsque brill ai ent le s beaux
jours de j adis colorés par le s teintes ro ses de l’avenir, — devenue teinte de sang le 1 9
juin 1 867 cette col lect ion unique , devenue plus tard sa seule et sincére confiden t e, lorsque
sonn éren t les heures du mensonge et de la trahison , a été dispersée le 1 8 janvier 1 869
dans l a, sall e des ventes de Leipsic .
Avec l’adj udicat ion da dernier volume sombrait la dernlere épave da naufrage
mexicain .
Qu’
aj outer de plus $1 ce croquis imparfait s’
est ompe le profi l d’un homme qui sen t
emce moment courir sur sa tombe le refrain friss onnant de la bal lade al lemande— Hue Hue ! les mo r ts vont m
’
te
Vous qui me lisez,vous comprenez maintenant que devant l ’empereur Maximil ian
nos esprits se soient é chaufi'
és que nous nous soyons enthousiasmés ; que nous ayons fai t
l’impossible nous,
qui l ’avons servi pour lui prouver n otre dévouement .
J’
av ais alors é peine dépassé mes Vingt an s . Maximil ien en awai t trente-deux .
Hun eau , canadien-frangais, s’
é tait fait tuer pour sa cause an combat de Médellin Beau
grand , devenu plus tard maire de Montréal , servait comme maréchal de l ogis chef 51 l a
Sec. I,1889 . 1 1 .
8 2 FAUCHER D E SAINT-MAURICE
con treguérille du colonel Dupin Arthur Taschereau - ull 11 0m qui obl ige quand ils’
agit
d’aller de l ’avant — étai t l ieuten an t de chasseur et aide de camp da général Wachter ;celui qu i fait ce tt e é tude était capitain e au 2 9 batail lon d’
in fan terie légére d’
Afrique.
En ces temps historiques , Max imi l ien n ous donnait $1 pl eines main s son savoir, son
érudi tion . Ilnous communiquai t toutes les vibration s,toutes l e s asp irations de son
cceur . Ilsavai t aussi n ous mener gaiement an comb at .
Maximilien devait , en suivant le filordinaire de l a Vie , entrer daus l’
histoire par la
porte ouver te aux gens de let tres et aux s avants .
H y a été précipité brusquement par un peloton d’
exécu tion,commandé par 11 11
oIficier de Vingt- trois ans
Un j our, causant avec son état major , Maxim il ien disait— Regardez cette maisonnette assise prés da bois . J
’ai été marin . Sur l’
Océan ,
lorsqu’
on vo it £1 l ’horizon s’
élev er 11 11 poin t blanc, une voi le lointaine , cette vue éveillech ez le navigateur un sentiment de curio sité sympathique notre éme se porte vers cette
petite tache,vers ce point sur lequel des inconnus , nos semblables , poursuivent leurs
des tinées . C’est alors qu ’au sein de ce tte mer de verdure
,on regarde
,comme maintenant
,
s’
élev er vers le ciel les blanches colonnes de fumée qui l aissent deviner au voyageur que ,lé -bas
,entre les vagues immenses da feui llage
,une exi stence indépendante et ignorée
lu tte et 5 8 se ntient 5 force de travail . Les yeux da passant s ’
at tach en t avec in t éré t é ces
manife stations si len cieuses d’une v ie soli taire et ce n ’est pas san s mélancol ie que l ’ima
gin ation en travai l se représente la man iére de vivre de ces é tres qui , si l oin da monde,séparés de tout ce qui l eur fut cher et précieux, sont allés chercher un asile dams l aVasteeh impénétrable foré t . Ces colonnes de fumée sont les bornes mill iaires de la civi lisati on ,qui s ’
efforce de j ai ll ir au sein de l a foré t Vierge ce son t le s feux de bivouacs des avant
postes 0 11 l a Providence a envoyé de vai llants “pionniers . Accab lés de dégofit s et de cha
grins dans l'
ancien monde , i l s ou t pris Ia hache da colon , pour allem serv ir de premiers
instruments £1 cett e civil i sat ion méme , qui s’
ann once toujours £1 l eur in su . Quand on
songe aux motifs qui ont poussé taut de vail lants lutteurs dan s les solitudes sauvages , lecoeur se s
_
ent attri sté 21 l a vue de ces colonnes de fumée . Une sympathie secré te dirige
involon tairemen t le regard du cét é de ces germes de vie . Mai s dés qu ’on a v u l es colons ,et qu’on a 6 11 quelques rapports avec eux , cette sympathie se change en une mélancolie
profonde ; et , en s’
éloignan t , on se retourne pour regarder longtemps , l ongtemps encore ,ces signaux de la terre qui s ’
élév en t vers le ciel .
Voi la comment,un j our
,l ’empereur appréci ait les colons d’
Amérique devant ses
officiers,et j
’
en étai s .
Nous sommes descendants de pionniers aussi hardis . En de semblables circonstances
nos péres vin rent créer ici l a Nouvel le-France . J’ai cru é tre agréable é ceux qui sont fiers
de cette l ignée , en l eur faisant conn aitre sous son Véritable j our mais dan s l’humble l imitede mes forces , Maximilien
,voyageur, cri tique d
’art,maria ,
poete, b iblioph ilo, philosophe
et chrétien .
B’
ailleurs daus ces pages que vous venez de lire , l’empereur s’es t pein t lui -meme . A
vous maintenan t de juger eet homme , é qui peuvent s’
appliquer volontiers ce s paroles
qu’
un historien allomand disait de Juan d ’
Autriche
C’
est le propre de certain es ?ames que de se complairé dans des désirs et des proj ets
vagues . Quand leurs premiers desse ins ont échoué, elles s e l ivrent $1 des plans plus vastes
ROYAL SOC I ETY OF CAN AD A .
TRANSACTIONS
S E CTIO N I I .
E N G L I S H L I T E R A TU R E ,H I S TORY , A ROH JE OLOGY
P A PE R S F OR 1 8 8 9 .
Sec. I I,1889 . 1 .
4 JOHN GEORGE BOURINOT
man , Dicey, and Stubbs , I n eed hardly tel l you , stan d in the foremost rank of con st itu
t ion alwriters and in dicate the desire on th e part of the great Engli sh seats of learn in g
w ithin recen t y ears to stren gthen thi s bran ch of higher education . It has been wel l
observed by Mr . An drew White , W ho presided for many years so ably over Corn el l
Un iversity,that a r emarkable change has taken place in thi s direction on the part of
Oxford and Cambridge sin ce he first visited them thirty years ago when the provis ion
for in struction in political and soci al sci en ce,to say n othing of the n atural scien ces
,
was wretchedly in adequate .
” 1
It is to Fran ce and Germany con fessedly that w e should look for the most perfectsystem of educat ion of this class . N0 coun try in the world has more effective methods ofadmin i stration , or a better in structed civil service , than the Empire of Germany — the
very qualiti es which have made the German soldi er a remarkable milit ary machin e ten dto fit him for officiall ife . The German i s educated to habits of obedi en ce and disciplin ein all W alks of l ife , and has had from his youth excellen t opportun i ties for in struction inall bran ches of kn ow l edge . He i s n aturally ploddin g and in dustrious . He studies in
un iversit i es where the opportun iti es for being deeply groun ded in all bran ches of kn owledge are n ot surpass ed by in st i tut ion s in any other coun try for a lon g time they havegiven a special cours e of train in g suitable for polit ical l ife or the work of admin i stration .
The same th ing may be said of Fran ce, where the ofli cialservi ce has been always adm i t
ably admin i stered by servan ts of the state capable in every essen ti al particular . Whatever may be the faults of the politi cians of that great coun try , it can be truly said that
the perman en t publi c service, by the stabil ity , capacity, and kn owl edge of its members ,has proved a veritable bulw ark again st the impuls iven ess and un steadin ess of the
polit i cian or demagogue at times of in t en s e politi cal excitemen t .
The Col lege of Fran ce and th e In depen den t School of Pol itical Scien ces in Paris havefor a lon g t ime past presen ted a course of studi es , which en able a diligen t studen t tomake himself thoroughly con versan t w i th all those bran ches of history
, and of Pol it ical
Scien ce which assi st him to master the great problems of governmen t and soci al life thatare daily presen t ing them selves aroun d him , and help to make him a more useful mem
ber of the commonwealth .
It i s therefore emin en t ly s atisfactory to find that Can ada is commen cing to fol low ,
in thi s particular, the example s et her b y the coun tries just men t ion ed . Our population
and wealth are very in sign ifican t as yet compared w ith the Un ited States, or w ith thosepeopl es from W hom the two races that in habit thi s Domin i on derive their origin and
in stitut ion s ; but though it may n ot be possible for us for a while to offer the large
opportun it i es which the rich in stitut ion s of these coun tries give to the studen t , s t ill iti s for us to make a begin n ing , and l ay the foun dation for the study of those bran ches ofkn owl edge which are admitted to be essen ti al ly W ithin the provin ce of all seat s of thehigher education that w i sh to be en rapport w i th the t imes .
N0 course of studi es i s better calcu lated to profit the studen t than thi s , when i t i s
fully and fai thfully carried out . It is on e in s eparably con n ected w ith the vi tal in terests
of the whole commun ity . E very man ,woman
,an d ch ild has an in terest in the efficien t
admin i strat ion of governm en t,and in the impartial execution of th e l aws . Thes e
1 See Johns Hopk in s Un ivers ity Studies , 5 th Series, x 11.
ON POLITICAL SCIENCE . 8
are matters which relate immediately to human happin ess , and those studies which teachthe prin ciples on which all good governmen t must rest, the respective duti es , powers and
privileges of the differen t executive , legislat ive and judicial authorities, and the etern almaxims of civi l liberty , are studies which , when taught in the spirit of a judicious andhon est hi storian ,
are well worthy of the n ame of a sc i en ce , and should obtain a preemin
en ce over alldepartmen ts of thought and study , except the teaching of the true l esson s of
Christi an ity . I n the words of the distinguished essayist from whom I quoted in com
men cing thi s lecture I f there is a scien ce of poli ti cs at all , it must n eeds be almost themost complicated of all scien ces . It deals W i th that curiou s phen omen on cal led the State ,W hich is a kin d of organ ism composed of human bein gs . The lives of in dividual men
,
even the greatest men ,are in cluded in the l ife of the State ; almost everything indeed is
in cluded in it . Does n ot the very thought of studyin g such a vast comprehen sive phen o
men on ,and of discovering the laws that govern it , give rise to a feel ing of bew i ldermen t ?
Does it no t strike you that this study must res t upon other studies , that this scien ce must
presume the results of other scien ces , therefore that it can not be properly studied by itself ?Would you kn ow W hat is w ise and right in politi cs , you must con sult experien ce .
In poli tics , as in other departmen ts , w i sdom con sists in the kn owledge of the law s thatgovern the phen omen a , and these laws can on ly be discovered by the observat ion of facts ,history . I f thi s i s so , how can we avoid th e con clusion that such a study of politic s as
you meditate can n ot be separated from the study of historyCan ada, though a young coun try compared w i th the old civil izat ion s of Europe,
presen ts a very in terest ingfield for the studen t in this departmen t of study . Though no t
a n ation al sovereign ty l ike the Un ited States , and therefore probably in fer ior to i t in that
respect as an object of con templat ion and reflect ion for European stat esmen,its political
history,i t s fun damen tal l aw and con sti tut ion , i ts econ omic system ,
i ts social in st itution s
and the racial characterist ics of its people are worthy of the close study,not on ly of Can a
dian s,but of all person s who w i sh to fol low the gradual developmen t of commun it ies
from a state of cramped colon ial pupilage to a larger con dition of political freedom which
give s it many of the attributes of an in depen den t n at ion , n ever before enj oyed by a
colon ial depen den cy .
A course of Pol i tical Sc ien ce , to be in any measure complete , would mean that weshould study, in the first pl ace, th e pol it ical history of our own coun try, from the time
the Fren ch laid the foundation of their colon i al governmen t on the heights of Quebec,
down to the conquest o f Can ada by Englan d in 175 9 -60 , and then cethrough all the pol i
t ical and con stitution al chan ges which have brought about a federat ion of provin cesun der the somewhat ambitious n am e of Dom in ion . This hi storical study n ecessarilyleads us to review the politi cal and social con dition s of old Fran ce during the cen turyand a half when Can ada was under its governm en t . We c ann ot fai l to see how theconflict between Great Britain and Fran ce for cen turi es actually mean t a conflict for
supremacy in America, and how the dev elopmen t o f Fren ch Can ada was retarded by theambitious design s of the Fren ch mon arch in Europe
, and the way con sequen tly madeeasier for the triumph of the mother coun try on thi s con tin en t .
The history of the un fortun ate differen ces which led to the separati on of the old
thirteen colon i es, the state of poli ti cal parties in Englan d durin g the days when thepeople of Can ada, Nova Scot ia andNew Brun sw ick were con ten din g for extended political
6 JOHN GEORGE BOURINOT
rights, and the causes that led English statesmen at last to change their policy towards
these depen den cies of the Empire , and to gran t the large measure of s elf-governmen t wen ow enjoy, are more or less of an historical as w ell as political n ature, and clearly en terin to the domain of Political Scien ce . Indeed , history an d the polit ical scien ces are soclosely associated that so high an authority as the late emin en t Prof. Fran cis Li eber
,
of Columbia College , in the ci ty of New York , made these studies an in dependen t andhomogen eous departmen t in that excel len t in stitution . On thi s poin t Prof. HerbertAdams
,of John s Hopkin s Un iversity , has said w ith much force ; “ There i s a v aluable
and suggestive idea in Lieb er’
s first combin ation of history and politics, which ought toinfluence al l Ameri can colleges and un iv ersit i es in the proper coordin at ion of thesestudies . I f, for econ omic or other reason s , there must be a groupin g of various subj ects
under on e admin istrat ive head , hi story ought rather to be yoked w ith political sci en cethan W ith language, l iterature or phi losophy . The n ature of H i story and Pol it ical Sci en cedetermin es their in timate relation ,
if n o t their n ecessary coordin ation . History is past
polit ics and polit ics is presen t history . H i story is,primarily
,the experi en ce of man in organ
iz ed societ i es or so-called states . Political Scien ce i s the application of thi s historical
experi en ce to the existin g problems of an ever progressive society . H i story and polit i cs
are as in separable as past an d presen t . Thi s v iew i s j ust ified by the best historical andpolit i cal opin ion of our time— Ran ke, Droysen ,
Blun tschli,Kn ies
, Roscher, Nit z sch ,
Freeman , Seeley, and by the practical experi en ce of the best American colleges and
un iversities .
” 1
Amon g the studies that n aturally enter in to the domain of Pol iti cal Scien ce we maymen t ion the study of gen eral and histori cal juri spruden ce
,which n ecessarily open s up a
large field in a coun try like this, where on e provin ce , inhabited by a mil lion and a quar
ter of people, has a system of law drawn from the civi l law of Fran ce, which again restson the prin cipl es of that famous Roman law which has en tered in to the in sti tution s of som an y n ati on s of Europe , and more or less affected the civil condition s of n ation s who
have exerted , and con tin ue to exert , such importan t in fluen ces on the'
dest in ies of the
world .
It i s gen erally adm itted that the common law of En gland its elf exhibits to the carefulinquirer traces of the influen ces of Roman law , and that the prin ciples that governequity juri spruden ce have been largely drawn from the same remarkable source . But in
studyin g that great system of common law , which i s the basi s of the juri spruden ce of al lthe English-speakin g commun it i es of the Domin i on ,
the studen t of Pol it ical Sci en ce w i l ln aturally take a philosophic survey of Engli sh hi story in . order t o obtain an accurate
in sight in to the gen ius of those prin ciples , usages , and laws of act ion which have fromall times been appl ied to the governmen t and the s ecurity ofperson s and property in E ngland . The polit ical and civ i l liberty which w e now enj oy is the n atural heritage of
English commun it ies throughout the world , and its main prin ciples can be traced to themax ims of the common l aw . I t i l lustrates the sturdy, in dependen t spirit of the Englishrace, and i ts determin ation to resi st al l the efforts of mon archs , W i th the assi stan ce ofs ervile stat esmen
,to establi sh an arbitrary power in the realm . The great prin ciples on
hich our parl iam en tary governmen t rests had their origin in maxim s in vogue in the
1 Study of Hi s tory in American Colleges and Un ivers ities, b y H. B. Adams , Ph . D .
, p. 67 .
8 JOHN GEORGE BOURINOT
character, and show how n ecessary i t i s for our statesmen and publici sts to make them
selves thoroughly acquain ted w i th the rules and prin cipl es that govern commun it i es intheir dealings w ith on e an other . Though Can ada is sti l l a depen den t state , yet her
importan ce en titl es her, as her recen t hi story w i ll show you , to be con sulted and
represen ted on every occasion when her in terests are immediately affected by a proposedtreaty . Con sequen t ly, every y ear that passes gives greater scope to the abi liti es and
learn in g of her public men . The relation s of Can ada to other peeples , and especially to
alien s who are domici led or mere temporary residen ts in the coun try, and the n ecessityof observin g the great moral elemen ts that l i e at the basis of in ternation al law —the
duties of human ity, comity and in tercourse— en t ai l respon sibil ities on our people whi chmust be en l arged w ith the in crease of the wealth and population of the Domin ion .
Some of you who n ow hear my words may see the rel ation s between the paren tstate and i ts differen t depen den cies un dergo a very importan t chan ge, which may give
our statesmen a direct and l arger influen ce on the destin i es of the whole Empire— whena Can adian w i l l have as poten t a voice on imperial affairs as a dweller in Ken t or Devon .
H igher con dition s of n ation al ex i sten ce must be in store for a coun try like Can ada, which
has expan ded so remarkably in pol it ical greatn ess W ithin a few decades . I t may be thatthe Imperial Federal i sts w i l l even tual ly find a solution of the great problem they are
busy W ith in Great Britain and i ts depen den c ies,and Can adian s w i l l becom e citi zen s of
the Empire in reali ty , and as such able to n egotiate directly w i th foreign n ation s . But
in any case, as things are n ow , Can adian s must n ecessari ly fin d it to their advan tage ,
W hether lawyers or pol it ician s or ordin ary c itiz en s , to l earn som ethin g of that public law
which govern s the relation s of sovereign peoples w ith on e an other throughout the
civ ili zed world .
Pol itical E con omy i s an other of those useful studies which are n aturally all ied w ithothers on thi s w ide domain . Look aroun d us , and do we n ot see how importan t i t i s forCanadian s to un derstan d the prin ciples or doctrin es which have been laid down bymen like Adam Sm ith , Ri cardo , Mi ll , Carey, and others I n eed n ot men t ion here , whohave devoted their l ives in Europe and America to a bran ch of sci en ce so fruitful of dis
ca ssion , and so in timately con n ected w ith the industrial and commercial developmen tan d the material prosperity and soci al com forts of a people E very year that passes
sees question s conn ected W ith the health , and the improvem en t of the condition of the
labouring cl asses deman ding the con sideration of our l egislature s . On ly last session of
parl iamen t we had laid on the table a number of bulky volum es represen tin g the w ork
of a comm i ssion appoin ted by the Domin ion Governmen t to en quire in to subj ects of deepin terest to labour . Or, when I refer to the fact that we h ave a n ation al pol i cy whi chi s practical ly a system of protection ,
I show you as Canadian s how importan t it i s toun derstan d the prin ciples W hich recommend it to so large a body ofpeople in the Domin i on ,
in preferen ce to the prin ciples of the opposin g partywho w ould have a system of indirect
taxation for reven ue and would give a fuller expan sion to free trade w i th other peoples .
W ith this study are in t imately alli ed the question s of un restrict ed reciprocity and com
mercialun ion , which are of an econ omic charact er, requiring a large kn owledge of the
econ omic condition s of Can ada, and of the Un ited States , and a thorough understandingof th e soun d prin ciples W hich should guide us in our in tern ation al relation s . An accur
ate kn ow ledge of statist ics which are n ow a recogn iz ed bran ch of economic scien ce,
ON POLITICAL SCIENCE . 9
(despite the old saying that figures can be made to prove anything) i s invaluable in the
con sideration of question s like thos e I have cursorily men tion ed . I t i s on ly n ecessary tos tudy the pages of the works of a man like Mr. Mulhall , the emin en t En gli sh statist and
econ omist,to s ee how importan t and useful i s a scien t ific method of handling figures
and draw in g from them sound deduction s as to a n ation ’s prosperity or decl in e .
While it i s to Englan d that w e n aturally look for those lesson s and examples of
statesman ship and political sagacity , which may assist us in l aying broad and deep the
foundati on s of our political organ ization and soci al system , the studen t of Pol itical Scien cecann ot fail at the same time to draw much valuable in struction from a close and con stan t
study of the in sti tution s, n ation al , state , and mun i cipal , of our American n eighbors .
They,l ike ourselves have borrowed largely from the paren t state , to which w e both ow e
our origin , in organ izing their system of governmen t,and i t i s the common law of Eng
land, w e all kn ow , that l ies at the basi s of their system of j urispruden ce. Som e amon g
us have a pract ice of depreciatin g American in st itution s , thin king that this i s the best , asit i s c ertain ly som etim es the easiest , way of showin g the superiority of our own polit i
t ical and social con diti on s ; but after an hon est and assiduous study of the polit icalsystems of both coun tri es , I must fairly come to the con clusion that each of us may learn
something from the oth er,and that there is a great deal to adm ire in the sagacity , the
busin ess-l ike methods,and the thorough organ ization of man y of the in stitut ion s of our
n eighbors .
I f we should study thoroughly the comprehen sive and thoughtful work on the
Am erican Commonwealth by Prof. Bry ce , on e of those men who do hon our to the
great seat of learn ing on the banks of the Isis , we shall see that this particular study i s
full of en couragemen t and warn ing to us at on e an d the same time ,but its chi ef value,
to quote his exact words, and apply them to ourselves rather than to Englan d, l ies in
what may be called the law s of polit ical biology which i t reveals , in the n ew i llustrat ion sand en forcem en t s i t suppl i es of gen eral truths in soci al and political sci en ce, truths,som e of which were presen ted lon g ago by Plato and Ari stotle, but which might havebeen forgotten h ad n ot America poured a stream of l ight upon them .
”
As I have just said , both Can ada and the Un i ted States can trace all the valuable in st it ution s they posses s to England . Their legislative bodies have been modelled on the great
parliamen t of the paren t state . The many differen ces that n ow exi s t between the governmen t of Can ada and that of the Un ited States have arisen from the differen ces in the political circumstan ces and varyin g condition s of the two coun tries . The Un ited States formore than a cen tury and a half had been colon ies of England , enj oying a system of l egal
and polit ical in st itution s , which was their n atural heritage as Englishmen . When theirindepen den cewas ackn ow ledged and i t became n ecessary to mature a con stitution adaptedto the n ew stat e of things , they proceeded to frame a governm en t , whi ch throughoutshow s that they sti l l con sidered the En gli sh governmen t superior in essen ti al re spects toallother governmen ts in the world . I n the di vision of legislative
,judicial and executive
departmen ts w hich they made, they showed their desire to adhere to those importan tprin ciples which evoked the admirati on of Mon tesquieu . The presiden t was still th e
king of England,though he was deprived of powers which the American s con sidered
fatal to their liberty . He was given the right of veto over legislat ive acts and of ap
poin ting his own cabin et . But the coun cil was n ot made respon sible to or given seats
Sec. 11,1 889 . 2.
1 0 JOHN GEORGE BOURINOT
in congress , a fact quite in tell igible when we con sider that the king was , as far as theold colon i sts saw ,
the con troll in g power in the n ation , and that parliamen tary governmen t , as we kn ow i t in these times , was not un derstood by the American s . The framersof the American con st itution kn ew that amon g the royal prerogat ives was the right of
veto,although they forgot it had n o t been exerci sed for one hun dred and s even ty years
but they gave it to the presiden t chiefly because they thought it would be a valuable
check on the otherw i se arbitrary power of congress . I f I should pursue thi s subj ect sti l l
further, w e would see throughout the political system of our n eighbors many other evi
deuces of their desire to reproduce Briti sh practices and rules when con si sten t w ith thesystem of republican l iberty they were attempting to establ ish . Can ada, on the other
han d,has remain ed a depen den cy , and has n ecessari ly kept pac e W i th the progressive
stages of parliam en tary and respon sible governmen t of the paren t s tat e . Our govern
men t has always closely followed the importan t rules and maxims which make up theBrit ish con st itution . Our statutory law i s drawn in a great measure from that of Eng
land .I t is then most advisable for us to con sider in what respects , if any,
the Un i ted
States system is an improvemen t upon our own . Whilst it i s very in terest ing to n otethe differen ces in the workin g of the two systems of governmen t , it i s sti ll more importan t to observe the operati on of their federal system from which that of Can ada i s takenin essen t i al respects . I n short , an elaborate seri es of lec tures fully deal ing w ith the
n ature and workin g of the pol it ical in st ituti on s of our n eighbors should n ecessarily forma promin en t feature of any course of Pol i tical Scien ce , if i t i s to be made of practical andreal value to the studen ts of a un iversity .
I might dwell at con siderable length on the many subj ects that n aturally suggestthemselves to my min d in con n ecti on W ith so suggestive a theme . Our own sy stem of
governmen t i t self, drawn as it i s from the con sti tut ion al and polit ical experien ce of Engl an d and of the Un it ed States , i s replete w ith matter for study and reflect ion . Of Can ada
and h er in stitution s (particularly her local governmen t , and her federal system ) , it maybe truly said , she
.
“ i s the heir of all the ages .” For in stan ce,the federal idea is on e
W hich origin ated w ith the leagues that exi st ed in an cien t Greece , w ith those famousA chaean and Lyci an federated n at ion s which played so importan t a part in the history of
the an cien t world. We can trace its prin ciples , according to the Fren ch historian , Guizot ,in the working of the feudal system , and in the relation s that ex isted between the rude
commun ities of Europ e and the feudal king or chief to whom they professed to pay a modihed homage . W e can see that it has been the source of security upon which the Swi ss Canton s have relied for cen turies , though surrounded by hostile and jealous n ation s . It i s asystem which rests on the basis of local self-governm en t and a cen tral authority , and i ti s in teresting to trac e its developmen t through all times un ti l at last it has foun d its mostperfect realization in the Un ited States , Can ada , and the remodelled Swi ss Con federation ,
as wel l as in the Empires of German y and Austria,where the machin ery is in a measure
more complicated than in the American example of federation .
A l l these subjects to which I have very b riefly referred , as imm ediately associ at edw i th , and in deed fallin g n atural ly un der , the gen eri c term of Pol it i cal Scien ce, areimportan t to us in asmuch as they bear more or l ess directly on the developmen t and
opera t ion of the elaborate system of federal governm en t which we possess at l ast as'
the
results ofmore than a cen tury of political s truggle and achievemen t .
1 2 JOHN GEORGE BOURINOT
are characteristi c of the E ngli sh and even the Australian press . When w e con
s ider the varied topics w i th which a n ewspaper writer has to deal in the course of aweek
’
s issue, and the short t ime he has n ecessarily at his disposal for thoroughly in form
ing himself on the question s on which he has to speak authoritatively , it i s certain ly sur
prising to n otice the kn owledge of the subj ect and the in sight in to its sal i en t poin ts he
exhibits . One must at tim es recogn ize eviden ces of superficialin formati on ,and a t en
den cy to ign ore the valuable max im ,
“ A lways verify your facts . On e would w i sh
sometimes to see a greater sen se of respon sibi l i ty and a more earn es t desire to elevat epublic opin ion but these are defects which must in the n ature of things be associated
w i th dai ly j ourn alism . A fter all,it i s well to rem ember that a n ewspaper in these days of
speculation and competit ion i s a busin ess en terprise . No successful journ al i s l ikely to
be ahead of the commun ity in which it l ives,and it s daily ton e must gen erally afford a
fair criterion of the state of public opin i on aroun d it . A s the population and the
wealth of the coun try in crease,i t must happen that j ourn ali sm w il l become more of a
profession , offering larger em olumen ts to deserving men , although they are l ikely to be
much smal ler for a l on g time to come than the rew ards open to legal andmedical men o f
m erit . A s a rule,a n ewspaper man must be more or less to the man n er born . I am
hardly prepared to admit that much practical b en efit can be derived from the establi sh
men of classes for educating men in th e vari ous departmen ts of j ourn alism ,as i s propos
ed, and I believe even n ow attemp ted , in on e or two in sti tut ion s in the Un ited Stat es .
A reporter or editorial w riter must be train ed in the drudgery o f a n ew sp aper office , mustwork hi s way way up and gain prac tical experien ce before he is l ike ly t o become successfulin so arduous and engrossing a profession ,
deman ding special qualificat ion s . But ,at the same time
,I can see very great advan tages to be derived by journ al ism from the
careful study of the differen t bran ches of research that should fal l w ithin the domainof Pol iti cal Sc ien ce . Young m en ,
who have a desire to embrace this arduous pursuit as
a profession,ought assuredly to make themselves more capable of meet ing the many
requiremen t s‘
of a vocation ,wh ich every year i s making greater deman ds on varied
kn ow ledge . An un derstan din g of the prin ciples of Polit i cal Scien ce , of the differen tcon st itution s of the two con tin en t s , and especially of th e Uni ted Stat e s and En gland , of
historical juri spruden ce, of political econ omy and statistics , of the prin ciples that li e at
the basis of the two great systems of l aw that regulate the l ives of the Teut on ic and
Latin races,must certain ly stren gthen the confiden ce of a public writer in himsel f, and
give h im a men tal equipm en t which most n ewspaper men,who have n ot had such
advan tages,w il l fully appreciate . The respon sibi li t ies that rest upon j ourn al ists in this
coun try are un doubtedly great,and they owe it to them se lves and to the public they serve
to bring to the numerous question s that com e before them for revi ew and judgmen t the
most accurate kn ow ledge as well as hon esty of purpose .
We are n ow layin g t he foundation s of a great commun i ty stretching between two
ocean s , and the m ore c learly allcl asses of our people can le arn the prin ciples of governm en t , and un derstand the lesson s which the history of our own and other coun tries
teaches them,the more con fi den tly we can look forward to the future , and al l we trust i t
has in store for u s . We have already achieved a great deal through the in strum en tal ity of
the courageous and astute statesm en who have so far guided this coun try through i t spol itical developmen t . The in s titution s we n ow possess compare very favourably in all
ON POLITICAL SCIENCE . 1 8
essen tial respects w ith those of any other coun try , n ot even excepting the Un i ted Statesor England but sti ll there i s much to l earn
,and it i s to th e young men of the presen t
day,who are 11 0 W going out in to the world to figh t the practical battles of life, that we
must look to con tinue the great work of thosewho have preceded them .
We n eed n ot be apprehen sive that these studies w i l l' educate mere theorists . I t i s a
truism to say that theory must a lways precede practice . Certain ly it has its valuable in
fluen ces on al l poli tical system s , w hatever the purely pract ical polit ici an may say in his contempt for studies beyon d hi s ken . Who ever doubts n ow the importan ce of the pol it icalideas ofMon tesquieu , or the value of the l esson s drawn by De Tocquevil le from his study
of American democracy , or the soundn ess of the teachin g of Burke , or of H amilton in
the ‘Federal is t ’
Or who can exaggerate the influen ce of th e work of Adam Smith in
the w ide field of Poli tical E con omy , sin ce his t ime so importan t a bran ch of Pol it icalScien ce
But among the great works that have been wri tten on governmen t , there is n on e
that affords a more strikin g example of the influen ce that one book can make upon the
polit ical in stitution s of the world , than“ De l’Esprit des Lois , which was written in the
middle of the eighteen th cen tury . No studen t of in stitution s should fail to read carefully a work replete w i th learn in g and show ing a remarkabl e in sight in to the mean in g
and working of the English governm en t , and the fun damen tal prin ciples of civi l liberty .
He may be just ly con sidered thefoun der of the historical school of modern t imes w hich
comprises amon g it s t eachers man y of th e most learn ed and bril lian t men who have been,
or are now ,con n ected w ith leadin g un iversities in America and Europe . He saw in tui
t iv ely that we must in terpret laws by history, and in terpret history by c ustom . The
influen ce of hi s Opin i on s can be traced throughout the ‘ Federalist,
’ that excel len t series ofcommen tari es on the American con st itution ,
which,i t has been wel l observed by Chan
c ellor Ken t , i s equally admirable in the depth o f i ts w isdom , the comprehen siven ess of
i ts Vi ews the sagaci ty of its reflect ion s, and the freshn ess, patriot i sm ,can dour, simplicity ,
and eloquen ce w ithw hi ch its truths are uttered and “recommended .
” Ham i lton,Madison ,
and the other authors of the con stitut ion were deeply imbued by the ideas of the Fren chwriter . H istory must place him amon g the great architects of political systems . H i s
ideas have in spired the statesmen of Fran ce in establi shing their presen t parliamen tary
sy stem ,and have had their influence on the polit ical in sti tution s of German y . Mon t
esqu ieu ,
” says an em in en t Fren ch writer, 1 has l eft us somethin g more than precepts , he
has left a method which en ables us to develop his thought and apply it to con tin gen ciesthat he could n ot foresee . He exercised a deep and perman en t influen ce in his own time
,
and i s full of teachin g for ours . H i s n ame is assoc iat ed w ith man y of the most excellen treforms which this cen tury has seen in Fran ce, and he is the represen tative of the Fren chspirit in all i ts clearn ess, breadth , gen erosity and w i sdom .
I can well rem ember that the di scussion of the un ion of the Briti sh North Am erican
provin ces was actually left for years to theori sts in the press,or was ch iefly valued b e
cause it gave opportun i t i es for bri lli an t rhetorical flashes in legislative halls . But the
day cam e when thi s theoret ical problem had to be solved to meet the pol it ical ex i
gencies of old Can ada,and the con federation of the provin ces became a real ity . Indeed ,
A lbert Sorel in his L ife of Montesquieu in the series of Great French Writers , p. 1 79 .
14 JOHN GEORGE BOURI NOT
in a coun try l ike this , where the people are of essen tially prac t ical in stin ct s in al l mattersaffectin g governmen t , the man who shou ld alway s remain a mere doctrinaz
'
re or theoristwould soon become w ithout weight or stren gth in the commun i ty where he lives but
whoever brings to the pract ical di scussion of the question s o f the day soun d kn owl edge,which is based on the experien ce of the past , and shows he can wel l adapt prin ciples
drawn from the great storehouse of soun d polit icalsci en ce to the difficult ies of the day ,he w i l l be foun d invaluable as a leader of men and t he archi tect of in sti tuti on s .
No human in sti tution s are perfect , but “an in creasing purpose must always dis
t ingu ish the developm en t of governmen t , an d the thoughts of statesmen must be w iden
ed w ith the proces s of the sun s ,” by the experien ces of the past as set forth in emphat ic
and pregn an t sen ten ces by histori cal and political writers .
I have thought it n ecessary to give these in troductory remarks to show the import
an ce that a study of Pol it i cal Scien ce ought to assume in al l in stitu t ion s o f high standing
I hope they w i l l be abl e from year t o year to obtain the services of able men , ready to
devote themselves to the elucidation o f the various subjects to which I have referred .
Lectures addressed to classes in the un iversities by men engaged in the practi cal pursu its
of law and pol itics , by men whose opin ion s are Valued by their coun t rymen for theirexperien ce and l earn ing , should always supplemen t the labours of the regular professors
and lecturers , who deal main ly w i th prin ciples and theories of the schools .
This is the practice of the famous E col e des Scien ces Pol it iques of Pari s i t is muchto be des ired that the Can adian un iversit ies should obtain the services of the same class
of men ,who may be w i lling from tim e to time to give them the b enefit of their kn owledge
and experien ce .
A s I have endeavoured very imperfec tly to show you in the course of this lecture ,there is a rich field o f s tudy and research before you . We l ive in tim es of great in tel
lectual act ivity,
-
and Can adi an s must keep pace w i th the resul ts of thought throughout the
world. The fac i liti es that are open to us for exten ding our kn ow ledge of other coun tries
and of learn ing valuable l esson s from the rich storehouse of their experi en ce , are verysuperior to those possessed by the pi on eers and foun ders of this coun try . I n the times o f
slow commun i cati on w i th the great outside world , in the absen ce of electric telegraphs
and daily mai ls , they were at a great dis advan tage compared w ith u s , who kn ow every
day what i s passing in the m ost distan t places of the globe . Wi th our un iversities,col
l eges and schools , affording so gen erous an education in al l bran ches of n ecessary study ,w ith numerous l ibraries established in allthe prin cipal cen tres of thought and activity ,
w ith scien t ific and l iterary soci eties s tartin g up everywhere , w ith an able an d en terpris
ing n ewspaper press , circulating vari ed kn owl edge of matters of curren t and immediate
in terest , young men now -a-days have opportun it ies for becomin g useful ci tizen s whichs tan d out in remarkabl e con trast w ith the condition of thin gs even half a cen tury ago .
Still , in the early days of trial and struggl e in this coun try , there were men of remarkabl e
abil ity and kn owl edge , possessed of a thorough pract ical comprehen sion of the n ecessiti es
o f the t imes , and there was always w ith the mass of the people that strong common
sen se,so characteristic o f Englishmen ,
which en ables them to tide successfully throughdifficult ies and crises , and w ithout which no l earn ing or kn ow ledge can real iz e great
resul ts in a coun try l ike ours . The men who l aid the foundation s of our social and pol i t
ical structure,a goodly edifice , whatever some doubting Can adian s may say , were men
JOHN GEORGE BOURINOTON POLITICAL SCI ENCE .
o f soci al l ife and destroy the perman en cy of the family, the true basis of the happin ess
and security of every commun ity that aim s at real greatn ess . This is but one in stan ce
out of man y that I could cite to prove to you how n ecessary i t i s to study thoroughly and
con scien tiously the soci al as w ell as the polit ical con dit ion s of commun it ies , in order toaccumulate those experien ces which may assist us in mouldin g and perfectin g our ow n
in st itution s . There i s n o in stitut ion or law that w e may adopt,that w i l l n ot have som e
efiect upon our social and and political developmen t .
In con clusion I can on ly say we have much to look forward to in thi s coun try if w eare w is e an d pruden t in profit in g by the best experien ce of other peoples , and in avoidingthe quicksan ds in to which in discreet pol itician s and dangerous theoristswould ever andan on push Can ada . Twen ty-two years have passed sin ce w e en t ered on the n ew
political era which Con federation has open ed up to this Domin ion , and we have achieved
an en couraging amoun t of success through the sagacity, perseveran ce and hopefuln ess of
our statesm en , and the industry , en ergy and patriotism of the people who have faith in
this coun try and its future . We have achieved this success through the exertion s of two
races , differen t in language , in rel igion ,and in certain in st itution s , but equal ly all ied by
the t i es of a common in teres t . The one can gain much from the other the en ergy , the
common sen se and the forbearan ce characteristi c of En gl i shmen, can well be associated
w ith the brill ian cy , the ardour, and the sanguin e temperamen t of the Fren ch race . But
whatever may be their poin t s of differen ce,a study of in stitut ion s w i l l teach them both
to value the great prin ciple s and maxims on which rest the foun dation s of Engli sh
liberty , and which i llustrate the pages of Englan d’s n oblest history and i t i s from the
love of her people for home and soci al purity,from their assertion of free thought and
free speech , and from their en couragemen t of polit ical moral ity , above al l other things ,that Can adian s can best gather true in spirat ion and soun d example , which w il l en able
them to steer the ship of state in to a haven where it w i l l rest secure from the storms thatever threaten it s safety .
— Sai l on , 0 Sh ip of State ?Sai l ou, 0 Un ion ,
strong and great !Human ity, with allits fearsW ith allthe hopes of future years ,Is hanging breath less on thy fate.
Fear not each sudden sound and shock ,’Tis of the wave and not the rock ;’Tis but the flapping of the sai l ,And not a rent made b y the gale !I n Sp ite of rock and tempes t’s roar,I n Sp ite of false l ights on the shore ,Sai l 0 11 , nor fear to breast the sea 1Our hearts , our hopes , our prayers , our tears ,Our fai th triumphant o’
er our fears,Are allW ith thee,— are allw ith thee.
SECTION I I , 1 889 .1 7 TRANS . ROY . Soc . CANADA.
11 .
— The Car tography of the Gulf of St . Lawrence, from Cartier to Champlain .
By W . F . GANONG, AM .
(Presented by D r. George Stewart, May 8 ,
At i ts meet ing in May, 1 887 , the presen t wr iter had the honor to lay before thi sSoci ety , a paper on the first voyage of Jacques Cartier to Can ada . At that t ime theimportan ce of the bearin g of this voyage upon the subsequen t cartography of the Gulfhad not become eviden t to me
,but a more careful and comprehen sive s tudy sin ce then of
this in conn ection wi th o ther early voyages and w ith early maps , has made i t clear th at iti s of the greatest importan ce . The first “
voyage of Cartier to the Gulf quiteovershadows ,from a cartographical poin t of v iew his later on es , and indeed all of those of th e Sixteen thCen tury . It s resul ts largely moulded the maps of thi s region for n early eighty years and
the various discrepan ci es and errors of those maps , as well as the differen ces of opin ionand in accuracies of some l ate writers
,have been due to a lack of that true in terpretation
of Cartier’s course which i s the key to the s ituation . So marked and importan t is this,
that I may be pardon ed for repeating w ith greater emphasis what is in reality the text ofthis paper —The correct interpretation of Cartier
’
s first voyage is the key to the cartography ofthe Gulf for almost the subsequen t century . This statemen t I hop e to substant iate in thefollowing pages .
In order that we may have a conn ected view of the whole subj ect , I must ask you tobriefly review Cartier
’s i tin erary as set forth in the paper 1 referred to . In this conn ect ion it w il l be n ecessary to ment ion the differen t and sometimes incon si sten t Views heldb y several writers , sin ce these have directed the writ ings on the subject .
VOYAGES OF CARTIER AND CONTEMPORARIE S .
A .
— Cartier’
s First Voyaye.
Cart ier, w ith two ships , l eft St . Malo on April2otb ,1 5 34 . He made land at Cape
Bon avista, May loth , and after spen ding som e days in Catal in a Harbor, visited Fun k
Islands to provision his ships w ith the birds there . He en tered the Strait of Bell e Isle
early in Jun e , and coasted along the Labrador shore as far as the presen t Cumberland
1 Tran s. Roy. Soc. Canada, 1887, vol. iv . sec. 11. pp. 121-1 36.
-1889. 8
1 8 GANONG ON ST. LAWRENCE
Harbor,to the west o f Sheeat ica Bay,1 visiting and
.
n aming several harbors on the way .
At Cumberland Harbor he turn ed back and retraced hi s steps to the port of Brest , th epresen t O ld Fort Bay .
2 Then ce , on Jun e 1 5 th ,he crossed to Newfoundland, making land
in the Vicin ity of th e presen t Poin t Rich . From this place he coasted to the south-west,
visit in g and n aming several bays and capes,un ti l he reached the presen t Cape Anguille ,
which he sighted in a s torm on Jun e 24th,and n amed Cape St . John .
Up to this poin t , Carti er’s n arrat ive i s s o clear that there n ever has been any doubt ,
except in a few min or in stan ces , as t o the course he followed . From thi s poin t un t il hereached Bay Chaleur , however, there has been great differen ce of Opin ion as to his route .As traced in the presen t writ er’s former paper, i t i s as follow s
Leaving Cape Anguille , he came n ext day to the Bird Rocks and later to Brion Is l and ,al l of which he describes fully and faithfully . Then he approached North Cape (cap da
D aulphin ) of the Magdalen e Islands, and on the 27 th of the mon th coasted along thewestern side of the larger of the group , un ti l En try Islan d was reached, one cape of whichwas n amed St . Peter . The presen t Deadman
’s I sland,off to the w est , was n amed Allez ay .
The course was n ow laid to the west , and he sai led forty leagues before again com ing in
sight of lan d . Ou the morn ing of Jun e 30 th , he saw to the south-west what appeared tobe two isl ands , but what proved lat er to be really firm land lying SS E . and on
which was a cape n amed Capei
Orlean s . He en tered the mouth of a beautiful but shallowr iver which he n amed River of Boats (ripuiere de Barcques) and describes very fully the
shores and banks of the region . The land , l ike two islands , was the high land n ear G'rren
ville ; the River of Boats was Richmond Bay ; Cape Orlean s was Cape Kildare ; and the
Cape of the Savages ,3 V isited and n amed by him l ater, was the presen t North Cape .
A fter landing at the latt er poin t , he coasted n in e or t en l eagues along the land, finding
1 Allwriters h itherto have con s idered Sheeat ica Bay to b e the Port of Jacques Cartier, and a smal l in let to theeast of the mouth of the latter (B . da Petit Pene) to b e the R iver of St. James . They are so marked in the excel lentFrench and Engl i sh charts of the last cen tury , wh ich g ive both Cart ier’s and the modern names. The reason formy v iew is, thatCart ier describes St . James as a very large river, bonne ripuiere plus grande .
” Th i s would b y no
mean s apply to the smal l in let referred t o, b ut it would apply wel l to Sheeatica Bay wh ich on the charts doeslook l ike a river. Again ,
the Port of Jacques Cartierwas clearly a harbor, not a river, and Cumberland Harborwould b e more l ikely to b e Spoken of as a harbor than Sheeat ica Bay . See good modern charts of the coast. I t i sworth noticing b y the way , that Kingsford, in his H istory of Canada ( 1. suggests that “ Sheeat ica i s anIndian i z ed surv ival of Jacques Cartier, an improbable suppos i t ion it seems to me .
2 There i s some ques t ion as to the exact local ity of Brest. Thus H ind (Labrador, i i . Packard (Bul l . Am.
Geog . Soc. xx . Rev . M . Harvey (Ency. Brit. x iv. 1 77 ) say that Bres t was on Bradore Bay , a few m i lesfrom B lane Sablon ,
and that it was founded in 1500 (Packard) , or 1520 (Harvey ) . Yet Cartier’s narrative i s quiteclear on th i s po int. Bradore Harbor he en tered and cal led its islands the Islettes . He mentions no town there .
B rest, he says, was ten leagues from the Islettes . The conclus ion must b e that Cart ier’s Port of Bres t was real lyOld Fort Bay , and that the town of Brest, if on Bradore Harbor (where its ruins are said to he) must e i ther havebeen founded later, or el se was unknown to Cartier. The latter can h ardly b e credited.
3 It seems probable that th is word surv ives , in an altered form,in Cape Tormentine on the Stra it of Northum
berland coast of New Brunsw ick . During the earl y part of the seventeenth century a large number of maps werepub l i shed in Europe, wh ich followed Champla in’s 1612 or 1613 map, ne ither of wh ich showed any trace of PrinceEdward Island. Some of these retained Cartier’s names, wh ich , of course , had as a consequence to b e on the
main land. Later, however, Prince Edward Island was added to them (fol low ing , no doub t , Champla in’s 1632map) , b ut natural ly the n ames were left where they were and not removed t o t he i sland. Hence R iver of
Boats ,” Cape of the Savages,
”et c.
, appear on some maps on the New Brunsw ick coast, even w i th Prince EdwardIsland clearly shown . De Lae t
’s map of 1632 i s a consp icuous example, the name C de Sauvages be ing appl ied
b y him to Po int Escumenac and“ Fleue de Barques to Ba ie Verte. Som
‘
e maps of the last century have “ C of
2 0 GANONG ON ST. LAWRENCE
a recen t map .
1 The course among theMagdalen e Isl ands does n ot differ very greatly from
that of the presen t writer,
2 but the lon g sai l to the west is made to take Cartier toMiramichi Bay which , as usual , i s called the Bay of Sain t Lun ario . Then ce he i s made
to go southward to Ri chibucto River , which is made the River of Boats , and then ce
n orth again to Bay Chaleur . This i s about the course which is given also in the Quebec
L i terary and H istor ical Society’s reprin t of Cart ier ’s voyages (Vol . I , pp. 1 0,
I t i s
remarkable how persi st en tly he has been sen t to the main land and kept away from Prin ceEdward Islan d . This i s n o doubt because it has n ot been remembered that his direction swere invariably not
_
for the true but for the magn etic meridian . Forty leagues true westwould take him to the New Brun sw i ck shore, but forty leagues magn etic west wouldtake him t o Prin ce Edward Island . A s to whether the in terpretation o f the course as
giyen by the presen t writer i s con s isten t and clear , or, in other words, the correct one, hemust l eave others to judge .
Cartier, l eaving his ships at Port Dan iel , exp lored in his boats to the head of BayChaleur, and,
of course,did not find the passage to the wes t which he came to seek . On
July 1 2 th he left his an chorage and coasted to the east,
3 l eaving so clear a n arrative
that he is easily fol lowed to Graspé Bay . On the 25 th he sailed away again to the eastn orth-east for about twen ty leagues, which brought h im to An ticost i . He followed the
lan d to the eastward,givin g us a clear accoun t of his progress . To E as t Cape he gave
the n ame of Cape St . Loys (or A lu ise , i .e . St . Louis ) , and to Fox Poin t that of Cap de
Memorancy .
4 He kept on to oppos ite North Poin t , and n amed the strai t between An t icostiand Labrador the Strait of St . Peter . H ere the laten ess of the season and other causes
made h im turn back and sail away for Fran ce . He foll owed the coast of Labrador ,Visitin g Natashquan Poin t (which he n amed Cape Th ienn ot ) ,
5 to Blan e Sablon ,and,
passing through the Strait of Bel le I sle , reached Fran c e on September 5 th .
I t is rather surprising that there has been a differen ce of opin ion as to his course
1 Carte de la Nouvel le France, pour serv ir al’E tude de l’Histoire du Canada , etc. Par P. M. A . Genest, 1875 .
2 I had not seen th i s map when my former paper was written .
3 He v is ited the presen t Wh i te Head, near Bonaventure Island, and named it Cape Prat to. Th i s name , De
Costa says , he found there ( America, i i i . imply ing that Cartier did not g ive it on th i s voyage. I quote th i shere to i l lustrate the difference of op in ion wh ich h as preva iled as to Cartier’s or h is compan ions’ prev ious knowledge of the Gulf. Many names Cartier s imply writes , w ithout saying whether he gave them or not , wh i le many
others he di stinct l y says he gave. I bel ieve that allnames on the south and west'
of the Gulf used by h im he
gave h imself on th i s and h is fol low ing voy ages. Th i s was apparently D r. Koh l ’s v iew. We have no maps , noev idence of any k ind to show that th i s reg ion was at allknown e ither to h im or to his compan ions , wh i le h isactions and language throughout are those of an en t ire s tranger. On the east coas t of Newfoundland, however,and poss ibly in the Strait of Belleisle , some of the names were used before his time. Bonav i sta and Chasteauxappear to b e among these. Compare America, iv . 72
, las t paragraph . As to the orig in of the word Fratto, DeCosta states ( America,
i i i . 1 86 ) that A lbert de Prato , a priest and mathemat ician,was on the coast of New
foundland w ith Jean Rut in 1 527 . He i s probably the man referred to in Hakluyt ( i i i . 167 ) in the narrative of avoyage of 1527 to the east coast of Newfoundland and Cape Breton Cartier may have known h im, and named
the cape for h im. The name must not b e confounded w ith “ Plato ,” “ Plateau or“ Flat Island,” near Po int
Peter, on the Opposite point of MalBay. The latter names were g iven on accoun t of its shape.
4 Doubtless meant for Montmorency. Th is was the name of one of the noblest old fam il ies of France. At th i stime, Anne, Duke of Montmorency , a brave and i l lustriousman , was he ld in h igh honor in France b y Franc i s I ,and it was probably in his-honor that Cart ier named the cape. (See E ncyclopwdia Britann ica, xv i
5 Most writers con s ider C. Thiennot to b e Mount Joli, a l ittle to the east of Natashquan Poin t. Yet Cart iertel ls us di stinctly that C. Thiennot was a
“ low cape.
” Why , then , seek to place the name on Mount Jol i ? I t
may have been just at the mouth of Natashquan River.
CARTOGRAPHY TO CHAMPLAIN . 2 1
after leavin g Gaspe, for the n arrat ive is here perfectly clear . Yet more than on e writer
has cl aimed that in stead of crossing to An ti costi he sailed up the St . Lawren ce to n ear
Poin t des Mon ts . This is the view t aken by Abbé Laverdiere in M . Grénest’
s map .
1I n
the latter the course,as marked , follows the curve of the n orth shore of the Gaspepen
in sula to n ear the presen t River St . An n e , then cross es to n ear Seven Islands , recrosses to
n ear Matan e , then run s n early direct to the n orth of An ticosti , and along the Labradorcoast to the Strait of Belle Isle . This View i s taken al so by the very courteous author of ashort review 2
of my paper on Cartier ’s first voyage . I cann ot help bel ieving,however,
that the latter has n ot examin ed the eviden ce in the light of fact s,but has rather based it
upon supposit ion . The chief reason advan ced by the reviewer was,practical ly , that
Cartier would n ever have gon e to the east alon g An ticosti , when the great St . Lawren cewas open ing to him what would seem to him to be the western passage for which he wass eeking . It is n ot in the l ight of what Carti er would have don e w ith a modern chart of
the Gulf b efore h im ,but in the l ight of what h e, w ith his imperfect knowledge or wan t
of kn owledge , did do , that we are to read the history of his voyage . This matter i s so
clear that argumen t i s hardly n eeded . There are at l east three distin ct l in es of eviden ceshowin g that he did n ot go up the St . Lawrence on this voyage
,but to the eastward
aroun d An t icost i .
The n arrative it self i s quite clear on this poin t . I t says that he sailed away to
the east-n orth-east ; that he thought he w as crossin g the mouth of a great bay , the coast
of which he could see from his ships ; that the lan d he approached lay south-eas t and
north-west, and that the pass age across was twen ty leagues . This is al l unmistakeable .
The “Relation origin al e reads as follows : “
Le landemain ,xxv e jour dudit moys , le
Ven t v yn t b on et appareillasmes du hable ; et n ous estan s hors de ladit e ryuiere, fismes
porter al’E st Nordest,pour ce que depui s la terre de ladite riuiere estoit l a terre rengée,
faisan t une b aye eu man iere de demy eercle,don t anyon s v eues de toute la couste de n oz
n auires E t en faisan t la routte, v ynmes querre ladi t e terre qui gisoit Suest et Nornoyst ,e paraige de laquelle ilpouoy t auoir de distance, depuys ladite riuiere , en uyron xx
l ieues .” The edit ion of 1 5 9 8 i s less clear here as el sewhere , but its mean ing is the same .
H i s distances and direct ion s from his landfall on An t icost i to E ast Cape , then ce aroundand up the n orthern coast of An t icosti , are quite correct and clear
,and l eave no doubt
that he reached North Cape and wen t but very little beyond it . Now ,as to why he
thought he was crossing the mouth of a bay, the whole coast o f which he could see fromhis ship
,when crossin g to An ticosti , I can on ly suggest that he was deceived by fog
banks .3 Why is it,I may ask, that the position of the Bay of Fundy i s represen ted by
sol id lan d upon n early every kn own map up to the time of Lescarbot Navigators and
1 See an tea, p. 20 , note 1 .
2 See Le Canada-Francai s, i. 689-690 .
3 I n the same manner, in modern times , Sir James Ross, in Lancas ter Sound, bel ieved he saw moun tain swhere there were but fogs , and dep icted th i s sound as land- locked, wh i lst it has the w idest open water in t he
whole world.
” J. G. Koh l , Col l . Ma ine Hi st. Soc.,vol. 1, 1869 . The reports of lands seen at a distance in these
waters Arctic Ocean ,near A laska) should be made w ith great circumspect ion ,
where clouds and fog-bank s
are con stan t ly appearing on the hori z on ,and are so very decei v ing,” etc.
, and examples of such decep t ion s .
W . B . Gi lder, I ce-Pack and Tundra, p. 1 00 . My friend, D r. Benjamin Rand, of Cambridge, who has sai led inschooners in the Gulf and R iver St . Lawrence, tells me that the reg ion we are con sidering i s a famous one forits m irages .
2 2 GAN ONG ON ST. LAWRENCE
explorers passed it,and al though it was almost certain ly kn own t o the fishermen ,
the
explorers did not see its en tran ce .
(2 ) I n his second voyage he passed between An ticosti and Labrador (as no one has
ever doubted ) , and, roundin g the wes tern end of Ant icost i,saw the moun tain s of Notre
Dame to the south . And by the two n at ives whom he had taken from Gaspe the year
before w e were told that i t was a part of the southern coast , and that there was an i s lan d
to the south of which is the way to go from Honguedo Gaspe] to Can ada .
” This
was n amed the Is land of A ssumption . Cartier cl early shows that he had n o suspicion
previously that this was an i sl and,for on his first voyage he had n ot gon e far enough
beyon d North Cape of An ticost i to see the land to the south . Had he gon e up the river
south of the i slan d the previous year,as he was n ow passing along the n orthern side , he
would n ot have n eeded to be told by the n atives that the lan d he had sailed all around
was an i sland . But as he had n o t gon e up the river south of the island,but supposed i t
t o be all lan d , the in format ion that i t was an i sl and w as n ews to him .
But the most con clusive eviden ce of al l i s that Carti er t ells us , in so many words ,that he did n ot discover the southern en tran c e 0 11 his first voyage . I n return in g towards
Fran ce in May ,1 536 , he passed down the St . Lawren ce directly to Gaspe, which
passage,” he says , had n ot before that t ime been discovered .
” 1 Nothing could be more
con clusive upon thi s poin t .
13.
— Cartier’
s Second Voyage.
In hi s second voyage, Cartier l eft St . Malo w i th three ships , on May 19 th , 1 535 ,
and he did no t succeed in reaching Newfoun dlan d un til July 7th . He Visit ed Funk
Is lands , and, en ter in g the Strait of Bel le Isl e , waited at Blan e Sablon un ti l th e 26 th for
the arrival of the two ships which had been separated from hi s in a storm . On the 29 th
he sailed to the west, and twen ty leagues beyon d the port of Bres t (now O ld Fort Bay)
passed two i slands which proj ec ted beyond the others in to the sea . These were n am ed
St . W ill iam ’s I sl an ds, and would appear, from the distan ce given ,
to be in the Vic in i ty o f
what is tod ay cal led St . Augustin Chain . Twelve leagues further he found other islan ds ,which he n amed St . Martha’s . Among them
,to the n orth , was a bay w ith many islands
and apparen tly good harbors . This description appl ies well to the i slands at Great Mecat in a, to the n orth of which i s just such a bay as Cartier describes . Fifteen l eagues fur
ther brought him to an other group of i slands , which he n amed St . Germain , the descript ion and position o f which would pl ace them at the St . Mary ’s Islan ds or those at Cape
Whittl e . This i s confirmed by the fact that his course after leav in g them was al ong acoast which ran east and west , a poin t to th e south- east . Seven teen and a half l eagues
further he met w ith other i sl ands , but gave them n o n am e . Seven leagues beyond this
he came to Cape Thien not , to which he had given that n ame on his first voyage . This
w as w i thout doubt the presen t Natashquan Poin t . Some seven l eagues or more further
on he en tered a harbor among four isl ands which stretch out in to the sea. Thi s he n amed
St . Nicholas Harbor ; i t appears to be the Pachachibou (or Pashasheeb u ) of to-day .
Passasmes iusques a Honguedo [i.e. Gaspe] , lequel passage n’auoit pas cydenan t esté descouuert .” Bref
Récit., p. 54, ed. 1863.
2 The directions are magnet ic and not true, of course.
2 4 GANONG ON ST. LAWRENCE
the 2 1st he con tinued on to the eastward un til he came in sight of An t icosti , and kn ewthere could be n o passage on that coast . Turn ing to the west again ,
he return ed to Seven
Islands , and on the 24th en tered the mouth of the river proper. From this t ime un t il hi s
return to the Gulf on his way to Fran ce in thespring his movemen t s do n ot con cern our
presen t subject . But in May ,coming down the river , he passed directly down to Gaspe
by the passage which had n ot before that been discovered,wen t n ear Cape Fratto (the
presen t White Head ) , and crossed then ce to Brion Island . He appears to have coasted
along the w est , and afterwards the east of the Magdalen s , from which he wen t1 to
Cape Lorrain e, in Cape Breton I slan d . This cape was in deg . N. l at . and three
quarters of a degree to the n orth he saw an other cape,which he n am ed St . Paul . He
does n ot give us sufficien t data for determin ing the position of these place s ; if Cap e St .
Paul be our I sle St . Pau l ,2Cape Lorrain e could hardly be the presen t Cape St . Lawren ce,
but must have been s ome poin t to the south of it,perhaps at Gran d An se or Chetican .
3
On Jun e 4th he saw the coast of Newfoundland, and en tered a b arber which he n amed
Harbor of the Holy Spirit ,” which may have been La Poile Bay . Thence he wen t to St .
Peter’s Islands , and afterwards passing Cape Race (Cap de Raz e) to Harbor Rougnoz e
(undoubtedly Ren ew se Harbor of to-day and from this place laid his course for Fran ce,where he arrived on July 6 th ,
1 536 .
C.
— C’artier
’
s Third Voyage.
We have but few particulars of Cartier’s course on his third voyage . A s given by
Hakluyt , he left St . Malo May 23rd,1 540 , and after a long
,stormy voyage en tered the
Harbor of Carpun t , in Newfoundlan d , and on August 2 3rd,reached the Port of St . Croix .
Ou September 2nd,he sen t two ships back to Fran ce , but the n arrative does not tell us
when he himself w en t , nor by what route .
D .
— Roberval’
s Voyage.
In the accoun t of the voyage of Roberval , we are told that it was by way of St .
John ’s , Newfoun dlan d , in We have a very fragm en t ary accoun t of Roberval ’s
voyage , and i t con tain s n othing of value in con n ection w i th our presen t dis cussion .
1 A s M. D’
Avez ac po ints out (Par i s edition of 1863 of Bref Récit , p. 64) some vers ions read we named th i scape,” in stead of we reached th i s cape.
”
2 D r. Koh l (D i scovery of Maine , p. 349 ) and De Costa (America, iv . 5 3 and 6 7) cons ider them to b e the
same, b ut th ink the name was g iven before Cartier, as it appears in th i s reg ion upon at least two maps beforeCartier’s voyages— that of Maiel lo of 1527 and of Viegas of 1534 . But on the former C. St . Paulo ” i s on New
foundland, near St . Pierre, wh i le on Cape Bre ton i s a Rio de St . Paulo .
” On the latter “ S . Paulo ” i s on the
strai t be tween the i sland marked Cape Breton and the main land. I t does n ot seem at allcertain , then , that theS. Paulo ”
of these maps was th e same as the“Sainct Paul ” of Cartier, and it appears l ikely that Cartier gave
the name anew w i thout know ledge or notice of its prev ious appl ication in th i s reg ion .
3 Cartier says at Cape Lorraine :“ There i s low land, and seems to b e the entrance to a river ; but there i s no
harbor of any value.
” Th i s may help to locate it to one fam i l iar w i th the local ity . According to the charts, thedescription m igh t apply to e ither of these local ities. Near the latter are two b i l ls, and feet h igh , and no
heigh t i s marked at Grand An se.
‘1 See Hak luyt, ( i i i. 155 ) where it i s cal led the next harbour unto the northward of Cape Rase.
” A l so 0 p.
cit , p. 239,al so Map of A valon accompany ing Murray
’s Geo log ical Survey Newfoundland, London , 1881 . A lsoWh itb ourne’
s D i scourse and D i scovery of New-found- land, 1622, p. 53 , where “ Harbor of Reh ouse i s said to bes ix leagues north of Cape Race.
5 Hakluy t’s accofmt i s now known to b e erroneons in certain particulars. Cf. De Costa, America, iv. 5 6, 64-66.
CARTOGRAPHY TO CHAMPLAIN. 2 5
E .— Allefonsce
’
s Cosmographie.
There is but on e 1 other con temporary accoun t of the Gulf, or of voyages to it , whichthrows any light upon our subject . .I ean Allefon sc e who accompan ied Roberval to Can ada
as his pilot in 1 542 , wrote awork on cosmography, which is preserved in manuscript in theNation al Library at Pari s . It has n ever been reprin ted in full , but the parts relating to
this region have be en tran sl at ed and published by Hakluytf’
Murphy 3 and De Cost a.
4
Hakluyt’
s accoun t is prefaced by a t itle which reads : Here followeth the course from
Bel le I sle, Carpon t , and the Grand Bay in Newfoundland up the River of Can ada for the
space o f 230 leagues , observed by Iohn Alphon sce o f Xanctoigne ch iefe Pilote to Mon sieur
Roberval , Thi s would imply that Allefon sce actually made“the voyage along the
coast himself, and thi s receives some confirmat ion from the statement of Le Clercq (in his
“ Et abliss emen t de l a men tion ed b y Murphy and De Costa , that Roberval sen t
Allefon sce along the Labrador coas t to search for a western passage . Thi s statemen t i s
also made by Champlain .
5 He may have made the voyage , or he may n o t,but there i s
very little, if anything , in his accoun t of the Gulf, which is n ot in the n arrat ives of Carti er ,and w hich , therefore, could n ot have been derived directly from Cart ier himself (wi th
whom ,of course , he had acquain tan ce) , or from Cartier ’s maps . He has certain ly used
Cartier’s n ames almost exclusively, and if he did make a journ ey over the region he
describes , n amed n o places himself. The on ly differen ces between his place-names andCartier’s are as follows — He uses the n ame Belle Isl e for the isl and n orth of Newfound
land , stil l se-called , which Carti er had n amed St . Katherin e ’s . He us es the n ame Grand
Bay for the Strait of Belleisle, which Cartier had called Bay o f Castles , but extends the
term to in clude the eastern part of the Gulf also . He seems to apply the term Bay of
Castles to Cartier ’s Port of Castl es . He men tion s the Isl e s de la Demoisel le , 36 l eagues
west -south-west of Blan e Sablon and 1 8 leagues n orth- east of Cape Thiennot . There are
no i slands exactly correspondin g to this position,but the group at the presen t Cape
Whittl e, n ear St . Mary ’s I slands,seems to come n earest to them .
‘3 It w i l l be remembered
that in this vicin i ty Cartier n am ed a group St . Germain .
Allefonsce , in speaking of An t i costi , always calls i t A scen sion ,in stead of Assump
tion , as Cartier n amed it . He uses also the n ames Moun tain s of Notre Dame and Capeof the Moun tain s of Notre Dame, by the latter mean ing probably Moun t Louis .7 Carti er
undoubtedly gave these n ames , for he first s aw them and described them both on
August l5 th .
s Allefon sce uses the n ame Bay of Molues or Graspé ,9 which Carti er does
1 Hak luyt ( i i i . 168—1 70 ) g ives an accoun t of the voyage of M . Here and others to Newfoundland and CapeBreton , in 1536. Hannay (H ist. of Acadia, p. 21 ) th inks they were on the west coas t of Newfoundland. Theaccount conta in s no geograph ical information .
2 Voyages, i i i . 291—294 of 1 810 ed.
3 Voyage of Verraz ano, New York , 18 75 , pp. 38 , 39 .
1 America, iv . 69, 70 , 74
-76.
5 Laverdiere’
s ed. of h is works , p. 692.
6 I t i s not unl ikely that there i s some m i sprin t in Hakluyt here. Unfortunately there are many such , andone should never depend upon h is work in mat ters of detai l when h e can have the orig inal s before him. I n the
case of th i s part of Allefonsce’s work I have been forced to use Hak luyt, as I can find no other vers ion whatever in
the l ibraries near Boston .
7 See antea, p. 23 .3 See post. p. 58 .
9The earl iest use of the word of wh ich I can find any record.
Sec. I I , 1889 . 4.
2 6 GANONG ON ST. LAWRENCE
n ot , applying it apparen tly to the presen t MalBay .
1Cartier ’s Honguedo he changes to
Ognedoc (on his map Unguedor) , and describes very faithfully un der thi s n ame Gaspe
Harbor . He uses the n ame Seven Islands , to which Cartier at first gave the n ame of
Round Islands . But Carti er himself afterwards called them Seven Isl ands (sept ysles)in the same n arrat ive in which he called them Round Isl an ds . Allefon sce’
s description
of the river does not con cern us at presen t , and his referen ce to Isle St . .I ohn-
w i l l . b e
con sidered further on .
3 A complet e l i st of Cartier ’s place-n ames, for use in the study of
the description s of maps to foll ow ,w i l l be found at the end of thi s paper .
F .— Ca7'tier
’
s Previous Knowledge.
An importan t quest ion conn ec ted w i th Cartier ’s Voyages , especi al ly his first , i s
What previous kn owl edge had he of the region he was about to explore How much of
his course was real exploration,and how much merely revisi ting places kn own to him
What maps or other records had he to aid him
A s to maps,we have n o kn owl edge that he had any . No map is kn own to us which
gives the topography of the Gulf in a recogn izable form prior t o those which show his
explorat i on s . It i s quit e certain ,as Dr . Dean e has shown ,
4 that the Oab ots left maps
show ing their exploration s . I t i s thought that the outl in e of the coast in this region on
La Cosa’s map of 1 5 0 0 was taken from them . Some writers have thought that John
Cabot , in his first voyage in 149 7 , circumn avigated the Gulf,5 a View which w il l have to
be al luded to again “
; but , if he did so ,n o map kn own to us down to 1 5 34 shows any trace
whatever of it . John Denys,of B onfleur, i s said to have made a map of the Gulf in
1 5 08 , but if i t ever exi sted at al l , i t produced n o influen ce on l ater on es . Several maps
prior to 1 5 34 do show ,howev er, _
v ery distin ctly both en tran ces t o the Gulf, such as those
of Ruys ch Maiollo Ribero Verrazan o 7 and several others .
I t is hard to bel ieve that Carti er was ign oran t of the en t rance between Cape Bretonand Newfoun dlan d 8 (w e kn ow he had previously been in Newfoun dlan d) , though he
may not have kn own whither it l ed,
9 or that it was more than a shallow bay . So far as
maps ar e con cern ed then , we kn ow of n on e which Cartier had to help him .
1° Nor do we
1 Abbé Laverdiere, in h is superb edition of Champlain ’s Works , p. 1084, po in ts out that th i s word i s an Engl i shcorrup t ion of Baie des Molues (or Morues) . I t i s hence one of the oldest names in t he Gulf.
2 See sketches of Allefonsce’s maps in America , iv. 74—77 .
3 See post, pp. 45 , 46 .
4 America,i i i .
5 Mr. Steven s (Hi storical Notes) th ink s that La Cosa’s map represents the Labrador coast of the Gulf, Newfoundland be ing entirely absent. Th i s i s not very compl imentary to the Cabots as nav igators , or else to La Cosa(whose accuracy Mr. Stevens otherw i se h igh ly pra i ses ) as amap-maker.
‘1 See post, p. 46 , note 4.
7Tracings of these may b e found in America respectively as fol lows i i i . 9 , iv . 39 , 3S and 37 .
8 I n the narrative of his first voyage, however, he speaks as if he had not known of it . (See footn ote 2 on p. 44.
of th i s paper.) The earl iest known map show ing Newfoundland as an i sland, or rather a col lection of i slands, was
Mercator’s, of
‘
1538. Cf. America, iv. 74.
9The very improbable claim of the exploration of the Gulf byA lvarez Fagundes, a Portuguese, i s referred
to in America, iv . 37 , 74.
1°The map of Gaspar Viegas , gi ven by Koh l (D i scovery of Maine, p. shows th e Gulf as a smal l, nearly
circular b ay , hav ing no connection w ith the Stra it of Bel le Isle. But it i s in MS. and bears date 1534, and we can
hardly suppose Cartier knew much more than it embodies. I t must be remembered also that the famous Gastaldi
2 8 GANONG ON ST. LAWRENCE
had a book con tain ing a map , which is agreeable to the booke of I acques Cartier , thati t is made in man er of a sea chart
,
” 1and that his two son s had it w ith them in
Can ada . Again he says — “
I can write n othing else un to you of any thing that I can
recover of the writings of Captain Iaques Cartier, my un cl e disceased,although I h ave
made s earch in all places that I could possibly in thi s Town e saving o f a certain booke
made in in man er of a sea Chart , which was drawn e by the hand of my said un cle,which is in the possess ion of m aster Cremeur, whi ch booke is passing well marked and
drawn e for all the River o f Can ada .
”Some in scription s on the maps are also quoted .
(3 ) Some of the maps w e are presen tly to con sider,show plain ly that they did n ot
copy their topography, on e from an other , but must have t aken i t from a common source .
That source could n ot have been Cartier’s n arrat ion s,for aside from the inaccess ibi lity of
the latter (n on e of them having been published un t il after the dates of some of th e mapsin question ) , the maps are too accurate and too much al ike to have been drawn from
material s which have puzzled modern histori an s who had accurate charts of the Gulf
before them . The appearan ce in these maps,also of certain words which occur in
Cartier ’s n arration s n ot as place-n ames , but as used in describing places , seems to indicatethat they are fragmen ts of in script ion s taken from some other map. Such in scription s
would hardly have been placed there by an y other than Cart i er . There can be no
reason able doubt , in the face of thi s eviden ce , that Cartier l eft maps , show ing his
exploration s .2
In con sidering the cartographical work of old explorers and map-makers , w e must
endeavour to pl ace ourselves as far as poss ible in their men tal posi tion . Sit ting in our
studies,w ith our correct modern charts before us, we cann ot , from our stan dpoin t , see
why they did many things that they did, or did not do many things they could or should
have don e . We are always in danger of in terpret ing their ac tion s from our age ratherthan from theirs . I t i s sin gular how the idea we get of the topography of a pl ace from
Visit ing it , difl‘
ers from that derived from a chart . Isl ands a short distan ce off appear j oin edtogether
,and in an archipelago we s eem to be land- locked . To kn ow an i s lan d is n ot a
pen in sula, we must go around it ; that a bay i s n o t a curved strai t,we must go to the
head of it ; that a passage is n avigable, we must go through it . Anyon e who has long
studied a map of a place of complex topography before an an t icipated Visi t,w i ll remem
ber how surprised he was to find how l itt le he kn ew of the place , and how differen t i t wasin most respects from what he had pictured . We must remember that Cartier and his com
o an ion s Visited the places w e, for the most part , s tudy the corre ct maps . Then we musttake in to accoun t other things which they experien ced , but which the maps do not show us
,
mirages,fogs and misty weather, strong curren ts , s torms . They were superstitious
,badly
educated,often carel ess in writ ing . Their maps w ere mostly made upon a very small
scale,and an importan t place, however small in exten t , had to be represen ted , so that
small i slands and rivers oft en appear vas tly larger than they should and proper proportion
is quite l ost . In short,in con siderin g these an cien t n arratives and charts
,we must
,as far
as possible,place ourselves in the posi t ion of their makers and try to Vi ew things as they
had to,no t as we do . Then by a comparison of that standpoin t w ith our own correct
kn owl edge, we may gain truthful and therefore con sisten t resul ts .
1 Allefonsce may have had t h i s or a copy to con sult when he wrote his Cosmograph ie.
1 Indeed, Dr. Koh l, (op. cit ., p. 344) con s iders th i s so certain that he takes it for gran ted without di scuss ion .
CARTOGRAPHY TO CHAMPLAIN. 2 9
11 .— The Rot z ’ Map , 1542 .
The first map that I have been able to find,which shows certain traces of Cartier’s
voyages,i s that by John Rotz , dated I t is al so the on ly map kn own to me which
shows his first voyage w ith n o trace of the later on es . I have n ot been able to find any
complete reproduc tion of this map , the origin al of which occurs in a Boke of Idrographyby John e Rotz ,
” preserved in the British museum . The an n exed sketch is copied
from that in W in sor’s America
,
” Vol . IV , p. No n ames are attached to this map and
De Costa says 3 they are om itted on the Gulf and River St . Lawren ce . On ly the western
portion of the gulf i s given in W in sor’s sketch , but Harrisse
‘1 says some French n ames are
placed on the east of Newfoundlan d . The figures and explan ation s are en tirely my own .
I n eed hardly men tion that one cann ot fol low the explan at ion s of these maps w ithout a
good modern map of the Gulf before h im .
Fm. 1 .—Map of John Rotz , 1542 .
I shall omit,un t il a l itt le l ater , a discussion of localiti es Nos . 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 , merely saying
in passing that I con sider No. 1 to be Bird Islan ds 2,Bryon Isl an d ; 3 , the n orth-west coast
of the largest of the Magdalen es ; 4, Isle Allez ay (Deadman’s Island) . I t w i ll be remem
bered that Cartier sailed from the Magdalen es to the west , i .e ., magn etic west, which would
be south of true west . There he en tered the River of Boats (Richmond Bay ) , 5 , to the n orth
of which was Cape O rlean s (Cape Kildare) , 6 , n orth of which again was Cape of theSavages (North Poin t ) , 7— all of these places being on Prin ce Edward Island .
5 He thencoasted along the n orth-west of Prin ce Edward Island
,and being in the head of North
umb erland Strait , thought himself in a bay, 8 , the Bay of St . Lun ario . North of this was
1 B arrisse (Jean et Sebas t ien Cabo t , par Henry Harrisse , Pari s , pp. 19 7-200 , mention s a MappemondeHarleyenne,
”of about 1542 , from wh ich or from the prototype of wh ich Ro t z cop ied the Newfoundland coast. I
have n ot been able to find a copy of the map (wh ich i s preserved in the Briti sh Museum in manuscript) , butB arr isse’s description would lead me to th ink it contains l i ttle that i s different from that of Rot z . Harrisse
cons iders it earl ier than the latter, and says of it cette bel le carte, la p lus rapprochée, ce semble, des découvertesaccompl ies par Jacques Cart ier,” and again , La golfe et la fleuve Saint Laurent, la pén insule Gaspés ienne ,la baie des Chaleurs, présentent des contours tres exacts pourl’époque.
2 For further descript ion of th i s map see Amer ica, iv. 82 , also B arrisse, op. cit , pp. 20 1-204.
3 America, iv. 76 .
1 Jean et Sebastien Cabot, p. 203.
5 For deta i ls see preceding pages 18 , 19, or take subsequent p. 5 7 , or the writer’s paper in these Transactions ,188 7, ii. 1 21
-1 36 .
8 0 GANONG ON ST. LAWRENCE
a cape , 9 , n ot n amed by him ,the presen t Poin t Escumenac 1 0 represent s Miramich i Bay ;
1 1, the Cap d
’
Espéran ce, the pres en t Miscon Poin t , and 1 2 , i s , of course , the Bay Chal eur .At 13 i s the exaggerated group of i slands repres en t ing Isle Bon aven ture and Percé 14 i s
GaspeBay and Harbor . At 1 5 w e have clearly what should be the southern en tran ce tothe St . Lawren ce , but which , i t w il l be remembered , Cartier crossed , thinking he saw theland ranging in a semicircl e all th e way across 1 6 would represen t the poin t n ear whichhe reached An t icost i 1 7 , E ast Cape of An ticost i , Cartier
’s St . Louis 1 8 , Cape Mon tmoren cy
and 1 9, St . Peter ’s Strait b etween the n orth of An ticost i and Labrador . Above that , the
river w iden s out , as Carti er saw ,in his first voyage, that i t was beginn ing to do when
he had to turn back . 1 6 , 1 7 , 1 8 , 1 9 would therefore represen t the eastern and n orthern
part of An t icost i .l
There i s n othing on this map to indicate that its maker had any kn owl edge of Carti er’s
second voyage,but it corresponds exce edingly wel l w ith the facts of the first n arrative .
I s i t n ot a fair in feren ce , that it follow s , at least for the most part , Cartier’s own map of
his first voyage ? Rotz has a s econd map 2 quite differen t from the first , though of the
same year , which shows the second voyage , but it has n o special in terest for us h ere .
B .
— The D auphin or Henri I I Map , 1 5 46 .
The n ext map to which I invite atten t ion here , i s one which represen ts Cartier ’s
explorat i on s better than any other of the s ixt een th cen tury . It is the se-called “ Dauphin
or Henri I I Map,
”and is now kn own to have been made by P i erre D esceliers in 1 546 .
The origin al i s a map of the whole world . I t i s reproduced by M . .I omard in his
Monumen s de la Géographie ,” Plate XIX, 1 , and from this the sketch on p. 31 is taken .
3
A l l writers un ite in praising the pain s-taking, accurate and truthful character of the
maker, and the beauty , c l earn ess and great value of the map itself.
* It i s con sidered to be
a faithful picture of the geographical kn ow ledge of Fren chmen at the time i t was made .
D esceliers was the con temporary and almost the n eighbour of Cartier , and was undoubt edly
personally famil iar w ith Car t ier ’s maps and records,even if he did n ot kn ow Cartier him
self. We proceed , then , w ith an expectation of finding in thi s map the geographical
kn ow l edge of the Gulf given to the world by Cart i er, or in other words , n early Cartier’s
own idea of i t s topography .
Let us look first at the group of i slan ds to the west of the en tran ce of the Gulf, a
group lying in t he posi t ion of the Magdalen es . A s to ye aux margaulx,there can be
n o doubt ; this i s Cartier’s own n am e appl ied to our Bird Rocks . Ye brion i s equal ly
1 B arri sse, ( op. cit . pp. 203-204) says Si on ne vo it pas l ’i le d’Ant icosti surla carte de Rotz , ilfaut attribuer
cette omi ss ion aun s imple lapsus .
” The explanation simply i s that Rot z’s map show s Cartier’s first voy age on ly ,
and it was not unti l h is second that he found Anticos t i to be an
'
island.
1 America,” i v. 83 .
1There i s also a reduced sketch in Koh l , D i scovery ofMa ine , p. 351 , and in America, iv . 85 .
4 D r. Koh l, (op. cit . p. say s of it : The map i s not on ly one of the most bri l l iant, but al so one of the most
exact and t rus tworthy p ictures of the world wh ich we have in the first part of the si xteenth century . I t g ivesaccurately allthat was known of the world in 1543, especially of the ocean , and th e outl ines of the coas ts of differen tcoun tries , and again, The author of the map must have been a we l l ins tructed, intel l igent and con sc ientiousman . Where the coasts of a country are not known to him, he so designate s them. For his represen tation of
countries recently d i scovered and already known ,he had before h im the best models and originals .”
8 2 GANONG ON ST. LAWRENCE
c lear ; it is the Brion I sland of our charts . Alez ay , I hope, has been shown to be Deadman ’s Island . What can be the large, un named islan d , other than the large i slan d of theMagdalen e group , to which , in his n arrative , s trangely en ough , Cart ier gives n o n ame
I ts posi tion and shape are both exceedingly accurate for the time, and for the hasty
survey Carti er was ab le to give it . On tw o or three maps subs equ en tly to be con sidered,
the sam e i sland is marked “ i ll e de sablees,
”and I . dareas,
” both Portuguese forms forI sle of Sands , and so Cartier described it . I n his own words
,s emble de loing que se
soin ct but terolles de sables, pour ce que se son t terres-basses et arain eusses ,
”i .e . it seemed
from afar to be l ittle hil ls of san d, for i t i s a v ery low and san dy l an d .
” How well th is
describes the great i slan d of the Magdalen es , composed as it i s of four or fiv e dist in ct rocky
islands , j oin ed by long l in es of sand dun es , everybody kn ows . Does it not seem strange inthe face of these facts , that this i slan d has been con s idered up to the presen t , to represen tPrin ce Edward Is l and B arri sse , for in stan ce, so con siders it , for in his description of
an other and very similar map by the same author,made in 1 55 0
,he says that what i s
clearly the i sl an d we are con sidering , represen t s Prin ce Edward Islan d of tod ay . I cal l
particular atten tion to this poin t,for it i s conn ected w i th one of the most importan t parts
of our presen t study .
Passing to the main l an d,we meet w ith our famili ar R. des barques , and O. dan
goulesme,
” which stands,of course
,in place of Cape O rlean s . Cape of the Savages i s n ot
n amed , but runn ing out to the n orth-east we see represen ted the reef, spoken of by
Carti er, which ran half a l eague in to the s ea. These places of course appear to be on themain l an d . It i s hardly n eces sary to repeat that this is because Prin ce Edward I slandw as n ot kn own to be an I sl and , and i s therefore shown as apart of the main land . A l l of
the topography of the Gulf in this region was given to the cartographers exclusively by
Cartier, and n o writer whatever has ever preten ded that Cartier explored or passedthrough the Strai t of Northumberland . The Bay of St . Lun ario
,really the n orthern end
of the Strait , i s c learly shown ,but we have a n ew n ame for it . It seems to read Baye
de Se . man e.” which I believe is a misprin t , and mean t to r ead
“Se . Marie .” I t w i ll be
remembered 2 that Cart ier found he w as in hi s suppos ed bay on July 2nd, but as he hadactually en tered i t on the 1 st , he n amed it after the sain t of that day , St . Leonarius . Now ,
July 2nd, i s the day of the visi t ation of th e V irgin Mary, and i t seem s as if thi s n ame
had been subst i tuted either by Carti er or the maker of thi s map , as an altern ative forSt . Lun ari o .
3
The n ame G . Soman I cann ot explain . Just n orth of it i s a triangular in den t ation
which i s probably mean t for Miramich i Bay, though it i s s eparated from St . Lun ario by
a distan ce quite unusual in these old maps . C. despoir” i s perfectly clear
,—Cartier’s
4
1 And Harrisse describes , (op. cit . p. another map b y the same author, made in 155 0, in Wh ich what i sclearly the same i sland, is called Il. des arenes .
”
2 See these Tran saction s , v . 131-1 32 .
3 An interesting poss ib i l ity i s suggested to us here . Cart ier saw M iram ich i Bay on the 2ud, and described itas a triangular bay
,ly ing north-east, but g ives it no n ame in h is narrative . He had named so many places after
saints, that we are tempted to wonder whether he did not cal l M iram ich i Bay ,Bay of St . Mary , and the name has
got di splaced on the map. I must say I have as yet seen no facts to substantiate th i s very haz y theory .
1 I have n o doubt that anyone fam i l iar w ith the old French , Span ish and Portuguese, fami l iar w ith Cart ier’snarrat ives, and who w i l l al low for the abom inably b ad spel l ing and carelessness of early cartographers, could solveallthe puz z l ing questions about these names, left unsolved in these pages.
CARTOGRAPHY TO CHAMPLAIN. 8 3
Cape of Hope , our Poin t Miscou . The n ame Terre de michalman , I shall discuss upon
an other page . La bastill e 1 i s a word of which I can find no trace either in Cartier’s
n arrative or in any other map whatever . The on ly suggestion I have to offer as to itsorigin , i s that it was given to the region at the head of Bay Chal eur by Cartier, to sign ifyhis in t en se disappoin tmen t at finding hi s hoped-for and expected western passage closedup. He n amed a cape at the en tran ce of the Bay
, Cape of Hope , because he hoped he
had foun d the passage when he foun d the broad way n arrow in g, his hoped-for freedom
to spread his sail s for the west and far Cathay changin g to close imprisonmen t , may hen o t have n amed it , in disgust , a secon d Bast ile
A s Cartier was on his way back from the head of the Bay , he saw n atives at Tracadigash Poin t , a fact commemorated by the word Sauluages on our map . St . mart ini s clear, i .e. Cartier ’s n ame for Port Dan iel ; and C. de prey was his 0 . Fratto— why so
corrupted I cann ot say . Onygn edo” was
, of course, the Indian Honguedo of Cartier ’s
voyages , the Indi an n ame for GaspeBay or the region thereabouts . The n ext word,“R.
de Memoran ty” i s certain ly a corruption of Cartier’s Cape de Memorancy,
” as w i l l b e
seen by comparin g it w i th the Mercator map of 1569 , given below ,and some others . I t
wi ll be remembered that Cart ier gave this n ame on his first voyage to a cape on the n ortheas t of An ticosti , when he thought An t icosti was a part of the main land , and on his map
represen ted it as a proj ection of the Gaspe pen in sul a . The n ames Cape St . Loys , or A lui se,and Cape Memoran cy would, therefore, be represen ted on the mainland in the maps ofCartier ’s first voyage . But curiously en ough , in all the maps that I have s een , when An ticosti has been removed from the main land , thes e two n ames have been allowed to
remain .
2 This w i l l be seen on the Mercator map given below . For the same reason St .
Peter’s Strait , really between An t icost i and Labrador , was thought by Cart ier to bebetween the main lan d and lan d to the n orth . But when An t icosti was found to be ani slan d and so marked on the maps
,the Strait of St . Peter was stil l left between the Gaspe
pen in sula and the land to the n orth of it and so i t appears in the Mercator map south
of An t icosti in stead of n orth of it . The last word on the Gaspe pen in sula on our map
s eems to me to belong to An t icost i w ith St . Peter ’s Strait , and to have been kept on themain land w ith it ; de v oille,
” appears to indicate that here Cartier turn ed to sail backhome .
Upon the Labrador coast man y of the n ames are thos e given in his second voyage.
There is n on e at the pr esen t Poin t des Mon ts . To the east of i t we see St . Jacques ,”to
which “ Lez ban ez ” may also belon g,for i t appears on Mercator’s map as “ ban c S .
.Taques , but there i s no men tion of such a place in Carti er’s n arrative . I t se ems to be
on e more of the places n amed by Carti er or marked upon his maps , but n ot referred to inhis written description s .
3 Sept ys he did n am e, and the R . doulce ” he referred to
1 The Basti le of 13ari s ( spel led also, and or ig inally Bast i l le) was used as a pri son before the time of Cartier.
The admiral Chabot, whose place was filled by the Dauph in for whom th i s mapwe are considering was made, was
impri soned there. Or the name may have been g iven to some h i l l or rock resemb l ing a cas t le2 There i s in th i s, it i s hardly necessary to say , no shadow of an argumen t that Cartier wen t up the St . Law
rence, south of An t icos t i , in his first voyage. Anticosti , l ike Prince Edward Island at a later period, was simplyadded to the cartography of the Gulf
,w ithout affecting the nomenclature on the main land of wh ich the i sland was
prev iously thought to be a part.3 Cal led banc lorm ine ”
on D iego Homem’s map of 1558. There i s a bank at Cape des Mon ts , and it i s not
imposs ible that th i s was the one referred to . Poss ibly on e of Cartier’s sh ips struck upon it on St . James’ Day.
See. 5.
8 4 GANONG ON ST. LAWRENCE
as a river of fresh water . I t was in this he saw fishes l ike horses,so that this and the
R . de chev aulx should n ot be removed from each other,but should be both given to
the same river,as they are in Mercator ’s map. M ill e R . m i llas
,
” I find n o direct referen ceto in the n arrative
,and the on ly c ircumstan ce l ikely to be conn ected w i th i t , w as his
meeting at this place w ith great n umbers of whales , E t n’es t m emoire de iamais auoir
tan t y eu de b allaynes1 que n ous Vismes cette iournee . That “
so many should become“ mille ”
and R . millas,
” should be a corruption and misprin t for perhaps Balinas ,”
seems a Violen t supposition at first sigh t,but it i s n o stranger a history than many
geographical n ames are wel l kn own t o have had . It receives con siderable confirmat ion
also from the fact that the Cabot map , to be referred to below , has commemorated the
presen ce of the whal es by the n ame “num in as sal ina s ” 2
(or b alin as) , and as n early
every n ame on the Cabot map i s on this , and as the two n ames under discussion are in
n early the sam e position on the two maps,it s eem s quite reason able to suppose that they
have the same origin .
“6 0
p° I do n ot understan d . S t . Lauren s
,
”St . n icollas ,
”C. t iemo t , are al l
famil iar and in place t on tyn s refers,w i thout doubt
,to the many islands he saw in this
region . R . damot is , probably , a corruption of I sl e of Demon s ,”foun d in thi s region
upon some m aps, and explicitly placed there by Allefon sce.
“R . Carti er i s clear
,but I
do n ot see why “ R. blan c sablon has been placed here in“
addit ion to “ blan c sablon .
Upon the west coast of Newfoundland we have but three n ames given out of all thenumber Cartier placed there , Les granges,
”coullob ier (Coulonb iers) , 0 . Real (Cap
Royal) are easily recogn ized . Yet even thes e three are farmore than any other cartographer
gives us up to Lescarb ot . I n the many maps of th is region that I have examin ed , I haven ot seen an other which places any n ames on the west coast of Newfoundland , and the
three in this might readily have been suppl ied from n arrative or hearsay . I shal l return
to this poin t again . The two i sl ands n early blocking up the en tran ce to the Gul f are , of
course,a part of Newfoundland , which in e arl i er maps i s represen ted as cut up in to even
a larger number of i slands than i s shown upon this . We n otice St . paul on the n orth
of Cape Breton .
This map,though in s ome details less accurate than that of Mercator, presen tly to be
referred to , must be ackn ow l edged to b e , in gen eral , the most accurate picture of Cartier’s
voyage swhich has descen ded t o u s from the sixteen th cen tury . I t s topography is , for that
time,exceedingly accurate . Newfoundland
,though broken up in to many i slands
,has a
more correct outl in e than in any other map of the cen tury . The Magdalen es are proport ion
ately too large,but wan t of proportion i s a fault of al l early maps w ithout exception .
Prin ce Edward I sland is fused w ith the main land , but so i t i s on all maps n early up toChamplain ’s large map of 1632 . Cape Breton Islan d is l ikew i s e fused w ith the main lan d ,as it is for a long time thereafter . Latitude and longitude are both very erron eous .
These are its chief faults . I t s gen eral excellen ce mus t command our admiration .
1 Cartier spel ls very badly . I t i s not to b e expected that h is chart would b e more accurate in th i s respect thanh is narrative, or vice vcrsd, or that they should always agree.
2 The letter 0 added to“ sal inas on th e Cabot map (see next page ) does not belong there ; it is an error ot
transcription.
3 6 GANONG ON ST. LAWRENCE
impossible to resist the con clusion , allow ing for the differen ce in topography all throughthe two maps , that they are the same . We see the same three smal l i slands on the east ,and the whole group is even more correctly in the position of th eMagdalen e I slands than
it i s in the Hen ri I I map . Yet this I . de S . Juan ” has always been con sidered to b e
Prin ce Edward I sland . I shall r eturn to this subj ect later on .
Passing to the main lan d w e find the word saluayos ,” eviden tly Cart ier’s cap dez
Sauuaiges,”and
“ rio de paris, a Span i sh corruption ,appearing on many maps , of Cartier
’s
R. de Baroques .” I t w il l be n oticed that the two are tran sposed on thi s map the former
should really be n orth of the latter . 0 . del maro stands in the posit ion of St . Lun ario ,”
and i s e ith er a corruption of that word,
1 or possibly of St . Marie or Se . Marie of the
source from which this and the Hen ri II map took it in common . The words baya de
ralegn o” are probably some Span i sh corruption for Bay Chaleur, and in
“ongedo
”we
recogn iz e Cartier ’s “ Honguedo .
”On the n orthern shore of th e Gulf w e see “
Rio de S.
quen ain ,
” a curious form for Saguen ay .
” To the east of i t occurs Jaqui ,” which must
be the St . Jacques and ban c St . Jacques of the Hen ri I I and Mercator maps ; whil e
ylleos may refer to Seven Islan ds,though those at ysleos pin to correspond better
w ith them . Baya de S loreme would appear to be in tended for St Lauren s, but if
so , i t i s out of position ,as it belongs opposite An ticosti ; but rio duce i s quite clear,
though ysleos pin to I do n ot un derstand
The n ext n ame is numinas salin as , which I think,i s in tended for numinas
b alinas,” many whales . I t was n ear this place that Carti er speaks of having seen so man y °
E t n’est memoire de iamais auoir t an t v eu de b allaynes que n ous Vismes celle iourn ee,
etc . Ye de t ronot seems to be a repet it ion, of which there are many similar on es on the
map, of 0 0 . de t ronot Cartier’s Cape Tienno t . Todo yslas is the toutyns of the
Henri I I map , and in breste to the east of i t we have an other mean ingless repetition 3
;
the most easterly “ breste i s probably the Brest ”of Cartier . “
Atelab ara ” may be a
very much corrupted Span ish form for White Sand “On the west coast of Newfoundland
there are no n ames to be found . The n ame “ prima vist a ” i s fully discussed by Kohl ,B arri sse , Dean e and others . I t refers merely to Cabot’s supposed or real lan d-fal l atthis poin t .
Dr . Kohl says of n ames on other parts of this map that,the Span ish t erms and
n ames are corrupted and disfigured in such an extrordinary way , that sometimes i t i s
n early impossible to make out what the author mean s and,again
,speaking of certain
n ames being repeated or duplicated , of -which we have an in stan ce in breste above , he
says This doubl ing of n ames can be n othing else than an extraordin ary blunder, or a
mark of great n egligen ce in the preparat ion of the map .
” From such errors he con cludesthat Cabot had n othin g to do W i t h it , but that some ignoran t compil er had copied an
origin al manuscript in a very careless mann er, and had written ,in bad Span i sh , his con
struct ion of the language . Cer tain ly our Gulf of St . Lawren ce i s very badly don e . A side
from the n ames , the topography is poor compared w i th the Hen ri I I map . An t icost i is
too far up the St . Lawren ce ; i slands are put in phalan xes along the Labrador coast ;
Cartier in the Relation Origi nale has St . Limaire for St . Lunario.
2 See page 34, note 2.
3 I t must b e remembered that according to the 15 98 ed. of Cartier’s first voyage, there are two Brest-s on th i scoast one of wh ich i s an i sland. The more trustworthy Relation Orig inale, however, makes on ly one.
See area blanca on p. 38.
CARTOGRAPHY TO CHAMPLAIN. 8 7
Newfoundland is very badly shown,and even Cartier’s Bay of St . Lun ario and som e
other places are less wel l drawn than in any other map of the cen tury . Latitude, however,i s rather good for that t ime, though the longitude is as usual far wrong .
D .
— T/te Vallaa‘d Map, 1 543- 1547 .
A map which resembl es the Cabot map very closely in many respects is the NicholasVallard map of between 1 543 and 1547 . I t belongs to a manuscript atlas , and the on ly
reproduction of it that I am acquain ted w i th is that in Kohl ’s Discovery of Main e ,”
p. 354,
from which the tracing below is t aken .
1 Very litt le i s kn own of the map e xcept that its
maker was a Portuguese ,Vallard being con sidered to be merely the own er of the atlas andnot its maker . Kohl , i t i s a l ittl e surprising to see , con siders this a more accurate mapthan the Hen ri I I . In this I cann ot agree w i th him .
F IG. 4.— Tb eVallardMap, 1543
-1547 .
To the group of i s l ands in the Gulf, n o name i s ass ign ed. I f one compares their form
and position w ith those on other maps , he w ill see there i s n o escaping the con clusion that
they represen t this group , and n ot Prin ce Edward I sland , as Kohl and others have
supposed . The long islan d is too n ear the shore, i t i s true— a poin t that I shall con sider
presen tly. We find no n ames upon the main lan d un t i l we come to the n orth shore of theGulf, though the topography has the u
'
sual form . Beginn ing at le Saguen ay and going
eastward we meet w ith ban e lormine ,” where in other maps we have found “ ban e St .
Jacques and St . Jacques .” I do n ot know the mean ing of this word,but it suggests
the n ames of two of Cartier’s ships on his second voyage, “ la grande Hermin e and l a
petite Hermin e .
” 27 I ll es ,
”Rio douche ,
”Gr. loren s , are all clear . It must be
remembered that this i s a Portuguese map,and many of the n ames are to be expected to
have a Portuguese form . Rio gran t we have n ot met w i th before . Cartier does no t
men tion a river in thi s region . He does speak of what he n amed Bay of St . Lawren ce as
being un e moult belle et grande baye,
”and this grande b ay may have become
1 A lso cop ied in W insor’s America, iv . 87.2 French , l’Hermine. Portuguese, lormz
‘
ne Compare Pai l lon , H i s toire, i. 505 . See an tea, p. 33,note 3.
8 8 GANONG ON ST. LAWRENCE
grande or gran t (Portuguese form for gran de river . Sallinas i s the same
word as Sallin as in the Cabot map .
“
0 . t renot is cl early O. t iennot“ t erra bella ”
probably refers to the coast a few l eagues ( l ess than seven ) eas t of Tienn o t (NatashquanPoin t ) , which Cartier described in these words E t a l a fin desdictes ysles , y a un e fort
bel le terre basse pl ain e de grandz arbres hault z .
” l The goffre may be a corrupted
Golfo .
”
Area blanc would probably be area or areia ba'anca ,Portuguese for Blan e Sablon .
Bran ica I do n ot understan d un les s i t be an other greatly corrupted repetition brest
is clear and also chat iaux .
”Oh the west coast of Newfoundl and are no n ames
,and its
outl in e i s very poor . The many isl ands on the Labrador coas t res emble those on th e
Cabot map .
E .
— T/L6 Homem Map, 1 558 .
We may here look at an other Portuguese chart,that of Diego Homem , made in 1 55 8 .
This map is con tain ed in an atlas in the Brit ish Museum , and has been reproduced by
Kohl in his Discovery of Main e,
”from which work the sketch below was taken . We
n otice some surprising topographical inn ovation s here . Bay Chaleur and the St . Lawren ce
meet to the west and commun icate w ith a great n orth -west ern sea . To this same sea are
several open ings on the Labrador coast . A s Kohl says ,2 He puts down a strait in every
pl ace where Cartier in his report had said he had looked for one, even if he did n ot find it .
The west coast of Newfoundland is left unrepresen ted , the land merging in to the s ea . A s
to the n ames , Kohl saysf’ The whol e draft of the Gulf of St . Lawren ce i s n ecessarily
taken from Car t ier, though our Portugues e author has badly changed and corrupted the
n ames of his Fren ch origin al .”
F IG. 5 .—The D iego Homem Map, 1558 .
The Magdalen e group is represen ted by t wo i slands , briou , which , of course, shouldbe Brion
,
”and i l le de sablOes .
” The latter word, as already poin ted out , was used in
its Fren ch form by Cartier in describing the greater of the Magdalen e Isl ands . There can
1 Bref. récit, ed. of 1803, f. 7b and 8 .
2 0 p. cit ., p. 379 .8 Op. cit. p. 379.
4 0 GANONG ON ST. LAWRENCE
to call n othing else than the Magdalen e group . The great pen in sula to the south of theisland is the real Cape Breton of to -day , the square islan d marked C. de Breton b eing
on ly a part of it . Here w e n otice two n ames not before observed in this position ,
“0 .
real and O. S. .I ean .
” Both of these belong on the coast of Newfoun dlan d , Cape Royal
(Cape Real being the form it has on the H en ri I I map ) being the presen t Cape Gregory ,and C. S . Jean th e presen t Cape Anguill e . The question as to why they are placed by
Mercator down on the coast of Cape Breton i s conn ected w ith the question as t o whyn early al l of these old maps leave unrepresented Cartier’s exploration s on the west coast
F IG. 6 .— Tho GerardMercator Map, 1569 .
of Newfoundland, a quest ion I shal l con sider a l ittle l ater in this paper. Ou the coast tothe west
,where
,of course, Prin ce Edward I sl and is fused w ith the main l and , the n ames
are al l famili ar,and almost exactly as Carti er gave them . The on ly exception i s found in
C. de Stiago , alys dorlean s .” I do n o t kn ow why C. de St iago is used as an al tern a
tive for Orlean s . It is worth n ot icing that a cape of this n ame appears on some early
maps on Cape Breton , n otably on that ofMaiollo of 1 5 27 .
Humedo is for Honguedo , and I have already explained the displacemen t of
C. de S. Aluise,”
C. de Mommoran cy”
and“ Estroict de S. P ierre from An t icost i
,
where they belon g . We find an other “ Honguedo"in the Vicin i ty of the Saguen ay .
ban e S. Iaques,”7 i sl es and r. doulce are all clear en ough . Coste du oist is an
CARTOGRAPHY TO CHAMPLAIN. 4 1
odd expression , mean ing, probably, coast to the west . It may be a par t of some of the
in scription s. which Cartier ’s maps probably con tain ed . S. Lauren s,
”S . Nicolas and
C. Tieno t are clear , but posilles I do n ot understan d,n or acarty i sles . I find no
trace of these words in the n arratives or on other maps . The other n ames on this coastare clear
,
“ Isl es a la demoi sel le ” being men tion ed by Allefon sce . The west coast ofNewfoundland literally show s no trace of Carti er’s visi t .
H.— ~The Why tfiz
'
et Map , 1597 .
This map appeared in 1 569 . From that time un til after the close of the cen tury no
better on e was published . A ll that followed un ti l the time of Lescarb ot and ChamplainW ere either retrogression s , or were copies of this , or combin ation s of it w ith others w e have
Sinus Slaw
{E straltl
’
cie
6 .a. ta fbfl.
y ams
w n
F IG. 7. The Why tfiiet Map, 159 7.
con sidered . A s a type of the very best of the later maps of that cen tury we take that ofWhytfliet of 1 5 97 , which is con tain ed in hi s Ptolemy of that year . I t w il l be seen that
the topography , far from improving, has become poorer, while .th e n omen clature is almost
Sec. II,1889 . 6.
4 2 GANONG ON ST. LAWRENCE
precis ely that of Mercator . The maps treated of in the foregoing pages are the principalon es of the cen tury .
I .
-l e Lescarbot Map , 1609 .
In many respect s Lescarb ot’
s map of 160 9 1 is more n early all ied to those of thi s thanto those of a later period . While his topography is in special poin ts more accurate thanMercator ’s or the Hen ri I I map , it i s in gen eral l ittle , if any ,
better in this respect . I tmakes on e i sl and o f Newfoundland , but its outl in e is far from being as correct as i t i s inthe
‘Hen ri I I map . For the first t ime Cape Breton Isl and is clearly defined and the Brasd
’
Or l akes shown . But there i s n o trace at all of the large isl and of the Magdalen es , and
n on e at al l of Prin ce Edward I slan d . He made a strenuous effort to retain all of Cartier ’s
n ames,and I bel ieve there i s hardly one of the l atter that he has n ot worked in to his
map . But having no accurate charts to guide him , and, of course , n o t possessing Cartier’s
origin al s,he has made hopeless con fusion of the whole matter . He has n o t even used
Cartier’s n arratives w i th care . He places on Cape Breton many l ocal iti es which n o on e
n ow doubts wer e on Newfoundland . Lescarb o t’
s opin ion as to the places n amed by Car
t i er is quite valueless . He derived much of the material of his map, o f course , from
Champlain ; he n ever vis i ted the Gulf of St . Lawren ce himself. We hav e in troduced,however
,for the first time, some new n ames , afterwards appearing on Champlain ’s maps ,
which are the beginn in g of our modern n omen clature . Such are An t icosti , Mesamich is
(Miramichi) , Tregate (Tracadie) , Campseau (Can so) , I le Percée, I l e Bon aven ture and others .
Wi th Lescarb o t , Cartier’s n omen clature as a whole disappears from all good maps . I t
revives occasion ally upon l ater compilat ion s , somet imes w i th Champlain’s correct topo
graphy,but such are off the l in e of advan ce .
W ith Champlain ’s maps,and particularly W i th that of 1632 , begin s our modern
n omen clature ; w e have here a long step in advan ce and on e n ever to be retraced . Sin ce
then the place-n ames and topography of the Gulf have not changed on our maps ; theyhave s imply developed .
.I . Own Maps.
It is n ot impossible that Cart ier’s own maps may yet be found , but such a desirableeven t i s hardly probable . We have n o eviden ce that they w ere ever engraved , and even
as early as 1 587 his papers had been lost sight of. H is n ephew , Jacques Noel , writing to
a friend , at that date , from Paris , said :“ I can write n othing else un to you of any thing
that I can recover of the writ ings of Capt aine Iaques Cartier my un cle disceased,al though
I have made search in all places that I could possibly in thi s Towne: saving of a certain
booke made in man er of a sea-Chart , which was drawne by the hand of my said un cle .
” 2
Yet from the data supplied by the maps we have con sidered we can form some idea
of what thos e made by Cartier must have con tain ed . These al l bear eviden ce that , if no ttaken from Cartier ’s own
, they derived their topography and n ames from some one or two
which had been in turn really taken from Cart ier’s . Each map-maker copying the n ames,
turn ed them in to his own language as far as possible , and used his own j udgmen t as to
1 See reproduct ion in Tross’ reprint. 2 Hak luyt, iii. 290.
4 4 GANONG ON ST. LAWRENCE
drawn from similar or the same origin als . Such may have been copied directly fromCartier ’s own n otes and draughts , and in th em thi s west coast may have been defaced in
any on e of a dozen possible ways .1
B.
— E arl_7/ Cartography of the Magdalenes and Cape Breton I sland.
I bel ieve a somewhat similar reason i s to be found at the basis of my secon d ques tionbut in order to make it clear, I must in troduce an other map . This is the so-cal l ed .I omard
map of un certain date,but supposed to belong between 1 550 and 1 5 60 . I t i s in manu
script and a much reduced copy , from which thi s sketch is taken ,appears in Win sor’s
Narrat ive and Critical H i story of America,
” Vol . IV, p . 89 .
CANADA
F IG. 8 .— The JomardMap, 155
No doubt i t has suffered in the reduction from the origin al , and i t h as suffered in my
tran sferen ce from America.
” But its strong resemblan ce to the map of Rotz given above
must at on ce strike On e . The two are iden tical in their topography as far as the Rotz
map goes , except that the .I omard map has An t icost i separated from the main lan d . Now
what is the mean ing of thi s immen sely broad pen in sula occupying the posit ion of Cape
Breton ? Andwhere i s the group of the Magdalen es explored by Cart ier on his firs t voyage We may get some light on the difficulty ,
if we examin e in conn ection w i th these
our Hen ri I I map . There w e find an i slan d marked ye aux margaulx corresponding to
No . 1 on Rotz and 5 on .I omard, ye brion to 2 on Rotz and 6 on .I omard, alez ay to 4
on Rotz and 8 on .I omard, and a n orthern coast on the large isl and corresponding w i th
the coast, 3 on Rotz and 7 on .I omard. My idea i s that here w e have the Magdalen e
group fused w i th the main l and, or rather w ith Cape Breton ,just as Prin ce Edward Isl an d
was throughout the cen tury . Ro t z’
s map shows Cartier’s first voyage on ly, w i th no trace
whatever of hi s secon d . Now ,on his first voyage
, Cartier explored this group on i ts
n orthern and western sides, and he kn ew n oth ing at al l about the coast of Cape Breton 2
to the south, n or about the eastern coast of the Magdalen es . I bel ieve, therefore, that on
1 Th i s tends to show that th ese early map-makers rel ied ch iefly upon Cartier’s maps in constructing the irs and
made l ittle use of t he narrat ives . One could more eas i ly recon s truct his course on Newfoundland from h is narra
t ive than in any other part of the journey .
2 Th is i s shown by the fact that he did not even know on h is first voyage of the passage between Newfoundland and Cape Breton . I n the narra t ive he says : (Relation orig inale, p.
“ Je presume mielx que anltre
men t , at ce que j’ay v en
,qu’i l Iuy aict aulcun passaige en tre la Terre Neufi
‘
ue et la terre des Bretons . Sy a ins iestoi t , se seroit une grande ab reuiacion ,
tant pourle temps que pour la chemyn , se se trenne parfect ion en ce voy
age.
” Clearly h e did not know the passage and therefore he could not have known the coast ins ide of it . Whatcould he do but leave that coas t un represented
CARTOGRAPHY TO CHAMPLAIN . 4 5
his map of his first voyage he left the northwestern coast of Cape Breton and the eastern
coast of the Magdalen es undefin ed, as he had no t been there , perhaps repres en t ing them
as stan ding off in to the sea, as was the custom among honest cartographers to sign ify a
coast unkn own . Rotz , however, in copying the topography , extended the two indefin itecoasts to meet each other
,thus makin g the Magdalen es a part of Cape Breton . In deed
it is not imposs ible that this may have been Car t i er ’s own idea . Ou his secon d voyage,Cart ier again visi ted these i slands on hi s way home
, and also Visited the n orth of Cape
Breton,n aming two capes there . This en abled h im to fix the coast l in e in this region
and then ceforward to show it clearly on his maps . The maker of the .I omard map kn ew
of Cartier’s second voyage , as the Isle of A ssumption and the topography of the River St .
Lawren ce show ,yet for some reason he copied the error as to the Magdalen es , which was
n ot in excusable in Rotz , but was in him self. He may indeed hav e taken i t from Rotz , or
the two may have taken i t from some other source in common certain ly their topography
in this region i s strikingly s imilar .
O.
— The Name “ 1326 St . John .
Now I face the m0 st in teresting question in the early cartography of the Gulf, theorigin
,iden t ity and history of the n am e Isle St . John .
” Those who have fol lowed me
through the preceding pages w ill before this,I trus t, have foreseen whither my l in e of
thought is to lead me .
It has been held by n early all writers that Prin ce Edw ard Islan d received the n ame
I sle St . John , which it held from th e time of Champlain un ti l 1 79 8 , from John Cabot , it
being the islan d sighted and so n amed by him Jun e 24th , So far as I have been
abl e to find, after a careful study of the question , the eviden ce for“
this rests upon the
follow ing bases Upon the n ame itself ; Cabot somewhere in_
this region discovered
an i sland and n am ed it St . John ; Prin ce Edward Island was cal led Isle St . John fromvery early times ; i t i s n ot unn atural in the absen ce of further eviden ce to con sider themto be the same . (2 ) Upon some stat emen ts , presen tly to be n oticed, of Allefonsce
,
Roberval ’s pilot . (3) Upon the eviden ce of th e Cabot map , which places a large Isle St .
John in the Gulf. The first of thes e is conn ected with the last , and w i ll be con sidered
along w i th it .
Allefonsce several t imes distin ctly speaks of an Is l e St . John in this region,but n ever
in a way to en able us to locate it beyon d doubt . Thus he says ,2 Turn ing to the Isle of
St . John , called Cape Breton , the ou termost part of which is in the ocean in 45 ° from theArct ic Pol e, I say Cape of St . John
,call ed Cape Breton ,
” etc . ; again ,in the prin ted Voy
ages av an tureux,
” a work published after his death , and which must be con sul ted w i thcaution ,
3 we read, Having passed the Isl e of St .I ehan , the coast turn s to the west and
west - southward as far as the River Noromb ergue (i .e . the Pen obscot) . Certain ly such
phrases as these could n ot by any possibil ity whatever apply to our Prin ce Edward Island .
Yet some have said that it was because the Cape S t . John of Cart ier was on i t , the cape named b y CartierJune 24th, 1 534. Th i s statemen t i s made b y no less an authority than Rev . E . Slatter, the scholarly annotator of
Oti s’s tran slat ion of Champlaln . (Prince Soc. Ed. Boston,i .
2 From De Cos ta’s tran slat ion contained in America, iv . 6 9-76.3 America, iv. 68 .
4 6 GANONG ON ST. LAWRE NCE
They apply to Cape Breton fairly well , but they appear to me to refer really to the island
W hich appears on so m any old maps just to the east of Cape Breton of to-day and W hich
has gen erally been taken to be Cape Breton Island i tself. I have already poin ted out thatthis island was probably in tended for a par t of Cape Breton on ly, the real Cape Breton
being the large pen in sul a tol erably wel l shown upon n early all of the old maps . Maps
before Cartier n early all show an Isle St . John on the A tlan t ic coast in this region ,and i t
persists in some maps after Cart ier.
l
But again ,Allefonsce s ays , Passing about twen ty leagues west-n orth-west alon g th e
coast you w il l find an i s l and called St . Jean , in the cen tr e of the district , and n earer to the
Breton region than Terra Nova . This en try to the Breton s i s tw elve leagues w ide , and in
47°
30’
n orth . From St . Jean ’s Island to A scen sion [An t icosti] Islan d , in the Can adiansea, it i s forty leagues across , n orth-w est by west . St . Jean and Bryon and Bird Island are
47°
north .
” The grouping of Isle St . John w ith Bryon and Bird I slands,together w ith its
distan ce from A ssumption (An t icosti ) would place it where the Cabot map does , as thelargest of the Magdalen es . Yet it s latitude is made half a degree lower (if the MS. be
tran slated correctly) than the en tran ce between Cape Breton Isl and and Cape Ray, when
i t really is on about the same paral lel. Part of Prince Edward Island i s south of the
en tran ce , but in no other respect whatever does the latt er correspond w i th Allefon sce’
s
referen ces to Isl e St John . We get no help from Allefon sce’
s maps,'
for the n ame does
n ot appear, and the on ly islan d2 he has shewn in the Vicin i ty of Prin ce Edward I sl and is
a very small one w i thout a n ame . These are al l of Allefonsce’
s referen ces to I sle St . John .
What place he mean t it for does not n ow con cern us . It i s en ough that his own writ ingsand maps show that he did not refer to our Prin ce Edward Isl and .
Our kn ow ledge of the discovery and n aming of I sle St . John by the Cabots , rests , sofar as I have been able
‘ to learn , so l ely upon the Latin and Span ish in scription s on the
Cabot map , and upon the presen ce of the isl and itself on that map . There is no other eviden ce kn own bearing upon the question . Dr . Dean e , in his splendid es say in “ America
,
”
Vol . I I I , on the Voyages of the Cabots , has summed up al l of our kn ow ledge of the
voyages of John Cabot and his son , and in that work I find no other referen ces to I sl e St .
John,comin g from the Cabots themselves . Dr . Dean e tran slates the legend asfoll ows
This coun try was discovered by John Cabot , a Ven et ian , and Sebasti an Cabot , his son,
in the year of our Lord Jesus Chris t , MCCCCXOIV. [1494] on the 24th of Jun e,in the
morn in g, which coun try they cal l ed primum visam ’
and a large island adjacen t to it ,they n amed the isl and of St . John, because they discovered it on the same day.
”I n the
Latin in scription 3 the words referring to the siz e of the island and i ts position are , in sula
guan damagma ei opposita In sula diu i Ioann i s n ominarfit ,”and in Span i sh , prim a terra
Vista,y a un a isla
'
grade que esta par la dha tierra .
” Isl e St . John then,was simply oppo
s ite or before or near the first land seen 4
; we are not told in what direct ion , nor how far.
Ov iedo in his description of the coas t in 1537 , shows no know ledge of the Gulf. He men t ions an i sland of
St . Joh n, but th islay out in the Atlan t ic near Cape Breton ,close to the Strai ts of Canso.
” De Costa, America, iv . 73.
2 Ou fol. America, iv . 75 .
3 Given by Dr. D eane in Proc. Amer. Anti q. Soc. for Apr i l , 1867.4 Several writers have mainta ined that the Cabots sa i led in to the Gulf of St. Lawrence, turned to the south ,
went through Northumberland Stra i t , turned thence towards the Stra it of Bel le Isle, through wh ich they passed.
Such i s the op in ion of J. C. Brevoort, (H i storical Mag, Mar. 1868 , x i i i , 131 and Frederic Kidder, (N. E .
4 8 GANONG ON ST. LAWRENCE
But the Cabot map has not been proven to be apocryphal . I f it i s al l genuin e , andthe Cabots did sight Cape Breton as their l an d-fall , then the Islan d marked I sl e St . John
probably was their I sl e St . John . But i t i s n on e the less true that this I sle St . John
was not our Prin ce Edward the topography of the map non e can doubt i s that of Cartier ;if it be compared w ith other maps show ing Cartier’s influen ce it w il l be s een as before
,
that this is the same as on al l other maps represen ts the Magdalen e group , and Cabot ’sIsle St . John must have been the larger of the Magdal en es .
It has b een claimed in the early part of th is paper that Prin ce E dward I sl and is,in
al l these early maps , fused w ith the main land, and in n o way distinguished from it . Thi s
is the case,I bel ieve , in every map of the cen tury, that is , every engraved map . I have no
doubt that the Fren ch fishermen had MS . maps show ing,or that at al l even ts they kn ew
of,the ex isten ce of the i slan d, but n o officialmap showed it . Lescarb ot
’
s well-kn own map
of 16 09 1 shows n o trace whatever of it , n or in deed does Champlain ’s 16 12 map , un l ess the
very small round isl an d in the south of the Gulf marked ille St . Jean be intended forit . Yet Champlain kn ew of it as early as 1 603 , but by hearsay on ly . In Des Sauvages
publ ished in 1 604, chapter x ii , he tells us th e story of the Si eur Prev ert’
s attempt to find
min es on the Bay of Fundy , by crossing overlan d from the Gulf, in conn ect i on w ithwhich he men t ion s the Islan d o f St . John , which is some thirty or thirty-fiv e l eagueslong and some six leagues from the main lan d on the south .
” This i s the very first
men tion of the n ame I sle St . John ,
” as appl ied un question ably to Prin ce Edward Island ,that I have been abl e to hnd . The paten t of De Mon ts of 1 603 , which n ames many
importan t places in the Gulf, does n ot men tion it . W e admire the hon esty of Champlain ,
who would n ot place the i slan d from hearsay on ly , upon his 161 2 map , but in stead placedalong the shore the l egend , “ lau teur n a poin t en core recognu cette coste .
” It i s,how
ever,distin ctly shown upon his 1 632 map , and the latt er is the first map 2 of which I have
any kn owledge , which shows Prin ce Edward Islan d in its proper shape and in its properposition .
That the south-western part of the Gulf, the bas in in which Prin ce Edward Islan dl ies
,was very little kn own prior to 1 6 00 , i s shown by documen tary as well as cartogra
ph icalev iden ce . De Laet , a writ er of high repute , writing as late as 1 633 , in describingthe Gulf, s ays that from St . Lun aire (which he, apparen t ly, uses to design ate Miramichi
Bay or the head of Northumberland Strai t ) , to Isle St . Lawren ce (Cape Breton ) , the coasti s l ittle kn own ,
and i s difficult of acces s on accoun t of the shallows .” Champl ain himself
speaks of th e region as bein g almost unkn own . Still more sat isfactory eviden ce,because
coming much earl ier, is found in Thev et’
s descr iption of the Gulf. Though the latter ’s
reputation for trustworthin ess i s n on e of the best , he certain ly in gen eral t ells the t ruth ,and the follow ing passage bears on it s face eviden ce of i ts own rel iabil ity . In the Sin
gularitez de la Fran ce an t art ique,” pub lished in 15 5 8 , p . 147 , he says , referrin g to Cape
Lawren ce on Cape Breton and going from the said cape towards the west and southwest
, on e coasts for abou t two hun dred leagues, and it i s n othing but sandbanks w ithoutCartier , in hi s n arrative, speaks frequent ly of the shoals and sands7
any port or harbor .’
1 Marcel (Cartograph ie de la Nouvel le France, Pari s , 1 885 , p. 7 ) describes a fine manuscript map of 160 7, showing Champlain ’s exploration s.
2 I find later that SirW i l l iam A lexander’s 1624 map shows i t but g ives it no name.
CARTOGRAPHY TO CHAMPLAIN. 4 9
of the coast . 1 It i s so easy for us, looking down upon good charts in our studies , to seethis i sland, that i t is difficult for a s to put ourselves in th e position of those who first
came to it . The early n avigators had little to attract them to that region . Cartier showed
there was n o hope of finding a wes tern passage there the fishing was n o t so good as offNewfoun dland n earer home ; the shoal s were dan gerous and good harbours few . Is i t anywonder that it was avoided
How then did Isle St . John get its n ame ? This I cann ot an swer, but three possibleways occur to me
Champlain had the Cabot maps before him, and thought its Isle St . John must
be the same as the other large island men t ion ed by Sieur Prevert , and hen ce that the
latter should have the same n ame . This,whi le a possibl e
,i s an extremely improbable
explan at ion .
(2 ) The n ame was given de n ovo by some of the Fren ch voyagers in the latter partof the sixteen th cen tury, or immediately preceding 1 603 . This seems to me highly
probable ; the n ame St . John was a favorite w ith early explorers .
(3 ) An other explan ation which receives support from the m aps , w il l be found by
comparing the Mercator map wi th the Mol in eaux G lobe of with Lescarb ot ’
s map
of 160 9 , and w ith Champlain’s of 1 6 12 . In the former , Cartier
’s Cape St . John , whichreally was on Newfoundland, has been tran sferred to Cape Breton ,
where i t also appears
on Lescarb ot’
s map . Tran sferred stil l further , it has become C. S . .I ean on the Molin eux
Globe, which stands almost exactly in the posit ion of the l ittle “ il le St . Jean ”of
Champlain ’s 1 6 12 map. This appears to me hardly as probable an explan ation as that
given above , sin ce Champlain kn ew i t as a l arge Islan d w ith this n am e as early as 1 603 .
Further material i s n eeded to decide which of these three possible in terpretation s i s
the correct on e .
VOYAGE S BETWEEN CARTIER AND CHAMPLAIN .
After Carti er , there was n o offici al explorer of the Gu lf un t il. Champlain ; yet , that
there w ere num erous private voyages in the in terval there can be n o doubt . Eviden ce on
thi s poin t i s con stan tly accumulatin g . Dr. De Cost a quotes 3 Gosselin ’s work on the
marin e of Normandy, as showing that Fren ch vessels engaged in the fishery w en t to New
foundland during the twen ty years subsequen t to Cartier ’s voyages, and some of these
probably Visited the Gulf. The on ly actual n arratives of voyages , however , that we have,are thos e con tain ed in Hakluyt . He gives a n arrative of a voyage to Isle Ram ea (theMagdalen es ) for the capture of walruses in 1 5 9 1 , and an other to the same pl ace in 1 597 ,w ith some others relating to the Gulf and Cape Breton . They add very little to geogra
phical kn owl edge , how ever , as the place n ames used in them in most cases cann otbe iden t ified.
4 It i s in terest ing to n ot e, how ever , that the n ames used in these n arratives
2 There i s geo log ical evidence to show that the coas t in th i s reg ion i s steadi ly sink ing, and that the water musthave been even shal lower in its harbors in Cartier’s time than it i s now.
America, iii. 2 13. Ib id., iv . 60 , 62.4They are considered further on p. 55 .
Sec. I I , 1889 . 7
5 0 GANONG ON ST. LAWRENCE
are in corporated in the charts of Dudley ’s “ Arcan o del Mare of 1647 , but the poortopography o f the latter does no t h elp us in l ocat ing them .
Allthe accoun t s of voyages given by Hakluy t are of voyages subsequen t to 1 5 80 , and i ti s probable they were numerous after that date
,few before it . In this conn ection ,
a passage
in the Briefe and summary discourse upon t he in ten ded voyage to the hithermostparts of America, writ ten by Capt ain e Carl ile , in April , given by Hakluyt ,
l is of the
greatest importan ce . I t reads as fol lows , in conn ect ion w ith the voyages of Cartier :Thus the poore king of the Coun trey , w ith two or three others of his chiefe compan ion s ,
comming aboorde the Fren ch shippes, being required thither to a banquet , was traiter
ously caryed away in to Fran ce, where hee lived foure yeeres . This outrage
and in iurious deal ing did put the whole Coun t rey peopl e in to such disl ike w ith the Fren ch ,as n ever sin ce they would admit any con versat ion or familiarit ie w i th them,v n t ilof lat e
yeeres , the olde matter beginn in g to grow out of minde , and being the rather drawen on
by gifts o f many trifling things which were of great value w ith them , they are as (I
sayde) w ithin these two or three yeeres con ten t againe to admit a t rafli que, which two
yeeres since was b egunn e w ith a smal l barke of thirt ie tunn es, whose returne was found
so profitable, as the n ext yeere follow ing, being the last yeere, by those m archan ts , whomean t to have kept the trade secret v n to themselves , from any others of their own
Coun trey men ,there was hired a shippe of fourscore tunnes out of the Isl e of I ersey .
This sh ippe made her return e in such sorte as that this yeere they have
mult iplyed three shippes, to w it , on e of n in e score tunn es , an other of an hundreth tun nes ,and a third of fourscore tunn es .
”In Hakluyt
’
s Discours e on Western Plan ting,” 2 written
in 1 584, w e read : The Fren che,the Norman s, the Bryton s or the Duche, or some other
n ation , w il l no t on ely prev en t e us of the migh t ie Baye of St . Lawren ce , where they havegotten the starte of us already
,
” etc . And again , in the same , w e read And n owe our
n eighb oures, the men of St . Malo , in Brytain e, in the b egynnynge of Auguste laste paste ,of this yere 1 5 84, are come hom e w ith hy e sh ippes from Can ada and the coun tries upp theBay of St . Lawren ce they are preparinge tenn e shippes to return e thither in Januarynext e . In 1 587 , two son s of JacquesNoel , n ephew of Cartier, w ere in Can ada, and Noelhad been there him self. 3 Al l of these facts
,together w i th others , show the ex isten ce of a
trade in the Gulf, and Champlain ’s first voyage up the St . Lawren ce in 1 60 3 , was to a
region annually Visi ted by traders . Du ring these years s ome n ew n ames appeared in
the Gulf. The paten t of De Mon ts , of 1603 , m en tion s , in addition to well -kn own places ,Bayes de Sain ct -cler, de Chaleur , Il e Percée , Ch ischedec , Mesamichi, Lesquemin , Tadoussac
,
” 4 etc .
Yet,n on e of these voyages made any impres sion upon the maps of the tim e . Whyt
fliet’
s of 1 59 7 , shows n o trace of them ,n or have they produced any influen ce that I can
se e,un ti l the m ap of Lescarb ot , of 1 60 9 , and Lescarb ot derived h is kn ow l edge from
Champlain . In other words , there was no advan ce in a cartographical' kn owl edge of the
Gulf of St . Lawren ce,given to the world, between Carti er and Champlain . We see here
il lustrated the fact that the cartography of a n ew region advan ces no t by steps , but by
leaps . I t took an explorer to make or improve a map . Cartographers , in their studies in
2 Hak luyt, i i i. p. 233.
2 Maine H ist. Soc. Col l . Documentary H istory , 1877 , 11. 102 .
3 Hak luyt, i i i . 291 , Lescarb ot . Identi ty of these places is con s idered in the Appendi x.
5 2 GANONG ON ST. LAWRENCE
wh ich shows the w est coast of Newfoundland at allw ell , Cape Real is placed nearly in the position of
Cape Ray . On later maps, untilt he time of Lescarbot,it i s either moved out of place to Cape
B reton,or omitted altogether . It is especial ly sign ifican t that the only map show ing t he w est coast
o i“
Newfoundland should place it nearly in t he proper position . Some maps, after Lescarbot andapparen tly independen t oi
'
t he latter, have Cape Rey. Lescarbo t himself has C’. de Raye. St ill
,th i s
i s but a poss ibil i ty ; there is l ittle positive ev idence to sustain it . Mv. Reade (Trans. Roy . Soc . Can
VI . ii. 22 ) states that it i s sa id to be derived from t he Basque arraico,
”
pursui t or approach . I haveseen n o maps whatever wh ich support this .
NOTRE D AME MOUNTAINS .
— There can hardly be any quest ion as to th i s name . Cartier gave iton August 15 th , 1535 . See antea
, p. 23 .
CHI SCHE DE c .— Not now used
,but frequently found in maps of about the time of Champlain . I t
appears in D eMon t s’ Paten t of 1603 . It was applied, according to Hind (Labrador, I I .
,26 ) to Seven
I slands . Others have sa id i t appl ied to the mouth of t he St . John Riv er.
L ESQUEMA I N .— Th i s words appears in old documents . According to Laverdi ere , (Champlain ,
p. it is equivalen t to Les E scoum ins,the presen t E squamine in the St . Law rence.
LABRA D OR .
— Tb is word is no t used in Cart ier’s narratives , though it appears in the ti tle of the15 9 8 edi t ion of his first narrative. I t is supposed t o have been added by t he translator. There are
,
at least,six theories as to the or igin of this word.
( 1 ) The generally accepted and altogether probable one, that given by D r . Bourino t,in ‘Canadian
Monthly ,’ April, 1875 , and by other w riters, that it was or iginally Terra Laboratoris
,
” land of the
laborer,because Corterealbrought fifty men thence to E urope, who were described as w ell fit ted for
slaves . This i s sustained by allthe ev idence of old maps.
( 2 ) A tradit ion which say s that Bradore Bay took its name from La Bradore,a Basque Whaler,
who entered i t before the sixteen th cen tury , and that from the bay ( called Bradore to-day ) t he name
rapidly extended to t he whole coun try . Car t ier did not use Bradore for the bay , though he entered it
andgave a name to its islands ; nor so far as I know does the name appear on any map of the sixteenthcentury . Lab rador, applied to t he whole coun try , does appear, how ever, very early . There is no
cartograph ical ev idence to sustain this theory .
( 3 ) That given by M . Jules Marcou in his Sur L’
Originc da Noni D’
Amérique ( Bull . Soc . Geo .
,
1888, p. 57 of t he reprint) , attr i but es to it an Indian or ig in . Ce beau nomBrador ouBradaur, sonorc
et admirablement appropri é , est un mo t des Indiens des bords da golf'e Sain t-Lauren t ; ilsign ifie
‘ baieé troite e t profonde'
,s
’
avangan t dan s les terres et ii correspond exactemen t au nom norvég ien de fiord.
”
M. Marcou,how ever
,does n ot g ive us any authority for h is statement.
( 4) The latter w riter mention s that some have thought the name was g iven in irony , because of
t he sterility of the land,— a land of labor should b e fer t ile
,and here the name was g iven in deri sion .
( 5 ) Another interpretat ion , wh ich seems to have escaped notice,is hinted at by John Og ilby , in
his H istory of America” He says : The denomi nation of Term de Laborador or L abora
toris seems probably enough conj ectured t o be from the cultivability ( if one may so term it ) of the
soil, or its aptness for Cult i vation or Tillage ; that is because , by the painful Hand of t he Labourer or
Husband-man,it may be rendered so fertile as to y ield allsorts of Grain and Fruits ; haply in Allusion
to the frui tful Coun trey of Campania in I taly, vulgarly known by the name of Term dz'
L avoro.
” Av ery old Portuguese map of 15 20 , one of the earlies t on w hich t he name appears (g i ven by Koh l ,“ Discovery of Ma ine,
”
gives some author ity for such a suggestion as Og ilby’
s,for t he
reg ion is there called D o L avrador. O therw ise, there seems no ground for this t heory .
( 6 ) That g i ven by Mr. Reade, in these Tran sac tion s,VI . i i . 22 .
“ Labrador is claimed to be aremembrancer of t he Labourde district wh ich g i ves a di stinctive name to a dialect of the Basquelanguage .
”I have seen nothing on old maps to substan tiate th is.
CARTOGRAPHY TO CHAMPLAIN . 5 8
GASPE.
— There are two explanation s of this w ord. Sir William Daw son (Canadian Natural ist,III .
,calls it a Micmac word
,mean ing as nearly as pos sible, the land
’s end,
’
and suggeststhat it may be identical w ith t he termination “
gash”in names of poin t s in New Brun sw ick and Nova
Scot ia. Vetromile (The Abnakies, p. 46 ) derives it from Gachepe or Kech’
pi ( t he very appro
priately , to sign ify the extreme end of Micmac territory and t he last promon tory bet w een S t . Lawrence and Bay of
'
Chaleurs . De Mon t ’s commission of 1603 has Gachepe'
,and Champlain and D e
Laot use both Gachepé and Gaspe'
. Oh the other hand,Abbé Laverdiere ( ( E uv res de Champla in ,
p. 1085 ) derives it from Kat sepioui, qui est séparémen t,” referring to a rock known as Le Forillon ,
just off Cape Gaspe. I n B owley’s E cclesiast ical History of Newfoundland (p. 9 9 ) it is said to be
from t he Abenaquis word “ Katespi, which means separately, or that which i s separated from t he
mainland,
” thus agreeing in the main w ith that given by Laverdiere .
The very earliest use of the word that I know of is by Allefonsce in his Cosmog raph ie of 1542 .
A s tran slated by Hakluy t, it is Spelled Gaspay. I f it be an Indian word,either Allefonsce or Cartier
must have obtained it from t he Indian s . Now,it seems high ly probable that at the t ime of the v is i ts
of Cart ier, the Indians residen t there w ere neither Micmacs nor Mon tagnai s , but Hurons ( see N . E .
Dionne,E tudes Historiq ti es, Quebec, 1880 , pp. 57—60 , and Tran s . Roy . Soc . Canada
,I I . ii. 77 , 80 ,
Faillon,Histoire
,I,
I f this be so,it is rather to the Huron tongue that we are t o look for the
mean ing of the word,no t to the Micmac
,and both of t he interpretations g iven above may fa ilin t he
light of new evidence .
NEWFOUNDLAND .
—Probably the very oldest geograph icalname given by Europeans on the
American continen t,which has survived to the presen t time . I t probably dates back
,
to the first
voyage of the Cabots in 1497 . Cartier does no t appear to use t he word for the island i t self,though
he speaks of the coast of Labrador as Terre Neufiue. He was the first,so far as we know
,to prove
that Newfoundland was an island before his time t he name had to appear on the mainland. Ou the
map of Ruy sch , of 1508 , Terra Nova appears on a pen insula certa in ly meant for New foundland. Ou
that of Cosa,of 1 500 , it appears as Tierra Nueva, but , as no pen in sula or island is show n , it covers a
considerable tract on the main land. Cosa’s map in this region is supposed to have been derived fromthe Cabots’ maps . The name also appears in o ther records
,as men tioned by Kohl(Discovery of
Maine, p. the most interesting of which is t he en try in the privy-purse accounts of Henry VI I
in 1497 of “ 10 pounds to h im that found the new i sle.” Other later entries speak of the New I slande,New I sle, and one in 1503 of the Newfound island. It appears , then , that our word Newfoundland
is a direct descendan t of the name given to th is region by t he Cabot s . I t was used in it s present format least as long ago as the time of Champlain .
ISLE ST. JOHN ( See antea, p.—I t bore th is name until17 98 , when it was changed to Prince
Edward I sland,in honor of the father of our Queen , by an Act of t he Provincial Legislature, wh ich
was confirmed by the King in 1799 . The name “ Northumberland Strait is,how ever
,much older.
ST. LAWRENCE .— This name rapidly extended to the whole Gulf, and later to t he river. Early
names for the former,or parts of it , were Grand Baie, GolfoQuadrado . The river was called River of
Canada,River of Hochelaga . Purchas states (Pilgrimage, p. 8 69 ) that the river was also called the
S trait of the Three Brothers, though the stat emen t does not appear to occur elsewhere .
GRAND BAIE .
— Th is name w as v ery clearly applied to the north eastern part of t he Gulf byAllefonsce and other early w rit ers. Yet some have supposed it applied to the Bay of Fundy . (A . L .
Adams,Field and Forest
,Rambles, p. 15
,N . Y. Hind
,Rep. Geology , N .B.
, p.
I SLE or DEMONS .— An uncertain
,almost my th icallocality , based chiefly upon t he imag ination of
Thevet. The legend is given by Parkman (Pioneers of France) , and has been made t he subj ect ofone of Canada’s best narrative poems, v iz .
“ Marguerite or the Isle of Demons ”by Mr. George
5 4 GANONG ON ST. LAWRENCE
Mart in (Marguerite and Other Poems , Bourinot (Canadian Monthly, April, makes theIsle of Demons and t he I sles de D emoiselle the same. Allefonsce
,as point ed out
, places the latter int he Gulf on t he Labrador coas t though old maps place the former in t he region of Belle I sle.The legend is interest ing and
,Parkman poin ts out , may have an historical basis
,but these locali t ies
cannot be certa inly iden t ified.
MIRAMICHI .~ —Tl) is is popularly supposed to be a Micmac word, mean ing “ happy retreat, suchbe ing t he in terpretat ion g iven by Cooney, Gesner and others in th eir histories of this region . Anotheridea is that it comes from Miggumaghee or Megumaage,
” wh ich means Micmac—Land. On t he
other hand,D r . Silas Rand
,our greates t Micmac scholar, does not know its meaning or orig in , nor
does Mr . Edward Jack,who i s fam iliar wi th the language of the Milicete I ndians . One of the most
in telligen t Indian s of the Milicet e tr ibe, Newell Paul,has told me that t he word is not Indian at all.
Mr. .I ack w rites that there is n o such word in the Abenak i language to h is knowledge, and thatt he Indian s callthe M iram ich i L es- ta -
goo- chic, or Litt le Res t igouche . D r. Rand
,in h is Micmac
Reader, g ives i t the same name,M stegoocheechk. Were the word Miramichi used by either
Micmacs o r Milice tes,these two men would certainly know of it .
The word has had a most interesting h istory , but so far I have not been able to reach a satisfactoryconclusion as to its or ig in . Ou maps of the last century ,
the r i ver is usually called R z'
st z'
gouchi, wh ichis clearly the same word as D r . Band and Mr . Jack g iv e, w ith t he r soften ed to I
,as i t always is in
the language of these Indian s . Passing back to t he seven teen th cen tury, t he r disappears and is
replaced by 5,so that it reads M z
'
samz'
chi,M issamichi
,et c .
,though occasionally t he r does appear.
Lescarbo t has M z'
samz’
chis, D e Laet Mesamichi,Champla in lmsamz
'
chy. D eMont’
s commission of 1603
has JII esamichi. Moreover t he word in allof these cases is appl ied no t to the river, but t o a place orport Lescarb ot speak s of i t as a port where the French were accustomed to dry fish
,and he also tells
us that it i s an Indian w ord.
So much is certain but I believe the word can b e traced stillfurther back . On amap, dated 15 94in the H istoire de la Nav igat ione de Ican Hugues de L inscot , and on another dated 159 6
,in D e
Bry’s America
,
” w e find the name Machanuce (wh ich may be misprinted of course,) and indeed inthe latter m i
ght almost be read Machamice,occurr ing in the posit ion of our presen tMiramichi. More
over,it s posit ion is made cer tain on both maps by the presence of the little circle and tow er used
conven tionally on both t o indicate a town ,sett lemen t o r port
,and th is circle i s placed on what is
clearly very near or exactly on t he presen t Miramich i Riv er . I have not seen it again on any
earlier map untilthat of Homem of 15 5 8 (given antea, p. where it appears exactly in i ts proper
pos i t ion 2 in t he form M icheomai. The same forms appears also upon Freire’s map of 1546 , though it
migh t poss ibly b e read there pucheomaz’
. Las tly in t he Henry I I map (given an tea, p. 3 8 ) we find
a name Terre de Illichalman, placed no t at t he Miramichi , but in what is now Restigouche Coun ty .
Con sider ing the great differences in spelling in these early maps , their corrupting of names,and
change s from on e language to another, t oget her w ith t he fact that an en tirely n ew name v ery rarelyappears, it seems no t unreasonab le to suppose that these are allthe same word.
As it appears on the Henri I I map, which‘
so faithfully mirrors the explorations of Car t ier, it
would look as if t he name had been giv en by him,or
,at allevents , w as in some way connected w ith
h is voyages . Yet we search his narratives in vain for any trace of it , or anyth ing that can be con
nec ted w ith i t . No modern word either in Fren ch , Spanish or Portuguese , wh ich at allresembles
any of th ese forms throw s any l igh t upon it . Both Portuguese maps have Micheomai the French
map has JlI z’
chalman. Some studen t who thoroughly understands these languages migh t help us here,or the Kohlcollection of maps atWash ington m igh t give other forms of the name
,or intermediate
steps wh ich would throw ligh t on the quest ion .
2The l ittle b ay at t he righ t of the name i s mean t forM iram ich i Bay, the Baia de lunari just below be ingthe head of Northumb erland Strait.
5 6 GANONG ON ST. LAWRENCE
m 0
.
o
fi
flo
fimwo
3
8mQQO
3.uo
a
fiw9
39
s
q
Eo
BcoH
so
Omo
H
T.
2
86
1
‘
3‘
Eqmo
mu
ms
o
mo
ao
can
wmc
$
88
$5
N
CARTOGRAPHY TO CHAMPLAIN . 5 7
5 8 GANONG ON ST. LAWRENCE CARTOGRAPHY,ETC.
6 0 SIR D AN IEL W ILSON
in the caves of Fran ce and Belgium ,among remain s pertain ing to the Palmolithic age ;
and are among the most in terest ing disclosures of the greatly more modern , though still
prehistoric age of the barrows and cairn s of the A l lophyli an period of Britain , and of
western Europe gen erally . Sir R. C. Hoare records the huding, amon g the con ten t s of a
cinerary urn ,in a Wi ltshire barrow ,
“ chipped flin ts prepared for arrow heads , a lon g
piece of flin t , and a pyrites, both eviden tly smoothed by usage . More recen t explorers ,apprised of the sign ificance o f such discoveries
,have n oted the pres en ce of n odules of
pyrites,accompan ying the person al orn am en ts and weapon s occurrin g in graves o f the
same age— deposi ted there either as token s of regard , or more probably w i th a vague
idea of their uti lity to the dead in the life beyon d the grave . I n a commun icat ion tothe Society of An tiquaries o f Scotlan d on a group of ston e cists disclosed , in 1 879 , on the
farm of Tein side , Tev iotdale, Lord Rosehill thus describes part of the con ten t s of oneof them . It was filled w i th dark-coloured earth , mixed W ith charcoal ; and closely
in term ingled in every part w ith fragmen ts of bon es which had been exposed to the actionof fire .
” A broken urn lay about ten in ches from the top . Close to the urn was arounded piece of m etal l ic-looking substan ce
, which appears to be ‘ radiated iron pyrites ,’
and which ,
” adds Lord Rosehil l ,“ I have myself dis covered in several in termen t s . ” 2
More recen t ly, in 1883 , Major Colin Macken zie reported to the same Society the discovery
of a ci st and urn in the Black Isle, Ross - shire . He thus proceeds : “ Whilst gathering
together the broken pieces of the urn ,a round-n osed fl in t-fiake or scraper, chipped
at the edges , was found amon gst the debri s , and proved to have a bluish tinge,
as if i t had been subjected to the action of fire . Close bes ide i t there was found
a roun d piece of iron pyrit es ,' flat on one side , in shape somewhat l ike the half of
an egg, divided lengthways , on ly smaller . Dr. Joseph Anderson at on ce recogn i zedthis as forming, along w i th the solitary flin t
,n othing l ess than a prehistoric ‘ s trike
l ight ’ apparatus .” 3 No flin t is procurable in the locali ty ; and after the closest s earch ,n o other flin t impl em en t or flake was found on the site . I n commun icating thi s
in terestin g discovery to the Soci e ty of An tiquaries of Scotl and , Maj or Macken z ie
reviewed the disclosures of thi s clas s in Great Britain ,so far as they had been n oted
by Hoare , Borlase , Bateman , Greenwel l and E van s , furn i sh ing a tabulated stat emen t of
eleven examples , ch iefly found in barrows, and ran ging over an area extending from
Cornwall to Ross-shire . He draws atten tion to their occurren ce in l ocal i tie s which produce n either pyrites nor flin t . But w ith the former
,at l east , th is n eed n o t surpris e us .
The prized and easily tran sported pyrites may be looked for in any an cien t barrow or
sepulchral deposit and has probably in many cases passed unn oted before its sign ifican ce
was un derstood . Now that thi s i s fully apprec iated,i t i s seen to have been in use from
the early dawn of prim itive art and doubtless the pyrites and flin t found in local it i es
remote from those where they occur as n atural products are in most cases due to prim itivebarter .
The old Promethean myth represen ts the fire-brin ger in terposing on behalf of a
degraded race of bein gs whose helpless lot had been preceded by the Hesiodic Golden ,
Si lver and Bron ze ages , as w ell as by an Heroic age of such demigods as the Ti tan son of
2 Hoare’s South W i l ts , p. 1 95.
2 Proceedings of the Society of Anti quaries of Scotland, v i i i . 137.Proc. of Soc . Anti q. Scot , N . S. , V11. 356.
ON THE STONE AGE .6 1
Iapetus . By a reverse process of evolution from the lower to higher stages , thean thropoid
,or Cal iban of archae ological sci en ce
,becomes the tool-maker , the tool-user ,
and in the same prim itive stage,the fire-maker . But the service of fire i s required by
man under the most varied condit ion s of l ife . The ston e l amp w ith its moss w i ck . and
the ston e kettle,are importan t implemen ts in the sn ow-hut o f the E skimo . On those he
depends , n o t on ly for cookin g, but for his supply of wa ter from melted sn ow and w ith
out the lighted taper of his ston e lamp the in door l ife of the long, un broken arcti c n ight
would be pas sed in a rayless dungeon . He has in herited the kn ow ledge of th e palaeo
l ith ic fire-maker,from whom ,
indeed, some have claimed for him direc t gen ealogicaldescen t ; and he gen erally treasures amon g his most useful appl ian ces a piece of quartz ,and a n odule of pyrites , which con stitute his flin t and steel . At the remote extreme of
the southern con tin en t the same precious bequest i s in use by the Fuegian s and Patagon
i an s of Terra del Fuego,the n ame o f which i s a m emorial of i ts fire-using savages . The
Fuegian makes a hearth of c lay in the bottom of his rudely con structed bark can oe , on
which he habitually keeps a fire burn in g. He prepares a tin der of dried moss or fungus ,
which is readily ign ited by the spark struck from a flin ty ston e by mean s o f a pyrites .
The invaluable discovery i s shared by the lowest races . The Australian , the An daman
Islander, and other rudes t t ribes of the O ld and the New World , possess the same great
secret , and turn i t to useful accoun t .
The tradit ion may have been perpetuated from gen eration to gen eration from the
remotest dawn of human reason ; or it may have been re-disco v ered indepen den tly among
diverse races . But wherever the Value of the pyrites in evoking the laten t spark of the
flin t was known,i t would be a cov eted prize , and a valuable obj ect of barter . The story
of the old fire-makers i s recorded sti ll in the charcoal ashes of many an an cien t hearth for
charcoal is on e of the most in destructible of substan ces when buried. In the famous
Ken t’s Hole l imeston e cavern at Torbay,Devon shire , explorers have systematical ly pur
sued research backward from the specifically dated stalagm itic record of Robert Hodges ,of Irelan d , Feb . 20 , through Saxon , Roman ,
British, and Neolithic strata, to the
deposit where human remain s lay embedded alongside o f those of the woolly rhinoceros ,the mammoth
,the fossi l horse
,the hyen a and cave bear . There also lay , n ot on ly the
fin ished implemen ts,but the flakes and flin t cores that revealed the workshop of the
primitive tool -maker,and the charcoal that preserved the traces of his an cien t fire . 8 0 ,
too , in the Cromagnon rock-shelter of the Perigord,in an upper valley of the Garonn e ,
repeated layers of charcoal,in terspersed w ith broken bon es and other cul in ary remain s
of the an cien t cave-dwellers,tel l of the kn ow ledge and use of fire by palaeol ithic man
,
in western Europe ’s Rein deer and Mammoth ages . Compared w i th such disclosures of
the arts and kn owl edge of primeval man , the discoveries on which the Dan i sh archaeo
logist s based their systematisin g of prehistoric remain s belong , geologically speaking, tomodern eras . Denmark is un derlaid essen ti al ly by Upper Cretaceous rocks , the E tage
Dan ien of most Fren ch writers,and the Faxoe Kelke of German geologi sts . Dri ft clays
and gravel s overli e the cretaceous rocks in many places,w i th more recen t deposits of
san ds , gravels , etc . These latter are of Neol ithic age , con tain ing bon es on ly of ex istin gmammals . Palaeolithic deposits
,w ith bon es of extin ct species , do n ot appear to h ave been
recogn ized in Denmark ; nor i s there any trace of the presen ce of paleeolithic man .
Hen ce the field al ike of Dan i sh an tiquarian research and archaeological speculat ion was
6 2 SIR DAN IEL WILSON
greatl y circumscribed . But thus precluded from the study of primitive arts in that vague
Palaeol i th ic dawn which lies outside of the speculation s of the historian ,and from any
resor t to cl assical authorit i es for eviden ce in the in terpretation of local disc losures , theDan i sh an tiquary escaped the temptation to many misleading assumption s which longperplexed the archaeologists of Fran ce and E nglan d and so his l imited ran ge has ten ded
to facil itate the investigation s in to subsequen t disclosures relative to the an t iquity of
man and his arts .
Within the old Roman provinces of western Europe, the Latin con querors were n o t
on ly accredited w ith whatever showed any trace o f Hellen ic or Roman art, but w i th the
sole skill in work ing in iron . The Dan e and Northm an were assumed to have followed
in their wake w ith b ron ze,as w ith run es and other essen ti al ly n on -cl assical products
though stil l the beautiful leaf- shaped sword and other choicest rel ic s of the Bron ze age
were n ot in frequen tl y ascribed to the Roman s . But philologists had not yet assign ed a
place to the Celt ic in the Aryan fami ly of lan guages . The Celt w as n ot on ly assumed to
be the barbarous precursor,al ike of Roman and Dan e , but to be the primeval man of
western Europe . Hen ce when the first hoards o f palaeol ithic flin t implem en ts were acciden tal ly discovered in Sussex and Ken t , th eir Celt ic or British origin was as sumed w ith
out question . Bu t the known historic position of the Northman on Scan din avian soil
preven ted the crude application of the term Dan i sh” to every bron ze rel ic found there
and as n o Roman con queror had trodden the soi l of Denmark , the ethn ology as wel l as thearchaeology of t he region was left un affected by complex i ties resulting from the presen ceo f the Roman s in Gaul and Britain . The absen ce of remain s o f palaeol i thic man still
further simplified the problem ; while the geology of the Dan i sh pen in sula favoured
the n eolithic tool-maker . F l in t aboun ds there in amorphous n odul es or blocks , and the
nuclei , or cores , from which a succession of flakes have been struck , are of frequen t occur
ren ce amon g the rel ics of the Dan ish Ston e age . Fl in t i s no less abundan t throughout
the region s of Fran ce and England , on either side of the Engl ish Chann el ; and there ,accordingly
,al ike in the caves and the r iver-drift , the rude , massive flin t implemen t s of
the Palaeol ithic era abound .
The n atural cleavag e of fl in t,as al so of the obsidian foun d in certain locali ti es in
the O ld and New World , so readily adapts bo th m aterials to the manufacture of kn ives ,lan c es
,and arrow-heads , that they appear to have been turn ed to accoun t by the tool
maker from the dawn of rudest art . But it must no t be overlooked that obsidian i s
l im i ted to volcan i c region s, and fl in t i s n o more un iversally availab le than bron ze or iron .
I n some coun tries it is rare ; in sti ll more i t i s en tirely wan t in g ; and yet its pecul iar apt itude for tool-making appears to have b een recogn ized at the earli est period ; so that implemen ts and weapon s of flin t
, alike of the Palae olithic and the Neolith ic age, abound in
many local ities where the raw material of the tool-maker is unknown .
I t was on l y n atural that the system ati c study and classificat ion of the manufactures
of the an cien t workers in flin t should b e first carried out in region s such as the Dan i shpen in sula, geologically rel ated to the Cretaceous period , and abounding in the material
which most readily adap ts itself to the requiremen t s o f an implemen t-maker ignoran t o f
the ar ts of met allurgy . But the same in exhaustibl e store of raw mat erial was available
to the Fl in t-folk” whose implemen ts have become so famili ar by reason of more recen t
di sclosures o f Fran c e and England b elonging to a period when the climate, the physical
6 4 SIR DAN IEL ‘VI LSON
any matter of surpri se to be told o f the discovery of a palaeoli thic Workshop -floor of
the Drift period,n ear Eal ing . I t lay about a hundred feet above the presen t bed of the
Thames ; and here,s ix feet below the surface , on an an cien t slopin g bank of the river, an
area o f about forty feet square disclosed n early six hundred un abraded worked flin t s ,
in cluding n eatly fin ish ed spear heads from hy e to s ix in ches long . A long side of these
l ay roughly wrought axes,chipped on one or both s ides to a cuttin g edge
,and s om e o f
them unfin ish ed . There were also flin t flakes, some w ith serrated edges , and w el l
fin ished kn ives , borers , dr ills , chisels , etc . Waste flakes and chippin gs , as wel l as cores ,or parti ally wo rked blocks of flin t , w ere also observed in sufficien t numbers to leave n o
doubt that here , in the pl ace of their manufacture , l ay buried ben eath the accumulat ion s
o f unnumbered cen turies industrial products of the skil led art iz an s of the Brit ish Islands
con temporary w ith the long-extinct Quatern ary faun a .
1
The types of flin t implemen t s,found at Hoxn e in 1 7 97 , correspond to other palaeol iths
recovered from rolled gravel and clay of the gl aci al drift in the valleys of the Thames , the
Somme and the Sein e . I n their massive and artless ruden ess they seem to realiz e for us
some fit ideal of the primitive fabricator in his first efib rts at tool-making . But the
E alin g find accords w ith the more extended discoveries of this cl ass . In real ity,the
mauufactures of palaeol i thi c man,as a whole
,are less artless than many examples of
modern In dian flin t -work . Not a few of the ston e axes have had their shape determin ed
by that of the water-worn ston es out of which they were fashioned, and so required
much l ess skil l than was n ecessarily expen ded in chipping the flin t n odule in to the rudest
of poin ted implemen ts . Any clos e-grain ed rock , admi tting of grin din g and poli sh , was
available for fashion ing the largerweapon s and domestic implemen ts , al ike among the men
o f the Neol ithic age and the n ative races of the American con tin en t in modern cen turi es .
For man y of the simpler requirements of the tool -user, any apt ston e chip or water-worn
pebble sufii ced ; and scarcely anything can be con ceived of more rude or artles s than
some of the ston e weapon s and implemen ts in use among savage tribes at the presen
day . Prof. Joseph Leidy describes a scraper employed by the Shoshon e Indian s in
dressing buffalo skin s , con sistin g of a thin segmen t of quartzite , so devoid of man ipulative
skill that , he says , had he n oticed it among the strata o f indurated cl ays and s andston e,in stead o f s eeing it in actual use , he would have regarded i t as an acci den tal Spaw l .
2
Dr . Charles C. Abbot t,in his Primitive Industry of the Native Races ,
”furn i shes
illustration s of poin ted flakes,or arrow t ips
,trian gular arrow heads
,spear heads , and
other ston e implemen ts,on ly a littl e less rude and shapeless .
3 Of a simi lar ch aracter
i s the blade of a w ar-club in use among the Indian s of the Rio Frio , in Texas .4 Nothin g
so rude has been ascribed to art ificialorigin amon g the disc losures of the drift , thoughcorrespondin g implemen ts may have escaped n otice ; for w ere it n o t that the chipped
piece of trachyte of the Texas w ar-club is in serted in a wooden haft of unm i stakable
human workman ship,the blade would scarcely suggest the idea of artificialorigin . Mere
ruden ess,therefore
,i s n o c ertain eviden ce of the first artless efforts of man to furn i sh him
sel f w i th tool s .
Un ti l we arrive at the period o f n eoli thic art , wi th it s perforated hammers , grooved
2 Athenaeum,Dec. 18 , 1886 . U . S Geolog ical Survey , 18 72 , p. 65 "
2 Prim itive Industry , hgs. 241 , 254, 29 2 , 295 , &c . E van s’
Stone Implements , fig. 94 .
ON THE STONE AGE . 6 5
axes,n et -sinkers , gouges , adzes , and numerous other ground and polished implemen ts,
fashion ed of gran ite, diorite , trap , and other ign eous rocks , the form s of implemen ts are few
and simple, depen den t to a l arge exten t on the n atural cleavage of the flin t . The com
mon er examples of n eoli thic ar t,r ecovered in thousands from ancien t Scan din avian ,
Gaulish and Bri tish graves , from the lake-dwellings of Sw itzerl an d , the Dani sh and
British shell mounds,the peat mosses of Denmark and Irelan d , and from numerous other
depositories of prehistoric industrial art , are scarcely distin guishable from the flin t kn ives ,scrapers
,spears and arrow heads
,or the chi sels and axes , manufactured by the Indian s
of this con tin en t at the presen t day . The material available in certain local iti es , such asthe clayston e of t he Haida and Bab een Indian s
,and the argilli te of the old implem ent
makers of New Jersey,the obsidian of Mexi co , or the quartz , j asper, and green ston e of
many Can adian cen tres , give a spe ific character to the implemen t s of the various region sbut , on the whole , the arts of the Ston e period of the most diverse races and eras presen t
strikin g an alogies,scarcely less suggestive of the operation of a tool-making in st in ct than
the work of the n est—builders,or the ingen ious art of the beaver . But the massive and
extremely rude implemen t s of the river drift and caves presen t essen t ially differen t types ,con trol led in deed
,l ike the production s of later artificers by the n atural cleavage and
other essen t ial properties'
of the material in which the flin t -worker wrought but w ith
som e characteristic differen ces , suggestive of habits and condition s of l ife in which the
art ificer of the Mammoth or Rein deer period differed from the tool-maker of Europe’s
Neolith ic age,or the Indian savage of modern cen turi es .
The tool-bearing drift-gravel of Fran ce and England pres en t s i ts relics of primitiveart in term ingled w ith coun tless amorphous unwrought fiin t s . Both have been subj ected
to the viol en t action of floods, to which the presen t condition of such geological depos its
i s due ; and many con ten t s of the -caves,though subj ected to les s Violen ce , are th e results
of sim il ar causes . But, along w i th n um erous implemen t s of the rude drift type, the
shel tered recesses of the caves have preserved, no t on ly the smaller and more delicate flin timplemen ts , but carefully wrought tool s and weapon s of bon e , horn and ivory . Some, at
least,of these undoubtedly belon g to the Palaeol ithic age ; and therefore ten d to verify
con clusion s , n ot on ly as to the mechan ical ingenuity , but also as to the in tellectual capaci ty of the earl iest tool -makers . The large almon d and ton gue-shaped flin t implemen ts are
so massive as to have effectually resi sted the violen ce to which they, along w ith othercon ten ts of the rolled gravels in whi ch they occur, were subjected ; whereas i t is on ly inthe favoring shelter of the caves , or in rare primitive sepulchral deposits, that del icatetrimmed flakes and the more perishabl e implemen t s of bon e and ivory, or horn , have
‘
escaped destruction .
The palaeol ithic implem en t s to which Boucher de Perthes directed atten tion so
'
earlyas 1 840 , were recovered from drift gravel b eds , where amorphous flin t n odules , both wholeand fractured , aboun d in coun tless numbers ; and thi s ten ded to suggest very reason able
doubts as to the art ificialorigin of the rude implemen t s lyin g in close proxim ity to them .
Nor was this in credul ity l ess en ed by the sign ifican ce assign ed by him to other con ten t so f the sam e drift gravel . For so far is Boucher de Perthes from overlookin g the endless
variety of fractured pieces of flin t recoverable from the drift beds , that his n arrative issupplemen ted by a series of plates of
“ L’
Indu strie primitive ,” the larger n umber o f
which presen t chipped flin ts so obviously the mere products of acciden tal fracture or of
Sec. II, 1889. 9 .
6 6 .SIR DAN IEL WILSON
weathering, that they con tributed in no slight degree to discredi t the book on its first
appearan ce . O thers of them , however , show true flakes, scrapers , and fragmen ts probablyreferable to smaller implemen ts of the sam e class , such as would be recogn ized w ithouthesitation to be o f art ificialorigin if foun d alongside of undoubted flin t implemen ts in a
cave deposit,or in any barrow , cis t, or s epulchral urn . In so far as they belong to the
true Drift,and no t to the Neolithic or the Gallo-Roman period, they ten d to confirm the
idea that the large almon d and tongue- shaped implemen ts are not the sol e rel ics of palaeol ithic art .
But n ow that adequate atten t ion has been given to the ston e implemen ts of the Dri ftfolk, or the men of the Mammoth and Reindeer ages it becomes apparen t that they areby no mean s l im i ted to such localit ies . On the con trary, sites of n at ive m anufactoriesof flin t implemen ts , w ith abundan t remain s of the fractured debris of the an cient toolmakers ’ workshop
,some of which are described on a later page, have been di scovered
remote from any local i ty where the raw materi al could be procured . Un til the gun flin t
was superseded by the percuss ion cap,the material for its manufacture was procured by
sinking shaft s through the chalk un t il the beds of flin t suited for the purpose werereached . In this the modern flin t worker on ly repeated the pract ice of the primi tive toolmaker . A group of ancien t flin t pits at Cissbury, n ear Worthing, has been made very
familiar by the systematic exploration s of Colon el A . Lan e Fox . They occur in and
around on e of the aborigin al hil l -forts of Sussex , the n ame of which has been conn coted
w ith Ci s sa, the son of E lla, who is referred to by Camden as Saxon king of those parts .
But any occupation of the old hill-fort as a Saxon stronghold belongs to very recen t timeswhen compared w ith that of the flin t workers, whose pits have attracted th e n otice ofmodern explorers . Colon el Lan e Fox describes Cissbury H ill Fort as a great flin t arsen al .Here w ithin it s earthen ramparts the workmen who fash i on ed the arms of the Ston e ageexcavated for the beds of n at ive flin t in the underlying chalk, and industriously workedit in to every variety of weapon . I n one place a collection of large flakes might be seen ,
where eviden tly the first rough outl in e of a flin t implemen t had been formed . I n an other
place,a quan tity of smal l flakes showed where a celt had been brought to perfection by
m inute and careful chippin g .
”I n other excavation s the pounders
,or ston e h ammers
,were
found , w ith a smooth roun ded end by which th ey w ere held in the hand , and the otherbruised and fractured in the manufacture of the flin t implemen t s that abound on the samesite .
2 Tw en ty-fiv e pits were explored and from these , hundreds of worked flin ts were
recovered in every stage of workman sh ip— chips , flakes , cores , ball s , and fin ished kn ives
dri ll s,scrapers , spear heads and axes or celts . I n fact
, Col. Lan e Fox sums up his gen
eral statemen t of detail s w ith the remark that Cissbury has produced specimen s of n early
every type known to have been found among flin t implemen t s,from the Drift and Cave
up to the Surface period ,” 3 But this Woolw ich" of the flin t age occupied an altogether
exception al posit ion , w ith the raw material immediately un derlyin g the mil itary
en closure, n ot improbably con structed on purpose to defend the primitive arsen al andworkshop
, and so ren der its garri son in dependen t of all foreign supplies .
O ther flin t pits poin t to the labours of the in dustr ious min er, and the probable tran s
port of the raw material to distan t local ities where the prized flin t could on ly be procured
2 Archaeologia, xln . 72 2 Ib id., p. 68 .
3 I b id. , p. 68 .
6 8.
SIR DAN IEL WILSON
every fracture, adapt it for fashion ing the smaller k ifiv es , lan ce and arrow heads, in a w ay
n o other material except obsidi an equals . Hen ce flin t appears to have“
b een'
n o less in
request amon g the an cien t tool-makers than copper, t in ,and iron in the later periods of
metallurgic art .
The fact that t in i s a metal of rare occurren ce, though foun d in n early in exhaustibl e
quan tit ies in som e region s , has given a peculiar sign ifican ce to certain historical r esearches ,apart from the spec i al in terest inv olv ed in the processes oi
'
the hrimit iv e m etal lurgist , andthe w idely diffused traces of workers in bron ze . The comparative rarity o f flin t , and i ts totalabsen ce in man y l ocali ties , suggest a l ike enquiry in to the probable sources o f i ts supply
in region s remote from its n at ive deposit s . The flin t lan ce or arrow-head, thrown by an
en emy,or wrested from the grasp of a van quished fee, w ould , as in the case of improved
weapon s of war in many a later age , first in troduce the prized materi al to the n otice ofl ess favoured tribes . A s the prim itive tool-maker learn ed by experien ce the gr eateradaptabi lity of flin t than o f most other s ton es for th e man ufacture of his weapon s and
implemen t s, i t may be assumed that i t became an object of barter in local iti es remotefrom those where i t aboun ds ; and thus
,by its diffusion
,it may have con st ituted a
recognized form of pecum’
a ages before the barter of past oral tribes gave ris e to the
peculiar sign ifican ce attached to that term .
One pi ece of confirmatory eviden ce o f trade in_unwrought flin t i s
i
the frequen t
occurren ce of numerous fl in t flakes amon g the prized gift s deposited w i th the dead .
Can on Greenwell describes , among the con ten ts of a Yorksh ir e barrow in the parish of
Gan ton,a deposit of flin t flakes and chippin gs numbering on e hun dred and eighteen ,
alon g w ith a fewfin ished scrapers and arrow-heads ;2and small er deposits of l ike kin d are
repeatedly n ot ed by h im . St il l more , he describes their occurren ce under circumstan ceswhich suggest th e probabil i ty of the scattering of flin t flakes, l ike an offering o f curren tcoin ; by the mourn ers , as the primitive grave was covered in and the memorial moundpi led over the sacred spot . F l in t s and potsh erds
,he says
,occur more con stan tly ,
and
even more abun dan tly than bon es ; and this presen t s to his mind a difficult problem ,in
con siderin g which he refers to an an alogous pract ice of a very diverse age . The maimed
rites at poor Ophel ia’s grave are familiar to the reader of Hamlet . ” The priest replies
to the deman d of Laertes for more ample ceremony at his sister ’s burial
But that great command e’ersway s the order
She should in ground. unsanct ified have lodged’Ti l l the last trumpet ; for charitable pray ers ,Shards
,fiin ts, and pebbles should be thrown on her.
The fiin t s and potsherds , Can on Greenwell remarks , occur at t imes in very large
quan tit ies , the flin t s gen eral ly in t he shape ofmere chipping’
s and waste pieces , b u t often
as manufactured articles , such as arrow poin ts , kn i v es , saws , dri lls and scrapers, etc . He
further n otes that they are foun d distributed throughout the sepulchral mound,in some
in stan ces in such quan t ities as to suggest the idea that the person s who were engaged inthrow ing up the barrow ,
scattered them from t ime t o time during the process .
” A ssuredly
whatev er motive actuated those who con tributed such objects while the sepulchral mound
2 Bri t i sh Barrows , p. 166 .
. ON THE STONE AGE . 6 9
was in progress of erection ,they w ere n ot designed as any slight to theman es of the dead .
In districts remote from those where the flin t abounds , flakes an d chips of the prized
material must have been in con stan t deman d to replen ish the sheaf of arrows , and replace
the lost or broken l an ce , kn ife , and scraper . The trader would barter the raw material for
furs and other equivalen ts or the industrious m in er would carry off an adequate supply
for his own future use . Such small objects, possessing a un iversal ly appreciable value ,would be as avai l able for curren t change as the African cowrie , the q ua shells of the
Pacific coast,or the wampum-beads o f the tribes to the east of the Rocky Mountain s . I f
thi s assumpt ion be correct , the scattering of fl in t flake s , while the moun d was being piled
ov er th e grave,was a form of largess n ot less sign ifican t than any l ater tribute of rever
en ce to the dead .
The s ources when ce such supplies of raw material of the old fiint -worker were
derived , have been sufficien tly explored to fu1 n ish confirmatory eviden ce of some , at least ,of the deduction s suggested by other indication s thus far n oted . The archaeologists
of Europe are now familiar w ith many local i ties which have been the quarries and
workshops , as well as the settled abodes , of palaeol ithic and n eol ith ic man ; n or are such
unknown to us in the New World,though research has to be greatly exten ded before
defin it e con clusion s can be accepted relative to the earliest presen ce o t man on the American
con tin en t . Fl in t and ston e implem en ts of every variety of form ,and n early every degree of
ruden ess , aboun d in the soi l of the New World . But in estimating the true sign ifican ce
of such eviden ce , i t has to be born e in remembran ce that its indigen ous populat ion has noteven now abandon ed the arts of their Ston e period . Implemen ts have already beenreferred to sti ll in use amon g the Shoshon e , Texas , and other l iving tribes , ruder thanany yet recovered from the river-drift of Fran ce or England ; whilst others , more n early
resemblin g the palaeol ithic types , have been met w i th on this con t in en t , some of t hem
imbedded in the an ci en t rolled gravels , or glacial drift , and“associated wi th the bon es of
the mastodon and other foss ilmammals . But the e v iden ce as to their an t iquity or palaeol ithic origin has been ,
at best,doubtful . Ah imperfect flin t kn ife , n ow in the museum of
the Un iversity of Toron to , was recovered from a depth of upwards of fourteen feet , among
rolled gravel and gold bearing quartz o f the Grinn elLeads i n Kan sas Territory . Fl in t
implemen ts from the auriferous gravel of Cal iforn i a were produced at the Pari s Expositionof 185 5 . Accordin g to the Geological Survey of I l l in ois for 1 866 , ston e axes andflin t spear
a
heads were obtain ed from a bed of local drift n ear Alton ,underlying the loess , and at the
same depth as bon es of the mastodon . Sim i lar discoveries have been repeatedly n oted in
Southern States . The river Chattahoochee , in G eorgia, in its course down the Nacoochee
valley , flows through a rich auriferous region . Explorers in search for g old have made
exten sive cuttings through the un derlying drift-gravel , down to the slate rock upon
which it rests and during on e of these excavation s , at a depth of n in e feet , in termin gled
w ith'
the gravel and boulders of t he drift, three large implemen ts W ere foun d , n early
resembling the rude flin t hatchet s of the drift type . Such examples , howev er, thoughrepeatedly noted, ha1 e, thus far, been too i solated to admit of thei r u se for any suchcomprehen sive induction s as the disclosures of the glat 1ald1 ift of n0 1 th-w este1 n Europe
have j ust ified. The eviden ce hitherto adduced, W hen the implemen ts o f this class have
been of flint, has fai led to establi sh their palaeol i thic age , n otw i thstanding their recovery
from an cien t gravels . Implemen ts of fl in t occur in great abun dan ce throughout vast
7 0 SIR DANIEL WILSON
areas of thi s con t in en t . With the fact before us that even n ow the Ston e peri od of it s
aborigin es has n ot wholly passed away , carefu l observat ion i s required in determin in g
the probabl e age of stray specimen s buried even at con siderable depths .
Bu t di sclosures of an actual American implemen t-bearing drift appear at length to
have been met w i th in the valley of the Delaware . These show the primit ive tool-maker
resorting to a granular argill ite , the cleavage of which adapted itself to the requiremen ts
o f his rude art . Prof. Shaler, in a report on the age of the Delaware gravel beds,describes this formation as occurring from V irgin ia n orthward to Labrador, though
it i s on ly in New Jersey and Delaware that the accompany ing eviden ces of human
art have been thus far recovered . The New Jersey dri ft is m ade up of tran sportedmateri al
,in cluding boulders and smaller fragmen t s of gran iti c , hypogen e , san dston e . and
l imeston e rocks,along w ith water-worn pebbles of the same granular argill ite as the
characteri sti c s ton e implemen ts recovered from it,to which , from their peculiar shape, the
n ame of“ turtle-back celts” has been given . There i s l itt le true clay in the deposit to
give coheren ce to the mass . The type of pebble i s subovate , or discoidal , suggesting it sform to be due to the action of runn in g water ; and i t seems probable that the ston e
was n ot quarried out of the l iving rock , but that the pebbles thus reduced to a con
v en ien t form were turn ed to accoun t by the tool-maker . The researches of Dr . Abbott
have been rewarded b y the discovery in the drift-gravel of numerous examples o f this
peculiar type of implemen t , for which the one m aterial appears to have been used , not
w ithstanding the varied con ten ts of the drift-gravel in whi ch they occur . A s in the cas e
of the Fren ch and English river dri ft,the fractured m aterial is found in every stage of
disin tegration . Prof. Shaler says A long w ith the perfect - looking implemen tsfigured by Dr . Abbott , which are apparen tly as cl early art ificialas the well-known
remain s of the val ley of the Somme , there are all grades of imperfect fragmen t s , down to
the pebbles that are w ithout a t race of chipping .
”But more recen t discoverie s in the
Delaware valley poin t to palaeol ith ic remain s of a sti l l earl i er age . The disclosures ofDr. Abbott n aturally attracted atten tion to the region ; for there, for the first time , the
American archaeologist saw the prom i s e of di scl osures corresponding in character to thoseo f the European drift-gravels . A systematic and prolon ged series of in vestigation s have
accordingly been carried ou t byM12 Hilborn eT. Cresson ,under the direction of the Peabody
Museum , resulting in fresh disclosures of early Am eri can man . The Naaman ’s Creek rock
shelt er carefully explored by h im,i s s ituated in the St at e of Del aware, immediately to the
south of Mason and Dixon ’s lin e . There in underlyin g deposi ts , claimed to be of Post
Glaci al age, rudely chipped poin t s and other implemen ts , al l o f argill ite , were found ; and
at a higher level,others of argillite
,but in termingled w ith bon e implemen ts , and frag
men ts of rude pottery,and alongside of these implemen ts fashion ed of quartzite and
j asper . The an tiquity assign ed to the Delaware implemen t s , as determin ed by the age of
th e tool-bearing gravel i s much greater than that of the Tren ton gravels previously
r eferred to ; but though remain s of fift een differen t spec ies of an imals , including
fragmen t s of a human skul l , were recovered from the cave or rock-shelter, they in clude
n on e but ex i sting faun a . But the eviden ce of an tiqui ty is based most confiden tly on the
discovery of palaeol iths in si tu in the true Philadelphia red-gravel . Prof. G . F . Wright
remarks,in discussing the rel ative ages of the Tren ton and Philadelphia red gravel ,
that bo t h he and Prof. Lewi s came to the same con clusion ; assign ing the deposit ion of
7 2 SIR DAN IEL WILSON
and appearto in dicate the site of an ab origin al workshop,w ith on e of the tools of the
an cien t arrow -maker, who here fashion ed his implements and w eapon s , and traded withthem to supply the n eed of the old Huron or Petun Indian s of wes tern Can ada . The
Spider Islands in Lake W in n ip eg, n ear the outl et , have been n oted by Dr . Robert Bell , as
a favourite resort of the old workers in fl in t,where they could trade the products of their
industry w ith part ies of Indian s pass ing in their can oes . I have found ,” he says
,
“ a
con s iderable number of n ew flin t implemen t s , al l of one pattern ,in a grave n ear one of
those sites of an -old factory ; the body of a man — presumably the old arrow-maker
had been buried there in a sitting position,surrounded w ith the latest products o f his
in dustrious skil l .
In 1 875 I devoted several weeks to a careful study of some of the prin cipal groups
o f an cien t earthworks in the Ohio val ley,and visited F lin t R idge to examin e the n ativeflin t pi t s in the coun try of the Shawn ees . They w ere formerly a numerous and powerful
tribe of Indian s . But they teok part,in 1763 , in the con spiracy of Pon tiac , and were
n early exterminated in a battle fought in the Vicin ity of their o ld quarries . From thesei t i s probab le that no t on ly the Shawn ees , but the older race of Mound-Builders Of
the Ohio valley,procured the material from which they manufactured many of their
implemen ts,in cluding some of those used by the latter, in the con struction of th eir great
earthworks .
Fl in t Ridge , as the l ocal ity is called, a s il iceous depos it of the Carbon iferous age ,extends through the state of Ohio , from Newark to New Lexington . I t has been worked
at various poin t s in search of the priz ed material and the an cien t pits can st i l l be recog
n iz ed over an exten sive area by the funn el-shaped hollows , or sl ighter depression s wherethe accumulat ed vegetable mould of many w int ers has n early
.
eff’
aced the traces of theold min ers . The chert , or horn ston e , of thi s local ity accords w ith that from which theimplemen ts recovered from the moun ds appear to have been ch iefly made . On e fact which
such disclosures place beyond doubt , v iz .
,that the se -called Mound-Builders h ad n ot
advan ced beyon d the stage o f flin t or s ton e implemen ts , i s of great significan ce . Their
numbers are proved by the extent o f their earthworks in many local ities in the Ohioval ley ; and the con sequen t supply of implemen ts n eeded by them as builders must haveinvolved a con st an t demand for the flin t -min ers and tool -makers . The great earthworksat Newark are among the most exten sive structures of this class , covering an area of
Several miles , and characteri zed by the perplexing elemen t of el aborate geometri calfigures, executed on a gigan tic scale by a people st il l in the primitive stage of s ton e
implement s and yet giving proof of skill fully equal ling, in the execution of their geo
metrical design s , that of the scien t ific l and-surv eyor . On this speci al aspect of the ques
tion , i t may be well to revert to n ot es written immediately after a careful survey of the
Newark earthworks, so as to suggest more clearly their exten t and the con sequen t numberof workmen and of tools in deman d for their execut ion . The sacred en closures have tobe classed apart from the mil itary works of the Moun d-Builders . Their elaborate fortifi
cation s occupy isolated heights speci ally adapted for defen ce ; whereas the broad riverterraces have been selected for their rel igious works . ‘ There
, on the great unbroken l evels ,they form groups of symmetrical en closures
,square , circular, ell ipti cal , and octagon al ,
conn ected by long parall el avenues , suggesting an alogies w ith the Brit ish Avebury , the
Breton Carn ac , or even w ith the temples and sphin x-avenues of the Egyptian Karnak and
ON THE STONE AGE . 7 8
Luxor : but al l wrought of earth , w i th the simpl e tools made from quartzite , chert orh orn ston e , derived from quarries and fiin t-pits, such as thos e of Fl in t Ridge, the local itiesof which have been iden t ified.
For a time the ten den cy among American archaeologists was to exaggerate thean tiquity of those works, and to over-est imate the artist ic skill of their builders . But i tn ow appears that some vague memories of the race have been perpetuated . The tradition s
of the Delawares preserved the remembran ce of the Talligew or Tallegew i, a powerfuln ation whose western borders exten ded to the Mi ssi ss ippi , over whom they , in conjun ct ion
w ith the fierce warrior race o fWyandots or Iroquois , triumphed . The old n ame of the
Mound-Builders i s believed to survive,in modified form ,
in that of the A lleghany Moun
tain s and River ; and the Chatta Muskogee tribes , in cluding the Choctaws , Ch ickosaws,
the Nat chez, and other southern Indian s of the same stock , are supposed to represen t the
an c ien t race . The Natchez claimed that , in their more prosperous days, they had fiv e
hun dred vil lages,and their borders exten ded to the Ohio . W ith such assignmen t of an
affin ity to kn own Indian n ation s,the vague idea of some stran ge prehistoric American
race of unkn own an t iquity van ishes ; and the latter tenden cy has been rather to underestimate their distin ctive peculiarities . Some of these seem to separate them from any
Indian tribe (if which definit e accoun t s have been preserv ed . Special features significan t
of such differen ce are worthy of n ote and foremost among these i s the eviden ce of com
prehen s ive design,and of scien tific skill in the con struction of their sacred en closures .
The predomin an t impression suggested by the great military earthworks of the Mound
Builders is that of a people cooperating under the guidan ce of approved leaders , w i th a
view to the defen ce of l arge commun it i es . E laborate fortificat ions are erected on well
chos en hills or bluffs,and strengthen ed by ditches, mounds , and compl icated approaches
but the l in es of earthwork are everywhere adapted to the n atural features of the site .
The sacred en cl osures are, on the con trary, con structed on the l evel river- terraces w i th
elaborate artificiality of design ,but on a scale of magn itude n ot l ess imposin g than that
of the largest hil l-forts . On first en tering the great circle at Newark , and looking across
its broad tren ch at the lofty embankmen t overshadewed w ith full -grown forest trees,my
thoughts reverted to the An ton in e vallum,which by like eviden ce sti l l records the pre
sen ce of the Roman masters of the world in North Britain sixteen hundred years ago .
But after driving over a circuit of s everal m i l es , embracin g the remarkable earthworks ofwhich that is on ly a single feature ; and satisfying myself by person al observation of the
exi sten ce of parallel avenues which have been traced for n early two m i les ; and of thegrand oval
,circles
, and octagon ,the smallest of which measures upwards of half-a-mile
in circumferen ce : all idea o f mere combin ed labour is lost in the higher conviction of
man ifest skil l, and even sc ien ce . The octagon in deed is n ot a perfect figure . I ts angles
are n ot coin ciden t , but the sides are very n early equal ; and the en closure approaches soclosely to an accurate figure that i t s error i s on ly demon strated by actual survey . Con
n ec ted w ith it by paral lel embankmen t s 35 0 feet lon g , i s a true circle , measurin g
feet in c ircumferen ce an d distan t n early a mile from this , but conn ected w ith it by an
elaborate series of earthworks , i s the great circular structure previously referred to . I ts
actual form is an ell ipse ; the differen t diam eters of which are feet and feet ,respect ively ; and it en closes an area of upwards of thirty acres . At the en tran ce , theen closing embankmen t curves outward on either side for a dis tan ce of 1 0 0 feet , leavin g a
See. I I , _
1889 . 10 .
7 4 SIR DAN IEL WILSON
l evel way between the ditches,eighty feet w ide, and at this poin t i t measures about thirty
feet from the bottom of the di tch to the summ it . The area of the en closure i s almost perfectly l evel , so that durin g rain -floods the water stan ds at a un iform height n early to theedge of the ditch .
The skulls,both of the Palaeol ithic and Neoli thic periods of Europe , have been suc
cessfully appealed to for indication s of t he in tellectual capacity o f the an cien t races and
similar ev iden ce has been employed to test that of the Mound-Builders . Bu t an cien tmounds and earthworks were h abitual ly resorted to at long subsequen t dates as favourit epl aces of in termen t ; so that skull s derived from modern graves are no t in frequen t ly
ascribed to the an cien t race and much difficulty has been found in agreeing on a typical
moun d skull . Even after el im inat in g those derived from superficialin termen ts , a veryn oticeable diversity is foun d in the comparatively few undoubtedly genuin e mound
skulls,which
,as I long sin ce suggested , may be due to the actual presen ce of two essen
t ially dist in ct races among the an cien t settlers in the Ohio v alley.
l It seems to accordw ith the unmistakable traces of in tell ectual progress of a k in d foreign to the attainmen tsof any kn own race of the North Am erican con t in en t , thus foun d in as sociation w i th other
arts and methods of work n ot greatly in advan ce of those of the Indian savage . The
on ly satisfactory soluti on of the problem seems to presen t i tself in the assumption of theexi sten ce among them of a theocratic order, l ike the pri ests of an cien t Egypt , theBrahmin s of In dia, or
‘
the In cas of Peru , under whom the van i shed race of the Ohio
valley— Tallegew i, Natchez , Alleghan s, or other American aborigin es— executed their vastgeometrical earthworks w ith such mathematical accuracy .
The cont en ts of the earthworks of the Ohio and Missi ssippi Vall eys show that thecopper
,found in a pure metallic con dition at various poin ts aroun d Lake Superior , was
n o t unkn own to their con structors . But in this they had litt le advan tage over theIroquois and A lgonkin tribes , in whose grave-mounds copper axes and spear-heads
occasion ally occur . I t i s even possible that working parti es were despatched from timeto time to the an cien t copper min es on the Kew en aw pen in sula, to bring b ack supplies ofthe prized malleable rock , which could be ben t and hammered in to a shape that no otherston e was suscept ible of. But the labours of the n ative min ers were in adequate to provide suppl ies that could in any degree suffice to displace the [l in t or quartzite of theimplemen t maker . One use, however, has been suggested for the copper, in relati on tothe l abours of the h in t-workers . Mr. George E rcolSellers , whose r esearches among thew orkshops of the an cien t tool-makers have thrown much light on their processes
,w as
led,from careful observation of some of their unfin ished work , to the opin i on that cop
per was in special request in the operation s of the flin t -flakers . After referrin g to the
wel l-kn own use of horn or bon e-flakers, he thus proceeds From the n arrown ess of thecuts in som e of the specimen s , and the thickn ess of the ston e where they termin ate, Ihave in cl in ed to the bel ief that , at the period they were made, the Aborigin es had somethin g stron ger than bon e to operate w ith , as I have n ever been able to
.
imitate some of
their deep heavy cuts w ith it ; but I have succeeded by using a copper poin t , which possesses al l the properties of the bon e , in holdin g to its work wi thout slippin g, and has the
'
stren gth for direct thrust required .
” 2 No copper tool , however, was r ecovered by him
2 Preh i storic Man,3rd Ed. 11. 132. 2 Smithson ian Reports , part i ., 1885 , p. 880.
7 6 SIR DAN IEL WILSON
are overlaid by subsequen t accumulation s suggests a remote era . In 1 85 3 Mr. Sellersfirst visited the site of on e of those an cien t work yards
, on the n orthern ban k of the
Sal in e River, about three miles above i ts jun ction wi th the Ohio . The region was then
covered w ith den se forest, w i th the excepti on of a n arrow strip alon g the bank of the river,
which had been cleared in conn ecti on w i th recen tly open ed coal works . But at a later date ,in sinking a cistern , about two hundred yards from the river bank , the excavat ion was madethrough a mass of flin t chips . Subsequen tly heavy rain s , after ploughing, exposed some
spears and ar1 ow points . But i t was n ot un t i l the great flood of the w in ter of 1 862 and
1 863 that ov erflowed thi s ridge three or four feet w ith a rapid curren t , that the portion
un der cultivation on the river ban k was denuded , exposin g over six acres of what at first
appeared t o be a mas s of chips or ston e rub b i sh,but amongst it were found man y ham
merston es , celts , grooved axes , cores , flakes, almos t innumerable scrapers and other imple
men ts , and man y tyn es from the buck or stag, all of which bore ev iden ce of havin g been
scraped to a poin t . On exposure to the air they fell to pieces .” The actual sit e of the
quarry appears to have been sub sequen tly iden t ified. The greater number of cores ,scattered flakes, fin ished and unfin ished implemen ts
,are of the chert , from a depression
in a ridge three miles to the south-east,where there are abundan t in dication s o f large
quan titie s havin g been quarried .
” But the same great work-yard of the an cien t Mound
Builders furn i shed eviden c e of other sources of supply . Mr . Sellers n oted the finding a
few cores of the white chert from M issouri , and the red and yellow j asper of Ken tuckyand Tenn e ssee ,
” but he adds , the flakes of these have mostly been foun d in n ests or smali
caches , many of which have been exposed and in every cas e the flakes they con tain ed
were more or less worked on their edges whereas the flakes from the n eighborin g chert
preserved their sharp edges as when spl i t from the mass . These cache specimen s w ith
t heir worked serrated edges would , if foun d singly , be classed as saw s or cutting imple
men ts . But here where found in mass , eviden tly brought from a distan ce , to a placewhere harder chert of a much better character for cuttin g implemen ts abounds , they tella differen t story .
” The materi al was better adapted for the manufucture of certain classes
of small implemen ts much in demand , and the serrated edge is s imply the n atural resulto f the mode of workin g of this species of chert and of the j asper .
The fine-grain ed quartzit e was al so in request, espec i al ly for the manufac ture o f thelargest class of implemen ts , in cluding the hoes and spades , equally n eeded by the primi
t ive agriculturi s t, and by the n avvies to whose industrious toil the vast earthworks of
the Ohio valley are due . The site of the old quartzit e quarry appears to be about eightmiles from the banks of Sal in e River ; but there are many other local i t ies scatt ered
over the region extending from southern I l lin ois to the Mi ss i ssippi , where the sam e sub
st itu te for chert or horn ston e occurs . Some of the quartzi te hoes or spades measure six
teen in ches in l en gth , w ith a breath of from six to seven in ches,and evince a remarkable
amoun t of dexterity and ski ll in their manufacture . H ere , accordingly , i t becomes appar
en t that there was a time in the history o f thi s con tin en t . before i ts exi sten ce was revealed
to the race that now peoples the Ohio valley , when that region was the scen e of busyn ative industry, and i ts manufacturers quarried and wrought the chert , jasper, and“quartzite
, and traded the products of their skil l over an exten sive region . But the germs
of an in c ipien t n ative civil i zation were trodden out by the in roads of savagewarriorsfrom the n orth and the t own s an d vil lag es of the in dustrious commun ity were replaced
ON THE STONE AGE . 7 7
by what appeared to La Salle , the discoverer and first explorer of Ohio River, as the
prim eval forest .
It throws an in terestin g l igh t on the industrial processes of the an c ien t flin t -workersto learn that , even in a region where the useful chert aboun ded , they w en t far afield in
search of o ther materials special ly adapted for some classe s o f implemen ts . They w ere
un question ably a settled commun i ty, in a higher s tage than an y o f the tribes found in
occupation of that or an y n eighbourin g region when first visit ed by European s . But
many tribes , both o f the Northern an d Southern States , habitually travelled far distan ces
to the sea coast,where still the an cien t shel l mounds attes t their presen ce . The routes
thus an nually pursued by the In dian s of the in t erior of Penn sylvan i a, for example , w ere
fami l iar to the early surveyors , and som e o f their trai ls un doubtedly marked the foot
prin ts of many gen erat ion s . I n traversing those routes , as w el l as in their autumn al
en campmen ts on the coast , opportun ities were afforded of selecting suitable material s for
their ston e implemen ts from locali ties remote from their homes . The lin es of those old
trails have accordingly yielded n umerous examples of the wayfarers ’ weapon s and tools ,as wel l as of unfin ished implemen ts . We are apt to think of a people in their Ston e
period as merely turn ing t o accoun t material s lyin g as accessibl e to al l as the loose ston esemployed as miss iles by the vagran t school-boy . But such an idea i s man ifestly in ap
plicabl e, not on ly to the arts of commun iti es l ike those by whom the ear thworks of the
Ohio val ley were con structed, but to man y far older workers in flin t or ston e . The
Indian arrow-maker and the pipe-maker, it i s man i fest, often travelled to great distan cesfor the material best suited to their man ufactures ; and the use of fl in t or horn ston e
for slin gston es , l an ce and arrow heads , as well as for kn ives , scrapers , axes and other
domestic and agricultural tools , must have involved a con stan t deman d for fresh supplies .
It might be assumed,therefore
,apart from all direct eviden ce, that a regular syst em of
quarrying for the raw material bo th of the pipe and the implemen t-maker was pursued
and that by trade or barter the pipeston e of divers qualit ies , and the chert or horn ston e ,the quartzi te
,jasper and other useful min eral s , were thus furn i shed to tribes whose home
steads and hun ting groun ds yielded n o such n eedful supplies . But the same region
which aboun ds in such rem arkabl e eviden ces of the ingen i ous arts of a van i shed race,
also furn i shes to us the traces of the old min ers , by whose in dustry the flin t was quarried
and roughly chipped in to available forms for tran sport to distan t localiti es,or for barter
amon g the Moun d-Builders in the region traversed by the great river . At various point s
on Fl in t Ridge,Ohio
,and localities far beyond the l imits of that stat e , as at Leavenworth ,
t hree hundred m i les south of Cin c inn ati , where the grey flin t aboun ds , eviden ces of
systematic quarrying i l lustrate the character and exten t of thi s primitive commerce .
Funn el-shaped pits occur there , in many cases filled up w i th the accumulated vegetablemould of cen turies
,or on ly traceable by a slight depress ion in the surface of the groun d .
When cleared out,they exten d to a depth of, from four or fiv e , to n early twen ty feet . Ou
removing the mould, the sloping sides of the pi t are found to be covered w i th pieces o ffractured flin t
, in term in gled w ith unfin ished or broken implemen ts , an d w ith others
partial ly reduced to shape. The largest hoes and spades hitherto n oted appear to have b eenfashion ed of quartzite , but thos e o f most common occurren ce in Ohio and Ken tucky aremade of the grey flin t .or chert , which abounds in the Fl in t Ridge pits in blocks amplysuffic ing for the manufacture of tools upwards of a foot in length , such as may be assumed
7 8 SIR DANIEL WILSON
to have been employed in the con struction of the great earthworks . But the tran sporta
t ion of the unwrought blocks of horn s ton e to the workyards in the vall ey would have
involved great labour in the con struct ion of roads , as wel l as of sledges or waggon s
suited to such t raffic . I n l ieu of this,the accumulated waste chips in the quarri es show
the amoun t of l abour that was expended there in order to fac il it ate the tran sport o f theuseful materi al . Suitable flakes and chips w ere n o doubt also carried off to be turn ed to
accoun t for scrapers , kn ives and other smal l impl emen ts . Partial ly shaped disks and
other pieces of all sizes abound in the pits , but thefinerman ipulation ,by mean s o f which
small arrow-heads , lan ces , drills , scrapers , etc .
,were fashion ed
,was reserved for leisure
hours at home , and for the patien t labour o f the skil led tool-maker , for whose. use the rawmaterial was chiefly quarried .
In the tool-bearin g dri ft of Fran ce and Englan d the large characteristic flin t imple
men ts occur in beds of gravel and clay aboun ding in flakes and ch ips in every stage of
acc iden tal fracture, to some of which M . Boucher de Perthes assign ed an artificialorigin ,
and very fan ciful sign ifican ce . But if the palaeol i th ic fl in t-worker in any case quarried
for his material before the latest geological recon struction of th e beds of rol led gravel , the
fractured fiin ts may in clude traces of primeval quarrying,as well as of the tool-maker
’
s
l abours ; for the rolled—gravel beds occur in river vall eys best adapted to the habitat ofpost-glacial man .
I n a report furn ished to the Peabody Museum o f A rchae ology,by Mr. Paul
Schumacher , he con tributes some in terest ing eviden ce rel ative to the quarrying and manu
factures o f the ston e-workers of Southern Cal iforn ia . The Indian s o f the Pacific coast,south o f San Fran cisco , n ot on ly furn i shed themselves w i th ch isels , axes , and the like
class o t'
implemen t s, but W i th pots for culinary purposes , made of steatite, usually of a
green i sh grey colour. I n 1876 , Mr. Schumacher discovered various quarries of the oldpot-m anufacturers , w ith their tools and unfinished articles lyin g there . The softer ston e
had been used for pots , whi le the close-grained darker serpen tin e, was chiefly employed
in making the weights for diggin g sticks, cups , pipes , an d orn amen ts . I was struck ,he says
,
“on examin ing the local i ty through a field-glass , by the discovery of so many
silv erhued moun ds , the debri s of pits , t he rock quarries and open -air workshops , so that I
beli eved I had found the main factory o f the ol las of th e Cal iforn ia aborigin es . He also
discovered the slate quarry, where the rock had been broken off in irregul ar blocks , from
which the pieces best adapted for chisels were selected and fashion ed in to the forms
specially useful in m akin g the steati te pots . A ven erable Span i sh lady told Mr.
Schumacher that she recollected her mother tell ing her how the In dian s had brought
ollas in can oe- loads from the i slan ds in San t a Barbara Chan n el to the main l and , and there
exchanged them for such n ecessities as the isl an ders were in n eed of. Thi s tradition wassubsequen tl y confirmed by an old Mexican guide . Sim il ar eviden ce of sy stematic in dus
try w ith the accompanyin g trade , or b arter , meets the explorer at many poin t s from the
Gulf ofMexico n orthward to beyon d the Can adian lakes . The pyrulae from the Mex ican
Gul f are of frequen t occurren ce in Northern ossuaries and grave moundsiwhile correspon ding southern sepulchral deposits disclose the catlin i te o f the Couteau des Prairiesand the n at ive copper of the Lake Superior min es . Obsidian i s an other prized material
” I
1 Report of the Peabody Museum, 11 . 262 .
8 0 SIR DAN IEL WIL SON
An c i en t Monumen ts of the Missi ss ippi Valley , describe one of the mounds open ed bythem w ithin the great earthwork on the North Fork of Poin t Creek, in which , according
to their estimate , about four thousan d horn ston e discs were disposed in regular order,in successive rows overlapping each other. I n 1 864, I had an opportun ity of examin ing
some spec imen s retain ed in the posses sion ofD r. Davis . They were mostly discs measur
ing about s ix in ches long and four w ide , more or less oval , or broad spear-shaped, and
fashion ed out of a fin e gray flin t w i th con s iderable un iformity of character . Mr. Squier
assumed that the deposit was a religious offering ; but subsequent disclosures of a like
character confirm th e probabil i ty that it was a hoard of material stored for the tool
maker.
l
I n other, though rarer cases , the cache has been found con tain ing fin ished imple
men ts . In digging a cellar at Tren ton , New Jersey, a deposit of on e hundred and twen tyfin ished ston e axes was brought to light , at a depth of about three feet below the surface .An other discovery of a l ike character was made W hen digging for the con struct ion of a
receiving vault of the Riverview Cemetery, n ear Taun ton and similar deposits are recordedas repeatedly occurring in the same State .2 I n two in s tan ces al l the specimen s were
grooved axes . I n an other, fifty porphyry celts were foun d deposi ted in systemati c order .Mr. Charles Rau has given the subject special atten tion ,
and in a paper ent i tled An cien tAborigin al Trade in North America,
” he furn i shes eviden ce of addic t ion to certain manufactures , such as arrow -heads , hoes , and other digging tool s , spear-heads , chisels, etc . , byskil led n ative craftsmen .
3 Deposits closely corresponding to the on e reported. by Mr.
Squier as the sole con ten ts of on e of the mounds , in Clark ’s Work,
”Ohio , have been
subsequen t ly discovered in I ll inois , Wi scon sin , and Ken tucky . On e of the I ll in ois
deposits con tain ed about fifteen hundred leaf-shaped or roun ded discs of flin t arran ged in
fiv e hori zon tal l ayers . An other, said to have con tain ed three thousand fiv e hundred
specimen s , was discovered at Fredericksburg, in the same State . A smaller,but a more
interesting hoard was acciden tal ly brought to l ight in 1 868 , when some lab ourers in
open ing up a new street , at E ast St . Louis, in the same Stat e of I ll inois , came upon a collection of large flin t tools al l of the hoe and shovel type . There were about fifty of the
former and twen ty of the latter , made of a yel low i sh -brown flin t , and betraying no traces
of their having been used . Near by them lay several large unworked blocks of flin t andgreen - ston e , and many chippings , fragmen t s of flin t .
4 Deposits of a l ike character, butvarying both in the number and divers ity of their con ten t s , and,
in gen eral , show ing n o
traces of use, have been discovered in other States t o the east of the Mi ss issippi . In the
Smithson i an Report for 1877 , Mr. Rau prin ts a curious accoun t of The Stock in Trade of
an Aborigin al Lapidary . I n the spring of the previous year Mr. Keen an presen ted to thethe Nation al Museum at Washington a collec tion of j asper orn amen ts , mostly unfin ished,
which had been found in Lawren ce Coun ty, Mi s s iss ippi . They were brought to light inploughing a cotton field,
where a deposit was exposed,lying about two and a half feet
bel ow the n atural surface . It in cluded four hun dred and six ty-n in e obj ects , of whichtwen ty-two w ere unwrought j asper pebbl es ; on e hundred and one were beads of an elon
gated cylin drical shape, and a few of them partially perforated . O thers were orn amen ts ofvarious forms , in cluding two an imal - shaped obj ects . The whole were made of j asper of
1 Sm ith son ian Contributions to Knowledge, 158 .
2 Abbott’s Prim itive Industry, p. 33 .
3 Sm i thson ian Report, 18 72 .
4 Sm ithson ian Report, 1868 , p. 402.
ON THE STONE AGE . 8 1
a red or reddish colour, occasion al ly variegated w ith spots or streaks of pale yellow but
n early all were in an unfin ished state, and s o fully bore out the idea of their b eing the
stock in trade of some old n ative workman,who fin ished them in sufficien t numbers to
meet the demands of his customers .1
From time to t ime fresh disclosures prove the exten t to which such systematicin dustry was carried on . The collection s thus brought to light were unquest ion ably theresult of prolonged labour, and were, for the most par t , un doubtedly stored for purpos es
of trade . I n some cases they were probably accumulated in the arsen al of the tribe in
readin ess for war . But whether W e recogn ize in such discoveries the store of the trader,or the arsen al of the tribe
,they indicate ideas of providen t foresight altogether distin ct
from the desultory labours of the Indian savage in the preparation of his own indispen
sabl e supply of implemen t s for the chase or for war .But there were also
,no doubt , the home made weapon s and implemen ts , fashion ed
w ith pat ien t in dustry out of the large rolled serpen t in e , chalcedony , j asper and agate
pebbles,gathered from the sea-coast and river beds , or picked up wherever they chan ced
to occur . When camping out on Nepigon River, w ith Indian guides from the Saskatchewan ,
I observed them carefully collectin g pieces of a metamorphic rock , underlyin g the
syen ite cliffs , which , I learn ed from one of them ,was special ly adapted for pipes . This
they would carry a distan ce of ful ly eight hun dred mil es before reachin g their lodges onthe prairi e . Dr . Robert Bell described to me a pipe made of fine green serpen tin e which
he saw in the possession of an Indian on Nelson River . It s own er resis ted al l attempt sto induce him to part w ith it ; assign ing as a reason of its speci al value that it had been
brought from Reindeer Lake distan t several hundred miles n orth of Frog Portage , on
Churchil l River . The pipe was of a favorite Ch ippewayan patern . The diverse forms in
which various tribes shape the tobacco pipe are highly characteri sti c . In some cases thisi s -partly due to the texture and degrees of hardn ess of the material employed ; but therecovery of pipes of n early allthe very diverse tribal pattern s, made from the beaut ifulcatlin i te , or red pipe-ston e of the Couteau des Prairies , l eaves litt le room for doubt that
the ston e was tran sported in rough blocks and bartered by its quarriers to distan ttribes . This fiesh -colored rock has suggested the Sioux l egen d of its origin in the
flesh of the an tediluvian red men ,who peris hed there in the great deluge . It i s soft ,
of fin e texture,and easily wrought in to minutely varied forms of Indian art
,and
so was coveted by the pipe-m akers of w idely severed tribes . Hen ce red pipe-ston epipes of man y ingen ious forms of sculpture have been recovered from grave-moun ds
down the M is sissippi,eastward to the A tlan t ic seaboard
,andwestward beyond the Rocky
Moun tain s . This priz ed material appears t o have circul ated amon g all the Plain tribes .Pipes made of i t were to b e
‘
found in recen t years preserved as cheri shed possession s
among both the Sioux and the Blackfoot tribes . Dr . George M . Dawson foun d in 1 874
part of an an cien t catlin it e pipe on Pyrami d Creek , about lat . long .
A very differen t material was in use amon g the A ss in iboin Indian s, l imiting the artof the pipe-sculptor to the simplest forms . It i s a fin e marble, much too hard to admitof minute carving, but susceptible of a high poli sh . This i s cut in to pipes of gracefulform , and made so extremely thin ,
as to be n early tran sparen t ; so that when l ighted the
1 Smithson ian Report , 1877 , p. 293 .
Sec. II, 1889 . 1 1 .
8 2 SIR DANIEL WILSON
glow ing tobacco presen ts a singular appearan ce in a dark lodge . An other favourite ston e
is a coarse speci es of j asper,also too hard for any elaborate orn amen tation . But the choice
of materials i s by no mean s l imited to those of the locality of the tribe . I have already
referred to my Indian guides carrying away w ith them pieces of the pipe-ston e rock on
Neepigon r iver and Paul Kan e, the artist , during his travel s , when on A thabaska River ,n ear i ts source in the Rocky Moun tain s, observed his A ssin iboin guides select a favouritebluish jasper from among the water-worn ston es in the bed of the river, to carry home for
the purpose of pipe manufacture,although they were then fully five hun dred miles from
their lodges .
The favourite material of the Chippewas was a dark , close-grain ed schist obtain ed atsome poin ts on Lake Huron . It i s easily carved
, and man y of their pipes are decoratedw ith groups of human figures and an imals
,executed w ith much spiri t . Pab ahmesad, an
ol d Chippewa pipe-maker of unusual skill,pursued hi s craft on Great Man itoul in Island,
on Lake Huron ,in comparativ ely recen t years . The peculi ar style of his ingen i ous
carvings may be detected on pipes recovered from w idely scattered local i ti es , for his
fame as a _ pipe-sculptor w as great . He was gen erally known among his people as
Pwahguneka, the pipe -maker . He obtain ed his material s from the favourite resorts of
differen t tribes , using the black pipeston e of Lake Huron ,the white pipeston e procured
on St . Joseph’s Island , and the catl in ite or red pipeston e of the Couteau des Prairies .
But the mos t varied and elaborat e in device of al l the peculi ar n at ive types of pipe
sculpture are those executed by the Chimpseyan or Bab een and the Clalam In dian s, ofVan couver I sl an d and the n eighbouring shores along Charlotte Soun d . They are carved
out of a soft blue clayston e or sl ate, from which also bowls , platters , and o ther uten si lsare made, decorated w ith n ative legendary symbol s and other devices . But the most elaborate carving is reserved for their pipes , which are n ot l ess varied and fan ciful in design than
the detai l s of Norman eccl esiastical sculpture . The same easily carved clayston e i s ingreat request among the Haida Indian s of the Queen Charlotte Islands for their i dols ,and for orn amen tal gorgets and uten si ls of various kinds . Thus the avail abl e materi alsof differen t local ities are seen to modify the forms alike of implemen t s, weapon s , and
articles design ed for person al orn amen t or domestic use and were sought for and tran s
ported to many distan t poin ts,w i th the same obj ect as the t in and copper whi ch played
so importan t a part in the commercial exchanges of n ation s at the dawn of civi lization .
I n region s where flin t or horn ston e is not availabl e , the quartzite appears to havebeen most common ly resorted to . I have in my possession some spear heads measuring
from seven to n in e in ches long,which were dug up on an old Indian trai l at Poin t Oken ,
lying to the n orth of Lake St . John ,Quebec ; and implemen ts of the like material are
common throughout east ern Canada . The same w idely diffused material was no less freely
resorted to by the tribes on the Pacific coast . The arrow-heads foun d throughout theSal ish coun try of southern British Columbia are ch iefly formed of quartz ite , though cherti s also used . The quartz i t e occurs in s o man y local it ies that i t i s difficult to trace itsspecial source . But n ear the east end of Marble Cafion ,
and at the Big Rock Sl ideabout s ix miles above Spen ce ’s Bridge
, on Thompson River, chips occur in con siderable
quan titi es , sugges tive of one of the chosen locali t ies resorted to for quarrying and
manufacture .- D .r . -Dawson informs me, as the result of his own person al observations,
that trade between the coast and in terior tribes of British Columbia was formerly chiefly
8 4 S IR DAN IEL WILSON
Mr. Sellers had kn own Catl in in hi s youth,while he was stil l an expert worker in
wood and ivory in the service of the elder Catlin ,a musical in strumen t maker in Phila
delphia, and from him he learn ed much relative to the modes of operation and the sources
of material of the Indian workers in ston e .
“ He considered making flakes muchmore of an art th an the shaping them in to arrow or spear-poin ts , for a thoroughkn ow ledge of the n ature of the ston e to be flaked was essen tial ; as a sl ight differen cein i ts qual ity n ecessitated a totally differen t mode of treatmen t . The prin cipal source
of supply for what he termed home-made flakes was the coarse gravel bars of the
rivers,where large pebbles are “
foun d . Those most easily worked in to flakes for
small arrow-poin t s were chalcedony , j asper and agate . Most of the tribes had men
who w ere expert at flaking , and who could decide at sight the best mode of work
ing . Some of these pebbles would split in to tolerably good flakes by quick and
sharp blows , s triking on the same point . Others would break by a cross fracture in to twoor more pieces . These were preferred, as good flakes could be split from their clean fractured surface, by what Mr . Catl in called ‘ impulsive pressure
,
’ the tool used being a shaftor stick of between two and three in ch es in diameter
,varyin g in length from thirty
in ches to four feet , according to the mann er of using them . These wer e poin ted w i th
bon e or buckhorn'
. It i s thus apparen t that among rude tribes of modern cen turies ,as in the prehistoric dawn , exception al aptitude and skill found recogn ition as r eadily as
in any civil ized commun ity . There were the quarriers and the skil led workmen ,on
whose join t l abors the whole commun i ty largely depen ded for the indispen sable supplyof al l n eedful tool s .
In the summer of 1 854, when civilization had made Very sl ight in roads on the w esternWi ldern ess , I visi ted a group ofChippewa lodges on the south-west shore of Lake Superior ,where they still main tained man y of their genuin e habi ts . Their aged chief, Buffalo, wasa fine specimen of the uncorrupted savage, dressed in n ative attire
,and w earing the col
l ar of grizzly bear’s cl aw s as proof of his triumph over the fiercest object o f the chase .
Their weapon s were partly of iron , derived from the traders . But they had also theirstone-tipped arrows and on e Indian w as an object of an in terest to a group of Indian boysas he busied himself in fashion ing a water-worn pebble in to an edged tool . He held an
oval pebble between the finger and thumb , and u sed i t w ith quick strokes as a hammer .But he was on ly engaged on the first rough process
,and I did no t see the completion of
his work . No doubt , the l eisure of al l was turn ed more or less to accoun t in supplying
themselves w ith their ordin ary w eapon s and missi les . But Catlin ’s free in tercourse w iththe w i ld western tribes famil iarized him w ith the regular sources of gen eral supply.
The best flakes,” he said, outside of the home made, were a subj ect of commerce , and
came from certain local ities where the chert of the best quality was q uarried in sheets orblocks , as it occurs in almos t con t inuous seams in the in t ercalated lim eston es o f the coal
measures . These seam s are mostly cracked or broken in to blocks that show the n ature o fthe cross fracture , which i s taken advan tage of by the operators , who seemed to havereduced the art of flakin g to almost an absolute sc ien ce, w i th divi s ion of labour ; one set
o f men being expert in quarrying and sel ectin g the ston e,others in preparing the blocks
for the flakers .
” l But suitable and speci al ly prized material were sometimes sought on
Smith son ian Report, part i., 1885 , p. 8 74.
ON THE STONE AGE . 8 5
differen t sites , and dissemin ated from them by the primitive trader . A long eastern .
Labrador and in Newfoundlan d arrow-heads are mostly fashion ed out of a peculi ar l ight
grey tran slucen t quartzite . Dr. Bel l in form s me that n ear Chimo, south of Ungava Bay, i s
a spot resorted to by the Indian s from t ime immemorial for this favorite material and
arrows made of it are no t un common even in Nova Scoti a . Among the tribes remote
from the sea coast , where no exposed rock furn ished available material for the manufac
ture of their ston e implemen t s , the chief source of supply w as the larger pebbles of theriver beds . From these the most suitable s ton es were careful ly selected
,and often carried
great distan ces . These most easily worked in to flakes for small arrow-heads are chalee
dony, j asper, agate and quartz and the finer specimen s of such weapon s are now greatly
prized by collectors . The coast tribes both of the A tlan t ic and the Pacific foun d similar
sources of supply of the ston es best suited for their implemen ts in the rolled gravel of
th e beach,and this appears to have been the m ost frequen t resort of the Micmaks and
other tribes of the Can adian Maritime Provinces .I have already referred to in formation derived from Dr . G . M . Daw son and Dr. Robert
Bell,to bo th of whom I have been indebt ed for in teres ting results of their own person al
observation s as m embers of the Can adian Geological Survey . Collectors are famil iar
with the elongated flat ston es,w i th two or more holes bored through them
,variously
styled gorgets , implemen ts for fashion in g sin ew into cord, etc . They are made of a
gray i sh green clay slate , w ith dark streaks ; and the same material i s used in the
manufacture of person al orn amen t s, ceremon i al obj ects , and occasion al ly for smooth spearheads and kn ives . Relics fashion ed of this pecul iar cl ay slate are foun d throughout
On tario , from Lakes Huron and E ri e to the O ttawa valley . A s omewhat similar ston e
occurs in si tu at various poin ts , but Dr. Bell believes he has satisfactorily iden t ified thean cien t quarry at the outl et of Lake Temagamic , n early on e hun dred miles n orth of
Lake Nipis sin g . No clay slate procured from any other locality corresponds so exactly
t o the favourite material . The site i s access ibl e by more than on e can oe route ; and
quan t it ies of the rock from differen t beds lie broken up in blocks of a size ready for
tran sportation . Dr . Bell found on the shore of Lake Temissaming a large unfin ished
spear head,chipped out of thi s clay-sl ate, and ready for grinding. When the region is
settled and the lan d cleared , sites w il l probably be discovered where the aborigin alexporters reduced the rough blocks to form for con ven ien t tran sport .
Dr . Bel l has described to me specimen s of n arrow and somewhat long spear points ,of local manufacture , made from smoky chert found on or n ear A thabaska , in Macken zi e
Ri ver basin ; and an arrow head of brown flin t from the mouth of Churchill River,Hudson Bay . The flin t implemen ts of Rainy R iver and Lake of the Woods are of
brown i sh flin t and cher t such as are found in the drift al l over the region to the south
westward of Hudson Bay ; and are mostly derived from the Devon ian rocks . Worn
pebbles of this kind occur in the dri ft as far south as Lake Superior. A bran ch of
Kinogami River, i s called by the In dian s Flin t River (Pewona sipi) from the abundan ceof the favourite material they find in the river gravel and shingle . The fin est flin t
implemen t s of Can ada are those of th e n orth shore of Lake Huron made from materialcorrespoding to a very fin e grain ed quartzit e, approx imating to chalcedony, foun d amongthe Huron ian rocks of that region . Dr . Bell has referred to this in his report for 1 875 .
A long the west ern coast of the Provin ce of Nova Scotia a high ridge o f trap rock
8 6 SIR DANIEL WILSON
ext ends , w ith sl ight in terruption , from Briar Island to Cape Blomidon . Here the strong
tidal rush of the sea un dermin es the cliff, and the w in ter frost s spli t it up,so that every
year the shore i s strewn w i th broken fragmen t s from the cl iff, expos ing a variety of
crystal lin e min erals, such as j asper, agate , etc . The beach gravel is also in terspersed w i th
numerous rounded pebbles derived origin ally from the same source . I am in debted to
Mr. George Patterson ,of New G lasgow , N .S. , for s ome in terest ing n otes on thi s subject .
The pebbles of this beach seem to hav e been one of the chiet’
sources of supply for the
Indian implemen t-makers of Nova Scotia . Few locali ti es have hitherto been n oticed in
the Marit ime Provin ces marked by any such large accumulation of chips as would suggestthe probabi lity of manufacture for the purpose of trade ; t hough chips and finished
implemen ts occasion al ly occur together on the sites of Indian Villages or en campmen ts ,suggestiv e of individual industry and home manufacture. But Mr. Patt erson in forms me
that he has foun d on e place at Bauchman’
s Beach , in the Coun ty of Lun enburg‘
, Which
furn i shes abundan t traces of an old n ative workshop . There,unt il recen tly
,could be
gathered agate,j asper, and other varieties of the fine-grained crys tall in e min erals from the
trap , sometimes in n odules , roun ded and worn , as they occur at the base of the oceanwashed cliffs . At t imes , they showed parti al traces of working ; but more frequen tly theywere spl it and broken ,
bearing the unmistakable marks of the hammer . A long w it hthose were cores and large quan tities of flakes, or chips , w ith arrow-heads
,more or
less perfectly formed . At one t ime , according to. Mr. Patterson ’s accoun t , they might have
been gathered in bushel s but recen t in roads of the sea have swept away much of the old
beach, and strewed the products of the In dian ston e-workers where they .may be stored
for the won der ofmen of other cen turies . I t i s curious , indeed, to reflec t on the strangememorial s of the l i fe of ages , so diverse from those W ith which the palaeontologist
n ow deals,that are accumulating in the submarin e strata in
’
proces'
s of formation for the
in struct ion of coming gen erat ion s , should our earth last so long . The world w ill, _doub t
l ess,have grown w i ser b efore that epoch is reached . But it w i ll require some discrimi
tion ,even in so en l ighten ed an age, to read aright the sign ifican ce of this min gl in g of
rel ics of rudest barbarism w ith all the products of modern civilization that are being
strewn along the great ocean highways between the O ld and the New World .
A curious i l lustration o f the possibl e con fusion of eviden ce is shown by the discovery
in 1 884, of a large ston e l an ce-head of the .E sk imo type, deeply imbedded in the ti ssues
of a whale taken at the whaling station on Ballast Poin t, n ear the harbour . of San
Diego , 0 aliforn ia.
lIn the museum of the Un ivers ity of E dinburgh is the skeleton o f a
whale , stranded in the an cien t estuary of the Forth in a prehistoric age, when the o ceantides reached the site which had been elevated in to dry land long ages before the Remaninvaders of Caledon i a made their way over it . Alongside
‘
of the buried whale lay a rude
deerhorn implemen t of the old Caledon i an W haler and had, the San Diego whale sunk
in deep waters off the Pacific coast , i t would have perpetuated a similar memorial ofrudest savage l ife, in close prox imity, doubtless , to evidences
‘
of modern civi lization .
Such , though in l ess striking form ,is the process of in
'
termingling the arts of the AmericanSton e age w ith products of modern skill and refin emen t that i s now in progress off the
Lun enburg coast of Nova Scotia . The inroads of the sea have n ot , howev er,'
ev en n ow
SECTION I I , 1889 . 8 9 TRANS . ROY . Soc . CANADA .
IV.
— E vpedfilions to the Pacific . With a brief reference to the Voyages of D iscovery in
seas con tiguous to Canada,in connection with a Western Passage f rom
E urope to Asia . By SANDFORD FLEMING .
( Read May 8 ,
INTRODUCTORY.
The establi shmen t o f rai lway commun ication from the A tlan t ic to the Pacificacross the territory of Can ada
,suggests an en quiry in to the several maritim e and overland
expedition s , undertaken from time to time , between the two ocean s . I t i s accordingly
proposed b riefly to review ( 1 ) th e'
marit ime expedition s un dertaken w ith the desire of
obtain ing a western passage from Europe t o A sia , in seas con t ermin ous to the Dom in ion ,
and (2 ) the several overlan d expedition s from the eastern parts of Can ada to the shores of
the Pacific , from the earliest date .
Six cen turies have elapsed , sin ce the most illustrious'
t rav eller of the M iddle Ages
found his way from Europe across the whole ext en t of A si a, to the l imit s of the then
known habitabl e world . After an absen ce of twen ty years , Marco Polo return ed to hi s
hom e on the shores of the Adriatic , to bew i lder the Ven et ian s w ith won drous accoun ts ofthe magn ificen ce of Cathay , the splen dours of Z ipangu , and the vastn ess of the Orien t .
He was the first European who looked upon the hitherto unknown Pacific Ocean , which
he had reached after tedious journ eys through many strange lands , and after traversingthe spacious empire of Kublai the Great Kaan .
Polo and hi s compan ion s were the pion eers of commercial in tercourse between
Europe and Cathay . O ther European travellers followed the Ven etian n oble, who w i th
him bore testimon y to the exten t , power and wealth of the marvellous old c ivilization s of
Asi a ; and as a con sequen ce, the en terprise and commerce of the Middle Ages becamedirected towards the E ast .
The populous and wealthy kingdoms o f A si a could on ly be approached by lon g and
perilous overland journ eys , through coun tries inhabited by warlike races , given to hosti lity
and plunder . The route lay by Turcoman ia,Armen ia , Persia, Upper India, Cashmere
and across the moun tain s and deserts of Tibet . Notw ithstanding the immen se dis
tan ce to be passed over by caravan s,and the dangers and difficult ies of the journ ey ,
European traders flocked to the.
remote East . So far as it was possible un der the
conditi on s which ex i sted in the fourteen th and fifteen th cen turies , comm erce flourished
over an extended overlan d route stretching from Genoa, F loren ce and Ven ice , to thegreat marts of eastern A sia .
It was the possib il ity of facil itating and in creasin g the in terchange of trade between
Europe and A sia which powerfully attracted the imagin ation of m en l ike Columbus and
Cabot . I t is n ot therefore surprising, that an arden t.desire was awaken ed for the dis
covery of a new and safer route to the E ast,than the on e then followed .
Sec. 11,1889 . 1 2.
9 0 SANDFORD FLEMING ON
I .— DI AR ITIM E E XP E D ITI ONS .
( 1) E arly Voyages of D iscovery in the North A tlantic .
Columbus had formed the bel ief that the earth had less dimen sion than i t real ly
possesses,and that t he con tin en t of
’
A sia extended farther to the eastward . This opin ion
was the groun d of his bein g confiden t of reaching Cathay by a west ern voyage . So
firmly was this bel ief held, that when Columbu s set sai l in 149 2 , he was the bearer of
a letter from the Span ish court to the Great Kaan of the mighty orien tal empire .
More than one European n ation was stimulated to activity by the prospects of profitable trade w ith A sia . A s Cathay was the aim of Columbus , so l ikew ise it became the
goal of Cabo t , who induced Hen ry VII of England to en ter the field of marit im e en ter
prise.The expedit ion fit ted out under the comman d of Cabot obtain ed for him the
fam e o f preceding Columbus in the first actual discovery of the new con tin en t . John
Cabot sighted the coast of Labrador Jun e 24th , 1497 , th irteen mon ths before Columbus
beheld any part of the main l and . I t was n ot un til August lst , 1 498 , on his third voyage,that Columbus for the first t ime l ooked upon the shores he had long sought . 1
Columbus discovered the Bahamas in 1492 , and the other West Indian Islan ds insubsequen t years, believing them t o be outlying islan ds of A sia . The A rchipelago
received the n ame it st il l bears under the belief that it was w ithin the l imits of theIn dian O cean . The great captain did n ot l ive to kn ow that another con tin en t , and an otherocean ,
the broadest expan s e of water on the surface of the globe , in terven ed between the
West Indies and the shores visited by Marco Polo two cen turies earlier . To the day ofhis death
,Columbus w as firm in the conviction that the isl ands and lands , he had
discovered,were in proximity t o the domain of the Great Kaan .
The two Cabots , John and Sebasti an , equally w ith Columbus , were imbued w ith
the idea,that the shores of A sia were washed by the waters of the A tlan tic and they
each displayed great activ i ty in pursuing the obj ect of their search They were each
distin guished by lofty en thusiasm , extraordin ary courage , and in domi t able perseveran ce ,in the work of discovery which they had undertaken .
Whil e it can n ot be doubted that Columbus was the first who con ceived the idea of aw estern route to the East , it i s c ertain that he w as n o t the first W ho discovered the n ewcon tin en t . Chri stopher Columbus , the Gen oese , kindled the flame of western maritime
adven ture, and the result of his first voyage filled Europe w ith won der and admiration ;i t was
,however
, .I ohn Cabot the Ven et i an and Sebastian , his Engli sh-born son ,who
discovered Am erica . The record shows that the great Columbus n ever beheld any port ionof the North American con tin en t , and that he did n ot come w i thin sight of South America ,un t il the year in which Sebastian Cabot had made a voyage of discovery along the whole
coas t between V irgin ia and the en tran ce to Hudson Strait . In that year, 1498 , Sebastian
Cabot , w ith a fleet of fiv e ships under the English flag , ben t upon the effort to find an
1 Columbus landed on an i sland named by the Indians Guanahani, October 1 2 , 1 492 , bel ieved to b e San
Salvador, one of t he Bahamas. The first v iew he had of the mainland was at the mouth of the Orinoco in SouthAmerica on August 1 , 1498 . He died May 20, 1506 .
9 2 SANDFORD FLEMING ON
cosmography . Great privation was experien ced , and but for the timely appearence and
assistan ce of a Fren ch vessel the w hole crew would have perished miserably .
In 1 5 53, an expedition o f which the then aged Sebasti an Cabot was the chief pro
moter,sailed under Sir Hugh Willoughby and Richard Cha11cellor, to end in disas ter .
The three ships fol lowed an east erly course, and overtaken by w in ter Wi lloughby and all
his men peri shed by famin e and cold . Threeyears later an other vessel w as sen t out in a
n orth -eas terly direction under th e command of Stephen Burroughs . I n midsummer, the
ship w as beset on all sides by masses of ice,and was in dan ger of being ann ihilated, so
that all efforts to proceed w ere un avail ing .
(3) Efioa'
ts ih the Sixteenth Cen tury to discover a North-west Passage.
Vasco da Gama doubled the Cape of Good Hope,in the year 1498 , and establi shed
the p ossibility of reaching A si a by sea but the n avigators of European n ation s remain ed
in their belief of a western passage to what was then design ated the “ E ast . ” Having
this discovery in View , examin ation s were made on behalf of Portugal , Spain , Fran ce,Hollan d and England, in every parall el of lati tude between Darien and th e extreme n orth .
Cathay con t inued to be the obj ect of man y adven turous voyages . The discoverie s of
Columbus and his Span ish foll owers , the expedition s of Cabot , Cartier and others , havingestablished the exi sten ce of a large con tin en t extending n orth , on the eastern coast , as highas latitude 67° 30 , it was pl ain that the much des ired n avigable route to A s ia must besought n orthward of thi s l imit . I t i s at th is stage in the history of maritime discovery
that there b egan a series o f expedition s , having gen erally in View the discovery of a
North-wes t Passage,
” which were con tinued W i th but short in termission over a period
of more than three cen turies . Great en thusiasm long con tinued to be felt for the establishmen t of trade directly w ith the mart s of Indi a and Chin a ; and voyages were
undertaken by the:most cel ebrated marin ers of the age main ly w i th thi s end in View .
Influen ced by n at ion al con siderati on s , Martin Frobisher one of Englan d’s heroes,
who afterwards took part in the defeat of the Invin cible Armada , embarked in a seri es of
expedition s . I n 1 576 , he set sail w i th three ships , and in 1 5 77 and 1578 , other expedition s
followed under the same commander . I n 1 5 78 , he sail ed w i th fift een vessel s . Frobisher
was followed by John Davis , who made three successive voyages in the same direct ion
in the years 1 5 85 , 1 5 86 and 1 587 . Davis Strait received the n ame of t his commander .
(4) Attempts to find a North-west Passage in the Seventeen th Century .
I n 1 60 2 , the en t erprise was renewed by some .patriotic merchan ts of London and
by the Muscovy Company ; two ships were fit ted out under the command of George
Waymouth , who made for Green l and ; after reachin g a high lat itude they en coun teredsuch obstruction s from ice and den se fogs , that the crew apprehen sive of safety mutin i ed .
The ships return ed w i thout adding to previous discoveri es . I n 1605 , the Kin g of
Denmark caused three vessel s to be despatched under command of John Cun n ingham .
They coasted Green lan d and reached latitude 66 ° 30 ' but the seamen refused to proceed
further . A smaller expedition wen t out the following year in comman d of John Kn ight ,w ith no better result .
EXPEDITIONS TO PACIFIC. 9 3
The great navigator Hen ry Hudson was engaged by the Muscovy Company . This
commander made voyages in 1 607 , 160 8 and 160 9 . I n the latter year , when exploring
the coast of North Am erica for the Dutch E ast India Company , he ascended the riverHudson . In 1 6 10 he discovered the great in l and sea which bears his n ame ; it maywel l be imagin ed that on en tering on it s vast expan se
,he felt sat isfied that the Pacific
Ocean l ay before h im , and that the problem of a western passage , which had b atfled so
many,had at length been solved . The illustrious captain n ever l eft Hudson Bay . A fter
w in tering there he perished m i s erably on July 22nd,1 6 1 1 , at the hands o f h is mutin ous
crevv .
I n 1 61 2 , the Merchan t Adven turers o f London sen t out Sir Thomas Button in com
mand of two sh ips,to follow up the
‘
discov eries o f Hudson during the following year
he con t inued the examin ation of the n ew -found in lan d sea
I n 1 6 14, Captain G ibbon was despatched on a sim i lar expedition o f discovery, but
w ith un importan t results . I n 16 15 and 1 6 16 , Robert Byto t andW i lliam Baffin con t inued
the exploration s,examin ing the coasts of Hudson Stra it and o f the great chan n el which
has sin ce been known as Bathu Bay .
I n 16 19 , Denmark again en tered the field of di scovery . In that year Christian IVsen t out two well equipped ships commanded by Jen s Munk . Mun k traversed Davis
Strait , but failing t o find the desired open ing to the west,he struck southward to
Hudson Strait and Hudson Bay . He w in tered at Chesterfield In le t, the crew enduring
great suffering, so that , when summer return ed , out o f sixty-fiv e souls , on ly thre e survived
to make a peri lous voyage homeward .
Two expedition s l eft Englan d 111 1631 , under Luke Fox and Captain James the latter
w in tered in the ice, n ear Charlton Isl and , in the southern extremity o f James Bay
,and
return ed to E ngland in th e October follow ing . Neither o f these expedition s discovered a
sin gle indication that the desired passage to the west was obtainable .
- In 1 670 , the Hudson’s Bay Company was in corporated and undertook various voyages
having in view the discovery o f the n orth -west passage to the Pacific Ocean . The first
was un dertaken in 17 1 8 by Mr. Kn ight, govern or at Nelson River the two ships engaged
were lost and the crews peri shed . A search was sen t out for the missing ships . Theofficer in charge , Mr. John Scroggs , upon his return ,
reported confiden tly that a pass age
to the Pacific could be foun d .
(5 ) E xpeditions of D iscovery in the E ighteen th Century .
In 1 742 , the British Governm en t hay ing obtain ed from the officers of the Hudson ’s
Bay Company in formation which was regarded as furn ishin g decisive proofs of th e
exi sten ce of a n orth-west passage , a n aval expediti on was despatched in command'
of
Captain Middleton . Middleton ’s two ships w in t ered in Churchill River . This expedi
tion was followed in 1746 by that of Captain W . Moor, who was s en t out to prosecute
the same work of discovery .
I n 1 769 , un der in struction from the Hudson’s Bay Compan y , Samuel Hearn e was sen t
out to explore Coppermin e River , but w ithout result . I n 1 770 , the explor ation w as
ren ewed ; he conducted the expedit ion b y lan d, having arrived at the river during the
w inter . He follow ed the Coppermin e to its mouth , which he reached in July 177 1 .
9 4 SANDFORD FLEMING ON
(6) GeographicalD iscoveries in the Pacific .
It was n ot un t i l n early seven years after the death of Columbus that the Pacific
Ocean was seen by European s from the n ewly discovered Con t in en t . Vasco Nunez deBalb ao crossed the I sthmus of Darien and was the first to behold the great ocean . This
took place upon September 25th , 1 5 13 . Six years later , Ferdin and of Magellan emergedfrom the strai t which bears his n ame
,and crossed the ocean to the Philippin e Isl ands . The
first E nglishman to n avigate the Pacific was Sir Fran c i s Drake , who was al so the first of
h is coun trymen to circumn avigate the globe . In 1 579 , Drake , in the hope of finding a
shorter way home from the Pacific than by doubl ing Cape Horn ,explored the Pacific
coast of North America as far n orth as latitude 48 ° N .
,and i t was Drake who gave the n am e
of “
New A lbion to the western portion of North America, n ow known as O regon and
Washington Territori es . The coast,at a lower lati tude
,had been Visited by Span i sh
n avigators ; by Ferrelo in 1 543,by Fran cisco de Gal i in 1 584
,and by V izcain o and
Aguilar in 1603 .
For more than two cen turies after Drake ’s discoverie s, n o European n avigators have
c laimed to reach a higher lati tude on the Pacific coast,if we except Juan de Fuca,
whose voyage by most histori an s i s con sidered apocryphal .
(7) F ictitious D iscoveries of Waterways through the Con tinen t .
The efforts , above described , to find a n avigable passage between Europe and A sia
through n orth-western America,were un dertaken from the
_
Atlan t ic side of the con tin en t .
I f l es s act ivity prevailed on thePacific side, i t cann ot be said that any attempt from the
western coast w as looked upon as in expedien t ; indeed at this date a remarkable phase
in the history of geography may be n oticed . The imagination o f n avigators , as it were ,was al lowed to run riot ; if the actual exploration s were l im i ted , in number and exten t ,theorizing wen t on
, and several curious fic t ion s w ere propagated,some of which have
been placed on record . Amon g those which gained curren cy , on e may here be al luded
to , as typical of other similar n arrati on s, and for the further reason that the memory of
i ts author has been perpetuated in the strait bearing his n ame .
A marin er of Greek birth , Juan de Fuca , claimed to have discovered in 1 592 a
n av igabl e strait conn ecting the two ocean s . He represen ted that it was to be found on
the western coast , in l atitude 47° or and that i t had its outl et in the North Sea, through
chann el s n ot far from Hudson Bay . He described the Pacific in let of the strait to
be thirty or forty leagues w ide,in creasing in w idth in l and to a much broader expan se
of water,through which
,after twen ty- six days s ailing n orth and n orth-east he got in to
the North Sea .
There was a gen eral i dea among n avigators that there ought to be such a passage,and con sequen tly the fict ion ,
as it subsequen tly proved,of Juan de Fuca , w i th other
spurious n arratives gain ed ready creden ce . The w ish eviden tly assisted the bel ief, for
there remain ed a firm impression on the minds of cartographers, up to a date later thanthe middle of the E ighteen th Cen tury , that the con tin en t ofNorth America in its n orthern
part was in tersected by chann els , in l and seas , and water passages in such a mann er as
would admit of ships passing from on e ocean to the other . I n i llustration of this
9 6 SANDFORD FLEMING ON
(8) E xplorations on the North Pacific coast .
I n 1778 , the i llustrious Captain James Cook recei v ed in struction s , on his last voyage ,to make an examin ation o f the w estern coas t of America in search of the des ired passage to
Europe ; but he foun d no in let such as was described by Juan de Fuca . Singularly en ough ,
howev er, Captain Barcl ay , after whom Barclay Soun d in Van couver I sland is n amed ,
Fro . 12.— Jeffrey’s Map, 1 768 .
discovered,in 1787 , a strait about the lati tude men tion ed by Juan de Fuca , which strait
had escaped the observat ion of Captain Cook. This n ow well-kn ow n in l et then received,
and has sin ce born e , the n am e of the Greek marin er who claimed to have discovered a
n avigable passage from the Pacific to th e A tlan tic two hun dred years earlier . I n 1788 ,
the in let of Juan de Fuca W as explored by Captain Duflin , and again in 1 79 0 by Captain
EXPEDI‘
I‘
IONS TO PACIFIC. 9 7
Quimper. It n eed scarcely be added,that beyon d the geographical position of the
en trance,i t has n o resemblance to the imagin ary passage between the two ocean s which
Jn an de Fuca declared he had discovered .
In 1728 , a Russian expedit ion under Behring discovered the strait n am ed after the
commander, who 0 11 t his occasion explored part of the North-west coast . In 1 741 , Behring
was again employed , and coasted asfar south as Moun t St . E li as,which he n amed . Behring
and his crew W ere ren dered helpl ess by scurvy ; he expired in a m i serabl e con ditionduring the w in ter on an i sl and in the strait , which commemorates his n ame .
I n 1 79 1 , Van couver was sen t out from England in charge of an expedition . The
spec i al obj ects were to ascertain whether the in l et of Juan de Fuca really formed a straitand to explore the coast from latitude 30 ° N . as far n orth as Cook ’s In l et w i th a Vi ew to
the discovery o f an eastward passage . Those fam i l iar with the pecul iar character of the
Pacific coast , embraced w ithin the l imits of Briti sh Columbia and southern A laska, w i l l
understan d the n ecessity of an minute survey ; for the p assage might have so n arrow an
en tran ce as to elude the search made for i t Van couver examin ed the coast w i th greatcare
,surveying al l in let s up to l atitude 5 2 and left for England in 1 79 4 .
The thorough exam in ati on of the coast by Van couver, together w ith the discoveriesmade by Behring, and the overland travels of A lexan der Macken zie to the mouth of
the river Macken zie in 1 789 and across the Rocky Moun tain chain , in 179 3 , together
w i th the expedition of Hearn e , twen ty years earli er, t o the mouth of Copperm in e River,swept away all beli ef in the ex isten ce of a n avigable passage through the con t in en t .
It was n ow establ i shed beyon d al l doubt , that the con tin en t extends unbroken from theGulf ofMexico to latitude the mouth o f the great river which bears the n ame of the
celebrated traveller .
(9 ) E ighteenth Cen tury At tempts to find a passage to Asia across the Polar Sea .
Every effort to find a n avigable chan n el between the eastern and western coasts of
America, having so far resulted in complete failure , the idea of a passage from Europe t o
A sia across the polar sea , attracted great atten t ion tow ards the close of the last cen tury .
A mass of evidence w i th regard to its feasibil ity was laid before the Royal Society whose
presiden t Earl Sandw ich , was also at the head'
of the admiralty . The proj ect of an expedi
tion across the pole received the favorable con sideration of the king who commission edtwo ships for the serv ice . They was placed in command of Captain John Phipps andCaptain Lutw idge. Horatio Nel son j oin ed the expedition as a midshipman .
The expedit ion left Englan d in Jun e 1 773 , proceeded almost due n orth to Spitzbergen ,
and finally reached latitude 8 0°37
’
when the ships were incompassed by ice and remainedin a peri lous condition s for some time . Having w ith difficulty escaped destruction ,
the
ships return ed home .
Forty - three years lat er , the Briti sh Governmen t again sen t out a sim ilar expeditionW ith a correspon ding result .
(10 ) Eflorts to find at North west Passage in the N ineteen th Cen tury .
Notw ithstan ding so many d iscouragemen ts , n avigators con tinued to believe in theexi sten ce of a North-western passage conn ectin g the Pacific by Behring Strait , to be reached
Sec. 1 1, 1889 . 13.
9 8 SANDFORD FLEMING ON
by some unkn own in l et approachable from the Atl an tic betw een the n orthern coas t ofLabrador and Green land . I nfluen ced by these View s , the Brit ish Governmen t , being
extremely desirous of securing a new route to In dia , at the close of the war w ith Fran ce ,ren ewed the efforts of discovery“
by offering a reward of to any one, or any body
ofmen who would sat i sfactori ly es tabl ish its existen ce . A n orth -west passage thus having
become a n ation al object, two expedition s were sen t out in the year 1 8 1 8 , one un derCaptain David Buchan and Lieuten an t John Frankl in ,
the second under the command of
Captain John Ross and Li euten an t Edward Parry .
These efforts although unvail ing did n ot establish t he non -existen ce of the longsought passage : they rather made the question more interesting and in creased the deter
min ation to obtain its solution . New expedition s were therefore decided ou . In 18 19 ,
Captain Parry sailed in command of two ships which after w in tering in the n orth seas
returned in 1 820 . In 1 821 he again commanded an expedition whi ch after passing twow in t ers among the E skimo return ed in 1 823 .
I t was in 1 81 9 , that Lieuten an t Frankl in was despatched by lan d to the n orthern
coast, in order to survey to the west of Copp ermin e River . H itherto the coast had on ly
been Visited at two poin ts ; b y H earn e at the mouth of the Coppermin e in 1 77 1 , and by
A l exander Macken zi e at the mouth of the river which bears hi s n ame , in 1 789 . Fran klin
was accompan ied by Dr . Richardson , Messrs . George Back and Hood . Ou the return
journ ey the expedition experien ced great suffering from cold and s t arvation ,and Hood
and man y of the men perished .
In 1 824 a combin ed attemp t by four expedit ion s was organ i zed ; un der Parry and
Lyon from the'
east ; under Beechey from the west en tering by Behring Strai t ; and
under Franklin by Macken z ie River . These several expedition s return ed in 1 826 . I n
1 827 , Captain Parry under took the last of the series of un successful attempts made under
his command .
In 1829 , a wealthy gen tleman , Sir Fel ix Booth , undertook to defray the cost of a
private expedition ,and placed i t under the comman d of Captain Sir John Ross and his
n ephew James . Ou this occasion the ships becam e w in ter-bound , and were un able to
return un ti l 1 833, the expedition having passed four w in ters in the frozen region . The
an xiety fel t for their safety induced the authoriti es to sen d out a land expedition underSir George Back and Dr . Richard King . These explorers set out in 1 833 and travelled by
Great Slave Lake and Great Fi sh River to the arcti c seaboard they return ed in 1 834.
In 1 836 , Sir George Back was pl aced in comman d of a n aval expedition,to prosecute
n orth-western discoveries . He was obliged to w in ter in the pack ice and return ed toEnglan d the following year .
In 1 837 , Simpson and Dease, sen t out at the in stan ce of the Hudson’s Bay Company ,
reached the mouth of the river Macken zie . The object of this examin ation was to con n ectby actual survey the several poin t s on the n or thern coast which had been visi ted by
previous explorers . They were engaged in this servi ce un t il 1 839 .
In 1 845 , a fresh attempt to discover the n orth-west passage w as un dertaken by Sir
John Franklin and Captain Richard Crozier in charge of a n aval expedit ion with 135
officers and men . The un fortun ate end of the expedi tion i s wel l kn own . The ships
E rebus ”and
“ Terror sai led on May 1 9 th , 1 845 . They were last seen b y a W haler,on the follow ing July 26th ,
in Baflin Bay . After years o f anxi ety and un certain ty , and
1OO SANDFORD FLEMING ON
The En terprise under Captain Collin son return ed to Englan d in 1854 by the Pacific .
The “ Investigator,”
under Captain McClure , n ever return ed . In the second year shereached a palaeocrystic region where she became hopelessly embedded in the ice n ever to
move again . In the third year , her peri lous pos iti on having been discovered by a sl edge
party under Captain Pim on a rel ief expedition,the ship was aban don ed , and Captain
McClure his ofli cers an d crew to find s afety marched over the ic e to the Resolute ”of
Sir Edward Belcher ’s expedition which they reached on Jun e 1 7t h ,1 8 5 3, after a
journ ey of two w eeks . But they did no t reach Englan d un til the fol lowing year . The“
Resolute was caught in the pack ic e and th ere remain ed durin g the w inter of
1 8 53-54 . Thi s vesselwas even tually aban don ed , 0 11 May 1 4th,
t o be recoveredin 1 8 55 , after drifting in the pack n early a thousan d m i les . Meanwhil e McClure and his
men reached Englan d by a reli ef ship in the autumn of 1 854 .
( 1 2 ) GeneralResults of the Maritime E xpedit ion s.
Thu s terminated the voyages of discovery for a western passage for ships from Europe
to A sia . Sin ce Cabot sailed from Bri stol in 1 497 under the auspices of Hen ry VI I , upto the day, when the return of Franklin was for ever despaired of, there have been almost
ceasel ess efforts to obtain it . I n the numberless att empts to find a n orth-west passage ,
En glan d has risked the lives of many of her adven turous son s . I t is a story of heroicstruggles year after year in ic e-en cumbered region s , and of daring and un successful
attempts for thre e and a half cen turies . The single in stan ce of partial success i s
that of McClure, who trav ersed the route from the Pacific to the A t lan tic w i th his ship’
s
crew . H i s ship was,however
,l eft behind
,and a second ship in which he found
refuge was aban don ed,the voyagers reachin g Englan d on board of a third ship
after an absen ce of n early h y e years . McClure was hon oured and rewarded by the
Bri ti sh Parl iamen t ; he had demon strated the possibil ity of passing between the two
ocean s , but w ith the conditi on that for s everal degrees o f longitude the passage is across animpen etrable region of palaeocrysti c ic e . We had thus a n egative soluti on to the problem
which has tried the skil l and daring of n avigators ever sin ce America was first discovered ,and on which the l ives of man y hundreds of brave men and many mi llion s of mon ey had
been expended . The obstacl es to n avigation around the n orthern extremity of the con t inen thave been proved to be in superable . I t had been establi shed beyon d all question ,
that
the cl imatic condition s of the A rctic O cean render the passage of n o commercial value
whatever,and that n ature has imposed an adaman tin e barrier beyon d the power of man
to remove .
11 .— D I SCOVE R I E S B Y L AND .
(1 ) E xplorations by the French Pioneers.
I f th e maritime efforts extendin g over three and a half cen turies , and of which the
above i s on l y a fain t outl ine , were , in View of the obj ect sought , completely barren of
fruit,the overland journ eys must be regarded in a differen t light .
" I‘
he Resolute was found by a Whaler from the Un ited States, she was brought into port, and eventuallypresen ted to the Briti sh Government b y the Government of the Un i ted States.
EXPEDITIONS TO PACIFIC. 1 0 1
Up to the comm en cemen t of t his cen tury , 11 0 exploration s were undertaken by the
Governmen t or by any citizen of the Un ited Sta tes , beyond the valley of the Missouri .
It i s to the n orthern part of the con t inen t that we have to look for the seat of adventureand en terprise . It i s main ly w i thin the territory now kn own as the Domin i on o f Can ada
that the earliest and more importan t re sults were obtain ed .
The Fren ch pion eers displayed remarkable en terprise and act ivity . As early as 16 15 ,Champlain ascended the O ttawa , and discovered Lakes Huron and On tario . I n 1 640 ,
Fathers Jogues and Raymbault were at S ault St . Mary,the discharge of Lake Superior .
I n 1669 , the Fren ch discoverie s extended to Lake Michigan . In 1 673 , .I olliet and
Marquette pen etrated to the Mi ssissipi , and descended its waters as far as Arkan sas . I n
1682 La Sal le descended the Missi ssipi to its m on th . As early as 1 67 1 , an overlan d
expedition from Quebec under father Charles Alban el, reached Hudson Bay, and in 1 686
a trader,Noyon ,
had foun d hi s way to the Lake of the Woods .
A great impulse was given to these discoveries early in the follow ing cen tury . La
Verendrye the elder,between 1 73 1 and 1 739 , establi shed various trading posts on Lake
Win n ipeg and its tributaries , Red River, the A ssin iboin e and the Saskatchewan .
H is son , Chevalier La Verendrye , undertook more distan t expedition s to the west and
south . This adven turous traveller places on record his arrival at som e moun tain s which
were probably the outlying highlands or foot-hill s which , south of the 49 th parallel,
extend som e degrees of longitude to the east of the Rocky Moun tain s zon e . Under
Nivervi lle,the ascen t of th e river Saskatchewan was made for some con siderable distan c e
and the n arrative states that the Rocky Moun tain s were seen .
(2 ) First overland Journey to the Pacific Ocean .
In the second half of the cen tury , Can ada havin g passed. under British rule,expedition s
of discovery were made at the in stan ce of the English trading compan ies . I n 1 77 1 ,
Hearn e , under the in struct ion s of the Hudson’
s Bay Company,which then had been in
exi sten ce a hundred years , followed the river Coppermin e to its mouth on the ArcticOcean . In 1783 , the North -West Fur Company was formed , w i th its headquar ters inMon treal . By the year 1787 , it s trading posts had reached the river A thabasca, and the
follow ing year a pos t was establ ished on Peace River. I n 1789 , an o fficer of the company,
A lexander Macken zi e , discovered the grea t river of the n or th which bears his n ame,
which he descen ded to its outlet in the Arct ic Ocean . Three years later he arrived at the
Pac ific coast in lati tude about This in trepid traveller made the first overland journ ey
to the Pacific , n orth of the Gulf ofMexico .
(3 ) Un ited S tates overland E xpedit ions.
Twelve years after Macken zie had traversed the con tin en t in the in terest of a Can adianfur compan y, the attempt to reach the Pacific Ocean , was repeated by Lew is and Clark ,un der the authority of the governmen t o f the Un i ted States . Up to this period the
cen tral region of North America, w ithin the lim i ts of the Un ited States was unkn own .
Can adian merchan t s had establ ished trading posts from the St . Lawren ce to the Rocky
1 0 2 SANDFORD FLEMING ON
Moun tain s and from Hudson Bay to Peace River they had exten ded their explorat ion s
from Lake Superior to the Arct ic Ocean , at a time when the whole region from the
Mi ssouri to the Pacific had been un trodden by white men .
Captain Lew is and Lieut en an t Clarke , w i th a stron g and well equ ipped expedition , l eft
the A t lan tic coast in Jun e 1 8 0 3 , and reached the mouth of the Columbia in December, 1 805 .
Return ing, the expedi tion arrived at Washin gton in February, 1 80 7 . Their officialj ourn al
was not publish ed un t il 1 8 14 . Notes were however given to the public in 1 808 .
With the exception of a private expedit ion,sen t from New York three years after
the return of Lew is and Cl arke , the moving spirit of which was John Jacob A stor , andwhich ended in failure
,there was 11 0 in tercourse between th e Un ited States and the
Pacific coast by land un ti l the second quar t er o f the presen t cen tury .
After the failure of A stor ’s Company,the first successful attempt in the Un ited States
to form a conn ection w ith the west was in 1 825 , when .I edediah Smith led a party acrossUtah and Nevada to Cal iforn ia. The secon d was in 1 832 , when Nathan iel .I . Wyeth and
some twen ty others proceeded overlan d from Massachusets to O regon . These w ere the
pion eer waves of the tide of immigration which follow ed in after years .
(4) E xplorat ions under the great Fur Compam’
es.
The agen ts and officers of the Can adian fur compan i es pen etrated the coun trybeyond the Rocky Moun tain s in all direction s . They establi shed trading posts throughoutNew Cal edon i a, n ow British Columbia, ( 1 ) in 1 805 on McLeod Lake , (2) in 1 806 on Stuart
Lake, (3) in 1 8 07 on the Jackanu t (now the Fraser) at For t George, and in 1 80 8 , an expe
dition started from the latter poin t to trace the .I ackanut to the sea . They discoveredThompson River in 1 8 08 ; they traversed the river Columbia from its extreme n orth ern
ben d at Boat En campmen t to its mouth in 1 8 1 1 and their agen ts were the first European s
to exercise con trol in the exten sive region n ow kn own as Oregon , Washington Territory ,and British Columbia . Throughout that vast region early in the cen tury, the Can adian
fur compan ies founded man y trading establishmen ts , and gain ed a domin an t influen ce
amongst the n ative tribes .
E arly in the ce ntury the several fur compan i es were reduced to two , the Nor th
West and the Hudson ’s Bay .
”I n 1 82 1
,the r ivals became con sol idated to form a single
organ ization , hen ceforth to be kn own by the n ame of the “ Hudson ’s Bay Compan y .
”
The authority of this compan y was n ow undisputed , and its influen ce was supreme ,as wel l throughout the region bounded on the “
west by the Pacific coast, as to the eastof the moun tain s . I n 1 839 , the compan y en tered in to an arrangem en t w ith Russia
for the lease of A laska ; and i ts trading posts were establ ished at all eligible poin t s fromBehring Strait on the n orth
,to San Fran cisco to the south . For the t ime being, the
northeru Pacific coast was Virtually in posses sion of the Hudson ’s Bay Company .
I n this condition of affairs the river Columbia proved of paramoun t importan ce as themean s of in tercourse between east and west . For half a cen tury after David Thompson
’
s
first descen t in 18 1 1 , i t became the great highway between Can ada and the Pacific .
There was n o n atural l in e o f commun ication more accessible or more available ; and at
the date when the O regon Treaty wen t in to force , few travellers attempted to en ter
1 0 4 SANDFORD FLEMING ON
Period I .-FR0 M F IRST OVERLAND JOURNEY I N 1 793 TO OREGON TREATY IN 1 846 .
I n the firs t period , th e Hudson’s Bay Company and its associat ed traders appear as
the active agen t s . During these fifty- three years w e have a record of thirteen expedition s ,which
,w ith on e exception ,
that o fMr. David Douglas,the n aturalist
,were un dertaken by
t he company ‘s officers who explored the western t erritory, and plan ted tradin g posts
over a primeval coun try, thousan ds of miles in exten t . Geographical kn ow ledge wasn ot the main obj ect of these explorers ; but their en ergy and en terprise en abled them tomake discoveries which had the remark able con sequen ce of establi shing rights n at ion al
in their character, and of gain ing in formation o f much gen eral importan ce and sc ien t ific
value .
( 1 ) E xpedi tions Of S ir Alexander Macken z ie, 1 78 9 - 1793 .
Among thos e who have di stinguished themselves by their exploration s on this
con t inen t , n o n ame is more i l lustrious than that of Sir A lexan der Macken z ie . He
ranks the first on the l i st of overland discoverers . He was the first white man from
Can ada to reach the Arctic O cean , the first European to pass through the Rocky Moun tain s ,the first overlan d traveller n orth of the Gulf of Mex ico to arrive at the shores of . the
Pacific .
A l exander Macken zie was born at Invern ess, Scotland, i t i s said,
in 1 760 . It i s n o t
kn own when he arrived in Can ada ; we , however , learn from himself that in 1 785 he was
admitted a partn er in to the fur- trade operation s in the west . He had then been fiv e years
employed in the ofiice o f Mr. Gregory, so that he must have been twen ty years of age
when he began . H i s first venture was w ith some goods to Detroit,at that date littl e more
than a trading post . Then ce he proceeded to the Gran d Portage, n orth of Lake Superior,where he commen ced his remarkable career . He in forms us of his ambitious hopes in
the follow in g words : I not on ly con templated the practicabil ity of pen etrat ing acrossthe con tin en t of Am erica , but was confiden t in the qualificat ion s , as I was an imated bythe desire , to un dertake the peri lous en terpri se .
”
For som e years a severe struggle had been going on between several rival establ ishmen ts , and, indepen den tly of the n atural difficult ies of the trader’s l ife , the greates topposition was en coun tered from the common foe, the Hudson
’s Bay Compan y . The
resu lt was that a un ion of their several in terests was effected ; and, in the year 1 78 7 ,the North-West Company was organ ized on a sol id basi s for the purpose of vigor
ously carrying on the fur trade .
Macken zie became connected w i th the n ew company , and we find him in 1 789 at Fort
Chipewyan , on the Lake of the H i lls (Lake A thabasca) . On Jun e 3rd, of the same year ,he set out 0 11 his j ourney to the n orth
,where he discovered the river which bears his n ame ,
reaching its mouth which lies w i thin the Arct ic c irc le . This geographical discovery was
of the highest importan ce,inasmuch as i t swept away al l dubious conj ectures which
had been formed as to the ex isten ce of a strai t or passage for ships through the in teriorof the Nor th American con tinen t . He return ed to Fort Chipewyan on September 1 2 th ,
1 789 .
We learn from Macken zi e, that on his voyage down the river he had,
felt himselfdeficien t in the kn ow ledge of astron omy and n avigation . He un hesitatingly , therefore ,
EXPEDITIONS TO PACIF IC. 1 0 5
undertook a j ourn ey to Englan d,in order to educate himself in these scien ces and procurebooks and in s trumen ts for his future use It was in this way that he prepared himself
for the expedition to the Pacific .
Once more Macken zie found his way to Fort Chipewyan , and, 0 11 O ctober l0 th , 179 2 ,
having made every n ecessary preparation , he left on a journ ey of further discovery .
Ascending Peace River un til his progres s w as impeded by ice , the party remain ed for thew in ter at the place where the delay was experien ced .
Ou May 9 th , 1793 , when the river open ed , the voyage was resumed . He ascended
Peace River to the Forks one bran ch o f which has been n amed th e Fin lay,the other the
Parsn ip . Macken zie’s party followed the latter to n ear its source,when he crossed to
the great river cal led Tacout ch e by the Indian s , cutting a passage through the woodsso that he could carry hi s can oe w i th him . Macken z ie formed the opin i on that the riveron which he then embarked was the Columbia a belie f gen erally en tertain ed un t i l 18 08 ,when Simon Fraser fol low ed its waters to the Strai t of Georgia . The travel lers float ed
down the Tacou t che fiv e days , meeting Indian s with whom some difficulty was experi
enced. They learn ed from the In dian s that the river they were follow ing was of great
length and fullof peri ls . Ilis men becoming mutin ous,he decided to abandon the
attempt to descend to the mouth of the Columbia , and determin ed to reach the sea by
an other route . I n order t o gain the path to the west used by the In dian s , the explorer
had to turn back . Fort A lexan dri a was established twen ty- eight years afterwards,at the
p1ecise spot where he reversed his course , and W as so n amed in hon or of the first
explorer .
I t proved fortunate that he so determined ; the route described by the Indian s led to
the sea in sixteen days after leaving th e main river . H i s party had adven tures w i th
differen t Indian tribes ; they were pl aced on short al lowan ce, and underwen t hardships ,but Macken zi e at last attain ed his long cheri shed obj ect . Ou July 2 2nd, 1 79 3, he reached
the sea overlan d from Can ada , and floated on the tide-water of the‘Pacific . The poin t
reached is n ear the Indi an Vi llage of Bel la Coola, on the North Ben t ick Arm ,about
latitude 5 23° The explorer return ed approximately by the same route , reaching on
August 24th , the poin t on Peace Riv er where the party had passed the win ter , and from
which they had started west on May 9 th . They arrived at Fort Chipewyan after an
absen ce of eleven mon ths,during which period they had en coun tered many dangers and
un dergon e privation . Macken zi e had the unqualified satisfaction of feelin g that the
work o f exploration and di scovery he had un dertaken , w i th all it s toil s and sol ici tudes ,had been crown ed w ith complete success .
Sir Al exander Macken zie’s portrait i s given in the edition of his works of 1 80 1 , after
the picture by Lawren ce . There i s almost a fem in in e delicacy in the features , but
accompan ied by a daun tlessn ess of expression,w ith a mouth round the lin es of which can
be read firmn ess and determin ation . He describes himself as of an inquisitive m indand en terprising spirit
, and as possessing a con stitution and frame of body equal to the
most arduous undertakings . I t was his pride to think that he had added n ew region s tothe realm of British commerce . Macken zie died in 1 820 .
Sec. I I,1889 . 14 .
1 0 6 SANDFORD FLEMING ON
( 2 ) Travels and D iscoveries of Mr. Simon Fraser, 1 805— 1 8 0 6 .
The exploration s ofMr . Simon Fraser were in every s en se remarkable, and they have
exercised n o l ittle influen ce on the hi story of Bri ti sh Columbia . He en tered the serv iceof the North 'West Compan y , in 1792 , at the age o f n in eteen t en years l ater he became a
partn er . I n 180 5 a con feren ce was held at Fort W i l l i am ,to discuss th e advisabil ity o f
extending the operation s of the company beyond the Rocky Moun tain s,for the purpose of
occupying the territory . The desire was to an ticipate the Un it ed States explorers and
traders,who m ight establish a cl aim to its own ership by right of discovery and occ upa
tion. It was decided that trading posts should be establ ished in the then unkn own terri
tory,and possess ion by this mean s taken of it . The duty of carrying out the proj ect was
assign ed to Mr. Fraser . He soon afterwards left Fort Wi ll iam , made his way to Lake
Athabasca, and ascended Peace River in the moun tain s , where he establi shed a tradingpost
,which he n amed the Rocky Moun tain PortagePlacing men in charge , he con tinued his journ ey to McLeod Lake
,whioh he discov
ered,and there also l eft some traders . I n 1 806 he po1 taged to Fraser River , at that
date regarded as the main stream of the Columbia, or on e of i t s prin cipal affluen t s . He
l eft the Fraser , and fol lowed a tributary flow ing from the westward , n ow kn own as
Stuart River , and so n amed from a compan ion in the service , Mr. John Stuart . “ He
traced thi s stream to Stuart Lake he here established a trading post,the presen t Fort
St . James . He pen etrated to Fraser Lake , an other of his discoveries , and there also he established a trading station . He gave the n ame of New Galedon ia to the whole terr itory . In
1 807 , two can oes w ith goods, under the charge of Messrs . Quesn el and Parries , reached
him at the same time he received letters urging him to carry on his exploration s to the
ocean ,by the river flow ing through the coun try to the south ,
in an t icipation of parties
from the Un ited States , who were displaying some activity at this date ; Lew i s and
Cl ark having been sen t out by the Un ited States Gov ernmen t to the Pacific coast . Thisyear Mr. Fraser establ i shed an other post , Fort George , on the main stream .
In the spring of 1 80 8 , Mr. Fraser,w ith Messrs . John Stuart , Jules Maurice Quesn el ,
and a crew of n in eteen men , and two Indian s , embarked in four wel l-furn i shed can oes toexplore the unkn own waters which were regarded as the main aflluen t o f the Columbia .
They left Fort George on May 2 8th ,where the river i s described as 300 yards w ide w ith a
strong curren t . They reached its mouth on July 1st , and found the l at itude to be aboutestablishin g that the river was a separate and di stin ct stream
,and n ot the Columbia ,
the l ati tude at the mouth of which w as then kn own to be 46°
For a few days after leavin g Fortfi
George, the expedition made rapid progress . Sir
A lexander Macken zie fift een y ears earl ier , had passed over some exten t of the distan ce tothe poin t where , on the -advice of the Indi an s , he turn ed back , t o follow a trai l westward
to the s ea . The Indian s whom Mr. Fraser met were frien dly, and gave him similar advicethey in formed him that the descen t o f the river was extrem ely dan gerous , that he could
n ot go on and that the whole party would meet destructi on if they made‘
th e attempt .
The obj ect of the undertakin g being to follow the river to the mouth , Fraser decl in ed toturn back . The y erifioat ion of the Indian description of the n av igat ion was n ot long
delayed, for in a short t ime appalling difficult ies were en coun tered. A striking n arrative
of thi s descen t i s given in the Journ al of Simon Fraser in the work of Senator Masson ,
recently i ssued, Le Bourgeois de la Compagn ie de Nord- Ouest .”
1 0 8 SANDFORD FLEMING ON
i dea may be formed of the difficult ies the foot-sore travellers overcame . The journ ey
i tself was hazardous from first to l ast ; i t required the greatest n erve and courage . The
travellers , for par t of the way, were dependen t on the In dian s for food , which con s istedof dried fish ,
berries and roots . E xcept on t he upper section of the river, previously
visited by Macken z ie, n on e of the tribes on the route had ever before seen the face of a
white man ,and caution and pruden ce were n ecessary to avoid awaken ing Indian enmity.
The undertaking was bravely and su ccessfully accompli shed ; and i t i s n o l it tle owin g to
Simon Fraser and his associate di scoverers, Messrs . Stuart and Quesn el , of the North
West Company , that the coun try n orth of the 49 th parallel i s at thi s date British territory .
Mr. Fras er remain ed in the service of the company for som e years after the discoveryof the river whi ch has been n amed in hi s hon or . Ou his retiremen t from hi s posit ion ,
he was offered a kn ighthood,but the honour was declin ed
,ow ing to his n arrow circum
stan ces . He died at St . Andrews , above Mon treal , at the age of eighty-n in e , very poor,and leavin g n o provis ion for hi s family .
1 Such was the fate of this darin g explorer, whowas so l argely in strumen tal in securin g the Brit ish foothold on the Pacific coast
,w ithout
which the Domin ion of Can ad a would hav e been shut in on the west by the Rocky
Moun tain s .
(3) Travels and D iscoveries of Mr. D avid Thompson ,179 0— 1 8 1 1.
David Thompson , whose explorat ion s were un dertaken early in the cen tury, was aWelshman ; he was born in 1 770 , and educated at the grey coat school
,London . He
en tered the service of the Hudson ’s Bay Company in 1 789 and proceeded to Fort Churchil l ,where he remain ed fiv e years . For the succeeding n in e years of his life on thi s con t in en t
he was engaged makin g surveys of the rivers Nelson, Churchill , Saskatchewan and their
tributaries,frequen tly Visiting York Factory during that period . Having completed his
engagem en t w i t h the Hudson ’s Bay Compan y,he join ed the Nor th-West Company , in
179 7 , when he wen t to the Gran d Portage n ear Lake Superior . Follow ing his duties
as astronomer and geographer to the company,for a number of years he was presen t w ith
the Mandan Indian s in Missouri , at Lac La Biche , Lake A thabasca, th e Rocky Moun tain sand n early al l the station s of the company throughout the vast t erritory .
In 1 800 , Mr . Thompson en tered the Rocky Moun tain s in lat i tude probably in
the Vicin i ty of the same pass as that followed b y the Can adian Pacific Rai lway . He
descended on e of the n or thern bran ches of the Columbia, which he cal led McGillivray
River . He was , however , driven back by Indian s , and compelled t o recross th e moun tain s .
I n 1 807 , Mr. Thompson was again in the Rocky Moun tain s and was the first to go
through what is kn own as Howes Pass,by which route he reached the Columbia . He
ascen ded that river to the Columbi a Lakes and built Fort Kooten ay . In 18 0 8 , he des
cended River Kooten ay to Kooten ay Lake where he en tered in to trade relation s w ith the
Fl athead In dian s . He return ed by an other route to Fort Kooten ay , descended the
Columbia to Blackberry River, and recrossed the moun tain s by the Howes Pass . He then
" I‘
hree descendants Of S imon Fraser surv ive : h is daughter, M iss Catherine Harriet Fraser, who res ides inCornwall , and her two brothers, W i l l iam, W I10 l ives in Hami lton ,
and Roderick, at presen t in St . Andrews ,County of Stormon t.
EXPEDITIONS TO PACIF IC. 1 0 9
travell ed eastward w i th the furs he had obtain ed in trade to Rainy Lake House , whichhe reached on August 2nd . Much suffering was experien ced by his party on thisexpedition .
On August 4th,he again s tarted for the west and arrived at the Columbia on
October 3rd . I n his n otes he speaks of the Rapid River , n ow kn own as t he Kickinghorse River . He con tinued at Fort Kooten ay
,t rading w ith the In dian s and making
exploration s in the n eighbourhood . There is some con fusion in the accoun t of Thompson’
s
travel s,but i t i s cl ear that for several successive years he cros sed the moun tain s many
times by various routes . It would appear that late in the autumn o f 1 8 1 0 , he ascended
A thabasca River to its source,and crossed the moun tain s by what is n ow kn own as
the Athabasca pass to the Columbi a,where he arrived early in January . He spen t the
remainder of the w in ter at the mouth of Can oe River, and in the sprin g o f 1 8 11 he left
for the mouth of th e Columbia . But he did no t fol low the stream on this occasion ; heascended the Columbia to its source
,crossed McGilliv ray Portage , and descended Koo
t en ay River, then ce by Pen d d’
Oreille and ~Spokan e Rivers . Ou Jun e 1 9 th he reachedthe falls of the Columbia kn own by the Indian s as I l th -koy-Ape (Fort Colvil le) , and
then ce followed the main river to the Pacific coast , where he arrived on July 1 5 th ,
1 8 1 1 . He was kindly received by the ofiicers of the Pacific Fur Company , who had
arrived a few weeks earl ier and were then establi shing Fort A storia . Mr. Thompson
remain ed here a few days and returned as he came to Fort Colvill e , then ce by ArrowLakes and the Columbia to the mouth of Can oe River , when ce he had started a few
mon ths previously to as cen d the stream . Mr . Thompson was thus the first civil ized
man to traverse the main stream of the Columbia , certain ly that portion o f it above Fort
Colville, to its source .
In 1 79 9 Mr . Thompson married M is s Charlott e Small , aged 1 5 . The ceremony tookplace at I le a la Croix , Buffalo Lake . He l ived to be eighty-seven , dying at Longueuil ,oppos ite Mon treal
,on February l6 th ,
1857 i t i s sad to writ e , in extreme poverty . H i s
w idow followed h im to the grave in a few weeks . Ban croft says of Dav id Thompson :
“ No man performed more valuable services or est imated hi s achievemen ts more
modestly .
”He was well educated ; and his m eteorological and astron om ical observa
tion s to this day command respect . Hi s map of the Northw est Territories , 1 7 92-18 1 2 ,embraces the region between l ati tudes 45 ° and 5 6
°
and longitudes 84° and and
was made for the North-West Company in 1 81 3-1 8 14 . I t i s in the possession of the
Crown Land Departmen t. of On tario .
‘
(4) Journeys of Mr Alexander Henry 1 8 1 1— 1 8 14.
A l exander Hen ry started from Mon treal in July , by the river O ttawa . He
fol lowed the ordin ary route v ia Lake Nipissing, F ren ch Riv er,_
and Sault St . Mary to
Lake Superior, and the can oe route to Lake W inn ipeg . En gaged as a fur trader he spen t
1 Some of the facts above g iven are from MSS,now in the possess ion of Mr. Charles L indsey of Toron to ,
g iv ing an account of Mr. Thompson ’s travels . I t i s wellworthy of pub l ication . An outl ine of some of the
journeys of Mr. Thompson was subm i tted to the Canadian Institute, Toronto, b y Mr. J. B . Tyrel l , March 3, 1888 .
Three daughters of D av idThompson surv ive : Mrs. G. E . Shaw, of Peterborough , Ont , M rs . R . Sco tt, E vansv i l le,Indiana, and M i ss Thompson , Ivanhoe, Oh io.
1 1 0 SANDFORD FLEMING ON
t en years in the n eighbourhood of Red River , Visiting from t im e to time the posts at
Pembin a,Assin iboin e and M i ssouri . He made almos t annual Visit s to Fort W i ll iam on
Lake Superior un t i l 1 8 0 9 , when he started for the Saskatchewan , and in 1 8 10 , passed up
that river to Rocky Moun tain House . In May,1 8 1 1 , he set out to reach the water
flowing westerly to the Pacific . He reached on e of the sources of th e Columbia, andreturn ed to Rocky Moun tain House . From 1 8 1 1 to 1 8 1 3 , the j ourn al o f Mr . Hen ry i s
wan ting . It may , however , be said that duri ng this period he proceeded in 1 8 12 to Fort
Vermil ion,and i t i s inferred that he spen t the foll ow ing year at Henry House n ear the
j unction of the Mye t t e and the A thabasca . I n 1 8 13 , he crossed theRocky Moun tain s a
second time , on thi s occasion follow ing the river Columbia to its mouth .
On December 13 th , 18 13 , Mr . Hen ry w as presen t at Fort A storia,when the Captain and
crew of H. M . S . Racoon landed in un iform , and w i th some ceremony broke a bottle ofMadeira on the large flag stafi
‘
carrying the Un i on Jack . They took possession of the
coun try in the n ame ofHi s Britann icMajesty and n amed the establishmen t,which was then
own ed by the North -West Company,
“ Fort George .
” Mr Hen ry remarks in h is j ourn al,“ the officers of the Racoon are famous fellow s for grog . The year follow ing, he was
drown ed in a heavy storm when about two miles out in the stream of the river Columbia ,n ear the fort . The last en try in his journ al , which is preserved in MS. in the Parliamen t
ary Library,O ttawa
,i s dated Saturday, May 2 l st
,1 8 14 Mr. A l exan der Ross refers to
the inciden t in his n arrative of the The Fur Hun ter, ( I , p.
“
Ou May 22nd,
some time after the arrival of the I saac Todd, a boat con tain ing Messrs . Don ald Mc
Tavish and.A lexan der Hen ry , two partn ers of long standing and high reputation in the
service,w ith six men , Was swamped , all han ds peri shing, in crossing the river , w i th the
exception of one man . A lthough the acciden t took place in broad daylight , and in fron t
of the fort , the circumstan ce was n ot perceived or known ,for some hours alt er, when John
Littl e,the man who was saved , arrived at the fort , and commun icated the in tell igen ce .
”
(5 ) Journey of Mr . GabrielFranchére, 1 8 14 .
The ship Tonquin crossed the bar at the mouth o f the river Columbia. March 25 th ,
1 8 1 1 . She had on board thirty-three passen gers,thir ty of whom were Brit ish subj ects ,
and o f these twen ty-eig‘ht w ere from Can ada . They had passed round Cape Horn from
New York ; their object was to carry on the fu r trade on the Pacific coast , under th e
n ame o f the Pacific Fu r Company of which company,Mr. John Jacob A stor , a German
by birth,residing in New York , was the prin c ipal promoter . The Can adian partn ers had
among them some of the traders who at on e time had been in the service of the North-Wes t
Company , in cluding A l exander McKay ,who had accompan ied Sir A lexan der Macken zie,
0 11 his overland travels . Ou Apri l 1 2th they selected a si te for a building in which
the busin ess of the compan y could be carried on ,The establi shmen t broke up two years
afterwards , and on O ctober 1 6th ,1 8 13 , the Can adian North-West Company purchased the
effects and accepted the tran sfer of Fort A storia . Some o f the cl erks who had b een en gagedby the Pacific Fur Company were reengaged during the w in t er by the new company .
The others return ed to Can ada,amon g whom Gabriel Fran chére started overl and the
spring following , and'
described the journ ey in a n arrative published on his return .
1
1 Narrative of a voyage to the North—West Coas t of America in the year 1812-13-14
, by Gabriel Franchera.
1 1 2 SANDFORD FLEMING ON
motley gathering of t 'oyageu-rs, soldiers , Indian s and half-breeds . The De Meuron soldiers
represen ted n early ev ery coun try in E urope . Besides n atives of Can ada and the Un i ted
States , Mr. Cox saw men from the Sandwi ch I slands , two n egroes and an Eas t Indian
from Bengal . Proceeding by Sault S t . Mary , Fren ch Ri ver and the O ttawa , Mr. Cox
reached Mon t real on September 19 th , hy e mon ths and three days from the date o f leavingthe Pacific coast .
( 7) Travels of JlI r. D . IV. Harmon , 1 80 9 — 1 8 19 .
Mr. Dan ie l Wi lliam Harmon l eft Lachin e on Apri l 29 th ,1800 , in company w ith
several other officers, un der an en gagemen t of seven years service w ith the North West
Compan y . They passed Sault S t . Mary 0 11 May 30 th ,reached Gran d Portage on Jun e
13 th ,and Lake Winn ipeg on Augus t l0 th . I n November he was at Swan River post ;
on O ctober 23rd, 1 80 1 , he men tion s having met Mr. W i ll iam Henry at this place . From
1 802 to 1 80 7 , Mr . Harmon w as stat ion ed at Fort A lexan dria, Lac la Biche , Qu’
Appelle ,Dauphin , Swan River, Rain y Lake , Bird Moun tain and Cumberland House . I n 1 8 07 he
made a j ourney to Fort Dun can , on the n orth shore of Lake Nepigon ,where he spen t the
w in ter . In 1 8 08 he set out for the far west , reached Lake Winn ipeg on August lst , Cum
berland House on August 1 2 th,and Fort Chipewyan on September 7 th . He here met
Simon Fraser, 0 11 his return from the Pacific coast . The same year he reached Dun veganon Peace River . From 1 8 09 to 1 8 19 , Mr. Harmon was engaged at various poin ts in the
Peace River region an d in New Caledon i a to the w est o f the Rocky Moun tain s . I n 1 8 1 0
w e find him at Rocky Moun tain Portage Fort in 1 8 1 1 , at Stuart Lake in 18 1 3 , at McLeod
Lake ; in 18 14, at Fraser Lake . I t does no t appear that Mr. Harmon ever reached the
Pacific coast ; he however passed eight and a-half years on the western s ide of the Rocky
Moun tain s . The description of his travel s and experien ce accords w ith the other expedit i on s rel ated in this paper .
Mr. Harmon finally left McLeod Lake on May 8 th , 1 8 19 , and arrived at FortW illiam ,
Lake Superior, on August 1 8th ,th e sam e year
,eh route for Mon treal .
Harmon ’s Journ al,publi shed in 1 820 , furn i shes an in terestin g n arrative of a fur
trader ’s l ife in thes e early days . He gives a full and en tertain in g accoun t o f the Indi an
tribes w ith which he cam e in con tact on both sides of the Rocky Moun tain s .
( 8 ) The Travels of Mr. Alexander Ross, 18 1 1— 1 8 25 .
Mr. A lexander Ross , on e of the twen ty- eight Can adian s who lan ded at the mouth o f
the Columbia in 1 8 1 1 , has rel ated his adven tures durin g the fifteen years he remain ed on
thePacific coast , and given a n arrat ive o f his expedition across the con t in en t . Mr. Ross was
in Upper Can ada when he was invited by Mr. A lexander McKay , the sen ior partn er, to j oin
the Pacific Fur Company, then being organ i z ed by Mr. A stor . He proceeded w i th severalCan adian s to New York , and there embarked for the mouth o f the Columbia, w ith thir tythree differen t person s , al l b u t three of whom were British sub jects . Mr. Ross was presen t
when A stori a was established, and when David Thompson ,
of theNorth-West Compan y ,arrived there a few weeks later . He describes the circumstan ces which led , in thefollow in g summer , to the breakin g up of the Pacific Fur Company , and the t ran sfer of the
EXPEDITIONS TO PACIFI C. 1 18
stores , m erchandise and buildings to the Nor th-West Company . He in forms us , that after
A stori a had remain ed in possession of the latter company for about four .w eeks , it was
taken possession of by the officer in comman d of H . M . S. Racoon ,
”in the Kin g’s n ame ,
and changed from A stori a to Fort G eorge . Four mon ths later Mr. Ross en tered the
service o f the North-West Company,and proceeded to the duties assign ed him in the
in terior . He spen t the following twelve years trading w i th the I ndian tribes , amongst
whom he had man y adven tures, and n o t a few hair-breadth escapes . I n th e spring
'
of
1 825,in company w ith Sir George Simpson ,
he set out to cross the moun tain s . Theyfollowed the Columbia to the Great Bend, kn own as Boat E ncampmen t they ascended
b y the A thabasca pass to a smal l lake to which the n ame of the “ Comm ittee ’s Pun chBow l ,
” was given . 0 11 reaching the main source of the A thabasca , they follow ed t he
curren t of that river to Fort A ssin iboin e ; here they chan ged can oes for horses , and strucksouth -easterly acros s the coun try for Edmon ton . At this post they remain ed two w eeks ,during their stay a gran d bal l was g i ven in hon or of Govern or Simpson . The party left
by a b rigade of boats to float down the sw ift Saskat chewan f They halted at FortCarleton and Cumberlan d House . At the latter pl ace they foun d the Franklin advan ceparty ; further down the river they met Captain Franklin and Dr . Richardson on their
overland Arctic expedition . The travellers reached Lake W inn ipeg and visited Norway
House , then a place of con siderable busin ess and activity . At this place the traders,on
their return from the posts of the company , from Lake Superior 0 11 the south , the RockyMoun tain s on the west , and Macken zie River on the n orth , an n ually collected the fruitsof their labour, to be dispatched to York Factory on Hudson Bay . After remain ing
two w eeks at Norway House, Mr. Ross m ade the passage of Lake W inn ipeg, and early
in July, 1 825 , reached the Red River settlemen t where after a varied and even tful l ife“
he established himself. I n 1 849 he published a volume describing the career of the
Pacific Fur Company , its operat ion s , reverses and hual discomfiture ; and in 1 855 a
secon d n arrative of his adven tures among the In dian tr ibes west of the Rocky Moun tain s .
(9 ) Travels of Mr . John McLeod, 1 822— 1 826 .
A fter th e un ion of the Hudson ’s Bay Company w ith the North-West Company, in1 821 , Mr. John McLeod was th e first officer to cross theRocky Moun tain s from the east .
Mr. McLeod en tered the servic e of the old Hudson ’s Bay Compan y in 1 8 1 1 , and for
the ten years previously to the un i on o f the two , he was a zealous participan t in the
con t est w ith the North-WestCompany . He was detailed to accompany and as si st Lord
Selkirk ’s first brigade of colon i st s from York Factory to Red River, and he established
trading posts at a number of places in the prairie region , to in tercept the trade of the rivalcompan y .
.
Mr . McLeod,when selected by the un i ted compan i es to proceed to the west
side o f the Rocky Moun tain s , was station ed at Green Lake , about 20 0 m iles n orth of Fort
Carlton . He set out in 1 8 22 , w i th his w ife and two youn g children . He reached
A thabasca River, and crossed the moun tain s by the A thabasca pass t o the Columbia,
and descen ded the river to its mon th . I n the follow in g years he was en gaged at
differen t posts in trade operation s ; during this t ime he left Kam loops , fol lowed the
Thompson ,and descended the Fraser to the Strait of Georgia . Mr. McLeod was in the
Columbia district when it was dec ided to change the headquarters of the company . Fort
Sec. II, 1889. 15 .
1 14 SANDFORD FLEMING ON
George was open to some objection s , and an other site was finally selected on the n orthernbank of th e river , about a hundred miles from the mouth . At this poin t a n ew cen tral
post Was establ ished , in 1825 , on a large and perman en t scale , called in _ hon our of the
famous n avigator,Fort Van couver . The n ew headquarters of the compan y w ere pl aced
on the n orthern bank of the river, in order that i t might be indisputab ly on British soi l ;there was no probability at that date of the in tern at ion al boundary being establ ished tothe n orth of the Columbia .
I n March,1 826
,Mr. McLeod left Fort Van couver to proceed eastward . He was
accompan ied by Mr. Edward E rmat inger and Mr. Douglas , the dist in guished botan i st .
The crew con sisted of sixteen men ,two ofwhom were San dw ich Islan ders . Their route
took them to Okan agan and Spokan e . They ascen ded the Columbia to Boat E ncampmen t , the river at the t ime being much obstructed by ice . The moun tain s were cross edby the A thabasca pass
,then covered w ith deep sn ow
, and,w ith much difficulty and
some danger, the party reached Jaspar House on May 5 th . Here he was detain ed
ow in g to the confin emen t of his wi fe , which had taken place in February , the family
hay in g proceeded thither the previous October . On horses bein g sen t forward from
Edmon ton , they con tinued their journ ey , and reached that stat ion on May 1 7 th .
From Edmon ton they embarked in the spring brigade of boats to fol low the river Sas
katchewan and the chain of waters to Hudson Bay . They reached York Factory in July ,havin g crossed the con tin en t in three mon ths and twen ty days . Mr. McLeod was in
the service of the Hudson ’s Bay Company when he died , in 1 849 , at the age of s ixty-one.
(10 ) E xpedition of Sir George Simpson , 1 828 .
The expedition of Sir George Simpson , in 1 8 28 , i s remarkable in every poin t of View .
A s residen t govern or of the Hudson ’s Bay Compan y he madefrequen t Visit s to the
territory of Rupert ’s Land and the Northwest, in order to exam in e in to the condition of
the several posts,and superin ten d the affairs of the compan y over which he presided .
On this occasion he resolved to travel from Hudson Bay to the Strait of Georgia .
Leaving York Factory,he ascen ded Hayes River , passing through what was kn own
as the boat route to Lake W in n ipeg,at the n orthern end of which i s Norway House .
Skirting the n orth shore of the l ake , he passed to the Saskatchewan , which he ascen ded
to Cumberland House . From this poin t he wen t n orthward through the chain of lakes
and streams un t il he reached Churchil l River, which he followed to the height o f l an d,Methye Portage . By Clearwater R iver , he en tered the Athabasca, follow ing its w atersto Athabasca Lake and Peace River . He ascen ded Peace River , passing through the main
Rocky Moun tain chain and,w ith the aid of horses , he crossed the plateau , a distan ce 0 1
eighty-three miles , to Fort St . James , on the east of Stuart Lake . Sir George Simpson
w as careful on all occasion s to en ter the forts he visited w ith his men, cl ean and dres sed
in their best . He carried w ith him a piper,who also acted as his servan t . In this in stan ce
the same ceremony was observed a gun was fired,the bugle soun ded
, and the piper led
the m arch . There was a meetin g to be held here of the chief officers , among whom Mr. ,
afterwards Sir, Jam es D ouglas , the first Govern or of British Columbia, was presen t , and,
amid a discharge of smal l arms, Mr. Douglas wen t out to meet Sir George . Mr. Conolly,the chief factor of the Pacific depar tmen t
,was also expected . He had no t arrived . Shortly,
1 16 SANDFORD FLEMING ON
In the autumn of 1 829, Mr. Douglas again s ai led from Englan d for the Pacific coast
of North America . Between the date o f his arrival and 1 834, his exploration s extended
gen erally through the coun try drain ed by the Columbia and the Fraser . The two lastyears of his l i fe were devoted to scien t ific exam in ation s in British Columbia .
In his travel s through the coun try he obtain ed the kn owledge of man y plan ts , birdsand mammals hitherto unkn own his discoveries in clude the Douglas fir
,which w il l
always bear h is n ame .
David Douglas was born at Scon e , Perthshire , in 179 8 . H is end i s much to be
deplored he was gored to death by a w i ld bul l in the San dw ich Islan ds , July 1 2 th , 1 834.
( 1 2 ) E xplorat ions and Travels of Mr. Robert Campbell, 1 830 — 1 843 .
Among the adven turous men sen t out by the Hudson ’s Bay Company , to explore
the coun try beyond the Rocky Moun tain s,Mr . Rober t Campbell takes a prom in en t pl ace .
The field of his operation s was main ly in the territory to the n orth of Briti sh Columbia ,st il l on ly imperfectly known .
Mr. Campbell was born at Glen lyon,in Scotland ; h e l eft home on Jun e lst , 1 830 ,
under an en gagemen t wi th the Hudson ’s Bay Company . He lan ded atYork Factory, and
proceeded to Fort Garry: He was variously employed un til the spring of 1834, when he
was tran sferred to the Macken zie River district . I n 1 838 he established a trading post at
Dease Lake , on e of the sources of the river Li ard,an impor tan t tributary of Macken z ie
River. On this o ccasion he passed over to Stikeen River , which flows in to the Pacific n ear
Fort Wrangle, n ow w ell kn own in con n ection w i th the Cassiar gold fields of British
Columbia . In 1 840 , Campbel l travel led up the n orthern bran ch o f the Li ard . Leav ing
Fort Halkett on the latt er river in May , w i th seven men he ascen ded the bran ch several
hundred miles in to the moun tain s to a lake which he n amed Lake Fran ci s and some
distan ce further , to a secon d lake , in about l ati tude 6 2° N . l ongitude 1 30 ° W .
, which
he called Lake F in l ayson . From this poin t he passed to the western slope, and in
two days ’ travel he discovered a w ide stream which he styled the river Pelly . I n 1 841
a trading post was establi shed on Lake Fran cis . In 1 843 , Mr. Campbell left Lake Fran ci s ,recrossed the moun tain to Pel ly River , which he descen ded for some distan ce . This
river discovered by him proved to be iden tical w i th the Yukon which flows in to the
Pacific far n orth . Three hundred miles from the sources of the Pel ly, Fort S elkirk was
establ ished , and the river was explored by Campbel l 70 0 miles to For t Yukon , establ ished
in 1 846 by .I . Bel l of the Hudson ’s Bay,
Company, 1 5 0 miles w ithin the A laska boundary .
From Fort Yukon,situated almost directly 0 11 the Arctic circle and about 1 45 ° W.
longitude , Mr . Campbell ascended the river Porcupin e to i ts eastern sources , crossed the
height of lan d to Peel River , a small tributary of the Macken zie , not far from its outle tin the A rctic Ocean . Follow ing the tributary to the main stream , he ascended Macken zi e
River to Fort Simpson,his starting poin t at the mouth of the Li ard .
I n 1 85 2 - 53 Mr. Campbell made a remarkable journey from the Yukon t erritory toE ngland . He l eft White River
,n ear the Alaskan boundary, on September 6 th ,
ascended
the Pelly to on e of i ts s ources,crossed the moun tain s to a bran ch of the Li ard ,which he fol
lowed to Fort Simpson,at which place he arrived on O ctober 2lst . W in ter hay ing set in ,
he started on sn owshoes to make a j ourney to Grow W ing, on the Mi ss iss ippi , extending
EXPE DITIONS TO PACIFIC. 1 17
over sixteen degrees of lat i tude and twen ty -seven degrees of longitude . He h ad w ith h im
three men and a train o f dogs these were changed at the Hudson ’s Bay posts on his route
as he arrived at them . H i s course lay by Great Slave Lake , Lake A thabasca, I le a laCrosse , Carlton House , Fort Pelly Fort Garry and Pembin a . Ou March 1 3th ,
Mr.
Campbell reached Crow Wing,where he obtain ed horses for the journ ey to Chicago . From
Chicago he started eas tward , and arrived at Mon treal on April the ls t , and such was his
dispatch that he was en abled to report himself in Lon don at the Hudson s Bay Houseon the 1 8th of that mon th . From his starting poin t on the Pelly-Ynkon , Mr. Campbell
had made a con t inuous journ ey of mil es,n early half of which was through an un in
habited w i ldern ess . and of thi s distan ce some miles were passed over in the dead
of w in ter and much of it walked on sn owshoes . I n the ann als of the Hudson ’s Bay
Company ’s service,lon g w in t er journ e y s un der circumstan ces simi lar to the on e described
are n ot un common . Possibly the long tramps o f the in trepid Dr . Rae in 185 1 , and o f
Adm iral Sir Leopold , then Comman der, McClin tock ,in 1 85 3
,both in con n ection w i th the
Franklin Search expedition s .are t o some exten t comparable w ith them .
Mr. Campbell , the discoverer of the Pelly-Yukon ,the largest river flow ing in to the
Pacific from the Ame1ican con t inen t , i s sti ll l iving, and enjoys excel len t health, 0 11 his
ran ch in Man itoba . He i s on e o f the last represen tatives of the great explorers of the
Hudson ’s Bay Company under the old regime . I I ie n ame comes close to the end in thelong li st of active and un daun ted men who
,from the days of Macken zie . traversed the
moun tain s , and unkn own w il ds i t would be diflicult to find their peers in courage and
en durance in any servic e .
In 1 887 -88 the field of Mr. Campbell ’s discoveries was Visited by Dr . Gr. M . Dawson ,
of the Geological Survey . Dr . Dawson en tered the in terior from the Pacific coast by theriver Stikeen ,
passed over to the Li ard,and thence to the Pelly-Yukon . He return ed by
the river Lew i s to the Lynn can al on the coast . The j ourn ey proved exceedingly fatiguingand not a l ittle peri lous . H is assoc iates , Messrs . McConn elland Ogilvi e remain ed in
the district to carry on astronom ical observation s and held exploration s during the following w in ter and summer .
(13) Sir George S impson’
s Journey round the World, 1 841 .
Sir George Simpson havin g resolved to travel round the world , l eft Englan d on
March 3rd,1 841 , and landed at Boston ,
when ce he made his way t o Mon treal. H i soutfit was completed at Lachin e , the headquarters of the Hudson ’s Bay Company in
Can ada . The expediti on start ed from that Vil lage on 4th May on the 16th of the mon th
th e party arrived at Sault St . Mary . After som e deten t ion by ice on Lake Superior , Sir
George reached Thun der Bay and ascended by the Kamin ist iqua to the height o f land .
He traversed the chain of lakes and rivers to Lake of the Woods , and arrived at FortA lexander, n ear the mou th of the river Winn ipeg 0 11 Jun e 8 th . On the third day
following, Sir-George Simpson was at Fort Garry, having accompl ished the journ ey o f
miles in thirty-eight days .
There was an ord in ary trail from Fort Garry to Edmon ton . I t -passed from poin t to
poin t across thc prairi e, and was used by the Red River carts for the tran sportat i on o f
merchandise . I t was not always in good conditi on,but was easily followed along the
1 18 SANDFORD FLEMING ON
ban ks o f the Assin iboin e to Fort E ll i ce, then ce to Fort Carlton ,Fort Pitt and Edmon
ton . Ou July 23rd, Sir George left Edmon ton , t aking a south -western course . He
crossed Battle River and Red Deer River and two bran ches of Bow River . A scending
by a tributary o f the latter, he gain ed the height of lan d at the Kan an askis pass in
about 5 0 ° 30 ' latitude . Descen ding a tributary of the Kooten ay to the main river of
that n ame,the party directed its course to Kulispelm Lake , the source of Pen d d
’
Oreille
River which was foll owed to the Columbia .
At no great distan ce , south of the presen t boundary lin e the then Hudson ’s Bay
post of Fort Colvil le was situated . Here then,
” wri tes Sir George , term in ated a lon g
and l aborious journ ey of n early two thousan d m i l es on horseback,across plain s
,moun
tain s,rivers and forests . For s ix weeks and fiv e days we had been con stan tly riding, or
at least as con stan tly as the strength of our horses would allow,from early dawn to sun
set,an d we had , on an average
,been in the saddle about eleven hours and a half a day .
From Red River to Edmon ton , on e day’s work w ith an other am oun ted to about fifty
miles, but from Edmon ton to Colvil le, we more gen erally than otherw is e fel l short of forty .
From Fort Colville , the Columbia was descen ded by can oe . The travel lers passed the
Company ’s post of Okan agan and reached Fort Van couver . From Fort Van couver , SirGeorge crossed to Puget Sound, where, on September 6 th , he embarked on board the
company’
s steamer the Beaver,
”and passed up the Strait o f Georgia on a tour of in
spect ion to the various trading ports . He proceeded as far n or th as Sitka, and reached the
quarters of the Russ ian America Company at New Archangel . He left 0 11 September
3oth ,and return ed
,
to Fort Van couver,when ce he travelled to San Fran cisco, Monterey
and St . Barbara. The l at ter pl ace he l eft on January 27 th , to Visi t the Sandw ich I slands .
He returned to Sitka, when ce he took ship t o con t inue his remarkable j ourn ey . I n the
voyage he sk irted Kamschatka to reach a more western poin t on the A siatic coast . He
traversed Siberia to gain western Russ i a , and at St . Petersburg embarked for Englan d .
This portion of his j ourn ey has n o bearing upon his passage across the American con ti
n en t,but it is worthy of m en tion as in dicating the en ergy of character and tenacity of
purpose which characteriz ed the man .
Period I L— FROM OREGON TRE ATY IN 1 846 TO CONFE DERATION IN 1 867 .
The Oregon Treaty of 1 846, w i th the Un ited States , and the passage of the Imperial
A ct , establish ing the Domin i on of Can ada , form epochs of great importan ce in the history
of the n orthern half of North America .
The first for ever settled an in tern ation al dispute which had exi sted for a quar ter of
a cen tury , and had awaken ed feel ings on both s ides of bitt er hosti l ity. It was a turn ing
poin t in the career o f the Hudson ’s Bay Company the commen cem en t of a series of even t s
owin g to the influen ce of which the old regime was to pass away . The secon d was the
gen esis o i a n ew order of things . I t gave bir th to Can ada as a Domin ion , w i th a n ation al
status and w ith a territory o f sem i-con t in en tal m agn itude .
The time which in terven ed between the Oregon Treaty and the establi shmen t of the
Domin ion by the Briti sh North America A ct may be con s idered as a period of tran si tion .
During these twen ty-on e years we have records o f at l east eight expedition s from the
1 2 0 SANDFORD FLEMING ON
mountain s the route followed was the trail to Edmon ton . From Edmon ton he proceeded
westward to the river McLeod, which he ascen ded in to the heart of th e m oun tain s . I n
gaining the height o f lan d , he followed the east ern slope of the moun tain s to the sources
of Bow River, whi ch he descen ded un t il h e met the Edmon ton trai l which Sir GeorgeSimpson passed ov er in 1 841 , and which Lord Sou thesk follow ed . Return ing by way
of the North Saskatchewan ,Forts Carlton and Pelly
,he reached Fort Garry in Jann ary ,
1 860 . From Fort Garry he passed by way of M inn esota to New York and took passage
for England . I n 1 875 a Volume was published w ith a n arrative of Lord Southesk’
s
travels and adven tures .
(3) E xplorations of Cap tain Palliser and his Associates, 1 857— 1 860 .
The exploration s of Captain Pal lis er took place in 1 857- 60 , un der in struction s
from th e Imperial Governmen t . He ascended the St . Lawren ce,and traversed the lakes
to Fort W i ll i am,where hi s examin ation may be said to have comm en ced . He was
assisted by sev eral w ell kn own scien t ific men , among whom may be n amed Dr . Hector
and Li euten an t Blakist on , Mr . John W . Sull iv an and M . Bourgeau . The examin ation s
made b y th e expedit ion extended from Lake Superior to the Okan agan Lakes in British
Columbia, and from the fron t i er of the Un ited Stat es n orthward to the sources o f the
chief rivers which flow to the Arctic O cean .
I n the summer of 1 85 7 , the atten t ion o f Captain Palliser was direc ted to that porti onof the country lying between Lake Superior and the prairies . The examin ation was
con tinued up Red Riv er to Pembin a, up the A ssin iboin e to Fort E l l ice, and up the
Qu’
Appelle to the elbow of the South Saskatchewan then ce across the coun try t o For tCarlton on the North Saskatchewan . The members of th e expedi tion arrived at this placein O ctober, and their w in t er quarters were established here . From Fort
'
Carlton , Captain
Palliser started for Fort Garry,the Un ited States and Can ada, t o return the follow ing
spring . Dr . Hector made a w in t er journ ey from Fort Carlton up the North Saskatchewanto Fort P itt
,Edmon ton and Rocky Moun tain House . He also pen etrated the first range
of moun tain s .
At the commen cemen t of the summer of 1 85 8 , the various bran ches of the expedi t ion
set out fromC arlton to exam in e the E agle Hi lls , Battle River , Red Deer River and Bow
River districts . The latter stream was fol lowed to the moun tain s along the route on whichthe Pacific Railway i s to day con structed . The Vermi l ion and Kan an askis passes were
exam in ed and the sources of Kooten ay River reached . Dr . H ector return ed by KickingHorse River, and explored in the gen eral dire ction o f the moun tain s to the Brazeau
ran ge , and from the sources of the North Saskatchewan he followed the course of that
river to Edmon ton . Traces of the weari som e j ourn eys , made by h im in this and the
following years,are everywhere t o be met by the railway traveller in the n ames of
moun t ain s and rivers between Calgary and th e Columbia . Captain Pal liser exten ded
his j ourn ey to the boundary of the Un i ted States , and return ing n ortherly reached'
Edmon ton in September . Dr. Hector reached that post in October .In January, 1 85 9 , Dr . Hector left Edmonton on a journ ey to themoun tain s . He made
his way by the usual means of travelling in w in t er to Jaspar House , then ce to the Atha
basca pass . Return ing to Edmon ton in Apri l,he immediately l eft for Fort P i tt . Captain
EXPEDITIONS TO PACIFIC. 1 2 1
Palliser star ted in May for th e forks of the South Saskatchewan and Red Deer River,
and then ce to the district n ear the Un i ted States boun dary . He crossed the moun tain s
by the Kooten ay pass , followed Kooten ay River to Fort Sheph erd and Fort Colville ; andfrom Fort Shepherd he made excursion s to the westward . Ou reachin g Fort Colville ,Dr . Hector descended the Columbi a to the sea .
The report s of the Pall iser expedition ,presen t ed to the Imperial Parl iamen t in 1 863
,
furn i sh detailed n arratives of t h e exploration s undertaken by the several bran ches of thesurvey , w i th maps show ing the routes followed from Lake Superior to the moun t ain s andlikewi se through the moun tain s . These documen ts con tain much sci en tifi c and gen eral
in formation respecting the cen tral prairie region s, and they throw l ight 0 11 an immen se
territory previously but little kn own . The in formation furn i shed by this expeditiongives indication of the great agricultural and industri al possibil ities of vast areas of the
in terior of Brit i sh North Am erica . Captain Palliser’
s report i s also remarkable for his
adverse recommendati on to the British Governmen t in respect to open ing up the coun try
for settlemen t ,1and for th e posi tive opin i on given by h im as to the impracticabili ty of
con struct ing a railway through Brit ish America to the Pacific . He con sidered that thewhole prairie region n orth of the 49 th paral l el was completely isol ated and practically
un approachabl e both from east and west .
(4) Journey of Mr. M . Lawrtn , 1 86 0 .
Mr. M . Law rin,an old m in er, l eft the forks of Quesn elle, in the Carib oo coun try, on
August 1 5 th , 1860 to cross the moun tain s to the east . H is party cons ist ed of four per
son s besides himself, and they carried away w i th them in value of the precious
metal from the Carib oo diggings .” The li ttle party ascended Fraser River by canoeto its source at Yellow Head Lake . Aban don ing the canoe as it could be of no further
service , they crossed the Rocky Moun tain “ divide ” at the Yellow Head pass,to the
rivers Myet te and A thabasca, follow ing the latter to Jaspar House ; proceeding by thetrai l they found their way to Edmon ton and Fort Garry , and fin ally reached St . Pau l ,0 11 the Mississ ippi .
(5 ) Journey of D r. A . P. Reid and others, 186 1 .
So far, we have had 11 0 record of any party or person , other than the officials and
explorers of the Hudson ’s Bay Compan y en tering British Columbia by the Yellow Head orA thabasca passes . Immigran ts
,attracted by the gold discoveries
,gen erally reached the
1 “ I therefore cannot recommend the Imperial Government to ronn tenance or lend support t o any scheme for
constructing or, it may he said, forcing a thoroughfare b y th i s l ine of route e ither b y land or water, as there wouldb e no immediate advan tage commen surate w i th the requi red sacrifice of capital ; nor can I adv ise such heavyexpenditure as would necessari ly at tend the construct ion of any exclus ively Bri t ish l ine of road between Canada
and Red R iver sett lemen t .” Palliser’s Report , p. 6 .
7 St i l l the knowledge of the country , on the whole, would never lead me to advocate a l ine of commun icat ionfrom Canada across t he con t i nen t to the Pacific, exclusively through Bri t i sh terr itory. The time has now for evergone b y for effecting such an object , and the un fortunate cho ice of an astronomical boundary l ine has completelyi solated the Cen tral American possession s of Great Bri tain from Canada in t he east
,and also almos t debarred
them from any el ig ible access from the Pacific coast on the wes t .” I hid. p. 6 .
Sec . 11,1889 . 16 .
1 2 2 SANDFORD FLEMING ON
famed Fraser River by the sea . The few who wen t overland from the east , s truck away
from the Saskatchewan to the southward of the in tern ation al boun dary , and en tered
either by Fort Colville and Portl and , or by Fort Colvill e and Similkameen. Dr. A . P.
Reid and fiv e others started to find their W ay by one of these routes . They left FortGarry on Jun e 1 8 th , 1 86 1 ; they travel led by way of Fort E lli ce
,Carlton , For t Pi t t
and E dmon ton ; turn ing southward , they crossed Bow River and,by a southern pass ,
reached Kooten ay R iver . They were weak in numbers and had on ly an imperfect idea
of the difficult ies of the route ; in con sequence, they suffered much hardship , fel l shor t
o f food , and reached Fort Colville in great distress on November 26 th .
(6) M ig ration of a large party of Canadians, 1 862 .
The discovery of gold on the Fraser exercised a powerful influence on the history of
British Columbia ; so that in 1 860 a con siderabl e population had assembled w i thin the
provin ce, all , or n early al l of whom, W as engaged in m in ing . The first rush to the
gol d min es was in 1 85 8 ; the rich discoveries made in 18 61 on Wi l l iam’s Creek , caused
a secon d immigration . The excitemen t resultin g from the boun t iful presen ce of theprecious metal exten ded in al l direction s
,so that men gathered from every quarter .
I n 1 862 i t influen ced many adven turous n atures in On tari o to Vis it the scen e of the
discovery , in the hope o f bettering their fortun es . Man y hundreds wen t roun d by
Pan ama . A l arge company was formed to find i t s way overlan d i t con si sted of 1 93 men,
made up of detachmen ts from Queen stown , St . Thomas,Hun t in gton
,O ttawa
,Toron to
,
London , Mon treal , Huron and a few from Ogden sburg . They l eft their homes during the
mon th of April , to rendezvous at St . Paul , Minn esota . From St . Paul they proceeded , byBurban k’s stages
,to Red River , which they descen ded, by the steamer In tern ation al ,
to Fort Garry .
At Fort Garry they completed their organ i z ation for th e j ourn ey . Thcir number
was in creased to two hun dred by the addition of seven person s from the Red River
settlem en t , amon g whom were Mr. and Mrs . Schubert and three smal l children . The
expedition l eft Fort Garry on Jun e 2ud ; i t formed a train con si st ing of about n in e ty
Red River carts , each drawn bya n ox. There were also about fifty saddle horses w ith
the party . The j ourn ey across the plain s was n ecess ari ly slow,and they on ly came in
sight o f Fort Edmon ton on July 2 1s t , having accompl ished some 9 0 0 miles of their
journ ey from Fort G arry , w ithout any serious hardships having been en coun tered .
At Fort Edmon ton they exchan ged the carts for pack saddles , and left for the mountains on July 29 th . Their route was by the ordin ary trail
,imperfec tly defin ed,
through
forest and swamp to Jaspar Hou se , and then ce up the Val leys o f the A thabasca and Myet teto the Yellow H ead pass
,where - the river Fraser takes its ris e ; follow ing which they
reached Tete-Jaun e -Cache on Augus t 2 8 th . Here those con stituting the party wereun able to decide as to the route they should fol low . 1 I t was fin ally agreed to divide in to
two parties,each division to act independen tly o f the other and fol low the direction i t
might select . Both of them left Té t e-Jann e-Cache on the same day, September 2ud.
The larger number made rafts by which they descended the Fraser, which at this poin t
flow s n orth-westerly . Those who trusted to the river had m any m i shaps and underwen t
suffering , but they arrived at the mouth of th c Quesn el on September 1 1 th . They lost
12 4 SAND FORD FLEMING ON
despatched to rescue the unhappy men l eft behin d . They return ed in a few days ,
explain ing that,ow ing to the depth of th e sn ow ,
they were un able to p roceed . The
wri ter w i ll leave Dr , Cheadle to relate the con c lusion of this pain ful n arrative .
O ther Indian s , however, discovered the par ty some time afterwards . Helston e and
Wright were sti llal i ve , but , madden ed by hun ger, had killed Renn ie . When they were
found they had eaten allbut hi s l egs,which they held in their hands at the t ime . They
were covered w ith blood,being engaged in t earin g the raw flesh from the bon es w i th
their teeth . The In dian s attempted to light a fire for them , W hen th e two can n ibalsdrew their revolvers
, and looked so w i ld and savage that the Indian s fled and le ft them
to their'
fate, no t daring to return . The follow ing spring a party o f m in ers , on their
way to Peace River , were guided by Indian s to the place where these men were seen
by them . The bon es of two were found p iled in a heap,on e scull had been split Op en
by an axe, and many of the other bon es showed the marks of teeth . The third was
m i ss ing , but was afterwards discovered a few hundred yards from the camp . The skull
had been cloven by an axe,and the clothes stripped from the body
,which was l i ttl e
decomposed . The interpretat ion of these sign s could hardly be mistaken . The lastsurvivor had kil led his fellow-murderer and eaten him
,as shown by the gn awed bon es ,
so carefully pi led in a heap . He had in turn probably been murdered by Indian s , for th e
prin cipal part of th e dead man ’s property was found in their possessi on (p
(7 ) Travels of Lord M ilton and D r. Cheadle, 1 862— 1 863 .
No Pacific expedition has attracted great er atten tion than that of Lord Mi lton and
Dr . Cheadle ; that such was the case may be at tributed to the l iterary abil ity w ith whichthe n arrat ive was written . The travellers arrived at Quebec in the Spring of 1 862 ,
‘
and
made their way,w i thout loss of time , to Red River , but n ot w ithout some of the unpleas
an t in ciden t s of such a journ ey, common en ough a quarter o f a c en tury back . They
n arrow ly escaped being in volved in the massacre , by the Sioux, of the settlers in Minn e
sota , through which State they passed and in their can oe voyage down Red River they
had to undergo serious privation and in cur danger .
They left Red River to proceed to Edmon ton ,but the season being late, they dec ided
to w in t er at White Fi sh Lake , eighty m iles beyon d Carleton . They reached Edmon ton inMay ,
1 863 . Here they were advised again st follow ing the route by the Yellow Head pass ,but the Can adian party , the preceding year, havin g travelled by it , they determin ed tofollow the trail which so large a party must have left the traces .
They started from Edmon ton on Jun e 8 th ,1 863 . They had w ith them an Indian ,
kn own in the n arrative as“ the A ss in iboin e h e was accompan ied by his w ife and
their son ,a boy of thirteen . The Assin iboin e had but on e han d n evertheles s he w as an
excellen t hun ter , of undaun t ed courage and un fai ling resource . The guide,Baptiste
,
whom they had engaged , w ith a Mr . completed the party,which thus con si sted of
seven person s . The latter in dividual had drifted westward to Edmon ton ,possibly w ith
the Can adian party . He was a Cambridge man, w i th a good kn owl edge of classics , but
the most shi ft less and useless of hum an beings . No on e could h av e been more out of his
el emen t , on such a journ ey . Men tion of him threw doubt upon the n arrative, but the
EXPEDITIONS TO PACIFIC. 1 2 5
writer of this paper,from in formation obtain ed at Edmonton and Briti sh Colum b ia in
1 8 72 , can tes ti fy that Mr . O’
B . was n o t a creation o f fan cy , but that he ex i sted in the flesh .
At the elbow o f McLeod River, Baptiste deserted , but the j ourn ey was persevered
in . The travellers experien ced great difficult ies,and suff ered the hardships in c iden t to a
j ourn ey through that. rugged coun try possibly the obs tacles would n o t have been found
so trying to men experien ced in backwoods l ife . Th ey con t inued on the trail of the
travel lers of th e previous year,and on Jun e 29 th reached Jaspar TI ouse . Ou July
17 th they were at the Yel low Head pass . O ccasion al ly they lost the trail, but the in telligen ce of the A ssin iboin e invariably regain ed i t .
They had n o defin ite objective poin t in Bri tish Columbia, and had con sidered i tadvisable to follow the route taken by the Can adian s , as the trace of i t was n o t whol ly
obliterated . At Tet t .
-Jaun e-Cacli e i t led them to the southward , where the timber becameheavier
,the obstruction greater , and the route more difficu l t to fol low . Fin ally they
arrived at the spot where the Can adian s had made raft s to descend the Thompson ,and
from thi s poin t th ey were compell ed t o proceed over un trodden ground .
They could n ot retreat or leave the deep val ley they had en tered , so they con t inuedto follow the ri ver . Their h ardships and great privation s n ow real ly commen ced , and
except for the indom itable spirit which sustain ed them , and the resources of the A ssin i
boin e,they must have succumbed . Those fam il iar w i th their publi shed n arrative, may
remember their accoun t o f the headless Indian sitting upright as a mummy , w ith a
tattered blanket,by the dead ashes of a fire
,w ith the bon es of a horse and a few uten s ils
beside him .
1 The sight came upon them all as a pain ful w arn ing o f what m ight be theirown fate
,a slow death by starvation . They were , however, sustain ed by the hope that
they would ultimately reach som e settlemen t . Soon aft erwards they were dishearten ed
by the on e hand o f th e Assin iboin e becoming di sabled . The woman took her husband’s
place in cutt in g out the way . They passed th e first three weeks oFAugust in t he struggle
to advan ce,worn out w ith fat igue
,weak from wan t o f food,
an d w ith the prospectbefore them of death by hun ger . They ki lled their two horses on e after the other to
supply their wan t . Pressing forward day by day , on August 1 8 th they came on
the traces of human beings . Some bushes had recen tly b een cut , a few “ blazed ” trees
succeeded , and t hey met some Indian s who gave them food . Their prowess in eating
aston ished even the In dian s,who are n o t giy en to surprise at feats of thi s description .
Fin ally they reached Kamloops , and for s ome. days the whole party could think o f
n othing b u t eating . From Kamloops they foun d their way to New Westmin ster and
Victoria. They return ed to the main land and passed up to Lilloet , Quesn el and Richfield,
to vis i t the Carib oo gold-diggings .
Lord M ilton and D r. Cheadle returned to En glan d by the way of Cal iforn ia , Pan ama
and New York . A'
n arrat iv e of their adven tures appeared in 1 865 , The North-West
Passage by Lan d ,
” which has passed through several editi on s .
1 t oI‘
he reader 18 referred to D r. Gran t’s book , Ocean to Ocean ,2 x5 , where the record is made of the buria l of
these remains , June 5 th , 18 72 . The head was found yards up the bank of the r iver. The skul l was brought toOttawa, and was lost in the fire of the Canadian Pacific Ra i lway offices in the fol low ing year.
1 2 6 SANDFORD FLEMING ON
(8 ) Journey of D r. John Rae, 1 864 .
The year fol low ing the expedition of M il ton and Cheadle, Dr . John Rae , already dis
t inguished as an A rctic t rv eller, un dertook an overland journ ey to the Pacific . From the
east he found hi s way to Fort Garry,arriving there on Jun e l6th ,
1 864 , and l eaving on
the 26 th he took the route by Fort Pelly to Edmon ton . On August 7 th he reachedthe river McLeod
, when ce he passed t o the A thabasca . Follow ing the route taken by
M il ton and Cheadle,through t he Yellow Head pass
,he arrived at Tete-Jaun e-Cache on
August 23rd. Here his Indian guides,havin g heard of the ex tremely dan gerous character
o f the rapids , refused to descen d the Fraser .
Dr . Rae resolved to proceed w i thout the Indian s . He succeeded in purchas in g twosmal l dug-out canoes from the Shuswaps , a few o f whom he met at t his place , and
accompan i ed by Richard Turn er, Hen ry Macken zie and a third man ,he left Tete-Jaun e
Cache on August 2 7 th . On the fourth day of thei r descen t they reached a dangerousrapid at which there are two portages of con siderable length . It was kn own thatdi sasters had occurred on thi s part of the river
,but al l the m embers of the party w ere
experien ced can oe men ,and Macken z ie , w i th great courage , l ed the way in the smal lest
can oe . Ou the 3 1st , they ran an o ther dangerous rapid. man y miles long, in which severalmen had been drown ed in prev ious years . On September lst they reached Fort George .
From the ill-omen ed reputation of the section of the river above that station ,their safe
arrival caused aston i shmen t to the chi ef trader, Mr . Charl es for i t had been thought that ,
ow in g to the in tricate and dangerous n avigation,n o stranger un accompan i ed by a guide
could successfully make the descen t .Ou September 3rd, Dr . Rae l eft Fort George, taking w i th h im an In dian guide
and on e white man . They m ade the descen t to Quesn el,n early a hundred miles , in
on e day . Ou the 4th , accompan ied by on e man ,he paddled down to A l exan dri a, a
distan ce of thirty -fiv e miles , in less than fiv e hours . From A lexan dria,he fol lowed the
road to Richfield, the cen tre of the min in g district . Return in g to A lexandria, he obtain ed
horses , and rode to Yale , where he took the steamer to New Westmin ster .
Period I I I .
- FR0 M CONFE DERATION TO COMPLETION or CANAD IAN PACIFICRAILW AY IN 1885 .
An importan t change in the ann als of Can ada begin s w ith the British North America
A ct . By the Imperial statute , the several British Provin ces eastward of Lake Superior
were un ited to form one con federation,and at the same time provi sion was made for th e
occupat ion of the Northwest Territory and the en tran ce o f British Columbia in to the
Domin ion . The un i oni
of the Pacific provin ce w i th the provin ces in the eastern part o f thecon t in en t
,n ecessitated the establi shmen t o f a l in e of commun i cation between them ,
and
the con struction of the Can adian Pacific Railway w as the con sequen ce . The act of un ion
passed the Imperial Parl iamen t and came in to force in 1 867 ; British Columbia en tered
the Con federation in 1 87 1 . Between thes e dates the Governmen t of Can ada purchased theterri torial rights ef the Hudson ’s Bay Company . I n con sequen ce of the policy adopted tocarry out the condition s of the un ion ,
there has been a success ion of expedition s to the
1 2 8 SANDFORD FLEMING ON
British Columbia w ith the rai lway system of Can ada . The Can adian Governmen t
accordingly con sidered i t advisable that the whole distan ce should be caref ul ly explored ,and the wri ter w as in structed to make the n ecessary organ i zation to carry out the work .
The exam in ation w as commen ced in the summer o f 1 87 1 and was cont inued during
the fol low ing w in ter . A large number o f surveying parti es w ere engaged between
th e val ley of the O ttaw a and the Pac ific coast,and in 1 872 i t became n ecessary to under
take a gen eral reconn aisan ce and tour of in spect ion across the con tin en t .Previous to st artin g on the expedition ; the writer, as chie f engin eer of the In ter
colon i al Railway , then under con struct ion , had to make an examination of that lin e ;
this duty n ecessitated his presen ce in Nova Scotia . Accordin gly his western j ourn eycommen ced at Hal ifax .
Great in t erest being felt w i th regard to the surveys , i t was con s idered advis able tomake known to th e public as far as was expedien t
,the in formation obtain ed , so that the
problem which the Domin ion had undertaken to solve could be the better"
understood .
The wri ter had the good fortun e to induce the Rev . Gr. M. Gran t , of Halifax (now Prin
c ipalGran t , of Queen’s Col lege , Kingston ) , to accompany the expedition as secretary , w i th
the View of publi shing a n arrative of the j ourn ey .
Leavin g Hal ifax on July 1st,1 87 2 , the party arrived at Thunder Bay, Lake Superior ,
on July 2 2nd,and Fort Garry, on July 3 1st . The plain s were cros sed to Edmon ton ,
which place w as reached on August 27th . At Edmon ton a detachmen t con sisting of
Messrs . Horet sky and Macoun ,was despatched by way o f Peace River to the Pac ific
coast . The main party proceeded to Jaspar House , cros sed the moun tain s by the Yellow
Head Pass to Tete -Jaun e Cache , and passed southerly by way o f the Nor th Thompson
to Kam loops,where they arr ived on September 28 th . From Kamloops they followed the
governmen t road to Yale , the head of n avigation , an d by steamboat re ached New West
min ster .
After crossing the moun tain s by the Peace River pass , Mr. Macoun passed down the
Fraser to it s mouth . Mr. Horet sky found his way to the river Skeen a, and arrived at
Port Simpson ,on January 23rd,
1 87 3.
The writer extended his exam in ation to various poin ts in British Columbia, and
return ed to O ttawa by way of San Francisco . Full details are given in the Can adian
Pacific Railway Report subm itted to Parliamen t . A n arrative of the j ourn ey by Dr .
Gran t 1 was published the follow in g year .
(3 ) E xpedition of A (lj utanl-GenemlP. Robertson Ross, 1872 .
I n July , 1 872 , Colon el P. Robertson Ross , Adjutan t -Gen eral of Mil i tia , l eft O ttaw a
for the Northwes t Terri tory . H i s rout e was by Toron to, Collingwood , and the lakes to
Por t Arthur . Follow ing the old can oe route to Lake of the Woods , he reached theroad to Fort Garry, then lately Open ed . A fter vi sitin o' Pembin a he proceeded to FortEll ice
, Carlton ,V ictoria to Edmon ton and Rocky Moun tain House . From thi s point he
passed southward to the Bl ack feet coun try and crossed the Rocky Moun tain s by theNorth Kooten ay Pass . I n his n arrat ive , published in the M i l iti a Report for 1 872 , he gives
1 Ocean to Ocean . Sandford F lem ing’s Expedi t ion through Canada in 1872. By the Rev. George M . Grant .
EXPEDITIONS TO PACIFIC. 1 2 9
his views as to the number and character of the Indian s in the coun try traversed . Colon el
Robertson Ro ss reached W ild Horse Creek , on the wes t side of the m ain range ofmoun tain s , and proceeded southerly v ia Mooyais River, Lake Pend d
’
Oreille , the Spokan e and
Sn ake Rivers to Walla Walla and Walula,in Washington Territory, U . S. The portion of
th e j ourn ey across th e moun tain s was tedious and fatiguing . From Wala l a he descen dedthe Columbia to Port land , and then ce passed n orthward v ia Olympia and Puget Sound to
Victoria,in Vancouver I sland , where he .
arrived on October 28 th . Remain ing about
two week s in British Columbia, he return ed through the Un ited States by way of San
Fran c isco,and by railway to Chicago and O ttawa .
(4) Travels of General S ir W. F . Butler, 1 8 72 — 1 873 .
Gen eral, then Captain, W . F . Butler left England in 1 87 2 , and travelled by way o f
Minn esota to Red River . He found the village of Fort Garry, afterwards to be kn own as
the city of Winn ipeg ,
'
under the excitemen t of an elec t ion,the first which had taken
place . On O ctober 4th he left for the Northwes t . Reach ing the forks of the Saskatchewanhis in tention being to make this place a cen tral poin t from which the buffalo could
be hun ted , he remain ed in this n eighbourhood un ti l February, when w ith a dog-trainhe started for the west and reached Fort Carleton . Ou the 1 1th of that mon th he left
Fort Carleton and pas sed by the way of Methye portage , the river A thabasca and A thabascaLake to Peace River . He ascended the Peace River valley , follow ed the F in lay or NorthBran ch to Omin ica, and ascended a western tributary to German sen . From German sen
he passed overlan d to Fort St . James . Leaving this poin t on May 25 th he travelled
southerly to Quesn el on the Fraser,where he arrived on Jun e 3rd. At Quesn el he came
w ithin reach of the appl ian ces of civilization to carry him to New Westminster . Ou his
return to England,Gen eral Butler publi shed an accoun t of his travels ent i tled “ The
W i ld North Land , being the story of a w in t er j ourn ey w ith dogs across Northern North
America .
”
(5 ) E xpedition of the Boundary Commisszon ,1 872-1874 .
The boun dary between British North America and the Un it ed States , as described inthe Treaties of 1 8 1 8 and 1 846 , had been in previous years defin ed and traced from the
A tlant ic westward to Lake o f the Woods,and from the Pacific eastward to the crest
of the Rocky Moun tain s . There remain ed to be marked out the in terven ing distan ce .
In 1872 the British and Un i ted States Governmen ts appoin ted a join t commission to tracethe l in e from Lake of the Woods to the summ it of the moun tain s . The British com
mi ssion er was Maj or-Gen eral,'
then Major,D . R . Cam eron , R . A . Mr . A rchibald Campbell
acted in that capacity for the Un ited States . A staff of scien t ific officers o f both n ation s
w ith moun ted escorts w ere detailed for the service .
The field operation s were begun at Lake o f t he Woods in the autumn of 1 872 and
prosecuted to completion durin g the two fol low ing years . A topographical survey was
made of the belts of coun try fiv e m i les w ide on each side of the l in e . Iron monumen ts
were plan ted from longitude 9 6° to 99 ° a t in tervals of a mile ; west of the latter poin t
the l in e was marked by ston e pyram ids or otherw i s e at approx imate in terval s of three
Sec. II, 1889 . 1 7 .
1 8 0 SANDFORD FLEMING ON
miles,to the summit of the Rocky Moun tain s , where the l in e join ed that which had been
establi shed from the Pacific coast by a similar commission thirteen years earl ier .
The boundary l in e for the greater part of the distan ce passed through open g roundwhere forest lan d was en coun tered the trees were cut down and a con t inuous open passageformed . Dr . G . M . Dawson accompan i ed the expedition as geologist and n atural ist . Ou
the completion of the field work , at the end of 1 874, he report ed the results obtain ed .
The published volume con sis t s of 379 prin ted pages , replete w ith in format ion resp ectingthe resources of the en tire distan ce surveyed .
(6) Journey of Messrs. Jarvis and Hanninglon ,1 874— 1 875 .
The overland exploration ofMessrs . Jarvis and Han n ington i s worthy of record . They
had been engaged in 1 874 on a sect ion of the survey of the Can adian Pacific Rai lway in
British Columbia . I t being deemed advisable to gain in formation respec t ing the SmokyR iver pass , Mr. E . W . Jarvis w as s elected for the duty, and at the beginn ing of w in ter he
received in struct ion s to begin exploration . Ou December 9 th ,1 874, w ith his assistan t Mr.
Hann ington , he left Quesn el on the Fraser for Fort George , to complete his arrangem en t s
and obtain an outfit . So soon as the ice was frozen on the rivers, the party , con s isting
o f eight men and six dog train s , started on the hazardous journ ey across the moun tain s .
They left the Fraser above the Giscome portage,follow ing the North Bran ch un ti l i t
termin ated in a culde sac . They return ed to ascen d a second bran ch and finally reachedthe con t in en tal divide on February 25 th . Aft er l eaving the summit , the dogs
became un servi ceable from frostbites and exhaustion,so that each man was compelled to
carry on his back a share of the n ecessary supplies , l eaving behind everything n ot ab so
la tely required . They were also placed on short ration s . The party crossed an extrem ely
broken moun tain ous region in tersected by tributaries o f the Smoky and A thabasca Rivers .The sn ow was deep , the temperatu re low and th e weather unusually stormy in the
elevated region they passed over . They were on the verge of starvati on and every member
of the party suffered greatly from fatigue and exposure . Nevertheless they succeededeven tually in reachin g Jaspar House on March 5 th to find i t un occupied . They
,
however,in their exhausted condition were fortun ate in m eetin g in the n eighbourhood
a ban d of Indian s who suppl ied them w ith some provision s— all they could spare from
their meagre store . The weary travellers con tinued their journ ey eastward over 2 00miles to St . Ann e
, which they reached in twelve days . Here they found rest and food
un der the hospitable roof of a Hudson ’s Bay Company ’s establishmen t . From St . Ann e
they drove to Edmon ton , then ce to Fort P itt and Carlton and arrived at Winn ipeg on
May 2 1st .
The journ ey from Fort George to W in n ipeg occupied 1 16 days , the distan ce being 1 887
miles,of which 9 32 miles w ere travers ed on sn ow-shoes . The temperature w as at t imes
exceedingly low . For twen ty con secutive days in January the thermometer averaged 37degrees below zero . Mr. Jarvis’ n arrative of the j ourn ey is in cluded in the Canadian
Pacific Railway Repor t of 1 877 Mr. Hann ing ton’
s diary is given in the report of Can adianArchives for 1 887 (pp. cx , cxxxu .)
1 8 2 SANDFORD FLEMING ON
(9 ) Journey of Mr. M arcus Smith, 1 877 .
Mr. Marcus Smith , crossed the con tin en t in 1 877 , on a tour of in spection o f the
Can adian Pacific Railway surveys . He had been engaged for some years in exten ded
exploration s in British Columbia , but on each o f his former expeditions he travelled by San
Fran cisco and the Un ion Pacific Railway . Ou this occas ion he left O ttawa on May 24th ,
passed by the lakes to Port Arthur,then ce by ste amboat and rai lway , by St . Paul , to Win
n ipeg. Ou July 2ud he started from W inn ipeg to cross the plain s,by way o f Fort E l l ice .
Ou the 26 th he reached Fort Carleton ; making a detour to Lac la B iche , he arrived at
Edmon ton on August 13th . Mr. Smith W ith his party followed the recen tly improved
trai l to Jaspar House and Yellow Head pass , which poin t he reached on September 7 th .
Two days later he w rites at Tete -Jaun e-Cache, “ Just as w e were arriving, a man,
W . Roxburgh , cam e runn ing W i ldly towards us ; he had been n early two years in
charge of that depot all alon e, seldom havin g seen a human bein g, even an In dian ,
during that t ime . He had read all the books in his possession over and over again ;had caught fish t i l l he hated th e sight of
i
on e ; had tri ed gold-m in ing w ith a littl e
success had shot bears , on e of which he on ly l am ed and seein g it craw l ing aroun d thedepot
,he took pity on i t and fed it ; i t came regularly , and at l ast grew so tame that
it became his on ly frien d and compan ion .
” Mr. Smith con tinued his journ ey southward ,by the rivers A lbreda and North Thompson ,
to Kamloops. From this station he foll owed
the ordin ary route to Yale,where he arrived on September 23rd,
th e fourth mon th
from the day he l eft O ttawa . From Yal e he took the s teamer for New Westmin ster , and
return ed home by way o f San Fran cisco and the Un ion Pacific Railway .
( 10 ) Expeditions in connect ion with the GeologicalSurvey , 1 87 1- 1879 .
Sin ce British Columbia became part cf the Domin ion n o year has passed w i thou t
exploration s being carried on in the Pacific Provin ce by the officers of the Geological
Survey . The chief director, Dr . Selwyn , has frequen tly made examin ation s in the territory
and has crossed and re-crossed the Rocky Moun tain s . I n 1 87 1 , havin g reached V i ctoriaby way of Chicago and San Fran ci sco , he left in July for the main lan d . He followed
the valley of the Fraser t o Lytton , passed on to Kamloops , and by the North Thompson
and the A lbreda travelled t o Tete -Jaun e-Cache . He reached Yel low Head pass.
on
October 2 1st . Return in g by th e same route he arrived at Victori a on November 29 th ,
and Mon treal on December 26 th . For the four y ears 1 87 1 to 1 874 Mr. Richardson wasengaged in the geological examin at ion of Van couver and Queen Charlotte Islands . I n
1 8 73 Dr . Selwyn crossed the plain s from Red River t o the Rocky Moun tain s and
return ed by the North Saskatchewan . I n 1 8 73 Dr . Bell examin ed the coun try between
Red River and the South Saskatchewan ,and in 1 874 the district between Lakes Man i toba
and Winn ipegoosis .
I n 1 875 Dr . Selwyn made an extended exploration of that part of the coun try formerlykn own as New Caledon ia . He fol lowed the trai l t o Fort Fraser on Stuar t Lake , then ce
he proceeded across to Fort McLeod n ear the source of Peace River . On July 3rd he left
Fort McLeod and descen ded Peace River . On July 1 1 th ,after passing the mouth of F in l ay
River, Dr. Selwyn ascended a moun tain feet above his camp , and above the
EXPEDITIONS TO PACIFIC. 13 3
sea . He passed up Pin e River , follow ing the stream as far as his can oe would float .
He return ed to Fort St . John and descended Peace River to Dunvegan proceeding down
stream to the forks , he ascended and partial ly explored Smoky River . This proved the
l imit o f Dr . Selwyn’s expedition , and he return ed by the route he had fol lowed . The
result o f his labours i s embodied in the GeologicalReport o i l8 7 5 -76 .
Prof. Macoun ,who accompan ied Dr . Selwyn ,
con t inued the exploration from the
m outh of Smoky River to Lake A thabasca ; then ce he proceeded eastward by the Methye
portage and along the ordin ary route o f the Hudson ’s Bay Company to Carl eton ,and
returned to O ttawa by w ay of W in n ipeg . Th e resul t of Prof. Macoun ’s exploration i s
given in Geological and Geogra phical n otes” for the year 1 875 .
I n 1 875 Dr . G . M . Dawson commen ced his labours in Bri tish Columbia by making anexamin ation east o f the lower par t of the riv er Fraser . The follow ing year he made ex
plorat ions in the basin of the Blackwater, Salmon , Nechacco Rivers and Francois Lake .
The same season Mr. Richardson con tinued the examin ation of the coal fields of Nan aimo
and Comox .
I n 1877 Dr . Dawson devoted his time to an extended geological survey of southern
Briti sh Columbia, and the fol low ing season t o an examin ation o f Queen Charlotte Island .
Dr . Bell spen t the summer of 1878 in the coun try bordering on t he Churchill and NelsonRivers , and three years later he made examin ation s in t he Athabasca and Macken zieR ivers region s . I n 1879 Dr. Dawson accompan ied Messrs . Cambie , McLeod and Gordon
from Port Simpson , on the Pacific , through n orthern British Columbia and the PeaceRiver coun try to Edmonton . From Edmon ton
,crossing the plain s t o W inn ipeg, he
reached O ttawa .
The services performed by the geological staff have been highly importan t , and deserve
the most respec tful men t ion . The volumes which hav e an nually appeared relate indetail the results of the s everal explorat ion s , and ful ly establi sh the value o f the exami
n ation s which have been carried on , equally in the in terest of gen eral scien ce and in
making kn own the econ om ic materi al s whi ch are foun d in the t erri tory .
( 1 1 ) Travels of the rWarquis of Lorne and the Princess Louise, 1 88 1— 1 882 .
In t he summer of 18 8 1 , the Marqui s of Lorn e , then Govern or-Gen eral of Can ada,started on a journ ey through the Northwest Territory . Part of the Can adian Pacific
Rai lway between Lake Superior andW inn ipeg was then under con struction , and the rail s
were laid from both ends , l eavin g an in t erven ing gap at that date of about seven ty miles .
Lord Lorn e reached Port Arthur by steamer,passed over the rai lway som e 230 miles by
a con struction t rain to the end of the track . From this spot the j ourn ey was chiefly by
can oe through a series of lakes and water chan n els un t il he reached the completed rai lway,by which he travelled to W inn ipeg .
From Winn ipeg, Lord Lorn e travelled westward 1 15 miles by rail to a poin t whereother mean s of locomotion became n ecessary . Here he w as met by an escort o f theMoun ted Police under Maj or Crozier , and thus attended in hi s further j ourn ey
,he
proceeded over the plain s on horseback to the North Saskatchewan ,then ce to Red
Deer district , Calgary and Bow River . Lord Lorn e crossed the fron tier east of themoun tain s , and passed in to the Un ited States as far as Fort Shaw in Montan a . He
1 8 4 SANDFORD FLEMING ON
reached this poin t in September,and return ing eastward through Dacota, he revisi ted
Win n ipeg on his way to O ttaw a , where he arrived after an extended j ourney of sevenweeks in the Northwest, most of the time being at n ight under canvas .
The following year w i th H. R . H . the Prin cess Louise,he visited British
Columbia . Lord Lorn e and Her Royal H ighn ess travelled by Niagara and Chicago toSan Fran ci sco , arriving on September 13 th . They embarked on H. M . S .
‘Comus ”
fo r Victoria, where they landed on the 20 t h . A fter a week of ceremon i al Observan ces,
Lord Lorn e and the Prin cess left for New Westminster on the 2 9th . Prin cess Louise
return ed to V ictoria , whi le Lord Lorn e ascended the Fraser to Yale by s teamer, then ce heproceeded by the old Carib oo road to Kamloops in the in terior
,return ing by the same
route .
On O ctober 7th ,the V i ce-regal par ty reembarked on the Comus for San Fran c isco .
Whi le on thePacific coast they Visited St . Barbara an d S t . An gelo ; after which they
return ed to O ttawa .
( 12 ) Second Journey of M r . Sandford Fleming , 1 883 .
I n the summer of 1883 , the writer of this paper was induced to un dertake an examin
ation of th e route, which has sin ce been located through the Rocky Moun tain s, for theCan adian Pacific Railway , and on which the line has been con structed . Being at the
time in Englan d , he crossed the A tlan ti c and on his arrival at Halifax proceeded to Lake
Superior . At th is date the rai lway was completed from Lake Superior as far west as
Calgary ; con sequen t ly on ly a few days were required to arriv e at the base of the
moun tain s . When atW in n ipeg the writer had the good fortun e to mee t his old travell ing
compan ion ,Prin cipal Gran t , whom he had invited to accompany h im . At Calgary,
horses were obtain ed to cross the moun tain s as far as any trai l could be found . The party
followed Bow R iver to the con tin en tal “ divide ” where the waters flow eas tward and
westward to the A tlan t ic and the Pacific. They descended by Kicking Horse Val leyto the Columbia, and after follow ing that r iver for about thirty miles
,ascended the
Selkirk range of moun tain s by the valley of Beaver River and desc en ded on the western
slope by the valley o f the I lle-cel le -waet t o the secon d crossing of th e Columbia.
- The
journ ey was con t inued across the Eagle pass to the Shuswap Lakes . I n many portion s
of the route the trai l was difficult to follow, unti l fin ally, in the Selkirks , al l vest ige
of a trail ceased . The horses were con sequen tly unable to be taken fur ther , and the
par ty was compelled to go onwards w i thout them . Like other travellers , similarly si tu
ated,those who made this j ourn ey experien ced difficulty and an xi ety ; they however
succeeded in reaching Kam loo'
ps and proceeded in the usual way to New Westmin s ter .
I t is worthy o f n ote that this was the first conn ected expedition through the moun tain s ,in fact the first con tinuous journ ey on the actual route of the rai lway as established
from Lake Superior to the Pacific coast . Dr . Gran t wrote several papers in the Toron to‘Week ’ describ ing it . The writer ’s experi en ce was embodied in a volume published the
year follow ing .
1 England and Canada, a summer tour between Old and NewWestm in ster, 1884.
1 8 6 SANDFORD FLEMING ON
members of this expedit ion are fully given in the Pacific Railway Engin eer Reportfor
Up to 1 880 th e con struct ion of the Can adian Pacific Railway was directly carried on
by the Governm en t ; at that period the comple t ion o f eight hundred m i les,embrac ing
some of the heav ies t and mos t difficult sec tion s of the l in e,had been assured . In that
year i t became the policy of Parliamen t to tran sfer the whole work to private en t erprise,
and thus the Can adian Pacific Rai lway Company cam e in to bei ng . The Company has
sin ce . w ith extraordin ary en ergy , carri ed the work to completion .
The rai lway, as con structed through a portion of the mountain region,follows a
ditferen t route to that previously adopted by the Governmen t . A s the directors of the
compan y con sidered it w ise to change the l in e to a more southern direct ion ,i t became
indispen sable to seek for an other pass . For this purpose Major A. B. Rogers w ith muchl abour and determin ation explored the Selkirk Range , and found the pass through whichthe railway has been con structed .
( 14) Journey of Mr. W. C. Van Home, 1 884 .
In the year 1884, Mr . W . C. Van Horn e , at that t ime gen eral man ager and vice
presiden t o f the Can adian Pacific Rai lway, accompan ied by Mr. S . B. Reed reached
British Columbia by way of San Fran cisco,w ith the obj ect of in specting the l in e of the
railway and examin in g the works in progres s in the m oun tains . Ou August 9 th they
left Victori a for New Westmin ster and .Burrard In let ; they proceeded up the valley
of the Fraser to Kamloops on the l1th they took their departure for Shuswap Lake and
the moun tain s . Ou the 15 th they en tered the E agle pass and reached the Columbia ;havin g crossed that river they passed over the Selki rks by the val leys of the I lle-cell ewaet and Beaver . Again reaching the Columbia at i ts eastern crossin g they ascen ded
that river to Kicking Horse Ri ver, t he valley of which they followed to the summit .
Between the E agle pass and the source of Kickin g Horse River , the j ourn ey was madepartly on horseback and on foot much of it was exceedingly tedious and fatiguing . On
the 2 1st , they reached the end of track , which had then been laid to the summit in th eRocky Moun tains and by train they travel led to Winn ipeg . The railway journ ey was
con t inued by St . Paul to Mon treal , and the t ravell ers arrived at that city on August 29 th ,
twen ty days after leavin g Victori a .
( 15 ) Journey of Mr . Collingwood Schreiber, 1 884 .
A s Mr . Van Horn e’s party emerged from the moun tain s , Mr. Collingwood Schreiber,Chief Engin eer of the Can adian Governm en t Railways , started on th e overland journ ey .
He was accompan ied by Mr. Pottinger, Gen eral Superin t enden t , and Mr . A rchibald ,Engin eer of the In t ercolon i al Railway . They pi oceeded by railway to Oregon , and then ce
0 via Peace R i ver Pass , b y t he Rev.
1 See also Mounta in and Prairie ; a Journey from V ictoria to W inn ipeg ,
Dan iel M . Gordon,B .D .
, Ottawa, 1880 .
2The c ircumstances wh ich led to the di scovery of the pass through wh ich the ra i lway i s establ i shed are
alluded to in the work of the writer,England and Canada, pp. 267 and 40 9 .
EXPEDITION.
‘ TO PACIFIC. 1 8 7
by rail and steamboat to Victoria,British Columbi a . Crossing the Strait of Georgia t o
New Westm in ster , they ascen ded the Fraser to Yale , and proceeding along the lin e of
railway , examin ing the works un der con struction ,they reached E agle pass . Then ce
crossing the Selkirk and Rocky Mountain s ranges on the route, already described as
followed by Mr. Van Horn e the previous mon th, Mr . Schreib er reached the end of the
track at the “ divide betw een the Kicking Horse River and Bow Riv er v alleys ;con tinuing his journ ey eastward b y rai lway, he return ed to O ttawa on September 29 th .
(1 6) Visit of the British Association 10 the Rocky Mountains, 1 884 .
I n August , 1 884, the meeting of the British A ssociation was held in Mon treal on the
termin ation of the session the majority of the m embers who had crossed the A tlan ticVisi ted Toron t o and Niagara . Of the number, from eighty to a hundred, in cluding someladies , accepted an invitation to exten d their tour to the Rocky Moun tain s .
They left Toron to on September 6 th , an d by steamb oat passed through Lakes
Huron and Superior to Por t Arthur, w here they took the train for the west . The rails
were then laid a few m i les over the Rocky Moun tain summ i t,so the travellers proceeded
to the end of the track and remain ed some few hours in the n eighbourhood . They
actual ly passed the period of their halt in Briti sh Columbia— the crest of the RockyMountain s being the eas tern boundary of that provin ce .
Ou their return they arrived at Regin a on Sunday the 14th . Divin e worship was
held on this day ,the Bishop of On tario and the Rev . Harry Jon es
,a m ember of the British
A ssociation from E ngland , officiat in g . The vis itors remain ed some hours at Gleichen,
where they had an opportun i ty of meeting a large n umber of Blackfeet Indian s . They
also made a halt at Winn ipeg, where a reception was given them at Governmen t House .
They arrived at Toron to on September 19 th , after an absen ce of thirteen days, expressing
great sati sfaction w ith the trip . The party in cluded a number of distinguished men .
Among them was Dr . Cheadle , who must have con trasted the ease and comfor t w ith whichthe journ ey had been made , w ith his pain ful experien ce in crossing the mountain s w ithLordMi lton twen ty-one years earlier .
( 17 ) Journey of Sir Charles Tapper, 1885 .
Sir Charles Tupper, High Comm i ssion er in Lon don , arrived in Can ada on August
7th , 1885 . After remain in g three weeks in the eastern prov in ces,he left by the Northern
Pacific Railway for Portland , Oregon ,and then ce wen t to V ictoria
,British Columbia .
H is party con sisted of Mr. Col lingwood Schreiber , Mr. Stewart Tupper, the late Mr.
An drew Robertson , of Mon treal , and Mr. Town shend , MI)
. A fter Visit in g Nan aimo,they
cros sed to New Westmin ster and Yale . Ou O ctober 3rd they l eft Yal e by the recen tlycon s tructed rai lway and by train reached the end of the track in the Eagle pass wherethere remain ed a gap of forty-seven miles unfin ish ed. Proceeding over the gap on
horseback , they met , on September 4th , Lord Lan sdown e passing in the opposite direc
tion . On gain ing the track laid from the eastward , they took the train for Winn ipeg,and b y way of Chicago reached O t tawa on October 20 th .
Sec. I I , 1889. 18 .
1 8 8 SANDFORD FLEMING ON
( 1 8) Journey of the Marquis of Lansdowne, 1 88 5 .
The Govern or-Gen eral , the Marquis of Lan sdown e,accompan i ed by his stall
"
,Lord
Melgund and Mr. An son , l eft O ttawa on Septemb er 2 i th by the Can adian Pacific Rail
way, then un in terruptedly available for tralh e by the n orth shore of Lake Superior. At
Dunmore , the poin t of junction of the n arrow -gauge coal- railway,H is Excellen cy pro
ceeded to the mines at Lethbridge . From Lethbridge he travel l ed ou.horseback to Fort
McLeod, and then ce to Calgary, where he rejoin ed the main lin e of rai lway . From
Calgary, Lord Lan sdown e passed by train to the end of the track then at a poin t in theSelkirks , eighteen miles east of the second crossin g of the Columbia . At this poin tcomm en ced the gap of forty-seven miles of unfin ished work referred to . Two days were
taken to ride over this section,on the last stage of which he met
,as previously stated
,the
party of Sir Charles Tupper travel ling eastward . When the railway track from the westwas reached
,Lord Lan sdown e and his party took the train and followed i t to the then
term inus,Port Moody, on Barrard In l et . Crossin g the Strait of Georgia to V i ctori a on
October 6 th ,he was received w ith every mark of respect , and in his address at the
ban quet given him ,he remarked that un til the presen t occasion n o oth er go vernor-gen eral
had been able t o make the journ ey en tirely through Can adian territory . Remain in g some
few days at Victori a, the party visited the coal min es at Nan aimo ; they l eft on the 14thfor New Westmin ster . The following day they took the train at Port Hammond, and
remain ed over a short t ime at Yale , Lytton , Dryn och , and other poin ts . The party
reached the end of the track on the morn ing of the 1 7th . They here again resumed thesaddle
,but in the in terval o f the thirteen days sin ce they passed westward , the gap
had been reduced to twen ty-eight miles ; this distan ce w as accomplished in on e day .
The train took the party to W in n ipeg, where H i s Excellen cy was received by the
authorit ies, and en tertain ed at a banquet . In the speech made by h im
,l ike each of his
two immediate predecessors on similar occasion s , he gave a n arrat ive of what he hadseen , and spoke of th e bright future, which he confiden tly an ti cipated . He reached
O ttawa by way of Chicago, on O ctober 26th , having made the double journ e y in l ittlemore than a mon th . Lord Lan sdown e ’s trip was the first occasion on which the new
rai lway route had been followed in both direction s across the moun tain s on the sameoverland journ ey .
( 19 ) First through. train by the Canadian Pacific Railway , 1 885 .
The writer has thus described the several overland journ eys to the Pacific , un dertakenpreviously to the completion of the Can adian n ation al rai lway . He has endeavored to
make the catalogue compl ete , and has in cluded every through Can adian j ourn ey of whichhe could find any accoun t . The importan t epoch is n ow reached when the n ecessi tyfor all such expedit ion s has for ever passed away .
It has been s tated that when Lord Lan sdown e passed through the moun tain s on hisway homewards , there remain ed twen ty-eight miles of rai l track to be laid , t o comple te theconn ection through the moun tain s . Nin e day s later, on O ctober 26th ,
the Govern or
Gen eral arrived at O ttawa .
On the even in g of October 27 th , when the regular W inn ip eg train l eft Mon treal , a
1 4 0 SANDFORD FLEMING ON
l ast momen t,had struggled to do their part
,and who were n ow mute lookers on at the
singl e individual actively engaged— at on e who in his own person un ited the past w i th
the presen t,the most promin en t m ember of the an ci en t compan y of
“ Adven turers of
England,
” as he was the represen tative of the great Can adian Railw ay Company .
The blow s on the spike were repeated , un t il it was driven home The si l en ce
however con tinued unbroken ,and i t must be said that m an y a more solemn ceremony
has been w i tn essed w i th less sol emn ity . It seemed as if the act n ow performed hadworked a spell on al l presen t . E ach on e appeared absorbed in his own reflec tion s . The
abstraction of m ind,or si len t emotion , or whatever i t m ight b e, w as however of short
duration . Sudden ly a cheer spon tan ously burst forth , and i t was n o ordin ary cheer .
The subdued en thusiasm , the pen t up feel ings o f men famil i ar w i th hard work , n ow
found ven t . Cheer upon cheer fol lowed as if i t was difficult to sati sfy the spirit whichhad been aroused . Such a scen e i s con ceivable on the field of a hard fought battl e atthe momen t when victory is assured .
Not un frequen tly some m atter of fact remark form s th e termin ation of the display of
great emotion . A s the shouts subsided , and the exchange o f congratulation s w ere being
given a vo ice was heard , in the most prosaic ton e as of con stan t daily occurren ce , A ll
aboard for the Pacific .
” The n ot ice was quickly acted upon : in a few minutes the train
was in motion . I t passed over the n ewly laid rail,and amid ren ewed cheers sped on i ts
way westward .
Ou the same n ight a telegram was sen t to O ttawa and published in the easternCan adian n ewspapers . It ran :
“ The first through train from Mon treal i s approachin g Yal e , w ithin a few hours of
the Pacific coast . The last spike was driven thi s morn ing by Hon . Don ald A . Smith
at Craigell achie in E agle pass , three hun dred an d forty m i l es from PortMoody ; on reaching the coast , our runn ing t ime from Mon treal exclusive of stoppages w i l l be fiv e days ,averaging twen ty four miles per hour . Before lon g,passenger train s may run over the
rai lw ay from Mon treal to Van couver in four days and i t w i l l be quite possible to travelon speci al occasion s from Liverpool to the Pacific coast by the Can adian tran scon tin en tall in e in t en days . A l l are greatly pleased w ith the work don e . I t is impossibl e fully to
real ize that en ormous physical and other difficult ies have been overcom e w ith such
marvellous rapidity,and w i th results so satisfactory.
”
The train arrived at Port Moody the follow in g morn in g, November 8th . Ou the
succe ed ing morn in g the prin cipal n ewspapers in Englan d publi shed the substan ce of theabove t el egram , w ith the addition al importan t fact that the first through train from
Mon treal had actually arrived at the coast .The party embarked in a steamer to cross to V ictoria . They touched n ear the mouth
of Burrard In le t , the sit e of the city of Van couver,then an unbroken forest . In a few
hours the vessel en t ered the Strait of Juan de Fuca r the n ame of the chan n el recalled
the memory of the Greek adven turer o f three hundred years ago, and with i t the pain ful
record of the more hon est s eamen , whose n ames w i ll for ever be associated w ith the heroicyet fruitless efforts to discover a n ew route , in the n orthern hemisphere , to hold in possession the commerce of Cathay .
It i s difficult to bel ieve that to-day the efforts to obtain thi s result have been crown ed
w ith success . I t i s quite true that the passage for ships,sought for in Vain by every
EXPEDITIONS TO PACIFIC.1 4 1
commander from Cabot in the fifteen th to Frankl in in the n in eteen th cen tury , has not beenfoun d ; but if i t be n o t possible for a ship to pass from the A tlan ti c to the Pacific w ithinth e l imits of the n orthern hem i sphere
,the mean s are now provided for speedily tran sport
ing the cargoes of any number of ships from one ocean to the other . The rai lway journ ey
described from a shipping port on the St . Lawren ce to Pacific t ide-water, t est ifies to thefact that the long desired commun i cation i s at length established and if further eViden ce
be n eeded,i t may be found in the circumstan ce that a con signmen t of n aval stores
fol lows by the n ext train from the dockyard at Hal ifax for the use of the Pacific fleet at
Esquimault . I t would indeed have aston ished the il lustrious n avigators , Drake , Cook and
Van couver, when in thi s part of the world,to have been told that the tim e would come
when ships on the Pacific coast could have their stores replen i shed from a n aval stat ion
on the n orth A tlan tic w ithin a few days in terval from the hour of making the requisition .
The members of the party who had made the tran scon t in en tal journ ey remain ed in
V ictoria a few days . They left on the return trip on November 1 2th , and reached
W in n ipeg on the 1 5 th ; after a short delay , they con t inued the journ ey to Mon treal .
The n arrati ve of the passage of the first train from Mon treal to the Pacific comple tes
the record of the expedition s which the writer has endeavoured to describe. It would
have exceeded the scope of the enquiry to have referred at any length to the travels of the
pion eer s who in the early days of Fren ch rul e were the first to pen etrate the unkn own
western w ildern es s . A long list of i llustrious n ames in con n ection w ith these explora
tion s and adven tures w i l l ever be associated w ith the history of North America ; but
the briefest outlin e of their travel s would have carried the n arrative far beyon d the limitsof this paper . The w riter’s obj ect , especially in the second part of the paper, has been to
place side by side the several complete journ eys which have been made overl and betweenthe waters of the two ocean s . He ven tures to affirm that few more importan t even ts
are recorded in our history than the first and last o f these j ourn eys, between which therei s an in terval of n early a cen tury .
On the rol l of famous travellers there i s no grander figure than the in trepid Scotchman
who was the first to cross the con tin en t n orth of the Gulf of Mexico . Can there be a
more fit ting subject for an historical pain ting for the Nation al Gallery of the Domin ion ,
than the in ciden t of his mi x in g some vermilion w ith melted grease, and in scribing on
the face of the rock on which he had slept his first sleep by the shores of the Pacific,
thi s brief m emorial : “ A lexander Macken z ie, from Can ada by land, the twen ty-secon dof July , one thousan d seven hundred and n in ety-three
Equally appropriate for a pain t ing to hang by its side , i s the scen e at Craigel
l achie on the morn ing of Nov emb er 7th , 1 8 85 , when Sir Don ald Smith , spike hammer in
hand , i s giving the las t blow to fin i sh the work of the railway . I t marked the closeof a long series of even ts in terwoven w ith the an n als of the n or thern portion of the
con tin en t . Can we doubt that the future histori an w ill regard the occurren ce, as a turn in g
poin t in the history of the Dom in ion , as the beginn ing of a n ew page in the l ife and
destiny of the British colon i al empire
ROYAL SOCI ETY OF OA N AD A .
TRANSACTIONS
S E CTION I I I .
M A T H E M A T I CAL , P H Y S I C A L A N D CH E M I C A L S C I E NCE S .
PA PE R S FOR 1 8 8 9 .
see, I I I,1889. 1
4 BOVEY ON SHEAR PRODUCED
The reacti on R at A w ith the n ew distribution of weights is given by the equat ion ,
RelZ wv i-l( aw l +33) +w +wn +1 -an+1
“ i“ wn+s -an+s
(Rl
(E .Ra
-l (Rf — Ra'l— x
-
(m— mr
The shear 8 2, at the same poin t P as before, i s given by the equation ,
s,
R; ( 20 pm+wp+2
W,+
Hen ce the shear at P w i th the first distribut ion of load is greater or less than the shear at
the same poin t w ith the second distribution , according as S 1 S2
or R,
_ W,
T)
or Rl VVPT
(I:
or Rp
— R, W
P) Wp— T
CC
or R,,
— R, W, +T> ( W,,
WI J.
1
Corollary .
— I f n o weights advan ce upon or leave the girder, R,”R, , and W,
become
severally ml, and the last relat ion reduces to the simple form ,
A .
— In words , the shear at P w ith the first distribution wi ll be greater or less thanthe shear at the same poin t w i th the second distribution
,according as the weight tran s
ferred,divided by the distan ce of t ran sfer , i s greater or less than the total weight divided
by the span .
Again,the ben ding momen t M 1 at P w ith the first distribution i s given by the
equation ,
111,
R, (l— z ) w
, ( al z ) — w2 ( a2 z ) z )
R,(l - z ) R l+a. IV,
2 being the di stan ce o f P from B .
BY LIVE LOAD ON GIRDER. 5
The bending momen t Ill2 at the same poin t .P with the second distr ibut ion i s givenby the equation ,
M2
Ez (l - z ) w
p+1 ( ap+ 1 x z ) z ) w, “ +x — z )+ 55 5 )
— z ) — R ,. z (x
Hen ce,
according as
R, (l— z ) — R
,
— z ) z (ac T)
or (R ,R
,)l ( R, Bg).l ( z m) (m T)
or ( z — R ,
- W,, R
p— R
q
z
Corollary — I f n o weights advan ce upon or leave the girder , RP,and W
Pbecome
severally nil, and the last relation reduces to
x z — x
( 5— 2 ) —
l~Wt
>< l(— Rq
l. W, +
l
Let the 7 “ weight be at the poin t P in thefirst distribut ion ,and l et the distan ce of
tran sfer be equal to that between the r‘“and (r—l—l)
th w eights .
z 96 : ct , a,+ 1 T: and Rq.lw,+1 ct , “
Hen ce Mlwi ll be M 1 according as
1 3
W.+z z
B .
— In words , the bending momen t w ith the first distribution w i ll be greater or lessthan that w ith the secon d distribution , according as the '
sum of the first r weights ,divided by the correspondin g segmen t , is greater or less than the total w eight divided bythe span .
NOTE .—Results A and B w il l b e foun d very useful in determin ing the maximum
shears and ben ding momen ts at the pan el poin t s of a truss w ith horizon tal chords,
subjected to an arbitrari ly distributed l ive load, e .g .
, a passin g train . In such a case,
6 BOVEY ON SHEAR PRODUCED BY LIVE LOAD .
as suming that the weights are collected at the pan el point s , and that the distan ce oftran sfer is a pan el length ,
first r panels
total number of panels .
Simi lar results may be obtain ed when the chords are no t horizon tal . For example,con sider a diagon al between th e r
”and the (7 +1 )
th weights,in the case of a truss AB ,
in
which on ly the lower chord is horizon tal .
Let th e corresponding pan el length of the upper chord produced meet the lower
chord produced in the poin t C.
Let CA h.
p be t he perpendicular from C upon the diagonal in question .
R R2 , be the reac t ions at A due to thefirst and second distr ibution s, respectively .
D D 2 , be t he corresponding diagonal stresses .
Suppos e, for s impl icity , that no weights either l eave or advan ce upon the girder .
Rllz wlal-l
.Dlp t — w
1 ( h+l— a) w, ( h+l
R919 : wu (a
D gp R2 .h — a,— a
‘
) — d,. x)_ ‘wr+ q (h 'l' l ar+q
Hen ce, D l D 2 , according as
x (wl—l—w2 -t w, “ (h+l +w, (h—H(R2 R I ) h ,
or m(m-l-TU—l—R’
QU-l—h) Wn
'w
bein g the algebraic sum of the momen t s of the weights tran sferred w ith respectto C.
I f n o weights are tran sferred , this rel ation reduces to
8 J. LOUDON ON
sum of the momen ts roun d 0 eviden tly van i shes . Hence the sum also van i shes forthe origin al forces when each is turn ed through an y angle .
Retain in g C’as origin ,
the sum o f the momen ts G of the given forces roun d the
poin t P(a, b) i s eviden t ly bR ,whilst the Virial Vi s — aR . I f therefore each force be
turn ed through an angle 9 , these quan tit ies become
G’ — Rb
’ — R ( b cos fi— a s in Vsin (9+ G cos (9,
V’ — R (a cos 0+ b sin 0) Voos 9 G sin 6,
where (a’
,are the coordin ates of P referred to the lin es of zero momen t s and Virial
for the new forces .
Hen ce also G V’2G —lV R (a
2b ) varies as CP
When any set of forces are reduced to a single force R at O and a couple G, they
may,as is well kn own
,be stil l further reduced to two forces actin g alon g l in es which
are perpen dicular to each other . This reduction can be readily effected by referrin g R
and G to ordin ary polar coordin ates , as in the accompanying figure , and by resolving
the force and couple in to two forces and two couples in such a way that each compon en tforce shal l be perpen dicul ar to the ax i s of a compon en t couple .
Thus R at O and G are equivalen t to R cos R sin e) , at O, and the couples
the axes of which are perpen dicular to the forces .
Now R sin and L are equivalen t to R sin go , parallel to Oy , at a distan ce from LOy ,equal to
G sin 0
R ein e) R tan (p
,
whilst R cos (p and L’ are equivalen t to R cos paral lel to Cx, at a distan ce from L
’
ao ,
equal to
Hen ce the distan ce between these reciprocal'lines of force is
G ein t9
( cot ge-lt an qe)R
MATHEMAT ICAL PHYSICS 9
G sin 9 G sin <9
Eviden t ly the quan titi es also represen t the dist an ces of the reciprocalR t an go
,
R cot q)
the cen tral axis .
The extreme poin ts o f emergen ce for rays refracted through a prism in a prin cipal
plan e may be exhibited as in the accompanyin g figure, where BAD represen ts the.
prism,
B i s the poin t of inciden ce , ABC the complemen t of the crit ical an gle BAE BAF,and
the circle i s described aroun d BAF . The angles marked at B and D being equal , BB i s
the last ray which emerges . Thus as the angle of the pri sm is in creased, on e poin t ofemergen ce w i l l always l i e on the c ircle , whilst the other w i ll be the in tersection of
BC’w i th the secon d side of the pri sm and when the an gle of the prism becomes equal
to twi ce the criti cal an gle 0 and D coin cide at F .
Sec. 1 11, 1 889 . 2 .
1 2 J LOUDON ON STANDARD OF PITCH.
are based . Accordingly whilst w ith this standard, the G S of the differen t systemsagree
,w ith the musical standard (A) the O
’
s are differen t . Thus if A i s 870 , the C of then atural scale is 5 22
, w hilst the C of the equally tempered scale is 5 17 3 . These
con sideration s go to show -the importan ce of r etain ing un changed the t ime-hon ouredacoust ical standard . The exi sten ce of two stan dards i s not a source o f in con ven ien ce , in asmuch as they are used for en tire ly differen t purposes and so long as the des ign ation s ofn otes by musician s and acoust ici an s practi cally agree , no difficulty can arise .
(3 ) Wi th regard to the realization of absolutely correc t stan dards, there were insurmoun t able difficult ies unt i l 1878 , when Koen ig solved the problem by his device of the
clock-fork comparator . By this con trivan ce an au xi l iary standard of low pitch is estab
lished,and the actual stan dard determin ed by the usual opt ical method . Thus, for the
musical s tan dard,the auxi liary fork is regulated to give 145 sin gl e Vibration s per second
at the n ormal temperature, and
’
the actu al stan dard (870 ) i s correct when the optical testfor 1 6 i s sat isfied . Standards have so far been con structed on this plan for Austria and
I taly,and the Physical In st itute, Berl in whilst the origin al Fren ch standard, which was
con structed un der the superin tenden ce of Lissajous , has been shown t o be in error by
fifth s of a Vibration .
1 I n the same way the acoustical standard (5 1 2 ) i s determin ed whenthe optical t es t for 1 :4 i s sat isfied,
the aux i l iary fork makin g 1 28 Vibration s per secon d at
2 0 ° C. This method of establi shing a standard possesses accordingly the great meritthat the accuracy of the standard may be tested at an y time by the aid of the auxil iary
comparator .
From the foregoing facts and commen ts on the two st andards the con sideration swhich should guide us in the sel ect ion of a musical st an dard w i l l be eviden t . Whilst thestan dard n ote should be 0 ,
as it i s in the acoustical system , i t should agree w ith thatwhich is already so largely in use by musician s and in strum en t makers abroad . As thestandard A corresponding to 870 gives a C of 51 7 3 , the agreemen t may be secured for allpractical purposes b y s electing a C of 5 17 or 5 18 . Accordingly it i s proposed that the
musical standard be the C’which correspon ds to 5 1 7 or 5 1 8 singl e vibration s per secondat 20 ° C,
whilst the acoustical standard shal l remain in tact . It i s to be hoped thatCan adian musician s and physicists w ill take some action in this matter , and by thei r
cooperation help on a movemen t which is cal culated to put an end to con fusion in the
music al world,and to secure the importan t advan tages to be derived from adopting a
truly un iversal stan dard of musical pitch .
1 Koen ig ’s Quelques experiences d’acoust ique , p. 190 .
SECTION I II , 1 889 . 1 8 TRANS . ROY . Soc . CANADA .
IV— N0 tes on some Unexplained An omalies in the I t’
lame
'
Reac tions of certain Minerals
and ChemicalBodies . By E . J . CHAPMAN,
(Read May 9 ,
The brief n otes embodied in thi s commun ication refer to some anomalous poin ts inthe flam e react ion s and spectra of c ertain m in eral bodies , at presen t of doubtful explan ation or which remain altogether un explain ed . A tten t ion i s called to these an omal ies inthe hope of el ic it ing a c lue to their sati sfac tory in terpret ation .
AXINITE AND TOURMAL INE .
— Substan ces in which borac ic anhydride i s present ,common ly impart
,it is well
'
kn own , a green colour to the outer envelope of the Bun sen or
blowpipe flam e . In the case of Ax in ite , a silicate con tain ing between 5 and 6 per
cen t . of B20 3, the green fiame-coloration i s always man ifested ; but in that of Tourmal in e ,a si licat e in which the amoun t of 3 2
03 exceeds 9 or 1 0 per cen t ,
n o trace of colour isimparted to the flame un l ess the min eral b e treated W ith spec ial reagen ts ,
There does
n ot seem to be any ready explanation of this an omaly . The amoun t of si l ica in eachspecies i s comparat ively low
,and not far from coin ciden t . Axin i te, it is true , i s an
alumin o-calcareous, and Tourmalin e an alam in o-magnesian s il icate but the presen ce o f
lime in one case,and i ts absen ce in the other
,hardly seems sufficien t t o accoun t for the
phen omen on . I n the calcarous species Datol ite , the coloration of the flam e is strongly
marked ; but i t i s equally well di splayed in the magn esian Borac ite . A l l the later
analyses of Tourmalin e show a small amoun t of fluorin e, averaging 0 65 to 0 7 0 per cen t ,
and this should assist in bringing out the flame react ion . I n the an alyses of Axin ite,
fluorine has n ot yet been recorded, but I have recen tly found dist in ct indication s of i tspresen ce in the decomposi tion of the glass obtain ed by fusion .
(2 ) APOPHYLL ITE AND ORTHOCLAS E .
— These two potass ic silicates are here placed injuxtaposit ion
,in order to show the influen ce of fluorine in flame reaction s . Apophyl lite
con tain s , or rather yields to an alysis , between 5 and 6 per cen t . of potash ; whil st Ortho
cl ase con tain s practically 1 7 per cen t. of that compon en t . When moisten ed , in powder,w ith hydro-chloric acid , Apophyllite shows in the spectroscope the red lin e of the potessium spectrum very distin ctly and persisten tly ; whereas O rthocl ase , w ith more thanthree times the amoun t of potash in its composition , does not under this treatmen t reveal
the slightest in dication of potassium . The apparen t an omaly may perhaps be explain ed by
the assumption that the potassium in Apophyllite i s n o t in an oxidized condition,but in
combin ation w ith the 2 9 per cen t . of fluorine presen t in the min eral,forming 6 40 per
cen t . KF . This View of the composi tion of Apophyllite i s not adopted , however, by all
m in eralogists . The small amoun t of fluorin e i s regarded by some as apparen tly replacingoxygen , or i s looked upon as of l i ttle practical momen t . I n the third edition of Ts chermak
’
s “ Min eralogie,” i ssued w ithin the presen t year for example , the chemical
1 4 CHAPMAN ON FLAME REACTIONS .
composition of Apophyllite i s said to agree very n early w i th the formula 2H20 . CaO.
SiOZ , in which a smal l part of the hydrogen may be assumed to be replaced by pot as
s ium .
” Irrespective however of the part actually fulfilled by its HQO,the composition of
Apophyl li te,as confirmed by the spectroscope reaction which forms the subject of the
presen t n ote, would appear to be more correctly in dicated by the formula 4 (CaO,2Si0
2
,
211 20 ) +KF .
(3 ) THE RED LINE IN THE SPECTRUM OF POTASSIUM .— The detection of potass ium in
the presen ce of sodium and other bodies by the examin ation of the flame reaction through
a blue glass or a solution of in dig o— as indicated by Cartm el l, m an y years ago
whil st effective in the main,does not in al l cases give absolutely satisfactory results .
But if the flame spectrum of potassium compounds be examin ed in this m ann er , n o
erron eous or indefin ite con clusion can by any poss ibili ty occur . The red l in e o f this
spectrum,when Viewed through
.
a deep blue glass , remain s altogether un afiected,or stands
out in ful l relief,whilst the yellow lin e (or double l in e) of sodium
,the orange and red
lin es of stron t ium ,the red calcium lin e
,and the vivid red lin e of the l i thium spectrum ,
assuming these bodies to be presen t al so in the substan ce under exam in at ion,are en tirely
cut off and obliterated . Min erals may thus be conven ien tly exam in ed for potassium by
previous fusion w ith fiuor spar (in defaul t o f ammon ium fluoride) , or w ith sodium
carbon ate according to the method r ecommen ded by Bun sen for Orthoclas e,as
the glare of the sodium spectrum and the red calcium lin e become en tirelydestroyed and in tercepted by the glass— provided , of course , that the colourof the l atter be n ot too pale . The question then arises as to the cause of
thi s phen om en on . The red potassium lin e referred to , i s en t irely w ithin the red
ban d of the solar spectrum ,coin c idin g practical ly w ith the A l in e of the latter . How ,
then,does this red lin e pass through the blue glass , whils t the red l in es of l ithium ,
stron t ium, and calcium are compl etely absorbed and in tercepted I f the blue glass be
suffic ien tly deep in colour , the phenomen on does n ot appear to b e in any way affected bythe n ature of the colorin g matter . Can i t be that the red ban d of the solar spectrum
con sists real ly of two ban ds— a Violet-red or cl aret-red ban d at the commen cemen t of
the Visible spectrum,an d a red band proper , form ing the tran sition betw een thi s and the
orange zon e ?
MOLYBD IC ANHYDRID E .
— Distin c t and wel l marked flame-spectra are exhibited as
a rule by al l subst an ces which impar t. a colour to the fl ame of the blowpipe or Bun sen
burn er . Molybdenum compounds , however, form one of the exception s , and perhaps the
most strikin g except ion,to this rul e . Molybdic anhydride or tri-oxide, w hich results
during the ign i tion of these compounds gen eral ly , commun icates to the flame-border a
very distin ct and characteri sti c yel low i sh-green coloration ,but n o l in e-spectrum is
man ifested. Thi s an omalous result appears to be at presen t w i thout explan ation .
1 6 N . F. DUPU IS :
The developmen ts of the series which are the equivalen ts of a”
, sin 9,tan a: ao
cordin g to ascending powers of the variables are among the most importan t developmen ts
in the whole of mathemati cs , and usually occur quite early in a studen t’s course . These
developmen t s are gen erally effec ted through the differen ti al calculus,or by som e mean s
employing the method of l imit s . The l atter method in volves prin ciples which alwaysseem question ab le to a begin n er and to which he becomes recon cil ed on ly after much
thought and many application s . The m ethod here presen ted is induct ive and i s free
from the seemingly quest ion able feature m en t ion ed .
It i s n ecessary in what fol lows to prem i se the fol low ingThe symbol Ci.
“ w i l l den ote the n umber of combin ation s of n things when taken 7’
together ; then from the relation ex istin g between combin ation s and the bin omial serie swe have
Cf—l—CQJA—Cg-l n even2n
—l_ 1
7- 1 n odd
n even
n odd
71. even2 221t — 1
n odd
DEVELOPMENT OF THE EXPONENTIAL SERIES W ITHOUTTHE USE OF LIM ITS .
To develop ex
,as suming that the developmen t can be expressed in ascending powers
of x .
A ssume
The first term of this assumption i s correct ; sin ce when 2:becomes zero, at becomes un ity .
Takin g the property a“
and substituting we obtain ,
1+2alx+22a2x2
+
x°
+alal
n even ;
toodd.
CRUCES MATHEMATICAL 1 7
Equating coefficien t s of x"
,
au+a'
u—1al+
n GVOII .I I N.
a+
77. even .
Now by equating coefficien ts o f :c , of etc ., we readily find that
A ssume that thi s l aw holds up to the coefficien t in clusive . Then ,
n oven ;
n odd.
1 Ci ' t' 0 5+ n even ;
n odd.
and the law of the coefficien ts, holding good for a i s establi shed .
1,. a: x
2a:1
EXPANSION on THE SINE AND Coe E W ITHOUTTHE USE or LIMITS .
Developmen t of sin 0 in ascending powers of 0 .
It i s well kn own that the on ly legitimate assumption for the expression of sin 3 in
Sec. I I I , 1889 . 3.
1 8 N . F . DUPUIS :
term s of 6 must. have i t' s first t erm 6 and must con tain on ly odd powers of 6. Therefore4
Sin 6 —l
assume
Now take the relat ion
(S in 6 s in fp) ( sin 6 sin 71 ) S in ( t'l— (yz )
Sin 6 + s iu 71 : 6+ (p
S in 6 sin 7) z 6 qj—l( t
3 ( 63
qfi) aw fl w (y,'
S in ( 9+ (p) H+ <p+ a3 ( 6 —l (p>
'
Sin ( 6 —q) ) ( 6
And wri t ing these in (4) and dividin g throughout by 6'
which n ow becomesfactor
,and then putting (p
Z 6 the relat ion becom es
Ir+ a y «7 e
=~
{l—l—Lflasfif
- t- 2
+
1 2"
a,H a f e
And equat in g Coefficien ts of we obtain
2 7l>a2n _ l ‘ua'
L’u — 5 ( L5
u u )
Now by equat ing coeffic ien t s of 63
,65
,&c . , w e readily obtain
1 1
A ssume that thi s l aw of in verse factorials holds up to a i n clusive .
Then a and a, are of Opposite sign s , and also ( 13 and a, are o f opposite sign s .
Therefore a . as and &c .
,h av e al l the sam e sign for the same v alue o f 75 . And w e
readily seethat this sign i s opposite that of a and is accord in gly expressed b y
‘
2 2 t 2 11) iI I 1 IL 72)
U “ 1
( 2 10 ) l
( nn u en
,
( Z n) !
n I n l>n U (ltl.
cg" 0 33
"
i t even
a odd.
( 1214— 1
2 0 N . F. DUPU IS °
and the law of the coefficien ts i s establi shed .
62 64
80 8 9 : 1
4 !
EXPRESSION OF THE GE NERAL BERNOULL IAN NUMBER AS A COMBINATIONALDETERM INANT.
When the fun ct ion i s expan ded in the form
x x2
1 B,
B,
2 2 ! ( Z n) !
the quan titi es den oted by B B 2 , B are c alled the first , second, 76" Bern oullian
numbers .
This defin it ion gives direct ly
as 902
at x 332 "
x x x 1 + 1 —B1
_ +2 3 I 2 2
when ce equatin g coefficien ts of x“
in the expanded product gives
B B
lé fi! 3 ! ( 2n 5 l( 2n — 4)l
or multiplying through by (272)
( Z n) 1 ( Z n)3—
1B
7“ B" ' 2
i ( 2n+ l
( 2 71) 1 ( Z n) 2n 1
2 ( 2n) ( 2n+ 1 ) l 2 ( 2n 1 )
B. iceB . - 2
when ce
“?ECE
R-E
u—l Bl— ) n+l
CRUCES MATHEMATICAL 2 1
which expresses B,in terms of the numbers of lower orders .
Giving con secutive values to n ,
324 8 2Cgii B
l
2 71— 1
‘7 _ 0
n_ l 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 GEZ _ GE 2
2n — 3
B em ,
When ce by determin an t el imin ation and a li ttl e reduction we obtain
CQn—Q 2n—2 2 11—2
:Z ra 6 21a— 8 2a 10
2 71 — 5 2n— 7 2n — 921:
“13—4 210— 6 0
2 71 — 5 2n — 7
EXPANSION OF THE INVERSE TANGENT W ITHOUTTHE USE on LIM ITS .
E xpan sion of tan a:w ithout the use of limits .
A s in the expan sion of sin 9 , a l ittle con sideration shows that the expansion of
t an“ 1
a:must hav e its first t erm x and must con tain on ly odd powers of x .
Therefore assume
tan" 1x a: 61
3902
(1530
t an— 1
y z y day a
5y5
a2n+1y2n+1
t an— 1
x tan— 1
y z x y a3 (x
*
y*) y
2fl+1)
tan* 1x — ta 1
= t“ 1 x —
yn y an
1 xy’
2 2 N . F . DUPU IS : CRUCES MATHEMATICJE.
Dividin g the equal expression s b yw —y ,
and mak ing 3/ 2 re , we obtain
1 ( 2 71, 1 )a2n+ 1fL‘Q
11
1 ac
and equatin g coefficien t s of
1)
— 1>2n+ 1
which gives al l the coefficien t s by giving con secutive powers to
tan ’ la
‘
2 4 MACGREGOR ON DENSITY AND
slightly above 20 °C. When the solution had taken the temperature of 20 ° i t was at on ce
poured in to the spec ific gravity bottle , and th e latter stoppered , dried and weighed . The
thermom eter used had been provided w ith a table of correction s at Kew . Weighings for
the determ in ation of den si ty were made in one pan on ly (always of course the same pan ) ,the double weighings for the determin ation of mass having shown that the ratio of the
lengths of the arms of the balan ce was practical ly con stan t . I n calculating the den sit ies
from the observation s,the usual correction s wer e applied .
I n us ing the determ in ation s of other observers , I found that in many cases they hadn ot s tated whether their published percen tages were percen tages of anhydrous or of
crystalli sed sal t in solut ion,and that in man y cases al so they had omitted to state whether
their spec ific gravit i es were referred to water at the same temperature as the solution ,or t o
water at some other temperature as 0 °C or 4°C. I n the former cases , however, comparison
o f the observation s of differen t men usually showed whether anhydrous or crystallised
sal t was mean t . I n the latter it was often possible , especial ly when several observa
tion s of dilute solut ion s were given , to determin e the temperature of the water which wastaken as the stan dard substan ce, by plott ing a curve of concen tration s again st specific
gravit i es,and n otin g the poin t of i ts intersection w i th the axis of specific gravities .
In the case of all salt s for which the den s iti es of sufficien tly dilute solution s havebeen determin ed , either by myself or by other observers , I find that up to certain con
cen trat ion s, varying from 1 t o 5 per cen t . of an hydrous salt in solution,the excess of the
den sity of a solution over that of water at the same temperature as the solution ,i s directly
proportion al to the percen tage of salt in the solution . I n symbols,if .D “ alt are the
den sit ies at the same temperature 1 of a solution and of water respectively,and if p i s the
percen tage of anhydrous sal t in the solution , w e have thus
where k i s a con stan t for al l sufficien tly dilute soluti on s o f any on e sal t . The value of thecon stan t k for any on e sal t havin g been determin ed
,the den sities (in grms . per cu .
obtain ed from the above formula,are foun d to agree w ith observed values to the fourth
place of decimal s w i thinthe l imits of con cen tration specified above .
The follow ing tabl es give the con cen tration s and observed den siti es of dilute solu
tion s of a number of salts , together w i th the den sit ies calculated by the aid of the above
formula w i th the proper value of k. The fourth column gives the differen ces betweenthe observed and calculated values . The values of the den sity of water us ed in these
calculation s are those given by Volkmann ,
1 which are based on the observation s of
Hagen , Mat thiessen , Pi erre , Kopp and Jol ly .
Wied. Ann . x iv ( 188 1 ) p. 260
CONCENTRAT ION OF SALT SOLUTIONS. 2 8
Z INC Suw an n — Z nSOr.
Observer The author .
Temperature 20° C.
Formula 0 9 9827 0 0 103918 p.
Percen tage Ob served Calculatedof Anhydrous Salt densny at 20
°C density a t 20°C D iff erence.
10 solut ion . (g rins. per cu. cm. ) (grams . per cu. cm. )
The above formula thus gives the den si tie s of solution s of Z in c Sulphate accuratelyto four places of decimal s , provided they do not con tain more than about 3 per cen t . of
anhydrous sal t in solution .
MAGNES IUM SULPHATE — MgsoyObserver The author.
Temperature 20°C.
Formula D p.
Percen tage Observed Calcula t edof Anhydrous Sal t densi ty at Z O°O densi ty a t 20
°C D iff erence.
in solut ion. (grms. per cu. cm . ) ( grms. per cu. cm.)
The formula i s thus appl icable up to about 2 per cen t . The follow in g is an otherseries of observation s of solution s of the same salt
Observer Schifi”
.
1
Temperature 23°C.
Formula D 233 : 0 ~99 762 0 ‘ 00981 76 p .
Percentage Observed Calculatedof Anhydrous Salt densi ty at 23°C densny a t 23°C D ifi
'
erence.
i n solut ion. (grms. per cu ‘ cm. ) (grms. per on . cm. )
1 Ann . Chem. u. Pharm. cv i i i, p. 336 ; see also Watts’
D ictionary of Chemi stry , Art . MAGNESIUM SULPHATE .
Sec. I I I , 1889 . 4.
2 6 MACGREGOR ON DENSITY AND
Thus in th e case of Schiff’s ob servat ion s al so,the formul a holds up to between 2 and
2 5 per cen t .
IRON SULPHATE . FeSO4 .
Observer The au thor.
Temperaturc 20°
C.
Formula D 0 9 9827 p .
Percen tage Ob serv ed Calculatedof Anhydrous Sal t densi ty at 20°C densi ty at 20
°C D ifference.
i n solut ion. (grms. per cu. cm. ) (grin s. per cu. cm. )
For solution s of Iron Sulphate therefore the above formula holds up to and beyond a
con cen trat ion of 2 6 per cen t .
0 b G l 1
COPPER SULPHATE — CUSO4 .
server : er ach .
Temperature 1S°
C.
Formula D I 8 0 99866 0 0 098427 p .
Percen tage Ob served Calculatedof Anhydrous Sal t density a t 18°C densi ty at 18°O D iff erence
ia solut i on . ( grms. per cu. cm.) (grms. per cu. cm. )
Thus according to Gerlach the limit of con cen tration within which the above formula
applies is somewhat less than 2 per cen t .
CADMIUM SULPHATE . CdSOi .Observer Grotrian .
Temperature 18°
C
Formula D 0 9 9866 0 009 7329 p .
Percen tage Observed Calculatedof Anhydrous Sal t densi ty a t 18°C densi ty at 18°C D ifference.
m solut ion . grin s. per cu. cm. ) (grms. per on. em. )
F res. Z eitschr. f. analy t Chem . v i i i ( 1869 ) p. 2 79 ; Landolt u Born ste in’s Phys -Chem. Tabellen p. 147 .
2 1Vied. Ann . xv i i i ( 1883 ) p. 1 91 .
2 8 MACGREGOR ON DENSITY AND
According to these experimen t s the above formula holds up to a con cen trati on of at
least 1 7 per cen t .
The follow ing observation s were made by Grerlach 1on solution s o f this salt at
17° .5O. The calculated den si ties are obtain ed from the formula
0 9 9875
Percen tage Ob serv ed Calculatedof Anhydrous Sal t densi ty a t density at D ifi
'
ercnce
m solut ion . (grms. per cu. cm. ) (grms. per cu. cm. )
The comparat ively smal l ditferen ce between the observed and calculated den si ty for
a solut ion con tain in g 48 6 per cen t . of an hydrous salt , makes it probabl e that the simple
proportion al ity of excess of den sity of solution over den sity of water , to con cen tration
holds up to a con cen tration of about 2 5 per cen t .
POTASSIUM Sun a n a — K SOyObserver Hassenfrat z .
2
Tempera ture 12° .5O
Formula D p.
Percen tage Observed Calculated0
of Anhydrous Salt densi t y at 12° .5O densi ty at D iff erence.
i n solut ion . (grms . per cu. cm.) (grms. per cu. cm.)
The fol low ing is another series of observation s of solution s of the same sal t
Observer Gerlach .
3
Temperature 15°O.
Formula D 15s : 0 9 99 15 10 .
Percen tage Observed Calcula tedof Anhy drons Sal t densi ty at 15°O densi ty a t 15°C Diff erence.
in solut ion. (grms. per cu. cm. ) (stms. per cu. cm. )
Beiblat ter Ann . Phys . Chem. , X 1 ( 188 7 ) p. 21 7. 2 Ann . de Ch im . xx v i i i ( 1 79 9 ) p. 296
3 Gerlach ’s Specifische Gew ich te der geb rauchlichsten Salzlésungen , Fre iberg , 1859 ; and Jahresberich t 11 . Fortschri tte (1. Chem ,
CONCENTRATION OF SALT SOLUTIONS.2 9
The above sets of observation s agree in show ing that the excess of the den sity of
solution s of this salt over that of water at the same temperature is, for solution s which don ot con tain more than about 2 5 per cen t of anhydrous salt , directly proportion al to thepercen tage of anhydrous sal t which they con tain .
Ob G 1 b ‘
SOD IUM SULPHATE .
server : er ao
Temperature 15°O.
Formula D 0 99915 + 0 ' 0091267 p .
Percen tage Observed Calcula tedof Anhydrous Sal t densi t y a t 15°O densi ty at 15°C D ifl
'
erence.
in solut i on . (grms. per cu. cm.) (grms. per cu. cm.)
These experimen t s would seem to show that the above formula holds in the case of
Sodium Sulphate for solution s con tain ing from 0 to 4 per cen t of an hydrous salt . The
follow ing are other observation s w ith the same salt
Observer : Ostwald.
Temperature: 15°O.
Formula. D 16 0 99915 p .
Percen tage Qbserved Calculated_
ofAnhydrous Sal t densnty at 1S°C densit y at 10°C D iff erence.
ln solut ion . (grin s. per cu. cm .) ( grms. per on . em. )
Thus O stwald ’s experimen ts give the s ame resu lt .
Ob Th 3
CAUSTIC PorAsn .— KHO.
server ow sen .
Temperature 1 8°
C.
Formula D 0 9 9866 p .
Percen tage Observed Calculatedof Anhydrous Sal t densi ty at 1S°C densi ty at 18°C D ifference.
10 80 111110 11 . (grrn s. per cu . cm. ) (grin s. per cu. cm. )
1 Fres . Z eitsch r. f. analyt. Chem ,v i ii ( 1869 ) p. 279 ; and Landol t u. Bern ste in ’s Phys .
-chem . Tabel lenJourn . f. prakt . Chemie xx i i (1880 ) p. 305 .
3 Thermo-chemi sche Untersuchungen , Bd. i, p. 4 7.
8 0 MACGREGOR ON DENSITY AN D
The follow ing are other observation s w ith the same substan ce
Observer : Koh lrausch .
1
Temperature 1 5°
O.
Formula : D 5 p .
Percentage Observed Calculatedof Anhydrous Sal t densi ty at 15°C densi ty at 15°C D ifference.
in solut ion . (grms. per cu. cm. ) (grms. per cu. cm. )
Thomsen ’s experimen ts shew that in the case of solut ion s of Caustic Potash , even upto a stren gth of more than 5
.
per cen t .,excess of den si ty over that of water i s practical ly
proportion al to the percen tage of salt . Kohlrausch ’s results substan t iate Thomsen ’s for,
as i s seen above , a formula in which 1c is chosen s o that the den sity given by it i s exact
for p 41 9 , gives a den s i ty for p 8 42 , which n o t very far wrong .
CAUSTIC SODA.— NaHO.
Observer Thomsen.
2
Tempera ture 1S°C.
Formula D 18 0 ' 99866 p.
Percentage Ob served Calculatedof Anhydrous Sal t density at 1S
°C densi ty at 18°
C D i ff erence.
in solut ion. ( gram. per cu. cm. ) (grms. per cu. cm. )
The formula therefore holds for solution s of stren gths ranging up to about 2 percen t ,
but not for solution s of greater strength . Caustic Soda thus differs in a markedmann er from Caustic Potash .
The above are the on ly salt s for which I have been able to obtain,or to find
,data to
determin e the limits of con cen trat ion'
w ith in which formulae of the above kin d hold
w i thin which , in other words , the con cen tration -den sity curves o f their solution s are,to
the fourth place of decimals , straight l in es . In the case of most salts , the weakest
solution s , whose den sities have been examin ed , are already beyond the limits referred to .
The tabl e upon the page that follows con tain s a l ist of the values of k found abovefor the various salts examin ed.
It w i ll be n oticed that in most cases the values of 1s do not differ from on e an other toany con s iderable exten t . Now Is i s the rate of in crease of the den sity w ith the stren gthof a solution when its strength is but small . Hen ce the den siti es of dilute solution s of
1 W ied. Ann . v i ( 1879 ) p. 2 1.
Thermo-chemische Un tersuchungen , Bd. i, p. 47 .
SECTION II I , 1 889 . 8 8 TRANS . ROY . Soc . CANADA .
V I I . A Prohlm z in Polit icalScience.
By SAND FORD FLEM ING .
( Read May 8 ,
I propose to direct atten t ion to a scien t ific quest ion w ithin the domain of polit ics orc ivil governmen t which appears to me to be of gen eral in terest . It presen t s a problem
which up to the presen t time remain s un solved .
The in st itution of Parli amen t , as we all kn ow , i s of an cien t date . In E ngland a gen eral
assembly or coun ci l of the n at ion has been held immemori al ly un der various n ames .
Before the Conquest three design ation s w ere at various times assign ed to it
1 . MycelSynoth ,or great syn od .
2 . MycelGemot , or great coun cil .3 . Witen agemot
,or coun cil of the w i se men .
The n ame of “ Parl iamen t was n ot given to the Nation al Coun cil in England un ti l
after the Con quest , when the Fren ch language was exclusively used by the domin an tclass
,and Fren ch became the officiallanguage of the En glish n ation .
Parl iamen t has greatly chan ged since its early days . I t has grown and developed
from cen tury to cen tury,and i t may be said to be stil l in a condition of growth and
developmen t .
Whatever may have been the character of the meetings of the wi se men before the
Con quest , or of the Parl iamen t s which fol lowed , the cen tral idea of Parliamen t at thepresen t day ,
i s an assembly of individuals represen ting the whole n ation . The fun ct ion s
of Parl iamen t are to act on behalf of th e n ation as the suprem e authority, and— represen ting
the n ation— it possesses every power and every right and every attribute which the n ation
possesses . The fundamen tal idea and guiding prin ciple of Parl iamen t i s , that it embracesal l the separate parts which compose the realm
,that in fact i t i s the n ation in essen ce .
This i s the theoret ical and proper idea of Parl iam en t , but i t cann ot be affirmed that
the ideal Parl iamen t has ever yet been real ized . Indeed i t may be held that the mean s
taken to con sti tute Parli amen t cann ot , in the n ature of thin gs , result in producing a
n ation al assembly in which every individual elector may be fairly represen ted and his
voice heard . A s a matter of fact , un der the ex isting system ,it i s n ot practicable to have
in the elective house every part of the n ation represen ted : some parts must n ecessarilyremain un represen ted .
Such bein g the case,the problem which science may be asked to solve , i s simply
this to devise the means of forming an elect ive assembly which pract ically as wellas theoreticallywillbe the nation in essence.
Sec. 111 , 1889 . 5 .
8 4 SANDFORD FLEMING ON
What is common ly kn own as the Governmen t or the Admin i stration , and how
i t may be con stituted,form n o part of the problem , but are separate question s which I
do n ot propose to discuss . I merely submit as a gen eral prin ciple, that the Governmen t
may be con sidered in the l ight of a committee o f Parl iamen t , or executive coun ci l to carryin to effect the acts and resolut ion s of Parl iamen t and adm in i ster affairs t o the approval
of Parl i amen t .
Nation s differ in their soci al and political circumstan ces , but in al l free coun tries , at
least,i t i s gen eral ly recogn i sed that the elective assembly i s of th e first importan ce . The
theory of the elective as sembly, i s that the whole people or such of the people as are duly
qualified to vote shal l be equal ly repre sented . It can n ot be said that hitherto thisobj ect has been even approximately attain ed . I ts attainmen t may in deed be impracticable
,
but the question i s of so much importan ce that it c ann ot be unworthy of grave cousi
deration . May we n ot ask if i t be possible to devise some mean s,by which the whole
people of the realm may be brought to a cen tral poin t , to a focus s o to sp eak , in a del ib erat iv e assembly or Parli amen t .
The question of el ecting represen tatives to si t in Parliamen t has rece ived theatten t ion of many poli tical writers and has l ikew i se been in vestigated at length bymany cel ebrated geometers , who have recorded their dissen t from the pract ice follow ed .
Un der the presen t system ,m embers are elect ed by a part of the commun ity on ly
,while
their election i s opposed by an other part . I t i s quite true that the in ten tion i s to have themaj ority of the peopl e represen ted , but even thi s i s n ot a n ecessary result of the exi stin gsystem ; moreover it does n ot follow that the majority of members return ed w il l hold the
views and opin ion s of the majority of th e people on any subject . It may happen and
frequen t ly does happen , as a direct result of the presen t system ,that legislative power i s
placed,n ot in the represen tat ives of a majority, but in those who represen t a min ority .
Sir John Lubbock gives an apt illustrati on of this result . He supposes a coun try in
which there are electors who vote w ith party A , and who Vote w ith
party B . Now if the two parties are even ly distributed over the whole coun try, i t i s clear
that,un der the ordin ary system of represen tation , the weaker party w i l l be utterly
swamped . To use a fami l iar il lustration (he remarks) when ever you drop a bucket in to
t he sea,you w i ll bring up salt water . I n such a case therefore the w i l l be
pract ically un represen ted . But we must carry the matter a l itt l e further . In the House
s o elect ed,let the maj ori ty brin g forward some bil l of an advan ced character and carry i t
by two to on e,i . e .
,by the votes of members represen ting electors and again st
those represen t in g in such a case i t is clear that the min ority in the House w ould
h ave w ith them al so the in the coun try who were left un represen ted ; so that
in fact the measure would represen t the w i shes of on ly el ectors , and would be
opposed by t hose of Thus he poin t s out that the resul t of a system of
Governm en t by majorit ies , i s , on the con trary, to en able a m in ority of t o over
rule a majority of
This i llustrates on ly on e of the m an y defects in the pre sen t system , but i t is quite
sufficien t to show that the prin ciple of Represen tative Governmen t which i s inheren tly
good,has n ot been real ised . I t is obvi ous from the very n ature of the system practi sed
in electin g members , that , in every Parl i am en t , n ot the whole but on ly a par t o f the
electors are represen ted , and that the represen tatives of a minority may frequen tly
overrule a majority of the people .
3 6 SANDFORD FLEMING ON
usage regarded by them as a m ean s of obtain ing the divin e min d . They determined by
lot who should be the twel fth apostle,and thus they made a sel ection to which a
cheerful acquiescen ce was un an imously given .
I have assumed a case of two electors,and poin ted out the course wh ich might be
followed— indeed , the on ly rati onal course which could be followed . I f the prin ciple laiddown he sound, could it n ot be applied in other cases ? Let us assum e that th e el ect orat e con sists of twen ty voters , what could be don e in thi s case ? I f individual Voters in
the electorate were equal in all respects,as in the first case re ferred to
,the questi on would
be a very simple one, as it might be settled by castin g lots for on e of the twen ty equally
eligible person s . It may be taken for grant ed that under the c ircumstances n o on e would
obj ect to make the sel ection in this w ay,as being the simplest and best mode of
making a choice . I t would remove an tagon i sm and promote un an imity ; and,by the very
act of casting lots , each one of the twen ty taking par t there in would be an assen t in g
party to the choice made . Men as we ordin arily find them are , how ever not al ike they
differ much in their qualificat ions, and their opin ion s are not the s am e we must therefore
con s ider cases in which equal'
eligib ility and un iformity of m ind in th e whol e el ectorate
i s not the rule .
First , let us suppose that among the twen ty electors , fiv e voters favor the choice of
A , an other fiv e B , an other 0 ,and the remainder D . We should thus have A , B , C, D ,
each equally desired and preferred as the represen tative of th e twen ty .
- r— 4 would therefore be the represen tative un i t of the whole . We
cann ot , however , take one quarter of A,B
,C
,and D , and combine thes e quarters so as to
form on e individual , but w e can reduce the four to on e by the prin cipl e of casting lots .
One of the four can be selected by what may be termed the Apostol ic ”m ethod
,and
the'
person so selected would be recogn ized as chosen by the twen ty electors as thecommon represen tat ive of the whole .
Secondly ,le t us suppose a case in which there is less diversity of opin ion ; two groups
of fiv e electors each favor A ,on e group of fiv e prefer B ,
an other 0 . The selected men
would thus s t and A ,A
,B and C, and the represen tat ive un it o f the whole would be
(2 A+B+C) —4 . A s in the previous case,thi s complex un it would be reducible to a
sin gle in dividual by casting lots,and i t i s obvious that the probability of the lot fall ing
upon A , w ould be as two to one .
Th irdly , suppose three groups of fiv e el ectors desire to be represen ted by A and one
group by B . I n thi s case we should have (3 A+B ) — 4,as the represen tative un i t : in
selecting one of them by lot , there i s undoubtedly a possibil ity of the lot falling upon B ,
but the probability of A’
s being chosen would be three times great er than the probabilityin B
’
s cas e . True i t may be said that there should be no possibility of B S being chosen
in a con stituen cy where three-fourths of the el ectors desire A . We must however bear
in mind that the primary object is not so much to have part icular section s of the coun try
as to have the whole n ation ,fairly represen ted in Parliamen t . I f we look a l ittle further ,
if w e take four con stituen ci es precisely similar to the one under con sideration , accordin g
to the mathematical theory.
of probabi lit ies,there would be return ed out of the four ,
three members in sympathy w ith A and one member in sympathy wi th B . Again , if w e
carry the matter st ill further if we take in to con sideration every one of th e con stituen cies
in to which for conven i en ce the whole n ation may be divided,i t would be foun d as a
A POLITICAL PROBLEM. 8 7
gen eral resul t that the represen tatives return ed to s i t in Parliamen t would col lect ivelyrepresen t the n ation and fairly embody the reason contain ed in the whole commun i ty .
There i s on e peculiarity o f the system suggested which may be n oticed ; in every case
the election of a represen tative would be effected deliberately and wi thout conflic t . I t
would be accompli shed in fact w ith unan imous assen t . Each individual Voter would
con tribute towards a common result— a result Which would b e reached on prin ciplesequally just and fair to all
,and thus command gen eral acquiescen ce .
These resul ts are attainable on ly by bringing to bear , on matters of doubt or di th
culty, the prin ciple of settlemen t adopted by the Apostles . That prin ciple can n ot beobj ected to on scien t ific grounds , and those who hold the bel ief that mundan e affairs areover-ruled and directed should have n o difficulty in accepting it as a mean s of promotingharmon y and advan cin g the common good. The bel ie f in a Providen ce , who takescogn izan ce of the affairs of men ,
i s the foundation of all religion ; commun it i es therefore
the social fabric of which is based on Chri stian ity should have n o hesitation in leaving
m atters of the highest momen t to the arbitramen t o f an infin i tely w i se Providen ce ratherthan to the settlem en t of men wi th all their individual in terests and selfi sh Views
,all
their prejudices , all their passion s, and all their errors of j udgmen t .
I have so far, for the purpose o f the argumen t , assumed hypothetical cases it remain sto be con sidered how t he prin ciples laid down may be appli ed pract ically . Le t us take
for example the election o f a single represen tative in a con stituen cy of voters . It i s
desi rable in the first place that each voter , or group of voters of one min d , should have
perfect freedom of choice in the n omin ation . Suppose, in order to accommodate every
shade of opin i on ,it be arran ged that each hundred voters o f on e way o f thinking n ame
the person whom they would w i sh to represen t them . Thi s would separate the con sti
tuen cy into twen ty groups of voters , who would each n omin at e whomsov er they most
favored . It does no t n ecessarily follow that there would be twen ty person s n om in ated
in the con sti tuen cy , as two or more groups m ight n omin ate the same person ; a circum
stan ce which would in crease the probabili ty of his selection exactly in proportion to the
n umber of groups makin g him their n omin ee . On the twen ty n omin ation s being m ade,
the n ext step would be for the person s n om in ated to proceed, on the prin ciples above setfor th , to select one of them selves .
I f un able to make an un an imous choice,they m ight
,as in the case of the twen ty
electors choosing a represen tative , sort themselves in to smal ler groups and, by the
appl ication of the prin ciples set forth,proceed to reduce the number of votin g un its , and
fin ally, by the apostoli c method , determin e the selection of one person . The person so
chosen would be held to be the common choice of the whole to r epresen t the
con stituen cy in Parl iamen t .In the carrying out of such a system, there would b e, as in every system ,
a number
of poss ible con tingen ci es for which provisi on would have to be made ; these I have n otdeemed it n ecessary at pre sen t to en ter in to . My obj ect has been b riefly to suggest
leading prin ciples by which,as i t appears to me
,the cen tral idea may be realized . I f
the prin ciples submitted be sound, I ven ture to think that i t is no t impracticable todevise proper machin ery to elect represen tat ives who
,when brought in to on e delib erative
gathering , would , so far as such a thing is possible , be a mathematical con cen tration of
the whole el ectoral body— would in fact con st itute an assembly which would closely
approximate to the ideal Parliamen t .
8 8 SANDFORD FLEMING ON
Referring to the presen t system an emin en t writer asks : Is Governmen t on ly pos
sible by the conflict of oppos in g prin ciples ? ” The famil i ar expression ,
“ governmen t
o f t he peopl e by the people can n ot be held to mean governmen t of th e whole by a partor by the conflict o f hosti l e parts . I t must be obvious the un ited en ergy and w i sdom of
of a whole n ation directed towards one end can on ly be fully realized , when th e supreme
power is vested in a Parl iamen t chosen by the whole people , and fairly represen ting thewhole people . This is the great problem for solution and i t is man ifest that if such aParl iamen t i s ever to be con s tituted , thepeople , in choos ing members to represen t them ,
must in some way be brought t o act no t in con testation and conflict, but in con cert
and in con cord .
I f i t be on e of the first of pol itical des iderat a t o hav e n o l arge min orities l eft un re
presen ted in the n at ion al assembly,i t appears to me es sen ti al to seek for some mean s of
securing the cooperat ion o f the whole body of the electors in th e electi on of members
to si t in the High Court of Parl iam en t . To obtain this resul t i t is obviously expedien t toadopt a sys tem which n ecessarily does n o t develop an imosity or provoke hosti l ity ; the
aim should be to promot e fri en dlin ess and agreemen t in a matter which con cern s al l
al ike . I t can n ot be den ied that the whole commun i ty i s con cern ed in having in Parl ia
men t , n ot m en of extreme View s,but moderate-min ded men of good common s en se and
good con scien ce , capable of represen t ing the more en l ighten ed el ectoral mind . By elect ingrepresen tat ives on the prin ciples laid down
,these desirable obj ect s would undoubtedly
in a l arge m easure be attain ed ; every step would be deliberately taken , free from the
excitemen t and heated feel in g which so frequent ly accompan y ordin ary election s . I n
every stage of the proceedings there would be a tendency to return on ly the best men .
At the very first step i t i s obvious that a can didate must be a person respected and
supported by a hundred electors . It is presumable that no hundred electors of any classor race or creed would deliberately pu t forward a base or unworthy or even an in ferior
individual ; i t i s no t to be supposed that they would choose one of the least in tel ligentor least hon est or least reputable amongst them as their represen tative in the candidature .
A s a rule,el ectors of one m in d would arrange themselves in t o groups of one hundred , and
each group woul d select some man, who on his m erits as a citizen would creditably
represen t them ,or who as a statesman commen ded himself to their favor. I n their turn ,
those select ed by the hundreds would follow the same course, selectin g gen erally thebest
,the worthi est and w ises t men un ti l the hmalchoice was reached and a member
select ed to represen t the con stituen cy in Parliam en t .I t can scarcely be doubted that if such a system could be put in force , the ten den cy
would be upwards from first to l ast , and that there would be drawn to the l egisl ature
accomplished statesmen,men endowed w i th w isdom and patrio tism ,
'
pract icalkn ow
ledge and experi en ce . The in evi table effect would be to al lay the spiri t o f fact ion and
remove political ran cour . In a higher degree than under the ordin ary method of electin g
members,the system would attract w ithin the pal e of Parli amen t men in gen erous
sympathy n ot w ith a part on ly , but w i th the whole people . Thus might be c on sti tutedan august body which as closel y as possible would be a true mirror of the en l ighten ed
mind of the n at ion t o reflect its opin ion s , i ts wi sdom , and its Virtues .
I n a Parl iamen t s o con st ituted , perfect un an imity on all question s , perhaps on any
question ,i s n ot to be looked for, and each separat e
“question would have to be s ettl ed ,
FLEMING ON A POLITICAL PROBLEM.
peace ably w i th all men . I f the age of belligeren cy has passed away,i s it n ot emin en tly
fit and proper that we should seek for the removal of the last vestiges of a b elligeren t
age which s ti ll remain in our poli tical system 7
SECTION II I , 1 889 . 4 1 TRANS . ROY . Soc . CANAD A .
V I I I . On the Hygroscop icity of certain Canadian F ossilFuels.
By G . CHRISTIAN HOFFMANN , F . In st . Chem .
, Chemist and Min eralogist to the Geologicaland NaturalH i story Survey of Canada.
(Presented May 8 ,
The experimen ts,in thi s conn ec tion , here recorded , and which were conducted upon
material in allstag es of alteration ,ran ging from surfac e peat to an thracit e , were all
carried out un der preci sely sim i l ar condition s .The various fuels w ere all reduced to as n ear as poss ible the sam e state of mechan ical
division ,having been ground just sufficien tly hue to allow of their passing a sieve of
n in ety holes to the l in ear in ch . The materi al— of which , in each case , on e gram and
a-half w a-s employed— was placed in low , broad , flat-bottomed , straight -sided , very l ightglass bottles
,provided w i th accurately groun d glass stoppers . I n the dryin g experimen ts
,
the specially con structed stagin g— which carri ed thirty of these bottles— supported byglass legs
,stood over a glass dish (almost equal in area to the mouth of the bell j ar) con
tain ing stron g sulphuric acid ; the whole bein g covered by a bell j ar w ith ground rimresting upon an accurately groun d plate . I n the absorbtion experimen t s the glass dish
con tain ing the sulphuri c acid, was replaced by one con tain ing a shallow s tratum ofwater,
over wh i ch were heaped shreds of filt ering paper, and the bel l j ar en closing the experi
men ts was in turn covered by an other of much larger dimen sion s - an arran gemen t whichefiectually preven ted the deposit ion of dew . The t emperature of the room (which was
art ificially heated— the work havin g been carried out during the w in ter mon ths) inwhich the experimen t s were con ducted , ran ged from 65
° to 70'
F . The experimen ts were
all made in duplicate— the two experimen ts w i th the same fuel being carri ed out , asaffordin g a better che ck
,on separate occasion s .
In some prel imin ary experimen ts , fifteen of the lign ites , in duplicate, were exposedto an absolutely dry atmosphere for 48 hours, at the expirat ion of which t imethey were foun d to have parted w ith the greater part of their moisture . They were then
further exposed for con s ecutive peri ods of 36 , 44, 68 , 68 , 48 , and 42 hours , during whichperiods they in curred an addition al loss (in each case the mean of the thirty experimen ts )of respectively 1 2 5 , 05 9 , 0 2 9 , and 0 1 5 per cen t . of water (the loss— taking them ean of the two experim en t s w ith each of thefift een fuels— ran gin g from 09 2 to 1 6 6 , to
0 5 1 to 0 80 , 0 36 to 0 75 , an d 0 19 to 0 37 per cen t .) or a total loss of 3 8 5 per cen t . for theaddition al 306 hours . A st i l l further exposure for con secut ive peri ods of 9 3 , 1 2 0 , 70 , and
9 0 hours, was atten ded by a further loss (in each case the mean of the thirty experimen ts )of respectively 0 1 5 , and 0 19 per cen t ,
or an aggregate loss of 1 2 7 per cen t .
for the 373 hours (addition al to the previous 354 hours) exposure . The peat , which had
already been subm itted to_
an exposure of 354 hours , was further exposed for con secutive
Sec. I I I,1889 . 6.
4 2 HOFFMANN ON HYGROSCOPICITY
periods of 93 , 1 20 , 70 , 9 0 , and 48 hours,which resulted in an addition al loss of respec
t iv ely and 0 05 per cen t . , or for the total period of 42 1 hours (addi
t ion alto the preceding 35 4 hours ) a combin ed loss of 14 3 per cen t . In l ike m ann er a
li gn iti c coal which had previously been submitted to an exposure of 354 hours , w as also
further exposed for con secutive periods of 9 3 , 1 20 , and 70 hours, and w ith the result thati t in curred an addition al loss of respectively 0 34, and 0 08 per cen t . , or for the total
period of 283 hours (addition al to the form er 354 hours) an aggregate loss of 0 74
per cen t .
The period of exposure— both in a dry and moist atmosphere— fin ally adopted , in all
cas es,was 35 4 hours , w eighin g at in tervals o f 19 0 , 94, and 70 hours ; and i t was found
that,durin g the last 70 hours of thi s exposure
I n a dry atmosphere,the loss in curred by the
L ign i tes ranged from 03 3 to 0 5 8 per cen t. , the average loss be ing per cent.Lign itic coal s to 02 0
Goal s 0 0 2 to
Sem i-anth racites 00 1 to
Anthrac ite amounted to 0 05 per cen t.
I n a moist atmosphere , the amoun t of w ater re absorbed by the
. ranged from 0 2 6 to 0 8 5 per cent., the average gain be ing 05 5 per cent.to
0 0 2 to
to
amoun ted to 0 0 6 per cen t
The peat and an thracitic coal comported them selves,in both above regards
,in much
the same mann er as a lign i te and coal respecti vely .
I t w i l l be observed that there i s a remarkably close agreemen t in the amoun ts ofwater lost and reabsorbed by each of the respective variet i es of fuel during the last 70 ofthe 354 hours exposure , and that the amoun t o f thi s loss and reabsorption i s (apart from
the an thraci te) proportion ate to the degree of alterati on of the fuel— it bein g greatest inth e l ign i tes
,and least in the semi-an thraci tes .
From the above results , coupled w ith those obtain ed in the prelimin ary experimen ts ,i t i s eviden t that , beyon d a certain poin t , the lign ites and l ign it i c coals part w i th thei rwater but very slowly, so that even after an exposure of 35 4 hours to an absolutely dry
atmosphere , t hese y'
et retain a certain amoun t of water removable by a yet more protractedexposure . The coal s and sem i-an thraci tes , on the other han d , may fairly be regarded as
dry after such period of exposure— in deed i t was foun d that, in many in stan ces , the semi
an thracites and more altered coals had , durin g the last 70 hours , suffered n o al teration in
weight .
In the accompanyin g table the various fu‘
el s have been arran ged in the order of their
dim in i sh in g hygroscopicityz On referring to the same i t w i ll be seen that the capacityfor retain in g, and w ith it that for reabsorbin g, water varies w i th the degree o f alterat ionwhich the fuel has un dergon e— it being most pron oun ced in the l ign it es , les s so in t hel ign it ic coals , and least in the coal s . Thus , we find that the amoun t ofwater retain ed by
4 4 HOFFMANN ON HYGROSCOPICITY
2 . The Lign i tic Coal s show a greater disposition to resist 1 exposure to the air— bein g,on the whole
,tolerably firm con tain much less w ater ; do n ot impart so deep a coloration
to a solution of caustic potash ; show (b y fast coking) a slight cakin g ten den cy , and in
regard to chemi cal composit ion,occupy a posit ion between true lign i tes and true bitu
min ous coal s .
3 . Whil st the Coals resist exposure to the air ; are hard and firm ; con tain but a small
proportion of water ; commun i cate but a very slight , if any, coloration to a solution of
caustic potash ; yield (by fast coking) , in the majority of in stan ces , a good firm coke,and
in respect to gen eral appearan ce and chem ical composit ion closely resembl e som e variet ies of coal of the Carbon iferous system .
1 Employed, throughout th i s paper, in the sense of no t break ing down .
NOTES TO TABLE .
( 1 That i s to say the amount of water retained by the same after exposure to a perfectly dry atmosphere for354 hours.
(2 ) The treatment w i th solut ion of caustic potash was conducted at the ordinary temperature. Thi s offerssome advan tages over that b y diges t ion at a bo i l ing heat— the act ion not being so energetic (although sutticien tlyso, as the resul ts show ,
to ob tain the desired resul t ) , a greater number of shades of color are obtained, thus adm i ttingof a more accurate estimate of the nature of the fue l. The experimen ts were allcarried out s imultaneously , and
under preci sely s im i lar condi t ion s the resul ts admit,therefore, of a fair compari son . The fuel s were allreduced
to a very fine powder ; specific grav i ty of the potash solut ion, t ime of con tact, shak ing at in terva ls, twohours ; after wh ich filtrat ion was proceeded w i th ,
the filtrates be ing col lected in flat, broad-fared, narrow-s ided
wh i te-glass bott les of un iform dimensions. The amount of alkal ine solution , and we ight of fuel employed, was inallin stances the same.
I n appearance it resembles some varieties of coal of t he Carbon iferous sys tem .
I s probably an ex ten sion of the seam at B lackfoot Cross ing , Bow R iver (Specimen No.
Th i s specimen had been kept in the show-cases of the Museum for years , and may fairly be regarded as ,
hav ing been in a thorough l y air-dr ied condition .
Th i s l ign ite con tain s an occas ional in terst rat ified layer of m ineral charcoal , l ikew i se th in plate s of gypsumand numerous m inute crystall ine aggregations of pyrite it also h ad a large amount of lemon-
yel low , occas ional lybrown i sh-yel low, subtran sparent to t ransparen t res in , ch iefly in smal l particles, difi
'
used through its substance.
From the same seam ( po ints of col lection , however, different) as that from wh ich specimen No. 6 was
taken .
Th i s “ concho idal l ign i te would appear to con s ist of fragments of the more sol id port ion s— root, trunk ,or branch -u of some of the vegetable matter from wh ich the b ed of l ign ite has been derived.
Spec imen s Nos. 23 and 28 are from natural exposures of the same seam,the former be ing about e ight, and
the latter about s ix , m i les south of th e shaft .Th i s coal i s , here and there, inte rsected b y th in plates of calcite , as also by films of pyrite.
Th i s coal i s in te rsecte d b y numerous th in plates of gypsum and calc ite , and conta ins, in parts , a few films
of pyrite.
Specimen No. 46 i s from a natural exposure of the same seam on the north s ide of the river.
Th i s coal i s intersected by numerous th i n plates of calcite , as also, here and there, b y a few films of
pyri te .
Th i s specimen was, in parts , very much so i led w ith arg i llaceous matter, and to th i s c ircumstance mayb e attributed the large percentage of incombustible matter wh ich t h i s sample of t he fuel was found to contain .
The sample rece i ved for examinat ion was, in parts , coated w ith earthy matter wh ich was not read i lyremovab le : th i s would accoun t for the large percentage of ash wh ich th is particular specimen was found to leaveon ign ition .
OF CANADIAN FOSSIL FUELS . 4 5
From a m icroscop ic exam ination of th in sl ices of th i s coal it was inferred that the nodular grains consistof an al tered res inous matter.
The specimen of semi-an thracite No . 69 came from the Cascade m ine wh ich is near Ban ff
Stat ion , on the Canad ian Pacific Ra i lway. The Hughes’ m i ne (Stewart ’s m ine) here referred to, is about threem i les di stant from that mine.
Determ ination of the specific grav ity. The fuel was reduced to the state of a coarse powder b y crush ingit in an iron mortar, the appl ication of more force than was absolute ly necessary to eff ect th i s be ing careful lyavo ided, so as to obv iate , as far as poss ible , the production of fine part icles and dus t . The material was sabsequen t ly freed from the lat ter by shak ing it upon a s ieve of n ine ty holes to the l inear inch . The specimen h av ingbeen introduced into t he specific grav i ty bo t t le, and sufficien t water added to thoroughl y immerse it , the who lewas placed under the recei ver of an air-pump
,and exhaustion very gradual ly proceeded w ith ; the exhaust ion was
repeated at intervals , and unti l no more bubbles were seen to come off. The bottle was then removed, and the
necessary adjustmen t s hav ing been made, weighed ; after wh ich , a port ion of the water hav ing been w i thdrawn , it
was again placed under the rece iver of the air—pump , etc.
5 8 N . F . DUPU IS
the moon and the sun , upon the surface of the heavens , a smal l portion of which i s taken
as a plane,taking the placeo f observation as the centre of proj ect ion . This method giv e s
a s matters in their n atural appearances and in the projection , the star becomes a pointon the paper, and the moon becomes a ci rcular disc W hich moves over and obscures or
occults the s tar ; or in the case of an ecl ipse , we have two discs , representing the filland
Q,of which the sun remains fixed, while the moon , moving along her path , passes over
and obscures more or less of the sun .
If we were situated at the earth ’s centre,nothing would be easier than
,from the
Nantical Almanac , to l ay down upon paper the position of a star to be occulted and the
posi tions of the moon ’s centre from time to time at interval s of an hour,or a half-hour
,or
ten minutes , or less and the moon ’s apparent motion during these interval s would be
sufficien tly uni form to admit of the employmen t of proport ional parts in determiningsmaller interval s . But from our position upon the earth ’s surface
,the moon suffers
parallact ic displacement ; and thi s displacement i s practical ly the same as that of the place
of observation, w ith respect to the earth
’s centre , as seen from the centre of the moon .
Now putting 7: to denote the moon ’s horizont al paral lax (i.e . the angular value of
the earth’s radius as seen from the moon ) , 0‘
to denote the moon ’s declination , (p the
geocentric latitude of the place of observation,and a the hour angl e of the moon east or
west of the meridian of the place , we have for the displ acement , from the well knownformu lae for the transformation of spherical coordinates
D z rf sin tp cos d— fl cos go sin é‘
cos a
A z rr cos go sin a
where D i s the displacemen t of the moon ’s centre,north i f and south if and A i s
the displacement of the centre in R . A .
, eas t or west from the meridi an of the star .To find these quantiti es :
In the application (p i s a fixed angle for any parti cular place , and 7,<8, a, are found
in ,or through the means of the Nautical Almanac for any parti cul ar epoch .
These being obtained draw any l ine QOS and OG a perpendicular to i t . Make the
angle GOP equal to the latitude of the place of observation , and the angle GOH equalto the decl inat ion of the moon at mean time of conjunction , as taken from the Nau tical
Almanac .
-Nex t , take OP equal to 7! from a scale of equal parts . The value of ft i s best
expressed in minutes of arc , and al l other lengths concerned must be reduced to the same
unit and taken from the same scale o f equal parts . Draw PQ perpendicular to OQ,and
w ith Qas centre , and QP as radius, describe the quadrant PE , and take the angle PQA
equal to a, the hour angle of the moon for the par t icular epoch required , i .e , the angl e
between the meridian of the moon and the meridian of the place of observation . Draw
Ao perpendicular upon QP,and da
' perpendicular upon OH .
Then for the hour ang l e a, aa’ i s equal to D and Ad i s equal to A
To show this .
Q0 cos 6‘
Qa sin 6 .
Q0 : 7r sin (p ,and Qa z QA cos a z n cos ¢ cos a
aa‘
: 7t sin cp cos d
Aa Z QA sin a n cos go sin a z d
ON OCCULTATION,ETC. 5 9
We have thus a construc t ion for finding the moon’s displ acement .
The appl ication o f this construction,and the finaldetermination of the occul tat ion
w i l l be best unders tood from an explanatory example .
For the occul tation of the'
st ar 54 Arie tis , as seen at Greenw ich on Oct . 9 th , 1 88 1 , we
have the follow ing el ements
3’
s hor i z on tal paral lax3
’
s sem i-diameterQ
’
s hour ly mot ion in R . A .
Q’
s dec
3’
s decl inat ion at mean conjunct ionMean t ime of conjunc t ion3 north of 5Kat conj unc t ion
Proj ect for the hours t 1 1h
Corresponding sid. t ime 8 0 h 46S
13’
s R . A ar 2 5 7 3 8
Corresponding hour ang le, a, in t ime 2 42 5 2
in arc
The latitude of Greenw ich is q) N.
Construct the figure already described having the angl e POG and
OP 576 . Take the angles PQA , PQB ,PQC and respectively .
In thi s figure QP represents the meridi an of the place and A , B , C, the positions
of the moon at the hours X I,X I I and XII I respect ively ; and since the moon is approach
ing the meridian,it i s east of the meridian at the hour named . Hence the hori zontal
displ acement of the moon is eastward , or from right to left in the plot .
Draw OH to make the angle GOH (9 and as the declination i s north
OH lies above OG. For south decl ination OH w i ll l ie below 0 G.
Take OH H : 35 0 and draw HGh perpendicular to 0 G, and make Gh h
When the moon is moving northwards Gh i s to be taken downwards,and upwards
when the moon is moving southwards .
Draw Oh and produce both ways .
OH i s the moon ’s hourly motion in R . A. ; 0 G its hourly motion along its circle
of declination and Oh i ts hourly motion in i t s path as seen from the earth ’s centre .
I f 0 denotes the time of mean conjunction , W e take OH equal to three-fourths, (T
Oh, and make XI and KL .each equal to Oh. . J,K
, L are the position s of the moon’s
centre at the hours X I,X I I
,and X I I I as seen from the earth’s centre .
At these hours set ofi"
the displacements,parall e l to 0 62, v iz .
—Jj da'
, Kit bb’
,
Ll cc’
; and at j , k, I set ofi’ the displacements perpendicular to OQ, Viz . j
‘XI = Aa,
Ic'
XI I Bb and l'XI I I Cc.
X I , XI I , and XI I I are the apparent pos itions of the moon’s centre at these hours res
pect iv ely .
Lastly, take OS d 48 8 . S i s the apparent position of the star .
Wi th S as centre and a radius s 1 5 7 describe an arc cutting the l ine drawn
through X I , X I I , and XI I I , in D and R . D i s the time of disappearance of the star,or the
beginning of the occultation , and R i s the time of reappearance , or the end of the
occultati on . These are in the present example about 1 1"
for the beginning and
1 211 for the end .
6 O N F . DUPUIS
This particular occul tation was taken because it gives in the construction aconvenient diagram for explan ations , because i t i s not. a very favorable case W hereaccuracy is expected
,and because , being calculated for Greenw i ch in the Nautical
Almanac,we have a ready means of comparing results .
Such a compari son shows a complete coincidence in the t imes of beginn ing and end .
As a modification of this purely graphic method we may employ a certain amount
of calculation— principal ly by means of tables— to find the values of the displacements
Aa, aa’
,etc .
,and then through these we may readily find the coordinates of the moon ’s
centre,referred to the star as origin . This method dispen ses W ith a great portion of
the graphic construct ion , the con struction be i ng employed only in the last stage of thedetermination .
The tables herew ith given are logarithmic in character, but on account o f theirarrangement they are very s imple in their working . The arguments for Table Iare (p, a,
and their complements denoted by a’.
For Table I I the arguments are H and ?Z . The t abular results are for convenienceindicated by the same symbols as the arguments .
Tabl e I I I enables a s to return from the logarithm to the corresponding numbers , and
i s, in fact , a table of anti-l ogarithms .
To i llustrate the appl icat ion of the tables we apply i t to the same example as thediagram
,the occul tation of 5 4 Arieti s , as se en at Greenw ich , Oct . 9 th ; 1 88 1 .
We have then2 q
/
6 é"
a a'
the hours 1 1 , 1 2 and 1 3 respectively . Al so
7: I 57 15 H 35 0
The corresponding tabul ar numbers from Table I are
m 3894 a 35 17 7! z 7 60 a 38 14 3646 33 1 1
q/ z 37 94 6’
3975 H : 544 a’
: 3880 3 953 3990
A No . fromTab le I II t oA 6
’
B
D A — B .
These give the follow ing result s
A 23 3 3
D
when1 1h 1211
And these are the values of the displacements Aa, Eh, da'
, bb’
,
at the hours given .
6 2 N . F. DUPUIS
Moreover we may divide the original hour spaces into intervals of 20 minutes by
employing the fo l low ing formulae, x1 , x2, x
3denoting as before
,m
,72 being the terms
between x,and x2 and p , q those between at, and x3.
m $( 5x1+ 5x2 — x,) 25 84
n $( 2x 1+ 8x2 x3 ) 17 3 3
p g( 2x3+ 81 5— 331 ) 2
q g(sxfi m — xa
and simil arly for y .
In applying the preceding methods to the prediction of solar ecl ipses a few modifi
cations are required .
Thus for 7r we employ (the moon’s horizontal parallax) (the sun
’s horizontal paral
For 3 we employ the sum of the semidiameters of the sun and moon .
For H we take (moon’s hourly motion in R . A . ) (sun
’s hourly motion in R . A.)For h we take (moon
’s hourly motion in declination ) (sun’s hourly motion in
decl ination ) .
If the sun and moon are moving in opposite directions,we take the sum instead of
the difference of thei r hourly motions in decl ination .
As an example , we have for the solar eclipse of May 1 6 th ,1 882 , as seen from Green
W ich ,
T: 19 7 d 1 9 2 H : 33 7 5 h N . 6 JV. 7 8
For the hours
W e havea
Thence we find by the tables,etc . ,
Then draw ing any l ine L , we take upon it a convenient point S as the sun’s centre
,and
set off SA 1 78 6 , SE 1 2 43 , S 0 40 5 7 . Then setting off downwards A 'XVI I I30 8 4, B
'
XIX C‘XX 16 38 , and draw ing a curve through the three poin ts
thus found, we have the moon’s apparent path . Taking° SE s 31 73 (B being on
the moon ’s path ) we find the time of beginning, B ,as 1 8 h . 1 1 m .
,and the t ime of ending
,
E,as 1 9 h . 25 m . Draw ing SM perpendicular to the moon ’s path gives the middle of the
eclipse,i .e .
,the time of the greates t phase , M as 1 8 h . 46 m .
W ith centre S and radius equal to the sun ’s semidiameter, 1 5 84, describe the circle
f , and w ith M as centre and w i th a radius equal to the moon’s semidi ameter , 1 5 9 , describe
a circle g . The figure produced represents the appearance at greatest obscuration .
Dividing the distance fg by the sun’s diameter gives 01 87 for the magnitude of the
eclipse .
The angle ASB+ 90 i s the angle from the north point of the sun , toward the we st , a twhich first contact takes place . This angle i s by measurement on the plot
The angle CSE +9 0 i s the angle from the north point of the sun at which last contact
takes place . This angle measures 1 2953 .
The foregoing quantities as given in the Nautical Almanac are
Ec l ipse beg ins, 18 h . 1 031
3131 .
Greatest phase, 18 h . 46 m.
Ec l ipse ends, 19 11 . 23 m .
Magn i tude,Ang le from N . of first contac t 158° W .
last 130°
E .
The unit of the scale here employed is one-sixteenth of an inch . A larger scale would
give greater accuracy .
But,in general
,the smaller the magnitude of the eclipse , the greater w i ll be the
probable error of the prediction .
TABLE I . Argumen ts, cp, a, a, a'
.
6 4 DUPUIS ON OCCULTATION,ETC.
TABLE I I . Arguments, H,7x.
TABLE I I I . Arguments Sums from o ther tab les.
6 6'
HOFFMANN ’
S L ISTOF
REP. GEOL. CAN.— Reports of Progress of the Geolog ical Survey of Canada ( years 1863
—1 884, inc.= 14 vols .)
Mon treal .TRAN S. ROY. Soc. CAN. Proceedings and Transactions of the Royal Soc iety of Canada. Montreal.TRA NS . N . S . I s sr.
— Proceedings and Transactions of the Nova Scotian Institute of Natural Science. Hal ifax .
Tscn . Mm. M im°
n .—TschermakM ineralog ische Mit theilungen . V ienna.
Van ,variety of. Syn , synonym of. Anal, analy sis .
LIST or M INERALS .
Acadial ite, “
. var. Chab az i te.
A cm i t e ,Actinol i te, 3 .
Agalmatol i te,Agate, 5 syn . Domey k i te .
Alabaster, 6 . syn . N iccol i te .
A lb erti te , 7 “
. syn . A rsenopy ri te.
Alb i t e , 8 n : Sperryl i te.
Alla n iw. 9
A lmandi te, 10 var. Garnet. car. Amph ibole and Py
A lum. Nat ive, syn . Kal in ite. roxene.
Halotrich ite . A sph alt um , 36
Iron , syn . Halotr ich ite. Aug ite, 37 var. Pyroxene.
Magnes ium, syn . Pickering ite . A x i n i t e , 38
Alu n i t e , 11 A z u r i t e , 39
Alun o gen , B a r i t c , 40
Amaz on -stone, 13 Barium carb onateAmethyst, sulphate
Ammon ium ch loride
A n alc i t e , 16 .
Anatase . syn . Octahedri te.
A n d alus i t e , 1 7
A n d es i t e , 18
Andradi te, 19 . .fvar. Garnet.
A n h y d r i t e , 20 .
[An im ik i te] , 2 1
A n o r t h i t e , 23 .
An thrac i te , 24 var. M ineral coal .An thraxol i te, 25 near Asphaltum
Stib n i te.
An t im o n y . Native, 26 .
b lende . syn . Kermes i te.
b loom . syn. Va len tin i te.
glance syn. Stibn i te.
ox ide Senarmon ti te, Va lent inite.
oxy-sulph ide Kermes ite. syn. Limon i te.
Red, Syn. Kermes i te.
sulph ide z : Stibn i te .. var. Opal .
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
A rg en t i t e , 30
A rq ue r i t e , 31
A r ra go n i t e , 32
A rse n ic . Native, 33Arsen icalcopper
n icke lpyri tes
A rsen ide of platinumA rse n o py r i te , 34
Asbe‘
stus , 35 .
BarytesB er t h ie r i t e , 41
B e ryl, 42
B io t i te , 43
B ism u t h . Native, 44carbonate
glancesulph ide
B ism u t h i n i t e , 45
B ism u t i t e , 46
B i tter-Spar var. Dolomi te.
B i tumen syn . Asphal tum .
B i tum in ions coal 47 var. M ineral coal.B lack copper syn. Melacon ite.
B lack lead syn . Graph ite.
B lende syn. Sphaleri te.
B lood-stone syn . Hel iotrope.
Blue i ron earth . syn. V iv ian i te.
B lue malach ite . syn . A z urite.
Bog iron-ore, 48 var. L imon i te.
Bog manganese rar. “fad.
B o r n i te , 49
Brown hemati te[Bytown i te] , 50Cacholong, 51[Cacoclasite] , 52
Cat c o xe n i t e , 53
Cairngorm stone, 231
M INERALS OCCURRING IN CANADA .
Calcareous Spar . syn . Calc ite.
t nfa, 54 Travertine .
Calc i t e , 55
Calc ium carb onate Calc i te .
fluoride F luorite.
hposphate Apat i te .
s i l icate Wol laston i te .
sulphate Anhydri te, Gypsum.
Ca n c r in i t e , 5 7
Carme l coal , 58 syn . Gieseck i te .
Capilliary pyri tes var. Nephel i te .
Carne l ian ,
Ca ss i t e r i t e , 60
Cele s t i t e , 61 .
Cen t ralla ss i t e , 62 syn . Epsom i te.
Ce ru ss i t e . 63 . syn . Born i te .
Ch a b a z i t e , 64
Chalcedony, 65 Quartz . car. Grossulari te.
Ch alc o c i t e , 66
Ch alc o py r i t e , 6 7 syn . Aug i te .
Chert syn. Halotrich i te .
Ch iastol ite , 68Ch lorite, 69Ch lo r i t o id , 70 .
Ch o n d ro d i te , 7 1
Chrom ic ironChrom iferous garnet, 72
m ica, 165Ch rom i t e , 73Ch ry so c olla , 74 .
Ch ry soli t e , 75
Chrysoti le, 76 var: Serpentine.
C in n a b a r , 77 .
Ci nnamon stone 9yn . E sson i te .
Clay iron-stone, 78 var. S iderite.
Coal, B i tum inous, . va'r. M ineral coal .
Cob al t arsenate E rythri te.
arsen ide z : Smalti te.
Coccol ite, 79 var. Pyroxene .
[Co o k e i t e ] , 8 0 var. F in i te .
Co pp e r . Native, 8 1 . syn . M irab i l i te .
arsen ide Domeyk i te.
B lack , syn. Melacon i te.
carb onate A z urite, Malach i te.
Grey , syn. Tetrahedr ite.
ox ide Cupri te,Melacon i te. syn . Sy lvan i te .
s i l icate Chrysoco l la .
sulph ide z Ohalcocite , Covel l i te .
V i treous,. syn . Chalcoc i te .
Copper glance syn . Chalcoc ite.
Copper n ickel . syn . N iccol i te .
Copper ore. Purple syn. Born i te .
Red, syn . Cupri te .
Yel low, syn. Chalcopyrite.
Copper syn . Chalcopyri te .
Coracite, 82 . var. U ran in i te .
Co ru n d um , 83
Cowelli t e ’ 84 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 . 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6 7
C ry p t om o rplli t e 85
Cu p r i t e , 86
Cy a n i t e , 8 7
D awso n i t e , 88
D ial lage , 89D iops ide, 9 0D istheneDog
-tooth-spar, 9 1D olom i t e , 9 2
D om ey k i t e , 93
Dysyn trib i teE laeo l i te , 94E p id o t e , 95
E p is t ilb i t e , 96
E p som i t e , 97
Epsom sal tE rub esc i teE ry t h r i te , 98
E sson i te, 99F a h lu n i t e , 100
[Fassa i te] , 10 1Feather alumFe lspar, A lb i te
Andesi teAn orth i teLab radori teM icroc l ine .
Ol igoclaseOrthoclase
F lu o r i t e , 1 02
F luor-sparF ( etid calci te , 56
Fre ibergi te, 103GalenaG ale n i t e , 104
G a rn e t , 105
A lmand i teAndrad i teOhromiferous,
Grossulari teSpessarti te
G en t h i t e , 106
Gieseckite , 10 7Glauber saltGla uc o n i t e , 1 08
Gm elin i t e , 1 09
G old , 1 10
G 6 t h i t e , 11 1
Graph ic tel luriumG ra ph i t e , 1 12
Green malach iteGreen v i triolGrey antimonyGrey copper
Grossulari te , 1 13G y p sum , 1 14
G y r oli t e , 1 15
H ali t e , 1 16
H alo t r ich i te , 1 1 7
Heavy-Spar
Hel iotrope , 1 18
6 8
H em a t i te ,1 19
. syn . L imon i te .
H eula n d i t e ,Hornb lende
,1 2 1 var. Amph ib o le.
Hornstone, 1 22 mr. Quartz .
H owli t e , 1 23 .
H um b old t in e , 124
[Hunti l i te] , 2 1
Hyacin th , 1 26 _
w -
r. Z ircon .
lly p e rslh e n e , 1 27
I celand~spar, 128
IdocraseI lmen i te, 1 29[llv a i t e ] , 130 .
Infusorial earth,131 E arthy tripol i te.
I r id o sm in e , 132
Iron Halotrich ite.
I ron . Meteoric,carb onate = S ideri te .
chromate z Chrom i te .
ochre , 133 var. Hemati te, L imon i te .
oxalate Humb oldtine .
ox ides t h ite, Hemati te,Limon ite
,Magnet ite ,
Marti te .
= V iv ian i te .
s i l icate I lva i te.
Spath ic, syn. S ideri te .
sulphate Melan teri te.
sulph ide = Pyri te, Pyrrhoti te,Marcasi te.
Wolfram i te.
syn .Magnetite.
qzar. Hematite .
var . Hemati te .
syn. Menaccan i te.
Pyri te .
Magnetic , syn . Py rrhoti te .
Wh i te, syn . Marcasi te.
Iron sand, 134 .
Ironstone , Clay ,Iseri te, 1 35 .
Jade[Jameson i te] , 136 .
Jasper,137
K alin i t e , 138
Kammereri te 1 39
K a oli n i t e . 140
K e rm es i t e , 141 .
L a b ra d o r i t e , 142
L a u nlo n t i t e , 143
L a z uli t e , 1 44
L ea d . Native,145
carb onate Ceruss i te.
sulph ide Galen i te .
Ledererite syn . Gmel in i te .
Lederi te 93m. Ti tan i te .
L ep id om ela n e , 146 .
Lign i te, 147 var. M ineral coal .L im o n i t e , 148
HOFFMANN’
8 L IST OF
Logan ite , 149 wm'
. Penn in ite .
[Louisito] , 150
[Macfarlin ite] ,Macle 9gm. Clniaetolite.
M a g n es i t e , 15 1
Magnes ium alumMagnes ium carb onate
s i l icate
var . Pyroxene .
. . syn. Pit tasphalt .
syn. Rhodoch ros i te.
. . vafr . \Vad.
= Mangan ite,Psilome1ane ,Pyrolusi te .
. syn . Rhodoch ros i te.
var . Calci te .
o o o o o o o o o o
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
o o o o o o o
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Cinnab ar.
. var. Thomson i te.
var. iron .
TOT. I 'Iemati te .
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
o o o o o o o o o o o o
o o o o o o0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
s?Jn . Petroleum.
. syn. Asphal tum.
o o o o o o o o o o
0 0 0 0 0 0
“5 Mol y bdi te .
Mo lybden i te .
. sz/n . Moly bdito.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
o o o o o o o o of
var. Asb estus.
war. Asb estus.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 l'aro calc i te ‘
syn . P ickering i te .
Magnes i te.
Aph rodi te ,Chondrodite,Serpen tine , Talc.
sulphate Epsom ite.
Magnetic i ron ore syn . Magnetite.
Magnetic pyri tes syn . Pyrrhoti te .
M a g n e t i t e , 15°
M ala c h i t e , 153
Malacol i te 154
MalthaManganese
-Spar
Manganese, Bog,
ox ide
Di allga n ilc , 155
Manganos ideri teMarb leM a rca s i t e , 156
Martite , 1 5 7Dlela c o n i t e , 158
Flela n t e r i t e , 159
M e n a c ca n i t e , 276
M en egh i n i t e , 160
Mercury sulph ideMesole, 161M esoli t e , 162
Meteoric i ron ,163
M icaceous i ron -
ore 164
M ica. B ioti teChrom iferous, 165LepidomelaneMuscov i tePh logopi teRose-colored
,1 77
M ic ro clin e , 166 .
M ille r i t e , 16 7 .
M in e ralc o al, 168
oil
pi tchres in ,
169
tar, 1 70
M i ub ili t e , 1 71
M ispicke lM olylulen lt e , 1 72
Molyb denum ox idesulph ide
Molyb dic ochreM oly b d i t e , 1 73
M o n a z i t e , 1 74
M o rd e n i t e , 1 75
I'lo re n o s i t e , 1 76
Mountain cork , 35leather, 35
Dlu sc o v i t e , 1 77
Nai l-head-spar, 1 78
7 0 HOFFMANN ’
S LISTOF
S t au r oli t e , 241 var. Opal .Steati te
,242 var. Talc .
Steele ite , 243 . . var. Morden i te.
S tellarite , 244 .
S t i b n i t e , 245 fuar. Amph ibole.
Gt ilb i te , 246
S t r o n t ia n i te , 247
Strontium carb onatesulphate
Sulph a t i t e , 248
S ulp h u r , Native, 249Sulphuric acid Sulphat ite . syn. Chalcoci te .
Sylv a n i t e , 25 0 Argenti te.
Tabular-Spar . . syn. 1Vollaston ite.
Ta c h yli t e , 25 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Tel lurium . Graph ic, . syn . Sy lvan i te.
Ten n a n t i t e , 253 .
Tenori te syn . Me lacon i te.
Te t ra h ed r i t e , 254
Th om so n i t e , 255
Ti t an i t e , 256T i tan ium ox ide Octahedri te, Ruti le.
Tin oxide Cass iteri te .
T i nstone . syn. Cass i terite .
To n rm alin e , 25 7
Travertine, 25 8 var. Calc i te.
Tremo l i te , 259 . Amph ib ole.
REMARKS ON FOREGOING LIST .
1 . ACAD IALITE — The flesh -red,brownish -red
,purpl ish-red
,and yellow i sh-red varieties of
chabaz ite (which have been named Acadialite) are found at Partridge Isl and Swan
Creek and Two Islands (Cumberland in the province of Nova Scotia .
2 . ACM ITE — Forms an important consti tuent of some of the n ephelen e-seyen ites of
Montreal (Hochelaga Co . ) and Beloei l (Rouville in the province of Quebec .
Anal, B . .I . Harrington , Trans . Roy . Soc . Can , V0l. i, see. ii i , p. 8 1 , 1 882 and 1 883 .
3 ACTINOL ITE — A bed of actinolite,mingled w i th an asbesti form serpentine and talc,
occurs in the township of Bol ton (Brome Co ) , and a finely fib rous varie ty, w i thout
admixture,constitutes a bed in St . Francis (Beauce Co ) , province of Quebec .
4 . AGALMATOLITE— Of a greenish-white to olive-green color occurs in layers in anindurated cl ay- sl ate at St . Nicholas (Levi s Co .) of a honey-yel low color , forming a
thin bed in cl ay- sl ate in the parish of St . Franci s (Beauce and of an amber
yellow, W i th chloritic slates , on Lake Memphramagog (Stanstead Co ) , province of
Quebec . Analyses , T. S . Hunt , Geo l . Can , 1 863 , pp . 484, 485 .
5 . AGATE —Many beauti ful varieties are found in the trap regions of Nova Scoti a as on
the shore extending from Sandy Cove to the head of St . Mary ’s Bay (Digby
near Cape Blomidon ,in l arge blocks (King
’s and fine mo ss agates are met w ith
near Cape Split and at Scot ’s Bay (King’s also at Two I slands (Cumberland
Tripol i te, 131Tu rg i t e , 260
Ulex i t e , 26 1
U ra c o n i t e , 262
Ural i te , 263
U r a n in i t e , 264
Uran ium ox idesulphate
U ranochre
Valen t i n i t e , 265
Vesu v ia n i t e , 266
V i treous coppers i lver
Vi v ia n i t e , 26 7
W ad , 268
W e r n e r i t e , 269
Wh i te antimonyi ron pyri tes
W ilsonite, 270
[1Vinkworthite] , 271W i t h e r i te , 272
‘Wolf ram i t e , 273
‘Wolla s t o n i t e , 2 74
Ye l low copper ore
Z inc b lendesulph ide
Z i rc o n , 2 75
MINERALS OCCURRING IN CANADA . 7 1
Co ) . Agates are found in abundance in the amygdaloids of Lake Superior, and
sometimes of considerable size and beauty . They abound in rolled masses on thebeaches ofMichipicoten and St . Ignace Isl ands
,at Thunder Bay and el sewhere along
the shore of this l ake— province of Ontario .
6 . ALABASTER— Considerable masses of a very beautiful snow-W hite gypsum or alabaster
are met w ith in the gypsum quarrie s of H il lsborough (Albert Go ) , in the province
of New Brunsw ick .
7 . ALBERTITE— This beautiful mineral has,so far
,only been met w i th in King ’s , Al ber t
and Westmoreland counties— the most important local ity being° 111 the parish of
Hi llsborough (Albert Co .)— in t he province of New Brunsw ick . I t i s not found in
beds , but"
in true cutting° veins,which , although at times coincident w i th the
bedding, are as often oblique or at right angles to it . The chief deposi ts , those of
the Albert mines (in Hil lsborough) , occui° in highly bituminous and 0 11-bearin g
shales s i tuated near or at the base of the Lower Carboni ferous but , at points no t
w i dely separated,veins of the mineral are found penetrating
,for short distances , the
underlying° metamorphic rocks— suppos ed to be of Huronian age— and the overlyingand litt le disturbed beds of the Mi l lstone grit . The maximum thickness of the veinas first found near the surface w as twenty-two feet , that of the smaller ve ins only afew inches , w hile the veinl ets were often not thicker than a sheet of paper . It is
estimated that since i ts first discovery (b y John Duffy in 1 849 ) some t ons of
this material have been raised at the Albert mines . The depos it has , however, nowbecome practically exhausted
,and the mine in consequence abandoned . (From
informati on communicated by Prof. L . W . Bailey , of the University of New
Brunsw i ck . )
8 . ALB ITE — Large cleavabl e masses of whi te albite , w i th quartz and mica, const itute agrani te found at the Lake of Three Mountains , on the River Rouge , in the townshipof Clyde (Ott awa and a faintly greyi sh-white almost white albite , exhibiting a
fine bluish opalescence , occurs in large fragments in a coarse pegmatite Vein
composed of quartz,muscovite
,m icrocl ine , W ith occasionally black tourmalin e ,
garnet,etc .
— cut t ing a greyish garnetiferous gneiss in the township of Vi lleneuve ,also in Ottawa county
,province of Quebec . See also note to Peristerite .
9 . ALLAN ITE— Small crystal s of this mineral“ were found , by D 1'. T. S . Hunt , in a fel
spathic rock near Bay St . Paul (Ch arlevoix Co ) , and in a rock composed of labradorite and hypersthene from Lake St . John (Chicoutimi Co ) , province of Quebec .
Also occurs (Prof. E . .I . Chapman , Can . Journ ,new seri es
, v ol. ix , p . in
the form of a narrow vein in granitoid strata at Holl ow Lake , the head waters of the
South Muskoka,in the province of Ontario .
1 0 . ALMANDITE— The red garnet from the Stickeen and Skeena R ivers , as also many of
the other red varietie s al luded to under Garnet,” w il l
,most probably, be found to
be referable to this variety .
1 1 . ALUN ITE— A massive,fin e granular, light reddish colored alunite , has been met w ith
— associ ated w ith a greyish translucent quartz and specular iron— at New Ireland
Road , parish of Alma (Albert in the province of New Brunsw i ck .
12 . ALUNOGEN— Has been found , in the form of a crust of from 5 to 5 5 cm . thick , on
7 2 HOFFMANN ’
S LISTOF
an old heap of sh ale at the Sco tia mine , Springhil l coal -field, Cumberland Co ,
province of Nova Sco tia . Anal,F . D . Adams
,Rep . Geol . Can ,
1 878 -79 , p . 8 H .
"
AMA Z ON -STONE— Occurs abundantly, and of good color , in the township of Sebastopol
(Renfrew Co ) , in the province of Ontario . I t has also been found in the pegmatite
vein , referred t o under“ Albi te
,i n the township o f Vi l leneuve , an d i s aga in m et
w i th in the townsh ips ofWakefield and Hul l (Ottawa Co ) , province of Quebec .
AMETHYST— Often of great beauty , i s found at many places on the shores of Cumber
land , King’s , Annapol is and Digby counties , NovaScotia . The best l ocal itie s are
Cape Sharp and Partridge Island (Cumberland Co ) , Cape Blomidon (King’s Co ) ,
and Digby Neck (Digby Co ) . F ine specimens occur in‘ veins around Thunder Bay
— more especial ly at Amethyst Harbor, and at the mouth of McKen z ie’
s River and
at other points on the north shore of Lake Superior , province of Ontario.
AMPI—I I BOLE— See under Actinol ite,
”Asbestus
,
”Hornblende ,
” Nephri te,
Pargasite ,” “ Tremol ite .
ANALCITE— Fine specimens of this mineral are found at Cape d’
Or, Swan Creek , and
Two I slands (Cumberland al so at Cape Blomidon (King's Co ) , i n the province of
Nova Scotia . I t has been observed, in associ ation wi th natroli te , in some of thedykes cutting the Trenton l imestone at the reservoir extens ion
,Montreal (Hoche !aga
Co ) , province of Quebec . Also occurs in th e amygdaloidal traps of the nor th shore
of Lake Superior , province of Ontario . Anal , B. .I . Harrington , Rep . Geol . Can ,
1 877 -78 , p. 45 G .
ANDALU SITE — Occul‘s i n pale fiesh - red colored crystals in a fine g rained micaceousschi st at Moore ’s M i ll s (Charlotte Co ) , province of New Brunswi ck . Al so found , in
somewhat micaceous argilli tes,on Lake S t . Franci s (Beauce Co ) , i n the province o f
Quebec . See also note to Chiastoli te .
”
ANDE SITE — Occurs in large striated cleavabl e masses of a reddish color, w ith hypers
thene and i lmenite,constituting a rock at Chateau Ri cher (Montmorency Co ) ,
province ofQuebec . Analyses,T. S . Hunt
, G‘
reol. Can ,1 863 , p . 478 .
ANDRAD ITE — I S found in pale yel low i sh,honey-yel low
,and brownish -yellow colored
crystal s , imbedded in chalcopyrite and in yellowi sh-green colored masse s , in
associ ation w i th whi te fib rous tremol i te and dolomite,at the Mal aspina copper-mine ,
north-east s ide ofTexada Isl and,province of British Columbia .
ANHYDRITE — Is met w i th in considerabl e quanti ties,constituting beds
,i n the gypsum
deposits of Nova Scotia and New Brunsw ick .
AN IM IK ITE — HUNTIL ITE— MACFARLI N ITE . Th e mineral s thus designated occur at theSi lver I slet mine , Lake Supe rior, province of Ontario . The two first named were
described by Dr . H . Wurtz (Eng . Min . Journ .,xxvii
, pp. 5 5 and 1 24, the last by
T. Macfarlane (Can . Nat,2 se1 463 , t he results ofwhose investigations
of the foregoing, are g iven 1 11 theTrans.Amer . Inst . Min . Eng ,
viii,236 , 1 880 . [The true
nature of the individual minerals presen t i n the Si l ver Islet ores i s s ti l l to be determined , but there i s probably present a si lver arsen ide (Huntilite ) , and perhaps also a
si lver antimonide (animiki te) all ied to dyscrasite— (Dana , Min ,App . i ii
, p. 7 1 ,
ANKERITE— This i s On e of the mos t plenti ful and characteristic of the mineral s fillingthe numerous fissure veins occurring
° at the bas e of the southern slope of t he
7 4 HOFFMANN ’
S L ISTOF
crystals , w ith rounded angle s , together w i th grains of purple fluorite , and crystals of
black spine] , imbedded in a yel low i sh crystall ine l imes tone , in th e township of Ross
(Renfrew On t ) ; and crystal s of blue apati te and quar tz are imbedded in a
coarsely cleavable , sky-blue calcite at the Calume t Fal l s in the township of Litchfield
(Pon tiac Cc .
, Que ) . Smal l hexagonal prisms , sometimes an inch in length and
one or two l ines i n diameter, tran sparen t , of a pink or purple color, w ith surfaces
often dull , and angles rounded , occur, in associ ation w i th crystals of augite, in an
intrus ive mass of fine grained , grey dol erite at St . Roch , on the Achigan River,L
’
Assompt ion Co . Que . Anal, T. S . Hunt , Rep. Geol . Can ,
1 863 -66 , p . 20 3 . On
the composition of Can adian apat ites, G . C. Hofi’
mann ,Rep . Geol . Can , 1 877-78
pp . 1 - 14 H .
APHROD ITE — Is found filling fissures in the mass ive pyrallolite of the township of
Grenvill e (Argenteui l in the province of Quebec . Anal, T. S . Hunt , Geol .
Can , 1 863 , p. 473 .
APOPHYLLITE— Green and white crystals , aggregated in pl ates or in square pri sms ,occur at Two I slands and Cape d
’
Or (Cumberland Co ) , Blomidon (King’s and
Margaretvil le (Annapol i s i n the prov ince of Nova Scotia . Also,in fol iated
masses 0 1° pl ates , often o f a red color, in associ ation wi th calcite , on Prince’s Locat ion ,
Spar Isl and , Lake Superior, province of Ontario .
ARGENTITE — Occurs , w i th native si lver , chalcocite , sphalerite , etc .,in a vein of cal ci te
at Prince ’s mine ; w ith native silver, in a ve in of barite , celestite and calci te , on
Jarvi s Island ; w i th nat i ve si lver, sphaleri te , and a l ittle galen ite and pyrite , in avein of barite and calci te on McKellar
’
s Island ; and with sphalerite , pyri te , niccol ite ,e tc .
,in a vein stone consisting of calc-spar, bitter - spar and quartz , on Si lver I slet,
Lake Superior . W ith native si lver, in a gangue of calci te , at the Duncan mine— alsoat the Rabbi t Mountain , Porcupine , Beaver and other mines in the district of
Thunder Bay (Lake Superior) , province of Ontario .
ARQU ER ITE— I S found w i th alluvial gold upon V i tal and Si lver Creeks , Omen ica
District,province of British Columbia . Anal
,II . G . Hanks
,Dana
,Min .
,App . i i i
, p .
4,1 882 .
ARRAGON ITE — I S met w ith,in the form of acicul ar crystals
,varying in size from
microscopic minutene ss to an inch or more in leng th , l in ing fissures or cavities in the
ankerite,or impl anted upon bari te or calci te , in the ankeri te deposits of Londonderry
(Colchester Co ) , province of Nova Scoti a . Has been observed forming stal actites and
del icate fib rous masses in a calcareous rock in the township of Tring° (Beauce Co ) ,province of Quebec— and sparingly amongst the Lake Superior traps
, province of
Ontario .
ARSEN IC. NATIVE ,— I s found . in veins , seven miles up Watson Creek , west side of
Fraser River, twenty-fiv e miles above Lytton , province of Bri t i sh Columbia . Ann .
Rep . Ge ol . Can , v ol. i i , p. 9 T,1 886 .
ARSENOPYRITE— I S of exceedingly common occurrence in the gold-bearing quartz
bands of Nova Scotia . I s found, according to Dr . Hunt , well crystal lized , w ith galena,in a quartz vein on the Chaudiere in St . Franci s (Beauce Co ) ; and stil l more
abundantly i n small crystal s , in association wi th galena , in a l arge vein o f quartz on
Moulton Hi l l, near Lennoxvil l e (Sherbrooke province of Quebec . Occurs in
MINERALS OCCURRING IN CANAD A .
l arge quantities in quartzose veins in the township of Marmora (Hastings Co ) , and it
i s also met w i th in the township ofTudor, in the same county. province of On tairo .
ASBESTUS— A more or less del icately fib rous variety of hornblende has been met w ith
in the townships of Templeton and Buckingh am (Ottawa Co ) , province of Quebec .
In the l atter township,moun tain cork was found in quant i ty and in masses of
cons iderable s i z e at the Emerald phosphate mine . Mountain leather has also been
met w i th in thi s township as well as at the Beaver mine in the township of O’
Connor,
Dist rict ofThunder Bay,in the province of Ontar io . Thefib rous variety of serpentine ,
which consti tutes alargeproport ion of what i s known in commerce as asb estus , occurs
in quantity in the E astern Townships o f the province of Quebec .
— See under
Chrysotile .
ASPHALTUM— Occurs in the Vicinity of OilCreek , in the southern part of the townshipof Enniski llen (Lambton Co ) , province of Ontario , where i t forms two layers , of a
Visc id consistency,known as gum-beds
,occupying
° areas of about an acre , each , in
ex ten t, and having a thickness varying from a few inches to two feet . Another bed
of bitumen , of from two to four inches in thickness , i s met w i th at Petroli a, in the
northern part of the same township . The material of this bed , which is more sol idthan that of those just referred to
,and mixed wi th a good deal of earthy matter, i s
readily separable into thin l ayers , which are soft and flexible . Very extensive
deposit s of a bi tuminous Sand- rock occur for great distances along the banks of the
lower Athabasca River, Nor th-west Terri tory these are described in Rep . Geol . Can ,
1 882-84, part CO , and the resul ts of the examination of the material appear in Rep .
Geo] . Can , 1 880 -8 2 , p . 3 H .
AUG ITE —Well defined crystal s of black augite are found imbedded in the doleri tes of
Montreal (Hochel aga Co ) , Rougemont (Rouvil le andMontarville (Chambly Cc . )Mountains
,in the province of Quebec . Anal
,T. S. Hunt, Geol . Can ,
1 863 , p . 468 .
AX IN ITE— I S said by Dr. Bigsby to have been found , in fine crystals, 1in ing a cavity in
a b ouldei° of primi t ive rock at Hawkesbury (Prescott Co ) , in the province of Ontario .
I t has been'
found in situ. by Dr . R. Bell,in smal l veins in trap
,on the east coast of
Hudson Bay , about one mile and a-half south of the mouth of Li ttle Whale River .
Here it o ccurs , of a purpl i sh-brown color,in association w ith epidote , imbedded in a
matrix of calcite w i th a l ittle quartz .
AZ URITE f—Has, so far, not been met w ith in characteri sti c specimens , but merely as an
incrustation on copper-ores , or in the form of stains and smal l earthy masses in copper
holding° rock . Among the many localities where i t has been observed , may be
mentioned — The Prince of Wales mine , Upton (Bagot and at the Black River
mine— in a drusy calcite,w ith sulphurets of copper, in the form of small crystals
St . Flay ien (Lotbiniere Co ) , province of Quebec . With green carbonate of copper at
Bat ch ewanung° Bay and Prince’s mine
,Lake Superior , provin ce of Ontario .
BAR ITE— Occurs, sometimes in very beauti ful crystal l ine masses , in numerous irregular
veins or pockets in the sl ate s of the E ast River of the Five Islands (Col chester Co ) ,Nova Scoti a . In a vein cutting Laurentian l imestone, in the township of Hull
(Ottawa Co ) , province o f Quebec— and the follow ing locali t ies in the province ofOntario , v iz , th e townships of Bathurst and North Burges s (Lanark McNab
(Renfrew Co . ) Dummer aud Galway (Peterborough and Summervil le (Vi ctoria
7 6 HOFFMANN ’
S L ISTOF
Co ) , also - consti tuting large veins 0 11 .Tarvi s, McKellar
’
s and Pie I sl ands , LakeSuperior . Red crystals associated w ith purple fluorite are found 0 11 Iron Isl and , Lake
Nipi ssing and isol ated pale reddish -yel low crys tal s have been found by Prof.Chapman (Can . Journ .
,Nov .
,1 885 ) in veins , in the township of Neeb ing,
near FortW il l i am , Thunder Bay , Lake Superior, and subsequen tly in other mineral veins inthat region .
BERTHIER ITE— Is mentioned (Dana, Minn , p . 86 ) as occurring near Fredericton ,
provin ce of New Brunsw ick . Prof. Bailey thinks the local ity referred to wouldmost probably be the antimony min e in the pari sh of Prince “filliam ,
abou t twentyfiv e miles from Fredericton (York Co .
, NB . )BE RYL— Crystal s of thi s mineral
,having a diameter of three inches and more
,and a
length of from twel ve to fift een inches,have been met w i th
,by Abbe J . C. K.
Lafiamme, in the township of Jonquiere (Chicoutimi Co ) , and i t has also been found
in the township of Brassard (Berthier Co ) , province of Quebec .
BIOTITE— A dark bottle-green mica from Moore ’s sl ide (Roche-Fendue channel ) on the
Ottawa River , has been referred to this specie s .
B ISMUTH . NATIVE ,— Was recognized by Prof. Chapman in some rol led pieces of quartz
from near Echo Lake , on the north-W est shore of Lake Huron ; and agreeably w ith
the observations of Dr . Hunt , i t al so occurs , in traces , in a vein stone in the township
ofTudor (Hastings Co ) , province of Ontario .
B ISMUTHIN ITE— Has been met w ith,in small lain ellar and sub -fib rous masses , in a
quartz vein at Hil l’s mine , in the rear of Tudor townsh ip , Hastings county , provinceof Ontari o .
B ISMUT ITE — Has been recognized , by Dr . Hunt , as occurring in a quartz vein at Hi ll’s
mine , in the rear of the township ofTudor , Hastings county , province of Ontario .
B ITUM INOU S COAL— Of the Carboni ferous format ion occurs in the provinces of NewBrunsw ick and Nova Scoti a . In the former
,though covering a large surface area,
more than two-thirds of the enti re extent of the province , the Carboniferous or coalbearing° rocks have afforded as yet but l i ttle promise of large or valuable deposits ,and w i th the exception of the beds at Grand Lake in Queen ’s county
,which are about
two feet in thickness , no stratum of bituminous coal , sufficien tly large or pure to be
profitably worked , has as yet been discovered . In °
[ h e province of Nova Scotia there
are three important coal bas ins, v iz . , those of Cape Breton , Pictou , and Cumberland
counties— the first mentioned occupying° an area of at least 1 90 square miles , w ith a
thickness of not less than feet. o f the Carboniferous strata ; the second occupies
an area of only some 22 square miles,bu t several of the coal seams are of extraordinary
thickness the area of the Cumberland field i s l ikewi s e small , but includes several
good coal seams . Goal i s not found in the provinces of Quebec and Ontario ; the
black combustible coal-like matter referred to under Anthraxoli te ,” i s however met
w i th in small quantity at various local i t ies in both these provinces . In the Northwest Territory in the Rocky Mountains , and in the adj acent foot-hil ls , there areexten sive depos its of a b itumenous coalwhich
,al though of Cretaceous age. i s in all
re spects— physical character and chemic al composi t ion— undist inguishable from coal
of the Carboni ferous , and the same may be said of the coal of the extensive and
important depos i ts,also of Cretaceous age , which exi st in various parts of Briti sh
Columbia . For reference to analyses , see under Mineral coal . ”
7 8 HOFFMANN ’
S L ISTOF
the province of Ontario . See also notes to Dog-tooth -spar ," Foetid calcite ,
” Ice
l and- spar,
” Nail-head- spar,” Travertine . For a l ist of mineral s of the Laurentian
l imestones,see Report Ou the Laurentian limestones of North America , by Dr. T.
8 . Hunt,Rep . Geol . Can ,
1 863 -66, p . 18 1 , e t seq .
5 6 . FOETID CALCITE — A milk-white,cleavable
,foetid cal ci te
,forms a l arge bed in the
township of Grenvill e , and is also met w i th in the adj oining townsh ip of Chatham
(Argenteuil Co ) , province of Quebec .
5 7 . C xNCRINITE — Occurs in the nephel ine-syenites o f Montreal (Hochelaga and
Be1 l oei 1 (Rouville prov ince of Quebec . Anal,B . .I . Harrington ,
Trans . Roy . Soc .
Can , v ol1, sec . i ii , p . 8 1 , 1 882 and 1 883 .
5 8 . CANNE L COAL— Occurs at Little Gl ace Bay, Cape Br ,eton province of Nova Scotia.
Anal, H . How , Phil . Mag , 4 se1 ., vol . xxxvii , p . 268 , 1869 .
5 9 . CARNE LIAN— Is found at Blomidon (King’s Cc . ) at Trout Cove (Digby Cc ) , and the
north shore of Granvil le (Ann apolis Co ) , province of Nova Scoti a .
60 . CASSITER ITE — Smal l quantitie s of this mineral , in the form of minute grains , were
found to be associated with the Sperrylite obtained at the Vermill ion mine , in the
township of Denison ,District of Algoma
,province of On tario (H. L . Wel l s , Am .
.Tourn . Sci , 3 ser .
, v ol. xxxvii , p. 68 , Very smal l quantiti es of this mineral ,in the form of minute crystal s, have also been found by Dr. Gen th (priv . com .) in
some tailings from the Battery lead,Malaga gold mining di stri ct , Queen
’s county ,
province of Nova Scotia .
6 1 . CELE STITE — Occurs — in white translucent crystal l in e foli ated masses , which are
sometimes radiated,and often several inches in diameter, in the Black River or
Trenton limestone of Kingston (Frontenac Co ) : in large crystall ized masses , semitransparen t
'
an d o f a bluish or occasional ly , in parts , pale reddish color, in a vein
cutting° Laurentian limestone in the town ship of Lansdown (Leeds in
radi ating fib rous masses , constituting a vein in the Laurentian strata of Bagot
(Renfrew Cc . ) a red variety , in cavities in dolomi te , at the forks of the Credi t, town
ship of Caledon (Peel Cc ) . Other localt ies in th is province (Ontario) are — Owen
Sound , Drummond and Grand Mani touli n Isl ands (Lake Huron ) , etc .
62 . CE NTRALLASSITE — I S found in trap of Triassic age near Black Rock (King’s Co ) , in
the province o f Nova Scoti a . An al .,H. How , Ed. N. Phil . new series , vol . 11 ,
p. 84, 1 859 : Phil . Mag , 5 ser .,vol . 1
, p . 1 28 , 18 76 .
63 . CERUSS ITE— Has hitherto been met w ith only in smal l earthy masses and incrustations ,associated w ith the gal en ite of certain locali ties in British Columbia .
64 . CHABAZ ITE— I s found in large and very perfect crystal s at Swan Creek (Cumberl and
Co ) , M ink Cov e and Sandy Cove , Digby Neck, and Will iams Brook (Digby and
Pinnacl e Isl and (Colchester Cc ) , in the province of Nova Scotia . See al so note to
Acadial i te .
”
65 . CHALCEDONY— I s found in many parts of the trap dis trict of Nova Scot ia, where ,according° t o Dr . How ,
an almost unique blue chalcedony is found on the coast
between Capes Split and Blomidon (King’s and a very fin e milk-white
chalcedony near Trout Cove , Digby Neck (Digby Co ) . It occurs— of an ol ive-green
color,in small veins on Belan ger’s Isl and , lying off the en trance to R i chmond Gulf,
e astern coast of Hudson Bay in thin bands or veins,w ith j asper, on the River
MINERALS OCCURRING IN CANADA . 7 9
Ouel le (Kamouraska Co ) , in th e province of Quebec . In veins in the amygdaloidal
traps of Lake Superio r, province of Ontario and elsewhere in Canada .
CHALCOCITE— Is found , mos t frequently in association w i t h chalcopyri te . o r eh alco
pyri te and borni te , in the townships of Leeds and Halifax (l\11egan t ic Co ) , Brome ,Sutton (Brome Co ) , Shefford, Stukeley (Shefib rd Melbourne , Clevel and , Brompton
(Richmond Acton (Bagot Co ) , and Tingwiek (Arthabaska Cc ) in the provin ceof Quebec— at the Canada West mines on Lake Huron , and Prince 8 l ocation , Lake
Superior , in the province of Ontario .
CHALCOPYRITE— Is w idely distributed throughout many of the Eastern Townships oft he province of Quebec . In some of them it i s occasionally me t w i th unaccompanied
by other ores of copper,but it is more frequently associ ated W ith chalcoci te or bornite ,
or both . The more important l ocal itie s l ie in the townships of Bolton , Brome , Sutton
(Brome Co ) , Leeds , Hal ifax (Megan tic Co ) , Stukeley (Sheflord Ascot (SherbrookeCo ) , Acton (Bagot Cd ) , Cleveland, Melbourne (Richmond Co ) , Ches ter (Arthabaska
Co ) , and Ham (Wolfe Cc ) . Other n oteworthy local i ti es are— the township ofMcKim, and adjoin ing° townships , in the District of Nipi ssing ; the West Canada
mines , Lake Huron , and'
Poin t -aux-Mine s and other places on Lake Superior , in the
province of Ontario .
CHIASTOLITE— Occurs in a fin e grained micaceous schist at Moore ’s Mil l s , Charlotte
county, province of New Brunsw ick and in the somewhat micaceous argill ites onLake St . Franci s in Beauce county
,province of Quebec .
CHLORITE (PENN IN ITE ) —Occurs , most frequently , in admixture w ith other minerals ,forming° beds of chloritic slates as in Bolton (Brome Co ) , Shefiord (Sh efi
'
ord Ascot
(Sherbrooke Co ) , Cleveland and Melbourne (Richmond and other Eastern
Townships of the province of Quebec . I n some of these townships , however, as for
in stance those of Potton and Bol ton (Brome and Broughton (Beauce beds o f
pure compact chlorite are met w ith , and occasionally , as in Cleveland (Richmond
Co ) , the chlori tic sl ate s are traversed by thin , wel l defined veins , which are filled
w ith pure scaly chlorite . Anal, T. S. Hunt, Geol . Can , 1 863 , p . 6 07 ,
CHLOR ITOID— Is o f common occurren ce in the micaceous schi sts of the Eastern
Townships, in which it i s di sseminated in small grains and crystal line plates , or
small lamel lar and spherical masses . It is thus found in the townsh ips of Leeds
(Megantic Co ) , Brome and Sutton (Brome Co ) , in the province of Quebec . Anal,T.
S . Hunt , Geol . Can , 1 863 , p . 498 .
CHONDRODITE— I s often met w i th in the crystal line limestone s of the Laurentian
series . It i s found , in grains , in the limestones of St . .I éréme (Terrebonne Co . ) in a
magnesian limestone in Aldfield (Pontiac province of Quebec— and w i th small
scales of graphite , in a white crystal l ine limestone near Newborough in North Crosby ,also in South Cro sby (Leeds Co ) , in the province of On tario , and elsewhere in theseprovinces .
CHROMIFEROUS GARNET— A very beauti ful emerald-green chromiferous garnet occurs ,in granularmasses and minute crystals , thickly disseminated through a vein of whi tecleavable cal ci te , on th e eas t side of Brompton Lake , in the township of Orford (Sherbrooke Co ) , and a very simil ar garne t i s found,
associ ated w ith apatite , pyroxene ,calc i te , orthoclase , tourmaline and idocrase , in the township of Wakefield (Ottawa
8 0 HOFFMANN’
S L ISTOF
province of Quebec . Analyses , T. S . Hunt,Geo] . Can , 1 863 , p. 49 7 : B. J.
Harrington , Can . Nat , 2 ser .
,v ol. ix , p . 30 5 , 1 88 1 .
CHROM ITE — I S found in pockets , scattered through serpentin e , at Mount Albert ,Sh ickshock Range (Gaspe Co ) , and in considerable quan t i ty, in connection w i thserpentine and o ther magnes ian rocks o f the Quebec group , in the townships of
Bolton (Brome Cc ) , Ham and Wolfs town (Wo l fe Co ) , and Leeds (Megantic in
the prov ince of Quebec . Analyses,T. S. Hunt , Geol . Can ,
1 863 , p . 5 04.
CHRYSOCOLLA— I s found sparingly amongst some of the copper ores o f Lake Superior,province of Ontari o .
CHRYSOLITE — Occurs in the form of grains,and occasional ly as 111-defin ed crystals , i n
a dark grey doleri te , near South Lake (Antigonish Co ) , prov ince of Nova Scoti a. In
wel l -defined green crystals,and olive or amber-colored imperfect crystals
,and small
honey-yell ow grains , in the eruptive rocks of Rougemont (Rouvill e Co ) , Montarvi lle
(Chambly Co ) , and Montreal (Ho chelaga Co .) in red angular masses in a dyke at
St . Anne ’s (Jacque s Car tier and of a pale yel low i sh to greyish-green color,form
ing rock masses at Mount Albert , Shickshock Range (Gaspe Co ) , in the province o f
Quebec . Olivine has also been detected in several of the eruptive rocks of Bri t i shColumbia . Analyse s
, T. S . Hunt , Ge‘ol . Can , 1 863 , p . 464 : B . .I . Harrington , Rep .
Geol . Can , 1 87 7-78 , p. 39 G .
CHRYSOTILE — Often consti tutes seams , sometimes nearly seven inches thick , in theserpentin e of the Eastern Townships of the province of Quebec the more importantlocal ities compri sing— the townships of Thetford and Coleraine (Megantic Co ) ,Shipton and Melbourne (Richmond Co ) , Ham (Wolfe Broughton (Beauce Co ) ,and Bolton in Brome county . Anal, E . G . Smith , Am . Journ . Sci , 3 ser .
, v ol. xxix ,
p . 3 2, 1 885 .
CINNABAR— Occurs , in situ,sparsely disseminated through a fine crystall ine granular
limestone , at the Ebenezer mine , Hector (Kicking° Horse) Pass , Rocky Moun tains ,
Bri tish Columbia .
CLAY IRONSTONE— Is found everywhere in the Coal Measures o f Pi ctou county, Nova
Scoti a, in irre 0°
ular beds from fiv e to forty inches thick . Occurs in layers and nodules , in
connection w i th a small seam of coal at Gaspe, province of Quebec . Is w idely dis
tributed in the North-west Territory , in some local it ies in considerable abundan ce ,in the form of nodules an d nodular sheets . Anal yses, G . C. Hofi
‘
man n , Rep . Geo] .
Can ,1 880 8— 1 2 H .
COCCOL ITE — A greenish -grey granular pyroxene or coccolite , occurs in the townsh ip
of Port land , and the same mineral , of a pale green color, is -met w ith in the, in part ,adjoining township of Buckingham (Ottawa province of Quebec .
CooKElTE— A micaceous mineral having al l the blow-pipe characters o i, and which
may prove to be iden t ical w ith , Cookeite was found sparsely disseminated through aspecimen of galeni te from Otter Tai l Creek , province of Bri tish Columbia . Ann .
Rep . Geol . Can , v ol. i i , p . 1 0 T. , 1 886 [where , however, the local ity i s erroneously
given— read as above] .
COPPER . NATIVE ,— I s found
,in the form of grains and irregular shaped masses , occa
sion ally several pounds in weight, in veins and fissures t raversing the trap at Cape
d’
Or and Spencer’s Island (Cumberland Co ) , Five Islands (Colchester Margaret
8 2 HOFFMANN ’
S L ISTOF
Shun iah ) mines (at the last named , Professor Chapman observed , in a vug , a bunch
of crystal s , many of which measured upwards of eighteen inches in length ) ,ThunderBay , Lake Superior, province of Ontario . Good specimen s o f dog- tooth-spar are al so
found at Teny Cape (Hants Co ) , Black Rock (King’s Co ) , Partridge Island and Two
I slands (Cumberl and Co ) , e tc ., in the province of Nova Scotia .
DOLOM ITE— I h the form of rock-masses,i s of very common occurrence in Canada .
Besides forming great beds among the Laurentian l imestones , do lomites make up the
chief part of the so -cal led Calciferous formation , and are developed on a great scale in
its geol ogical equivalent,the Quebec group . The se -cal led l imestones of the whole
of the M iddle and Upper Silurian serie s in Ontario are , w i th few exceptions , dolo
mites , in cluding the Cl inton , Niagara , Guelph , and Onondaga formations . See also
note to Pearl -spar .DOMEYK ITE — Has been found
,in admixture w i th niccol ite , in a vein cutting a b ed of
amygdaloid on Michipicoten Island , Lake Superior , prov in ce o f Ontario . Analyses ,T. S . Hunt , Geo] . Can , 1 863 , p . 5 06 .
E LAEOL I ’I
‘E— I S mentioned
,by Dr . Hunt , as occurring in orange-red grains , w ith black
hornblende , i n a white felspathic rock , which is found in boulders on Pic Island in
Lake Superior, province of Ontario .
EPIDOTE— Characterizes l arge portion s of the metamorphic rocks of the pro v ince of
Quebec,in many parts of which occur beds which are entirely made up of quartz
and epidote ; sometimes in distinct grains, at o ther times forming a homogeneous ,general ly pale green
,very tough and sonorous rock . Characteristi c specimens of this
rock are met w i th in the township of Melbourne (Richmond but beds of the
s ame occur in numerous localit ies in this section of the province . This mineral hasbeen met w i th in th e crystall ine form
,in a concretion ary epidotic rock , at St . Joseph
(Beauce province of Quebec also i n some of the amygdalo idal traps and green
stones o f Lake Superior— as at Mamain se,where crystal s of the same are found
implanted upon mesol ite— in the province of Ontario .
oEPI STI LBITE —I S found w i th sti lbite on ledges of trap at Margaretvil le, about sevenmiles east of Port George , Annapoli s coun ty , province ofNova Scoti a Analyses , H.
How , Am . Journ . Sci , 2 ser .
,vol . xxvi , p . 33 , 1 8 58 .
EPSOM ITE— Occurs at the Cl ifton gypsum quarry,W indsor
,Hants county, province of
Nova Scoti a . As an efiiorescen ce on the black shales o f the Utica formation nearMontre al (Hochel aga and upon the bl ack shales of Queb ec (Quebec pro
Vince of Quebec . As an efliorescen ce on a serpentine rock n ear the i ron-ore bed of
Crow Lake in Marmora (Hastings Co ) , and as a cryst al l ine incrust ation upon shel
tered surface s of the dolomites at various poin ts along° thei r outcrop from Niagara
Fal l s to Lake Huron , and near Niagara is said to be found , w i th gypsum , in geodes
in the rock —province o f Ontario . Al so occurs , in association w i th mirabil i te , as an
incrustation upon the cl iffs of shale at Fort St . John , Peace River, British Columbia .
Anal . , Gr. 0 . Hoffmann , Rep . Geol . Can ,1 875 -76 , p . 42 1 .
ERYTHR ITE— I S found as a rose -red incrustation on calcareous spar, at Prince’s mine
on Lake Superior , province ofOntario .
ESSON ITE— Occurs , in smal l crystals , w ith crystals of idocrase , pyroxene and zircon ,i n calci te at Grenville (Argenteu il Co ) , and both massive and crystal lized , in the
townships of Por tland and Wakefield (Ottawa in the province of Quebec .
1 00 .
1 0 1 .
1 02 .
103 .
1 04 .
10 5 .
MINERALS OCCURRING IN CANADA . 8 8
FAHLUN ITE— Is mentioned , by Prof. How ,as occurring
° in granite on the road
between Windsor and Chester, Hants county, province of Nova Sco tia .
FASSAITE— A black , occasion all y blackish-green,pyroxene from the township of
Templeton (Ottawa Co ) , province of Quebec , would seem,from i ts chemical composi
t ion and other characters , t o be referable to this variety . Anal .,B . J . Harrington
,
Rep . Geol . Can , 1 877-78 , p. 1 7 G .
FLUOR ITE— Occurs , in green octahedral crystal s , w i th barite , l in ing° fissures i n per
phyry, on an island three miles eas t o f Gravel ly Point in green cubes , associa tedw ith quartz and calc ite
,at Prince ’s mine of a purple color
,filling veins in syen ite ,
0 11 the main land oppos ite Pic Island , and al so , w i th calc ite , in amygdaloid three
miles east of Cape Gargantua in cubes two or more inches in diameter,associated
w ith l arge crystals of ame thyst,in vugs in the large i rregular veins in the syenite at
the mouth of McKen z ie’
s River , Thunder Bay ; in veins near Black Bay and Terrace Bay ; on Fluor Island in Neepigon Bay , and elsewhere on Lake Superior,province o f Ontario .
FRE IBERGITE— An argenti ferous tetrahedrite , associated w i th some galenite andsphalerite
,in a gangue of quartz , is found at Cherry Creek , thirty- three miles east of
the head of Okanagon Lake , province of British Columbia .
GALEN ITE— Is very w idely distributed throughou t Canada : both in in ters tratifiedmasses
,veins
,and smal l crystall ine aggregat ion s , etc ., scattered through rocks of
Various kinds . Some of the most noteworthy local ities of its occurrence are situate— in the counties of Carleton , Lanark , Leeds , Frontenac , Hastings , and Peterborough ,
and on the north shore of Lake Superior, as at Prince’s M ine ,Thunder Cape , and Poin t
des Mines , e tc .,in the province of Ontario . E xtensive deposits of galenite exi st in
the Illecillewaet district,— at Mount Stephen (Tunnel Mountain ) , and at Ho t Springs
and Hendryx Camp ’s, Koo tan ie Lake , etc .
,in the province of British Co lumbia. F ine
specimens consisting of more or less perfect octahedra,the axes of some of which
were hy e centime tres in length , have been found , in t ugs, at the Si lver I sle t min e
Lake Superior .
GARNET— I S very frequently met w ith ,and in nearly al l parts of the Dominion .
The fol lowing comprise some o f the many local i t ies of i ts occurrence . In the pro
Vince of Quebec : small beds of granular red garnet occur at St . .I éréme (Terrebonne
Co ) , in Rawdon (Mon tcalm Co ) , and at the north-eas t si de of Bay St . Paul (Charle
Voix Co .) white l ime-alumina garnet , mixed w i th serpen t ine , i s met w ith at Orford ,
(Sherbrooke and an apparently homogeneous rock composed in great part of a
similar varie ty,occurs at St . Francis (Beauce Co .) red and yellowi sh-red variet ie s
are me t w ith in the townships of Chatham and Grenville (Argenteui l Co .) a rose
red iron -alumina garnet i s found disseminated in small masses through gneis s on
the Rouge Riv er '
and vicin ity in th e township of Clyde , and dark red garne t in thetownships of V i l leneuve and Templeton , and large and handsome crystal s of colorless
,light brownish , pale olive -green ,
and brownish-yel low garnet in the township
of Wakefield, Ottawa county . Magnificen t crystals of red garnet occur, imbedded
in micaceous schist , on the Skeena and St ickeen ri vers , and a massive brownish-redmanganesi an l ime- iron garnet i s found near Foster’s Bar
,Fraser River— in the province
of Briti sh Columbia . Analyses , T. S . Hunt,Geol . Can . , 1 86 3 , 496 . See further under
8 4 HOFFMANN ’
S L ISTOF
Almandite ,”
Andradite ,”
Chromiferous garn et , E ssonite ,”
Grossularite ,
Spes sarti te .
1 0 6 . GENTHITE— A mineral apparently identical w i th Genthite has been met w ith in a
vein 0 11 Michipicoten Isl and , Lake Superior, province of Ontario . An aylses, T. S .
Hunt,Geol . Can ,
1 863 , pp. 5 06 , 5 0 7 .
1 0 7 . GIESECK ITE — Dysyntribite occurs at Arisaig pier and Frenchman’s Barn in Antigonish
county,province of Nova Scotia .
1 0 8 . GLAUCON ITE— Occurs in a sandstone o f the Lauzon iormat ion , near Point Levi s
(Levis and on the Isl and of Orleans , in the provin ce o f Quebec . Analyse s ,T. S. Hunt, Geol . Can ,
1863 , p. 487 .
1 09 . GMELIN ITE— Has been found at Cape Blomidon (King’s and Two Isl ands and
F ive Isl ands (Colchester Co ) , in the province of Nova Scoti a . Analyses , A . A . Hayes,Am . Journ . Sci . , v ol. xxv p . 78 , 1 834 ; O. C. Marsh , ib . ,
2 ser . , v ol. xl iv, p. 362 , 1 867 ;
A . B. Howe , ib .
, 3 ser . , Vol. x i i , p. 270 , 1 876 .
1 10 . GOLD— The most important auriferous regions of Canada are si tuated in the prov inces of Bri t i sh Columbia, Quebec , and Nova Scotia the first on the Pacific coast ,the l ast forming the extreme eastern portion of the Dominion . Gold i s , however,also found in some of the rivers of the North-wes t Territory— in the Lake of the
Woods and Lake Superior region ,and in the district north o f Lake Ontario, in the
province of Ontario ,— and i s reported to have been found in a few local i t ies in theprovince of New Brunsw i ck . In British Columbia mining has been almost entirely
confined to the placer deposits . In the vicinity of the Lake of the Woods and of Lake
Superior gold occurs in ve ins associated w i th si lver and o ther ores . In the counties
of Madoc and Marmora (province of Ontario) , i n auriferous mispi ckel . In the pro
vince of Quebec the placer deposi ts of the Chaudiere region and o f the township of
Ditton are the only ones in which much work has as yet been attempted . Th e goldof Nova Scoti a i s found in quar t z , the al luvi al gold so far discovered being quite
incon siderable in quantity .
1 1 1 . GO'
THITE— I s mentioned by_Dr . Harrington , as occurring , in association w ith black
ox ide of mangane se and calc ite,i n veins cutting° the Lower Carboniferous l imestones
at Black Rock , near the mouth of the Shubenacadie , province of Nova Sco t ia.
1 12 . GRAPHITE— This mineral i s met w ith in most of the strat ified rocks of the Laurentian system not only the limestones
,but the gneiss
,pyroxenite
,quartz ite and
pyrallolit e beds s ometimes hold dis seminated graph ite . It is also met w ith in theiron ores of the series , as in the township of Hull (Ottawa Co ) , in the province of
Quebec Apart from its being° met w i th in a disseminated form ,i t occurs in beds or.
seams from a few inches to two or three fee t in thickness . These are often interrupted giving rise to l en ticul ar masses , which are some t imes nearly pure and at
other times mingled w i th carbonate of l ime,pyroxene , and other foreign minerals .
The most important deposits are in the townships of Buckingham and Lochaber
(Ottawa and Grenvil le (Argenteui l Co ) , province of Quebec ; but it i s also
found in the townships of Burgess (Lanark Loughborough and Be'
dford (Fron
ten ac province of Ontario , and , in smal l quantity , in other local iti es in these
provinces . It i s al so met w i th,in a di sseminated. form
,at French Vale and Glendale ,
in the province of Nov a Scotia in the Vicin ity of St. John , province of New Bruns
8 6 HOFFMANN ’
S LISTOF
1 19 . HEMATITE— Important deposits“ of red hematite are met w ith at several local ities in
Pictou and other counties in Nova Scotia . I t occurs,1 11 associ ation W ith specular
iron ore,among the Huron ian strata of the Quaco hil ls
,and more abundantl y in those
of Wes t Beach and Black River, St . John county,province of New Brunsw ick .
Forms an extensi v e bed in the township of McNab (Renfrew Co ) , and is further
found in the townships of Dalhousie and Beckw i th (Lanark Co ) , Palmerston (Frontemae Co ) , Madoc (Hastings Leeds (Leeds Cc ) , etc .
— at Gros Cap,north side “
of
Mi chipicoten Harbor,and other local iti es in the Lakes Superior and Huron region ,
province of Ontari o . See also n otes to “ Micaceous iron ore,”
Specular iron ore ,’
Marti te .
” Mineral associat ions of hematite, B. .I . Harrington , Rep . Geol . Can ,
1 873-74, p. 2 1 2 . Analyses,by various analy sts , ih . , pp . 223-226 , and subsequent
Reports .
1 20 . HEULAND ITE — F in e specimens of this mineral are met w i th at Isle Haute , PartridgeIsl and , and Two Isl ands (Cumberland Cc ) , also at Black Rock , Hal l
’s Harbor,Long
Point , and Cape Blom idon (King’s Co ) , in the province of Nova Scotia .
1 2 1 . HORNBLENDE— Black crystal lized hornblende enters abundantly into the diorites ofYamaska Mountain (Yamaska Co ) , and Mount Johnson ( Ibervil le Co ) , and occurssparingly in the trachytes of Brome (Brome and Sh efl
'
ord (Shefford Co . ) Moun
tains beds of bl ack hornblende,holding garnets
,are associated w ith the serpentines
of Moun t Albert in the Sh ickshock Mountains (GaspeCo ) , and black or greenish
hornblende i s very commonly disseminated through the felspathic rocks of the
Laurentian series,giving rise to syenite and syeniti c gne iss : also forming beds of
hornblendi c rock,as at Lake S t . John (Chicoutimi province of Quebec . Black
or dark green hornblende,i n cleavabl e masses , i s found associ ated w i th the magnetite
of Bathurst and South Sherbrooke townships (Lanark Co ) , prov in ce'
of On tario .
Anal .
,B . .I . Harrington
,Rep . Geol . Can ,
1 873 - 74, p. 20 1 .
1 22 . HORNSTONE OR CHE RT— Occurs , in veins traversing syeni te in th e township of
Grenville (Argenteuil Cc ) , in the province of Quebec ; in great abundance , in nodu
lar masses and thin l ayers , in the Corniferous fo rmation , and occasional ly, in asimilar form
,in the l imestones of the Trenton and Niagara groups ; al so , in layers , in
the lower beds of the silver-bearing rocks ofThunder Bay (the lower division of theUpper 0 opper-bearing
° rocks of Logan ) , Lake Superior, province of Ontario .
1 23 . HOW LITE — Occurs,in the form of nodules which are general ly about the size of
filb erts 0 1° pigeon ’s eggs
,and occasionally
,but rarely
,as much as two inches in
diameter,imbedded in anhydrite and gypsum at Brookville
,and in gypsum at
Winkworth,Newpor t Station , Noel, etc ., in Hants county , province of Nova Scotia .
An alyses , H . How ,Phil . Mag , 4 ser . , v ol. xxxv , p . 32 , 1 868 .
1 24 . HUMBOLDTJN E— Has been observed as a sulphur -yel low incrustation upon the black
schist s at Kettle Poin t in the township of Bosanquet,Lambton county
,province of
Ontario .
1 25 . HURONITE — The Huron ite of Dr . Thompson— an impure or altered form of anorthite
i s found, in situ,
near Sudbury (District . of Nipissing , province of Ontario) , where it
occurs in rounded or somewhat angular -masses , i n a dark green dyke of diabase .
Anal .,B . J . Harrington , Trans . Roy . Soc . Can , v ol. iv, sec . i i i , p. 82 , 1 886 .
1 26 . HYACINTH— Cherry-red,transparent crystals of z ircon
,are mentioned by Dr . Hunt
M INERALS OCCURRING IN CANADA . 8 7
as occurring° in the crystal l ine l imestone of the township of Grenville , Argenteui l
county, province of Quebec .
1 27 . HYPERSTHENE— Occurs , in broad lamellar masses , w ith andesite and ilmenite , const itu t ing
° a rock,at Chateau Richer (Mon tmo rency Cd ) , and in the pari sh of St .
Urbain,near Bay St . Paul (Charlevoix Co ) , in the province o f Quebec . Al so (Paulit )
at Paul Island , Nain coast of Labrador . An al .
, T. S . I Iun t , Geol . Can ,1863 , p . 468 .
1 28 . I CEL .4ND -SPAR— F in e cleavable and tran sparent masses of calci te occur at Harri son ’s
location on St . Ignace Island , Lake Superior , and in the township of Galway (Peter
borough province of Ontario .
129 . ILMEN ITE— Occurs in vast beds or masses in anorthos ite rock in the parish o f St .
Urbain , at Bay St . Paul (Charlevoix Cc ) , and in a similar rock in Chateau Richer
(Montmorency Co ) , and in Rawdon (Montcalm Large deposi ts,associ ated w ith
labradorite rocks,have also been observed near the mouth of Rapid River (Bay of
Seven Islands ) , on the Saguenay River, on the shores o f Lake Kenogami , and i t has
also been met w ith in several o ther locali ties in the province of Quebec . Analyses ,T. S . Hunt , Geol . Can ,
1 863 , p . 5 0 1 , and Rep . Geol . Can , 1 866 -69 , p. 2 60 .
130 . ILVAITE— A substance which , from its composi t ion and physical charac ters , wasregarded as a variety of l ievri te , was found in the form of a boulder, in the Vic in i tyofOtt awa (formerly Bytown ) , Carleton county, province of On tario . Description and
analysi s, T. S. Hunt , Geol . Can , 1 863 , p. 465 .
1 3 1 . INFUSOR IAL EARTH— IS found occupying° the bottoms of lakes in several o f the
coun t ies of the maritime prov inces . The depos its are not unfrequently of considerable depth
,and the earth remarkably pure . Some of the more important local ities
are— Fountain Lake , Amherst (Cumberland Folly Lake (Colchester and
Merigon ish (Pictou Co ) , in the province of Nova Scot ia, and Fi tzgeral d Lake, abou t
seven or eight miles from -St . John (St . John Co ) , Pol let Lake , Mechan i c Settlemen t ,and Pleasant Lake , about s ix miles to the south-west (King
’s Co ) , in the province of
New Brunsw ick . Anal . , G . C. Hofl'
mann , Rep . Geo] . Can ,1 878-79 , p . 4 H .
1 32 . IR IDOSMINE — Occurs , as first observed by Dr . T. S. Hunt , in the form of smal l
hard steel-grey plates,ass ociated w i th the native platinum found in the gold wash~
ings of the Riviere du Loup , Beauce coun ty, province of Quebec.
1 33 . IRON -OCHRE — Extensive deposits of i ron -ochre (var . l imonite) are met w ith innumerous local iti es in the province of Quebec . A remarkable deposit of thi s material
is found in St . Anne (Montmorency and very large beds o f the same occur in
Gap de la Madele ine (Champlain Cc ) , and in Pointe du Lac (S t . Maurice Co) .
Amongst other places , where deposits of more or less importance occur, may be men
t ioned the counti es of Bonaventure , Jol iette , Laval and Vaudreuil . In the province
of Ontario , beds of ochre are met w i th in Walsingham (Norfolk Co ) , Esquesing
(Halton Sydenham (Grey No ttaw asaga (Simcoe and other townships .
Chemical examination of iron-ochres, T. S. Hunt
,Geol . Can , 1 863 , p . 5 1 "
1 34 . IRON SAND— Occurs at St . Mary’s Bay,Digby county
,province of Nova Scotia .
Considerable depos its of the same are met w ith at Moi si e , Portneuf, Bersimis,M ingan , and Natashquan , in Saguenay county , and at Batiscan , in Champl ain
county , and el sewhere in the province of Quebec . I t i s also found on th e shores and
islands of Lakes Superior, Huron , Erie , Ontario , and many of the smal ler l akes in the
8 8
135 .
136 .
1 37 .
1 38 .
139 .
140 .
HOFFMANN’
S Ll.‘TOF
province o f Ontario . Mode of occurrence , examination , and analyses , T. S. Hunt ,Rep . Geol . Can ,
1 8 66 -69, pp. 26 1 -26 9 .
ISE RITE — Constitutes a certain portion of the black magneti c s ands me t w i th at St .
Mary ’s Bay , Digby , county , province o fNo va Sco t ia, on the north shore and gul f ofthe S t . Lawrence , provin ce o f Queb ec , and 0 11 the shores and i sl ands o f Lakes
Superior, Huron ,E rie , and Ontari o , etc .
, in the province of Ontario .
JAME SON ITE— I S stated to occur near Fredericton, New Brunsw ick . Prof. Bailey (of
the Un iversi ty o f New Brunswick ) informs me that should such be the case, it Would
most probably be at the antimony m ine in the parish of Prince Wi ll iam (about
twenty-fiv e miles from Fredericton ) , York county , province of New Brun swick .
JASPE R— A red and purple striped,and red and yel low striped jasper , i s abundant at
St . Mary’s Bay (Digby Co ) , and a red variety i s found on Briar Island , in the same
county , on Partridge I sl and (Cumberl and Co ) , Long Isl and , and at Woodworth’s
Cove (King’s Co ) , in the province Nova Scotia . A blood- red j asper, often finely
clouded , occurs n ear Sherbrooke (Sherbrooke a small bed of dark green" and
reddish-brown jasper,traversed by smal l vein s of white chalcedony , at Ri ver Ouel le
(Kamouraska Co ) , and a dark -red j asper in the township of Hul l (Ottawa Co ) , prov
ince of Quebec . Thi s mineral al so enters largely into the composition of the beauti fulj aspe r conglomerate— con si sting of pebbles o f red and reddish-brown jasper and
smoky quartz,thickly imbedded in a w hite quartzite— which constitutes great beds
on the north shore of Lake Huron , province of Ontario .
KALIN ITE— Is menti oned by Prof. Chapman as occurring in considerable abundance
on the exposed faces of some high b luffs of argil laceous shale 0 11 Slate River , a
tributary of the Kam in istiquia, abou t twelve miles west o f Fort W i l liam , Lake
Superior, province of Ontario .
KAMMERERITE— Is menti oned by Dr . Hunt as occu rring , w i th chromite , in serpen
t in e in the townships of Bo lton (Brome Co ) , and Melbourne (R ichmond in the
province of Quebec .
KAOLIN ITE— Is met w i th i n 1n asses, somet imes hal f an inch thick , in fissures in a
sandstone of the Sil lery formation,just below the Chaudiere Fal ls (Levis Co ) . The
masses have a greenish or yellow i sh-white color and are composed of minute so ft
scales , very unctuous and slightly coherent (Anal . ,T. S . Hun t ,‘
G‘reol. Can , 1 863 ,
Thi s mineral has al so been found i n the form of minute pearly scales o f a yellow ishwhite color, unctuous and plastic , l ining
° cavi ties in a rock in the township of Acton
(Bagot Co ) , l ikew ise in the province of Quebec . Anal . , G . O. Hofl‘
mann , Rep . Geol .
Can .
, 1 874-75 , p . 31 4 .
141 . KERME SITE— Occurs , in small crystal line tufts, w i th native antimony , stibnite , valen
t in ite,and senarmontite
,in Veins traversing° argi ll ite in the township of South Ham
Wol fe county, province of Quebec .
1 42 . LABRADORiTE— Fine examples of this fel spar o ccur in St . Jéréme , Morin— blui sh ,opalescent , cleavable ,— Abercrombie , and Mi lls I sle s (Terrebonne also at Raw
don— as a blui sh-white granular homogeneous ro ck — (Montcalm Co ) , and Chateau
Richer— as a pale bluish or greenish-grey rock,w i th red spots— (Montmorency Co ) ,
in the province o f Quebec . Analyse s, T. S . Hun t , Geol . Can ,
1 863 , p. 478 ; G . C.
Hoffmann , Rep . Geol . Can ,1 874-75 , p. 316 .
9 0
1 5 3 .
1 5 5 .
156 .
1 57 .
1 58 .
1 59 .
1 60 .
1 6 1 .
HOFFMANN ’
S L I .‘TOF
the Vicin ity of G il l ie s Bay , south s ide ofTexada Island , province of British Columbia .
Crystals pseudomorph after pyri te , E . B. Kenrick, An n . Rep . Geol . Can , vol . i i i , p .
5 8 T,I SS7 . Mineral associations of magne t i te , B . J . Harrington , Rep . Geol . Can ,
1 873-74 , p . 1 94 . Analyses , by various analysts , ib .
, pp. 208 -2 1 1 .
MALACHITE — Has,so far
,not been met w i th in charac teristic specimens , but merely
as an incrustat ion on copper ores or in the form of stains and small ear thy masses in
copper-holding° rocks . Of the numerous local ities where i t has been observed may
be mentioned— Spanish River, where some of the quartz Veins carrying chalcocite are
stained throughout w ith green carbonate of copper ; w i th galeni te in a lode wh ichcrosses a long° narrow i sland near the shore at '
l‘hunder Cape, Lake Superior, province
of Ontario . In the form o f li tt le fibrous masse s , with sulphurets of copper, in a drusycalcite at the Black River mine , St . Flav ien ,
Lotbiniere coun ty , provinc e of Quebec .
MALACOLITE (D IOPSID E )— Large tw in -crys tals of white pyroxene,associ ated w i th
cinnamon -colored garnets , are found in druses in a pale greenish pyroxene rock in
the township of Orford (Sherbro'
oke and slender, pale greyish-green co lored
crystal s,sometimes six inches in length , occur imbedded in l imestone at the Calumet
Fall s (Ponti ac Co ) , province of Quebec . Crystals o t'
pale greyish-green pyroxene
often replaced on thei r acute l ateral edges , and occasional ly several inches in di ameter— associated w i th crystal s of dark green pargasite
,and black tourmaline
,are found
at the High Fall s and at the Ragged Chute in the township of Blythfield, Renfrew
county,province of Ontari o . Analyse s , T. S . Hunt
,Ge o] . Can ,
1 863 , pp. 467 , 468 .
MANGAN ITE— Is frequen t ly found associated w ith pyrolusite at Teny Cape (Hants
Co . ) and els ewhere— often c rystalli zed 0 11 that ore . It is abundan t at Wal ton and
Cheverie , and is met w ith at Dougl as and Rawdon , in Hants county , province of
Nova Sco t i a . Also occurs on Amherst I sl and , Magdalen Isl ands , province of Quebec .
MARCASITE — Has been obtained, by Prof. Chapman , from the wal ls of a Vein holding°
galenite and chalcopyrit e,in the township of Neeb ing , a few miles east of the
Kamin is tiqu‘
ia River , north-west shore of Lake Superior, province of Ontario .
MARTITE— Has been met w i th in the Triassi c trap of North Mountain , Digby county ,province of Nova Scotia, and was al so observed by Prof. Chapman in a gneissoid
boulder from Bass Lake,a few miles north of Oril li a, Simcoe county, province o f
Ontari o .
ME LACON ITE — I S recorded by Prof. Chapman as occurring. but in traces only , in
some of the copper deposi ts of the E astern Townships of the province of Quebec .
ME LANTER ITE— Has been found in some heaps of shale and slack coal at the G lace
Bay coal mines,in Cape Breton county , province of Nova Scotia . Also occurs
,in
small quantities,in many of the ores from the mi neral veins of Lake Superior, Lake
Huron , and the Hastings region , province of Ontario .
ME NEGHIN ITE— I S found , apparently in a veins tone of quar tz and dolomi te , in theVicin ity of Marble Lake , in the township of Barrie , Frontenac county, province of
Ontario . Anal . , B . .I . Harrington , Trans . Roy . Soc . Can , v ol. i, see . ii i , p. 79 , 1 882
and 1 883 .
ME SOLE — Occurs , in association w i th mesol ite , in trap rock in the neighborhood o f
Por t George , Annapolis county , province o f Nova Scotia . Anal . , H . How , Ed . N .
Phil . Journ . ,new series , v ol. viii , p . 20 7 , 1 85 8 .
MINERALS OCCURRING IN CANADA . 9 1
1 62 . ME SOLITE— Is found at Port George , and is also said to be very abundant in the
North Mountains,Annapo l i s county
,province o f Nova Sco t ia . Analyses , H . How ,
Am . Journ . Sci . , 2 ser .
, v ol. xxvi , p . 32,1 85 8 .
1 63 . METEORIC IRON - ~A specimen of meteoric iron , w eighing° 370 pounds , was found , in
1 85 4, on the surface of the ground , in the township of Madoc, Has t ings county ,
province o f Ontario . I ts shape is rudely rectangular and flat ten ed on one side . The
surface i s irregularl y pi t ted,and coa ted wi th a film of dark ox ide . The i ron is mal le
able,and highly crystal line in texture . A pol i shed surface when e tched by an acid
exhibi ts the se -called Widmannstadt’
s figures . It contains 6 35 per cent . of n ickel
smallamoun t s o f the phosphide of i ron and nickel (Schreibersi te) are disseminatedthrough it
,and in mak ing a sect ion o f it
,rounded masses of magneti c sulphide of
iron (tro i l ite were met w ith . Resul ts of its examinat ion by Dr. T. S. Hunt , Geol .
Can , 1 86 3 , p. 5 08 .
164 . MICACEOUS IRON -ORE — I S found in veins in the Cob equid Hil l s of Londonderry
(Colcheste r Co .) con sti tutes an important deposit on the west s ide of the E ast Ri ver
(Pic tou is met w ith 0 11 Salmon River, at Melrose , Manchester , and Rom an’s
Valley in Guysborough coun ty , and at St . Peters, Richmond county , province of
Nova Sco t ia. Mingled w i th variable amounts of quar tz and chlorite, i t constitutesbeds of a schistose rock in the townships of St . Armand (Missisquoi Brome and
Su tton (Brome Co . ) occurs in smal l beds in the township of Bristol (Pontiac Co ) , and
is also met with in the townships ofTempleton and Hull (Ottawa Co ) , and elsewherein the province of Quebec . Forms smal l beds inPotsdam sandstone in the townships
of Bastard (Leeds and Ramsay (Lanark Co ) , in the province 0 1 Ontario .
1 65 . CHROM IFEROUS M ICA— I S found in several lo calit i es in the Eastern Townships o f the
province of Quebec , M inute scales of i t occur in th e magnesite o f Sutton (Brome
and is has also been observed,in larger plate s and imperfect crystal s , in a
dolomite from Bol ton,in the same county .
I 66 . M ICROCLINE— I S found in large cleavable masses,in associ ation w ith quartz
,musco
y i te , albite , etc .
,con stituting° a coarse pegmati te vein in the township of Vil leneuve
,
Ottawa county , province of Quebec .
1 67 . M ILLE RITE — I S met w i th in smal l grain s and prismatic crystals , together w ithminute grains and crystal s of a bright green chromi ferous garn et
,disseminated
through a white cleavable calci te , in a vein on the east s ide o f Brompton Lake , in the
township of Orford (Sherbrooke Co ) , province of Quebec .
1 68 . MINERAL COAL— See under Anthracite , Bituminous coal,
”Cannel coal ,
Lignite .
”
Analyses , E . Hartl ey , Rep . Geol . Can , 1866- 69 , pp. 365 -447— T. S . Hunt
,ib .
,1 87 1-72 ,
p . 9 8— 13. J . Harrington , ib .
, 1 872-73 ,pp . 76-8 1 ; ib .
,1 873-74, p. 63 ; ib .
,1 876 -77 , pp .
466 -470— G . O. Hoffmann , ih .
, 1 873 9 0 -93 . and 1 88 - 1 9 1 ; ib .
,1 875 -76 , p . 423
,
ih .
,1 879 -80 , pp. 8 14 H . ; ib .
,1 882-8 4, pp. 1 -44 M . ; Ann . Rep . Geo ] . Can , 1 885 , pp .
1 - 1 1 M . ; ih ., 1 887-88 , pp. 5 -20 T.
1 69 . MINERAL RE SIN— I S not unfrequently very freely disseminated through some of the
coals and lignites of the North-west Terri tory,in the form of small flat tened grains
and nodules of a yel low , yel low i sh-brown or brown c olor . The nodules do not,
general ly speaking, exceed a-quarter of an inch in diameter,but occasionally some 0 1
9 2
1 70 .
17 1 .
172 .
173 .
1 74 .
1 75 .
176 .
1 7 7 .
HOFFMANN ’
S L ISTOF
much larger dimensions are met w ith . On e from a coal seam on the Middle Fork of
the Old Man R iver, Rocky Mountains (North-west Territory) , was found to be alit tle over an inch and a-bal t in diameter
,and three -quarters of an inch thick .
MINE RAL TAR— I s o ften seen exuding from the deposits of bituminous sand rockoccurring al ong the banks of the Athabasca Rive r (see n ote to and in
numerous places on the ground at the foot of either bank,or on terraces lower
than their summits , this tar col lects in pools , or flows in sluggish streams to
l ower l evels . I t also occurs at several local ities on the shore s of the western par t o f
G reat Sl ave Lake at one or two places on Peace River, and elsewhere in thi s par t of
the North-west Territory .
MIRAB ILITE — Occurs at the Cl ifton gypsum quarry, W indsor , Hants county , province
of Nova Scotia ; and,associated with epsomite , as an incrustation upon the cl iffs of
shale at Fort St . John , Peace River, province of British Columbia . An al . , G . C.
Hofl'
man n , Rep . Geol . Can .,1 875 -76 , p . 421 .
MOLYBDEN ITE— Is somewhat w idely distributed , being found , although in most
instances only in small quant iti e s,in nearly all the provinces of the Dominion . Some
of the'
most noteworthy local ities of its occurrence are those in the'
prov in ce of
Quebec , as— near the mouth of the Quetachoo River, in Man icougan Bay , on thenorth shore of the Gul f of the St . Lawrence , where it occurs disseminated in a bed of
quartz six inches thick,in the form of nodules from one to three inches in diameter,
and in flakes which are sometimes twelve inches broad,by one -fourth of an inch
in thi ckness at Harvey Hil l in the township of Leeds (Megantic Co ) , occurring in
smal l rounded masses of fine granular structure,in veins of quartz and bitter-spar ;
and the township of Aldfield (Pontiac where perfec t and very handsome crystal s
have occasionally been found,and others
,less perfect b ut of con siderabl e dimensions ,
are met w ith .
MOLYBDITE— Has been met w ith in the form of an earthy yel low powder on molyb
den ite , in the township of Al leyn (Pontiac Co ) , in the province of Quebec , and in the
township of Ross (Renfrew Co) , i n the province of Ontario .
MONAZ ITE — I n the form of a nodular mass , was found at the Vil leneuve mica mine ,in the township ofVi l leneuve
, Ottawa county , province of Quebec (Ann . Rep . Geol .
Can ,vol . i i , p . 1 1 T, Dr . F . A . Gen th has recen tly made an analys is of a
specimen from this local ity,the results of which are g iven in Am . .Tourn . Sci ,
3 ser .
,
Vol . xxxviii, p . 203 , 1 88 9 .
MORDEN ITE — Occurs imbedded in trap , some two or three miles east of Morden or
French Cross , in King’s county
,province of Nova Scotia . Anal .
,H . How , Journ .
Chem Soc .
,new serie s
, v ol. i i , p . 1 0 0,1 864 .
MORENOSITE— I S mentioned by Dr . Hunt as having been observed , as an efflores
cence of minute acicular greeni sh-W hite crystal s , on an ore of nickel from the Wall ace
mine, Lake Huron , province of Ontario .
MU SCOV ITE— Large plates and crystal s of this species occur in a vein of graphic
grani te on Alumet te Lake , at Montgomery’s clearing
,about fiv e miles ab ove
Pembroke ,Renfrew county, province of Ontari o . It is met w ith,in association w i th
black tourmalin e,on Yeo ’s Island in the Upper St . Maurice (Portneuf and
abundantly,and not unfrequently
,in crystal s of very large dimensions , in a coarse
‘
9 4
1 87 .
1 8 8 .
1 8 9 .
19 0 .
1 9 1 .
1 93 .
HOFFMANN ‘
S LISTOF
co arse crystallin e diorite o ccurring° at the Fournier mine , i n the township of South
Sherbrooke , Lanark county , in the province o f Ontario . Analyses , T. S . Hunt, Geo] .
Can,1 8 63
, p . 477 : B . .I . Harrington , Rep . Geol . Can , 1 873-74 , p . 1 9 8 .
ONTARIOLITE f—A scapol i te from the township of Galway , Peterborough county,
province of Ontario , has been called On tariolite by C. U . Shepard (Am . .I ourn . Sci ,
3 ser . , vol . xx , p . 54, [The value o f an approx imate analysi s given , i s
destroyed by the impurity of the material analyzed ; thus far it has n o claim t o be
considered an independen t speci es— Dana, Min .,App . i i i , p . 1 0 6 ,
OPAL Common opal or semi -opal i s mentioned , by Dr . How ,as occurring° at a few
l ocal i t ies in the province of Nova Sco tia . See also notes to Cacholong ,” Hyali te ”
(under Addenda) , Tripolite .
ORTHOCLASE— This felspar i s very abundant among° the rocks of the Laurentiansystem ,
and well-defined cleavable masses of a reddish ,greyish-white or white color,
may be obtained in many local i t ies,some of the most important (Laurentian ) of which
are— the townships of North Burgess and Elmsley (Lanark Ross , in l arge
crystals,and Sebastopol , also in very large crystals (Renfrew Co ) , in the province
of Ontario— Grenvill e and Chatham (Argenteuil Co ) ,and mos t of the townships of
Ottawa county . Also occurs in vein s cutting altered sl ates in the townships of
Leeds and Inverness (Megan t ic Co ) , and Sutton (Brome Co . ) and in the trachytes
of Chambly , Brome and Shefi’
ord Mountain s , and Mount Royal , province of Quebec .
Analyses , T. S . Hunt,Geol . Can , 1 863 , pp . Gr. C. Hoffmann , Rep . Geol .
Can ,1 876-77 , pp.
PARGASITE — Finely terminated crystals o f dark green pargasite , somet ime s an inch
in di ameter,are foun d implan ted upon , or imbedded in ,
a green ish -white pyroxene ,»at the High Fal l s and at the Ragged Chute
,on the Madawaska in the township o f
Blythfield, Renfrew county, province of Ontario . An al . ,T. S . Hunt,Geol . Can , 1 863 ,
p. 466 .
PE ARL-SPAR— I S abundan t , generally associ ated w i th calcite and gypsum ,in cavities
and geodes in the dolomites of the Niagara formation al so,in association w i th calci te
,
gypsum , barite and quartz , in geodes in the dolomi tes o f the Calciferous formation ,and is found in many of t he me t all iferous Veins of Lake Superior and Lake Huron ,prov ince of Ontario —~and occasional ly in those of the Eastern Townships of theprovince o f Quebec .
PECTOL ITE —Occu1‘
s in radiated fibrous aggregations,the fib res being an inch and a
quarter and less in length , at Cathcart (n ow McKellar’
s) Po in t , Thunder Bay , Lake
Superior , province of Ontario .
PE R ISTERITE— The felspar described by Dr . Thompson under this name (in al lus iont o its beautiful bluei sh opalescence)— a variety of albite , occurs in large cleavable
mas ses,w i th quartz , in veins in the township of Bathurst (Lanark Cc ) , and in a vein
made up of a fin e-grained mixture of reddish-whi te albite and quartz,enclosing large
cleavable masses of the Opalescent albite , on the north shore of Stoney Lake , n ear t hemouth of E elCreek , in Burleigh (Peterborough Co ) , province of Ontario . Analysi s
of a specimen from first -named local ity, T. S . Hunt,Geo l . Can , 1 863 , p . 477 .
194 . PERTHITE— The Perthite of Dr . Thompson (a flesh -red aventurine fel spar,which , as
shown by Breithaupt, consists of in terlaminated albite and orthoclase) occurs in large
1 95 .
19 7 .
198 .
19 9 .
20 0 .
20 1 .
MINBEALS OCCURRING IN CANADA . 9 5
cleavable masses, in pegmatite veins cutting Laurentian strata, in the township of
North Burgess , Lanark coun ty , province of Ontario .
PETALITE — Is here mentioned among‘ the minerals o f Canada
,upon the authority o f
Dr . Bigsby , according° to whom this mineral w as found , w ith tremol i te , in a largeboulder on the lake shore , a t Toronto ,
York coun ty, province o f Ontari o .
PETROLE UM— The mos t important oil springs are in the township o f Enniskillen , in
the western peninsula of Ontario , bu t i t also occurs in other townships o f this sec t ionof the country , as for instance those of Mosa, Oxford and Dereham . It i s found , in
small quan ti ty , on Great Man itoul in Island in Lake Huron ,province of Ontario
also 0 11 the St . John River, and on a branch of Si l ver Brook , and other localities in thecounty of Gaspe, province o f QuebecPHLOGOP ITE — This m ineral is of very common o ccurrence among the. crystal l ine
limestones of the Laurenti an system,through which it is sometimes more or less
abundantly disseminated in the fo rm o f small scales 0 1° crystals . The l argest spec imens are general ly found in beds near to bands of quartzite or pyroxenic gnei ss ,which o ften l imit the crystall ine limestones
,or are in terstrat ified w ith them . It i s
also met w i th imbedded in massive pyroxene rock . Large plates are obtainable i n
the townships of Grenvil le (Argenteuil Buckingham , Templeton , etc . (Ottawain the province of Quebec— and in the townships of North and South Burgess ,
in the province of Ontari o . Anal . , T. S . Hunt , Geol . Can , 1 863 , p . 49 5 .
PI'
CKERINGITE — Occurs as an efflorescen ee on the shale of a shel tered cliff on thebanks of the Meander
,Newport , Hants county , province of Nova Scotia . Anal . , H.
How , Journ . Chem . Soc .
,new series
, v ol. i , p . 20 0 , 1 863 .
PicROLlTE— This variety of serpentine is met w ith in the townships of Bolton
(Brome Ship ton (Richmond Cc ) , etc ,in the province of Quebec . Anal . , T. S .
Hunt , Geol . Can . , 1863 , p . 472 .
PITCHSTONE— A pitchstone-porphyry , and pi tchstone w i th veins of agate occurs on
the eas tern extremity ofMi chipicoten Island , Lake Superio r, province of Ontario .
PLATIN UM . NATIVE,
—The earl iest reference to the findin g of native platinum in Can
ada, i s that by Dr . T. Sterry Hunt (Rep . Geol . Can ,1 85 1 -5 2 , p. who mentions
having observed it , in association w ith iridosm ine , in the gold washings of the
Riv iére du Loup and Riviere des Plantes , Beauce county, in the province of Quebec .
I t has since been met w ith,according to Dr. G . M . Dawson (An n . Rep . Geol . Can ,
vol . i ii,1 887 , Part R) , in association w ith placer gold in several local ities in the pro
vince of British Co lumbia— occurring in notable quantity in the region of the Upper
Similkameen and Tul ameen Rivers , in minute scales where the gold i s fin e butincreasing in coarsenes s to smal l pellets and nuggets in places where coarse goldis found . Coarse grains and pel lets h ave
,so far
,been found only on Gran ite , Cedar
and Slate Creeks , all entering the Tulameen on the south side . He also men t ions itsoccurrence , in fine scales w i th gold , on Tranquille River, Kamloops Lake ; at a placeten miles below Li llooet on the Fraser River , and in nearly al l the tributaries of theYukon River which have been worked . Analyses , G . C. Hoflman n , Trans . Roy . Soc .
Can , vol . V, sec. iii, p. 1 7 , 1 887— and an abridged s tatement of results , An n . Rep .
Geol . Can , v ol. i i , p. 5 T,1 886 .
202 . POLYDYM ITE— What i s regarded as evidently a ferriferous variety of this mineral i s
9 6 HOFFMANN’
S LISTOH
found in association w ith pyrrhot ite , chalcopyrite , some pyri te , etc .
,at the mines of
the Canadian Copper Company , Sudbury, District of Nipissing, province of Ontar io .
An al . , F . W . Cl arke and C. Catlett, Am . Journ . Sci ,
3 ser .,xxxvii
, p . 372 , 1889 .
20 3 . Plt EHN ITE — Occul‘
s ch iefly in the trap rocks of Lake Superior, some times formingdistinct veins , as 0 11 Slate River an affluen t o f the Kamin ist iquia, and w i th imbeddednodules of native copper 0 11 an i sl and near St . Ignace— province of Ontario . I t has
also been found in the Lauren tian o f the t ownship of Templeton (Ottawa in the
province of Quebec . Analyses , E . .I . Chapman , Can . Journ .
, 2 ser .
,vol . x i i ,
1869 B . .I . Harring ton,Rep . Geol . Can ,
1 877-78 , p . 34 G .
204. PSEUDOMORPHOUS QUARTz — Fine specimens of quartz pseudomorph after chabazite ,have been found at Horse- shoe Cove , Cape d
’
Or, and of quar tz pseudomorph after
sti lbi te , at Clarke’s Head (Cumberland Co ) , province of Nova Scotia . Silicified wood
is found in the Vicini ty of the E lbow of the South Saskatchewan R iver, and very
charac teristic specimens of the same at Ros s Coulee , Irvin e , District of As siniboi a ,North-west Territory .
205 . PS ILOMELANE— Occurs , in associ ation w ith pyrolusite , at Douglas , Hants county,province of Nova Sco tia .
20 6 . PYRALLOL ITE — Occurs in beds in the crystall ine l imestone of Grenvill e (Argenteuil
Co ) , and Clarendon (Ponti ac in the province of Quebec— also in the townships
of Ramsay (Lanark Co ) , and Rawdon (Hast ings Co ) , in the province of Ontario .
Analyses , T. S . Hun t, Geol . Can ,
1 863 , p . 47 1— and of a specimen from Portage du
Fort, township of Cl arendon , B . .I . Harrington , Rep . Geo] . Can , 1 8 76 -77 , p. 484.
207 . PYR ITE— I s very w ide ly distributed throughout the Dom inion . The fol lowing area few of the local ities where i t i s met w ith in a crystal line form — in fine crystal s a tLa Have (Lunenburg Co .) and Seven Mi le Pl ain (Hants Co ) , in the province of Nova
Scotia— in l arge cubical crystals in a vein of copper ore in the township ofMelbourne
(Richmond province of Quebec— in perfect octahedra at E l izabethtown (Leeds
Co ) , also in a crystall ine form in many of the veins and gneiss oid rocks of th e town
ships of Madoc , E lzevir and Tudor (Hastings Co ) , and in the trap dykes of LakesSuperior and Huron province ofOn tario .
20 8 . PYROLU S ITE — I s met w i th near Kentvil le (King’s Co ) , at Springvi lle (Pictou Co ) ,
Musquodoboi t (Halifax Co ) , Onslow (Colches ter near Amherst (Cumberland Cc . )
and at Walton and other places,especial ly at Teny Cape , in Hants county , p rovince
of Nova Sco t i a . This mineral als o occurs at several places in the counties of Westmoreland , Albert , St . John and King’s
,— the most important deposi t being at
Markhamv ille , in the parish of Upham ,King’s county
,— in the province of New
Brunsw ick .
20 9 . PYROXENE— I s of common occurrence,especi al ly among° the rocks of the Laurentian
system , where i t not unl'
requen tly forms beds , or l arge segregated veins , which
sometimes consist of pure pyroxene , at other times o f pyroxene in admixture w i thother mineral s , constituting pyroxen ite . I t also s ome times occurs di sseminated inin beds of magnetite and
,in the form of grains and imperfect crystal s
,i t i s common
in the beds of l imestone . Among the numerous local ities of i ts occurrence may be
mention ed — Kildare (Joliette Co ) , the townships of Argenteuil and Grenvi lle
(Argenteui l Co ) , Buckingham ,Templeton
, Portland , Wakefield and adjoin ing town
9 8 HOFFMANN’
S LISTOF
Paul (Charlevo ix Cc . ) in small red flat ten ed crystals in the chlorit ic schists oi'
the
township of Sutton (Brome Co . ) in minute grain s in the black sand obtained in the
washing of the auriferous gravel at Riviera du Loup (Beauce Co ) , and in somewhatlarge crystals , occasional ly geniculated , in a gangue of dolomite and barite , in the
township of Templeton (Ottawa province of Quebec . It has been found in
tolerably distinct crystals in crystall ine l imestone 0 11 Green Isl and in Moira Lake , in
the township of Madoc (Hastings and in the form of del icate acicul ar crys tals ,in quartz cavities at the Wal lace mine
, Lake Huron , province of Ontario . See also
note to Sagenite .
’
2 17 . SAGENITE — A transparent quartz penetrated w ith needles of ruti le is stated , by Prof.
How , to have been found at Scot’s Bay
,King’s county
,province of Nova Scotia .
2 18 . SAHLITE— The most common variety of pyroxene met w i th in the apatite depos i ts ofOttawa c ounty, province of Quebec
,would appear to be a lime -magnesia-i ron
pyroxene or sahlite . On pecul iarities in forms of crystal s from this local i ty, see
results of observations by B . J . Harrington , Rep . Geol . Can ,1 877-78 , p. 1 8 G .
2 19 . SALAMMON IAC— Has been met w ith , in associ at ion w ith native sulphur, constituting
a depos it on the cl iffs of shale on Smoky River, North-west Territory . Anal . , Gr. 0 .
Hoffmann , Rep . Geol . Can .
, 1 875 -76 , p. 420 .
220 . SAMARSK ITE— Has been found on lots one and two of the second range of Maison
neuve , Berthier county , province of Quebec . [When first met w ith , th is townshipwas not l aid out , consequently the local i ty could not be given more defin itely than
as it appears in the report,here referred to
, v ia ,just beyond the north-wes tern l imi t s
of Brassard (the adj oin ing township ) , Berthier Co ]. Anal . , G. C. Hofl’man n
, Rep .
Geol . Can,1880 - 82 , p . 1 H .
22 1 . SAPON ITE— Occurs in cavi tie s in the trap of St . George or Hog° Island
, Richmond
Bay , nor th coast of Prince Edward Isl and . Anal . , B . J Harrington , Can . Nat , 2 ser . ,
v ol. v ii , p . 179 , 1 875 .
222 . SE LE N ITE — Is met w i th in gre ater or l ess quantity at several of the gypsum deposits
in the province of Nova Scotia, as at Oxford , River Philip (Cumberl and Co ) . In the
province of New Brunsw ick i t is especi al ly abundant at Petitcodiac (Westmoreland
where the gypsum deposi t , which has a breadth of about forty rods and a total
l eng th of about one mile , i s traversed through its entire exten t by a vein of nearly
pure seleni te eight feet w ide . This mineral i s also me t w ith in the provinces ofQuebec , Ontario , Manitoba and el sewhere .
SENARMONTITE— Occurs,with native antimony
,s tibnite
,valen tin ite and kermesi te ,
in veins traversing argill ite in the township of Ham,Wol fe coun ty , province o f
Quebec .
SE RPENTINE— I s met w ith abundan tly among° the metamorphic rocks o f the Eastern
Town ships and Gaspe peninsula,in the province o f Quebec , where i t forms vast
[O
[0
masse s , which are frequently almost free from other admix ture , but at times enclose
dial lage , actinol ite , garnet and chromite ; or are intermixed w ith carbonate of lime ,dolomite and occasional ly ferruginous magnesi te . Exten sive beds , mostly contain
ing intermixed carbonate of lime and dolomite,o ccur in the townships of Thet ford
and Coleraine (Megantic Broughton (Beauce Co ) , Sou th Ham and Garthby
(Wolfe Co ) , Melbourne (Richmond Co ) , Orford (Sherbrooke Co ) , and Bo lton (Brome
225 .
2 28 .
229 .
230 .
23 1 .
[O
N)
00
10
009°
234 .
MINERALS OCCURRING IN CANADA . 9 9
Co . ) around Mount Albert in the Shickshock Mountains , and at Mount Serpentine
near Gaspe Bay , in Gaspe county . Among° the massive and nearly pure Laurentian
serpentine s may b e. mentioned those of the townships of Grenville (Argen teuil Co ) ,in above named province— and North Burgess (Lanark Co ) , in the province of
On tario . See al so notes to “
Chrysotile ,” “ Picrol i te ” and “ Retinal i te . Analyses ,
T. S . Hunt,Geo] . ( Jan ,
1 863, p . 472 .
SEYBERTITE — I s men t ioned by Dr . Hunt , as occurring , wi th smal l crystal s of bluespine] , in a crystalline l imes tone in the seign iory of Dailleb out , .I oliet t e county ,province of Quebec .
SIDERITE— A bed o f spathic i ron , varying in thickness from six to ten feet , occursin sandstones of the Mi l l stone -grit formation ,
near Sutherl and ’s River, Pictou county ,province of Nova Scotia. Occurs in thin vein s in Huronian rocks in the Nerepis
valley,and is also diffused t o a
'
con siderable extent through rocks o f Devonian age
in the northern par t of Charlotte coun ty , in the province o f New Brunswick . Is
found in quantity , in beds , on Fl int, Dav ieu’
s, and other islands o f the Nast apoka
group ,eastern coas t of Hudson Bay— and is also met w ith in quantity in the town
ship ofMcI n tyre, Thunder Bay , Lake Superior , province of Ontario . See also notes
to Clay iron -stone ,” “
Sideroplesite .
”Analyses , Gordon Broome , Rep . Geol . Can ,
1 866 -69 , p . 442 : B . J . Harrington , ib .
, 1877-78 , p . 47 G .
SI DE ROPLE SITE — Occurs in the ankerite deposits of Londonderry , Co lchester county ,province of Nova Scotia . Anal . , H . Louis ,Tran s . N. S . In st . , vol . V, p . 50
, 1 879 - 82 .
SILICIFIED WOOD— See no te to Pseudomorphous quartz .
”
SILVER . NATIVE ,— Nuggets and grain s of native si lver have been found in washing
for gold in a great many parts of Bri t ish Columbia, the l argest being obtained inthe Omen ica di stri ct . It also occurs , in associ at ion w ith argentite , at the variousmines enumerated in the note to “Argentite .
”
SMAI .T1TE ~—Has been met w i th in the form of minute crystal s , in association w ith
chalcopyrite,in the township of McKim, District of Nipissing, province of Ontario .
An n . Rep . Geol . Can , v ol. i i , p . 1 1 T., 1886 .
SMOKY QUART Z , CAIRNGORM STONE — Is met W i th in several locali t i e s in the provinceof Nova Scotia , amongst the most noted being Paradise River and the neighborhoodof Bridgetown and Laurencetown in Annapolis county ; i s also found at Mud Village
(Lunenburg Co ) , at Margare t’s Bay (Hali fax Co ) , and o f very dark colo r at Li ttl e
River , about five miles from Hal i fax .
SOAPs'rONE— See note to “ Talc .
”
SODALITE— Occul‘s in the nephel ine- syen i tes of Brome (Brome Co ) , Montreal
(Hochelaga Co ) , and Belce il (Rouvil le Co ) , in the province o f Quebec . A verybeautiful blue sodalite, in l arge specimens , has been found by Dr . G . M . Dawson
,in
abundance , in the vicini ty of Ice River, a tributary of the Beaver-foot , in the RockyMountain s , province of Briti sh Columbia . Anal . , B . J . Harring ton , Trans . Roy . Soc .
Can ,vol . iv , sec . i ii
, p. 8 1 , 1 886 .
SPECULAR - IRON— Amongst other locali ties,i s met w i th in tabular crystal s at Sandy
Cove , Digby Neck (D igby Co ) , province o f Nova Sco tia : in tabul ar crys tals , or thickplates
,in the township o f Leeds (Megan t ic Co ) , al so in thick plates in the township 0 !
She ti'
ord (Shefford Co ) , in the province o fQuebec .
1 0 0 HOFFMANN’
S LISTOF
235 . SPERRYLITE— This re cently discovered and highly interestin g mineral, arsenide ofplatinum
,was found at the Vermillion mine
,township ofDenison
,Distri ct ofAlgoma,
province of Ontario . Anal . , H . L . Wells , Am . Journ . Sci , 3 ser .
, v ol. xxxvi i , p . 67 ,
1889 : on the crystal l ine form of Sperryl ite , S . L . Penfield, ibid , p . 7 1 .
236 . SPESSARTITE — Is found,together w i th black tourmaline
,uran inite
,monaz ite
,etc .
,
in a coarse pegmati te vein— composed of m icro cline,albite
,muscovite and whi te and
smoky-brown quar tz - in -the township of -Vi l leneuve, Ottawa county, province of
Quebec .
237 . SPHAEROSTILB ITE— Has been met w ith by Prof. How ,at Hall ’s Harbor, King
’s county ,province of Nova Scotia .
238 . SPHALE R ITE— Is somewhat w idely distributed,being found , bu t most frequently in
small quantit ie s only,in al l the provinces of the Dominion . I t i s met w ith , in
greater or less abundance,in almos t every metall iferous vein which has been opened
on the east and north shores of Lake Superior, and an important depo si t of the sameis situate some eleven miles north-east of Rossport ( formerly McKay
’
s Harbor ) on the
north shore of that lake,province of Ontari o . Al so occurs in quanti ty in the town
ship of Calumet— where it i s associ ated w ith more or less galenite and a li tt le pyrite,
— Pontiac county,in the province of Quebec .
239 . SPINE L— Small translucent octahedrons of bl ue spinel are found in a bed of crystal
l ine limestone in the seigniory of Dailleb ou t (Jol iette in the province of Quebec .
Large and not unfrequently very symmetrical bl ack crystal s,some t imes an inch 0 1
°
even two inches in diameter, occur in crystal li zed limestone in Burgess (Lanark Co ) ,and similar crystals
,though less perfect , are found , toge ther w ith fluorite , apati te and
crystal s of white orthocl ase, i n a vein"
of fiesh -red calcite in the township of Ross,
Renfrew county , province of Ontario .
240 . SPODUM ENE — I S said , by Dr. Hunt , to have been observed in a smal l rol led mass of
granite near Perth , Lanark county, in the province of Ontario .
241.STAUROLITE — Occurs in mica- schi sts ofMoore ’s Lake,near to Moore ’s Mi lls , Charlotte
county, province of New Brunsw ick .
242 . STEATITE ~ See note to Talc .
”
243 . STEELE ITE— I S found imbedded in red clay in cavi ties inTriassac t rap , at Cape Spli t ,thirteen miles west of Cape Blomidon ,
King’s county, provmce of Nova Sco t i a .
244. STE LLAR ITE— The name given by Prof. HOW to the se-cal led stel lar” or oil-coal ,which occurs w ith bi tuminous coal (in a seam fiv e feet th ick , of which one foo t ten
inches are stellarite) at the Acadia mines on the Acadia Coal Company’s area , Pic tou
county,province of Nova Sco ti a . Analyses
,H. How ,
Min . N .S.
, p . 2 4, 1 869 . Sir
W i lliam Dawson , referring,° to this substance (Acadian Geology , 3rd ed . , 18 7 8 , p . 339 )
says The material known as stellar-coal i s,as I have maintained in previous pub
licat ion s, of the nature of an ear thy bi tumen ; and , geological ly is to be regarded asan underclay or fossil soil , extremely rich in bituminous matter, derived from decayedand comminuted vegetabl e substances . It is , in short, a foss il swamp muck or mudwhich
,as I have elsewhere po inted out
,is the character of the earthy bitumens and
highly bi tuminous shales of the Coal formation general ly .
245 . STIBN ITE— An importan t deposit of this mineral ex ists in the pari sh of Prince
W ill i am (York Cc ) . in the province of New Brunsw ick . where it i s contained in
1 0 2 HOFFMANN’
S LISTEOF
2 53 .
2 54 .
25 5 .
magnesia,and small quan t i ties of quartz and magnetite , i s found in the Laurenti an
of the township of E lzevir (Hastings Cc ) , in the province of Ontario . Analyses ,
T. S . Hunt , Geol . Can , 1863 , p. 46 9 .
TE NNANTITE— Occurs,in association w ith chalcopyrite , pyri te , quartz , etc .
, at the
Crown mine , Oapelton , Sherbrooke county , in the province of Quebec . Anal . , B. J .
Harrington , Trans . Roy . Soc . Can , v ol. i, see . ii i . ,“
p . 80 , 1882 -83 .
TETRAHEDRIT E— Ordinary tetrahedrite (containing only a li ttl e si lver) occurs , in agangue of ankerite
,in the Vicinity of Foster’s Bar
,about twenty-fiv e miles above
Lytton , Fraser River, and a more or less argentiferous tetrahedri te , associ ated w ith
variable amounts of galen ite and smal l quantities of one or more,or al l , of the fol
low ing mineral s, v iz , pyrite , chalcopyrite , bornite , sphalerite , i s found at the
Illecillewaet mines,between the north and south branches of the Illecillewaet
River, Selkirk Range, and at the International claim on the west side of Kootan ie
Lake on Otter-tai l Creek and Carbonate Creek at Cherry Creek , thirty-three m iles
east of the head of Okanagan Lake at some of the Stump Lake mines , Nicola Val ley
on Jamieson Creek , which flows into the North Thompson River, and elsewhere inthe province of Bri t i sh Columbia .
THOMSON ITE— Specimen s of this mineral , in the form of radiating crystal s , have been
found at the North Mountains of King’s county,province of Nova Scotia. See al so
note to ‘ Mesole .
”
TITAN ITE — Occurs in minute amber-colored grain s and crystal s , in the gran itoid
trachy tes of Brome (Brome Co ) , SheiTord (Shefford and Yamaska (Yamaska Co . )Mountain s , and in the diori te of Moun t Johnson (Ibervi lle Co . )— in crystal s , often of
considerable size , of a clove -brown or chocol ate -brown color, i n the Laurentian of
the townships ofArgenteuil and Grenville (Argenteuil Co ) , Buckingham ,Templeton ,
Wakefield and Hull (Ottawa and at the Calumet Fal ls in Lit chfield (Pontiac
Co ) , in the province of Quebec . It is also met w i th in the Laurentian of the town~
ships of Sebastopol— where very l arge crystals are sometimes found also fine tw in
crystal s,and a massive form— (Ren t
'
rew North Burgess— of a honey-yel low
color— and North Elmsley (Lanark and other townships in this part of theprovince of Ontari o . An alyses,T. S . Hunt
,Geol . Can , 1 863 , 5 0 3, and B. J . Harring ton ,
Rep . Geol . Can .
,1 877 -78 , p. 28 G .
25 7 . TOURMALINE — Principal ly black , but not unfrequently brown— i s o f comparatively
common occurrence,in many places , in rocks of the Lauren ti an series . Among,
° the
numerous local itie s of i ts occurrence may be mentioned — Near Hunterstown— where
a single transparent brown crystal,remarkable for i ts modificat ions, was obtained
(Maskinongé Co . ) at Calumet Fal l s in the township ofLitchfield,fin e translucent , rich
yellow ish -brown colored,highly modified crystals w i th bril l iant faces (Pontiac Co . )
in the township of Clarendon brown crystal s of great beauty— (Pontiac Co . ) in the
townships of Grenville and Argenteuil— black crystals— (Argenteuil Co . ) also black
crystal s on the west side of the North River at St . .I ér6me (Terrebonn e Cc . ) in the
province o f Quebec . In the province of Ontario — the townships of‘
North Elmsley,
No rth Burgess and Bathurst (Lan ark Co ) , Ross— where crystal s almost equal inbeauty to those from the Calumet Fall s have been found ,— and Blythfield (Renfrew
Co ) , Galway and Ston ey Lake in Dummer (Peterborough and Charl eston Lake
in Leeds county .
25 8 .
25 9 .
265 .
267 .
268 .
MINERALS OCCURRING IN CANADA . 1 0 8
TRAVE RTINE— Deposits from calcareous springs— the material of which is in some
instances hard and solid , at other times porous and tufaceous— are abundant in manyparts ofw es tern Ontario, being met w i th in the counties of York , Wentworth , Oxford ,Wel l ington
,Grey
, Simcoe , etc .
TREMOLITE— I S abundant in the Laurentian limestones at the Calumet Falls in
Lit chfield (Pontiac Cc ) , province of Quebec ; also in the townships of Bly thfield
(Renfrew and Dalhousie (Lanark and short th ick and highly modified
prisms of a white transparent tremoli te,hav e been observed by Prof. Chapman , in a
whi te crystall ine limestone in the township of Algona (Renfrew province of
Ontario .
TURG ITE— Occurs wi th brown hematite at Teny Cape , Hants county , province ofNova Scotia . Anal . , H . How ,
Phil . Mag , 4 se r .
, v ol. xxxvii , p . 268 , 1 869 .
ULEXITE — Occurs wi th cryptomorph ite,.
Howl ite , mirabili te , hali te , Arragonite andselenite in the gypsum deposi ts of Hants county— as at Cl i fton quarry , W indsor ;Brookvil le Trecoth ick ’
s quarry Three Mil e Plains Winkworth Newport Station— province of Nova Scot ia. Anal.
,H. How , Phi l . Mag ,
4 ser .
,v ol. xxxv
, p . 32 , 1 868 .
URACON ITE — Was observed by D r . Hun t,in the form of a sulphur-yellow crystal l ine
crust , l in ing fissures in magnetite in the townsh ip of Madoc (Hastings and by
Prof. Chapman , in a deposit of magnetite in the township of Snowden (Peterborough
province of Ontario .
URALITE — Good specimens showing° the partial and complete alteration of pyroxene
to urali te,have been found in the township of Templeton , Ot tawa county , province
of Quebec . Analyses , B . .I . Harrington , Rep . Geol . Can , 1 877-78 , p . 2 0 G et seq .
URAN IN ITE— Has been found at the V il leneuve mica mine,in the township of
Vi ll eneuve , Ottawa county , province o ueb ec . Ann . Rep . Geol . Can , vol . i i , p . 1 0 T.
,
1886 .
VALENTIN ITE— I S found w i th nat ive antimony,stibnite
,senarmontite and kermes ite
,
in veins in argill ite , in the township of South Ham,Wolfe county
,province of
Quebec .
. VE SUV IAN ITE — Occurs in yel low crystals,w i th garnet
,pyroxene and z ircon
,in
calcite , in the township of Grenvil le , and in l arge brown crystals,w i th tourmaline
,
at the Calumet Falls in Litchfield (Pontiac Co . ) in large brownish-red crystals in a
quar tz ose rock , in the township o fTempleton (Ot tawa Co ) , and Dr . Harrington hasrecorded the huding of small prisms of green idocrase imbedded in cinnamon stone ,in the township ofWakefield
,in the same county —province of Quebec .
VIV IAN ITE— An earthy form of this mineral, of a bright blue color, occurs underlying
a b ed o f b og iron-ore in Cé t e St . Charles , Vaudreui l (Vaudreuil in the province of
Quebec . I t has al so been met wi th,in a similar form
,at the Ramparts ,
”Porcupine
River , Yukon distric t , North-west Territory .
VVAD — This variety o f bog -manganese h as been met w i th in Bol ton (Brome Co ) ,Stanstead (Stanstead Co ) , Tring, Aubert-Gal lion and Ste . Marie (Beauce Co ) , and
several other locali t ies in the province of Quebec . At Parrsborough (Cumb er1and
Co . ) and in Hal ifax county : at the head ofLewi s Bay (Cape Breton Cc ) , and in associ a
tion w i th the iron ore of the Mar t in Brook mines at Londonderry (Colchester Co ) ,province of Nova Scotia . Anal . , H . Ifi uis , Trans . N. S . Inst .
,vol . iv , p . 42 7 , 1 878
1 0 4 HOFFMANN ’
S LISTOF
269 . WE RNER ITE — Scapol ite i s very frequently me t w ith in the Laurentian i t occurs in
l arge crystals and cleavab le masses,w ith pyroxene and sphene
,in Hunterstown
(Maskinongé Co . ) in the townships of Grenvi lle— ih the Augmentation o f, pale
lemon -yellow— (Argenteui l Co ) , Templeton— where good,and occasionally very large
though less perfect , crystals are met w i th— Port land and Wakefield, etc . (Ottawa
Cc ) , and Calumet Isl and— l i lac-colored— (Ponti ac Co ) , prov ince of Quebec . I n veryl arge
,but imperfect crystal s
, 0 11 Turner’s I sl and in Lake Clear, in the t ownship of
Sebastopol , at Golden Lake in the adj oining township of Algona (Renfrew Co ) , and
in good crystals in the township o fRoss , in the same county— province of On tari o .
Analyse s , T. S . Hun t , Geol . ( fan , 1 863 , p . 474 , and F D . Adams (show ing presence of
chlorine in scapol i tes ) , Rep . Geol . Can .
, 1 877-78 , p . 32 G .
270 . WI LSON ITE— F ine specimen s of this mineral are found in the townships of Portland,
Templeton andHull (Ottawa in the province of Quebec . As there met w i th,it
i s most frequently int imately associated w ith scapol i te , the two minerals occasionally
blending into each o ther . I t al so o ccurs in the townships of Bathurst— the local ity
of its first discovery by Dr. W i lson— and North Burgess (Lanark Cc ) , in the province
of Ontario .
27 1 . W I NKWORTH ITE— The name proposed by Prof. How for a mineral found by him ,
in gypsum at Winkworth , Hants coun ty , province of Nova Scotia . Analyses ,H . How ,
Phil . Mag , 4 ser . , vol . xl i , p . 270 , 1 87 1 . [Assumed to require further in v es
t igat io’
n .]272 . W
’
ITHER ITE— Occurs in a silver-bearing vein— the Veinstone of which consists o f
calc ite and quartz w i th some fluorite,‘
carrying argenti te and nat ive si lver— at TwinCit ies mine , near Rabbit Mountain , Thunder Bay, Lake Superi or, province of On tario .
2 73 . WOLFRAM ITE— Was found by Prof. Chapman , in a large boulder of gneiss , on the
north shore of Chief’s I sland , in Lake Couch ich ing, province of Ontario . Anal . T. S .
Hunt , Geo] . Can .,1 863, p . 5 03 .
2 74 . WOLLASTON ITE— Fibrous wollastonite is often found in the l imestones of the Lauren
tian series , associ ated with pyroxene , felspar , quartz , mica and other minerals . Some
of the best known locali ties of its occurrence are St . Jér6me and Morin (Terrebonn eand the township of Grenvill e (Argenteuil Co ) , in the province of Quebec— and
the townships of Nor th Burgess (Lanark and Bastard (Leeds Co ) , in the
province ofOn tario . Anal ., Mr. Bunce , Gcol. Can .
, 1 863 , p . 46 5 .
275 . Z IRCON— Small brownish crystals of zircon,w ith tourmaline , are found in grani t ic
veins which traverse gnei ss on the North RiVer, in S t . Jé réme (Terrebonnereddish-brown crystals
, which are sometimes half an inch in diameter , occur , i n
associ ation w ith wol lastonite,pyroxene
,sphene
,plumbago , etc . ,
in abundance in the
crystall ine l imestone of the township of Grenville (Argenteui l and i t i s of
frequent occurrence,often in fine crystals, in the apatite veins of Templeton and
adjoining townships (Ot tawa Cc ) , province of Quebec . Handsome crystal s , includ
ing fin e tw ins of z ircon ,are found in the township of Sebastopol , also large and good
crystal s of the same in the adjoining township of Bruden ell(Renfrew Co . ) in smal l
crystal s in a graphit ic vein in the township o f North Burgess (Lanark Co and in a
syenitic rock on Pic Is land in Lake Superior, province of Ontario .
2 76 . MENACCAN ITE— See notes to I lmenite,
” Iserite .
”
Trans. R . S . C 1 8 89 .I I I . Plate I .
O c c ult a t i o n
5 + A r ie t i s a -t Green w ic h
O c t , 9 141 . 1 5 3 1
SECTION IV,1 8 89 . TRANS . ROY . Soc . CANADA.
I .—Presiden tialAddress : On the Progress of GeologicalInvestigation in New Bruns
wick. By L . W . BA ILEY .
(Read May 10 ,
I t i s,I beli eve
,the custom in our Society , as in others simi larly consti tuted , and one
the util ity of which has been j ust ified by experience , that he who may have been
honored by selecti on as the Presiding Officer of a Secti on should make to that Section
something,° of the nature of a formal address
,and that thi s should take the shape of a
review , or at least be upon some topic of general interes t , rather than upon one which is onlyl oc al or technical . To one, therefore , whose l ab ours , l ike my own ,
hav e been whol ly
confin ed to unravel l in g the intricacies in th e geol ogy of such l ittle known and so com
pl icated regions as that of the in teri or of New Brunsw ick , the attempt to meet the
requi remen ts of the custom referred to presents unusual difficulty . But,one source of
satisfaction connected wi th the working out of such problems is always present in the
fact that the i r issue has often a bearin g far beyond the immediate region in which they
are undertaken . It has thus h appened,at several different periods sin ce the investiga
tion of New Brunsw ick geology was begun,that discoveries
,at first apparently of l i ttl e
value , have been found to re al ly posse ss a sign ificance of vast and general moment . I
think , therefore, th at I cannot do better, upon the pre sent occasion , than to bring before
you some facts refe rring to the progress and present status of New Brunsw ick geology,and while thus deal ing° w ith a theme upon which I may hope to speak w i th some
degree of person al know ledge,to suggest at the same time some points and comparison s
which may be found to have a much w ider appl icati on . As regards the few members of
the Section who are not geologists,I must ask their kin d indulgence
,reminding,
° them at
the same time,that many most in teresting facts connected w ith the botany , zoology, agri
culture , and cl im ate of difi'
eren t distric ts , are also connected w i th and dependant upontheir geology , some few of which in the present instance I may take occasion to notice .
The present t ime'
seems an appropri ate one at which to make such a review as I have
proposed , as this yeai° w i tnesses the i ssue of the fin alsh eet s of the. maps prepared by the
Geological Survey , in i l lustration of the geology of New Brunsw i ck . The first efforts i n
the direction of the preparat ion of such maps were made'
in the year 1 870 , but ow ing° to
the great difficulty experien ced in obtaining° even a probable solution of some of the
problems necessary for that purpose,i t was not unti l the year 1880 that the first sheets of
the map were actually i ssued . These we re three in number, tw o in illustration of thesouthern counties (Charlotte , St . John
,and Kimg
’
s) and largely based upon work done in
thi s region prior to the extension thereto of the work of the Geological Survey, and another
embracing portions of Queen ’s, Sunbury , and York Counties , i l lustrating the position
and relations of the Grand Lake coal-field. A special report and map , exhibiting thedistribution of the Albert bituminous shales and Albertite depo si ts of Albert and West
more land Countie s,had previously been issued in 1 877 . Follow ing° upon the investiga
L . W. BAILEY
tion embodied in these maps and reports,those next undertaken had rel ation ch iefly to
the formations bordering upon the Gulf of St . Lawren ce and Bay des Chaleurs , while
examinat ions were simultaneously made of portion s of the Province lying to the northof the great central co al-field, and along the val l ey of the St . John . Maps , il lustrative
of the eastern coast , fiv e in number, were prepared and. i ssued , under directi on of Dr .
E ll s , in 1 8 82 , while of tho se rel ating to the St . John River region ,the first appeared in
1 884, a second in 1 886 , and the last two , completing the entire series for New Brun sw i ck ,w i l l be publi shed in the present year .
Prior to the preparation of these maps , two geological maps of the Province had
been publi shed , Viz .
, one by Prof. James Robb , in 1 85 0 , chiefly based upon the earl ier
observations of Dr. A . Ge sner, though to some ex tent supplemented and modified by his
own, and a second publ ished by Sir W. Daw son in his “
Acadian Geology,”1 8 86 , and
further modified in 1 888 . That those sin ce i ssued by the Geological Survey shou ldexhibit a great advance upon the former i s no more than would naturally be expected ;for though the map of Dr. Robb represents
,in a large measure
,the results of surveys
made w i th prov inci al aid , these nevertheless embody the labors , at most , of but tw o
observers,were undertaken at a t ime when the country was far less general ly cleared
and less accessible than at present , and belong to a period when the science of geology
i tsel f was comparatively in a state of infancy ; while that of Sir W . Dawson,though far
more advan ced than the former,and far more accurate both in its topographical and geo
logic al detail s , was also largely based upon the scattered observation s made by himself
and others,and largely w i thout governmental assistance . The progress made in the
Survey maps , under the direct ion of Dr . Selwyn , i s specially marked in more exactt opographical del ineation
,the result of carefu l and systematic instrumental surveys
,and
also in the more positive determination,th rough fo ssil s and s tratigraphy
,of the age of
the fo rmation s represented . In the l ater sheets,increased at tention has been paid to the
determination of elevati on and the representat ion of rel i efs , but ow ing° to the increasedcost involved in work of thi s kind
,the maps
,in this particular, are stil l less complete
than could be desired . These maps are then , for the present at least , to be regarded as
the fin alresul ts of the officialsurveys of New Brunsw ick . It w i l l , however, be readily
understood that , in the course of l abours extending over eighteen years , carried on by
various observers,and that too in a region remarkable for the complexi ty of its structure ,
some diversi ty of opinion should exi st , and that results obtain ed in the later years ,’
and
in the portions of the Province las t examined , should , by reflect ion , tend to modify , t o
some extent,those gathered in the distri cts first studied . I t w i l l probably
,the refore
,not
be w ithou t advan tage to makeo
h ere a brief resurvey of the field, stating which of the
earl ier conclusions,of general interest
,have stood their ground , those which require
modificat ion i n the light of more recent know ledge , and in what directions further
in formation i s des i red .
Commencing° wi th the earl ier formations , it i s grati fying t o know that the recognition
of Azo ic or Arch zean rocks , as occurring'
n ear the city of St . John , and which was first
announ ced by Mr . Matthew and the autho r, in 1 86 5 ,lhas been amply and fully confirmed.
Be tween these rocks and the overlying Primordial , the evidence s of uncon t'ormab ility are
1 Ob servat ions on Geology of Southern New Brunswick , Fredericton , 1865 .
6 L . W. BAILEY :
cati on relating thereto by the late Prof. Hartt,
1 the total number of organic forms recog
n iz ed was l imi ted to eight genera (four genera, including° thirteen species
,of Tri lobites ,
and six species of Brachiopods) there are n ow recognized from the same formation four
species of Protozoa (sponges ) , two of Hydrozoa, one Cystid , twelve Brachiopods , seven
Pteropods , two Gasteropods , six Phyl lopods , four Ost'
racoids, and at least thirty-two
species ofTril obites among° the latter on e , the Paradoxides reg ina, being the l argest fairlycomplete example of the genus y et found in any part of the w orld .
But it is not solely,n or even ch iefly , in the recognition of n ew species that these
researches are important . I t i s l argely in the information which they afford as to therelationships of specific types and the phases of thei r developmental history that theyacquire greatest interest and value . They are sti l l further of importance as helping toestabl ish more exactly the range and relations of the enti re Cambrian fauna
,both as
regards its own subdivi sions and those of subsequent periods . As originally described
under the name of the St : John Group , the formati on was regarded as in cluding onlythe series of dark slates and sandstones
,at the base of which were found the Paradoxi
des and other forms by which Prof. Hartt was enabl ed , in 1 868 , to fix thei r age as Primor
dial , and the probable equivalent of Barrande’
s Stage 0 ,as represented i n Bohemia . At
the same time a series of red beds,of considerable thickness , was found to intervene
between these fossi l i ferous strata and those of the older volcanic or Huronian Group , andthough at first referred to the l atter as an upper member
,was subsequently regarded as
being more intimately associated w i th the former . At a sti l l l ater peri od,the uncon
formability of the Primordial s eries , as including these red beds , t o the underlying
Huron ian,was placed beyond question by investigati ons extending along
° thei r entire
l ines of contact ; but i t i s only quite recently that evidence has been found , by Mr.
Matthew,
2 tending° to show th at between the Paradoxi des beds and the supposed equiv a
lents of the Huronian , two physi cal breaks , rather than one , intervene , the red rocks
being real ly unconformabl e to the overlying as wel l as the underlying series . A dis
c ov ery of sti l l greater interest , made at the same time , was that of the occurrence in these
s ame beds,of organic remain s which , though few and somewhat obscure , seem sufficien t
to show the ex i stence,in this part ofAmerica, of a fauna older than that of the Paradox
i des zone,and the equivalent of the Lower Cambri an fauna of New foundland,
or that of
the Caerfai Group of Wales . Thus , the whole Cambrian system at St . John,original ly
described coll ectively as Primordial , has now been shown to be divi sible into tw o dis
tin ct serie s,of which the first , Series A-B, th e Basal or Georgian G roup , includes the
Ol enellus fauna, whil e the second , Series the St . John Group or Cambrian proper ,includes part of the Lower and the whole of the Middle Cambrian as recognized in
Europe,being equival ent to the Solva and Menevian groups of Hicks , and the Lingula
flags o f Murchi son , as w el l as the Regiones B and C of Angelin . Series D , the equiv a
lent o i? the Potsdam Sandstone , so far as known , is absent from Acadia . Of the groups
represented,the St . John Group i s further regarded as embracin g three stages or divi
sions,including in the first divi sion four subgroups or bands , each characterized by its
own peculiar forms of organ ic l ife . Thus,se
‘
far as the Mari time Provinces (and New
Geology of Southern New Brunswicli, Fredericton ,1865 .
9 0 11 a Basal Series of Camb rian Rocks in A cadia, Can . Record of Sc ience, vol. i i i , no. 1 , 1888 .
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 7
foundland) are concerned , the Cambrian succession may now be regarded as having been
placed upon a substantialbasis , and may serve as an invaluable guide towards removing°
or lessen ing the obscurity stil l enveloping that succession elsewhere .
The possibi li ty of making such ~div ision s as h av e been referred to , and of sati sfactori ly
establi shing° thei r correspondence w ith those of the Cambrian zones recognized in other
parts of the world , is sufficient proof of the zeal , care , and abi l ity w ith which these
minute investigat ions h av e been carri ed on by our associate but I cannot let this opper
tun ity pass w i thout adding my testimony , as that of one personally conversant w ith the
facts,to the energy and untiring perseverance which h as led to such import an t results in
the face of difficulties which seemed at one t ime to be well-nigh insuperable . It may
be added that the field in this direction i s even now only parti al ly explored , and the studies
sti l l in progress can hardly fai l to enl arge stil l further our know ledge of thi s ancient and
earl iest known era of undoubted organic exi stence .
Our attention i s again directed , in thi s conn ection , to the importance of the use of
the microscope in geological investigation , not on ly as reveal ing° petrological dist inctions
and condit ions of origination not otherw i se recognizable , but al so as an aid in the search
for minute organic rel i c s . Through its means , a series of rocks lying altogether belowthe first tri lobitic beds of the Cambrian , and to ordin ary observation utterly barren of
fos si l s,i s now known to be filled w ith the remains of sponges , radiol arians , etc . , and
therefore shows what we may reasonably expect when the same method of study is applied
to the study of l ike formations , both in the old world and in the new , in which as yet but
few observations of thi s kind have been made .
Of the formation next succeeding the Cambrian , that of the Cambre-Si lurian or
Ordovi cian , as occurring,° in New Brunsw ick , our kn owledge i s much less complete and
sati sfactory . Very large areas , i t i s true , have , in reports of the Survey , been referred to
thi s horizon , and are so represented upon the accompanying maps , but always w i th
some degree of hesitat ion,and rather for the reason that thi s reference i s more consistent
w i th such facts as we happen to possess , than that these facts are , for al l the areas so re
presented , entirely conclusive . At one point on ly,Viz .
,on Beccaguimic River, in Carle
ton Coun ty, have fossi l s been found , including such genera as Obolella, Acrotreta , Dingula,Leptama, Orthz
'
s, Strophomena Camerella or Rhynchonella and aTri lobite apparently identicalw ith the fl 'inuclens setz
’
com z’
s of His i-nger , as wel l as crinoidal or cys t idean fragments andsponge- l ike sp icules , which , are certainly Lower Silurian (or Ordovic ian) but the rocksin which they occur, consisting of hard black sil i ceous and pyriti ferous l imestones , are
exposed over a very smal l area, and are quite different in character from anything which
has been el sewhere observed in the areas refe rred to this system . I t is certainly very
remarkable that nothing corresponding directly either to the thick limestones of theTrenton formation or the Utica shales
,w ith their abundant fossi ls
,has been met w ith
here . The bulk'
of the strata would seem rather t o correspond to the less al tered portions
of the so-cal led Quebec Group,cons isting ch iefly of slate s and sandstones , which are
occasional ly highly colored , but even w i th the latter , the correspondence , except overl imited areas , can hardly be regarded as very clo se , there being but l ittle to represent the
coarse grits of the Si l lery formati on,and almost nothing to represent the heavy beds of
white quartzite , of limestone , or of l imestone -conglomerate, which are so conspicuously
displayed along the south shore of the St . Lawrence . Another element of doubt in con
8 L . W. BAILEY
nect ion w i th the areas referred to thi s horizon arises from the finding ,at different points
w ithin the latter, of fossi ls which indicate a more recent origin than that assigned to the
larger di stricts in which they occur . Thus , in the very heart of the supposed Camb roSi lurian band , in York Coun ty,a narrow belt contain ing forms of tran sitional characterbetween the Si luri an and Devon ian , was found as early as 1879 , by the l ate Chas . Robb ;and quite recen tly st il l other fo rms , somewhat obscure but apparently Devonian , have
been discovered, by Mr. W .T. H . Reed of F redericton , in the slates a few miles north of
that ci ty . I t may thus eventual ly prove to be the case that w ithin the area ascribed to
the Cembro-Si lurian , there are considerable tract s of younger strata, ei ther Si lurian or
Devonian , or both but the fact that on the north side of the cen tral granite bel t the slates
in question are so obviously and at so many points met and overlapped by undoubted
Si luri an strata, taken w ith the known occurrence of Lower Si lurian forms on the
Beccaguimic , and of graptol itic sl ates which are probably Lower Si luri an , in the eastern
extension of the same belt,near Bathurst
,would seem to be sufficien t reason for continu
ing for the present to assign this age to the group in question . I t may be added that
rocks very nearly resembl ing many of those which have in New Brunsw i ck been regarded
as Lower Si lurian , have recently been observed by the wri ter in northernMaine , where
they would seem to be unconformably covered by Si luri an conglomerates , made up of
their debris ; but the determination of the exact age of all these sl aty rocks in both
countrie s , i s amon g the most important problems in the geology of this region stil l
requirin g solution .
I may add that the same uncertainty rests upon the age of the so-called Kingston
Group , of southern New Brunsw ick , and which in its westward extension becomes, in
part at least , continuous w ith that to which Prof. Shaler has assigned the name of the
Campo Bel lo Seri es .
”By that author, who assigns to strata of the group a thickness of
at least feet , and compares them w i th the slates of the Cambridge distri ct i n Massa
chuset t s, they are regarded as being Lower Cambrian ; but as beds of very simi l ar charac
ter occur w i thin a very short di stance of the known Cambrian of St . John , and yet bear
but li ttle resembl ance to the latter,this supposition seems unten able . As they are certainly
older than Si luri an , and i n all probabili ty not Cambrian,they must ei ther be regarded
as Pre Cambri an , the View adopted i n the Survey reports , or as Camb ro -Siluri an .
'The rocks of the Si lurian system are among the most w idely spread and most int erest ing
° of those found w ithin the district to which thi s paper rel ates . No other forma
tion has determin ed so large an extent of arable l and none i s more remarkable for its
physical features, whether of mountains , l akes or rivers , and over none i s the distribution
of native plants more pecul iar . W ithin it are included the Aroostook region ,so wel l
known for i ts fertil ity , in northern Maine , and a corresponding fert ile bel t” in northern
New Brunsw ick and i t w as long since pointed out,by Prof. Gr. L . Gr
'
oodale, that many of
the spec ies of plants here met w ith are such as n atural ly belong to a more southern
paral lel . Final ly , the formation i s the first one in which i s indicated anything like a
defin it e idea of the early geography of thi s p0 1 t ion of Amei ica .
Although the general age and distribution of the larger part of the rocks referred to
thi s system’ has been long known,it i s only quite recently that any attempt has been
made , so far as New Brunsw i ck i s concerned , to effect any subdivi sion of the latter or to
determine the rel ation or equivalency of its different portions . Indeed,th i s could not
1 0 L . W. BAILEY :
most noticeable peculiari ties . No other system , unless it be the Huronian , w i l l compare
w ith it in this respect , and i t i s noticeable that between the volcanic members of thesetw o great groups , the litho logical resemblances are often so close as to make their recogn i
ti on difii cult . For thi s reason , and in consequence of the not in frequent close associ ation
of the two systems in the same district,several considerable areas have been alternately
referred to one or the other of these formati on s but it is probable that a closer m icroscopic
study of both— a work which i s greatly needed— w i l l do much to remove this difficulty .
Sti l l another most interesting° fact in connection w i th our know ledge of the Si lurian
rocks of New Brunsw i ck has been the di scovery , made b y Mr. Matthew in 1 886 , of the
remains of Pteraspidian fishes,related to the genus Cyalhaspz
’
s of Lankester, in D ivi sion II I
of that system,or in rocks which are about of the age of the Low er Ludlow , and probably
of about the same age as those which in Pennsylvania hold the Palmaspz'
s of Prof. Claypole .
Th is i s bel i eved to be our first know ledge of the occurrence of thi s type of an imal life in
strata of so great antiquity,so far at least as Canada i s concerned .
The most important facts in our know ledge of the Devonian system in New Brunsw i ck were obtained prior to the extens ion thereto of the work of the Canadian Survey ,the ri ch flora of Perry
, Maine , and Carle ton , N . B .,together w ith the interest ing insect
remains of the latter,having
° been previously made known to the worl d through the
l abours of Prof. Hartt , Mr. Matthew and Sir W . Dawson . A very important limitat ion ,
both in the supposed distribution and bulk of this formation,was
,how ever, made in the
first year of the survey by the transference to a very much lower (Pre-Cambri an ) horizon
of a great mass of non-fossi l i ferous rock s,occupying chiefly the north side of the Bay of
Fundy , and which , from their apparently conformable superposi tion upon undoubted
Devonian strata at St . John , had been regarded as a portion of the l atter system . In the
same year (1 870 ) the rocks of Perry, w ith their supposed equivalents at St . Andrew ’s and
Point Lepreau , were described by the present author and his as sociate as much more
nearly resembling, both in character and position , the rocks of the Lower Carboni ferous
formation than those which,at St . John
,held similar plant remains . At that t ime , how
ever,the rocks of St . John were looked upon as the equivalents of the Chemung° and
Portage Groups , whereas later investigation s showed that their position was rather that
of the Hamilton formati on , if not even sti l l older . At that time also but li ttle had been
done in the study of the Devonian basin of Bay des Chaleurs , where our knowl edge of the
relat ions of these two formati ons has since been so greatly enlarged by the observations
of Mr. R . W . E l ls and others . They bear to each other,in this l atter region
,the same
resemblance l ithological ly as that which led to their associ at ion in Passamaquoddy Bay,
but both their relative posit ion and their contained fossi ls are,according to Mr. E l l s, such
as render thei r separation comparatively easy . In view of these facts,it would seem pro
bable that the rocks of the Perry Group,
” as all along maintained by Sir W . Dawson ,must be accepted as true Devon ian , though occupying in that system a position consider
ably more recent than that of the St . John and Carleton rocks , and being probably the
equivalents of the Catskil l beds , which in character they nearly resemble .
The discovery , in c onnection w i th the Devonian rocks of Bay des Chaleurs , of fossi lfishes (Plerichthys, Coccosteus, Ptemspis, etc . ) of the same type as those of the Old Red Sand
Can . Record of Science , vol. i i , no. 4, Oct», 1886 .
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 1 1
stone of Scotland , and their careful and elaborate description by Mr. Whiteav es, in theTransactions of our So ciety , constitute other and most important steps of progress i n the
development of our know ledge of thi s system,as they supply another link between the
geology of eastern America and that of Europe .
A stil l more recent di scovery in connection w ith our Devonian system is that of new
types of insects and crustaceans,found only last summer by Mr. W . J . W i lson in the
same pl ant-beds at Carleton , near St . John , as those in which Devonian insects were first
found by Hartt . Th e latter , and w hich were for a long° time the earl iest insect-remainsknown from any part of the world
,were synthetic forms
,combin ing
° features of the
neuropterous and orthopterou s orders . They have since been placed by Scudder in a newPalaeozo ic o rder
,on the ground that they antedate both those modern o rders and that
they represent the source from which these latter have sprung .
The fact that considerable tracts in northern Maine , described in the Reports of theSurvey of that State , have been found to contain a wel l-marked Si lurian fauna, has already
been referred to . On the other hand , smal l areas , carrying° characteristi c fossi ls of Ori s
kany age,have been observed by Mr . W . McI nn es about the head-waters of th e Tobique ,
in N ew Brunsw ick , in a region previously supposed to be whol ly Si luri an .
1
In the case of the Carboniferous system ,the facts ascertained during the period now
under review h av e had to do rather w i th its economic aspects than w i th questions of
general scien t ific interest . In the year 1 876 -77 the distribution and succession of the
Lower Carboni ferous formati on , as represented in King’s , Albert an d Westmorland Coun
ties,was worked out in considerable detail
,w i th special reference to the se -cal led Albert
shales and the unique and valuable mineral , albertite , associated w ith the l atter .2 These
invest igations amply confirmed the i dea of alberti te being an altered mineral oi l, and
dis tributed much after the manner of ordinary mineral veins,w i th few , i f any , of . the
characteri sti cs of a true coal,and also indicated the w ide extent of the area
,ful ly fifty
miles,over which the conditions resulting in these products had operated . In the v erv
same year,however
,the original deposit of the A lbert mines, which had been so long
and so profitably worked , was found. to have so greatly decreased in amount as to render
its further prosecution useless,and thus what had been for many years the seat of a most
active industry as w el l as a source of considerable revenue to the Province , had to be
abandoned . Thi s w as not done w i thout long° and expensive search for further extension sof the deposit
,but though these , and exploration s since made , resulted in the discovery
of the mineral at qui te a number of points , at none of these have the veins provedsufficien tly l arge to warrant their further prosecution .
The existence of true coal in the Grand Lake district in Queen ’s County was di scovered
soon after the first settlement of the Province , and the subsequent explorations of Dr .
Gesner and others sufli eed to show the enormous area over which the rocks of the coal
formati on are spread w ithin its l imits . Prior, however , to the year 1 872 , but little was
defin it ely known ei ther as to the true thickness of the formation or its probable productive
capacity . The idea having been generally entertained by those resident in the GrandLake region that other and much thicker beds real ly exi sted there than the smal l twenty
two -in eh seam which had been so long known and worked near the surface,the members
Geo logical Survey , Report 1886 . Report of Progress, Geo logical Survey, 1876-77.
1 2 L . W . BAILEY :
of the Geological Staff at that time employed in the Province were , in the year above men
t ion ed, directed by the Government of Canada to see what defin it e information could be
obtained upon the subj ect . The resul t of the enquiries thus made was to show that therocks of the Grand Lake coal-field are di sposed in the form of a very shal low basin , having
a maximum depth of not over 40 0 feet , and having , on at least three of its borders , rocks
o lder than the eoal-formation coming to the surface . The employment of a di amonddril l
,under the direction of Mr. E l ls , gave further confirmat ion to the re sults thus
obtained, by show ing that at many different points , and at depths averaging about 2 0 0
feet,similar Pre-Carboniferous rocks were penetrated , an d that w ithout passing through
any addit ional seams of coal . Thus ; for this particular district at least , the facts ascer
t ained would appear to be decidedly unfavorable to the be lie f in the exi stence here of any
considerable thickness of eoal- rocks or of any great productive capacity . At the same t ime ,however
,the remarkable fact was brought to notice
,and was subsequently confirmed
ed in other parts of the Province,that the rocks of the coal—fo rmation are unconformable
not on ly to the Devonian , Si lurian and o ther older formations , but to the Lower Carb on iferous as wel l, and may rest directly upon either of these , w ithout the interposition
of the others . It may hence follow that the coal- ro cks , being deposited horizontal lyover a folded and eroded surface , may differ great ly in thickness in different locali t ies ,and while evidently shal low in the Newcastle region
,may elsewhere attain greater
volume . So far, however, as observations have yet been made , but little has been found
to confirm thi s bel ief.
The only other point to which al lusi on need here be made , in connect ion w ith theCarboniferous system ,
i s the reference of considerabl e portions of that system,in New
Brunsw ick,as wel l as in Prince Edward ’s I sland
,to the Permian Group by Dr . R . W .
E l ls . The grounds for thi s reference w i l l be found in the Report of the Geological
Survey for 1 8 83 .
I t may be in place to observe that , i n cén n ect ion w ith the iden t ificat ion of our
different geological formations , and the study of thei r di stributi on , character and contained
fo ssil s , endeavours have been made to employ these data as a means of working out the
varying geography of the periods which they represent , and thus of tracing the historicaland physical growth of this portion of America . Among° arti cles bearing upon this sub
j ect are some by Mr . Mat thew relat ing to Quaternary ch anges in the Vicin ity of St . John ,on e by the present au thor rel ating to an cien t ‘
erosion in New Brunsw ick , and another on
the history of the St . John River in .the same Provi nce , both publi shed in our Transaction s the paper by Prof. Shal er on the geology of Cob scook Bay previously referred to
and fin ally,an el aborate paper by Sir W . Dawson on the E ozoic and Paleeoz oic rocks of
the Atlantic coast of Canada (Quarterly Journal of Geological Society, November,From the observati ons thus made
,the fo ll ow ing general conclusions may be regarded as
fairly establ ished
The origination of an Acadi an basin , as di stinct from the other great basins of
the con t inent , by a series of great upli ft s antedating the opening of the Cambrian era .
Whi le on the north the basin was ch iefly l im i ted , as n ow , by the great chain of the
Laurentide hill s , w i th possibly a few outly ing° i slets in the Gaspe pen insula, it was ,
upon the south , s imil arly but less completely l imited , and separated from the Atlanti c ,by a serie s of long and probably low ridges stretching along the southern coast of New
14 L . W. BAILEY :
mining the formation of limet on es at Anticosti and to some extent along,° the St . Law
rence val ley,but mos t ly marked by shallow -water sediments
,mingled
,according° to Sir
W . Daw son,w i th the products of i ce-driftage ; and fol lowed by a period of disturban ce
in w hich these same sediments , including those of the so-cal led Quebec Group, were
compressed and upl ifted into the ridges now const itut ing° the Notre Dame range and the
axi s o f the Gaspe peninsula . Further south , simi lar movements may have affected theCambre -Si lurian strata of central and northern New Brunsw ick , producing a partial sub
division of the basin into a northern and a southern area .
A continuation during° the first half of the Upper Si luri an , of condit ion s
s imilar to those of the Lower Si lurian in south-eastern'
Quebec and nor thern Maine , Viz .
,
of shal low water sediments. including° local ly heavy beds of conglomerate
,and thi ck
accumul ations of vol canic origin , but ch iefly l imestones at Anticosti ; fol lowed , however,by movements which in the northern hal f of the basin led to a greater depression of the
l atter and the formation of impure l imestones and calcareous shales over much ofnorthern Maine , as well as New Brunsw ick , but in the south by a movement of elevat ionwhich
,except at a few points along the coast , rai sed thi s region above the sea-level .
The apparen t limi tation of purely marine deposition in the Devonian to the
northern div is ion of the Acadian basin , and mostly to its first or Oriskany period . Along
the southern coast the plant and insect-bearing beds of St . John and Carleton referred
to the Hamilton Group , point to thei r probable origin along° the northern border of a
trough coinciding° in the main wi th that of the present Bay of Fundy , and about the
mouths of rivers which may in par t mark the beginn ing;° of the modern St . John whil e
the character and fossi l s of the sl ates bordering the central coal-field indi cate the con
t inn ed ex istence there of the great central basin . The distributi on and character of therocks bordering Bay des Chaleurs , w i th their remarkable assemblage of land plants and
of fishes, both ranging from the Lower to the Upper Devonian , clearly indicate the
exi stence of the depre ss ion during° the continuanceof these periods , as wel l as its general
correspondence w ith that wh ich now ex i sts . The abundance of trappean deposits inassoci at ion w i th these rocks would further indicate that the region was one of considerable instabi l i ty
,and subject to frequent igneous outbursts . Near the Bay of Fundy
,and
in the interior of New Brunsw ick , such trappean masses do not accompany the Devonian
strata,or only t o a l imited ex tent
,but important physical movements are indicated by the
marked di scordance of attitude between the lowe r and higher beds of the formation .
An epoch , or epochs , of excessive disturban ce , plication and uplift , accompan i
ed by regional metamorphism ,and the extrusion of great masses of granite , in the
interval be tween the close of the Si lurian era and that introducing° the Carboniferous
age . The granites have invaded and al tered the Si luri an strata upon an extensive scale ,whi le they are not known
,at least in New Brunswi ck , to have so invaded t he Devoni an
rocks . The fact , however, that the latter, in common w ith al l the Pre-Carboni ferous
strata,show abundan t evidence of alterati on and a paral leli sm w i th the grani ti c axes ,
give s support to the View that the period of origination of these granites was the close
of the Devonian era .
A general depression in the Lower Carboniferous era, affecting but sl ightly the
nor thern and western portions of the New Brunswi ck , but t o a greater extent its central
and southern parts , submerging al l preexi sting° valleys
,both in New Brunswick and
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 1 5
Nova Scoti a, including° the great central basin of the former
,and partial ly submerging°
thei r bordering° hill s, to an amount equal,in some cases
,to feet of their present
height . The character of the sediments (largely coarse red sandstone and conglomerates ,w ith impure l imestones and beds of gypsum) , their impregnationw i th sal t and compara
t ive paucity of marine fossi ls,indicate a shallow water origin and general conditions
simil ar to those of the Sali na period of the Si luri an of New York . The close of theera i s marked by frequent igneous ou tflow s, by long-continued and extensive denudation
and, in some instances , by uplift s, leading to unconformi ty w i th the overlying coalmeasures .
(9 ) Th e replacemen t , i n the Coal era, of the bays , straits , shal low basins andevaporating
° flats of the Lower Carboniferous by fresh -water swamps and bogs support
ing the coal vegetation . In northern and central New Brunsw ick , the movements
involved in this and succeeding,° changes
,though affecting large areas
,w ere but smal l in
amount,the coal seams being few, and the entire thickness of the formation but slight .
In Nova Scotia , as is wel l known , the thickness i s enormous , and includes coal beds
remarkable alike for their number and magnitude . In the former, over the central coun
ties,the strata are sti l l very nearly hori zontal along° the Bay of Fundy they are more
highly inclined,w ith numerous faults and dislocations in Nova Scotia they are thrown
into numerous basins,show ing similar evidences of powerful physical movements .
Fin ally,w ith the changes marking° the New Red Sandst on e era, a depression and
deepening° of the Bay of Fundy trough,followed by igneous extrusions along its bed , and
subsequent elevation to form the North Mountains of Nova Scot ia and the Island of Grand
Manan , the Acadian basin assumes essentially its present physical aspect , subsequently
to be broken only by the events connected w ith the origination and decl ine of the great.
Glacial era, synchronous in all probabil ity w ith the first appearance of man .
Passing now to these more recent formations , we find, as regards the Quaternary geo
logy of New Brunsw i ck,that
,i n additi on to numerous more or less scattered observations
made by nearly al l the field observers , speci al study of thi s subject has been made both
by Mr. Matthew and Mr . Robert Chalmers , the last named gentleman being sti l l engaged
in the prosecution of this work . The members of the Section are probably already familiarw ith the more important conclusions ofMr. Chalmers , as set fort h in an elaborate contrib
ut ion to the memoirs of the Society , and in an arti cle on the glaciation of eastern Ameri ca
in the ‘Canadian Record of Science .
’ These Views are of great interest and importance astending to modi fy
,to a large extent
,the Opinions previously held as to the character
,
amount and direction of ice-action in thi s region in glacial times,and as giving° confirma
tion to the View, so long and ably advocated by Sir. W . Daw son,that the glaciation o f
this par t of the continent was the result of localrather than con tinentalglaciers,assisted
by icebergs, at a time when the country stood below its presen t level . A highly important work in this connection is the preparation
,by Mr. Chalmers , of a series of maps,
duplicating the geological maps referred to in prev ious pages , but in which the geologi
cal distinctions are replaced by others show ing the surface features of the country,the
distribution of the various Quaternary depo sits,the character of the soi l
,the distribution
of forests , peat bogs , plains , etc . These,when comple ted
,w i l l be of the greatest pos
sible service , n o t only in eonn ect ion w ith the wants of intending settlers,but also in any
discussion of the facts of our Quaternary history .
1 6 L . W. BAILEY :
The subject of the prehistoric human occupation of Acadi a i s one of considerableinterest , and although , according to the organizat ion of our Society, it i s one which pro
perly appertain s to another Section , it i s real ly quite as appropriate to our own , and a few
facts relating° thereto may be acceptable .
Among the most important investigations connected w ith this subject,so far as New
Brunsw ick is concerned , are those of the recognition and exploration of the shell-heaps ,which are found at di fferent points along the coast
,and especi ally about the shores of
Passamaquoddy Bay . Some of these were veryfully examined by the late Prof. S . F .
Baird , about fifteen years ago, and many interesting articles were obtained , which are
11 0 W i n the col lections of the Smithsonian Institution at Washington,but of which no
publi shed description has yet been made . Others were explored by a committee of the
Natural History Society of St . John , and in their Proceedings i s contained a very interest
in g° account
,from the pen of Mr. Matthew ,
of what was evidently an ancient Indian
village , at the mouth of Bocab ee River, in Charlotte County. In the interior of thePro
Vince , scattered rel ics , chiefly the coarser stone implements and arrow-heads,are of com
mon occurrence,and w ith these are sometimes found such articles as pipes
,pottery,
wampum,net- s inkers
,pendants etc .
, often somewhat elaborately ornamented . Thecoarser and finer rel ics
,including both chipped and pol ished implements
,are
,however,
promiscuously mixed together, and no facts have been observed from which , in any case ,any high degree of antiquity can be inferred . An article by the author
,summing up the
facts upon this subj ect,and accompanied by photographic i l lustrations
,i s contained in
the Sixth Bulletin of the Natural History Society of St . John This , it i s hoped ,w il l soon be fol lowed by a similar article , by Mr. Matthew , upon the preh istoric rel ic s
of the coast .
The au thor cannot close th i s brief review of scien t ific progress in New Brunsw ickw ithout some reference to work which , though not directly geological , must be of some
interest t o the geologist,as it w i l l al so be to other members of the Sect ion . I al lude to
the advances made in our knowledge of the botany and zoology of the Province . As
regards the former,much interesting and valuable work has been done by various l ocal
observers , in the way of adding to the. l i sts of speci es occurring w ithin our limits , or
of more accurately defin ing the range of their distribution but by far the most import
ant contribution to the subj ect is that of the systemati c synopsis of our entire flora, by
Prof. James Fowler,and which has since been in corporated in the stil l more extensi ve
and el aborate flora of the Dominion ,publi shed under the auspices of the Geological and
Natural H istory Survey , by Prof. Macoun . A Valuable supplement to the work of Prof.
Fowler,which i s confin ed to t errest ialforms, i s that of Mr. G . U . Hay and Mr. A. H .
MacKay, on the marine Algae of New Brun swick , and which was published in
Volume V of our Transact ions . An interesting and thoughtful articl e,show ing some of
the relations of our plant di stribution to the climate and physical condi tions affecting it,
was publi shed by Mr. Matthew in 1 86 9 , under the ti tle The Occurrence of Arctic andWestern Plan ts i n Continen tal Acadia,
” l and a somewhat similar articl e,by Prof. Fow ler,
Arctic Plants grow ing in New Brunsw i ck , . in Volume Vof our Transactions .Among important papers bearing upon the subj ect of our zoology are those of Mr.
Can . Natural ist, June, 1869 .
SECTION IV, 1 889 .1 9 TRANS . ROY . Soc . CANAD A.
I I .
—No tes on D evonian Plan ts .
By D . P. PENHALLOW .
(Presented May 8 ,
In a paper presented to this Society last year, I gave the results of certain
investigations into the histology of Prototax ites , and among the conclusions then reached
was a confirmat ion of the Vi ew advanced by Carru thers , that this pl ant i s in real i ty anAl ga and all ied to the Laminarias of our modern flora .
During the past year I have continued my examination of these fossil s whenever
fresh material was brought to notice , and it i s only necessary to remark here , that all the
results thus obtained have only served to confirm more fully the conclusion already
reached . I have al so been able to add to the genus three species previously recognized
under other names . In the present paper , therefore , I propose, ch iefly,'
t o deal w ith these
l atter,and present a complete revision of the genus as a whol e .
NEMATOPHYTON HICKSI I , D n .
In a former p aper on Nematophyton ,1 I dealt but b riefly w i th the characterist ics of
N . Hicksz’
z'
,as I did not feel that the imperfect material then avai lable would admit of a
more lengthy description . Since then , Sir Wm . Dawson has placed in my hands some
additional material , which ,although it does not add very largely to the facts already
gathered,yet enab les me to confirm and state , in a somewhat more detailed form ,
the
charact ers previously assigned to th i s species .
The only form in which thi s plant. i s at present found , i s in small fragments imbeddedin clay . In its general appearance , the material suggests the operat ion of decay followed
by the mechanical action of water— as waves on a shore —whereby the plants became
broken into small fragments . It therefore resembles the material commonly found on
beaches . The fragments are small and all highly silicified,and the organic matter is so
far removed, or so completely broken up as to render them extremely friable . In couse
quen ce of this , complete sec t ions show ing the normal rel ati onship of parts cannot beobtained, and almost all my observations hav e necessaril y been made upon isol ated cell s .
Furthermore , the destruct ion of the organic matter has extended so far that the specimens
are essentially represented only by sil iceous casts of the cel l s , though , in some cases ,patches of carbonaceous matter adhere t o the casts in such a way as to convey anapproximate idea of the thickness of the original cel l wall . From thi s I am le d to con~
sider the wall as somewhat thick . The cells are also,w ithout doubt , tubular and non
1 Trans. Roy . Soc. Canada, vol. v i , sec. i v, p. 45 .
2 0 PENHALLOW ON
septate , and more recent examinations have shown so many undoubted instance s of
branching— as may be seen in the figure— that the rel ationship to N . Logam
’
cannot be
questioned .
As stated in my former paper,these larger cel l s have a diameter of 1 2 22
,u,but as thi s
appl ie s only to the sil iceous casts , we must add to this , assuming the walls to be of the samethickness as in N . Lagan i, ,
u, which would make the total d iameter of the original
cel l s ,u, or equal to some of the larger cell s of N . L ogani.
A secondary system of filamen t s i s also evidently presen t . Cast s of small'
tub ular
ce l l s are very frequent . They have a diameter ranging from 1 to,u . Together w i th
these there are also casts of branching filamen t s,many of which have free terminations
and exactly resemble the young hyphee of a fungus . These l atter were in al l probabilityderived from a fungus grow ing in the plan t as a feature of i ts decay . The fact , however,that the l arger cel l s of the medulla branch
,permi ts me to cons ider that some of the casts
,
at least , bel onged to a secondary plexus of filamen t s which were in all e ssenti al respects
the same as in N . Logam’
or N . laxam.
Spores are abundant. These bodies are of a reddish-brown color,measure ,
u in
diameter and are often aggregated into dense , spherical mass es of reddish brown . resinous
looking substance . To thi s I would refer the spherical masses of a s imil ar characteralready noted as occurring
,
° in bo th N . Logom'
and N . crassum,and i t seems highly probabl e
that they were derived,in each case
,from associated fungi .
The fin e stri at ion or transverse marking on the casts , as original ly pointed out by
Mr. E theridge ,1 has been noted by me in more than one case . It i s not
,however, a constant
feature,but occurs on ly now and then . If such mark ing represented structure in the cel l
wall,we might reasonably expect to find it , if not on the casts of al l the cell s, at least on
so many of them as to leave no doubt in our minds relative to its proper connection . Ou
the other hand,such markings are di st inct from the ordinary striation of the cel l wall and
their pos ition i s variable . They resemble in fact markings made upon the casts by pressure of some external structure exerted through the cell w al l . In my last communication
on this pl ant,
2 I expressed a doubt as to these markings representing° any structure in the
cel l wall , and from'
more recent examinations I do not hesitate to express the bel i ef that
that they are in reality caused by the filamen ts of the intercellul ar plexus .
From the facts stated above , i t would appear that there i s ample reason for confirm
ing the position al ready assigned to thi s pl ant. It may be only another condit ion of N .
Logaf
ni ; but this , in View of the highly altered nature of the specimens so far obtained ,cannot be defin itely affirmed,
and for the presen t , therefore , i t must necessari ly remainunder its present specific name .
NEMATOXYLON CRASSUM , D n .
The original description of this plant is as follow s 3
Fragments of wood w ith a smooth , thin bark and a tissue wholly composed of
elongated cyl indrical cel ls w ith irregular pores or markings . No pith,medul lary rays , n or
rings of grow th .
”
1 Quart. Ju’l. Geo l . Soc.,Aug.
,188 1 , 49 2 fig. 4 .
2 Trans . R . S. C.,v i . iv . 43.
3
Quart. Jn ’l. Geol. Soc.
,Nov .
,1863, 466 .
2 2 PENHALLOW ON
The question of decay cannot be regarded as a factor in the present case since therei s no al terat ion of structure such as it would be l iable to produce
,and in consequence
,I
find that the organic matter has not suffered redistribution,but occupies its original
pos ition . I have stated that the cel l wal l s are thin . This i s true w ith reference to thecarbonaceous residue , but on the whol e , the wall s, as they appear in the specimens , arevery thick and the cel l cav at ies small or none . This great increase of thickness is stated
,
in the original description cited,to be due to a l igneous deposit . ”
The appearance of the cell s is just that exhibited by a cross section of Laminariastained w i th logwood, in which a thin outer wal l is seen to be stained , whi le the inner
and thicker wal l remains col orl ess,show ing° an obvious differentiat ion of the cellulose
substance . In N . crassum a s imilar differenti at i on may have been developed,and the
inner th ick l ayer may have become replaced by the sil iceou s cast as now found .
Treatment of a section w ith hydrochloric acid discloses the presence of calc ite , whichis almos t whol ly located in the intercellular regions
,as upon its removal the whol e
sect ion breaks up into separat e cel ls .
In longi tudinal secti on the cell s are found to be tubular, non-septate and somewhat
strongly vermicular , rather more so, perhaps , than in N . Legan i. The open tracts are nowseen to be somewhat elongated longitudinally so that they become two to four t imes as
long as broad . The si l iceous deposits are also seen to be continuous , although embracingthe fractures peculiar to such formations . These frac tures are the many narrow ,
tortuou s
lines'
or pores of the original description ; and the deposit s , as a whol e , are the coun terparts
of those sil i ceous c asts upon which the description of N . Hicksz’
z'
i s based .
The most significan t fact s o far observed , consi sts of the di scovery of a distinctly
branching sys tem,similar in it s general character to that of N . Logum
‘
,though differing
from it in some important respects . In one case I found a branch projecting from
the side of a large cell w ith a diameter of of 11 and a length to the point where cut
off, of abou t 35 ,u . Two other branches near together were each ,
u two more were
,u and
,u ; another, ,
u in diameter . These were al l I could find w ithin thi s
range of dimensions,and al l
,w i th one exception , were found in transverse section .
Numerous other secondary filamen ts may be readily observed , espec ially in cross section ,and they are found to have a diameter which varie s but l i ttle from 1 0 ,
u.. It is , therefore ,cl ear that the larger cell s of thi s pl ant branch into a secondary plexus as in N . Logum
'
,
and as all of the instances,i n which the branches were seen to emanate from the larger
cells,occurred in the open tracts above described , i t would appear that these latter serve
as the special regions in which the branching is effected , as in N . Logafl i . My measure
ments show,however
,that the secondary filamen ts of thi s latter plant are smaller on the
average,much more uniform in size , and more numerous than in the pl ant now under
cons ideration ; and thi s explains what i s stated in the original description , th at the cellsare destitute of their (N . Legam
’
) peculiar markings .
”
The silicified thicken ings of the cel ls are seen in the longitudinal section to be con
t inuous,though traversed by occasional fissures, the
“ tortuous l ines or pores of the
original description as pointed out above . So far , none of the specimens I have examined
show any evidence of structural markings in the cel l wal ls , which are perfectly continuous .
I have,however
,frequently noted small round bodies of a refract ive nature and a deep
reddish brown color,suggesting small aggregations of res inous matter elsewhere referred
DEVONIAN PLANTS . 2 8
to as associated w ith N . Logum'
. Their exact nature remains doubtful . They are usuallyfound disposed in the cell in l inear serie s of two to twelve or more . They are in al l casesquite di stinct from the cell wall . Bodies of the same kind have also been seen , thoughless frequently, in N . Logan i, and abundantly in N. Hicksii, where they are obviously com
posed of pores .
From the above i t i s eviden t that our plant i s a Nemaphyton ,though it differs from
N . Logan i in important respects . It approaches mo re nearly to N . laxum,but again differs
from it in its more compact structure,greater unifo rmity of siz e in i ts cel ls , and in its less
prominent intercellular plexus . We may,therefore
,regard i t as a distinct species for
which I would retain the name crassum as properly descriptive .
A revised description would be as follows
NEMATOPHYTON GRASSUM,Pen .
Nematoxg/lon crassum, Dn .
Growth rings pi th and radial tracts none . The plant whol ly composed ofthin-walled
,structureless
,vermicular and non - septate cell s which branch into a
secondary plexus . Open tracts frequent , and of irregular size, in which the branching° chiefly occurs . Cel l s of the medulla rather uniform and thick walled— wall
double— 35 14 in diameter . Cells of the hyphal structure vari able, from 2,u to 10
,u
in diameter .
Specimens found only in fragments . From the M iddle Erian of Gaspe.
CELLULOXLYON PRIM Z EVUM ,D n .
In the course of my examinat ions of Nematophyt on during° the past two years , certa in
pecul iari tie s of structure due to alteration in the distribution of the organic matter attractedattention , and suggested their possible identity w ith the structure of certain foss il s
already brought to my notice by Sir Wm. Dawson , under the name of Celluloxylon
primcevum. These latter have therefore been subjected to a more cri ticalexamination w itha View of determining if they are in reality di st inct specie s , or merely altered forms ofs ome other plant . As a prel iminary to thi s examination , 1 may detai l the peculiaritie s
of structure in Nematophyton above referred t o .
NEMATOPHYTON .
In most of the specimens of Nematophyton e xamined by me , the tubular character of
the cell s i s so perfectly preserved as to admit of no doubt concerning their correct form and
size . In section taken from Very highly silicified and crystall ine specimens , however, i t
i s found that the infiltrat ed sil ica has often so far repl aced the organic matter as to leave
not the faintest trace of cellul ar structure,and very frequently no trace of organic matter .
In other specimens , various in termediate stages of silificat ion are to be observed in which
both organ ic matter and cel lular structure are more or less conspicuous , but of an
obviously altered character . In many case s i t has been found that the infiltrat ion of
sil iceousmat ter,under certain conditi ons
,has resulted in its deposi ti on in a distinctly
crystal line form which fills the tubul ar cel l s throughout . In al l such‘
cases I have
2 4 PENHALLOW ON
noted a variable tendency towards the redi stribution of the organ ic matter,w i th a
consequent bre aking up of the normal structure and its replacemen t by a granulated ,carbonaceous substance which always tends to be determined along the l ine s of contact
between contiguous crystal s . It i s obvious,therefore
,that i f the preper condi t ion s of
structure are presen t in the first instance,together w ith sufficien t grow th in the crystal s,
the organ ic matter w i l l n o t only suffer compl ete redistribution,but at the same time w i l l
take up such pos itions as to produce a false cel lular structure which w i l l have the samegeneral character in both longitudinal and transverse s ecti ons although
,in the former,
there w i l l always be a t enden cy for the false cell s t o be di stributed in l ines , as determined
by the direct ion of the cells from which they were derived . This view ,we find,
was
advanced by Sir Wm . Daw son in one of his e arl i est papers on Prototaxi tes , when he
pointed out that, In parts of the l arger trunks,as is usual w i th fos sil w oods
,it has been
replaced by a concret ionary structure,w h y that pseudo -cel lul ar structure which pro
ceeds from the formation o f granular crystals of sil i ca in the midst of the tissues .
In fossil s woods the carbonaceous matter,being° reduced to a pulpy mass
,some
times partly becomes moulded on the surfaces of hexagon al or granul ar crystal s in such a
manner as to deceive , very readily , an observer not aware of this circumstance .
” 1
The st atements thus made admit of ready confirmat ion ,since it i s precise ly what
occurs in many specimens of Nematophyton,and not only do we find plants in which the
entire structure i s thus transformed,but in others
,where the normal structure i s pre
served , there are often found local i zed tract s w i thin which such alteration has taken
place . From facts brought to my notic e,I am led to consider a more or les s advanced
condition of decay as preceding° the impregnation by sil ica,and thus e ssential to the
changes noted .
These statements are partly based upon the follow ing observation s , which w i ll serveto indicate the correctness of my posit ion .
No . 1 .
—A transverse section . The organic matter was found to be nearly eliminated ,but sti l l enough was present to show i t sredist rib u t ion to such an extent as to completely
destroy the normal structure and give rise to a false cel lular structure , closely resembling
that of Celluloxylon in al l its essenti al features . Upon measurement it was found that ten
cells,selected at random
,gave a mean diameter of 60
,u and an extreme variation of from
40 ,U to 9 0
,u.
N0 . 2 .
—A silicified specimen in which the organ ic matter was much more abundant ,but subj ected to precisely the same redistribution and closely resembling Celluloxylon .
Ten measurements gave an average diameter of 62,u and an extreme vari ation from 40 ,
u
to 130,u .
NO. 3 .
- A sicilified specimen in which the tubular cell s were occasionally found , but
for the most par t the organic matte r was redistributed as in the previous cases . Tenmeasurements gave an average diameter of 61 )u and an extreme variat ion of from 40
,u to
9 0,u . In this specimen i t was also noted that stil l l arger cel ls were obviously formed by
coalescence of two or more smaller cell s,and this fact explains the unusually large one
observed in No . 2 .
No . 4.— A silicified specimen in which the normal s tructure was largely preserved,
1 Mon th . Mic. Jn ’l.,x . 6 9 , 70.
2 6 PENHALLOW ON
An examination of the internal structure shows that the follow ing characters are
Common to all the sect ions . The s tructure i s coarsely cellular. In transverse sectionthe cell s are v ari able in size , averaging about 5 0 ,
u in di ameter . The wal l s are notwel l defin ed and continuous , but are often poorly defined and consist o f a granulated
carbonaceous substance which often becomes irregularly scattered,sometimes intruding
upon the cel l cavity , though in most cases localized along° defin ite l ine s . We have found
cells of only one kind, and are therefore unable to confirm the statement of the original
description to the effec t that the appearance of rings of growth i s caused by l arge cellsdi sposed in concentric , narrow bands between the w ider bands of fin e , fib rous ti ssue ,
”
although from analogy we should infer that this might have been the case in the original
stem .
In longitudinal sect ion the cell s are found to present the same appearance as to their
general charact eristi cs,as i n the transverse section
,and al so a marked similarity in size
measuring° about 5 0 ,u in diameter . There is , however , a more or less marked tendency , as
noted in the original description , for the cel l s t o fal l into longitudinal rows which follow
a somewhat vermicular course . This i s mos t conspicuous under a low power, althoughto be observed
,in many cases , under a obj ective .
My measurements show that , as determined from cel ls taken at random ,the average
size in transverse section is 48 /x, the range being from 40 ,u to 70 ,
U. In longitudinal
section , the same number of measurements give an average of 5 4 ,u, and an extreme range
between 30,u and 70 ,
u .
These facts , taken in connection w ith the similari ty here noted be tween this plant andNematophyton in certain conditions
,lead to the conclusion that it i s only a highly altered
condition of thi s l atter . This View i s also supported by the Opinion expressed some timesin ce by Sir Wm . Dawson that Oelluloxlon i s al lied to Proto tax ites .
” 1
Furthermore,while it i s quite possible that this may have been a distinc t species
which I have no present means of proving , the fact that it occurs in the M iddle Erianand not in the lower horizon , where alone N . Lagam
’
has been found,together w ith the
probabili ty that the radial openings of N . Logam’
were represented here by scattered,open
areas of smal l s ize as in N . crassum, wou ld lead one to refer it , for the present at least , to
the latter species .
NEMATOXYLON TENUE , D a .
This plant was original ly described by Sir Wm . Dawson,as fo llows 2
Slender stems w ith thick , coaly bark and woody fib res of much smaller diameter
than in the last species (N . crassum) and marked w i th minute dots .
” In connection w ith
this it was also stated that the stems of thi s species are small,n o t exceeding° half an inch
in diameter, but are distinctly surrounded by a thick , shin ing , coaly bark . The wood iscalc ified and appears to be perfectly homogeneous . It may be doubted i f this
species has any real affin ity w i th the last (N . crassum) , but they correspond in their
negative characters , and both appear to indicate the exi stence of certain woody plants of
singularly simple and homogeneous structure .
”
1 Geolog. Surv . of Canada,Foss i l Plan ts, part i i , p. 126.
2Quart. Jn ’l. Geol . Soc.
,Nov . 1863
, 46 7.
DEVONIAN PLANTS . 2 7
My first examination of sections of thi s plant,showed that I had to deal w ith a
s truc ture of much fin er quality than found in any of the species of Nemat ophyton ,and I
was at first led to consider tha t i t might be a plant of very different type . Upon closer
inspection , however, thi s view required important modificat ion and , as w i ll be seen from
the fol low ing description , i t now seems most probable that we have to deal w ith anorganism which ,
‘
if n ot generical ly related,is at least all ied to Nematophy ton through the
general character of its structure .
The specimens examined by me are al l somewhat highly cry stalline and the structurehas , i n consequence , suffered important modificat ion s which , although the general form
and disposition of the cel ls can s t ill be made out,have tended to obscure the structure
and render detai ls difficult of determination . The materi al is also , in consequence of itscrystall in e character
,very friable
,and this has seriously interfered w ith securing sections
of sufficien t thinness to make a close examination possible .
In transverse section the structure is found to consist of small and closely compacted
cells— the tissue being,° so dense as to make the contiguous cel ls appear in most intimate
contact . This relation i s probably the resu lt of alteration and not that which existed in
the grow ing plant,since cells are found at interval s which are as distinct as in Nemato
phyton , while it i s also evident from the oblique section of many , that they were not al l
paral lel to the axi s of growth .
The cel l wall s are thin , and it is also a fact of some interest , in this connection , thatthe tissue presents almost the exact appearance of the intercel lular structure seen in cross
secti ons of N . Logani, w ith reference to size , form and general disposition of the cel l s and
thickness of the walls . Occasional ly , somewhat linear tracts are found , w ithin which the
cells follow a direction transverse to the axi s of growth .
Scattered through the otherw ise homogeneous tissue at rather w ide intervals , are
relatively large,rounded or oval openings . These , so far as can be determined at present ,
appear to be structureless , i .e . there i s no separate wal l , nor are there any surrounding
cell s such as form the resin passages of modern plants . They measure 1 0 ,u in
diameter and their proper sign ifican ce i s at present a matter of doubt,although the in
vari able presen ce in them of highly crystalline sil ica suggests that they may have been
caused by mechanical separation of the surrounding cell s . Smal l and irregular open
tracts are also to be seen in the ti ssue,similar
,although much smaller
,to tho se in N .
crassum.
In longitudinal sect ion the cel ls are found to be distinctly vermicular,and although
the more compact nature of the structure tends to render them less sinuous than in eitherN . Logam
’
or N . c'rassmn ,ye t the peculiar way in which the cells interlace and sometimes
cross one another very abruptly,leaves no room for doubt upon this point . Furthermore
,
the cell s are n on -septate and in diameter are tolerably uniform,measuring 5 — 8 ,
u. In
this latter we again n otice a curious resemblance to the intercellular structure of both
N . Logam’
and N . erassum, and also of N [a:wm. In N . Logam’
the filamen t s show a variation
in size ranging N. In N . larr'
um the corresponding structures range 3 — 9,u
and in N . crassum 2 — 1 0,u, so that the cel ls of the medulla in this plant may be fairly
regarded as essentially of the same size . Moreover, in N . laxum, i t frequently happens
that the secondary filamen t s constitute the on ly s tructure w ithin fairly large areas,and in such cases these cell s are generally found to run paral lel to the axi s of growth
2 8 PENHALLOW. ON
and form a very compact structure which presents a most striking resemblance to the
longitudinal structure of the plant now under considerat ion )
Th e rounded openings , observed in transverse section , are here seen to be continuou stubes filled w ith highly crystalline matter , while the open tracts appear as rounded and
small areas of irregular size and form . Thebranching of the cel l s has not as yet beendetermined as ful ly as might be desire d . In only one case thus far have we found thelarge cell s to branch
,but thi s w as of so pronounced a nature as to admit of n o questi on .
What appear to be secondary filamen t s , having a diameter about one-fifth that of thelarge cells
,have been observed in both transverse and l ongitudinal secti ons
,in every case
appearing in the open tracts above described . While , therefore , it s eems probabl e that
such an in t ercel lular structure exists , I must , for the present , speak w ith some reserve
on this point .
The minute dots on the cell wall s,referred to in the original descripti on
,cannot
be regarded as having any structural sign ifican ce, and we have so far found the wal ls to
be wholly structureless . Many of the cel ls show irregularly scattered,dark bodies which
,
of variable size, are sometimes spherical , again di st inctly angular . The material of whichthey are composed has been so altered as to render their true character a matter of somedoub t ; but from what has been observed in the various species of Nematophyton thus far
described,i t i s quite probable that they have similarly originated from spores .
The evidence thus 1ar obtained points , w ith considerabl e force , to an affin ity w ith
Nematophyton to which genus I would transfer it,retaining° the specific name original ly
g iven .
GE NUS .
— NEMATOPHYTON , D n .
Quart . Jn ’l. Geolog . Soc . XV , 484 ; Nov ., 1862 , 29 9 , 30 7 , 326 ; Nov .
, 1 863 , 466 , 467 ;
May ,1 88 1 , 302 ; Aug , 1 881 , 482 ; May, 1 8 82 , 1 04 ; Geolog . Surv . of Can .
, 1 86 3, 40 1 ; 1 871 ,
1 6 and 20 ; 1 88 2 , I I , 9 7 , 1 07 ; Can . Nat .V,9 ; VI , (New Ser . ) VI I , 1 73 ; Ann . and
Mag . Nat . Hi st . 5 , IX, 5 9 ; M . Mic . .I n’l. VI I I , 1 60 ; X,
66,2 08 ; XI , 83 ; Quart . Jn
’l. Mic .
Soc . X I I I,313 ; Amer . Nat . V, 1 85 , 245 ; Geolog . Hist . of Plants
,2 1
,42 ; Tran s . Roy . Soc .
Can .
,VI
,iv
, 27 Proc . Amer . Ass . A dv . Sci ,1 85 6 .
Plants of arborescent form from a b ran chin g , root-l ike base . Stem branching,often
exceeding 1 ° in diameter . Structure composed of unj ointed,interlacing
,structureless
cell s which branch into an in tercel lul ar system o f small and clo sely -woven filamen t s .
1 .
—N . LOGAN I , D n .
Pro tolaxiles Logam'
, Dn .
i’Vemalop/tycus Logani, Carr .
Stem distinguished by its concentri c layers , which simulate an exogenous
structure ; i rregular and disj ointed radial openings of vari able length ,and often a
thin corti cal layer appearing in the form of coal .
Cells of the medulla, thick-wal led , 1 3 0 5 ,u in diameter
,interwoven
,loosely
aggregated and turning into the radial spaces . Hyphal structure composed of
bran ching filamen t s 4 9 ,u in diameter, which branch from the cell s of the
medull a and form a closely-woven intercel lul ar plexus .
8 0 PENHALLOW ON DEVONIAN PLANTS.
DESCR IPTION or F IGURES .
PLATE I .
F IG. 1 .—Nematophyton Logam
’
.
— Transverse sect ion , showing convers ion of the normal in to a pseudo-ce l lular
structure through crystal l i z ation . Taken from a Spec imen also showing normal structure. x 154.
F IG . 2 .— Nematophy ton. crassum — Transverse section showing effects of crystal l i z ation . X 154.
F IG . 3.— Nema tophylon crasswn f’ —Long i tudinal section showing tendency of false cel ls to fo l low l ines of n ormalstructure. x 154.
FI G. 4.— Nema tophyton Logani. -Long i tudinal section of normal structure showing the secondary filaments cross ingt he ce l ls of the medul la. x 154 .
F IGS . 5 6 .
— Transverse and long i tudinal sections of Nematophyton crassum. Normal . x 154 .
PLATE II .
FlG. 1 .— Nematophyton Bichait .— Showing s i l iceous casts wi th carb onaceous fragmen ts adherent to them. x 2 10.
Fro. 2 .— Nematophylon tenue.— Longitudina1 sect ion , showing general character of the structure . One of the largetubular open ings is seen in the cen tre . x 300 .
SECTION IV, 1889 . 8 1 TRANS . ROY . Soc . CANADA .
I I I .
—0 n New Spec ies of FossilSponges from the S iluro-Cambr'ian a t L it tle Metis
on the Lower St . Lawren ce. By SI R J . WILLIAM DAW SON,LL .D . ,
&c .
( Including Notes on the Specimens, by DR. G. J . H INDE , [Plate I I I .]
( Presen ted May 7 ,
The specimens described in the follow ing paper show the exi stence of a rich faunaof si li ceous sponges
,more especi al ly of the genus Protospong z
’
a of Salter, on the muddy
sea bottoms of the Si luro-Cambrian per i od, and in that early portion of this period repre
sented by the Quebec series of Logan , and probably by the Levi s divi sion of the group .
1
They are also remarkable as i l lustrating the structures and habit of these ancient formsand the manner of their preservati on .
The beds at Litt le Meti s have hitherto been very unproductive of fossil s , but in thesummer of 1 887, Dr . B. .I . Harrington , was so fortunate as to find a bed of black
shal e rich in remains of sponges, hitherto unknown in these rock s , and having made
known the fact to the writer, we Visited the place several times and made col lections of
these interesting fossi ls,which are now in the Peter Redpath Museum . Subsequently ,
in the summer of 1 888 , more extensive excavations were made in the reefs of shale ex
posed at low tide,and it was found that the depos its of fossil sponges are l imited, so far
as could then be observed , to two thin bands , each of them scarcely more than two inches
in th ickness, in the black shales near the head of L it tle Metis Bay . From these bands,
by carefully tracing them along,
° the coast and excavatingwhere the exposures were suffi
cien tly good , a large quanti ty of materi al was obtained . Thi s was first careful ly workedover by the writer and subsequently submitted to Dr . G . J . Hinde , of London ,whose results are embodied in the description s of the species in the present paper .
Late r explorat ion showed that t he re are remains of spong es in other beds rangingthrough a vertical thickness of about forty feet of the shales but not so abundantly as in
the layers previously explored .
Li ttle Meti s Bay presents a good secti on of rocks of the Quebec group,in cluding
sandstones,slates and conglomerates sim i l ar to those which characterise thi s series of
beds alon g the south shore of the St . Law rence . The distribution of these beds i s shownin the accompanying map
,
2 from which i t w il l be seen that the general dips are to the
south-eastward , and that there appear to be four bands of sandstone and conglomerate sepa
rated from each other by i nterven ing shales,often of dark colours and carbonaceous
,but
sometimes dolomitic,and in many places show ing gray and red colours . Assuming the
series from the Lighthouse Point to be an ascending one , the thickness of beds exposedat t he head of the bay would be more than feet ; but it i s n o t improbable that
1 Logan , Geo logy of Canada , 1863 ; Se lwyn , Report Geo]. Survey , 18 77-78 ; E l ls , I bid.,1 880 -8 2 ° Lapwort h ,
Canadian Graptol i tes, Tran s . Roy . Soc . Can .,1886 .
“1 For the geograph ical part of the map on the fo l lowing page I am indeb ted to D r. E l ls of the Geo log ical Survey .
8 2 DAWSON'
AND HINDE
there may be repetition s by faults or fo l ding . The sandstones and shales of Ligh thousfPoin t contain Ret z
'
olites enszformz’
s‘ o f Hal l , many trail s of worms , an d worm castings of
the type of Arem’
colz’
tes sp z'
mlz'
s. The sandstones of Moun t Mi sery contain fragments ofRetiolz
'
les ensz’
formis. The shales on the south side of the bay,presumably near the upper
part of the series exposed , contain the sponges in question , a species of Lin n arsson ia not
distinguishable external ly from Obolella pretiose of Bill ings , and the slender branching
fucoid which I have described as Bulhotrephz'
s
Sketch map of L i ttle Metis Bay and v ic in i ty, showing local i ty of Fossi l Sponges .
(Scale about 2 inches to a m i le. )
N0 rE .—The series from the Church toMt . Misery is probab ly descending and conformab le ; bu t the sandstones forming
the cl iff near MeNider's Brook to the eastward, are not improb ably those of Mt . Misery thrown to the southward by a fault.and not as would appear from the map a continuation of those near the Church , wh ich probab ly pas s in land of them.
In the conglomerate s are limestone boulders , holding fragments of Tri lobites of thegenus Solenopleum and other foss il s ; but these seem to be of Lower Cambrian age , or
considerably older than the beds in which they occur .
There can be no doubt , from the stratigraphical posi tion of these beds , that theybelong to the Quebec group of Sir W . E . Logan . This i s , however, now known toinclude
,on the Lower St . Lawrence , beds ranging from the Calci ferous (Tremadoc) to the
Trenton (Bala) , and the beds are so much plicated t hat it i s often difficult to unravel theircomplexities of arrangement . At Metis, the evidence of the pebbles in the conglomerates
ind icates that they are newer than the Lower Cambrian , and the few fossi l s found in the
sandstones and shales would tend to place them at or near the base of the Levi s division,
or approximately on the horizon of the Chazy, equivalent to the Engli sh Arenig .
Lapworth , in hi s paper on Canadian Graptolites,” 3 suggests that the sandstones holding°
Ret iolites may be older than this ; but hitherto we have not found at Met is the charac
lden t ified b y Lapworth .
2 Notes on Spec imens in the Peter Redpath Museum,18 88 .
3 Trans. Roy . Soc. Can.,1886 .
8 4 DAWSON AND HINDE
The fol low ing i s a more detail ed sect ion of part of the second divi sion above,in
descending order, measured on the surface of the outcrop
I NCH.
B lack shaleDolom i tic b and (weather ing yel low)Gray and b lack shalesDo lom i tic b andB lack shaleGray and b lack shalesB lack shaleGray and b lack shalesBlack shale ( sponges,
A third sponge-l ayer was found in the lower beds, about 30 feet vertical ly , or 5 0
feet measured on the shore , below the l ast dolomiti c band . The sponges contained inthe l ayers mentioned above
,are apparent ly confin ed to a small thickness of the shale
,
but in this are quite abundan t . They are perfectly flat ten ed, and their spicules are
replaced by pyrite but in some cases they retain the outl ine of thei r form , and have their
root spi cules attached . The spicules were , no doubt , originally s i li ceous , but they haveshared the chemical change experienced by other fossi l s in thi s bed
,whereby they have
lost their si liceous matter and have had pyrite deposited in its place . In some cases,also
,
the pyritised spicules have been frosted w ith minute crystals of the same substance,
greatly en larging their size and giving them a mossy appearance . Thi s pyritisation of
Spicules , once probably sil i ceous , i s not uncommon in Palaeozoic rocks , and it arises from
the soluble condition of the si l ic a in sponges , and i ts association w ith organic matter,which
,in some modern sponges ; as in Hyalonema, enters into the composition of the
spicule i tse l f. These spi cu les , therefore , suffer the same change w i th the calcareou sshells associ ated w i th them .
Many of the sponges in these beds were enti re when entombed . Others are decayed
and parti al ly broken up,and there are some surfaces covered w ith confused patches of
loose spicules arising from the disintegration of many specimens .
Some remarks are perhaps necessary here respecting° the appearance of sponges in
different states of preservation . Of course the original textures of sponges are different,
and those which have consol idated spicules orfirm external cortex , are those most l ikely
to retain thei r original forms . Even the looser kinds of sponges , however, may unde r
certain circumstances,preserve their rotundity of form . In this case they usual ly show
extern al markings,but not so wel l internal structure, unless when sli ced . Ou the other
hand.when completely flat ten ed
,which i s usually the case in shaly beds
,only an out
line of the general shape remains,and sometimes not even th is , while the forms and in
part the arrangement of the spicules are usually apparent . Farther,the hol low and
thin-walled species are more l i able t o be completely flat ten ed, though in some cases , as
in the Devoni an Dictyospongiee , they may retain thei r form . I t was thi s property, andthe membranous appearance of the outer Coat
,that for a l ong time sustained the beli e f
that these l ast were plants rather than sponges .
In the case of the sponges procured in the shales at Li ttle Metis , perfect flat ten ing
has occurred,and in many cases the spicules have been separated , and appear as mere
B lack and gray shales, wi th rema ins of spongesin some layersDo lom i t ic b andB lack and gray shalesDo lom it ic b and .
B lack and gray sha lesBlack and gray shales (sponges, &c.)Black andgray shales,with th in , in terrupteddo lomi tic layers as b efore, to b ase of the div is ion .
ON FOSSIL SPONGES FROM METIS. 8 5
spicular patches or layers . In other instances,however
,they remain approx imately in
their n atural position , and even the general outl ine of the form can be observed .
The fol low ing additional remarks as to the state of preservation and characters ofthe specimens are from notes made by Dr . Gr. .I . Hinde
,F .G S .
The Meti s specimens are specially interesting, since they throw much fresh lighton the character of the earl i est known forms of these organi sms
,and their di scovery i s
the more Opportune from the fact that our know l edge of the exi sting hexactinell id
sponges— the group to which all,or nearly al l
,these fo ssi l s belong— has been vastly
incre ased by the work of Prof F . E . Schulze , of Berlin , on the hexact inelled sponges
dredged up by the Chal lenger Expedition , and thus we are now better enabled than
hitherto to compare the fossi l and the recent forms .
In the present specimens,the amorphous or soluble si l i ca
,of which their spicular
skeletons were originally composed,has entirely disappeared
,and the spi cules now con
si st of i ron pyrites . This replacement by pyrites i s of common occurrence,more parti
cularly in a matrix of black shales ; for example , the earl iest known sponge , Protospong ia
fenestrata, Salte r, from the Cambrian rocks of South Wales , i s i n the same mineral condi
tion , and in a nearly simil ar matrix , as the specimens from the Quebec group and the
Utica shale . When thus replaced , the general outline of the larger spicules i s fai rly
di stinct,but where the spicules are minute
,and in close proximity to each other, their
individual outlines are blurred by the tendency of the crystal s of the replacing pyrites
to amalgamate together so as to form a continuous film of the mineral in which the fin er
spicular structure s are quite indistinguishable . This coalescence of the pyrites l ikew isemakes i t very difficult to determine whether the spi cular elements of the sponge were
organically soldered together into a sil iceous mesh,or whe ther they were merely held i n
thei r natural positions by the soft animal structures,and owe thei r present union t o
subsequent fossi l isation .
Next to the chemical changes,we have to take into account those produced on the
original structures of these sponges by what may be termed the mechanical influen ces
of fossil i sation . There can be no doubt that they were hol low sacci -form eL y asi-form
structures w ith very deli cate walls of spicular ti ssue , support ing'
the soft animal mem
branes . They ex i sted at the surface of the soft ooze of the sea-bottom , and their basal
portion s were probably embedded in it . They were furnished w ith elongated spiculeswhose extension into the mud served to anchor them in one spot . After the death of the
an imal , and the decay of the soft tissues , the del i cate skeletal framework would be grad
ually buried in the accumulat ing sediments , unti l by their weight it became completelyflat tened . Under favorable ci rcumstances
,the outl ine of the sponge and the n atural
arrangement of the spicular skeleton would be preserved , and thi s i s fortunately the
case w ith the specimens of Cyathophycus from the Uti ca shale , and w ith some of the speci
mens of Pro tospongia from Metis . More frequently , however , probably ow ing° to currents
and other causes acting at the surface of the ooze,the skeletal framework i s bartially 0 1
°
wholly broken up, so that only small patches of the connected skeleton ,or merely the
dislo cated and detached spi cule s irregularly scattered over the rock surface , remain for
determination , and this i s the present condition of the majority of the specimens from the
Quebec group . For some reason, probably connected w i th the arenaceous character of
the rock in which they occur,the nearly all ied sponges belonging to the Devonian genus
8 6 DAWSON AND HI NDE
D ictyophy ton ,Hall , usual ly retai n their outer forms complete— that i s , w ithout being
compressed— but most of these sponges exhibit only internal casts of their spicular
ske leton,so that at present we know very l ittle of thei r origin al structures .
As already mentioned,ne arly al l these Quebec sponges belong to the suborder of
the Hexact in ellidae, in whi ch the fundamental type or elementary spicule o f the skeleton
consists of six equal rays,radiating from a common centre at right angles to each other
,
forming three equal axes . But thi s typical form i s subject to great modificat ion s through
the unequal development or even suppression of one or more of the individual rays , so
that spi cules w i th hy e, four, three , or merely tw o rays on ly , are frequently present , and
in the same species of sponge several modified forms of spi cules may be found . Now ,
i n the compressed condition in which the Quebec sponges occur,we can , as a rule ,
only perceive those rays of the spicules which l ie in the exposed plane of the rock ; these
are generally the four tran sverse rays of the normal spicule , but the two rays forming the
ax is at right angles to the transverse rays,are not l ikely to be distinguished , for one
would be concealed in the matrix immediately beneath the transverse ray s,whi lst the
other,projectin g above the exposed surface
,would inevitably be broken away . Con se
quently it is very difficult t o determine posit ive ly whether the forms w ith four transverse
rays exposed on the plane of the sponge-wall,represent the entire sp icule— in which
case it would be termed cruciform,
— or whether one or both of the other rays of the
normal spicules were original ly present . Judging by the an alogy of all ied recent forms,
i t i s probable that in most cases the se spicule s were furnished w i th'
a fifth ray at right
angles to the other four . In the example s of Oyathophycus from the Utica shale , are
di stinct traces of a fifth ray in some of the l arger spicules , and it can also be seen in
detached spicules from the Quebec group .
In both recent and fossi l hexactinell ids,many of the elongated filiform anchoring
spicules termin ate distinctly in four short recurved rays,and are thus fiv e-rayed spicules
i n which one ray i s gre atly developed ; but i n other instances they have simple blunt‘
or
pointed ends,and may thus represent only one ray or one axi s of the normal spicule .
Wi th the excep t ion of two species,all the anchoring spicules present in the Quebec
sponges seem to be merely pointed at their distal ends . In one species they are complex,
consi sting of several filamen t s tw isted spirally .
In recent hexact inel l id sponges , in addition to the spicules forming° the regular
framework of the ske leton , there are much smaller spicules of varied forms , imbedded in
the soft tissues . These , generally known as flesh -spicules,are very seldom met w i th in
the fossi l condition,but i t i s not improbable that the del icate film of pyrites
,seen in
places on the surface of the Quebec sponges , may arise from the replacement o f the flesh
spicule s by this mineral .
The specie s of sponges noti ced below hav e been submitted to D 1°. Hinde , author
of the Bri ti sh Museum , Catalogue of Fossi l Sponges ,” and the fol low ing descriptions
are largely based on his no te s on the specimens . The magn ified tracings of the
structure s in the text have usually been drawn under the camera to one scale (about
fiv e times the natural si ze) . The restorations are based on compari son of the more
perfect Specimens,some o f which are represented from photographs in Plate III . I t
i s to be observed that the smaller cruci form spi cules,though usually displaced ,
were. i n the l iving animals symmetrically arranged in the meshes . These smal ler
8 8 DAWSON AND HINDE
spaces . The rays of the l arger spi cules consti tute the boundaries of the larger squares,
and w i th in these , se condary and smaller squares are marked out by smal ler spicules .Judging by the length of the rays of the larger spicules
,the larger squares w ould be
about 5 mm . in diameter, whilst the smallest do not exceed 1 mm . The rays of theindividual spicules sl ightly overlap , and i t i s probable that they may have been l ightly
cemented by si l i ca at the points of contact . The rays of the larger spicules are con ic al,
gradually tapering° from the cen tral node to the pointed extrem ity whils t the rays of
the smaller spicules appear to be nearly cyl indrical . For the purposes of th is paper
the different orders of spicules,in these sponges
,may be designated as primary
,secondary
and tertiary spicules .
From the base of the sponge,four sl ender elongated filiform spicules proj ect . They
are approx imately cylindrical,pointed at both ends
,from to mm . in thickness
,and
from 5 0 to 70 mm . in len gth . Their proximal ends are inserted apparen tly in the basal
FI G. 4.— Protospongta tetra'
nema Osculum en larged,and surrounded by m inute spicules.
part only of the sponge , and they project in the same direction , though not in la teral
apposition w i th each other . In perfect spec imens their distal ends converge and un ite
terminally . The root spicules in the l arger specimens are about 6 cm . in l ength .
This specie s i s one of the most abundant at Metis . In some specimens the spicular
framework of the body of the sponge retains in places i ts natural arrangement ; in
others the framework has been almo st entirely broken up, and the constituent spicules
irregularly mingled and compressed together . But in every complete specimen there are
four anchoring spicules occupying the same rel ative position to the framework 0 1° body
wal l of the sponge,thus clearly show ing that they are essenti al to the species . In the
spicules of the body -wallonly four tran sverse rays can be distingui shed , but it i s quit e
possible,as already mentioned
,that a fifth ray may hav e been present . Ou one of the
rock-slabs there is a detached spicule i n which the fragmentary stump of a fifth ray can
be clearly seen projecting from the central node of the transverse rays . The rays in thi sspicule are unusually long .
There can be no hes i tation in placing thi s form in the genus Protospong ia , since the
same arrangement of the spi cu lar mesh -w ork i s presen t in i t as in the type of this genus .
In no other examples of the genus,however
,has the presence of anchoring spicules been
ON FOSSIL SPONGES FROM METIS. 8 9
recogn ised , ow ing, no doubt , to their imperfect state of preservation , and thi s feature
may n owbe reckoned as one of the generic characters . In the present species , however ,these anchoring spicules were very pecul iar, and seem to have consisted of a cruci form
spicu le of which the rays were bent upward and lengthened , forming a stalk for the
sponge . This w ould give a firm attachment,and adapt itsel f to the gradual rise of the
bottom to which the sponge was attached . The mechani cal properties of such an arran
gement of spicula are obviously wel l sui ted to effect their purpose .
Salter, in his original description of Protospong ia from the Cambrian of Wales ,compares it w i th Acan thospon gia of Griffith s from the Si lurian of I reland , the original
specimen of which he had seen ; but says it has six- radiate spicules . He also remarks
that the spicules of Protospon gia seem to be al l in one plane .
1 P. M aj or of Hi ck s i s a stil l
older species, from the Lower Cambrian or Longmynd series , and seemingly of differen t
structure and of much more open texture than that above described . Matthew has
also noticed and figured fragments of Protospon g ia from the Low er Cambrian of St .
John , New Brunsw i ck . The present species , though somewhat later in age than theforegoing
,has the merit of presenting a better state of preservation and better
i l lustrating the general form,and more especi ally the root-spi cules .
The fol low ing remark s are quoted verbatim from Dr . Hinde There are some
differences of opinion as to the character of the spicular mesh-work and the systemati c
posi tion of Protospongia, and fresh l ight on the points con t ested is afforded by the se
Quebec specimens . I t has been doubted whether the body-wall of the sponge merely
consisted of a single l ayer of spicules , or whether thi s layer corresponded to the dermal
l ayer in other sponges of thi s group , and , as in these , was supplemented by an inner
sp icular skeleton . The evidence of the Quebec specimens favors the v iew that the bodywal l of the sponge consi sted only of a single layer of sp icules . Various opinions h ave
likew i se been held as to whether the body- spicules were free , and merely held in their
natural posi tions by the soft an imal ti ssues,or whether they were cemented together by
sil i ca at the points where their rays are in contact . Prof. Sollas , in an able paper on thes tructure and affin it ies of the genus (Quart . Journ . Geol . Soc .
, Vol . XXX , p . asserts
that they are separate,and not uni ted either by envelopment in a common coating or,
by ankylosis whereas it would seem that a certain degree of organ i c union must hav e
exi sted to have al lowed even the partial preservation of the mesh-work of the body-wal l
in the fo ssi l state , and I have regarded the del i cate film of pyrite s , which extends over
the mesh-work in many specimens,as indicatin g a connected spicul ar membrane which
served to hold the larger spi cule s in position . From the study of the Quebec specimens
I stil l think a certain degree of organ ic attachment exi sted where the spicular rays were
in contact,but I am qu i te prepared to admit that it was not of the same complete char
acter as in typical Dictyonine hexactinell ids . Prof. F . E . Schulze has clearly shown that
a certain degree of i rregular coale scence takes place in the body-spicules of undoubted
Lyssakin e sponges , and now that we know that Protospongia was furni shed , l ike most of
the sponges of thi s group,w ith anchorin g spicules
,there is good reason to regard thi s
and the all ied Palaeozoic genera as belonging rather to the Lissakine than t o Dictyonine
hexact inell ids . This i s the position assigned to them by Carter and Sol las .
”
JournalGeol. Soc.
, vol. xx .
4 0 DAWSON AND HINDE
2 .-PROTOSPONG1A MONONEMA, S N .
(F igs . 5 , 6 and 7 . Pl. I I I , fig .
General size about one inch in diameter, originally globular but now flat tened .
Body spicules cruci form and more slender than those of P. tetmnema. Superficialor
defen sive spicules very numerous and somewhat long° and slender,so as to give a h irsute
F1G. 5 .— Protospongia mononema . F IG . 6.
— Protospongia mononema . Cruc iform and pro
Restored. tective Spicules, x 5 .
appearance and in flat ten ed spe cimens often to obscure the body spicules . Root , single ,s tout
,often three inches long , w i th two to four short spreading branches at base . These
terminal spicules are flat t en ed at the extremities . Hinde remarks that some specimens
seem to have two or more anchoring rods but in all or most of the specimens showing
FIG. 7.—Protospongta mononema. Primary, secondaryand tert iary Spinules, x 5 .
thi s appearan ce these seem to have been loose rods dri fted into contact w i th the sponge .
The anchoring rod i n this species i s often increased in thicknesslb y a crust or fros t ing ofpyrite , and thi s would seem to indicate that it had , l ike the modern Hyalon ema, animal
matter as wel l as sil ic a in its composition .
4 2 DAWSON . AND HINDE
4 .—PROTOSPONGIA POLYNEMA, SN .
(Figs . 11 and 1 2 . Pl. II I , fig .
This i s a large sponge in great shapeless flat t ened patches , several inches in diameterthough there are smaller individuals also . Body spicules fin e and slen der, making a very
F IG. 1 1.— Protospongta polynema. Portionof base of large specimen .
open mesh . At base numerous simple root spicules , short, and , in some cases , expanded
at their extremities . Young individuals seem to have been globular and probably sessile,
whi le l arge individuals had a flat base , but the general form is greatly obscured by crush
ing,especially in the l arger specimens .
FIG. 12.— Protowongia polynema. Primary, secondary
and tertiary Spicules, x 5 .
I t may be a quest ion whether two species may not be included under the above
specific name . The l arger specimens have much more open meshes while the smal lerare more hispid . These differences may,
however, depend on age . I have attempted
only a partial restoration of thi s species in fig . 1 1,as the specimens do not show w ith
cert ain ity the'
form of the upper part,which I imagine
,however, had long protective
spicules .
ON FOSSIL SPONGES FROM MET IS. 4 8
5 .—PROTOSPONGIA CYATHI FORM IS, SN .
(Figs . 13 and 14. Pl. I I I fi
F IG. 13.— Protospongia cyathi FIG. 14 .
— Protospongia cyathiformis. Primary , secondaryformis. Restored. and tertiary cruc iformspicules, x 5 .
General form inverted conical . When mature abou t 3 cm . w i de at top and 5 cm .
long° w i thout the anchoring° spicules which are at least an inch long . Top truncate asi f w i th a w ide osculum
,w ith a few short defensive spicules on its margin . Primary
body spicules cruci form w i th long° rays , in some 2 to 3 mm . in length,loosely attached
or free,but forming large rhombic meshes , secondary and tertiary spicules numerous and
deli cate w ith slender arms . Root spicules short , simple , about fiv e Visible i n the most
perfect specimens and passing up to the middl e of the body . Indications of many
interior minute flesh spicules often cons t i tuting;° a pyritised mass, obscuring the meshes .
The oblique character of the transverse spicules deserves n oti ce , but thi s may bethe resul t of compression
,though I think it more likely that it i s an original feature .
This species i s wel l characterised b y i ts form , and by its multitudes of very minute
cruci form spicules . These and the fact of the sponge being often represented by a densepyritous mass indicate a th ick and fleshy body
-wal l .
6 .
—PR0T0 SP0 NGIA DE LI CATULA, SN .
(Fig
FIG. 15 .
—P'rotospongt
'
a delicalula . Restored .
(b) Portion of b ase en larged.
G lobular or obl ong in form , from 1 to 4 cm . in greatest di ameter . Body spicules
cruci form , very numerous, and extremely small . Some specimens show what seems to
4 4 DAWSON AND HINDE
be a w ide osculum above , and very numerous slender anchoring spi cules below . Thereare also indications that
,in mature specimens
,the general form sometimes became cylin
dricalor inverted con ical , though specimens show ing thes e forms are too imperfectly
preserved to show the detail s of structure .
In this species and P. cyal/n’
fo-rmz‘
s,the w all of the body seems to hav e been denser
than in the other spec ies and sometimes to have preserved its outward form,and thi s,
w i th the multi tude of minute spi cules and the undeveloped condition of the spicu lar
meshes of the skeleton , may possibly indicate a generi c di fference .
Ou this specie s Dr . Hinde remarks This sponge has a subcircular outline the
central area i s vacant and there i s often a relatively w ide rim of a blurred mass of iron
pyrites w ith an outer margin of fairly large cruciform spicules.
The iron pyrites ev i
den tly represents a mass of spi cu les too small and too c losely associ ated together to be
separately dist inguished in their repl aced condition . The sponge i s c learly hexactinell idand quite di stinct from the others described above .
”
GENUS CYATHOSPONGIA (Cyalhophycus) , Walcott .
7 .— 0 YATHOSPONG1A QUEBECE Nsis, SN .
(F igs . 1 6 and 1 7 . Pl. I II , fig .
Pic . 16 .— Cyathowongia Quebecenst
'
s. FIG . 1 7.
— Cyathosp ongia i becensis.
Restored. Base enlarged.
Form elongated conical,compo sed apparently of numerous long
,vert i cal sp icules ,
crossed by horizontal or annular bars,and w ith a few cruci form sp icules in the meshes .
The vert ical and tran sverse spicules may be cruciform spicules arranged vertical ly . Theform terminates downward in a blunt poin t w ith indications of a few short anchoring
spicules . This species closely resembles Cyathophycus (Cyathospongt'
a) reliculatus ofWalcott
4 6 DAWSON AND HINDE
horizontal spicules seem to be triacerat e in form , and much shorter than those of the
vertical system , though of Very different lengths . They are som etimes in bundles andsometimes sol itary .
In parts of the substance , apparently w ithin the reti cul ate w al l , may be seen a few
cruciform spicu les , and flocculen t patches apparently of very smal l spicu les , which seem
to have been mostly internal and most abundant toward the base,but cannot be
distinctly made out .
The wal l i s very del icate,and consi sts of quadrate or oblong areas formed by slender
longitudin al and transverse strands or fib res , of whi ch th e former are the more prom
in en t . As in Protospongia, the quadrate areas are formed by the four transverse rays of
cruciform , or fiv e- rayed spicules, but these are di sposed so that their rays overlap each
other, and thus form fascicles of closely opposed paral lel rays . Th e spicules in the transverse strands of the wal l are less thickly grouped together
,and even in some of the larger
squares they may be arranged singly , whi lst the smal ler squares are general ly bounded
by single spicules on ly . The l ongitudinal strands principal ly consist of cruciformspicules
,but it is possibl e that elon gated filiform spicules may l ikew i se be present . There
are plain indications of a fifth or distal ray in many of the principal sp icules of the wal l ,show n by a Very minute knob or blunted process proj ecting° from the central node of the
transverse rays , which may represent a partially developed ray , or the broken stump of a
complete one . In some places,also , there i s a continuous film of pyrites
,probably
indicating a membrane of very minute spicules or an agglomeration of flesh -spicules,
n ow replaced by this mineral .
The basal portion of these spec imens i s in complete , but there are indication s of anextension of the longitudinal strands o f the w al l downw ard into a spreading° tuft of
short anchoring spicules w iden ing at their di stal ends .
This genus i s mainly distinguished from Prot ospongia by the fascicular arran gementof the spicular rays in the principal longitudinal and transverse fib res . The regularquadrate areas of the body-w al l also mark it off from Plecloderma and Phormosella, Hinde .
(See Brit . Foss . Sponges , Part . 1, Pl. I I I , hgs . 1,2 and Part . I I , p . 1 24-5 , Pal. Soc .
,1 886
How far i t may resemble D ictyophylon ,
‘ Hall , and the other genera associated therewi th
by Prof. Hall (35 th Report of the State Museum , 1 884, p. 1 65 , pls . it i s impossible
to state,for the structural features o f this genus have not been sufficien tly described ,
and the characters assigned to the other genera are m ain ly those of external form,which
,
as regards this group of sponges , are hardly of generic importance .
Th e structures of Cyathophycus , as shown in these specimens , bear a great resemblance to those of the recent genus Holascus, Schulze (Challenger Reports , Vol . XXI , p.
based on sponges dredged from depths varying between and fathoms in the
South Atlantic and in the Southern Ocean . There is a striking simil arity in the strue
1 I n the on ly species of the D ictyOSpongidae in wh ich I have seen structure , that named b y Whitfield Uphamtem
'
a D awsont , Am. Journ . of Sc ien ce, Aug .
, 188 I , and Bul letin Am. Num. Nat . H ist.,Dec. , 188 1 , the spicules are
appparen tly filiform and arranged in b road long i tudinal and transverse bundles cross ing each other, and w i thsmal l , loose flesh-spicules in the meshes. The arrangemen t is therefore differen t in deta i ls from that of Cya tho
phycus, or, as i t should now b e cal led, Cya thospong ia. The name Hydroceras proposed b y Conrad, is l iab le to theob jection that i t was in tended to indicate affin ity to cephalopod she l ls.
— J. W . D .
2 E special ly H. fibula tus, Schul z e . Chal . Rep. xv i,fig. 9 .
ON FOSSIL SPONGES FROM METIS. 4 7
ture of the sponge-wal l in the fossi l an d in the original specimen s described by Schulze,now in the British Museum of Natural History .
Th e whole of the spicules , in the Utica as in the Quebec group specimens , are com
pletely pyriti sed , and appear under the microscope to be made up of row s of cubical
crystals of pyrites . They w ere probably o rigin al ly sil iceous, b ut this need not excite
surpri se,as the sil ica of such spicules is in a conditi on which facil itates solut ion , and in
some modern sponges the sp icules are not purely sil iceous , but contain some animal matter .
I have also noticed other cases in which si l iceous Palaeozoic sponges have experienced thi s
change,while in many specimens the spicules have entirely disappeared .
This is the case w ith the E rian or Devon ian sponges of the genus D ictyophylon andall ied genera
,which
,ow ing to their apparently membranous character, I at one t ime
bel ieved to be fucoids,but abandoned thi s idea on see ing° the specimen of Uph an taen ia
(Physospong z’
a, Hall ) , which Prof. Whitfield w as kind enough to show me in the New
York Museum in July, 1 88 1 . In a note communicated to Prof. Whitfield in August,
1 881 , I have made the follow ing remarks on the pyritisation of sponges
The most puzzl ing fact in con nection w ith the original sil iceous character of thesespon ges i s their mineral condit ion , as be ing new wholly replaced by pyrite . Carbonaceous
structures are often replaced in this way,and so are also calcareous shel ls
,especially
when they contain much corneous matter , but such changes are not u sual w ith si l iceous
organisms . If the spicules w ere original ly si l iceous , either they must have had large
internal cavities which have been filled w ith pyrite , or the original material must have
been w holly dissolved ou t and its place occupied w ith pyrite . It i s to be observed , how
ever, that in fossi l sponges the sil iceous matter has not infrequently been dissolved out ,and its space left vacant or filled w ith other matters . I have specimens of Astylospongia
from the Niagara formation which have thus been replaced by matter of a ferruginous
color ; and in a bundl e of fib res, probably of a sponge al l ied to Hyalomen a from the Upper
Ll andeilo of Scotland (since named Hyalostelz’
a by I find the substance of the
spicules entirely gone and the spaces formerly occupied by them empty . It should be
added that joints of Crinoid stems and fronds of Fenestell a occurring in the same specimen
w ith the Uphan teen ia are apparently in their natural calcareous state .
Th e type of structure of Cyathophycus i s e ssential ly th at of the Hexactinel l id spongesof the suborder D ictyonine of Z ittel , and under this , as has already been suggested by
Barrois, it belongs to the fami ly of D ictyospongidce, estab l ished by Hall for Dictyophyton
and the al l i ed sponges of the Erian rocks . This type , already known as far back as theUtica shale
,i s now carried a stage farther by our discoveries at Meti s .
The sponges of the genus Cyalhophg/ cus are not abundan t in the beds explored atMeti s and most of them have been much broken up . Only one specimen was obtained
as a tolerable state of completeness .
GENUS ACANTHOD ICTYA, Hinde.
Sponges approximately subcylindrical in form ,consi sting of a skeletal mesh-work
of longitudinal and transverse spi cul ar strands or fib res . The longitudinal strands are
1 I have sim i larly expla ined Pyri tonema of McCoy and E ophyton erplanatum of H icks, as has H inde also, inGeol . Mag., 1886 .
4 8 DAWSON AND HINDE
composed of somewhat loosely‘
arranged fascicl es of elongated overlapping spi cules , and
the spicules of the s lender transverse fib res are as a rule disposed in a single series . Fromthe outer surface of the sponge
,numerous spi cul ar rays project outwards at right angles .
The sponge appears to have been anchored by a basal prolongation of the longitudinalstrands . Ow ing to the present compressed conditi on of the specimens it i s difficult to
determine the original form of the consti tuent spicules . Some of the elongated longitu
din al spicules may be merely simple rod- l ike forms,others are clearly cruciform and
their transverse rays form the cross-fib res . The spi cular rays which form the projectingbri st le s of the surface may be the free di stal rays of normal hexact inell id spicules , bu ton ly these project ing rays can now be clearly distingui shed ; the others are merged in
the longi tudinal fasci cles .
The general s tructure of the ske leton resembles that of Cyathospongia ,Walcott
,but
i t i s characteri sed by the presence of the proj ecting surface rays . The mesh is al so of alooser character than in Cyathospongia and it s arrangement in quadrate areas i s only
faintly recognisable .
8 .
— ACANTHOD ICTYA HISP IDA, Hinde.
(F igs . 1 8 and 1 9 . Pl. I I I , fig .
FIG. 19 .— Acan thod1
’
ctya hisp ida .— Portions en larged x 5 , showing
framework and cruc iform and protective Spicules.
FIG. 18 .— Acan thodictya hispida .
Restored.
The examples of this species are apparently nearly cylindrical tubes from 30 to 5 0 mm .
in length ,and about 12 mm . i n w i dth . The l ongitudinal fascicles are about 1 mm . apart
and the transverse fib res from 1 to 2 mm . distant from each other . The project ing spicul ar rays of the surface are on ly seen in these compressed sponges at the l ateral margins as
a sort of fringe . The free rays are somewhat t hickly set they vary from 5 mm . to 3 mm .
in length the longer forms in some instance s occur at regular intervals , probably at the
angles of the mesh,and between these are the shorter rays . The extremities of m any of
the l arger forms are slightly swollen or club-shaped , but i t is uncertain whether thi s is
5 0 DAWSON AND HINDE
of di stort ion , cruci form spi cules w ith one ray curved , and minute ste llate spi cules .
The whole somewhat resembles, though w ith difference i n detai l , the debri s of thebody of the modern Hyalonema, w hen crumbled and examined under the microscope .
Associated w i th these patches , and also found separate , are many large anchoring rods
of peculiar structure . They consi st of several s lender spicules twi sted together spiral lyso as to resemble a rope . E ach strand has l ittl e tubercles external ly to give gre ater
holding power,and the whole , when wel l preserved , con stitutes one of the most beau
tiful of sponge structures . In one or two cases the spiral threads were seen to be
unwound at their prox imal ends,as i f passing into the slender rods of the body of the
sponge . A tendency to such spiral rol ling appears i n the modern glass-rope sponge
(Hyalonema and the l ittle fril l s on i ts root spicules may represent the tubercles
of the strands in the present species . A similar structure has been found by Dr . Hinde
in the root spicules of Hyaloslelia fasciculus, McCoy, from the Si luro-Cambrian ,1 and a
specimen apparently of the same species in my colle ction shows thi s structure , though
less perfectly than the specimens from Metis .
The connecti on of these anchoring rods w i th the patches of scattered spicules i s ofcourse inferential
,but they are constantly associ ated on the slab s of shale
,and such roots
are n ot found attached to any of the other species,though
,as already stated
,similar roots
may hav e been present in Acan thodictya.
Imbedded in s ome of the patches of Hyalost elia are oval bodies , about a centimetre
in their longest diameter, destitute of roots or defensives and composed of crowded
cruciform spicules of minute size resembling those of P. delz’
catula . I was at first
disposed to regard these as gigantic ovarian capsules , but Dr . Hi nde thinks they are more
probably smal l sponges of some other species accidental ly introduced .
GENUS LASIOTHRIX, Hinde.
Sponges small , depressed oval in outl ine , the outer surface covered by a layer 0 1
l ongitudinally arranged, apparently simple , acerate spicules beneath thi s i s another l ayer
of spicules disposed tran sversely . From the base of the sponge several s imple elongated
spicules extend .
The pecul iar arrangement of the surface spi cules in this form indicates a probablynew genus
,but in i ts present condition one cannot tell w ith ce rtainty whether it i s
monactinel lid or hexactinel l id . The outer surface seems to have been invested w i th asheathing of regularly arranged acerate spicules
,and beneath these other sp icules , disposed
tran sversely,can be distinguished , but whether these are really acerate or modified
hexactinel l id spicules there i s no decis ive evidence to show . In one or two instances , the
spicules appear to be cruciform,and the presence of the long simple anchoring spicules
extending from the base of the sponge,precisely as in normal hexactinell ids
,i s a further
poin t in favor of i ts belonging to thi s divi sion .
1 Bri tish Foss i l Sponges, Pal. Soc.
,1888
,PI. i. fig 3.
ON FOSSIL SPONGES FROM METIS. 5 1
1 0 .
— LAS IOTHR1X CURVI COSTATA, Hinde.
(Fig .
The type form is tran sversely oval , 8 mm . in height by 1 2 mm . in w idth,the
anchoring spicules can be traced to a length of 1 5 mm . from the body . The summitis rounded . There are some nodular elevations of pyrites in the body porti on
,but i t i s
F IG. 21 .— Lasiothrix curvicostata. Natural .si z e and portion en larged
doubtful whether they represent aggregations of spicules or are merely due to the chemi
cal depositi on of the mineral , in connection w ith the presence of organic matter.
This curi ous l ittl e sponge , of which only one specimen was found , i s remarkable forthe strong curved spi cules which support its sides
,giving the appearance of a rounded
basket w ith strong vertical ribs and very slender horizontal bars,w i thin which and at
top w ere quantitie s of slender straight spicules .
1 1 .
— LASIOTHRIX FLABELLA'I ‘A , SN .
(Fig .
F IG. 22— Lasi0lhrix flabella ta . Restored,
and spicules x 5 .
I hav e some doubt as to the right of thi s speci es to be placed in Dr . Hinde ’s new genus
but the specimens at first sight resemble the former species , and may accompany it
provisionally . The surface‘
appears to be covered w i th smal l ovoid bundles of stout
b iacerat e spicules , diverging from the centre and sometimes in fan - shaped tu fts . Thespecimens show i ndications of an external membrane
,and they had somewhat strong
root spicules , much larger than those of the body . I t seems uncertain whether the fan
shaped bundles are real ly such or flat ten ed groups of radi ating spicules surrounding
smal l oscula . In some specimens the spicules are confusedly scattered in films of pyrit
5 2 DAWSON AND HIN DE
ous matter w i th li ttle indicat ion of radiat ing arrangement . Dr . Hinde remarks as to thi s
form that “ the sp icules do not stand out defin itely ,as in the case of the hexactinell id
sponge spicules, but appear to be imbedded in some membrane . In two instances ,anchoring spicules
,l ike those of Prot ospongia, proj ect from the base of the mass . I do
not know of any monactinel li d sponge furn i shed, as these appear to have been ,w ith
long anchoring spicules .
”
The sponges of thi s genus are very rare in the Metis col lecti on s , and are obscure anddifficult to make out as to thei r detail s .
GENUS HALICHONDRITES, D n .
1 2 .— HALICHONDRITE S CONFUSUS . SN .
(F i g .
F IG. 23— Halichondn’
les confususSpicules en larged.
Oval or irregular masses of smal l s imple spi cules , imbedded in patche s of pyrite ,an d w ithout any defin it e arragemen t or root sp icules , may indicate the presence of a
hal ichondroid sponge . In the best preserved specimen s the spicu les appear to be b iacerate
and more slender an d pointed than i n the last , and they seem to be in two series , inclined
at a very obl ique angle to each other . In some specimens el ongated spaces,w ith wel l
defin ed margins , are covered w i th thin films of pyrite s,which may have resulted from
the replacement or in crustati on of a mass of minute spicules , o f which traces remain insome places .
It i s to be observed in thi s connecti on that sponges having originally much keratose or
other den se animal matter would natural ly aggregate i n and around themselves a greater
quantity of pyrite than those of a more purely si li ceous character .
MISCE LLANEOU S SPONGE REMAINS .
Under this head may be placed
(1 ) Surfaces covered w i th a confused mass of various kinds of spicules , probably
the debri s arising from the decay of numerous specimens , most of which probably belong
to the species above described .
(2 ) Radiating groups of robust tapering spicules , some nearly an inch in length and
quite thick at base . They resemble at first sight sp ines of E chini , but were no doubt
si li ceous , and belonged to sponges probably di stinct from any of the species described
above . The best specimen has a few smal l crucifo rm spicules at the base of the l arge
5 4 DAWSON AND B INDE
narssom’
a of Walcott, and is not distinguishable from Obolella pret iosa of Bil l ings , from
the Quebec g Ioup of the Chaudiere River and Cape Rouge , near Quebec . It i s al l ied t o O.
sag z'
ltalz‘
s, Salter, from the Wel sh Menevian , and which al so occurs in the zone of Pam
doxz'
des Forchammeri in Sweden . Thi s genus i s thus , so far as known ,characteristic of beds
older than the Levis ; but there i s no re ason why i t might not occur thus far up in the
series . Shel ls of this species,usual ly pyritised
,but sometimes black and flat ten ed in
the plane of the shale , abound in the l ayers holding sponges . I figure (F ig . from
draw ings supplied by Prof. Hall , the structures of this l ittle shel l as they appear in some
of the best specimens .1
Cystidean — A smal l j oin ted stem,1 cm . in length , w ith an elongated flat tened mass
at one end,in which
,however
,no di stinct plates can be seen .
Trails of Annelz’
ds, ela— Oh some surface s are flat t ened and rounded grooves of differ
ent sizes , but mostly small , and which may be trails of aquatic animals of different kinds .
They are not pyritous and present no trace of organic matter . Some of the larger are
spiral in the manner of Arenicolz’
tes spiralis, and these are pyritous .
BUTHOTREPH I S PERGRACI L I S, D awson .
(Fig .
Fm. 27.— Buthotrephis pergracilis.
Stems very long and flexuous , about 1 mm . in diameter,and obscurely stri ate longi
tudinally sending off at their extremities short alternate or opposite bran ches . Al l ied to
B . gmailis, Hal l , of the S iluro-Cambri an , but much more elongated and sl ender . These
plants are replaced by pyri te and usual ly flat ten ed,but the bran ches are occasionally
cyl indrical,which seems to have been the original form .
Ou some of the surfaces are groups of minu te round pyritous spots , probably of organi c
origin , and perhaps ova or ovi-capsules of sponges or other animals , perhaps the vegeta
tion or fruct ificat ion of some aquatic plants . There are al so a few ova] or round ,perfectly flat or smooth
,discs re sembling flat tened vesicle s . Ou some of the slabs are
1 See appended Note.
ON FOSSIL SPONGES FROM METIS. 5 5
also groups of more minute rounded bodies w ith no distinct structure , except in a few
cases an apparent notch at the margin . They may be spore-cases or ov a, but perhapsare not organi c .
An interesting point i n connection w i th these remains is the appearance of so many
di stinct types of sil iceous sponges in one local ity and formati on,and thi s of so great age .
It i s also deserving of note that these sponges are of types usual ly occurring in deep
water, and if we regard the dark shale s contain ing them as deep-water deposits,this
might account for the absence of other fossils . The alternation of these shales w ithcoarse conglomerate s and sandstones would also imply great osci l lations of leve l at the
t ime of their depos ition .
The occurrence of so many species of sponges in very thin layers of shale,for the
most part unfossil ife rous,in connection w ith the obscure and unobtrusive character of
the se remains , i s also an indication of the importance of thorough study of the older
formations , and of investigation of even their more unpromising portions , as wel l as of
the exhaustive exploration of those portions in which fossil s occur .
N OTE .
DESCR IPTION OF Linnarssonia cn f. pretz’
osa, Bill ings .
By Prof. JAME S HALL , LL.D .
Shellsmal l,subcircular or elongate transversely . Valv es subequally convex , the ventralbeak
erec t,sligh tly proj ect ing and perforated at i ts apex . E x ternalsurface covered w i th fine concentric
lines,faint radiat ing str iae be ing v is ib le on the in terst it iallamel lae. The interior of the ven tralvalve
bears a sub triangular or U— shaped r idge, the branches of wh ich diverge anteriorly. The th ickest
portion of th is r idge at the union of the branches is penetrated by the foram inaltub e. In fron t ofthe foramen
,and just with in the cardinal l ine, on e i ther s ide the ax is of the sh el l is a conspicuous
tuberc le or boss . I n the dorsalval ve is a median r idge, extending half the length of the val ve, andfrom th is two short lateralr idges di verge, t ak ing their origin at one- th ird the leng th of the medianridge from the posterior margin.
(The ab ove descript ion has b een k indly Suppl ied by Prof. Hal l from specimens sent to h im from the PeterRedpath Museum.
— J. W. D .)
5 8 BAILEY ON GEOLOGY OF
partial revision of the geology of northern Maine was made by Prof. Hitchcock in an
arti cle accompanying an atlas of Aroostook County ; but thi s was based upon no new
examination of the di strict , and in the main adhered to the Views previously expressed in
the report of 1 862 . In 1 878 , an Atlas of the Maritime Provinces w as also publi shed by
Roe Brothers , of St . John , in which the geology of the western frontier of New Bruns
w ick,in common w ith that of the entire Province
,w as summarized by Prof. J . Fowler ,
and . represen t ed in a new geological map , but like the. publications previously named,
this al so w as based upon observations previously made by others,and contained no new
results of original investigation . More recently,observations of a more or less desul tory
kind have been made by various observers in and about Passamaquoddy Bay , by far
the most important being those of Prof. N . S. Shaler, who in a prel iminary repo rt
addressed to the Director of the United States Geological Survey , but publ ished in the‘American Journal of Science
’
(July , details the results of several months ’ observa
tions about Eastport and the adjoining bays and islands ; such report , though only tenta
tive,serving to add material ly to our know ledge regarding the structure of the latter and
the fossil iferous strata which they embrace . In the meantime,and at various periods
between the years 1870 and 1 887 , the work of th e Geological Survey in New Brunsw ick
has been extended up the val ley of the St . John and along the entire length of the Maine
frontier,and some of the results and comparison s thus suggested have been made the
basi s of communicat ions already published in the Transaction s of th is Society, as theyhave also been made the basi s of a review of New Brunsw ick geology, by Dr . E ll s , in a
pamphlet published for private circulation in 1 887 . In the pre sent year the last report
and the last map relat ing to this region w i l l be published by the Can adian Survey ,and hence it wou ld seem a fit t ing time in which to renew our retrospect , and , as far as
possible,to correct or to extend the comparisons of twenty years ago .
The importance of these compari sons w i l l be better appreciated when we bear inmind the pecul iar posit ion which New Brunsw ick ho lds , not only as regards the adj ac ent
portions ofMaine , but. also as regards the entire State and , indeed , a large part of New
England . Si tuated directly to the east and north-east of the State first named , the north
easterly trends , which here as elsewhere characterize most of the formations of the Atlan
tic sea-board , cause these necessari ly to pass directly from the one to the other , so that a
correct determination of the rel ations of these formations in ei ther country w i l l go far tomake intelligible the structure of that which adjoins i t . Mo reover, i n the case of New
Brunsw ick,it would seem that the disturbances and accompanying metamorphi sm which
have so greatly obscured the geo logy of much of New England,have been much less
severely felt,so that a much greater number of defin it e fossi l i ferous horizon s may be
iden t ified ; and the relations of other non -fossil iferous formations to the se being deter
mined,a key i s furn ished for the elucidat ion of regions in which the data avai lable are
less complete and satisfactory . The fact that , in many of these fossi li ferous horizons ,features are presented , whi ch are w idely ditferen t from those of the more westerly portions
of the continent , and point to a closer affin ity w ith tho se of Europe , adds further interest
to comparisons of thi s kind , and suggests many interesting questions re garding the early
geographical and physical conditions of eastern America,a few of which it is proposed to
consider in the present paper .
The subj ect may, for the present purpose , b e best considered b y a review of the
MAINE AND NEW BRUNSWICK . 5 9
different formations as these successively present themse lves , from south to north , along
the international boundary .
At the po in t where this boundary turns northward from the Bay of Fundy , the coastl ine of the lat ter i s extremely i rregular
,presenting in particular two deep indentations , of
which the larger,Passamaquoddy Bay
,li es almo st wholly w i thin the Province of New
Brunsw i ck,whi le the second
,or Cob scook Bay, i s who l ly in the State of Maine . Both are
themselves broken by numerous smaller indentations,bu t thi s i s especi al ly true of Cobs
cook Bay ; whi le between the two is what i s prac t ically a long , narrow peninsula , the largerpart o f which
,known as Moose I sland, and supporting the town of E astport , is separated
from the mainland only by a narrow channel . Across the mouth of Passamaquoddy Bay ,and separating i t from the Bay of Fundy
,i s a chain of isl ands
,of which Deer Island is
the most considerable, whi le off that of Cob scook Bay , but stretching eastward and partly
overlapping as a parallel belt to that of Deer I sland , i s the sti l l larger I sland of CampoBello .
The geology of Passamaquoddy Bay was first worked out by the writ er,'in connection
w i th Mr. G . F . Mat thew and Mr. R . W . E ll s , in 1 870 -7 1 , at which time i t was shown thatthi s inden tat ion i s upon three of its sides , the eastern , northern and western , the l atterincluding Moose Island
,bordered by a series of b ut sl ightly inclined rocks , of which one
portion , the lower, was composed of si liceous slates and sandy shales , contain ing fossi l
shel ls , while the upper was to a large extent of volcanic origin ,embracing diorites ,
w i th associ ated red and purple sandstones , amygdaloids and felsi tes bo th being atVarious points covered unconformably by the coarse red conglomerates of the Perry series ,then regarded as Lower Carboniferous . Simi lar fossi ls were col lec ted from Broad Coveand Shackford
’
s Head on the west side of Moose I sland , and from the latter; as iden t ifiedby the lateMr. Bi ll ings , the W hole series , described in the New Brunsw ick reports as theMascarene series , was referred to the Upper Si luri an . At the same time the rocks of Deer
Island, consi sting largely of slates , W i th intercal ated masses of diorite , and which , by afold , were supposed t o b e repeated in Campo Bello , were found t o l ie unconformably
beneath the Si lurian and, from the evidence of facts seen farther east , were described and
represen ted on the maps as Pre-Cambrian . Final ly,of the smaller i slands be tween Deer
Island and Campo Bello , and which differ greatly among themselves , some were referred
al so to the Pre-Cambrian , but th e l arger par t to either the Silurian or the LowerCarboniferous .
In his more recent examination of Cob scook Bay, Prof. Shaler also recognizes the
exi stence here of two separate formations,which he designates respectively as the Cobs
cook series and the Campo Bel lo series , of which the lat ter is regarded as lying immediatelybelow the former . Whi le
,however
,the rocks of the Cob scook series everywhere yielded
to h im as to us an abundant harvest of fos sil s— those of some local i tie s being o f a distinctlyLower Helderberg type , while at others they were rather of the age o f the Cl inton an d
Ni agara— the rocks of Deer Isl and and Oampo Bel lo ,after the mos t careful search , failed
to yield any . The l atter are,by Prof. Shaler, compared direc tly w i th the Cambrian system ,
and are said to nearly resemble the rocks of that age about Cambridge and Boston ;b ut when w e recall what i s n ow known of the Cambrian of southern New Brunsw ick ,both as regards the persistency w i th which i ts pecul iar features are retained , and theremarkable fauna which it yi elds , it seems hardly possible that thi s Vi ew can be a correct
6 0 BAILEY ON GEOLOGY OF
one . Unti l therefore more defin ite evidence i s obtained to the contrary,i twould seem best
t o adhere to the view adopted in the Survey Reports that the se rocks are Pre-Cambri an ,
and presumably Huronian,being an extension westward o f beds which traverse large
portions of southern New Brunswick , and W hich are at various poin t s o v erlaid by foss il
iferous Cambrian ro cks . From the character of the rocks of the Cob scook (or Mascarene)series , Prof. Shaler infers that they were deposited , probably , at no great distance from
land , along the eastern side perhaps of a ridge of Laurentian rock stretching up along thee astern sea b oard of America and separating the Si luri an ro cks of thi s region from those
formed in warmer wa ters on the western side of the same ridge , and north-west to
An t icosti . We shal l have occasion presently to re fe r to th is conjecture again . Final ly ,i t i s important to observe that the facts are such as to indi cate that the Campo Bello andDeer I sl and rocks were subject to extensive elevation and erosion prior to the depositionof the Cob scook series , as thi s in turn w as l argely removed before the deposition of the
rocks of Perry .
As regards the so - cal led Perry Group , al though recognized by al l as the most recentof the formations bordering Passamaquoddy Bay , considerable doubt has been enter
t ain ed w i th regard to its precise positi on . In its fossi l flora,so wel l described by Sir
W i lli am Dawson , i t s aspect is undoubtedly Devonian ,but t o the other rocks of that sys
tem as seen only a few miles to the eastward along the New B runsw ick coast,it bears n o
resemblance whatever,whi le
,both in the nature of the beds and in their relations to the
subj acent formations,i t does bear much resemblance to the rocks o f the Lower Carbon i
ferous system which spread so w ide ly over o ther port ions of the Province . For thi s reason
i t was,in the Survey Repor ts and Maps , represented as a part of the last-named system. On
the other hand,however
,i t differs from the lat ter in the to tal absence of the marine l ime
stones and gypsiferous beds usually found in connection t herew ith,and in this respect
approaches more nearly a group of coarse sediments skirting the shores of the Bay des
Chaleurs , and W hich have been there shown to be unconformably overl apped by the
Lower Carboniferous or Bonaventure rocks . I t i s probable that in both instan ces thesecoarse red beds, though true Devonian , are to be regarded as representing the most recen t
port ion of that system ,and like the Catski l l G roup of New York
,which they nearly
re semble , con stitute a trans ition al serie s between the two .
The great bu lk of the Pe rry beds , thei r coarse character and their contained pl ant
remain s are a further indication of the extensive erosion to which the reg ion has been
subj ected ; while their in tersec t ion (at Joe’s Point , near St . Andrew’s and el sewhere ) , by
dykes of trap,extending across Passamaquoddy Bay
,shows that , as in earlier periods , the
region con t inued to be one subject to igneous ov erflow s at leas t as l ate as the close of theDevonian age .
I n passing northw ard al ong the western s ide of Passamaquoddy Bay, towards St .
Croix River,the Perry rocks are found to rest upon a broad platform of grani ti c and
syenitic rocks,extending
,w ith few exception s
,almost to the town of Cal ai s . On the
eastern shore of St . Croix River they are more completel y covered by Silurian rocks ,but s t il l ri se into promin ent hills , forming a por tion of an extensive tract of such rocksex tending eas tward through Charlotte Coun ty, New Brunsw ick . These rocks , as seen inMaine , are regarded by Pro f. Shaler as probably Laurentian . A simil ar view was al so
entertained and published as regards those of t he Province (Report of Progress , Geol . Sur
6 2 BAILEY ON GEOLOGY OF
des ignated as mica schist,while the other , forming the centre of a syncl inal , w as desig
n ated simply as clay slate . The divis ion in New Brunsw ick was similar,but in connection
w i th both groups , fossil s we re ob tained, those connected w i th the former, which was
described as the Dark Argi ll i te Series , indicating a Si lurian horizon , while those of thelatter
,though ob scure , favored the supposition that they were Devon ian . Thi s latter View
al so received confirmat ion from the fac t that these rocks would thus be occupying their
n atural posi tion directly b eneath'
t he Carboniferous system,around both margins of which “
they come to the surface . No reason for doub ting thi s determination ,as regards the Devon
i an,has since ari sen , but as regards the so -call ed dark argill ites
, W hile at first the View
was en tertained that they were wholly Upper Silurian , a question subsequently arose as t oW hether they m ight not also embrace stillolder or Camb ro -Si lurian strata . The rocks w i threference t o which
,more particul arly, this l atter View was held are those which cross St .
Croix River , north of Baring , and thence extend e asterly through the parish of St . Stephen ,in New Brunswick , to and beyond the se t t lement of Moore
’s Mi l ls,consist ing ch iefly o f
fin e-grained gneisses , ,micaceous , garn eti ferous and staurol i tic sl ates , black plumbaginousschi sts
,actinolyte schists and purple fine-grained micaceous sands tones ; but e v en tually
the same View was extended to the who le of the “ dark argil l ite seri es,except such
portions as could be clearly shown,upon paleeon tolog icalevidence , to be Si lurian . I t was
,
however, at the s ame time stated that this arra ngement was provis ional, and it is stil luncertain how much
,i f any
,of the format ion in question can really be regarded as older
than the system l ast named. The facts which favor the general Upper Si luri an age o f thebel t are those of i ts posi ti on directly beneath and in apparent conformi ty to the “ pale
argill ites or Devonian (the contacts , however, being vert ical ) , and o f a general resem
blance,which it bears to the first -named group of rock
'
s , as developed in some portions of
King ’s County , New Brunswick ; and around Passamaquoddy Bay . Oh the o ther hand,the
re semblance to the rocks which occupy a similar pos i t ion on either side of the northerngrani te ax i s i s stil l more marked ; whi l e in thi s latter case , i t has
'
not only been shown thatthe argil l ites in ques t ion are unconformably covered by foss il i f
'
erous Upper Si luri an beds ,but in pl aces themselves contain fossi l s indicativ e of a Lower Siluri an horizon . That therocks of these several dark argi ll i te belts , as seen (1 ) no rth of Baring and St . Stephen , (2 )through the parish of Prince W ill i am , and (3) in Canterbury , New Bru nsw ick , are essen
t ially al ike , would probably be readily admitted by any one who direc tly compared them ,
and the View that they are the same format i on brought up by successi ve gean tielinals hasbeen t aken al ike by Gresn er
, Robb, Hi tchcock , Hind , Logan , E l l s and the present author .Allthese authorities have als o regarded them in the main as older than Si lurian , the twoauthorities first named considering them (together w ith the pale argi ll i tes or Devonian) as
of Cambrian . age , while by Hind and Logan they have been compared to the so-called
Quebec Group . It should not however, be overlooked that at one point in New Brunsw ick
(Rocky Brook , on Nashw aak River) in the very heart of the dark argilli te bel t , and at buta short distance from the granite , fossil s indicative of a Lower Helderberg horizon were ,some years ago
,found by the late Chas . Robb
,and more recently
,in the same bel t , but in
its l ess altered portions,foss il s which appear t o be of Devonian type have been ob tained ,
a few miles north of Fredericton,by Mr. W . T. H . Reed . Hence the same question arises ,
here as nearer the coast, whether, upon the evidence of these fossil s , the age which they
indicate is to be regarded as that of the entire belt in which they are obtained , or of any
MA INE AND NEW BRUNSWICK . 6 8
considerable part of it, or whether, on the other hand , the fossil-bearing bands are not
rather to be regarded as portions of newer formations en folded among strata real ly of
much greater antiquity . The resolut ion of thi s question,upon which some further fact s
w il l presently be stated , i s one of the mos t important problems still demanding theattention o f those interested in New Brunsw ick geology .
I t i s necessary now to refer more particularly to the grounds upon which the rocks
skirting the northern side of the northern granite axi s are,in part at le ast , held to be of
Camb ro-Siluri an origin . Of these evidences the first , that of unconformabi lity to the Si lu
rian,may be seen anywhere along the line of contact between the two formations , and is
evidenced alike by discordance of cl ip , by transverse progressive overlap ,and by the com
pos i t ion of the conglomerates of the newer series . W i thin a few miles of the border are
beds of coarse and highly calcareous conglomerates , conforming to the Siluri an succession ,
and filled w ith pebbles derived from the Camb ro-Silurian rocks near b y , and across which
their trends would carry them . The evidence of fossils i s at present confined, so far as
thewestern portion of New Brunsw ick i s concerned , to the occurrence , first observed by
Matthew ,of l inguloid shells in black calcareous and sil iceous beds upon the Beccaguimic
River in Carleton County , and which have s ince been found to be associated with t rilo
bites of the gen era Trz’
nuclefus and others , indicating an horizon which i s certainly
Ordovician while in the n orth -east of the Province , in what are believed to be rocks of
the same group,remains of graptol i tes , apparently Lower Si lurian , were observed by Mr.
E l ls . To these facts i t may be added that in the occurrence of bright green and red sl ates ,such as occur n ear Woodstock and Newburgh , New Brunsw i ck, and the associat ion w ith
these latter of heavy beds of coarse grey grit , s imilar to those of the Si l lery formation , a
general resemblance i s suggested to the rocks of the so- cal led Quebec Group,as seen along
the Temiscouata Portage Road , and the south shore of the St awren ce . It i s not impro
bable that the slates of Waterville, Maine , containing the so-called Nerez
'
ges, etc .,may be
a part of the same great belt .
It has been usual to regard the gran ites upon which the sl ates last described repose
as being of Devonian age, ch iefly upon the ground of their evident resemblance to the
granites of southern New Brunsw ick , and the fact that pebbles , apparently derived from
the latter,are abundant
_
in the Lower Carbon iferous conglomerates,whil e they are rare
in those of earlier formation s . In neither district , however , are the granites known to
actually invade undoubted Devonian sediments , whereas such invas i on ln the case
both of the Camb ro-Si lurian and Si lurian , has been frequently observed . The Siluri anconglomerates of the north also include both granit ic and syenit ic pebbles .
The line of contact of the Lower and Upper Si lurian , referred to above , crosses theinternational boundary not far from the Monument at the extreme source of St . Croix
River . From thi s point northward in New Brunsw ick,the admirable section afforded
by the val ley of St . John River, running parallel w ith and for a considerable distance
ac tually forming the boundary,has
,w ith a single exception (that of a narrow bel t of
Carbon iferous and possibly in part Devonian sediment s,a few miles north ofWoodstock ) ,
fai led to show the exi stence of any rocks other than those of the Si lurian system . At thesame time it was here
,as elsewhere
,found very difficult , ow in g partly to the comparat ive
uni formity of the beds , partly t o the general and excessive pl ication t o which they have
been subj ected,and partly to the paucity of fossi ls
,to determin e w ith any degree of
6 4: BAIL EY ON GEOLOGY OF
certainty either their order of succe ssion,their thickness
,or thei r exact horizon . In
attempting to solve these questions it occurred to the author that some valuable
information might be gained by insti tuting comparisons between the succession of beds
upon the extreme southern and the extreme northern edge of the general Silurian basin ,
the one being found on the Beccaguimic River, in Carleton County, and the other on Lake
Temiscouata, in the Provin ce of Quebec . With a View at the same time to the more ready
recognition o f any Devonian st rata which the region might contain,examinations were
made in portions of northern Maine , more particul arly in the region of the F i sh Riv er
Lakes and that of Aroostook River, in both of which such Devonian strata had been
represented as occurring These comparison s proved unexpectedly in teresting by showing not on ly that large tracts of what had
,in the maps of Maine , been represented as
Devonian were in reality Si luri an , but that, both in the character and succession of the
beds,as w el l as in the associ ated fossi ls
,these three w idely-separated localities exhibited
such a close paral le li sm as to l eave lit t l e doubt of their essen t i al sy nchronism . Some of
the facts bearing upon these comparisons have al ready been given in the Transactions ofthe Society , but more recently much further information relating to the same subject has
been obtained,so that we are now in a posit ion not only to correl ate
,w ith some degree
of certainty,the several divisions of the Si luri an system as seen through the extensive
tract extending from Cape Gaspe to northern Main e , but also to compare the nature and
origin of these severa l subdivi sion s w ith those of the same formation in southern New
Brunsw ick .
Of the three local it i es to which reference has been made , the most interesting and
instructive is that of Lake Temi scouata , and may wel l serve as a basis of compari son forthe entire region of which it forms a part . As indicated in the section s given in the
G eology of Canada ,” the strata here exposed fall n atural ly into three great groups
,the
first consi sting essentially of l imeston es , more or less pure , and abounding in fossi ls , but
having at their base a considerabl e thickness of grey and whi te sandston es , w i th some
conglomerate the second con sisting largely of sandy shales,but having beneath them
over feet of coarse conglomerate (Burnt Point conglomerates ) , and at their summit
heavy beds of coarse somewhat epidotic sandstones (Point auxTrembles sandstones) , andthirdly , an apparently great thickness of very fin e sl ates and sandstones
,the latter
o ccupying al l the lower hal f of the l ake,and spreading W idely over northern New
Brun sw ick . The atti tude of these groups i s as s trongly contrasted as i s their character,
the rocks of the first or Mount Wissick division having but a low incl ination (varying
from 1 3° to whi le those of the second have a much steeper
,but at the same time very
regular dip o f about 6 0°
t o the southward,while those of the third
,exhibit on ly a syst em
of abrupt and compl icated fol dings . Actual contacts between the several divisions are
not Visible ; but from the ci rcumstance that in all three the general dip i s to the south ,and further that the rocks at the base of Mount Wissick rest directly and unconformablyupon beds of the Quebec group , i t was , in the author
’s first paper upon the subject
(Trans . Roy . Soc . Can ., Vol . IV ) suggested that these were probably the lowes t b eds ,
and that those of the second and third divi sion s fol lowed the order of their apparent
succession . It was , however , at the same t ime stated that unti l a more completeexamination had been made of the fossils coll ec ted
,not only from MountWissick ,
but from
Po in t aux Trembles , no defin it e conclusions upon this point could be reached . Since
6 6 BAILEY ON GEOLOGY OF
thin beds of l imestone . Through the l atter, which are quite peculiar in havin g the th inlayers of which they are composed , n o t only separated by thin shaly partings , but
divided across the l ayers into numerous partly separated blocks,as though disjo inted by
the pressure to which they have been sub jected,th i s local i ty i s easily connected w ith
another,in which a simil ar associat ion of st rata may b e seen ,
Viz .,that of the Aroostook
River between Ashland and Presqu’
isle . Here again,a series of coarse conglomerates
,
carrying fragments of serpentine and jasper,in addition to a variety o f me tamorphic and
igneou s rocks, i s succeeded by heavy beds o f sandstone , somewhat diorit ic and vesicular
in aspect,and these by slates holding l imeston e layers in every way similar to those of
the Siegas . In the sandstones , be sides carbonized vegetabl e remains , are impressions of a
coral,resembl ing Favosites a Bryozoon , probably a Callapora , Orthi s , Sh
'
ophomena rhomboi
dalt'
s, Rhynchonella, Spirifera (l ike S . radium, Sow ) , Atrypa ret icularis , Lin .
,and Cornulites
( like 0 . flexuosus, Hall ) — the whole indicating an horizon about that of the Niagara
formation . Similar conglomerates and sandstones are w idely spread over northern Main e ,and in the reports upon that St ate have been regarded as Devon ian , but there would n ow
seem to be but littl e doub t that they are the equivalents o f the Burnt Poin t and Po int auxTremb l es rocks of Temiscouata Lake , and , w i th the l atter , hold a position which is quitelow in the Si lu ri an system . In the same portions of Aroostook County , Maine , the higher
memb ers of this system are again represented by l imestones , and are remarkable for the
number and fin e preservation of the organic rel ics which they hold , the wel l known
beds ofSquare Lake or Lake Sedgew ick hav ing y i elded not less than for ty- two species,mostly new
, w hile similar beds near Ashland are but litt le less prolific .
F inal ly,on Beccaguimic River , in Carleton County, New Brunsw ick , and on the
extreme southern edge of the great Si lurian trac t of that Province , strata are again metw i th
,which
,though highly disturbed
,exhibit much the same aspect as those which have
been described,w i th similar rel ations and organ ic remains .
It w il l now be of in tere st to in stitute a comparison between the succession of Si lu
rian rocks as thus made out in no rthern New Brunsw ick,Quebec and Maine
,w i th the
succession of the regions nearer to the Bay of Fundy .
In so doing , one of the first facts to attract attention i s the almost entire absence,in
southern New Brunsw ick , of the gre at belts of l imestone which consti tute so marked a
fe ature in the north , and. more part icul arly in the Province of Quebec . Indeed n o nu
doubted equivalents of these Lower He lderberg rocks are known to occur in the former
though apparently met w i th , to a l imited extent , in south-eastern Maine,as observed by
Prof. Shale r . Ou the other hand , between the lower members of the system in the twoc ase s a Very striking paralle lism may be drawn . Thus
,taking the section afforded by
the Mascarene peninsul a, in Passamaquoddy Bay , as typical of the southern coastal
region , the grey fe lspathic and sil iceous sl ates , which con sti tute its first two division s ,apparently find thei r counterpart in the great body of slates , often also highly si l iceous ,which border Lake Temiscouata between Burn t Poin t and Point aux Trembles
,already
described as ho lding a fauna low down in the Si lurian system . W i th the conglomerateso t
'
Burn t Po int , the latter a local accumulation , they Lmay be regarded as the prob able
equivalents of the One ida , Medina and Cl inton Groups of New York , of Divisions I I and
I I I of the Anticosti series , or of Groups B and B1 of Arisaig in Nova Scot i a. Divis ion I II
of southern New Brunsw ick cons i sts of sandstones,of greenish and purpl ish co lours and
MAINE AND NEW BRUNSWICK . 6 7
more or less amygdaloidal and similarly,in the north
,the beds of Po int aux Trembles ,
on Lake Tem i scouata , w ith thei r supposed equivalents on Siegas River, New Brunsw ick ,and on the Aroostook , in Maine , occur in similar relations and present much the
same aspect,including in both instances the occurrence of much comminuted vegetable
matter . Divi sion IV of the Mascarene section,consis ts of red and green slates and sand
stones,w ith diorites and felsites
,and so ,
again , similar rocks are found in thi s position
at Cape Graspé , Cape Chatte , Met apedia Lake , Rimouski,and near the base ofMount Wis
si ck . The felsites and associated trappean rocks of Aroo stook County , Maine , as well asthose of Restigouche County , New Brunsw ick , may possib ly represen t this and the succeeding division (V) but the fac ts at present known , rather favo r the idea that the formerare Camb ro -Silurian . The absence of the h igher members of the system in southern NewBrunsw ick may b e accoun ted for upon the supposi t ion that the barrier o f Laurentian
rocks,al luded to on a former page
,as extending along the coast subsequently t o the close
o f the Archaean age , continued t o exi st in Si lurian times , and that while , in the north ,
the later half of the Si lurian age was a period of subsiden ce , in the south i t was ch ieflyone of el evation
,excluding the access of pure sea wate r
,and hence
,of such fo rms as are
dependent on its presence .
Of o ther strata observed in northern Maine and New Brunsw ick , i t i s more difficultto speak w ith confiden ce, their s tratigraphical relations not having been ful ly worked out ,and fossil s being as ye t wanting . Oi these the mos t important consist o f a mass of fine
grained slaty felsi tic and sil iceous rocks,associated w i th diorit i c and amygdaloidal sand
stones,quartz-porphyries and agglomerates , which appear t o stretch in parallel belts
across a considerable portion of Aroos took County , and in places rise into prominen t hil l s .
One of these bel t s is conspicuously exposed abou t Churchill , Umsaskis and Spider Lakes
on Allegash River, and apparen tly extends thence past the head waters of the Aroostook ,forming the Aroo stook Mountains , and eastward to the Valley o f Fi sh River, separating
the Silurian basin of Square and E agle Lakes from that of Ashland and Presqu’
isle while
a second,as yet only seen at a few po ints
,l ies t o the south of the l at ter, here including
the steep and conspicuous conical peak known as the Haystack . No fo ssil s have yet
been observed in the slates of thi s group (referred to in the Maine reports simply as trappean rocks ) , and we are hence w i thout definite proof of their age , but the nature o f manyof the pebbles in the Silurian conglomerates wou ld seem to indicate that the former wasthe source from wh ich these were to a l arge extent derived , while there are also po ints in
which conglomerates,apparently Silurian and similarly constituted , have been seen t o
rest unconformably upon the sil iceous and fel sit ic rocks . On the other hand, these l atter,in their fin e-grained fiin
’
ty texture and banded aspect as wel l as in their dark purple to
black colours,recal l the similar beds which , i n southern New Brunsw i ck , mark the base of
the Silurian system . I t real ly more ancient than the lat ter— as seems most l ikely,— theirtrue posi t ion is probably that of the Camb ro-Si lurian formation
,to some portions of w hich
they al so bear much resemblance . The same remarks w il l al so apply to a series of fine
grained micaceous and gnei ssic sandstones and slates,o f dark purplish and l ilac colours ,
which accompany the beds above described on the Allegash River . These latter are
pecul i ar in being filled w i th imperfect ly developed crystals , apparently o f staurol ite ,and are quite simil ar t o some of the beds referred to on a former page , as occurring
along the course of St . Croix River, both near St . Stephen , and again in the western
6 8 BAILEY ON GEOLOGY OF MAINE,ETC.
part of York County, New Brunsw ick . A further examination of these doubtful bedsi s greatly to be desired .
Of true Devonian , none is known to occur in the immediate V icin ity of the frontier,unless i t be a' smal i band of dark grey and reddish conglomerates and shales
,ho lding
remains of Psilophyton , which crosses St . John River , a few miles ab ove the town of
Woodstock . While , however, as has been stated , much of what , in the Maine reports , hasbeen described and mapped as Devonian
,i s now known to contain a fauna quite low
down in the Siluri an , the determinations ofMr. Bil l ings of the col lections submitted t o
him would appear to indicate that strata b earing true Oriskany forms do occur at various
local ities (such as Parlin Pond and elsewhere) , in the n orthern part of the S tate , whil e anoutl ier of similar age has been observed by Mr. W . Mcln n es
,near the head of Tobique
River in New Brunsw ick .
Upon the roads leading south from the town of Presqu’
isle, in Aroostook County , and
not far from the border , the Si lurian rocks are uncon formably covered , over a small area ,by a series of bright red and rather
'
soft sandstones and conglomerates . I t i s possible that
these may al so be Devon ian , the equival ents in that case of the beds of Perry , b u t in theabsence of fo ssil s i t seems altogether more probable that they are Lower Carboni ferous
,
representing the very similar beds of that age,which occur 1 11 a l ike position in the val
ley of Tobique River, in New Brunsw ick . The absence , so far as known , of strata ofl ike age and origin from po ints further westward in the State of Maine , would appear to
indicate that the area of marine submergence in the later Devonian and Lower Carboniferous ages , the westward extension of the great St . Lawrence or Acadian Basin , had its
western l imit not far from the boundary lin e now separating New Brunsw ick from theUnited States .
7 0 SIR W . DAWSON
cies collected by Mr . McCon n ell, and W hich certainly represent the more abundan t trees
of the regi on in thi s period .
The matrix of most of the plants is a light-coloured shale or indurated cl ay , resembling that of the Laramie in many other local ities . In the case of some slabs
,however
,
the heat of burning l ignite has converted the clay into a sort of terracotta of reddi sh and
yellow ish colours .
In the present paper I shal l refer merely to the geographical distribu t i on o f the sp ecies in connec tion w ith the evidence for the Laramie age of the Mackenzie River beds ,which w i l l be described more in detai l by Mr. McCon n ellin hi s forthcoming Report .
PTERIS SITKENSI S , Hear . (Pl. X,Fig .
— This fern , not previousl y col l ected on theMackenzie , was origin al ly col lected near Si tka i n Al aska , and consti tutes anotherlink of connecti on between the flora of the Pacific coast and that of the interior
region in the early Eocene age .
GLYPTOSTROBUS UNGE RI , Heefr.
— ~ I f thi s species be the same w ith G. Em-
opwus and G .
(Eningensz‘
s, which seems probable , i t i s very w i dely distributed in Europe and
America . It is found in Alaska, Green land and Spitzbergen ; also in the Upper
Laramie of Porcupine Creek (G . M . D . ) and in the Fort Union group of Dakota .
(Newberry ) .
SEQUOIA LANGSDORFI I , Brong t .
— This speci es i s very w idely distributed in time andspace , i f all the forms referred to it are really of one species . I t ranges from the
Upper Cretaceous into the Miocene , and in real ity is not very remote in i ts charact ers from the l iv ing Sequo ia semperm
’
ren s of Cal i fornia, which may be a modern
Variety . I t occurs i n Green land,in the Lar amie of various places in the Uni ted
States , and is w idely distributed in Europe . Both leafy twigs and remains of
con es occur in the Mackenzie collecti on s . In the Bel ly River Group of Canada,the species S . Reichenbachiz
’ 1 replaces it , and the species referred to S . Langsdorfii from
the Upper Cretaceous of Nanaimo,Vancouver I sland
,appears t o b e S . Smil/n
'
ana,2
which also occurs i n the Kootan ie of the Rocky Mountains . It seems therefore
uncertain if in Canada i t i s as old as the Cretaceous,and it may in any case be
regarded as specially characteri sti c of the Upper Laramie or Eocene flora .
TAXITE S OLR IK I , Heer .
— This l arge and beauti ful Tax ine plant occurs i n the Eocene ofEurope , and is found also in Al aska and in Greenland . I t is abundant in thecol lections o f Dr . Selwyn from Souris River, described by me in the Report of the
Geological Survey of Canada ( 18793 It does not seem as yet to have been
recogni z ed in the United States , and is probably a dist in c t iv ely n orthern form . It
i s said by Sehimper to resemble closely a species of Cephalotaxus found in China
and Japan .
PLATANUS ACE ROIDES , Heer.
— This is the E ocene representati ve o f the modern Platamus
occiden talz'
s of America, to which it i s very nearly all ied . It occurs in the Tertiary
F lora of Cretaceous of Bri tish Co lumb ia and Northwest Terri tory , Trans. R. S. G.,1 882.
2 Mesoz o ic F lora of Rocky Mountains, Trans. R. S. C 1885 .
3 Fossi l Plan ts of Laram ie, Trans. R. S. C.,1886 .
ON FOSS IL PLANTS . 7 1
of Europe as high as the M iocene of Oeningen , and is found in the leaf beds of
Mull , that i s if, as seems likely , the P. Hebridicus of Forbes is thi s species . It also
occurs at Atan ekerdluk i n Greenland , in Iceland and in Spitzbergen .
I t seems probable that P. Gulielmw, Goept , is merely a variety . It occurs w i ththe former in Sw i tzerland and Green land . Farther
, Sch imper suggests that P.
Raynoldsiz’
and P. Haydem’
i‘o f Lesquereux,
both Upper Laramie species , and found
plenti ful ly in the sandstones on Bow River, near Calgary , may be varieti es of thi s
somewhat variable species .
POPULUS ARCTICA,Heer. (Pl. X,
Figs 2 , 3 85 — This i s much the most abundant species
in Mr. McConn ell’
s col lect ion,and seems to show that then ,
as now , this genus was
dominant . This is an Eu ropean as well as Ameri can and Greenland species , and
presents a great variety in the si ze and forms of the leaves , which have given ri se
to the formation of several species . Mr. McCon n ell’
s specimens show a great
number of gradations in form,from broad oval to a very b road reniform , and in size
from one inch to four in diameter . Its occurrence i n the Laramie of Western
Canada i s noticed in my paper as Laramie Plants , (Trans . Roy . Soc . Can .,
There seems to be some uncertainty as to the reference o f this leaf to Populus.
Saporta, thinks that it may really be a Menospermum all ied to the modern M .
v irg inicum. If a poplar,i t i s remarkable that its nearest l iving al ly seems to be P.
E uphrat z'
ca of the banks of the Euphrates and Jordan .
POPULUS HOOKERI , Heer . (Pl. X,Fig .
— This specie s , found thus far only at MackenzieRiver, has small l eaves, resembling those of P. m'
clica in form , but differing some
what in venation,in which it approaches sl ightly to P. tremulo z
’
des, the common
aspen .
2
POPULUS RICHARD SON I I , Heer.
— A l arge and fin e specie s,quite different from the preced
ing , and all ied to the modern aspens . I t i s found in the Fort Union Laramie of the
United States , and in the Greenl and and Spitzbergen collections , also in Canada
in the Upper Laramie , on Bow River . Its nearest rel ation in modern Canada is P.
grandiden tata, the great- toothed aspen , the leaves of young shoots of which species
greatly resemble those of the ancient form .
2
CORYLUS MCQUARRI I , Forbes — Thi s species i s found in the Mul l leaf-beds and elsewherein Europe , also in A laska, Iceland , Spitzbergen and Greenland , and in the Upper
Laramie of the wes tern plains,both in Canada and the United States , though it
seems to be less common than further north . Further south than Mackenzie
River, this species i s associated w i th leaves n o t distinguishable from those of themodern hazel
,C. rostrata .
2
NORDENSKOLD IA BORE ALIS , Heer. (Pl. X,Fig .
-This is a beautiful frui t , divided intolobes at t op, and supposed to be al l ied toTi l iaceae . These fruits occur in Greenlandand Spitzbergen , and have been di scovered by Mr. McCon nellfor the firs t time in
Canada . It i s by some referred to the genus Cz’
stus or to D z’
ospyros.
1 Fossi l Plants of Laram ie , Trans. R. S. C., 1886 .
2 I bid.
7 2 SIR W. DAWSON
In connect ion w i th the reference’ of thi s fruit to Tiliaceae , it i s worthy of notethat Saporta inclines to the bel ief that the previous species may be long n o t to a
haze l but to a Tilz’
a or l inden .
CARPOL ITHE S .
—Oval , flat tened bodies , probab ly seeds or fruits , about one centimetre in
length , and w i thout distinct markings . They may be seeds pos sibly of Taxi te s ,but their affin ities for the present must remain uncertain
,and I do not give them
a specific n ame , in hope of addit ional facts being discovered .
PYRITI Z ED AND FERRUG INOUS WOOD .
— The collect ion contains several branches and port ions of stems evidently of Exogenous trees , but in a s tate of prese rvation whichdoes not admit of distinct determination . Schroeter, as already stated , has des
crib ed fossi l wood from these beds , one species of which , hi s Sequoia Canadensis,may be the wood of Sequo ia Lang sdoafi i, another is no t improbably that of PlatcmusUngeri . Another of his species of fossi l wood is referred to the genus Ginkgo, but
i t may have belonged to Taxites Olrz'
kz'
.
LEGUM INOSITE S BOREALIS , S . N . (Pl. X, Fig .
— Pods of unequally obovate form,
apparently arranged on the sides of a stem . They are grooved or ribbed longitudin ally , and resemble L . arachz
’
oz’
des, Lesq ., except in their smaller size and broader
form . Oneshows what seems to be the remains of a sheath or calyx .
CALLI STEMOPHYLLUM LATUM , S . N. (PLX,Fig .
— Leaf en tire , obovate , w i thout petiole .
Midrib distinct , secondary veins obsolete indications of del i cate reticul ation . Thi si s probably a Myrtaceous leaf and may
,provisionally at least
,be placed in the
genus above named . It s eems quite diiferen t from the other described species .
MR . WE STON ’
S COLLECTIONS FROM THE LARAMIE OF Bow RIVER .
Wi th the above specimens from Mackenzie River, there have been placed in my
hands some interesting le aves collected by Mr . Weston in the Upper Laramie sandstones,
near Calgary . They belong to two speci es , Papulus Richardsom'
i and Quercus platam’
a of
B eer, (Pl. XI , Fig . The leaves of the former species are chiefly remarkable for their larges ize
,but in other respects are similar to those of Mackenzie River . The l atter species i s
repres ented by leave s of great size . One of them must , when perfect , have been at l east
ten inches in length w i thout the pet iol e . This species has not yet been found at
Mackenzie River , but i s one of those common to the United States Laramie and that of
Canada, and found al so in Greenland . As the species seems to be variable , and Heer had
only fragments in his col lections,I figure a small , but perfect , specimen in Mr. Westdn ’
s
col lection . Schimper regards the place of this species in the genus Quercus as fort
contestable and it is quite possible th at when i ts fruit shal l be known,i t may be found
to have difl‘
eren t affin it ies . It was evidently one of the most magn ificen t o f the Laramie
specie s in point of fol iage . I ts leaves are in some points not unlike those borne on
vigorous,young shoots of Tih
’
a Americana, though narrower in proportion to their breadth .
7 4 S IR W. DAWSON ON FOSSIL PLANTS.
Hemisph ere. E ven in Austral ia the ear ly Tert iary flora i nc ludes many types new fore ign to thatcoun try ,
but resemb l i ng those of Upper Cre taceous age in t he North , and thus indicat ing a much
greater un i form i ty in t ho ~ze t imes than at presen t, or perhaps that a flora or ig inat ing in t he Northhad already in the E ocene spread in to the Southern Hemisphere. I n general i z ing on th ese sub jects ,E tt ingshausen regards them too much from t he po in t of v iew of loca l evo lut ion rather t han of migrat ion
,and does no t sufficiently recogn i z e t he great an t iqui ty of
'
modern types in the North ernHem isphere , and t he certa in ty t h at , in the v ic iss i tudes of c l imate in geo log ical t ime, th ere have beenmany great transportat ions of floras from nort h t o sou t h , and from south to no rth . The time israpidly approach ing w h en these great quest ions w i llmee t w i th adequate answers ; but the aceurnula~
t ion of facts is scarcely as ye t sufficien t . E t t ingshausen’
s spec imens were un fortunately somewhatfragmentary , but I have rece i ved from Baron v on Muel ler a sma llco l lect ion of foss ilfrui ts wh ichshow some cur ious American affin it ies in the Tert iary per iod.
SECTION IV,1 889 . 7 5 TRANS . ROY . Soc . CANADA .
V I . — D eser1
'
p t'i0 n8 of eight New Spec ies of Foss ils from ( 716 Cambre -Sih t rian Rocks of
Manitoba . By .I . F . WHITEAVES . [Pl ates XI I to XVI I ]
( Read Mav 8 , rev ised Oct . 26 ,
GASTEROPODA.
MACLURE A MANITOBE NS I S . (N . Sp . )
(Plate XI I , and Pl ate XII I , figs . 1 and
Shel l large , attaining to a maximum diameter of eight inche s and a half, and. con
si sting of about fiv e somewhat slender volutions which increase rather slowly in size :
outer volution n early always di stinctly angulated at the periphery . Left side almost
flat, but faintly depre ssed in the centre in some specimens and as faintly rai sed in others
Volutions , as Viewed on the flat side , very shal low ly concave in the centre and sl ightl y
raised on their ou ter margin s suture l ightly impressed . Right side moderately convex
(the greates t thickness or depth varying in differen t examples from two fifths to one third
the maximum diameter) : somewhat conical or subhemispherical , the outer volutionobl iquely flat t ened and n arrow ing very rapid ly, but in a few specimens somewhat
convexly,from the periphery to the umbi l ical margin : umbi l icus deep , conical , and
apparently about equal in breadth to one fourth of the maximum diameter , though in all
the specimens col l ected the tes t i s e ither imperfect or absent at the umbilical marginaperture obliquely and rather n arrowl y sub trapez iform : outer lip apparently simple
'
test thick .
Surface of the test on the left or fl at s ide marked w ith irregularly disposed , b u t for
the mo st part di stan t , t ransverse linear grooves or periodic arrests o f grow th , each of
which curves gently backw ard in a very shal lowly convex curve, and occasional ly w ith
a few stri ations wh ich run parallel to them . In one of the specimens figured (Plate XII I ,fig . 1 ) wh ich i s a l i ttle l ess than four inches in its greatest diameter , and in which thewhole of the test i s preserved on the flat side , there are six of the se periodic arrests o fgrowth on the ou ter volution
,whi le the inner '
whorls are perfectly smooth . In l arger but
s imilarly preserved specimens these arres ts of growth , which are no t sufficien tly deep t oproduce any impressi ons on the casts
,are somewhat more numerous and disposed at sti l l
more unequal interval s . Ou the right or convex side the test i s orn amented w ith roundedspiral ribs of nearly equal size , and these are crossed by similarly shaped , straigh t andt ran sverse cost ze
,in such a way as to present a somewhat nodulous appearance . Th e
spiral ribs , however, seem to be rather broader than the narrow furrows between them ,
while the transverse costw are apparently equal in breadth to the regularly concave
grooves which al ternate w ith them .
7 6 WHITEAVES ON FOSSILS FROM THE
The foregoing description i s intended to apply only to those specimens in which thegreater par t of the test is preserved . Th e condit i on in which the species is usuallyobtained is that of mere casts of the interior of the shel l . In these
,the slender early whorls
are often broken off, the suture , on the flat s ide , i s deeply excavated or channeled , and ,on the convex side , a large portion of the inner whorls is Visible in the umbili cus . Th e
whole of the thick test between the volu t ions i s sometimes naturally removed in thesecasts
,in which case the volutions are completely separated .
In Appendix 1 t o the Narrat ive of Frankl in ’s Second Expedition to the Shores of the
Polar Sea, under the heading Limestones of Lake W innipeg ,” the di scovery, among
other fossi ls,of specimens of a Maclurea which i s most probably identical w ith the
present species on the western shore of that l ake , in 1 825 , i s thus referred to by Sir JohnRichardson Professor Jameson enumerate s terebratulae
,orthocerat it es, encrin ites , cary
ophyllit ae and lingulae , as the organic remains in the specimens brought home by Capta in
Franklin on his first expedition . Mr . Stokes and Mr. James De Carle Sowerby have
examined those which we procured on the l ast expedition,and found amongst them
t erebratulit es, spiri fers , maclurites and corall ines . The maclurit es belonging t o the same
species w i th specimens fromLakes E rie and Huron , and also from Iglool ik , are perhaps
referable to the Maclm'
ea magna of Le Sueur .
A few casts of the interior of shells which are certainly referable to ill. M (milobensz'
s
were col lec ted by Mr. John Fleming in 1 8 58 at L imestone Point , Lake W innipeg , el evenmiles north of the Litt le Saskatchewan , and by Prof. H . Youle Hind
,in the same year
,at
Deer Island , near Grindstone Point and at Punk Island , on the same lake . These
Specimens , which are stil l in the Museum of the Survey , are referred to by Mr . E . Bil lings,
i n chapter 20 of Prof. Hind ’s repor t,as belonging to a spec ies of Maclurea, al li ed to M
Logani, Sal ter, but w ith more slender whorl s .”
Since then the species has been col lected at the follow ing localit ies,but the firs t
specimens known to the wri ter in which any considerable porti on of the test i s preservedwere obtained in 1 8 84, by Mr . T. C. Weston at Pike Head and Kinwow Bay , Lake
W innipeg,and by Mr. McCharles at East Selkirk . Between Fort Alexander and the
mouth of t h e Red River Dr . R . Be ll,1 874 . At the second and t hird rapids of the Nelson
River, Keewat in , Dr . R . Bell,1 87 9 . Elk Isl and , Big Is land,
Grindstone Point, Washow
Bay,Bul l Head Bay , Dog
’s He ad, Pike Head or Jackfish Bay , and Kinw ow Bay , all in or
on Lake W innipeg ; T. C. Weston,1884 . E ast Selkirk , Mani toba , T. C. Wes ton and A .
McCharles , 1 884 . North end of Big I sland , Big Grindstone Point and Swampy Isl and ,
Lake W innipeg , J . B . Tyrrel l , 1 8 89 .
In the wri ter ’s judgment,M . JVI am
'
toZiensz’
s is much more nearly allied'
to the M .
B igsbyz‘ of Hal l (from the lower p ar t of the Butt l imestones of the Trenton group at
various local i t i es in southern W i sconsin ) and t o the M . cu/zeata of Whitfield (from theupper portion of the Trenton group , or G alena l imestone of W i sconsin and Iowa) than i t
i s to either M . magma or M . Logam'
. Sti l l , the obl ique flat ten in g of the convex side ofthe outer volution in the presen t species and its dis tinctly angulated periphery would
seem to separate i t su fficien tly from M B z’
g sby‘
i, while its comparativ ely broad umbilicus
and more slender volu t ions would apparently prevent i ts reference to M . cimeata . The
surface of the shel l of M . Big sby i, too , as seen in the matrix , i s described as being marked
only w ith strong revolving striae .
”
7 8 WHITEAVES ON FOSSILS FROM THE
that Oncoceras, Hall , i s synonymous w ith Po terioceras, and states that Prof. Hall’s actual
type , as W ell as others which have been referre d t o the genus , in no respects differ
from M ‘
Coy’
s genus .
” To this con tention the present wri ter feel s compelled t o demur,as the statement by which it i s support ed seems to be at vari ance w i th the known factso f the case . If the genus Poleriocems i s to be retained at al l , in the sense in w hich i t
was defin ed by M ‘
Coy, the n ame w i ll probably have t o be restri cted to those straight ,Gomphoceras
- l ike shell s i n which the apert ure i s simple and entire , and i t is in accordance
w i th thi s defin it ion of i ts characters that the name w i ll be u sed in the, presen t
'
paper . In
On coceras ,on the o ther h and
,the shel l i s always distinc tly curved and inflat ed in a
peculiar manner in advance o f the m id- length,while i ts body chamber is transversely
constricted j ust behind the aperture . According t o Prof. Hall , the aperture of On coceras
i s constri cted , b ut as Mr . E . Bil l ings asserts that i t i s ova],
l the constri ction referred to
by Hall may have been meant to refer to that immediately behind the aperture .
In the outl ine draw ing of the species on Plate X IV,al though the contour and exact
dimensions of the o riginal are correctly represented,the sutural l ines are sl ightly restored
and the supposed outline of the aperture,on one side of the specimen
,i s indicated by a
do tted l ine .
POTER IOCE RAS APERTUM . (N . Sp )
(Pl ate X IV, figs . 2 to
Shell much smal ler than that of the preceding species , straight , though in somespecimens there i s a scarcely perceptible curvature at the apical end
,varying in contour
from ovately subfu si form to rather n arrowly subovate , about one third longer than broad ,slightly compressed
,but a l i ttle fl atter on on e side than the other
,so that the outline of a
tran sverse sec tion through the broadest part woul d be el l iptical or ovate ly subel l ipti cal ,the venter b eing sometimes slightly broader than the dorsum : body chamber truncated
anteriorly. Septate por t ion narrow ly rounded at the apex in some specimens b u t more
pointed in o thers , and increasing rather rapidly in size , especially in the dorso-ventraldirection body chamber occupying about one third of the en t i re length , and narrowing
Very gently and in some cases somewhat convexly tow ards and up to its anteri or term i
nation : aperture s imple,open
,not much narrower than the posterior part of the body
chamber , and narrow ing apparently in to a short , shallow and backwardly directed sinu s
a l ittle on or to on e side of the middle o f the venter .
The surface markings are very imperfec tly preserved,but the t est appears to have
been nearly smooth and marked only w i th a few fain t l ines of growth .
Sutures straight and paral lel , the last two septa, at leas t , being coarsely crenul atedsiphuncle inflated between the septa
, pl aced n ear the outer margin,and a l ittle on one
side of the centre of one of the flat tened sides .
The dimensions of the l argest specimen col lected (fig . 2 ) are as fol l ows — l eng th,1 24
mill ime tres (or nearly fiv e inches) maximum dorso -ven tral diameter, seventy- four mm .
greates t l ateral diameter,fifty
-eight mm . In the o ther specimen represented on Plate XIV
Geo l . Surv . Can . Rep. Progr. 1853-56 , p. 31 1 .
CAMBRO—SILUR IAN OF MANITOBA . 7 9
(fig . the length along the median line is sixty-six mill im etres , the maximum dorso
Ventral diameter forty - seven mm .,and the greatest l ateral , forty .
Dog’s Head , LakeW innipeg,T. O. Weston , 1 884, and Swampy Island in the same lake ,.I . B .Tyrrell
,1 889 three nearly perfec t but badly preserved specimens from each of these
local i t ies .The siphuncle seems to have been placed a l itt l e nearer to the dorsal than to the
ventral side , bu t the only specimen in which any remains of this part of the shel l can bede tected is so much w orn that its relat ive posi tion is uncertain .
This species possesses many charac ters that are common to i t and to the b rev icon eOrt hocerat it es for which Professor Hyatt has const i tuted the genus Ri z oceras, but i t differsmaterially from that group or genus in the circumstance that i t s body chamber alwaysnarrow s distinct ly from its commencement to the aper ture . From P. nobile i t seems to bereadi ly separable by its much smaller size
,more s lender contour, and more compressed
sides .
ONCOCERAS MAGNUM . (N . Sp. )
(Pl ate XV, fig .
Shell very large , attaining a length of at least eight inches ,1 slightly but distinctly
curved , somewhat fusiform but much more convex on the dorsal than on the ventral s ide,
and contracted at both ends sides compressed , though one side is flatter than the other ,so that the outline of a transverse section through the thickest part would be nearly ovate ,the dorsum being broader than the venter ; maximum dorso -ventral di ameter about tw i ce
as great as the lateral,and nearl y equal to one half of the en t ire
'
length . Septate portion
increasing rather slowly in size from the posterior end to a li ttl e in advance of the. mid
length , aft er which i t narrows somewhat more rapidly , especial ly on the dorsal side ; itsdorsal margin not only uniformly convex , but di s t inctly gibbous anteriorly, whi le itsventral margin i s shal lowly concave behind and sl ightly convex in front . Body chamber
oblique , short and occupying abou t one third the ent ire length ; at its commencement posteriorly , i t i s broad ,
especi ally in a dorso-ven tral direction , and bounded by a deep obl iquegroove , which is broader on the dorsum than on the venter, an d paral lel to the s epta
nearest to it ; in front of this groove the chamber narrows rapidly , but at first convexly,towards th e aperture , behind which there i s a broad and shallowly concave constric t ion .
In the most perfect specimen known to the writer,the characters of the aperture are very
imperfectly shown,but it appears to have been simple
,entire , rather narrow and subovate ,
w ith its lateral margins obl i quely truncated ; there are also some indications that i tnarrowed into a short sinus on the ven tral s ide .
Sutures obl ique,the sep ta being broader on the dorsum than
‘
on the venter,nearly
straight on’
the sides bu t faintly convex on the dorsum , and slightly concave on the venter ;siphuncle inflated between the septa, nummuloidal , endogastri
’
c , and placed very near to
the ventre,but not quite marginal .
Surface markings unknown .
1 I n an imperfect and water-worn cast of a she l l co l lected by Mr. Tyrrel l at Swampy Island th is summer,wh ichs probab ly referab le to th is Species, the length is fully e leven inches.
8 0 WHITEAVES ON FOSSILS FROM THE
Approximate dimensions of the most perfec t specimen col lected — actual length along
the medi an l ine of the most convex side , 179 mill imetres , or about seven inches and a
half (bu t as a considerabl e piece is broken off the posterior end , i ts entire length when
perfect was probably an inch longer than this) maximum dorso-Ventral d iameter of the
same , 1 06 mm . ; greatest l ateral diameter, 5 5 mm .
The beau t i ful specimen figured,which i s a wel l preserved cast of the interior of the
shell , col lected by Mr. U . Chesterton at East Selkirk , was recently presented to the Museum
o f the Survey by the President (Mr. Charle s N . Bell ) and members of the Manitoba
Hi stori cal and Scien t ific Society . A s imi lar but less perfect specimen was obtained at the
same local i ty in 1884 by Mr . T. O. Weston .
ONCOCERAS G I BBOSUM . (N. Sp. )
(Pl ate XV,figs. 2 and
Shel l resembling that of the preceding species in external form and apparently al so
in the characters of its interior,but differing therefrom only in it s much smaller size .
Thus , the smal lest specimen of O. magnum kn own to the writer must have been a little
more than eight inches in length,when perfect , and the largest fully eleven , whereas in
the present species out of fourteen specimens coll ected,the smallest could not have been
more than three inches and a half long when perfect , and the l argest four and a half.
These two series of specimen s , too, do not seem to be connected by any intermediate
gradat i ons in s ize .
In one of the specimens of O. g ibboszun from Swampy Island, the surface of the test
of .the septate portion is faintl y costulat e t ransversely , as represented on fig . 3 .
Big Island, Wash ow Bay , Bul l Head Bay , and Jack Fi sh Bay or Pike Head , Lake
W innipeg, T. C. Weston , 1 884 : three specimens from Jack F i sh Bay , and one from each
of the o ther local itie s .
Swampy Isl and , Lake W innipeg , J . B. Tyrrell , 1 889 : seven specimens .
CYRTOCERAS MAN ITOBENSE . (N. Sp . )
(Pl ate X I I I , figs . 3 and 4, and Plate XV , fig .
Shel l very s lightly curved , s lender elongated and narrow ly subfusiform , moderately
inflat ed a l ittle in advance of the mid-l ength,though the dorsal margin , in a ful l l ateral
View,i s much more convexly curved than the ven tral pos terior extremity narrower and
more pointed than the anterior ; body chamber short , occupying l ess than one third of
the entire length,and narrow ing gradually to the somewhat obl iquely truncated anterior
end ; aperture rather l arge , simple and Open , w i th a broad and shal low ly concave con st ric
t ion immediately behind it , but only on the ventral side ou tl ine .of a transverse section
through the broades t part ovate,the dorsum being narrower than the venter .
Surface of the test on the septate portion longitudinal ly ribbed .
Sutural l ines concavely arched on the sides , produced into moderately elevated and
simple saddles on the dorsum,and into similar but less prominent saddles on the venter.
8 2 WHITEAVES ON FOSSILS FROM THE
inner whorl s are not nearly so wel l pre served as the outer volution , and the asymmetry
and separation of al l three are best exhibited in the transverse section afforded by the
specimen .
APSI DOCERAS INSIGNE . (N. Sp .)
(Pl ate XVI I .)
This n ame is proposed for a large fragment, con si sting of a cast of the interior ofnearly one hal f of the outer volution ,
of a huge nautiloid shel l from the Hudson R iver
formation at StonyMountain , Manitoba ,which evidently belongs to the genus Apsidoceras
of Hyat t .
l The specimen is nearly a foo t i n length , as measured in a straight l ine , orsixteen inches
,i f the curvature of the abdomen be fo l lowed , and the dorso-ventral
diameter of the tube of which it is composed i s fiv e inches at the larger end . At its
anterior extrem ity a portion of the body chamber i s preserved an d in the res t of the
specimen twenty septa can be counted .
The whorl s appear to have been just in contact , and they were evidently coiled onthe same plan e : the umbil i cus is broad and deep , its breadth in the actual specimenbeing abou t h y e inches : and , although not a vestige of the shell i s preserved , the
surface appears to have been smooth . The periphery or abdominal region i s broad and
flat ten ed,the l ateral angles are tolerably distinct
,and the sides
,which are convex near
these angles,narrow rap idly to the inn er edge or dorsum . As far as can be ascertained
,
in the imperfect and somewhat distorted state of the specimen , the outline of a t rans
verse section of the outer whorl at it s th ickest end,and probably that of i ts aperture also
,
would be very broadly subovate w i th the l arger end of the ovoid truncated , the dorso
Ventral and lateral d iameters in this region being nearly equal .
The sgpta are about twelve m i ll imetres apart in the centre of the periphery orabdominal region
,and about hy e mill imetres apart on the narrow dorsum . E ach suture
has a bro ad and angular sinus or lobe on the abdomen or venter and a corresponding
and simi lar s addle on both of the outer and lateral angles . Ou the sides , the sutures are
nearly straight or very faintly concave , while those on the dorsum are so imperfectly
preserved that it i s scarcely possible to trace them throughout the ir en t ire course,though
each suture in thi s region seems to have been shallowl y curved in such a way as to
form a smal l and feebly developed saddle on each side,w ith a simi lar lobe or sinus in
the middle . The angulari ty of the lobes and; saddles on the venter and ventro-l ateralangles i s mos t marked near the body chamber . Allthe lobes and saddles , too , are of the
simplest type,their margins being en tire throughout .
The fine specimen upon which the preceding description i s based was pre sented to
the Museum of the Survey in the spring of 1 889 by the President and members of the
Man itoba Hi storical and Scien t ific Society .
A . insigne i s more nearly related to the Nautilus Hercules of Bi ll ings ,2 from the Hudson
River formation of Anticosti , which i s probably an Apsz’
docems, than to any other species
known to the w riter . Sti l l the two forms appear to be totally distinct , for N . Hercules i s
Bost. Soc. Nat . H ist. Proc. 1 883,xxn . 289 .
2 Described Geol . Surv . Can .,Rep. Progn , 1853
-5 6, pp. 306, 30 7.
CAMBRO-SILURIAN OF MANITOBA. 8 3
a much smaller shel l (the maximum diameter of the type of that species being only a little
over six inches) its aperture i s broadly reniform ,w i th a lateral d iameter nearly double that
of the dorso -ventral,i t s voluti ons have no ventro - lateral angulation , and its sutural l ines
are nearl y straight , not only on the s ides but also upon the abdomen or venter .
The exact stratigraphical relation s of the subdivisions of the Camb ro -Si luri an rocks ofManitoba have yet to be ascertained . Ou purely palaeontological evidence , the highly fossil i
ferous deposits at Stony Mountain were referred to the Hudson River formation by the
present writer, in and the fossils of the pale b ufilcoloured limestones or dolomites
of E ast Selkirk and Lower Fort Garry have long been supposed to show that these rocks
are the equivalents of the Galena l imestone or upper portion of the Trenton formation , of
Wi sconsin and Iowa . On th e same evidence,the somewhat simi l arly coloured and
fossi l i ferous limestone s of the is lands and shores of Lake W inn ipeg, appear to be of the
same age as the Trenton Limestone proper, or, at any rate not older than the Birdseye andBlack River Group of E astern Canada an d the State of New York . It i s possible that
the fossiliferous rocks on the shores and isl ands of Lake W innipeg may be a little lower
down in the series than those at E ast Selkirk and Lower Fort Garry , but the whole
of these deposits,apart from those at Stony Mountain and elsewhere in Manitoba which
can be somewhat confiden tly referred to the Hudson River group , probably represent
on ly on e wel l defin ed horizon in the Oamb ro-Silurian system . However thi s may b e , in
the writer’s judgment,there is at present no satisfactory palaz on t ologicalevidence for the
exi stence of the Chazy formation or i ts equivalent , i n Manitoba .
Geol . Surv . Can . ,Re p. Progn ,
1878-79 , p. 5 0 c .
8 6 A . H . MACKAY ON
dams and in streams which can be stepped across . They are found in the stagnant pooland breasting a strong current . They encrust w ith green the surfaces of pebbles in themargins of our lakele t s , or speck w ith patche s of dull cream or gray or white thei r unders i des . The author dredged some from a depth of forty feet in Grand Lake , Nova Sco ti a,and from nearly as great a depth in Newfoundland . More t ime and patience might
doubt less have been rewarded by specimens from a greater depth,had a pebbly or rocky
bottom or a water- logged timber been scraped in our course . The deeper bottoms (in a fewcases over two hundred feet) were general ly characterized by extensive deposits ofdiatomaceous slime or mud . Dyb owski, when dredging in Lake Baikal , Central Asi a ,brought up some specimens, stunted and nearly colorless , from as g reat a depth as 30 0
feet but only from an area of the bottom not mud-covered .
COLLE CTING .
— Sponges should be co l lected attached to their base o f support when
ever possible . They may“
b e preserved by immediate transference to alcohol or in j ust
as serviceable a manner for most purposes , and more conveniently , by immediate and
thorough drying in th e sun or by artificialheat . When thoroughly dry , they can be
preserved for an indefin it e period . Care should be taken to protect them from dust,and
if the natural green color is to be ret ained,from the light also .
GENERAL CHARACTERs .
— \Vith out attempting any ou tl ine of the histol ogy,physi
ology or development of the Spongil lidae , it may be desi rabl e to cal l at tention t o a fewconspicuous characters . In connection w ith al l the Porifera
,thei r spicule-supported
flesh i s traversed by a system of incurrent and excurrent canals,through which there i s a
circulation o f water from which is deri v ed the materi al for the growth o f the ir defin it elyorgan ized sarcode
,their spicules and their reproductive elements . In w inter, as a general
rule,thi s sarcode di sappears. The skeletal and dermal or flesh spicules are thus set free ,
and are eventually deposited by the water where sediment i s accumulating. They areoften carried by the water currents into the substance cf different species
,and may thus
give rise to errors if their extraneous origin is not detected. In the diatomaceous muds
and earths found in more or less abundance in al l our lakes,these spicules are general ly
found. Sometimes they form quite an appreci abl e percentage of the sil iceous organi c
remains in these so -cal led infusorial deposits . The spicules are of colloidal si l icamineralogical ly considered , opal ,— the si lica of which ultimate ly came from its solution
in the water,from which i t was secreted and built up by special cell s into transparent ,
flin ty,symmetrical forms . The skeletal spicules of the
'
more abundant species in Canada
are Oxeas (the sharp-pointed form o f Prof. Sollas’
s Monaxon dz'
act ine)— needles sharp at
both ends— the one -hundredth of an inch in length,or sl ightly more or less , smooth or
variously microspin ed,s traight or sl ightly curved
,slender or robust
,separate or overlap
ping each other in linear fascic les , and sl ightly cemented together .
Dermal or flesh spicules are found in some species , whi le they are absent in“ others .
They are very much small er than those of the skeleton— in one species as short as
inch . They are found free at the dermal surface or w i thin the flesh . In our species they
are either minute acerates or b irotulat es.
During the summer and autumn , cluste rs of elementary cells appear at points wi thin
the sarcode . They soon become invested w ith more or less spherical chitinous capsules ,
FRESH-IVATER SPONGES . 8 7
which become further pro tected by firm cel lular crusts in which i s embedded , in dense
and orderly array,a third cl ass o f Very peculiar and distinctive si l iceous spicules . These
are o f two types , the spined Monaxon and th e b iro tulate Monaxon . The “ seedlike
capsular bodies are vari abl e in size,averaging about the one-fift ieth 0 1
'
an inch in
diameter . There i s a smal l round aperture in the capsule communicat ing with thecentral cavity . The aperture has general ly a short tubular exten sion outwards and i scal led the foramen .
” The intern al cavity i s filled w i th a cel lu lar protoplasmic matterw hich comes out next spring w ith an amcnb oid movement , and develops in to a new
sponge . These w ell -pro tected capsules of germinal plasm have been cal led by variousnames
,such as ovaria,
” statoblasts,
”stat ospheres ,
”or gemmules . ” The statob l asts
are found often in layers near the base o f the sponge , sometimes scattered,o r i n loo se
clusters,or in minute
,compact
,spheric al aggregat ion s
.
throughou t the sarcode . The
character of the spiculation o f the sta toblast forms the art ific ialbasi s of our genera asoriginal ly determ ined by Carter.
Some of our sponges are thought t o be perenn ial ; but there i s no doubt that the
statoblast is the special agency for propagating the l ife of the fresh -water sponge beyond
the generally le thal chill of w in ter. The Spongill idae have been considered to be dist in c tly separated by this pecul iari ty from the marine sponges
, which , from their habitat ,are not so much
,
affected by the annual variat ion of temperature . But their close phylogenetic affin ity i s strikingly suggested by the follow ing observation s. In the four specie s
of fresh water Sponges (Lubomirslria) found by Dybowski so abundantly in Lake Baikal ,no statoblasts have as yet been di s covered . Possib ly
,for any thing we know as yet
,the
marine habit may coexi st in the deep w aters of our own greater l akes . On the other
hand , capsul ar bodies , having a close resemblance to the statoblast , have been described inthree genera of the marine Sil icispongiae , namely Chal ina, Cli ona , and Suberites . (M. E .
Topsen t , Comptes Rendus , CV. 1 888, pp. 1 29 8 The enclosing capsules in these
are , however, mu ch more simple than those in the fresh-water sponges,as they are
wan ting in the foramen , the massive cellular crust and the si l iceous armature .
The position of the fresh-water sponges in Prof. Sollas ’
s system of classificat ion i s asfollows
The Phylium.— SP ONG I JE (Sponges) .
Branch B .
— MICROMASTICORA.
Class I I .
— S I L I C’I SPONGL E
Sub-Class i i .— D em o spo n g iae .
Tribe A .
— MONAXON IDA .
Order 1 .— MONAXONA.
Fami ly 7 .- SPONGI LLI D JE (Freshwa ter Sponges.)
PROVISIONAL CoNsPECTUS
OF
CANAD IAN SPONG I LL I DE .
Genus I .— SPONGI L1.A. Statob last spicules, one class of spined monaxons , tangential .Species l.
— Spongilla fragilis.A . Dermal Spicules, ab sen t.
2 .— Spongilla MacKayi.
3.— Spongilla lacustris.
4.— Spongilla Terraz-Norze
Dermal spicules,
8 8 A . H . MACKAY ON
Genus I I .— MEYEN I A. Statob last spicules, one class of b irotulate monaxons, radial .Spec ies 5 .
— Mcyenia E veretti . Dermal spicules, b iro tulates .
6 .— Meyeniafluvia t ilis.
Genus i I I .— Hsrsnon nm sm. Statob last Spicules, two classes of b irotulate monaxons , radial .Species 7 .
— Heteromeyenia m‘
gyrosperma.
8 ,— Heteromeyenia Ryderi.
9 .— Heteromeyenia Pictovensis.
Genus IV.— TUBELLA . Statob last Spicules one classe of inequib irotulate monaxons , radial .Species 10 . Tubdla Pennsylvanica.
The spiculation of the genera and of mos t of the spec ies is i l lustrated in the accompany ing Plate of e ightdiagrammatic drawings. A smal l segmen t of a statob last shows , be low, the ce l lular germina l matter, b oundedab ove by an arc of the enclos ing ch i tinous capsule. The sta tob last spicules come nex t, and when in pos itionare general ly emb edded in the crust wh ich is not sketched, but wh ich immediately in vests the ch i tinous coat.Next above are the ske leton Spicules, and ab ove them the dermal Spicules when they occur. They are all
magn ified on the same scale— 200 diameters .
SYNOPS IS .
For the sake of brevity, the author here takes the l iberty of condensing or modifying
the origin al descriptions as suggested by his own observations. He feels that many of
the synonyms have been based on varietal dist inctions but he cannot a t present attemptthe del imitation of Canadian varieties . There are very many species, not to speak of
varieties,which are yet to be discovered in this country . W ith more extensive col l ections
and closer investigation,data for a more complete treatment of our fresh -water sponges
may be hoped for in the near future .
GE NUS I .
—SPONGILLA, Carter.
Statoblasts more or l ess spherical separate , in den se layers , or aggregated in com
pound,subglobul ar
,minute masses ; invested w i th sil iceous spicules more or less l inear
straight or curved,cyl indrical or acerate , variously spined , and arranged tangential ly to i ts
inner,chitinous , capsul ar coat .
A .
— D ermalSpicules Absent .
1 .
— SPONG ILLA FRAei Lrs.
1 85 1 . Spong illafi'
ag ilis, Le idy .
1863 . Lordz'
z’
, Bowerbank .
1 870 . conteela, Noll .
1 875 . Ot tawaensz‘
s, G . M . Dawson .
1 878 . Siberz'
ca, Dyb ow ski .
1 880 . Morg iana ,Potts.
188 0 . Calumeli, Thomas .
1 880 . frag ilis, v ar . minute, Potts .
1 880 .minutissima, Potts .
1880 . irregularis, Potts .
9 0 A . H . MACKAY ON
13.
— D ermals’
cules Present .
3 .—~ SpoNe 1LLA LACUSTR IS .
1 745 . Spong t’
a lacustrz'
s Linn .
1 788 . canalium Gmelin .
18 16 . Spong z’
lla mmosa, Lamarck .
1 842 . lacuslrz'
s, Johnston .
1 853 . Lieb erkiihn .
1 863 . D awsom’
,Bowerbank .
1 863 . panpercnla ,
1 866 . lacustris,
1 870 . L ieberkhi'
lemz , Noll .
1 875 . flexispina, G . M . Dawson .
1 877 . lacustris,Vej dov sky .
1 877 . Jordanensis,
1 879 . lacustroz’
des, Potts .
1 880 . abortiva,
1 880 . mutz’
ca,
1 880 . montcma,
1 88 1 . mult zforis, Carter
1 883 . E uspong‘
z’
lla lacush z’
s, Vej dov sky .
1 883 . Jordanenszs,
1 883 . Spong illa laeustrz’
s, v ar . 7'
amosa, Retzer .
1 883 . Leiberkuelmii, Ret ser .
1 884 . Lehighensz’
s, Potts .
1 884. E 7t spong‘illa lacustris, Wierz ej ski .
1 884. Spong illa lacustrz’
s, var . Americana, Carter .
1 88 5 . lacustrz’
s, v ar . D amsom’
, MacKay .
Sponge green , generally branching , texture loose . Skeleton spicules fasciculated,
smooth,curved
,fusiform
,gradually pointed , about inch long. Dermal or flesh
spicules fusiform acerates , curved , entirely m icrospined, generally less than on e-third the
length of the skeleton spicules . Statoblast about inch indiameter . Granular crust
Variable in thicknes s , sometimes even absen t . Foraminal tubule infundibular . Stato
blast spicule s nearly the same length as the dermals, general ly cyl indrical . Curved in
various degrees,spars ely and strongly spined , especial ly towards thei r ends , where the
spines are frequently recurved . Th e number and position of spicules Vary w ith the
thickness of the crust .
Habitat .
— The mos t common of fresh-water sponges . Most luxuriant in running
water . Newfoundland and Nova Scotia — M acK ay . River St . Lawrence — S z’
7' J.
W'
. D awson . Ottawa River .— H . M . Ami . Elgat ehes Lake — S z’
r f .W. D awson . Tuladi Lake ,near Lake Temiscouata.
— H . M . Ami . Chilukweyuk Lake , British Columbia — C'
arler.
Nimpkish River , Vancouver Isl and , British Columbia .
—G. M . D awson .
FRESH-WATER SPONGES.9 1
4 .
— SP0 NG1LLATERRE -NOVAB.
1 886 . Spongilla Term -Novce, Potts (Proc . Acad . Nat . Sci , Phila ,188 1 , p .
1 887 . MacKay .
Sponge greenish , encrusting , thin ,traversed by filamen ts of fascicled spicules forming
a loo se tissue w i th few connecting spicules . Skeleton spicule s , slender , cyl indrical ,generally smoo thish
,gradually po inted
,about inch long . Derm al or flesh spicules ,
minute b iro tulates of varying size,about inch in length
, an d very abundant
Statoblasts globular,large
,about inch in diameter
,having no crus t enveloping the
chit inous capsules . This capsule is covered w i th a layer of spicule s which are robust ,fus ifo rm , variable , but averaging inch in leng th
,w i th from one to twelve strong
spines irregularly projecting from them, so that each has a differen t configurat ion of
spinous pro cesses .
Habz’
tat .— Lakelets near He ar t ’s Content , Trinity Bay , Newfoundland — Maclf ay .
[NOTE .
— Dr . A. Wierz ej ski found near Lemberg , in Gal icia (Verk . K . K. Z ool.~Bot .
Gresell, 1888 , pp. 5729 a form of sponge which he thinks resembles thi s species . He
argues that both forms are pro bably deformed varie t ies of M eyenia Mullerz'
, Lieberkuhn .
The statoblast spicul e s of S . Ter'
rw-Novee can easily be imagined in many particular
instances to be more l ike deformed b irotules than like the more extreme forms of those ofS . JVI acIfayi. And Mr. E . Potts has shown (Proc . Acad . Nat . Sci . Phila , 1 887 , p. 222 ) that
the b irotulates of Meyenia fluvz’
alilis var . aeumz'
nala , Potts , have the rotules de formed and
the axes produced beyond them ; and as the crust usual ly surrounding the chitinous
capsule is absent,they are c ompelled to assume the tangenti al positi on of Spongillas
instead of the radial posi tion of Meyen ias . But on the other hand, the s tatoblast spicules
of S . lacustris,when the crust i s very thick
,may in some instances assume nearly a radial
position and the spines are stronger towards the two ends , so that we can easi ly thinkof them as deformed
,long- shafted
, b irotulat es of the Meyen ia type . But we might as
wel l cal l al l the Meyen ias by their origin al name Spong illa, and a great deal better,than cal l the original Spong illa lacustm
’
s by the name Meyenia . No doubt a close phylo
genetic relationship exi sts between the genera,but the degree of thi s rel at ionship cannot
probably be guaged accurately by the vari abil ity of a single element in the species inquestion . General morphology is the safer criterion . Now , the dermal spicules would
indicate a close rel at ionship to M . Everelt z’
,as would also the unusually large- sized
statoblas ts and the filamen t ous structure s of fascicled , skeleton spicules only the stato
blas t spi cule s have no close resemblance in this case . But S . Terne-Novce has rather the
general appearance of S . MacKay i, the statoblast spicules are tangen tial as in the whole
genus generally , and it has dermal spicules as has its congener , S . lacustris. Ou the
whole it appears to the author to have much more o f the complexion of Spongil la than
ofMeyen ia, and especial ly more so than of M . Malleri (Spong illa Mullerz’
.
9 2 A . H . MACKAY ON
GENUS I I .
— MEYENIA, Curler.
Statoblasts general ly surrounded b y a minutely cel lular crust charged w ith
b iro tulat e sp icules in a radial posit ion,their axes normal to the chi tinous capsule .
5 .
— MEYE NIA EVERETTI .
1 884 . Meyenia E verellz’
, Mi ll s .
1 885 . MacKay .
1 887 Potts (Proc . Acad . Nat . Sci , 1 887 , pp. 230
Sponge green , consi sting of numerous , slender, straggl ing filamen t s, l ittl e more than
the one-sixteenth of an inch in diameter,made up of centre l ines of closely fasciculated
skel eton spicules about inch,w ith short
,thin lines of the same
,diverging at acute
angles . Dermal spicules , minute b irotulat es , about inch long,w ith sl ender , cylin
dricalshafts and cap -l ike rotules notched at the margins into fiv e or six hooks . Stato
blasts large,about inch in diameter
,i ts b irotulate spicules averaging inch in
leng th,shaft s smooth , s lender, w idening tow ards the rotules , which are formed of fiv e or
six recurved,acuminate hooks .
Habz’
lat— Mackay ’s Lake near watershed of Nova Sco t i a in Pi ctou County . A few
dermal b iro tulates (if n o t those o f S . Terrw-Novfe or some o ther species) have been foundin the diatomaceous deposits from Ben ’s Lake , Pi ctou County and also from sediment
from the lakes supplying the wa ter works of Hali fax,which the author rece ived from
Prof. Lawson .
[NOTE .
—There are three in teresting sponges known w i th minute birotulate, dermalspicule s nearly iden t ical . They are 8 . Terrw-nocca, S . Bolmm
'
i,Hi lgendorf, and M . E rerellz
’
.
The first has been found in Newfoundl and alone by the author,i f Wierz ej ski
’
s Gal ician
sponge i s not identi cal w ith it . Th e second has been found in Ugalla River , near Lake
Tanganyika , Central Africa . And the thi rd has been found only in a pond on Mount
Everett , feet above the sea , in the sou th -wes t corner of Massachusetts , and in the
local ities above n amed in Nova Scotia ]
6 .
— MEYE NIA FLUV IATILIS .
1 745 . Spong iafluvialz'
lz’
s,Linn .
1 788 . cmmlz’
um,Linn .
1 8 1 6 . Spong z’
lla pulm’
nata,Lamarck .
1 842 . j iuvialz’
lz’
s,Johnston .
1 849 . Meyeni, Carter .
1 85 6 . fluvialz'
lz’
s,Lieb erkiihn .
1 863 . Bowerbank .
1 867 . Ephg/dal'
z'
afluv z’
at ilz’
s,Gray .
1 875 . Spong illa asperm’
ma, Gr. M Dawson
1 875 . slagnalz’
s,
1 877 . Vejdov sky.
1 88 0 . astrosperma , Potts .
1 880 . polymm'
pha,
9 4 A . H . MACKAY ON
8 .
— HETEROMEYEN IA RYDER I .
1 8 82 . Heleromeyem’
a Ryderi, Potts .
188 5 . MacKay .
Sponge greenish , in massive encrustations , texture l oose surface more or l ess l obed .
Skeleton spicules non - fasciculate,nearly by 0 0 0 0 6 inch
,fusiform
,spin ed except at
the extremiti es . Statoblasts w i th inconspicuous tubular foramina . Greater b irotulates ,about by inch diameter of rotules inch . Shafts w ith spines hookedtowards their centers . Rotules of three to six short recurved hooks . Lesser b irotulates ,
inch long . Diameter of rotules Shafts sometimes spined , enlarging
towards the rotul es which are flat di sks w i th l acinate margins .
Habitat .
-Lakelets and old m i llpond , Pi ctou Cc .,Nova Scotia — Maclfay .
9 .— HETEROMEYEN IA PI CTOVENSI S .
1 885 . Heteromeyem’
a Piclovensz'
s, Potts .
1 885 . MacKay .
1 887 . Ryderi, var . Piclovensz'
s, Po tts .
Sponge green , massive , en crusting . Texture very compact . Surface smooth .
Spicu les non -fasciculated , 0 0 0 75 by in ch . Short , robust , cyl indrical , curved , w ith
spines div erted towards the ends which may be round and spined or sharply conical .
Statoblasts scarce . Grealer b irotulat es,about in ch w i th fusiform shafts often spined
near the middle,and rotules of three to s ix i rregularly pl aced rays recurved at their
extremi t ies . Lesser b irotulat es , about inch . Diame ter of the disk- shaped rotules
inch , umbonate , w i th l acinulate margin s .
Habitat — Lake lets in Pictou Coun ty drained t o the Atlantic by St . Mary ’s River ,Ou stones in a small s tream flow in g into the North-West Arm
,Hali fax . Spicules of, in
sediment o f Dartmouth lakes,etc .
,al l i n Nova Scot i a . In lakes between Conception
Bay and Trin ity Bay, and at Harbor G race Junc t ion , in Newfoundland .
This i s the firmest and mo s t beau t i ful of our fresh-water sponges . So distinctive i s
this character that it can generally be recognised at sight . Although its texture and
statoblast spiculation bear a degree of resemblance to those of H . Ryderi, the skele tonspi cules are so different from those of that species , i ts variet ies , and all other known fresh
w ater sponges , that i t appears to hav e a c lear claim to specific rank . The statoblastspiculati on has very judici ously been t aken as an art ificialcriterion for gen eri c del imita
tion . But t o make its morphology the chief factor i n specific grouping , agains t sothoroughly di stinctive a skeleton spiculation , looks like forsaking the phylogenetic i dea
of classificat ion for an art ificialone which has n o practical advantage . The palaeon tolo
gist findin g these sponge spicules in his geological formations would be l ikely to go to
the other extreme,and make H Pictovensz
'
s generically di stinct from H . Ryden'
.
GENUS IV .
— TUBELLA, Carter.
Granular crust o f statoblasts charged w i th trumpet- shaped , or inequib irotulate
spicules , the larger rotule re sting upon the chitinous capsule .
1 0 .— TUBELLA PE NNSYLVAN ICA .
1 882 . Tabella Pennsylvanica, Potts .
1 8 85 . MacKay.
1887 . Potts .
Sponge minute,incrusting
,greenish when grow ing in the light. of mature
Spec imens often found bearing parallel skeleton spicules not arranged to form cel l- l ike
interspaces . Skeleton spicule s variable as t o length and curvature , averaging by
inch,subfusiform
,acuminate or rounded , entirely sp ined ; spines large , conical
terminations of spicules more often round than acuminate . No dermal spicules . Stato
blasts small . The diamete r of the distal ro tule may vary from that of the shaft to thatof the large rotule . Margin of l arge rotule general ly en tire . Dimension s of inequi
b irotulates by inch . Diameters of ro tules and in ch .
Habitat .
— Ou stones in margin ofQuidi V idi Pond , St . John ’s,New foundland
,and in
lakelets , Pictou County , Nova Scoti a.— MaeKay .
The rotules of the Newfoundland species differ from the No va Scot ian by having therotules of the statoblast Spicules distinctly crenate -rayed .
9 8 COLEMAN ON THE GEOGRAPHY
Racks Observed — This range consi sts chiefly of quartz ites , Soft sl ates weathering intocl ay
,and limestones
,the l atter sometimes black and seamed w ith small rami fying veins
of calci te,so that they would probably form handsome marbles . The se rocks are prob
ably Palteoz oic , and of the same age as those described by Mr. McConn ell from the
western part of Bow Pass .
l Veins of quar tz and calci te are common,and a few dykes of
erupt ive rock occur . The strata dip at low an gles away from the Columbia .
Jlfounlains south-west of ihe Spillimichene.
— The mountain s west and south of thelonger fork of the Spillimichen e are loft ier than those just described, and often rise abovethe snow -line . From the top of one which was ascended , the scene in its confusion of
snow, i ce and naked rock , reminded one s trongly of view s from the lofti e st points of the
Norwegian fj elds . Score s of glaciers were in sight , one t oward the head of the west fork
of the river appearing much larger than the w ell-known gl acier near the Canadian Pacific
Railway . Patches of snow where the ascent was made were of a rosy color , probably
caused by the growth of Protococcus n ivalz’
s.
Rocks Observed — The rocks observed were ch iefly sl ates , harder than those of the prev ious range , and w i th a very perfect cleavage and also some quartzites . The cleavagecut the l ines of strat ificat ion of the slate
,as shown by bands of l ighter and darker grey,
at al l angles,but did not pass into the quartzite .
F IG. 1 .— Folds of Slate showing cleavage wh ich does not pass in to the quartz i te . Summ i t of a moun ta in south
west of the Spiliimichene.
A vein , from 1% to 5 feet w ide , was found to be largely charged w ith copper pyri tes
(chalcopyrite )
FROM THE K ICKING HORSE TO BEAVER — From the mouth of the Kicking Horse
to D onald , the Columbia preserves i ts gentl e character, and , though sometimes dividedby low
, w ooded is lands into several channel s , fol lows the w i de and straight val ley inwhich i t set out . It receives several tributaries from the Rocky Mountains , beside the
Kicking Horse ; for instance , the Blaeb erry and Bluewater , but no large ones from the
Selkirks . About hal f way between Donald and Beaver,the Columbia leaves the broad
valley to a tributary and turning west,b reaks through wal ls of slate in a series of rapids
and sharp curve s . The rocks found in this part are chiefly lustrous s lates , and are wel l
1 Geolog ical Features of a 1’ort ion of the Rocky M ts., Geol . Sur. Can .
, 1886,
AND GEOLOGY OF THE COLUMBIA . 9 9
exposed along the railway cuttings following the Beaver valley up the Roger’s Pass into
the Selkirks .
FROM BE AVER TO SURPR ISE RAPI Ds .
— Below Beaver the Columbia flows twenty
or twenty-five mi les uninterrupted by rapids , though sometimes spli t into numerous
channel s by low islands of alluvium . Old channels , dammed at the upper end by masses
of dri ftwood and si lt,have the character of bayous
,and were formerly greatly frequen ted
by beavers , as shown by the numbers of tree s cut by these animals . Some cottonwood
stumps displaying the marks of their teeth were more than two feet in diameter . Theirnumbers a re at present much diminished by th e work of trappers .
For some distance above Surprise Rapids , the river , which here receives a considerable
s tream from each side,forms narrow ,
l ake-l ike expansions . In this part of its course therei s only a comparatively low ,
wooded ridge separat ing the Co lumbia from a w ider val leyto the north-eas t
,occupied by a tributary flow ing in the opposi te directi on and jo ining
the Columb ia j ust below Donald . This is perhaps another hint that the upper Columbiaonce flowed south-east
,be fore it had dug it s way through the walls of slate above
Beaver .
In this region,rock was observed by the writer only once , and was found to be sl ate
l ike that near Beaver .
SURPR ISE RAPID s.
— These rapids are well n amed , since they are almost unseenunti l one is just upon them
,though their roar may be heard a mile or two above . The
val ley i s much n arrowed here , and the rapids are caused by barriers of steeply incl ine dmica schi st .
A compari son of barometer re adings w ith tho se at Donald gives a fall to the head of
the rapids of 138 feet while i n the four or fiv e miles of the Surprise Rapids , we found a
fal l of about 1 40 feet ,1 of which 5 5 or 60 bel ong to the first mile . The first fal l w i l l some
day afford a magn ificen t water-pow er , since a canal of about half a mile through a low ,
wooded point would render nearly the whole of it available . The engineering difficult ieswould probably n ot be serious
,and suitable steamers could ply up the r iver to Beaver
,
the nearest poin t on the rai lway . There is a vast supply o f forest w ithin reach,
chiefly black and white spruce , w ith a considerable amount o f giant cedar and some
white pine .
Moun tains north-easlof the Rapids.
— The nearest summit of the Rockies , four or fiv e
miles from the rapids,was ascended
,and named Lookout Point . Its height
,determined
barometrically , is feet . A very rugged,triple-peaked mountain , a few miles north of
this, bears several glaciers , and was est imated to be feet at least in height . It Wasjudged to be Sul l ivan ’s Peak or possibly Mount Forbes , and is the highest point in the
n e ighborhood .
Rocks Observed.
—Soft , greenish slate s and quartzites make the exposed portions ofLookout Point . The quartzi tes are evidentl y metamorphosed sandstones
,since some of
them show t races of ebb and flow structure . The beds dip s lightly away from the
‘Travel along shore is much ob structed, hen ce the readings of the b arometer were often some hours apart,rendering the results less certain than could b e wished, though probab ly not much astray.
1 0 0 COLEMAN ON THE GEOGRAPHY
Columbia . A massive horizontal bedding , l ike that of Castle Mount in Bow Pass , i s seen
on the Face of Sullivan ’s Peak three or four miles away but the horizontal look is probably
only apparent, the strata dipping more or l ess steeply away from the point of observat ion .
The rocks examined appear to be of the same character as those described by Mr. McCon
nel from the we stern part of Bow Pass,
lthough perhaps more indurated .
M oun tain s to the south-west .
—The nearest summit of the Selk irks , three or four milesfrom the rapids , was al so ascended , and its height found , by comparison of barome terreadings w ith those at Donald , t o be feet . From this point , precipices , snowy
mountain tops and glaciers can be seen in al l directi ons . Several peaks o f the Selkirksare much higher than the one ascended , at least or feet . A large glacier in
the valley W est of the mountain climbed , reached about feet lower than the point on
which we stood .
The view from the top of Surprise Mountain , as I named it , i s w ide and interesting .
The rapids lie feet below ,and the river may be traced for about forty miles
,from a
point a l ittl e below Beaver on the south-east to Lake Timb askis on the north-west .
Beyond the river v alley ,.
unnumb ered summits o f the Rocky Mountains are seen , the
of highest al l, fifty miles to the north , being probably Mount Hooker .
Rocks Observed.
— The rocks exposed at Surpri se Mount are typical mica and hornblendio schist s dipping about 40 ° to the S . S . W . and w i th a strik e of E . S . E . and
W . N . W ? In this they differ from the mica schi sts at the rapids,the latter dipping 5 0° to
70° toward t he S . S E . These rocks are probably Archaean in age,although they stand
several hundred feet higher than‘gthe (supposed) Palaeozoic slates and quartzites of Look
out Point , les s than ten miles away . There must be a great faul t separat ing,r the two .
SURPRISE RAP IDS TO LAKE TIMBASKrs .
— From the head of Surprise Rapids to
Lake Timb askis 3 i s a di stance o f perhaps eighteen or twenty m i le s in a straight l ine,
though not less than twenty-fiv e by the route fol low ed— an old trai l along the north-east
bank of the river, now almost impassable in many parts from the fal l of trees and thegrowth of bushes and young forest . We saw n o trace o f inhabitants during the six weeks
after leaving Beaver, yet at one point a forest fire was found raging . Thi s may haveoriginated from lightning , as in a case actual ly w itnessed by the wri ter a few years b efore on the GoldRange opposi te Revel stoke .
Rocks Observed in the Reg ion .
— For about ten miles down the river from the head of
Surprise Rapids , the rocks observed are pearly, lustrous mica (serici te) sch ists , sometimes
containing small garnets , and dipping at h igh angles toward the south-east or south .
Then fol low a few miles of grey, finely banded , schistose l imestones , whose boundaries
appeared to be h idden by loose material s . From the river bank to the highest point
reached,about or feet above the river, they remained of the same character ,
being often excessively folded , crumpled and contorted , and containing a few scales of
mica . They dip at varying, usual ly high , angles , and strike about E . S . E . and W . N . W .
A stream flows at one point out of a subterranean ch annel in the so l id rock,and empties
1 Geol . Sur Can . , 1 886, p. 25 , D .
2 The b earings g iven are magnetic . Mr. Carpmael, D irector of the Meteorolog ical Ofii ce,Toron to, g ives the
dev iation as about 23° 30 ’east, in southern portions, and 25 ° east in northern portions of the Se lk irks .
3 Name as g iven by Old U n cle , a trapper at Beaver.
1 0 2 COLEMAN ON THE GEOGRAPHY
Rocks Obse7°ved.
— At McCulloch and French Crefiks , green , finely w rinkled schists
occur, containing , e specially tow ard the head of the former creek , auriferous quartzVeins
,which may be looked on as the source of the gold of the placers . Boulders of
grey gran ite and gnei ss found along the creeks originate higher up the val ley or at the
watershed , though none were seen in situ by the w riter . Similar boulders , some of
porphyri t i c granite,are found on the trai l between Laporte and Revelstoke and come
probably from higher parts n e ar the axis of the range .
E triers of the Selkirks.
—The s treams flow ing west out of the Selkirks are larger as a
rule than those flowing east , a fact accounted for, perhaps , b y the grea ter ra infal l on the
slope toward the Pac ific , enabling the rivers fed by i t to excavate their supply basins
more rapidly than tho se on the other l pe , and thus to shift the watershed slow ly e ast
ward of the centre of the range . At Don ald ,where the Canadian Pacific Rai lway crosses
the Columbia for the first time,the leve l of the river is feet above the sea ; but at
Revel stoke , the second crossing, it i s only — a difference of nearly 9 0 0 feet . Thestre ams flow ing westward from the Selkirks must therefore have on the average a ste eper
slope , which no doubt acts in the same way as the increased rainfal l in hasten ing the
excavation of their val leys .
Glaciers of the Selkirks.
— Perhaps in no part of the world are glaciers more numerous
than on this range and the mountains n orthward tow ard Al aska and the Arcti c Oce an .
From man y summits of the range,dozens of them may be seen of al l sizes from tiny ones
w ith a few acres of neve’ ending in a tongue of ice , to masses of snow and ice several miles
across and covering many square m i les of surface . There is evidence show in g ret rogres
sion of the ice in some case s . Ci rques are common just below snow leve l , and are due
perhaps to the erosive power of former glaciers,though it doe s not seem impossible that
they may have been excavated by convergin g streams . A number of glaciers examined
by the writer show sign s of recent retrogressi on in the b areness of the rock of the val ley
just below the front of the glacier . There appears not to have been time since the w ithdrawalof the ice for l ichens
,mosses and o ther p lants to form even the beginn ing of a
b ed of soi l . A retrogression of the glaciers doe s not necessari ly imply a ri se in the
annual temperature,since a diminished snow-fal l resul ting from a change in prevailing
w inds would have the same effect .
D tfieultz’
es of E xploration .
— Every one W ho has attempted exploration in the Selkirks
w il l agree that few mountain ranges offer so many obstacle s to the explorer and the
geologist . The moist and comparatively mild cl imate causes an immense grow th offorest and underbrush
,much greater than that of the Rockies , for instance , so that up
to about feet 1 the rock i s largely h idden by vegetation , except alon g the water
courses . Unclothed precipices are much more common , according to the experi ence of
the writer,in the Rocky Mout ains, perhaps because , from their later origin , they have not
suffered so much from erosion . Their drier cl imate must work in the same direction ofl imiting erosion .
Travel through the fore sts of the Selkirks i s very l aborious . In most case s al lnecessarie s must be carried on the back— no l ight matter when a trip of two weeks is
undertaken,up steep incl ines
,through second-grow th evergreen s s o thickly planted that
1 The tree l ine is at feet on Surprise Moun t, and about on the southern s ide of Lookout Po in t.
AND GEOLOGY OF THE COLUMBIA . 1 0 8
they must be parted w i th the hands ; or among the tangled box- alders along river
margins,or the j ungles of pri ckly devil ’s-clubs that rise as high as one ’s head in
swamps . Windfalls and sn ow-sl ides, w here great trunks of spruce or Thuj a g igan tea l i e
heaped upon on e ano ther, also form most disheartening obstacles at times . On the
western slope,continued rain s and swol len creeks add frequently to the difficult ies of
travel .
I I.— Mrcaoscorrc PETROGRAPHY or ROCK SPECIMENS .
The Spillimz’
ehene Reg ion .
SLATEs.
—The soft clayslates of the range between the Spillimichen e and the
Columbi a belong in al l probabil ity w ith the Palaeozoic slates of the Rocky Mountains and
n eed not be described here . They readily crumble to cl ay and so are n ot easily made in tosections thin enough for microscopic work . Th e harder , somewhat more crystal l ine
slates south-eas t of the northern branch of the Spillimichene are mo re easi ly handle d
and are more characteris tic of the Se lkirks .
Macroscopic D escript ion — These s late s are very fissile, the cl eavage crossing at vary ing
angles the planes of strat ification indicated by bands of lighter and darker grey . They
often contain cubes of pyrite,somet imes distorted by the pressure that formed the
cleavage . In a crystal measured , the angles be tween the faces meeting in edges exposed
to compression were enlarged from 9 0° to 93°
FIG. 2.-D istorted Crystals of Pyri te in Slate.
M icroscopic.
— Thin sections show a micro-crystall ine or crypto-crystal li ne structure'w i th many opaque
,dusty looking particles
,especi al ly in the darker bands . Splin ters of
the rock grow l ighter in color when heated in a Bunsen burner, show in g that at least
part of the dark substan ce i s carbon . The transparent parts have not a elasti c look .
Quartz may form a part of the obsc’ urely anisotropic substances,but chlorite or some
related fib rous or scaly mineral seems more important . The vague fib res and oblong
sections seem to have extincti on paral lel to the chief se ctions of the nico l s . A
scaly, slightly dichroic mineral , occurring in larger part i cle s , i s perhaps muscovite . Im
mense numbers of minute ru t ile needles are scattered through the rock , often in groupsw i th roughly radiating points
,and sometimes w ith characterist ic knee- shaped tw in s . 1
Between crossed n icol s the ruti le needle s gleam out as brill iantly-colored threads . Small
portions of a yellow brown , sl ightly translucent substance scat t ered here and there
may be hydrous sesqu ioxide of iron .
1 See plate xv i i i, fig. 1 .
1 0 4 COLEMAN ON THE GEOGRAPHY
A TRANSITION FORM — Macroscopic— On e specimen i s of a different type
,not so fin e
grained , and banded wi th greenish and brownish layers cut through by a very perfectcleavage .
M ic7°oscop z'
e.— L i ttle or n o carbon or o ther amorphous substan ce can be seen
,but many
small grain s of quartz of elasti c origin and contain ing cav iti e s w i th l ibel lules . A l ittle
plagioclase i s observed , badly weathered , and some muscovi te . Ye llowi sh,and also pale
greeni sh substances , which are plenti ful , may be considered varie ties of chlorite . Scales
of the l atter have sometimes a roughly radial arrangement about grains of quartz . Thebrown bands contain much hydrous sesquioxide of iron .
Region near Beaver .
SLATE s.
— M te7'
oscopic.
— A wel l known series of s lates is found near Beaver, along the
railway , the rocks ran ging in color from ligh t grey to dark i ron -grey,lustrous in surface ,
sometimes almost as i f pol i shed w i th graphite . They have usually a well markedcleavage , sometimes two
,cutting at an angle of 1 0 0 ° to They are Often fin ely
corrugated and may even show two sets of w rinklings . Some have the speckled
appearance of the German Knotenschie fer . Cubes of pyrite are common inclusions .
M z'
croscopz’
c .
— I n general the components of th e sl ates are the same as those of the
Spillimichene, carbon particles an d perhaps other amorphous materi al of el astic origin ,w i th quartz in small quantitie s
,much of a ch loritic substance and numberless fib res of
rutile . In addi tion a li ttl e muscovite and al so biotite w i th b rown oxide of iron . In some
specimens,however
,the quartz increase s greatly in quanti ty , and calcite al so plays an
important part . The Knoten or Garben in the spotted slates are nearly opaque , so thattheir composition could not be determined . They are perhaps of a concret ionary nature .
ROCKS INTERMED IATE BETW E EN SLATE S AND QuARTz rrE s.-Macroscopic.
— A few l ight
greeni sh rocks from Beaver seem related'
to slates and quartzites , but w i th a leaning
toward mica schi st . One specimen contains blebs of quartz and fel spar, as though a
metamorphosed conglomerate w i th smal l ovoid pebbles .
M icroswpic.— Th e allogen ous portions are much more important in si ze and amount
than in the slates . Fragments and blebs of quartz , contain ing fluid cavities w i th bubbl es ,form much of the rock ; and greatly weathered felspar i s al so found . Th e autogenouselements form larger and far more
'
distinc t individual s than in the slate . The quartzfragments are often surrounded in a roughly radi al way b y confused scales of colorl ess
or blue-green chlori te . Mingled W ith it are secondary quartz , a few l amellae of muscovite
and biot ite , and grains of magnetite , sometimes rectangular in cro ss section .
The fin er grained varieties remind one somewhat of the last specimens described
from the Spillimichene .
Surprise Rapid.
M ICA SCHI ST (SERICITE SCHIST) .— Macroscopic.
—Most of the rocks exposed near the
rapids are very hue-grained,greenish grey and w i th pearly , lustrous cl eavage surface .
The schi stose structure seems to correspond to the bedding . Small garnets and oblong
portions of dark bioti te are abundant .
1 0 6 COLEMAN ON THE GEOGRAPHY
M icrosco;n’
c.
— Nearly the whole of the rock proves to be made up of quartz in l arger
or smaller fragments,s ome t imes l ooking as if el as tic in origin . These are o ften sur
rounded and wedged in by small , probably secondary , individual s as a tesselated border.
The l arger grains have the usual inclusions , cavit ies containing water and also liquidcarbonic acid . In addi t ion we find a few scales o fmuscovi te
,a fragment or two of horn
bl ende,and some minute yellow grains , probably of t itani te .
M ICA (SERICITE ) SCHISTS .
— Macroscopic.
— These are lustrous , pearly or reddish greyschists w ith wavy micaceous lamellae folded about various minerals , such as garnet , s tau
rolit e and disthene . Allof the se mineral s sometimes occur in crystals an inch or more in
length,and they may be so crowded as to make up fully half the rock , garnet b eing
commonest and staurol ite nex t in order. In such cases the rock should perhaps be
n amed garnet , st aurol ite or di sthene schi st .
Micmac] ; ic.
—Q_uartz occurs of the usual kin d
,but i s variable in amoun t and at t imes
quite absent . The chief constituent i s serici te in wavy, confusedly paralle l scales but aconsiderabl e amount of biot ite i s also found . The garnet is of a pale flesh-color in thin
sections . The staurolite displays a magn ificen t dichroism ,orange red paral le l t o the
longest axis and yel low perpendicular to it . The less common disthene shows no pleochroism , but has bri ll iant. polarization colors . Smal l red brown grains and crystal s of
t itanite are very common .
GNE I ss .
— Mac7'
0 30 0pic.
— A specimen obtained from a boulder,found near the trai l on
the north east shore of the Columbia, appears to be gnei ss , though none was seen in situ .
It i s the only specimen o f the kind known to the writer from the Canadian Rocky Moun
tain s . Could i t have been transported , by gl aci al action , for instance , from the Selkirks
across the river ? The rock i s slightly schistose in appearance,medium grained
,and
light-brownish grey in color, w ith patches o f black mica .
M ic7‘
0 30 0pic.
— It contains l ittle quartz,much microline and plagioclase and a quantity
of green , and also brown , biot ite . Ox ides of iron and epidote occur in smal l amounts as
decomposition products .
French Creek (Big Bend Gold Reg ion ) .
CHLORITE SCHIST .
— Macroscopic.
— The only specimen at command was obtained atFrenchtown four years ago . It is a fin ely-corrugated lustrous schi st of a grey-green color
much darker than that of the sericite schis t of Surpri se Rap ids on the other side of theSelkirks .
M icroseoPie.— I t consists of quartz in small
,clear portions
,a very l ittl e pl agiocl ase
,
and much of a blue green mineral,probably chlorite
,in irregular
,sl ightly dichroic
,scales
.
A l i ttl e green biotite seems al so to occur ; and innumerable, small , greenish yel low crys
tals of rutil e are imbedded in the mineral s first mentioned . The ruti le crystals havesharp rel ief, frequently form knee-shaped tw ins , and are almost always associ ated with
grains o f a black , opaquemineral that seems to be magnetite .
‘Rhombohedra of calcite
are found scattered through the rock .
1 See plate xv i i i , fig. 2 .
AND GEOLOGY OF THE COLUMBIA . 1 0 7
HORNBLEND IC GNE ISS .
—Macroscopz’
c.
— A specimen from a boulder at Frenchtown i s
of medium grain ,rather dark grey
,and sl ightly schi stose in appearance .
M icroscopie — I t consi sts of quartz w i th fluid cavities contain ing salt cubes ; much
orthoclase, some of i t microperthi t ic , w ith trichites and other inclusions , much hornbl ende of dark green and yellow tones
,and a l i t t le brown biotite . Apat ite and magneti te
are found in smal l quantities,and epido te i s a decomposi tion product .
GRAN ITE .
— Several specimens of granite were obtained from boulders
at French Greek and at points on the trai l between Laporte and Revelstoke . They arelight grey
,medium to coarse-grained rocks
,o ften porphyritic
,containing oblong white
cross sections o f fel spar sometimes an inch in length . The smaller felspars are yel lowi sh’
white and more weathered than the larger ones .
— Quartz of the kind usu al in gran ite i s abundant also orthocl ase,
where not replaced by microcl ine , which i s often the case . Microperthite and plagio
clase are less important . The porphyri t i c crystals are of microcl ine , s o far as observed .
Biotite and hornblende occur in con siderable amounts,replacing one another . Apatite
i s frequent,an d epidote
,the latter a product of decomposition .
Roger’
s Pass ( 0 . P. R .)
M ICA SCHIST .
— Macroscopic.
— The mica- schi sts are ch iefly white or light grey, con
sisting of quartz and muscovit e . They sometimes approach the quartz i tes from the smallquantity of mica they contain . A distinct varie ty , dark iron grey , w ith metall ic lustre ,occurs at Albert Canyon on the Illicillewaet .
M iC7'osc0pz'
c.
— The quartz has often a elastic appearance . The colorless muscovite i sof the usual k ind
,n o t sericite . No chlorite has been observed in my specimens
,which
however are only three in number, excluding the rock from Albert Canyon . The l astmentioned rock gets its black colo r from the large number of dark
,amorphous looking
particles it contains in addition to quartz and mica . That the black substance i s carbon ,
or some carbon compound,is proved by the fact that a fragment readily burns white in
the blowpipe flame and the gases formed , when it is heated in a glass tube in a curren t
of oxygen,give w ith limewater a milky precipitate , whi ch i s re-dissolved by continued
passage of the gas .
GNE ISS .
— Mac-roscopz'
c.
— The two specimens in my col lection (one from the summit
of the pass ) are fine grained , very l ight colored , and not very schistose. They are farfrom typical specimens as compared w ith Laurentian gn eiss from Ontario .
M icrosc0pic.
— They contain quartz , some orthoclase and microcline , and plagioclase ;al so a l ittle microperthite
,and bioti te and muscovi te in small quan tities .
I I I .— CoNCLUs10 N .
An attempt has been made in the first part of this paper to give by brief descript ions some idea of parts of the Selkirks not easily reached from the railway, and hence
rarely visited . When the region has been rendered more accessible by means of trail s
1 0 8 COLEMAN ON THE GEOGRAPHY AND GEOLOGY,ETC.
it should become interest ing ,not only t o the sportsman ,
botanist and geologist,but to
every one who l oves w i ld alpine scenery, glacie rs and torrents , beautiful valleys andrugged mountain tops .
In regard to the geological feature s of the region,the extent to which metamorphism
has gone on becomes important . Are the sl ate s southwest of the Spillim ichen e and those
of Beaver older than the Palaeozoic sl ates of the Rockies Or are they of the same age
but modified by more intense compression and more complete recrystal l i zation of . the
sedimentary material s ? A certain an swer to thi s would demand a large amount ofstratigraphical work or the findin g of fo ssil s .
The sl ates near Beaver are associated w i th green ish , highly sch istose rocks that seemconn ecting links to the mica schi st s ; and al so w ith what appear to be greatly met amor
phosed congl omerates . Allthe thin sections examined fromBeaver appear to containconsiderable quantities of el astic material . The sericite schi sts of Surprise Rapids aremuch more crystall i ne, bu t yet contain grains of quartz apparently of allogen ous origin ;and one associated rock much resembles the metamorphosed conglomerate of Beaver .
The schist s of Lake Timbaskis seem sti l l more thoroughly crystall ine than those justmentioned
,but yet show traces of elastic material s . It i s possible that all these rocks
may be of Cambrian age , though they are more probably Huronian ,at l east those that are
more highly crystall ine . The Timb askis sericite schi sts are interesting for the numberand size of the in cluded crystals of garnet
,staurol ite and disthene .
The mica and hornblende schists of Surpri se Mountain appear thoroughly autoge
nous and crystalline,and w ithout evidence t o the contrary
,must be looked on as Archaean ,
perhaps equiv alen t s pf the eastern Laurentian .
On the other side of the Selkirks the green schists of French Creek are perhaps to be
ranked w ith the sericite schi sts of Surpris e Rapids , though rather more crystal line and
dev oid of eviden t ly allogenous substances .
The black schi st of Albert Canyon , again , appears to be largely of elastic , perhaps
partly of organic, origin , since the quartz looks fragmentary and the carbonaceous matters
can hardly be accounted for w i thout l i fe . From the ease w ith which the coaly matter
burn s we may conclude tha t metamorphism has not gon e so far as to form t he'
allo tropic
form,graphite, as has been the case in the Laurentian of Ontario. I t i s probable then
that the rock of Albert Canyon , twenty miles east of the second crossing of the Columbia ,i s not Archae an , but of considerably later age .
The gneisses from the central parts of the range are not,so far as examin ed by the
writer,typical , when compared w ith those of eastern Ontario . On the other hand the
granite s are quite characteris t i c , con taining the minerals found in the same rock fromeastern local i t ie s , especial ly the microcline so common in most Ontario gran ites . Inhabitus
, the gran ites of the Selk irks differ much from those of the eastern Laurentian ,
being l ight grey , instead of red , in color, and much more apt to be porphyritic .
1 1 0 W. SAUNDERS ON
sort, 123 fold , and the average from 326 plants was 6 10 fold. From the third grade of
pl ants , which usually included more or l ess weakly ones, the highest y iel d was 85 2
from the Fern wheat,and the lowest from the Greek Summer , from Russia, 1 24 fold , the
average of plants being 40 6 fold .
The fol low ing were among the varieti es of wheat which gave the largest yield
Y IELD or Y I ELD 0 9 AVERAGE YI ELDVARIETIES . S INGLE SELECTE D 3 os 4 SELECTED or UssaLscrr-zo
PLANTS. PLANTS . PLA NTS.
Herison ’s Beardless
The average of three plots of Red F ife gave .
BARLEY .
Th e highest yield of barley obtained from among the first selected pl ants was that of
the Imperial Improved American , which gave fold . This, however, i s a six-rowedbarley of light weight and inferior quali ty . The heaviest yielders among the six -rowedbarleys were as follow s
YIELD or Y IELD OF AVERAGE YI ELDVARI ETI ES S INGLE Sxt ncrso 3 on 4 -Ssr.scrsn or Uus s t scrso
PLANTS. PLANTS . PLA NTS .
Imperial Improved American
Six -rowed wheat barleySmallb lue naked
Six-rowed from Northwest Terri tories
Spring .
Renn ie’s Improved six-rowed
The largest yield among the two-rowed sorts was that of the Danish Cheval ier,which produced fold. The smallest yield of barley from the plants of the first
sel ection was 1 25 fold . In the second selection of 3 or 4 plants, the largest yield among
YIELD OF CEREALS .1 1 1
the six-rowed sorts was that of the Imperial Improved American , which gave fold
the most productive of the two -rowed sorts in thi s class being the New Z ealand , which
gave as the average of three plants 9 1 8 fold , the ar erage yield of the 1 9 8 selected pl antsbeing 764 fold . From the unselected pl ants which comprised the entire remainder,
numbering in all,the average yield was 442 fol d . The best yielders of the two
rowed sorts were
YI ELD or Y I ELD os AVERAGE Y IELDVAni er iss. SINGLE SELECTED 3 on 4 SELECTED o s UNS ELECTE D
PLA NTS . PLA NTS . PLANTS .
OATS .
The highes t yield of c ats from among the 9 8 selected p lants was from a varietyknown as Scotch c ats
,from British Columbia, which gave fold , the lowest was
from an unnamed variety obtained from Oregon , which gave 355 fold , the average of the
plan ts of the first select ion being fold . From the second selection , contain ing 379
VARI ETI ES . S INCvYY.
I
Fin
éI
i5L(
:JF
0TED or i nii‘
gsg
shghcreoPLA NTS . PLANTS .
Scotch from Bri tish Co lumb iaHopetown
Wh ite Oats from L incolnsh ireRuss ian Black .
B lack Oats from L inco lnsh ireEgyptian
Red Crowned o
North DakotaBohem ian Ha l leesGeorgia E arly Wh i teRust Proof
Clydesdale
Welcome
1 1 2 W. SAUNDERS ON Y IELD OF CEREALS .
pl ants, the average was fold , and from the unselected plants , numbering in al l
the average obtained was 8 17 fold . The table on the previous page gives thevarie t ies that yielded best .The seed obtained from these single plants , when compared w ith the seed from
which they were grown, was found to be l arger and heavier ; the in crease in some
instances amounting to from 2 5‘
t o nearly 5 0 per cent . The grain used for seed in the
experiments for a s im i l ar serie s in 1 888 was of an average character unselected : that
chosen for experiments in 1 889 has been carefully sel e cted , only the largest and plumpest
grains being chosen . It i s expected that , i f the season i s favorable , this w i l l re sult in a
more un iform y ield throughout the entire series , and it i s hoped that, by continuing this
process of sel ection,a high grade of grain w il l in scme instances be obtained which shal l
be impressed w i th a tendency to produce grain of l arger s ize and in increased quantity .
1 14 E . J. CHAPMAN
by a ridge or band w ith the glabel la, narrow“
body-axi s w ith numerous or comparat iv ely
numerous segments, and small , short pygidium . Again in the Cambrian Dikelocephalus,and in Cten opyge (Linn arsson ) , the pygidium i s Very large
— thus presenting a marked
departure from the so-called primordial type . Other examples.might be ci ted to prove ,
( I ) that these imaginary primordial characteristics are present i n various pos t-primordial
genera,and (2) that they are not always present in primordial or Cambrian types .Nothing , perhaps , shows more forcibly the arb itrary
,unnatural character of
stratigraphical groupings , than the col location in recent classificat ions of Neseuretus,Hicks , side by side w ith Paradox ides i n the family of the Olen idae . In all i ts leading
characters, Neseuretus i s simply a Cambrian Calymene , probably the ancestral source of
the l atter type ; but in the classificat ions referred to , these gen era are placed in different
families and w idely apart . To show these points in al l their di st inctness , Viz .,the close
agreement of Neseuretus w ith Calymene , and its remote relations to Paradox ides , a com
parat iv e view of their more characterist ic structures i s given in the fol low ing tabl e
NESEURE’
I‘
US. PARADOXID ES.
Glabella Con tracted an teriorly , 3 later Con tracted an teriorly, 3 later Expanded anteriorly. Transai furrows . alfurrows. verse and lateral furrows .
Thorax 13 segmen ts 13 segmen ts 16 to 20 segments.
Pygidium. Comparatively wide , wi th fur Of moderate width , wi th fur Very smal l and narrow, wi throwed s ides, and 8 to 10 rowed s ides and 6 to 1 1 rarely more than 2 or 3
r ings in its ax is. rings in its ax is. r ings in its ax is, the sidesforming merely a smoothb order.
In these recen t classificat ion s, also, we find Dikelocephalus arranged under the
Olen idae , whil st Arethusina and Harpides, which agree very strikingly w ith Olenus in
their more sal ient characters , are placed far apart from the latter under the Proetidae ,ev idently upon purely s tratigraphical grounds . The s tructural rel ations of these generaare b riefly indicated in the annexed tabular vi ew
Dm sro cnPHALUs. OLE NUS. ARnTr-rUSINA.
Comparatively large, Comparatively smal l. Qui te smal l .
Facialsutures Forming a poin t ab ove the Open an teriorly . Open an teriorly.
glabel la
Large. Unconnecte dwi th the Comparative ly smal l. Con Comparative ly smal l. Con
glabel la. nected by a b and wi th the nected b y a hand wi th theglabel la. glabe l la.
Body-axis. Comparat ively b road. Narrow. Narrow.
Pygidium . Very large, wi th comparative Smal l , b ut wi th extended Smal l , but. wi th extendedly short ax is. ax is. axis .
ON TRILOBITES.1 1 5
As the Trilobites have no known Post-Palae ozoi c representatives , and are prac
t ical ly confin ed to strata represen t ing the earl ier and middle periods of the Palaeozo ic Age,broad dis t inctions
,such as those which separat e the Palaeozoic Crinoids and E chin ida from
Mesozoi c and higher forms of these orders,cannot obviously be looked for in any
classificat ion . Added to this disadvantage,there are other drawbacks which beset at
pre sent , and render diffi cult , the systematic grouping of the Tril obites . Briefly stated ,these comprise, first of al l
,the very lax manner in which fragmentary examples have been
referred to known types,or pl aced,
as new genera,in famil ies w ith which they have but
few points of resemblance . D efin ition s , applicable enough in the first in stan ce,'
b ecome
thus , after a time , of almost impossibl e application— the original defin it ion being soextended as to include forms of very dissimi lar structure . Mathematically rigid defin i
t ion s in the grouping of organic forms cannot , of course , be strictly enforced w ithout , atleast, greatly mul tiplying our classificat ion groups but better an undue multiplicat ionof orders an d famil ies
,than this l icense of indefin iten ess that now so habituall y prevai ls .
Another source of difficulty l ies in the remarkable dissimilarity of aspect which exists in
the case of many species commonly referred to one and the same genus, as seen in"
Asaphus , Proetus , Cheirurus and other forms . This has led to the creation of numeroussub -genera, by which , however, the difficulty i s in no way lessened— family defin it ions
stil l remaining vague and diffuse .
(6 ) In the classificat ion shown , as regards i ts l eading features , in the annexed
synopsi s,the Trilob ites
,considered as an order of Crustacea, are arran ged under four sub
orders , or primary groups , founded on general structure and configurat ion ,w ith sub ordi
nate sections based , as far as pos sible , on some strik ing or typical character . Thi s l atter,
however , i s to be taken in connection W ith the general characters of the sub -order to
which the section may refer . The names attached to these s ections refer necessarily tosingle characters
,and they are thus to be regarded as names only , not as defin it ion s . It
i s thought, however , that they may serve to bring rapidly before the mind’s eye the more
sal ien t or special features of the types to which they refer . In the collocation of the
familie s,an attempt is made to place them in as connected a sequence as possible , s o that
each family shal l present relations to the family which fol lows it , whether placed in
the same section or under contiguous sections ; but in a linear system of arrangement,and especially where the objects t o be classified are not very numerous , i t i s not poss iblet o avo id occasional breaks in the continuity of the series .
In offering this new classificat ion ,I am not sanguine enough t o expect that it w il l
meet w ith general acceptance . In i ts subdivi sion of genera , and the recognition of these
subdivisions in one or two cases as the types of new famil ies , and in its disregard of
stratigraphical considerations , it w il l necessarily rutfle exi sting prejudices . But i t may
tend to bring under more immedi ate not ice the indefin ite and hence unsatis factory
character of our commonly received subdivisions,and so lead even tually to a more
successful grouping of these ancient forms .
1 1 6 E . J. CHAPMAN
ORDE R TR I L OB I TA .
Sub -Oi'dor I .
— PUSILLIFORMES .
— Smal l,aberran t tri lob i tes
,w i th typical ly two thorac ic segmen ts
,
and head—sh ield and pyg idium of nearly equal s i z e .
Fam. 1 . Agnost idce .
— Typical genus, Agnostus, Camb r ian , Lower S ilurian.
Suh-Order I I .~— LATI FORMES — More or less b road
,often large , tr i lob i tes , w i th head-sh ield, thorax
and pygidium oi'
nearly equal d imen s ions. Body-segmen ts typical ly 8 to 10 in number
Surface of shellcommon ly marked w i th wavy marg inal l i nes .
g 1 . LEVATI .
-Broad-formed or o val tr i lob i tes, w i th essent ial ly smoo th sh el l , and inconsp icuous orfeeb ly e levated g labe l la.
Illccnidce.
— Pleura3 unfm'
rowed. Pyg idium w i th smooth s ides and smoo th or feeb ly furrow
ed a'x is . Typ. gem : Illcenus, Up. Cam
,Sil. ; Bumastus, Sil. ; N ileus, L i
’
. Sil. ; S tyge’
na,LP. Sil.
Farm. 3 . Asaphidaa.— Pleurae fuvi 'owed. Pygid ium w i th smooth s ides and smooth or feeb ly furrowcd
ax is . Typ. Gen . : I llamurus, Cam. ; Nz'
obe,LP. Sil. ; Asaphus, Lv. Sil. Psilocephalus, Cain ;
Barrandz’
a,Lv. Sil. Ba thyurellus, Lv . Sil. ; Ba thyurus, Cam.
,Lv . Sil. ; Megalcwpz
'
s, L v. Sil.
Norn — The two fam i lies of th is sect ion,al though w idely separated in the classificat ion of
Barrande, are very c lose ly al l ied,and are common ly un ited in more recen t systems, pr i nc ipal ly from
the fact that certain genera— Illaenurus,N iobe and Stygina , more espec ial ly— appear t o form an
in termediate or t rans i t ion group . But the typical represen tat i ves of each fami ly are clearly charact erised, and connect ing po in ts of th i s k ind are abundan t ly traceab le in the case of o th er familiesun iversal ly regarded as dist inct . I n the presen t classificat ion ,
i ndeed,the co l locat ion oi
'
the fam i l iesis based
,as far as th is can b e carr ied out , on the ex istence of t hese connect ing or trans i t ionary forms .
As regards Fam i ly 3 , I have separated from the Asaph idae proper the forms w i th h orned h eadshiold and strong ly furrowed pyg idium,
and have placed these in a dist i nct fam ily under the gener icname of Bas ilicus, already appl ied to them,
as a sub-
genus of Asaphus, b y Sal ter. Th is is warran tedby t he very marked contrast presen ted by th ese s trong ly farrowed, lobate and conspicuously hornedforms, t o t he smooth Illaenidze and Asaph idae . The horned genus, MegalaSpis, forms the connec t ingl ink .
2 . SULCATI .
— Broad-formed or o val tri lob i tes w i th horned h ead-ang les, po i n ted pleura}, and large,strong ly-furrowed pyg idium .
Farm. 4 . Basilicidw Glabel la w i th shor t s ide-furrows,or smooth . Typ. gem : Basilicus Asaphus
in part) , Ll‘ . Sil. ; Oxygia, Ll‘
. Sil. Homalotopeon, LP. Sil.
Fam. 5 . D ilcelocephalidce .
— Glabel la s trong ly deve loped, W i th transv erse or s ide furrows . Numberof body-segmen ts unknown . Typ. goo . z D ikelocephalus, Cam. ; D orypg/ge, Cam.
NOTE .
—D i ke locephalus , as a Camb rian type, is common ly p!aced with Parodox ides and oth erCambr ian forms under t he fami ly of the Olen idae. But from these i t is dist inc t ly separated by it slarge pyg idium. Th is latter charac ter, together w i t h i ts horned head-sh ield and t he mee t ing of it s
fac ial sutures in a spade -likc po in t abo ve t he g labe l la, connec ts i t far more c losely w ith t he hornedand furrowed Asaphidze o r Basilicidac
,in many of wh ich , as we l l as in many spec ies o f thc Asaphidzc
proper, the course of the sutural out l ine is t he same. The g reater number of body—segmen ts may
1 1 8 E . J. CHAPMAN
i ts very dist inct aspec t. I n some of i ts forms i t looks almos t l ike a trans i t ion type between theCalymen idae and t he Asaph idae. Tr iarthrus
,wh i ch much resemb les Calymene in i ts fac ial suture
,
pleurae and pyg idium,forms t he connec t ing l ink between t h is sect ion and t ho Conocephalidae.
2 . CURT10 0 N1 .
—Glab el la t ) icall short smoo th or li rh tl furrowed. Bod -rin o s 12 to 17 iny1 .Y t: Y y a
number,typ ical ly o ver 13 . Pyg id ium smallor comparat iv e ly sma ll
, w i th typical ly 2 or 3(more rarely 6 to 8 ) r ings in i ts ax is .
Fam. 13 . Conocephalz’
dce .
— Eyes presen t. Typ. gen . E llipsocephalus Cam. Cyphasp z’
s, Sil., D ev . ;
Angelina, Cam. ; Conocephalt tes, Cam.,L r. S il. ; Agraulos Arionellus) , Cam. ; L iostmcus,
Cam ; P tychoparia , Cam. ; Solenopleura, Cam“
. Sac,Cam.
Fam. 14 . Conocoryphidw.—Eyeless forms of Conocephalidce. Typ. gen ; Oonocoryphe, Cain ; Gteno
cephalus, Cam.
NOTE .
—The genus Ellipsocephalus, as regards t he charac ter of its g labella, is a somewh ataberran t type ; but in i ts generals t uuc ture and aspec t i t is closely related to t he Conocephalidse and
not very wellbe placed in any o th er family . The separation of the eyeless forms, typified byConocoryphe , is a conven ien t , if no t s tr ic t ly n ecessary, subdiv is ion . Cyphaspis con nec ts the Conocephalidaaw i th Arethusina.
3 . V1TTAT1 .
— Eyes connec ted by a narrow band w i th t he g label la. The latter shor t and smal l .Body-segments numerous, with narrow ax is. Pyg idium,
typical ly , v ery smal l .
Fa in . 15 . Olenidw.
— Body-segments 12 t o 15 or 16 in number.
- Head- sh ie1d s tra igh t or flat tened
along its an terior marg in , and pro longed posterior ly i nto Spines or horns . Typ. gen
Olenus, Cam. E urycare, Cam.
Farm. 16 . Arethusz7
nida3 .— Body-segments 22 in adul t fo rms . Head-sh ie ld sem ic ircular
,term inat ing
in po in ts or sp ines . Typ. gem : Arethusina Aulacopleura) , Sil. , Dev . ; Harpides, Cam .
,
L i'. Sil.
Fam..
— Harpesidae.
— Head- sh ie ld very large and horned, w i th broad, finely punctured border.
Typ. gen . Harpes, Up. Sil.,D ev . ; Harpina,
Ll'. Sil.
Norn — The sec tion in wh ich these fam i l ies are placed is named after one of' th e i r more str iking
charac ters,the band or fillet wh ich connects t he eyes w i th t he s ides of the g lab el la ; but th ey h ave
also oth er po in ts of ag reemen t, as seen more espec ial ly in t heir numerous body -segmen ts, th e irnarrow ax is and small pyg id ium . Th rough Harpides, the Harpesidzc proper are connec ted b oth w i thAre thusina and w i th Olenus .
Sub -Order IV.
— FRONTONES .
—Tr i lob i tes w i th large or strong]y pronounced g labe l la, w iden ing asa rule an ter iorly . Pyg idium very smal l or oi
"
moderat e s i z e, t he many—r inged body-ax isextending quite or nearly t o i ts ex trem i ty .
1 . ANNULATI .— Many -ringed, comparat i vely elongated forms, w i th pyg idium obscure ly separatedfrom t he thorax . Body
-segmen ts typical ly 1 1 in number . Fac ial sutures terminat i ng at the
s ides of the hcad- sh ie ld.
Fam. 18 . Phacopsz'
dce .
— Pleurae furrowed. Eyes coarsely face tted. Pygidium rounded or spinose .
Typ. gen . : Phacops, Up. Sil. , D ev . ; D almam’
tes, Sil. Odon tocephalus, D ev .
Farm. 19 . E ncrinurz'
dw.
— Pleurae w i th ra ised band. Pyg idium long , narrow,w i th many-r inged ax is .
Typ. gem : E ncrzfinurus,Sil. ; Cybele, Lr . Sil. ; Cromas, Up. Sil. Amphion, Lr . Sil.
ON TRILOBITES . 1 1 9
Farm. 20 . Cheiruridw.~ PIcursc w i th ra ised band. Eyes finely face tted. Pyg idium horned, spinose
or dig i tated. Typ. gen . Chez'
rurus, U p. Cam,D ev . ; D ez
’
ophon, Up. S il. ; Sphcerexochus, Sil. ;
S taurccephalus, Sil. ; Placaparia, Lv. Sil.
NOTE .
-Tlle fami l ies of th is sec tion are more or less closely connected by the pecul iar course of“
the fac ialsutures,al ike in all
,and by th e i r typical ly eleven body-segments. Tho E ncrinuridse and
Cheiruridze , are connected by the i r bourrelet ted pleurse and t h is same condit ion— as wel l as the irspinOse character general ly— connec ts tho Choiruridfe w i th tho Ac idaspidac of the nex t sect ion .
2 . ARMATI.— Essen t ial ly broad-hcaded, spinoso forms, w i th po in ted or spiny pleurae, and smallto
very small( common ly spi ne-bear ing or dig i tated) pyg idium. Body—segments 9 to 20 .
Fain . 2 1 . Acidaspidce .
— Head, pleura and pyg idium,
allspine-bcaring . Body-segmen ts 9 to 10 .
Pleurae W i th bourrelet . Typ. gen : Acidaspes, Sil. , D ev .
Fam 22 . Paradoxz’
dm— Head-sh ield very large and broad,w i th horned ang les and
'
largo, an terior lyexpanded glabella. Body-segmen ts 12 to 20 ; pleurae, furrowed, t erminat ing in spines ; pygidium very smal l . Typ. gen . : Paradoxe
'
des, Cam. Hydrocephalus, Cam. : Telephus L v. S i] .
§ 3 . GLOB0 s1 .— Glabel la large and prom inent, oval , or globular, and unfurrowed. Thorax short,
W i th 5 to 6 segmen ts .
Farm. 23 . Trinuclei'daz .— Head-shield v ery large, term i nat ing in horns, and surrounded by a broad,perforated border . Eyes common ly ab sent. Typ. gem : Trinucleus, L r. Sil. D iom
’
de,Lr. Sil. ;
M croda’
scus Cam.
Fam. 24 . Ampyxidaz.— Head- sh ield w i thout perforated border. Glabel la ex tended an teriorly in to a
strong spine . Eyes absen t . Typ. gem : Ampyx‘
, Sil. ; E ndymionia Up. Cam.
Fam 25 . E glz'
nidce.— Glabel la very large and g lobular, ex tended anteriorly, in some spec ies, in to a
stout sp ine. Eyes abnormal ly developed. Typ. gen : E gla’
nd,Lr. Sil.
Norn — Th is latter fami ly forms a connec t ing l ink between t he Globos i and the Oculosi. I t
should, perhaps, be placed under the last-named sect ion ; but i t would appear to be very c losely al l iedt o the Ampyx idae ( no tw i thstanding t he absence oi
“
eyes in that f ami ly) by i ts 5-6 body-segments, i tstriangular pyg idium,
and i ts enormously developed g label la, wh ich in some of i ts forms E .
armata,Barn ) , extends forward into a disti nc t po in t or spine, much as in Ampyx . Wh i lst Barrande
makes E gl ina the type of a dist inct fam i ly, Z ittel places i t under the Asaph idae.
4 . OCULOS I .— Eyes enormously developed. Head-sh ie ld with horned angles. Pyg idium verysmal l
,with 2 -3 r ings in its ax is .
Fam. 26 . B 0hemillida3.— Body-segmen ts 5 in number . Typ. gem : Bohemilla, Lr. Sil.
Fam . 27 . Remapleuridce.— Body
-segmen ts 1 1 to 13 in number. Typ. gem : Remopleurides, Lr. Sil.,
Caphyra, Lr. Sil.
1 2 0 E . J. CHAPMAN ON TRILOBITES.
SUMMARY .
Retrospective view of the Sub -Orders , Sections and Families of the preceding class i
ficat ion .
ORDE R TR I LOB ITA .
Sub -Order I .— FUSlLLI FORMES .
Fam. 1 , Agnost idae.
Sub -Order 11.— LATI FORMES.
1 . LEVA'I
‘
I .
Fam. 2,Illaenidae.
Fam. 3,Asaph idae.
Sub -Order lI I .— CONI FRONTES .
1 . LONGICONI .
Fam. 10 , Homalonot idae .
F am. 11,Calymenidae.
Fam. 12,Triarthridae.
2 . CURTICONI
Fam. 13,Conocephalidae.
Fam. 14, Conocoryph idae.
3 . VITTA'I
‘I .
F am. 15 , Olen idae.
Fam. 16 , Arethusin idae.
Fam. 1 7 , Harpesidm.
Sub -Order IV .— FRONTONES.
l. ANNULATI .
Fam. 18,Phacopsidae
I 'am. 19 , Encrinuridze.
Fam. 20 , Cheiruridae.
5 2 . ARMA'
I‘
I .
Fam. 21,Acidaspidae
Fam. 22,Paradox ides.
3. GLososr.
Fam. 23,Trinucleidae.
Fam. 24,Ampyxidae.
Fam. 25 , JEglin idae.
4. OCULOSI .
Fam. 26, Bohemillidae.
Fam. 27,Remoplenridae.
2 . SUDCATI .
Fam. 4,Basilicidae.
Fam. 5,D ikelocephalidac.
3. PALMA'I
‘I .
Fam. 6 , Lichasidae.
Fam. 7 , Bron teidae.
4. COLUMNATI .
Fam. 8 , Phaeton idae.
Fam. 9,Proet idaa.
1 2 2 J. W. SPENCER ON
the large amount of differen tial e levat ions in the ir heights indicated great warping in
recent geological times . Only a note upon the subject was publ ished 1 by Mr. G i lbert ,2
but I have here t o acknowledge my indebtedness to him for the measurement of many
points and other in formation .
The writer has followed the beaches on the Canadian side of the lake,and in nor th
eastern New York beyond the region of Mr . G i lbert’s observations . The discoveriesmade are of great importance , especially in the st udy of origin of the Great Lakes— a
s tudy commenced by the w riter ten years ago . In the investigation of this subject,
there are two great quest ions : the origin of the valleys , and the cause of the val leys
being closed to form water-basin s . W ith the first of these , thi s paper has nothing to do .
W ith regard to the latter , Gen . Warren was the first to prOpose the hypothesis of warping
towards the north and east ( 1 875 )3 in expl anation of the closed bas in of Ontario , as wel l
as other basins of the Great Lakes . I accepted the hypothesis— n ow a theory— and
defin ed the St . Lawrence valley as on ly a broad. continuation of the ancient Ontario
valley . The dis covery of differential e levation s in the region of the present outlet , wasthe first defin ite proof that most of the warping, assumed by the author , had been
produced since the waters of the l ake were confined to a basin separated from the other
great l akes . In the sea-clifi'
s, east of Watertown , the inscription of older and greater
differen ti al changes of level can be read, so that the cl osing of the Ontario basin i s n o
l onger a mystery or an hypothesis . Lake Ontario was formerly included in the union
of Lakes Huron ,Erie etc .
, which , as pointed out long ago by the writer , formerly exi sted as
one sheet of water,out of which rose the highlands of Ontario
,now standing feet
above the sea,surrounded by elevat ed beaches . As reference w i l l be made to this sheet
,
when all the lakes,in an expanded and united form , stood at the same level , I w i l l n ame
it LAKE WARREN ,in honor
'
of the l ate Gen . G . K . Warren , Corps of Engineers , U . S.
whose discovery,in 1 875 , that Lake W innipeg was formerly of great si ze , occupying the
Red River val ley in Minnesota an d Man itoba, and explaining its ex i stence by differential
elevation or warping of the earth ’s crust— which explanation he extended to the
Great Lakes— enti tles him to be regarded as the father of l acustrine geology in America .
The l imits of Lake Warren are here defin ed as that body of water which ex isted in the
Great Lake region from the time that there w as the barrier between i t and Hudson Bay,
suffic iently high to have hel d in the waters on the northern side (even though an outleti n that direction should be found ) , and the time when Lake Ontario was separated fromit by a change of level in its surface . The n ame of GULF OF WARREN i s here given to the
enlarged body of water , before it s more complete separation from the sea. The barriersto the south w i ll be explained in a subsequent paper . Since the separation of Lake
Ontario from Lake Warren , there has been only one great epoch of rest in the subs idence
of its waters— marked by the beach (or a small series of beaches) under consideration .
In designating geological features , I am averse to giving names , necessarily non-descrip
t ive . But the better method of using geographical names ought not to be adopted arbi
trarily . In th is case , there are but two local names that seem to have claim for preference
1 At time of wr i ting th i s paper, Jan . 1888 .
2 Report of Proc. A . A . A. S.
,Sc ience, Sept. 1885 .
Appendi x J, Report of Ch ief of Engineers, U . S . A. 1875 . See also “ Surface Geology of the Region about
theWestern End of Lake Ontario,” by J W. Spencer, in Canadian Natural ist, Montreal, 1882.
THE IROQUOIS BEACH . 12 8
— Burl ington Beach (a name preoccupied by a modern spit) in place of Burl ington
Heights , which i s the lowest part of the great beach at the western end of the Lake
Ontario and Moh awk , a n ame connected long since w ith a supposed outlet of the lake
to the south-east . The amount of ov erflow in thi s direction during the epoch of thisbeach formation did not cut a great gap through the mountains ; therefore a geograph ical n ame in this region i s obj ectionable
,even if not involving unsettl ed theoretical ques
t ion . The north-eastern l imit of the beach i s no t known as yet . Consequently, I have
adopted a historical name and carried the priority of it s use as far back as practicable ,and here propose for the best developed beach of the Ontario basin the name of thegreat aborigin al confederation which dominated the l ake region at the t ime of the Euro
pean encroachments— the IROQUOIS BE ACH . The lake , which was accordingly muchlarger than the modern Lake Ontario , i s cal led LAKE IROQUOIS .
MAP or THE WESTERN PORTION or LAKE IROQUOI S SURROUND E D BY THE IROQUOI S BEACH, as iden t ified by the author,author, upon the Canadian side of the lake and at the northern end in New York ; and by Mr. Gi lbert fromN iagara R iver to Adam’
s Centre.
LOCATION OF THE IROQUOIS BEACH .
—~This beach skirts the Canadian shores of
Lake Ontario at a distance of usually from two to four miles . From the head of the lake ,i t may be followed for 1 50 miles to near Belleville . It then sweeps around into the embayment n orth of Oak Hill s . To the northward and eastward , the lake of thi s epoch coveredthe great triangular area between the Ottawa and the St . Lawrence Rivers , sending an arm
far up the valley of the former river. The lake in this region contained many islands ofLaurentian rocks . The marginal shores of thi s portion of the lake have not been foll owed
,
although many fragments , doub tless belonging to it , have been seen but the difficult ies
of tracing any beach among isl ands of crystall ine rocks,through a country covered w i th
v ery littl e drift soil , dotted w i th numerous swamps and lakes , and stil l mostly wooded ,
i s readi ly appreciated . The boundary of the western part of Lake Iroquois i s shown onthe above map .
1 2 4 J. W. SPENCER ON
The Iroquo i s Beach enters New York at Lew i ston ,on Niagara River , and extends as
far east as Great Sodus Bay , at only a few miles distant from the modern shore . Thence ,i t sw ings round
,passes under Cayuga Lake (Gilbert) and skirts an embaymen t from 26
to 35 miles w ide , which encloses One ida Lake , and turns northward to a point about
fiv e miles east of Watertown , near Black River Station , where on the side of a greatpromontory
,which may be cal led Cape Rutland (a spi t of Camb ro-Si lurian l imestone ,
bounding the interesting Ru tlaud Hollow ) , i t bends eastward , and becomes difficult to
fel low . I have traced it to a poin t about twenty-fiv e miles east of Watertown , near
St i rl ing Bush , amongst the Laurentian ridges , upon the flanks of the Adirondacks .
TABLE OF D IFFE RENTIAL E LEVATIONS ALONG THE IROQUOIS BEACH .
— In the fol
low ing table,all of the elevations were on the summits of the ridges . Sources of error,
at each place of observat ion , occur, ow ing to vari ations in height , ari s ing from the former
different intensity of wave-action upon the shore , either exposed or protected , and from
subsequent washes on or off the beaches ; and along spits, which are general ly a l ittle
lower than the adj acent b arrier-form of the beach . Besides these errors,others arise in the
subsequent deductions , on account of taking measurements from the maps . However as
these local errors,incident to each place of observ ation , do not produce a greater variati on
in our calculat i ons than a small decimal of a foot per mile , they may be omitted
Hami l tonBurl ington He igh tsWatertown Stat ionCooksv i l le Stat ion ab outCarlton StationK ingston Road, at ra i lway cross ing, 1 2 m i les eas t of Toron toWh itby , 6 m i les north of the lake atColborne Stat ion , 2 m i les north ofTren ton Station ,
2gm i le north ofLewiston , N. Y
RochesterCanastotaClevelandConstan tiaR ich landAdam’
s Cen treCape RutlandGreat Bend Station, ab oveOn Lauren tian Islands, near Stirl ing Bush
(4 ) AREA AND D EPTH OF THE LAKE DURING E POCH OF THE IROQUOIS BE ACH .
— Thearea of the western portion of l ake , as defined by the Iroquo is Beach , was n ot much
g reater than that of the modern Ontario , except towards the south-eastern port ion , as
shown on the map . The extension of the l ake towards the north-east,between Ottawa
River and the foot of the Adirondack Mountain s , beyond the l imits of the map , was
1The author’s elevations were level led from the nearest ra i lway stations, the b arometer b e ing used on ly where
expressed ; those of Mr. Gi lbert were ob ta ined by use of hand levels to adjacen t known poin ts.
Feet ab ove sea.
363 (Spencer. )355
365
400
41 7
459
50 7
602
682
385 ( G i lbert )436
441
484
489
563
65 7
700 (Barometer. )
685
667
1 2 6 J. W. SPENCER ON
St . Lawrence River,and must have had a depth of from 680 to 80 0 ’ feet
,in place of
from 1 20 to 240 feet of the present day .
CHARACTERISTICS or THE BEACH .
— In form,most typical and easi ly fol lowed ,
especial ly in Canada,the beach consi sts of a coastal barrier (fig . 4, b
'and fig . 5 a) , behind
FIG. 4 .
—Hori z ontal plan of a b arrier b each ( b) in fron t F IG. 5 .— Vertical section of anc ien t beaches in difi
‘
er
of a lagoon ,b ack of wh ich there are coastal h i l ls. en t forms wi th outly ing sand b ar (d) . W,
former surface of water.
which there are depressions,once filled by the waters of some swamp or l agoon . The
barriers often pass into spits and bars,and cross old valleys . Again the barriers give
place t o terraces of construction, (fig . 6 a) . The material i s invari ably gravel , rich in
sand , wel l s t rat ified,but often showing false bedding
,of various forms . At both the
e astern and western ends of the lake,there may be seen three di stinct ridges (fig . 5 b)
w ith a max imum difference in height of about 2 5 feet at the eastern end , and somewhat
les s at the western . But these ridges commonly run together,and form one or two crests ,
or may be furrowed into a dozen (fig . 5 c) . The face of the beach slopes gently to thethe subaqueous coastal pl ain
,descending fiv e, ten , or even twenty feet (when al l the
ridges are united into one) .
The depressions behind the barriers are much more abrupt , and the slopes greaterthan in front . Foll ow ing the beach
,i t i s only at occasional capes that the surface does
not appear level , and then the variati on i s due to the w aves that were exceptionally high .
Ordinarily I should not place the water margin more than fiv e feet below the tops of
the ridges,and usual ly less— rarely ten . There are several transverse sections cut through
the ridge (or combined ridges ) which , when best developed , measure 5 00 to 600 feet across .
Thedepth of thi s beach deposit,upon cl ay beds
,i s ordinarily from twelve to fifteen feet
thick , except in the spits, where it even reaches to a hundred feet or more . The beachmay be upon or against the shore bank
,or at some distance l akeward, but in front of it ,
there i s invariably a great broad plain from hundreds to thousands of yards w ide. Theplain i s
'
usual ly covered w i th a lake -deposit of s ilt which forms the best soil in theregion . But upon it
,at some distance lakeward of the beach
,there is commonly found a
sand ridge (fig . 5 d) , representing the fin e deposits borne ou tward by the undertowof the sorting waves . The plain is the floor of the cut terrace , typical ly bordered by the
gravel beach in fron t of the higher shores .
The beach itsel f i s often wanting (fig . 7) for di stances of a few hundred yards or even
a few miles , but it may be repl aced by rows or pavements of boulders . However, it i s
1 20—240 ft .—1 20 feet b e ing depth of modern soundings in channe l, excavated out of l imestone below Ixmgston ,
and 240 b e ing depth of channel excavated out of Laurentian rocks, at a po in t north of Cape Rutland ; 450 ft . ,he ight of b each ab ove river at Cape Rutland, plus 1 10 ft , the calculated increased elevation ofwater- level abovethe r iver b etween Cape Rutland and the places of sounding.
THE IROQUOIS BEACH.1 2 7
always reached again by follow ing the margin of the old shores , which are general ly
wel l defin ed. In front of the ridges,there is often a very heavy pavement of boulders
(fig . 6 P) . The blocks seldom reach a leng th of more than from three to fiv e feet (the
l argest seen had a volume oi'
1 5 0 cubic feet) , and they are general ly smaller . The smal lerstones may have been arranged by the waves
,but the larger were stranded in the shal low
waters by the coast- ice— no heavier than that seen to-day— or were left just below waterlevel
,as the finer material s were washed out of the shores composed of boulder clay
ow ing to wave action . The pavement i s most w idely developed , when the subaqueousplains descend very gradual ly, where it may be hundreds of yards w ide , al though generallyit i s only as many feet . The boulders upon the hill-s ides or wi thin the beach , are more
scattered,and do n o t form a pavement . 1
F IG. 6 .—Vertica l section showing a b each in the form F IG. 7 .
— Vertica l section showing a cut or eros ion terof a terrace of construction ( a ) , in fron t of wh ich race floor, w i th the true b each wan ting, b ut re
there is a pavemen t of b oulders ( P) former water placed by a pavemen t of b oulders (P) .level (W) .
D IFFICULTIES IN FOLLOW ING THE BE .
—\CH .
—There are several large river val leys ,especially in the country composed of drift
,so modi fy ing the topography as to render
the fol low ing of the beach often uncertain,or local ly impossible . I n front of exposed
clay bluffs,and indeed of rocky shores
,along which
,in water that was deep enough
to allow the free action of coastal currents,there was no beach formed , as al l the material
was carried out into the l ake w i th very little assortment . The gravel -beach often ends
abruptly in clay banks . When the condition s are favorable there may be considerable
gaps in th e beach of even several miles (fig . but still the cut-terrace i s there , and
along it s foot the shore may be fol lowed . The occurrence of i slands in front of the coastcomplicates observations . Where the shores have been s teep and the gravel depos its have
been left upon their flanks, the highest part of the beach cannot always be recognized,as
the older gravel s may be mistaken for those of the beach . Again , when the beach i s a
constructed terrace against the shore,i t i s apt to . be obscured by overwashes from the
hillsides . One l ast cause may be added to these difficult ies : there is often a covering of
clay and cobble stones , unlike the rest of the beach , to a depth of two or four feet . Thisdeposi t has a significan ce as pointing t o a temporary submergence
,yet i t i s no deeper
than frost action may have been .
SOURCES OF THE BEACH MATERIALs .
— The boulders , gravel s , aud sands are alikealmost en t irely derived from the drift h ill s of stony clay, or these capped w i th s trat ified
sand and gravel w i th boulders,forming the shores of the l ake . The gravel i s mostly
I For the ful ler study of anc ien t beach-structure, see Anc ient Beaches, Boulder-Pavements, etc.
, by the
author, in Bul l. G. S. A.,i . 71— 86, 1889 .
1 2 8 J . W. SPENCER ON
composed of limestone derived from older gravel of the hills,or from the rounding of
stones washed out by the boulder clay . There i s only a smal l proportion of pebbles ofcrystal line rocks , although the boulders mostly belong to thi s class . Along the western
end of the lake from Toronto,and round to Niagara River and eastward
,the old shore
line consisted of blufi'
s ofHudson River or Medina rocks , on ly occasionally having any drift
clay upon their flanks . Yet, there , upon the southern s ide of the lake , al l the gravel s of the
beach have come from the northern side of the l ake— the finer material , at least all westo f Niagara River, having been transported by coastal currents and ice , and the l arger
blocks by ice , such as are found every winter upon the present stormy shores . The bou lderpavements are here replaced by only occasion al erratics o f smaller si ze (having , however ,simil ar rel ation to the beach) as the source of supply was more distant . At the eastern
end of the lake , in New York , the deposits are of similar origin , essentially deriv ed from
the drift , or older gravel s , upon the Cambre -Si lurian escarpment , w hich there bounds
the vall ey .
STUDY OF THE DIFFERENTIAL E LEVATION OF THE BEACH AND THE F0 0 1 OF
UPLIFT .
—ln order to understand the character of the warping of the earth’s crus t , i t i snecessary t o ascertain the directions of the axes and the amount of maximum elevationfor a vast number of tri angles
,and calculate the meridian aland oriented equivalents , as
the movement has been compl icated,and the rate of change variable for general resultants
covering the whole area would be of l it tle value in understanding the terrestrial warpings .Along w i th tri angulations relative to points about Lake Ontario , I have correlated some i n
the Lake E rie and Georgi an Bay regions which bear directly upon the study of Lake
On tario . A few of the mos t important deductions w i ll be here recorded .
The eastern equivalent of the upl ift,al ong the southern side of the l ake , does not differ
in any import ant degree from it s mean value between its western end and Rochester,W hich i s feet per mile . Bu t from Rochester to Oneida Lake , the mean value of the
eas tern ri se i s only of a foot per m il e , and thence a downward movement i s indi
cated.
At. the western end of the lake, the maximum el evation’ i s 2 feet p er mile (along an
ax i s N. 28°
E ) , of which foo t per mile is the northern equivalent . Thi s amount i sincreased to feet per mi le in the region of Toronto . About Georgian Bay, the meri
dian alupli ft amounts to 4 feet per mi le .
1 To the south-west of t h e Ontario basin , about
the eastern end of Lake Eric,the northern equivalent of the warping is nearly two feet per
mile .
2 For twenty miles north of Oneida Lake , the mean northern upl ift is feet per mile ,
and thence,to Cape Rutl and feet . 0 11
‘ the northern side of Lake Ontario , the eastern
equivalen t of the uplift i s greater than upon the southern side of the lake , increasingfrom an average of feet
,west of Scarboro , to nearly three feet per mile at Trenton .
Sixty miles farther eastward , thi s eastern upl ift disappears, for there begins to be mani
fest ed an equivalent of elevation sl ightly to west of,in place of east of, north , as the
axi s o f simple northward uplift is passed . The passage of the axi s of simple northern
1 The Algonquin b each of the Georgian Bay ,from wh ich th is measuremen t is derived, is not connected wi th ,
and is b oth o lder and newer than , the Iroquo is Beach .
No triangulation can be made on the b each referred to , b ut its eastern upl ift is assumed at the same rate as
that of the Iroquois Beach , and deductions therefrom made .
1 8 0 J. W. SPENCER ON
al l of which movement belonged equally to the whole basin of Ontario therefore it is
certain that Ontario was at sea- l evel . Then , the Iroquois Beach enclosed a lake w ith avery broad ou t let , 70 0 or 800 feet deep in places .
At Smith’
s Falls , about seventy-five miles north of Adam ’s Centre , the remains of a
whal e (belonging to a species that is now s ometimes seen in the Lower St . LawrenceRiver) were found in a grave l bed, at a height of 450 feet above the sea.
1 Its occurrence
indicates that to thi s point there w as free communication from the sea, to which level
i t was depressed , when the region was 45 0 feet lower than now— an amount of change
that equally affected the Iroquoi s Beach,about the eastern end of Lake Ontario , al though
the effects diminished towards the west . Yet,westward of the present outlet of Ontario ,
n o marine shells have been discovered ; and there i s no proof that the beaches belonged
t o brackish water. Nor have fresh-water shel ls been found in them . The waters, whichadmi tted the whales , extended far up the On tario
'
b asin ,w ithout leaving anything to
enable us to trace to what extent they w ere freshened,as they were distant from the sea .
The outlet of Iroquoi s Lake was deep— sey en or eight hundred feet below sea- level .
If any barrier ex isted between the Ontari o basin and the Gul f of St . Lawrence , i t cer
t ainly was neither rock or dirt .
GLACIAL DAMS THEORY .— This has been
’
posi ted by Mr. G i lbert and others
ow ing to the supposed necessity of barriers to keep out the sea-water . Now , if anywhere
upon the American Continent such exi s ted , i t was here , between Lake Ontario and the
sea,for there were mountains on either side of the St . Lawrence valley , between which ,
glaciers , if such existed , could form dams . Furthermore,the Iroquois Beach was at
s ea-level , so that there would be no hydrostatic pressure to force the water out beneath
the glacier . Yet the glacial dam is not establi shed,for I have found the beaches , where
the supposed glacier w as located ; and our know ledge of the old shores , down the St .
Law rence Valley , i s sti l l too imperfect to necessitate the ex i stence of a dam . Nor does the
absence of the discovery of marine shel l s tell anything in favor of a glacier holding back
the waters,of what we cal l Lake Iroquoi s
,any more than their absence , when the level
of the region was 450 feet lower than now ,proves the existence of an ice barrier west of
the gravel bed,which contained the whale remains referred to in the last paragraph .
The Gul f of Ob i is tod ay the counterpart of ol d Lake Iroquois . The Gul f of Ob iis from 40 to 60 miles w ide , and 65 0 to 70 0 miles long. Its waters are fresh , and the
discharge from it so sweetens the Arctic Ocean that the water 60 miles beyond its mou th ,in the open sea
,i s almost po table .
2 The old Gulf of St . Lawrence and Lake Iroquois— its
continuation— had once s imilar dimens ions .
The foundation of the glacial dam hypothesis is the occurrence in the Alps of somesmal l gl acial lakes . These are of two kinds — On e , where the glaciers , carrying lateral
morains,cross river-vall eys and form permanent lakes
,on account of the earth-dams thus
made ; the other, where glaciers unite at the foot of hills, between which and the ice ,l akelets are formed
,or where the gl aciers pass the mouths of ravines
,in which there are
n o considerable streams . The l at ter clas s of gl aci al dams i s always evanescent . Whenglaciers
,not bearing lateral moraines
,cross considerable s treams
,the rivers simply flow
1 SirWm. Dawson in Canadian Natural ist, vol. x ,no. 7 , p. 385 .
2 Nordenskjo ld’s, Voyage of t he Vega around the North of Europe and Asia, p. 1 40 .
THE IROQUOIS BEACH . 1 8 1
under the ice . Some small lakes are known i n Greenland , at sea-level , where the glaciers
choke ou t the sea-water . Upon the flank of Mount St . E lias , there are several glaci al
lakes , the lowest at something less than 1 7 5 feet above the sea , which i s fifteen miles
distant . There , the waters are held in the l akes , when their outlets get choked w ith icebergs , for only a few hours or days , until the accumulated hydrostati c pressure breaksaway the barrier
,whereupon the waters flow beneath eight m iles
'
of the glacier,to emerge
from under 5 00 feet of ice (Topham) .1 It seems impossible to bel ieve in the existence
of great glaci al dams , above sea—l evel , sufficien tly permanent to develop such regular
beaches and terraces as the Iroquois,which indicates a wave action of as long duration
as that upon the modern beaches of Lake Ontario . This last represents a time period ofmany centuries , if not of millenniums .
‘
Of course , had morainic dams been formed , these
w ould sti l l remain,more or less intact
,across the St . Lawren ce val l ey .
Consequently , we have n o proof, as yet , of the exi stence of glacial barriers closing
the'
St . Lawrence Valley , nor should we assume the necessity for them ,any more than in
the Gul f of Ob i, unti l such is proved by future investigation into the physical structure
of the north- eastern portion of Lake Iroquois .
THE CLIMATE AND L IFE .
—Fr0m the boulder pavements , associated W ith the
beach upon the northern side,the power of the ice is s een to have been no greater than
that of to -day ei ther in that region,or along the lake expansions of the St . Lawrence .
The occurrence of mollusks tell s us nothing as to the temperature of the waters , as
th ey are not found in the beach . But this beach contains remains of mammoth , elk , and
beaver,
2 found in the Burl ington Heights at Hamilton ; and similar remains are said tohave been found in New York . Whether these animal s came down upon the spi t to
drink and died there,or whether their remains drifted to i t from the streams of the ol d
Dundas valley we have no means of conj ecture . Whilst the range of these animals i s
w ide , they are such as belong t o the c limate of the present day .
I have seen fresh-water shel l s only in the depos i ts about the lake of more recent date
(not more than fifteen or twenty feet above its surface) associated w ith lagoons or former
swamps .
LOWE R BEACHES .
— These are of frequent occurrence about Lake Ontario . But
they are all too fragmen tary to form the basis of study offered by the Iroquois Beach .
The t ime occupied in their formation was too short for the old shore l ines t o be straightened . From the examination of the lower beaches at the eastern end of the lake by Mr.
G i lbert , and that of others seen upon the northern side of the Ontario basin by the writer,i t appears that the elevations since they were formed have been less differentiated thanthose first l ifting the Iroquois Beach
,which has also been involved in al l subsequent
changes . The ti lting of the basins has caused a submergence of the lower beaches,and
narrow valleys of erosion , upon the sou thern andwestern sides of the lake . Such evidence
i s n o t seen upon the northern side of the lake . The effects of submergence have,however
,
1 Proc. Roy. Geo. Soc. 1889 , p. 424.
2 Not on ly were these found th irty to forty feet b elow the top of the Heights, in the Cutting of the Desjardin sCanal (Geolog ical Survey of Canada, but remains of another mammoth were found in an adjacent ra i lwaycutting through the same b each in 1878 -9 , at a depth of b etween twenty and th irty feet.
1 8 2 .I . W. SPENCER ON
been modified by the drawing off of the waters,which process has lowered the l ake level
1 16 fee t below the lowest point of the Iroquois Beach , at Hamilton .
AGE OF THE IROQUOIS BEACH .
—Whil e the valley of Ontario antedates thePl eistocene period
,although broadened by the waves of the lake itself
,there is no
evidence pointing to the age of Lake Ontario being anterior to the epoch of the Drift . Nordo we know that a smaller separate body of water exi sted when the barrier of the l akeW as less than at present . Lake Warren , i tsel f, i s older than Lake Iroquois yet i t i s morerecent than the deposi t of the stony drift clays of the last great Ice epoch , and of the
st rat ified clays and sands , of the so-cal l ed Modified Drift , except such as have beendeposited from i ts waters .The Iroquoi s Beach marks the boundary of Lake Ontario , at the time of its mo st
perfect development,at which time there was probably a shallow ov erflow to the sea
by way of the Mohawk and Hudson valleys .
The valley of t he Mohawk had not been a pre-Pleistocene outlet for t he ancient basinof Lake Ontario , as it i s a narrow rock-bound gorge over 9 0 0 feet above the bottom of the
basin,whilst the b ed of the St . Lawrence chann e l was 700 or 80 0 feet lower.
This addit ional outle t by the Mohawk val ley was only a co incidence , as thecontinent was rising
,l ike many other similar southern ov erflows of the more ancient
Lake Warren .
It i s difiicult to assign an exact age in years . Yet the commencement of the Iroquois
epoch does n ot date back very many millenniums . We know the rate of terrestrial elevation upon. the coast of Scandinavia, where the maximum is fiv e feet per century . Thecoas t of the Bay of Naples i s sinking at. four feet per century . At other places the rate
of movement is known to be less . Since the Iroquois epoch , the beach has been l ifted
up 70 0 feet near Watertown , N .Y .,where i s to be found the max imum amount of elevation .
A ssuming the rate to be that of the maximum known change upon coas t of Sweden
Viz .,fiv e feet per century, Lake Iroquois commenced a separate existence about
years ago . Sti ll , we may have to largely increase this time . Again,Niagara Fall s com
m en ced their h i story after the beginning of the Iroquoi s epoch , bu t then w i th a fal l ofonly 20 0 feet , as the Iroquois Lake level was 1 38 feet higher than that of the modern lake ,when the waters of the E rie basin w ere precipitated directly into it . Hence , the reces
sions of the cati on would be slower than now w ith the modern difference of level between
the lakes amounting to 326 fee t . The mean modern recession 1 i s 2 4 feet per annum .
This would indicate a l apse of about years . But ow ing to the slower recessions of
the shallower cati on (if the volume of water has been constan t) , on account of thediminished fall
,and the rel atively smaller amount of underlying shales , the age w i l l have
probably to be increased to years . Thus we get two rough approximations of thelowest age of the b irth of Lake Iroquois at or years w i th a probable increaseto nearl y double this term .
As the precipitation in the lake region is in excess of evaporation , as the deepening
of the outlet of Ontario is very slow , and as the elevating forces in the region of the
1 Computed from the Surveys of 1843 , 1875 , 1885 . See Report of R. S. Woodward’s paper, b efore A. A . A . S. ,
Sc ience, 1886.
1 8 4 SPENCER ON THE IROQUOIS BEACH .
region the country i s occupied by barren Laurentian ridges,woods and lakes , but at
Various places,beaches
,probably belonging t o the Iroquois system
,may be s een , as
as W el l as a l ittle beyond the Ottawa River . From Hami lton , at the western end of the
lake, the beach is along the foot of the Niagara escarpment , and parallel t o the modern
lake shore . At Lew i ston , i t i s 385 feet above the sea ; at Rochester,436 feet , and at
Sodus , 45 8 . But eas tward of this pl ace it bends round,passes under Cayuga Lake
(Gi lbert) , encloses an archipel ago and Oneida Lake val l ey , and then skir ts the footof the Camb ro-Si lurian escarpmen t northward to Cape Rutl and (near Black River) .
At Canastota, the elevation it 41 1 feet at Cl evel and , 484 ; at Con stantia, 489 ; at Adam’s
Centre, 65 7 : at CapeRutland, 700 feet (barometric) . E astward of thi s region , th e beach
rests against drift ridges or rocky ledges , crosses the Black River , above Great Bend (at
678 fee t , barometric) , rests upon the broad Pine Plains , a sort of terrace of construction ,and thence it may be fol lowed among the Laurentian ridges or is l ands (at 667 feet,barometric) to near Stirl ing Bush , in front of which there i s a kind of cu t terrace in flat
Palaeozo ic rocks . As the work was discontinued , i t has not been followed beyond this
point,and it s ti l l remains to be seen how far it can be expl ored . The IroquoisBeach ,
at the eastern end of the l ake,i s composed of three r idges
,w ith an extreme difference
of height of from twenty - two to twenty-h y e feet , and this difference is stil l seen amongst
the Laurentian ridges to the eastward .
Th e above elevation s from Lew iston to Adam ’s Cen tre are from Mr. G ilbert ’s observa
tions , and the remainder , where not o therw i se stated , have been ob tained , by the writer,from level s run to adj acent known points upon the railways . The l i st i s far from com
plet e , but the work promises a rich harvest in return for future labor. The barome tricdetermination should be corrected by inst rumental measurements .
SECTION IV, 1889 . 18 5 TRANS . ROY . Soc . CANADA .
X I I .
— O7z Cambrian Organisms in Acadia . [PlatesVto IX . ]
By G . F . MATTHEW , MA .
(Read May 30 ,
A — Remarks on the Slmt z’
gmphy and Correlation of the BaselSeries.
The writer ’s previous contributions to the knowledge of the Cambrian rocks inAcadia, as publi shed in the Proceedings of this Society , have referred to the Fauna of the
St . John group,and ch iefly the Paradoxides b eds,
'
b ut as he has found evidence of an
older fauna than that w ith Paradoxides, he has in thi s paper given a brief outl ine of
the rel ations of the group of b eds con taining the older fauna and descriptions of the
organisms which compose it .
It seems better to regard these rocks as a lower serie s of the Cambrian system , for in
Wales the corresponding sl ates and sandstones have long been called Cambrian , whether
we take the authority of Sedgw ick , Murchison or Hi cks ; and , although no physi cal
break between the Paradoxi des beds and these older Cambrian rocks has been establi shed
in Europe,there is such a break at the base of the St . John group in Acadia, and if
we accept as correct the observations of Mr. A . Murray, a similar di scordance exists in
Newfoundland .
In the section given in my first paper on the Paradox ides fauna ,1 this part of the
Cambrian has but an in sign ifican t thickness ; and further west , along the north side of
the Cambrian basin of St . John , this thickness is further reduced , and the St . John group
may be seen to rest directly upon the Laurentian l imestones . But in t racing the red
rocks of the section cited eastward,they are found to exhibit a much greater thickness
and , at the furthermost Cambrian exposures in St . John county,have an apparent thickness
of about feet .
The importance of these older Cambrian rocks is better understood by a study of theirrelations in these eastern exposures than about St . John , as they are not only thicker
there , but they contain a fauna which , though not e xtensive , i s d is t inct and important .
In the report on the geology of Southern New Brunsw i ck , 1 865 (p. this mass of
sediment was spoken of as the upper member of th e Coldbrook‘group , and thus distinct
from the St . John group ; l ater2 it was j oined to the latter formati on , because the W ant of
conformity between the two could not then be establ ished . But i t is now found thatthis red series is unconformable
,not ‘only to the St . John group , but also , as had already
been di scovered,to the underly ing Coldbrook group .
In the Ken neb eckasis River val ley , w hich i s the ne xt importan t val ley contain ing
1 See Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. vol. i. see. iv .
2 Report of Progress'
fireol. Survey Can . 1870-1 , p. 59 .
1 8 6 MATTHEW ON CAMBRIAN
Cambrian rocks north of the St . John basin,no trace of this part of the Cambri an sy stem
has been discovered, though there are several areas of Cambrian rocks bel onging to the
St . John group : these rocks may be seen to rest on the Laurentian gneisse s and l ime
stone s at several different local ities .
In the next vall ey to the north , that of the Long Reach of St . John River, the red
rocks of the lower serie s of Cambri an measures are wel l displ ayed,being brought to the
surface by an anticl inal fold running along the north side of St . John River in that
part of i ts course . These underlying measures,both here and i n the St . John basin , are
thus of considerable importance .
Mr. Alexander Murray,in his report on the geol ogy of Newfoundland (p. has
described a mass of red , green and gray sandstones , w ith slates of simi lar color, which l ie
at the base of the Paradoxides beds on that island . He estimates thei r thickness at
feet , and states that whi le they are present in the Cambri an basins of Trinity, St . Mary ’s
and Pl acentia Bays , they are absent from those of Conception and Fortune Bays . Hence
we may infer that these lower sandston es, etc . ,form a lower serie s unconformable to the
beds carrying Paradoxi des . Th e on ly fossil s reported from these rocks are obscure formsl ike fucoids and pecul iar markings resembling annel id tracks . ”
Between the beds of this lower portion of the Cambrian system in New Bruns
w ick and those which l ie at the same horizon in Norway and Wales there i s a strong
resembl ance in mineral character . In these countries feldspathic sandstones , often of a
red color, w ith some conglomerate and more or less of red and green shales or s lates , make
up the initial part of thi s basal formation .
The late Prof. Theodore Kj erulf has very careful ly inves tigated thi s part of the
Cambrian in Norway , where i t i s known as the Sparagmite formation . He divided it i nto
two parts, Viz . , (1 ) Upper : blue quartzite and quartzi ferous sandstone , 3 10 — 50 0 metres
(about feet) thick ; and (2) Lower : grey and red sparagmite ; also conglom
crates and sandstones, 630— 9 10 metres feet) thick . In thi s formation
(terrein) no fossil s are known in the lower division , but they are found at the b ase of th e
upper divisi on . The genera found there correspond to those of Bands b and c of Divi sion
1 of the St . John group,and therefore the upper divi sion o f t he Sparagmite forma t ion is
of Primordial age , and the lower w il l correspond, in part at least , to the underlying series
of red rocks of the St . John basin .
I t seems doubtful if thi s lower part of the Cambrian system is ful l y represented in
Sweden . In thi s country , the o lde st beds were first described as the “ fucoidal sand
stone but as the greatest thickness of this sandstone at several local i ties , where it wasmeasured by Hisinger, Wallen and Sidenbladh ,
did not exceed eighty feet , it i s not l ikely
that i t represents in ful l the great mass of sediments which in Norway, Britain , New
foundland and Acadia, l ie at the base of the Cambrian system . This sandstone correspondsin part to th e grey sandstones and dark grey shales of Bands a and b of Division 1 of the
St . John group , which in their eastern exposures have a thickness , the former o f about
200 feet, and the l atter of some 140 feet .
In Wales there i s a series of beds,which
,perhaps
,more nearly than any others ,
corresponds in m ineral character,and the rel ics of once existing li fe which they contain ,
to the l ower Cambrian rocks of Acadia . To the zeal and acumen of Dr. Henry H icks ,above al l others
,sci ence is indebted for the discovery of a somewhat varied fauna in
1 8 8 MATTHEW ON CAMBRIAN
in others on the Laurenti an rocks . A good section may be seen at Hanford Brook , St .
Martin ’s , where i t presents the fol low ing succession (roughly estimated)THI CKNESSm FEET.
l— a. Coarse purpl ish red conglomerate resting on an amygdalo idal greenstone ( toadstone) ofthe Coldbrook group
b. Grey and purpl ish flags and sandstones wi th worm-casts, sea-weeds ( I ’alaeochorda and Butho
trephis) , and numerous Spicules of spongesc. Purpl ish red sandstones, wi th green ish layers . Remains of sea—weeds (Phycoidella ) , an imaltracks (Psammichnites andHelmin tht
'
tes) , worm-burrows etc
Purpl ish red conglomerate, more friab le than 1 aSoft purpl ish red shales, wi th green glaucon i te gra ins, the upper part firmer and more
sandy, green ish grey layers interspersed espec ia l ly towards the b ase. Platysolmitcs, Obolus
Volborthella , etc .
c. Purpl ish sandy shales, wi th a few b ands of green ish shale. Worm-casts (Scolites)Measures concealed, probab ly of th is series
In thi s serie s of one thousand or more feet of beds , the very oldes t l ayers which arefine enough to preserve organic markings
,have trail s and cast s of marine worms , and
also contain seaweeds , one a Palaeochorda or all ied genus , the other a weed w ith a flat
frond similar to Buthotrephis. That these beds are marine is cl early shown by thegreat numbers of spicul es o f hexactinel l id sponges which they contain .
About three hundred and fifty feet above the base, where the measures are flaggy ,
tracks of annel ids are again abundant . Besides the smaller trail s and burrows , there are
frequent tracks of a marine animal,po ss ibly a w orm ,
similar to the markings on the
Fucoidal sandstone of Sweden , which , by Prof. O. Torrell, have been referred to the genusPsammichn ites . A very similar track
, w i th corresponding casts , occurs on the surfaces of
the purple streaked sandstones (Assise 3) of Band b in Divi sion 1 of the St . John group,
and a similar trail occurs as high up as the lower Band of Divi sion 2 of that group .
Above thi s poin t , such markings have not been found, though the kind of rock— flags
and slates— i s favorabl e to their occurrence . The flags of the middle of Division 2 of
the St . John group seem to be the horizon of Cruz z’
ana semz’
plz’
cala (Salter) and C. similis
(Bill ings) but I have not found them here .
About on e hundred feet or more above the horizon where Psammichn ites appears ,separated from it by a conglomerate , indications of the Olenellus fauna show themselves .
These consist of Volborthella, (a chambered cel l resembling an Orthoceras ) , the cystidean
genus Platysolem'
tes, Pander, and a large Obolus , all ied to Michwz'
tz ia (formerly Obolus ,
? or
Lingula ? ) monilt'
fera, Linrs, of the Eophyton sandstone of Sweden and the upper part of
the Blue Clay of Russia . Some of the l ayers in this part of the serie s abound in soft
green grains simi l ar to the glauconite grains o f the Cambrian rocks in Russi a . The paste
enveloping them is red .
A number of beds between thi s point and the top of the Basal series contain worm
casts and burrows , and some have remains of small strap-l ike seaw eeds .
A sketch map show ing th e whole of the Basal series exposed on Hanford Brook i s
given herew ith,and the local i ties of the most importan t fossil s indicated . By the section
given below it , the dip of the beds may be seen to be at a low angle in the lower divi
sion . At the base of the upper div i sion the dip increases considerably , and a change of
ORGANISMS IN ACADIA .1 8 9
s trike al so occurs at this point . This might suggest a repet ition of the measures by afault and overl ap . But we do not find any evidence els ewhere to sustain such a View ,
unless it be the thinness of the measures in other parts of the field . A difference in the
strike is also found at the base of the St . John group , Where the two series meet at themillpond, but here the dip of the two series co incides .
F IG . 1 .
The contact of these two serie s (the Basal series and the St . John group) i s not v i s ibleon this brook
,being concealed under the low ground around the milldam of McAfee
’
s
mill,but several miles west on Radclifi ’
s millstream , a branch of Mispeck River , i t is
apparent in the bed of that stream . There the first layers of the grey sandstones at the
base of the St . John group are seen to be mingled w ith red sand deri ved from the beds of
the l ower serie s .
The grey sandstone (a) at the base of the St . John group is a Very persistent deposit,being
found in all the bas ins of Cambrian rook near St . John . It appears to have been formed
not far from shore , but the actual sh ore line of thi s band has been preserved only at one
place on the Straight Shore in the upper part of the harbor of St . John ,where a small
area of pebbly beach , the equivalent of thi s sandstone , has been let down by faul ting among
the o ther rocks on the margin of the Laurentian area . The pebbles in this conglomerateare small and are mostly compos ed of fragments of quartz and green ish slates
,with a few
pebbles of Laurentian limestone . Ledges of Laurent ian l imestone are found on bo ths ides of this l ittle patch of conglomerate , and the l ocal ity is an interesting one , as show ing
the irregul ar contour of the seab ot tom in this region in early Cambrian time .
The Basal series of Cambri an rocks is well exposed in the val ley of the Long Reach ,in King ’s county , though here the rocks are more disturbed than at Hanford Brook , and
the thickness and succession of the measures i s not so clear,but judging from the dip and
the areas exposed , the former must be considerable .
Caton’s Isl and, a smal l island of the St . John River in thi s valley,gives the clearest
1 4 0 MATTHEW ON CAMBRIAN
exposure of the rel ations of this serie s to theSt . John group,and has afi
'
orded some fo ssil s
which help to fix the age of the Basal series . Unfortunately fault s occur at the contact of
this serie s w i th the St . John group , so that the first l ayers of the latt er are no t visible , butthe relation of the one series to the other is unmistakable .
FI G . 2 .
A sketch map of the island w i th two section s across i t w il l serve to make clearer the
rel ation s of the different members of the Cambrian sys tem that occur there , and thehorizons at which the fossi l s are found . In this map the unshad ed portion of the i sl and
i s occupied by the Basal series,and the shaded part by the St . John group , of which
only Divis ion s 1 and 2 are found on the i sland . Th e upper section taken on the easternside of the isl and (lower side of the map) shows only the St . John group , which i s divided
into two portions by an area where the measures are concealed . The l ower section wastaken on the western side of the i sl and (upper s ide of the map ) , and shows the Basal
series,w i th a smal l portion of the St . John group at the northern end , divided off by a
fault . Band a of Division 1 of the S t . John group does n o t appear anywhere on this
i sland,but at a po int about seven mil es south-west of this isl and , on the north s ide of St .
John River it i s found at the contact of the two series , being a band of grey sandstone
about twenty feet th ick .
I have remarked above that the Basal series affords indications of the fauna which
accompanies the trilobite genu s Olenel lus and i ts kindred genus Meson acis ,lbut indica
t ion s of a simil ar fauna are al so found in the two lowest bands of the St . John group .
A few words , therefore , on the organisms of these bands in support of the parallellism
suggested in the preceding table may w ith advantage be added here .
There i s in al l the Cambrian bas ins in thi s province , jus t below t he oldest beds
which are known to ho ld Paradoxides , a bed of shales of considerable thickness ( 1b ,which though apparently no coarser or more si l iceous than the beds below ,
stands out in
the sections w ith pecul iar mass iveness . It contains some fragments of tri lobites,many
Dictyonine sponges and other low organisms , and the brachiopods lie entombed in it at
1 See note at the end of th is article in reference to Mesonacis and Holmia.
14 2 MATTHEW ON CAMBRIAN
of the sections on the two sides of the ridge,it i s probable that the dividing ridge exi sted
in Cambri an times (compare the third and fifth sect ions) . Band b has i ts greate st th ick
ness in the more distant basin in King’s county (see fourth section ) , but does not show so
much variety i n the sedimentation as at the easterly exposures in the St . John basin .
F IG . 3 .
SWEDEN N E W B R U N SW I C K in C A N A D A
Sr . JOHN Co .
St . John Ci ty( north )
No fossils known.
Agnoahwfiance, (2 0 .
Paradox. Abcnacun ,
cf. P. Tessem'
.
Paradox . E terninictw,
ef. P. rugulom .
Pa radox . lamella twi ,cf . P. mlandicw .
Acrofhele. (f ‘
c.
Beyrichona .
Ag raulo s.
D iplotheca.
Reference to
CAMBRIAN BE DS
SWEDEN No fossils known.
Stage 3 a Ceratopy ge b e2 c—e Peltura Leptoplas tus beds2 a-bOlenus Beds1 ( 1 Upper Paradox ides b eds1 c Lower Paradox ides beds
Lower 1 b Olenel lus (Mesonacis ) beds1 a
‘
1 Fuco idal sandstone1 a 1 Eophyton sandstone
In thi s di strict at Hanford Brook the fauna of 1b presents itsel f in considerable
variety . At the base , forty feet of dark grey sandstone contains Ellipsocephalus and frag
ments of o ther trilobites , three entomostracan s, Viz .
, Hippon ieharion and two species of
ORGANISMS IN ACAD IA .14 8
Leperdit ia remarkable for thei r thick tests and pitted surfaces , and six specie s of brachio
pods of the genera,Acro thele, Acrotreta, Linnarsson ia and Lingulella .
These sandstones are fol lowed by fifty feet of comparat ively barren dark grey sandy
shales, and they by thirty feet of hard , purpl e-streaked sandstones (the streaks due to
ox ide of iron ) , in which occur an Agraulos of the form of Arionellus primwvus of the
bed b in Sweden , and the hyalithoid shell , D iplotheca, as wel l as numerous tracks of
Psammichn ites . The olive grey shale,thirty feet thi ck
,above the sandstone , i s com
parat ively barren , but has yielded the two species of Beyrichon a, a genus which has
points of resemb lance to Arist oz e of Barrande . The upper bed of b , twenty feet th ick ,has numerous she lls of the genera Acrothele, Lingulell a and Linn arsson ia, and wormburrows
,and the brachiopods are the same as those found in the Paradoxides beds above .
In treating of the equivalency of these several beds of the Lower Cambrian , owing to
the scant iness of the faunas,the compari son , bed for bed , cannot bemade W ith the same
confidence as where an abundant fauna, makes an exact comparison easy . Hence the
physical aspect of the beds must necessari ly be largely depended on in making thesecomparisons . This affords good indication s in basins so close to each other as these , buteven here may no t be used w ith entire confidence . I t may, for instance , be observed
that Band a,in the basin of Long Reach , Caton
’s I sland , etc ., i s only about twenty feet
th ick , and Band b, 20 0 feet thick , w hile at Hanford Brook the corresponding bands are
respectively 20 0 and 1 70 feet thick . Band a i s a shal low -water and beach deposit,and
Band 17 was formed in deeper water, which gave opportun ity for the growth of calcareous
organisms ; and there is a possibi l ity that part of Band b of King’s County (Long Reach)
basin may be contemporary w i th the upper part of Band a of the St . John basin,and
that Obolus pulclzer, which we here represent as being of the same age as Hippon icharionand the Leperditiae, may in real i ty be somewhat older . This may not be a matter of anyimportance , as the range of both sets o f organ isms may be found to be greater than i t isnow known to b e, but I direct attention to the actual facts .
In summing up the facts bearing on the comparative age of this part of the Cambrianrocks in Acadi a we get n o aid from the typical genera of this horizon , Olenel lus and
Mesonacis, but the Acadian rocks contain other genera of thi s fauna which serve to fix
their age w ith a certain degree o f accuracy . Some of these genera, however, are such as
may h ave a w i der range of exi s tence in time than 'the trilobites,and therefore are no t of
of the same homotax ial value . The trilobites that do occur are not so defin it iv e as someothers .
ACADIA. SWEDEN AND RUSSIA .
SPECIES. SPECIES . HORI Z ON.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
Ob olus major, n . sp u n
Platysolenites ant iquissimus
Volborthella tenuis
14 4 MATTHEW ON CAMBRIAN
13.
— Flora and Fauna of the BaselSeries, andAdditionalSpecies of Band b , D iv . 1 , St . John Group .
I .— AL G }E .
In describing objects under this head,the wri ter has l imited himself to such as
shows organic structure , or by a carbon iferous hlm ,give evidence of organic matter in
their composition . I t is true that some writers (Nathorst and others) do not con sider
the pres ence of this film as proof that such obj ects were plants and we hav e seen it stated
that seaweeds are such perishable objects , that even where abundant , they leave no
trace of thei r presence in the sol id rocks . This however appears to be a misconception .
It i s true that, where they are imbedded in sand , they may dissolve to a shapeless mass of
jelly and become diffused in the matrix but when buried in cl ay the result. i s different .In the Ti l l and Leda c lays of the Acadian coas t
,which have a considerable antiquity
,the
writer has been Polysiphonias and other delicate seaweeds , as wel l preserved as the ferns
and Asterophyl l ites of the shales of the Carboniferous system .
BUTHOTREPHIS, Hall, 1847 .
BUTHOTREPH I S ANTIQUA, Brongn . 1
Fucoides an tiquus, Brough .,H ist. deVeg. Foss. Vol. I , p. 63.
Fucoides an tiquus, Brongn .,Terre l l . B idrag ti l l Sparagmit , 1868 .
Brongn iart’
s description of thi s species is as fol lows F . fronde compressa,dicho
toma, ramis plan is eequalibus, pat en t ibus, apice sub rotundis, non in crassat is .
”
Seaw eed, havin g a compressed forked frond ; branches flat , equal , spreading, w ith a
tip that is rounded , but not thickened .
Torrel’s note of the local ity i s Funn en i Vestergo thlands Fucoid sandstein .
The horizon i s , therefore , that at which several fragments of flat -leaved , branching
sea-weeds have been found in the Acadian measures . As Bongniart’
s old genus Fucoides
has been broken up,this plant w i l l fal l into Prof. Jas . Hall ’s genus Buthotrephis. I have
reproduced Brongn iart’
s and Hisinger’
s original figures, partly to show the general aspect
of the plant,and partly to indicate the pl ace of the fragments found in our shales .
Siz e — W idth of branches , 2 to 4 mm . length , 2 to 4 mm . Length of plant unknown .
Horiz on cmd Locality .
— Shaly layers in the sandstone beds of Div . 1, Bands b and c in
the Basal series .
PHYCOIDELLA, n . gen .
PHYCOIDELLA STICH I D IFERA ,n . sp. (PI . V, figs . 5 a—d. )
Barren fronds (or branches) strap shaped , often show ing irregular rows of a few
darker spots or granules which have a transverse arrangement on the stem . Fertil e
fronds (or branches) bearing an enlarged extremity l ike a stichida, and also having along
14 6 MATTHEW ON CAMBRIAN
been injected w i th silica . To this mode of replacement al so w e owe the preservation o fsome of the del icate setae whi ch clothed the stem .
This and Buthotrephis antique which occurs w ith it , are the two oldest organisms of
the Cambrian rocks in Acadia.
HYDROCYTIUM.
Among the microscOpic forms in the Cambrian shales are some minute oval bodies
which by the ir black color are shown to have been composed of dense organ ic mat ter .
Th ey appear to have been held together by a strong epidermis, as the content s are often
found shrunken together so as to leave irregular cav ities near the cen tre . Until better
known , they may be referred to the above confervoid genus .
HYDROCYTI UM S ILICULA , n . sp. (PI . V I , fig .
Minute , oval bodies , w ith a s trong cuticle , and haying apedieel-l ike knob at one end .
Siz e — Length , mm . w idth, 4 mm .
Horiz on and Locality .
— In soft green shale of 1 b of the St . John group .
These organisms are not abundant ; they are large enough to be visible to the nakedeye . Other detached and scattered minute bl ack bodies are more common . These may
be the spore cases of algae ; they are in tensel y black , and gave tuberculated surfaces ; they
are usual ly globular or oval in form . Two of these are figured in the accompanying
plates . (Plate VI , fig .
MICROPHYCUS, n . gen .
MICROPHYCUS CATENATUS , n . sp. (P1. V,figs
“
. 6a—b .)
Minute , reticulated organism , forming a net-l ike expansion on the sea bottom w i th
enlargements or nodes at interval s . The connecting threads are nodulose,composed
apparently of chains of single cells . The nodes are tuberculated as though they consistedof an aggregation of cel ls . The cell s are filled w ith a dense organic matter, appearing of
a black color in contrast w i th the hue , greeni sh grey shal e in which they are imbedded.
S iz e — The nodes have a diameter of about Tl—f mm .
,and the conn ecting threads a
l ength of about 4mm .
Hori z on and Locality .; In the fine grey shales of Div . 1 b 1-4
, St . John group atRat clifi
"
s mill s tream .
This microscopic alga i s a most interesting obj ect . The horizon of the Cambrianwhere it i s found is the same as that which in the northern basin (Long Reach) i s
sandy and coarse and comparativel y barren . Here it is a hue soft shale,which
,to judge
from the perfect condition of the most del icate sponges and the erect posi t ion of many of
them in the shale , was deposited in the s t ill waters of a shel tered bay . Through thismud , and even into the tissues of the sponges , th is alga extended , forming an intricate net
work .
ORGANISMS IN ACAD IA . 14 7
I I .— MONE R A Gr: R AD I OL AR I A
Among the micro-organisms found in cavitie s of the Sponges of the Basal series are
some which appear to belong to these divisions of the an imal kingdom .
Ou removing the calcite infilling which n ow conceal s them , they may be found
attached to the walls of the cavi ti es of the sponge . Many of the sil iceous concretions inthese cavities are amorphous, but among these are found sol itary individual s or groups oforganisms which have a defin it e shape . Some of these are here figured and described .
These objects (excep t the fourth described) are amber-colored , and hyaline , and hav ebeen preserved by silicificat ion . They are placed here , awaiting fuller information ontheir nature .
MONAD ITES n . gen .
Minute spherical or oval bodies , w i th or w ithout pedicels . Cuticle horny or mem
b ran aeeous covered w ith minute pores or hairs.
MONAD ITES GLOBULOSUS , n . sp . (PI . VI I, fig 1 a- b .)
Little spherules covered w i th minute pores . These li ttle bodies occur scattered or areaggregated in cavities of the sponge . Sometimes t hey show pedicels , and have connect
ing threads . These are much more abundant than the other minute forms hereindescribed , and may have an organic rel at ion to the sponge .
Siz e — About 4 of a mm .
Horiz on and Locality .
— Red s andy shales of Basal series at Caton ’s Island .
MONAD ITES PYR IFORM IS , n . sp.. (Pl. V I I , figs . 2 a~ b .)
Pyriform , stalked , W ith a dark spot or opening at the extremity surface covered w ith
minute pores (and hairs
Siz e.
—Length,about i
‘ mm . ; w idth , about L mm .
Horiz on and Locality .
—Same as the preceding .
These are found attached to the sides of the sponge cavities,and sometimes one
appears to have grown from the side of ano ther .
MONAD ITES URCE I FORM I S , n . sp . (Pl. V I I , fig . 3 )
Broadly urn-shaped W i th a closed distal extremity beset w i th minute spines . Theswollen part of the body has on each s ide a group of dark spherules implanted on thesurface . On the narrow part of the base i s a proj ec t ion which may be the shrunken
representative of a pedicel . The contracted dis t al extremity is a hyaline,and of a
different texture from the rest of the body.
Siz e — Length , about 71; mm . ; w idth , about mm .
Horiz on and Locality .
—As the preceding .
1 4 8 MATTHEW ON CAMBRIAN
RADIOLARITES, n . gen .
RAD IOLAR ITE S OVAL IS , n . sp . (PI . VI I , fig .
Oval, bluntly pointed at the ends , covered w ith a rai sed hexagonal ornamentat ion .
Siz e — Length , about 4mm . w idth,about mm .
The epidermi s of this form and of Mnnadites g iobulosus may have been o f a horny
consistency as parts of the amber-colored skin are indented as though it had possessed
elast icity before i t was silicified. This and M . urcezformz’
s were found in cavities from
which the calci te had been removed by natural causes,and may be recent .
I I I .—SPONG I D A
Of sponges, there are in thi s part of the Cambrian syst em many representatives of the
hexact inellid order and the scattered spicules of the ir skeleton s may be observed in great
numbers on many of the layers of the shales , or scattered through the coarser beds ; those
in the sandstones are general ly much broken,but in the shales they are more perfect ,
enabl ing us to recognize several kinds of sponges of thi s order .
None have been found which possess a regular cup-shaped cavity,one has i rregular
passages,and appears to bel ong to Maeandrospongidae of the following genus .
PLOCOSCYPHIA, Reuss.
PLOCOSCYPH IA PERANTIQUA , n . sp. (Pl. V I I, figs. 5a— b . )
Outline and general form unknown . Composed of a calcareous or keratose skeleton
traversed by irregular locul i which show on their walls small oscules in which usual ly
the order of arrangement is not traceable , but in which it may s ometimes be observed to
have a quincunx order . The locul i are seen to have around their sides s imple needleshaped spicules in some o f the locul i may be found groups of the monad-l ike organ isms
represented in figs . 1a and lb of Pl ate V I I , nestl ing among the spicules or attached to the
surface of the l ocule .
Horiz on and“Locality .
-The red sandy shales of Div . 1 of the Basal series at Caton'
s
Isl and, Greenw ich .
Among the sponges having a calcareous skeleton holding sil iceous spicules , are two
characterized by simple needle-l ike sp icules . They are placed among the Lithistid
sponges until better known .
ASTROCLAD IA,Z it tel.
ASTROCLAD I A E LONGATA,n . sp. (P1. VI I , fig
Upright,cy l indrical , sinuous or curved , w ith smal l lobes along the sides , locul i few ,
not conspicuous , no cloaea . Spicules simple , needle-l ike . A few l arger ones observedthat penetrate the body of the sponge from the outer surface to the inside of the locule .
15 0 MATTHEW ON CAMBRIAN
HYALOSTELIA,Z it tel.
HYALOSTE L IA MINIMA,n . sp . (Pl. V I I , fig .
A tuft of spicules . E longate,ascending
,branched
,consisting of groups of cemented
spicules , ending in pointed or recurved extremities , or a loose open mass of aggregatedspicules . Having root-l ike branches at the foo t of the tuft of spicules .This appears to be an anchoring group of spicules which terminated upward in the
body of the sponge .
Siz e.
— Length, 4 mm . w idth at the branches
,I i mm .
Horiz on and Locality .
—Red shales of Div . 1 of the Basal s eries at Caton’s Island,Greenw ich
, N.B.
1V.— CR I NOI D E A .
PLATYSOLENITES, Pander.
PLATYSOLEN ITES ANTIQU I SSI MUS , E z’
chw. Sp. (PI . VI I , figs . 1 1 a— c. )
185 1 . Platysolenites, Pander in Bul l. , Soc . Geol. de France , 2 '
sér., vol. 8 , p. 253.
1858 . E hrenb erg in Monatsb ericht,Berl, Akad, p. 329 , 336 .
1 860 . an t'iquissimus, Eichw.
, Let h . ross . auc. per p. 6 78 , T. 33,F . 19 .
1 881 . F . Schmidt, Re v is ion der ostb altischen silurichen Trilb iten , ab theil. I , p. 13 , F. 1 .
1888 . Mem. Acad. Imp. des Sci. St . Petersb urg, V I I ., XXXVI. , No. 2, p. 26 .
F . Schimdt , in the last named publ ication: gives a full description of thi s Encrini testalk ,
” and of the opinions of several n atural ists who have examined it . Being the oldest
fossi ls known in the Lower Cambrian beds of Russi a , they have attracted much attentionPander
,who first described these minute
,hard
,flat ten ed little reeds ,
” could not decide
upon their place in the sys tem of nature . Ehrenberg , who studied them microscopical ly ,could find no structure in their hard shells , and was inclined to regard them as similar to
the mineral crust that encloses the stems of certain Algae . E ichwald referred them to the
Annelids,considering their hard calcareous shel l s to be similar to those of Serpulae . F .
Schmidt says that he was brought to consider . them parts of Cys t idian s , because of theirarticulated appearance . He al so states that in 1 870 Gumbel could find in them no thingbut crinoid s talks . ” They have been found by Mickw it z in abundance on the sea shore ,near Reval and Kostifer on the Baltic , where they have been washed out of the Cambrian
Blue Clay .
”Herr Schmid t describes those from the lower Glauconite sand (in the Blue
clay) as“ somewhat flatly _
compressed l ittle reeds w ith transverse divi sions and j oints ,about 2 mm . b road and 15 mm . long . The “
thickness o f the shel l about mm ., and the
length of t he joints about mm . The structure of the shel l i s pl ainly crystallo - calcareous
as w i th other crinoid stalks .
”
In the exampl es from -Caton ’s Is land the crystal l ine structure of the shel l i s preserved ,and the in terior is occupied by a black mass which appears t o be the carbon ized contents
of the cavi ty . The fossi l i s incl ined to spl it readily along the middle , where the two sets
of plate s meet,and here the edges of the plates are rounded
,where probably there was a
connecting cartilage . Ou referring to F . Schmidt’s figures of the Russi an examples of
thi s species ,1 it w i l l be seen that the half of the s tem
,or arm i s often thus preserved .
1 I bid. Pl. i i . 33 a and b.
ORGANISMS IN ACADIA .
S iz e.— The longest example preserved was 1 2 mm . long . W idth , 2 mm . Length o f
j oints, mm . Diameter o f the' canal
,about mm .
Horiz on and Localz'
ty .
— In grey layers of the red sandy shales of Div . 2 of the Basal
series at Caton’s Island
, Greenw ich , N.B.
Dr . Schmidt thinks these fossi l s may be compared to the long arms of the American
species, E ocyslz
’
tes long idaclylus, Walcott , of the Middle Cambri an of Nevada, U. S.
, but I
have found no body plates of cystids w ith the Canadian Platysolen ites .
V.— B R ACH I OPOD A .
OBOLUS,E ichwald, 1 829 .
OBOLU S PULCHER , Matt . (Pl. VI II , figs. 1 a—m and 2 a— c. )
Can . Record of Set , Jam,1889 , p. 303.
The original description of this species was as follows :
General outline nearly orbicular ; the valves gently , but rather flatly and evenlyarched downward from the centre al l around
,except that the dorsal i s flat ter at the back
than elsewhere,and the ventral valve runs out into a short , acuminate umbo .
Dorsal valve somewhat w ider than long more strongly arched toward the front than
elsewhere somewhat elevated at each end of the hinge line .
Ventral valve about asw ide as long the front evenly rounded back produced into ashort pointed beak , angle of incidence of the two sides 1 10
° to
Sculpture of t he posteri or half of the valves , consisting of minute tubercles , sloping
forward and arranged in rows,which arch fo rward across the mesian l ine from each .
lateral margin , giving the surface a cancellated appearance , l ike that of Lingula favosa
and Kutorg z'
na pwnnula . Sculpture of the anterior part on the front and sides in the adult
shell consi sting of concentric l ines of growth,w i th faint
,interrupted
,radiating striae .
On e of the most interesting species among the early brachiopods of the St . John group
is the one named above . Ou account of i ts antiquity and because o f its pecul iar form inthe embryonic stage s
, the writer n ow gives considerable space to the description of its
characters . It i s the oldest species of brachiopod belonging to the St . John group, of
W hich good material has been obtained,and the fol lowing extended account - i s based on
thi s material .
The ventral valve i s evenly and moderately arched,except that the sides are depressed
toward the beak ; the beak itself is prominent only toward the t ip , and runs out horiz on tally from the middle of the valve .
I n terior of the D orsalValve (F igs . 1 z'
to m) .— The most noticeable feature of the interiorof this valve i s the three ridges which radiate from the hinge line toward the anterior endof the valve . The mesi an ridge begins w i th a small tubercle near the umbo , i s l onger thanthe twolateralridges , and divides into two outward arching fo rks including these, i tex tends about two-fifths of the length of the yalve from the h inge l ine i t s posterior partdivides the pits of the hinge line. where the posterior adductor muscles were attached .
The two lateral ridges extend forward from the two ends of the hinge line and at the endof each , where i t j oins the hinge line , are situated the pits due to the attachment of the two
1 5 2 MATTHEW ON CAMBRIAN
branches of the cardinal muscl e ; outside of these two ridges are a pair of elongated
semilunar scars, W here the posterior adjustor muscles were attached . There i s a -shaped
ridge flat ter than those described and broader, in front of the space between the forks of
the mesian ridge this probably divides t he anterior adductor muscles .
In terior of theVentralValve (Figs . 2 h to l) .— There i s much resemblance in general aspectbetween the interior of the dorsal and ventral valves . The l atter differs i n the more el ongated callus of the visceral cavity, the n arrower scar of the posterior adjus tor muscle , theabsence of the strong l ateral ridge beside thi s muscle
,and the w ant of
.
a division along
the mesi an l ine . This valve also exhibits indications of the attachment of the pedice l,and
of the central adjustor muscles . The ventral valve also possesses a smaller, pointed depression in the front of the visceral cavity, which probably marks the attachment of the anterior
adductor muscle . From thi s point,a somewhat depressed b and extends to the front of the
shell . I f we assume that the small round s car,near the centre of the vi sceral cavity, was
made by the central adjustor muscles,a smal l scar behind it , having its opening directed
backward , w i l l mark the starting point of the pedicel . This organ in its b ackward coursehas made a sl ight groove on the axial l ine . There are indications that the pedicel thenpassed through a foramen in the hinge
,coming on the hinge area below the beak , but thi s
point is not clearly determinable .
Sculptura— The younger part of the s hel l i s covered w ith minute tubercles, slopingforward
,and arranged in curved row s which arch forward to the mesi an line from each
lateral margin of the valve , thus giving the surface a cancellated appearance this cancel
lated or rasp-l ike surface does not cover the valve continuously , but i s interrupted by
arching bands of ridges concentri c to the umbo . The anterior part and the outer lateralparts of the valves have the concentric ridges on ly
,w ith a few faint, broken , radiating lines ,
Visible at in tervals . The cancellated l ines do not always cover so l arge a space on thedorsal as on the ventral valve
,but the former val ve shows more dist inctly the radiat ing
l ines outside the visceral cavity .
Growth and .Development .
— The growth and development of thi s specie s as recorded inits shel ly covering are very instructive . Beginning w ith a shel l which i s comparative ly
tumid'
in form and nearly semicircular in outline , i t finally becomes orbicul ar in outl ine ,and w ith valves flat t ened to the form of saucers .
By the varied sculpture, the outl ines of the valves and the surface markings, severalphases in the l i fe of this brachiopod may be distinguished .
The first i s that marked by the embryonic shell . This shel l , now preserved in theumbo o t
’
the adult, show s in the markings on i ts surface faint indicat ions of additions to
its size , but these are hardly discernibl e . A remarkable feature about this is the formwhich i s entirely different from that of the adul t , for it (in the dorsal valve especially) i s
nearly semicircular in ou t l ine,and is quite tumid when compared w i th the adult shel l
i t l ooks more like an Orthis or a Linn arsson ia (see figs . i a to c) than an Obolus or aLingulel la , the two genera which the adult most nearly resembles . The embryo ventralvalve also differs qu ite as much from the adul t as does the dorsal, for in i ts high umbo
and straight hinge l ine it recal ls species of the genera Acrotreta and Kutorgin a (see figs
2a t o c . )In the embryonic shel l of the dorsal valve
,w hich is narrowly semicircular, the
straight outl in e of the hinge was scarcely broken by the rounded projection of the umbo .
1 8 4 MATTHEW ON CAMBRIAN
the markings are more distinct near the margin than toward the umbo , while the reverseis the case w i th this Obolus .
This larval part of the shel l i s sometimes divided by one or two concentric l ines intotwo parts
,of which the outer i s distinguished by an en larged pattern of the radular
ornamentation and the margin of thi s zone has a more rounded outer margin than the
inner zone,ow ing to the more rapid
“
extension of th e margin at the sides and front . I n
this outer half of the larval zone th ere i s a more decided thickening of the shell , for the
l ines of grow th are not so del icately marked as in the inner half, nor i s the impression of
the feature s of the interior of the shell so clearly apparent, except as regards the outl ines
of the Visceral cavi ty . These features , however, may be inferred from the rounded ridges
on the surface and by the l ines of scars left by the anterior adjustor muscles , which giv e
evidence of about six stages of growth in thi s outer zone of the larval shell .
Outside of this zone the radular ornamentation i s exchanged , on a narrow band of the
shel l,for concentric ridges
,indicating an arrest of grow th preparatory to the next phase
in the l ife history of the individuals of thi s specie s .
“The close of th e l arval period is marked by the fixat ion of the hinge l ine , which no
longer lengthen s,and consequently the posi tion of the posteri or adductor and the
proximate end of the cardinal muscle do not materi al ly change after this .
The advent of the next phase in the history of this shel l , which may be called theadolescent phase
,i s indicated by a return to the radular ornamentation , which now i s of
a sti l l coarser pattern t han previously,and is not always wel l preserved ; in fact dorsal
valves are not uncommon , and ventral valve s are occasional ly found , wh ich show no
radular ornament at thi s period , but have concentric l ines only . Thi s pecul iarity, however
,may be due to imperfect preservation .
This part of the valve , l ike the larval , is not un frequently found to be divided intotwo zones by a few concentric l ines in the outer of these zones the radular ornament is
usual ly very irregular .
At th is period one does not find the l ines of grow th so dis tinctly marked as in the
earl ier period,nor the scars of the anterior adjustor and adductor muscles but the out
l in e of the visceral cavi ty , ow ing to the thickening of the cal lus formed there , stand out
w ith greater distin c tness (fig .
The adul t shel l presents , in both valves , a nearly round contour, and on it also israther prominently indicated the outline of the Visceral cavity
,which becomes propor
t ion ately narrower in the adolescent and adul t stages, than at an earl ier peri od . Themarks of the muscl es i n the prev isceralarea of the she llalso continue to be faintly Visible
on the outer portion of the shel l .
This species, then , i s marked by four stages of grow th and development , o i’
which
the most prominent features are the follow ing
Embryon ic— Formation of the embryonic shel l .
Larval.— Lengthening of the hinge l ine and acquisition of mantle-margins .Adolescent — F ixation of the hinge line , otherw i se as the last , except that the
radular ornament becomes irregular .
Adult .
— Absence of radular ornamentation on the val ve,and great expansion of
the mantle margin .
The speci es of brach iopod which most nearly approaches thi s i s Lingula (or Obolus
ORGANISMS IN ACADIA. 1 5 5
f avosa, Linrs , of the Fucoidal s andstone in Sweden ; but in that shel l the sides meet:
behind at an angle of and. the shel l i s said to be pitted . Another resembl ing species is
Lingulella ccclala, Hall , of the Olenel lus beds of New York ; and a third is Kulorg ina
pannula, White , of the Nevada Cambrian rocks , but both are much smaller, and in these
two species the cancel lated markings cover the whole surface .
OBOLUS MAJOR,n . sp. (Plate VI I I , fig .
Only the dorsal valve known . This is transversely oval , flat tened near the umbo ,and deep w i thin the edges toward the back of the shel l .
The interior markings seem those of an Obo lus . The in esian l in e i s strongly marked
j ust w i th in the umbo , and at the middle of the shell , in front of which i t appears to fork .
The scars of the posterior lateral s only are distinct .
The example known shows the inter ior of the shell and a little of the external sur~
face . The shel l was thin , and is changed to i ron -oxide . The outer surface near the edgeof the shel l was covered by fin e radiating l ines or ridges .
A trace of the beak of the ventral valve is preserved and is indicated by a dotted l ine
in the figure .
Horiz on and Localz'
ly .
— In the sandy shale s of Series A, (Basal series) Div . 2 b.
Thi s species i s found in beds which are nearly or quite equivalent in age to the
Eophyton sandston e of Sweden , from W hich , in 1 869 , Linnarsson described. Lingula
monilz'
fem .
‘ W i th this species I should be incl ined to identify ours,although it i s l arger
and w ider, for it has a similar ornamentation ; but further developments regarding the
form of the interior of Lingula mon ilg'
fem based on numerous examples found by the
Russ ian engineer Mickwi tz , near St . Petersburgh , and described by Dr. F . Schmidt , show
it to be an entirely different shell . Dr. Schmidt finds in the interior of the dorsal valve
an extraordin ary horn,rising from its centre and directed into the beak of the ventral
valve . The existence of such a structure cer tainly is not indicated in the Acadian speciesabove described , the interior of which resembles that of the genus Obolus . We have ,therefore , fel t compel led to refer it provisionally to that genus under a new name . It
W i l l be observed however,that our species possesses the pecul iar flat ten ing of the dorsal
valve , so remarkably exhibited in Mz’
clcwz’
tz ia mon z’
lifem .
LINGULELLA, Salter, 1 86 1 .
LINGULE LLA MARTINENSI S , n . sp . (Plate VI I I , fig .
Orbicular, ovate , broadly rounded in front, somewhat ventricose . Beak of the ventral
Valve prominent . No other sculpture than that of concentric and radiating striae has
been observed .
Siz e .
—Length of ventral valve,about 10 mm . ; w idth , about 8 mm .
1 See also Geo l . Mag. London , 1868 , p. 398,t ab . x i
,figs. 1 and 2 , and Geognostiska och Palaeon tologiska
iakt tagelser ofver E ophyton sandston,Stockholm ,
1871 , J G. O. Linnarsson ,where i t is cal led Obolus monilifera.
1 5 6 MATTHEW ON CAMBRIAN
Horiz on and Localz'
ty .— Dark grey sandstones of Band b 1 Div . 1 , St . John group at
Hanford Brook .
This specie s in its deep and round valves approaches to Obolus in aspect . It i s
l arger than the other Lingulellae found w i th it .
VI .— CE PH AL OPOD A .
VOLBORTHELLA, Schmidt ( 1888 )
A number of years ago,Dr . A . Volb orth mentioned the occurrence near Reva] , in
E stland , Russi a , of some very small examples of Orthoceras in the Blue Clay .
” Thesehave since been found at other local i ties in the same region
,notably at Strietb erg and
Kunda , but always in the upper l ayers of the Blue Clay . Dr. F . Schmidt has made a
careful study of these peculiar l ittl e organi sms,the oldest of thei r kind known , and seems
to be fully convinced that they are Orthocerat ites . He has recognized a serie s of closely
set partitions,and a narrow
,reed- l ike siphon of about one tenth of the diameter of the shel l .
In the occurrence of this genus in the Cambri an rocks of Sou thern New Brunsw ickwe are again reminded of the closely simil ar cond i t ions which accompanied the depositio nof the oldest Cambrian measures in Russ ia and New Brunswick . The organism is foundw i th us in . Band b of the upper part of the Basal series , and in the upper part o f Band b
of Division 1 of the St . John group . I t occurs in clusters , as though of a gregareous hab it .
I do not observe any notable difference of aspect between our examples,and so describe
them under the same specific name as the Russi an species , the descripti on of which is
here reproduced .
VOLBORTHELLA TENU IS, Sclmn'
dt . (PI . VI I I , figs . 5 a—d. )
Memo irs Imp. Acad. Sci. S t. Petersburg. Series VI I ,Vol. XXXV I , No. 2, p. 25 , Taf. I I , figs. 27-31.
Body small,only a few l ines long
,similar in form to Orthoceras . They are conical
,
hav e chambers which are short and conical , arched (downward) , drawn forward some
what in the middle , and perforated for the passage o f a slender siphon , which occupies
about Tlath of the shel l [’
s w idth In the longitudinal section,the siphon is indicated
by a hol low ree tl-l ike mark , but i ts shel l substance is wanting ; and al so on the ou ts ide
o f the body itself al l t race o f a shel l is wanting, al though it has retained the appearanceof -a del icate cross-striation on the outs ide surface .
A living chamber cannot be clearly distinguished,but by washing ou t the top of
the shell a depression appears which corresponds to such a cavity .
Al though I now can produce no positive evidence against the Orthoceras-l ike char
acter of these smal l bodies , st i ll i t appears to me that their extreme smal lness and the ir
thin shell,wh ich i s entirely destroyed , while other fossil s as Platysolen ites and Olenel lus
have preserved thei rs , establ ishes a decided generic distinct ion , W hich I propose to mark
by the name Volborlhella, in honor of the discoverer .
Dr . Schmidt gives th e dimension s of a number of what he calls broken pieces of the
large end of the shel l , none of which exceed 5 mm . in length ; but he figures an example
show ing the smaller end, which i s about 10 mm . l ong . I have found no specimens of
1 5 8 MATTHEW ON CAMBRIAN
more difficult to decidehow these objects are produced whether they are the pet rified
remain s o f real w orms,or only tracks of worms in sand
,bored and then filled up pas
sages , or fin ally worm casts of the intestinal canal , such as one can see everywhere on
the beach that Aren z’
cola piscalorum inhabits . Such “
an animal cements together the sand
which it swal lows,by the mucus o f the intest inal can al so it may happen that the worm
like excrement may thus be held together in the fossil state . Probably the worm from
which this fossi l was produced was one whose way o f l i fe resembled that of Arenicol a .
From this description it is evident that Prof. Torrel l at first regarded this track as
that of a worm subsequently when describing it under the name of Psammichn ites, he
con sidered the possibil i ty that it might have been made by a mollusc or crustacean .
It is al so clear that he includes i n the description the casts of large size , s imilar to
those large tracks of worms which he found in the s ame sandstones .
By comparing the figures Arenicolz’
les (or Psammichn ites) g igas, given byTorrel l , it w il lbe seen that the fossi l agrees in all essential part icul ars w ith that which I have herein
referred to his genus Psammichnites . I t may,however
,be remarked that the ful l-sized
figure of the species , given by Torrel l (Plate X I , fig . 1h) , represents the form as much more
convex than it usual ly i s found . But there i s so much variety in the configurat ion of the
surface of the cast of the track , thatTorrel l’s figure only imperfect ly represents i ts feature s.
These vary according to whether the track runs over the top of a wave-ridge in the sand ,or extends along a hollow between the ridges ; when traversing the ridges the animalmoved more rapidly and formed a deep round furrow ,
set off by a narrow sharp ridge on
each side , which is separated from the main furrow by a smal l groove (fig . 1 b . ) E lsewhere
W e hnd the central furrow represented by a nearly flat band w ith three smal l furrows, one
central and the other two at the sides ; this track appears much narrower than the typical
track,but outside of the three furrow s are lighter traces of another pair of furrow s,
defin ing a slightly raised swell ing, which mark the ful l l imit of w idth of the track (fig .
near Thi s track has pittings along the centre , and W hen the centre i s raised , appearsto bear depressed irregular hol lows along the side .
The usual form of Psammichn it es has two broad rai sed convex ridges w ith a narrowchannel be tw een them when badly preserved , this channel seems to be w ider and the
ridges narrower,owing to the channel being filled partly w ith mud . In some wel l pre
served tracks,the ridges are seen not to be continuous , but to be a series of long spindle
shaped swellings, w ith the summits of the swel lings about one and a half inches apart,
and w ith one end having a longer s lope than the other (fig . I d. ) In others the ridges are
traversed by shal low diagonal depression s turning inward and backward from each side ,and about one inch apart (fig . la .)
ARENICOLITES, Salter.
D IPL OCRATE RI 0 1V, Torrel l .
Burrow s of worms referable to this genus are common at several horizons of the St .
John group,and notably in Divi sion 2 . Those of the Basal serie s are not so conspicuous
but have some interesting forms . Such casts of worm tubes were arranged by Salter
under the above name . Salter’s description i s as follows
ORGANISMS IN ACADIA . 1 5 9
Impression s which were once evidently the burrow s o f marin e annelids . Like
those of the ordinary Aren icolze of our coast they had both entrance and ex it holes , so
that the hollow s (and the corresponding tubercles which are the casts of th ese on the
lower surface s of the beds) are always in pairs .”
Mr. Salter says that these hol lows occur in such multitudes , and through so great an
extent of strata in the Longmynd (a ful l mi le in vertical thickness) as to impress us w i th
the b el ie f that annel id l ife was abundant in Cambrian times .
We cannot see that there is any generic difference between the forms described by
Mr. Salter under the name Aren icolites and those which Torrel l calls D iplocraterion .
Torrel l rel ies upon the funnel at the orifice of the tube as dis t inguishing D iplocrat erionfrom Arenicolites, but such ver t ical burrows could hardly exi st w ithout an enlargement
at the orifice, and Salter plainly depicted Ao'
em'
colites sparsus as having such a funnel .
Moreover Torrell admits that his D évlocmlem'
on pa-mllelum,
maj ore (fig . 4b) and minore (fig .
5b) , agree plainly w ith Salter’s Aren z
’
colites sparsus and didymus (figs . 4a and 5a) .
ARENICOLITE S LYELL I , Torrell, v ar. M INOR . (Pl. XI , figs. 2 a—c .)
Twinned worm burrows having the orifices distant from each other about 30 to 50mm . Diameter of the orifice, 1 0 to 1 5 mm .
Horiz on ( md Locality — Purpl i sh flags of Div . lo of the Basal series on slabs w ith
Psammichnites gigas.
This burrow has larger and more distant openings than Aren icolz’les sparsa-s, Salter (fig .
4a) , but not the great funnel-shaped cups of A . Melli, Torrel l (fig .
CHONDRITES. (Pl. XI , fig .
Numerous worm casts which by their round form and continuousnes s would come
under this head,are found in the flags and sandstones of the Basal serie s, many large ones
in connection w ith the tracks of Psammichn ites, but they do not cal l for special description .
V I I I .— CR USTACE A
After the wealth of tri lobites found in the Paradox ides beds , i t seems strange to find
this type of crustacean so scarce in the Cambrian measures beneath . Only doubtful frag
ments referable to this order have been met w ith . The beds of Band b, as has been
remarked , contain a few . In the lower part of th is band were found two b ivalveentomostracans belonging to the genus below .
LEPERD ITIA, Rouault .
LEPERD ITIA VENTRICOSA ,n . sp. (Pl ate V I I , figs. 1 2 a—d. )
Oval , Ventricose , hinge-l ine short .
Ventral valve bent inward at the hinge , and having a faint transverse ridge w ithin ,
1 6 0 MATTHEW ON CAMBRIAN
near the anterior end . Marginal furrow rather broad,st rongest near the anterior end
,
fading out towards the posterior,where the edge of the shel l i s bent outward . Dorsal
Valv e less ventricose , show ing an eye-spot faintly elevated on the upper anterior part .
Sculptura— Closely set , s trongly marked pits , which are most distinct on the ventricos e
part of the shel l . The pits along the margins,and around the eye spots are smaller than
elsewhere .
S iz e.
—Length , 1 1 mm . height, 8 mm . depth, 4 mm .
Horiz on and Localz’
ty .
~ - In the dark grey sandstones of Div . 1 a‘at Hanford B rook , St .
Martins .
LEPE RD ITIA STE AD I , n . sp. (Pl ate V I I , figs . 1 3 a— c . )
Oval , lenticul ar , rather flat , hinge l ine more than two -thirds of the leng th .
Marginal furrow sharp and the rim well marked at the anterior end, Where it
crossed diagonally by a branch of the marginal furrow .
Sculpture — As in the preceding species .
S iz e.
— Len gth , 9 mm . w idth,about 7 mm . depth
, 1% mm .
Horiz on and Localily — As th e preceding species .
Found by Mr. Geoffrey Stead .
Nora — S ince wri ting the above artic le, I have learned that a suggestion made by me, in reference to Olenellus
Kj erulfi, has met wi th acceptance from a numb er of natural ists. Some time s ince in speak ing of the work done b yDr. Gerhard Holm
,in developing the remarkab le characters of th is species, I suggested th at his n ame should b e
commemorated in connection wi th it .I am sat isfied that, when other species now ranged under Olenel lus and Olenoides are treated as D r. Hohn
has treated 0 . Kj erulfi, a rearrangemen t of these forms wi l l b e found necessary . One may see for instan cethe m ixture of characters b y compar ing the lately discovered Russ ian spec ies Olenellus Mickun
'
lz i,Schm idt, wi th
Olcnoidcs typicalis and Mesonacis Vcrmontiana. Olenoides, original ly b ased by Mr. Meek on a part of a thorax(and pygidium —O. c adensis,
— assumes an_
en t ire1y new aspect when referred to 0 . typicalis, Walcott, and theoriginal Olenoides may b e quite a differen t tri lob i te from t he latter. Wh i le I apprec iate Mr. IValco t t ’s loyaltyto the orig inator of the name, i t seems to me that he might with advantage, have left th is name in ab eyance ,
b ased as i t is on such a defective example.
The fonr-Spined hypos tome of 0 . Kj erulfi is differen t from any known hypostome of an Olene l lus or a
Paradox ides. The four po in ts are perhaps the analogues of the four S p ines at the back of the head-sh ie ld in th isspecies. Such a hypostome and the ab sence of an en larged th ird segmen t of the thorax , separates th is Spec iesfrom allthe American Olenelli. Mcsonact
’
s differs from i t in several importan t respects, e .g., the en larged th ird
segmen t and the great spine on one of the posterior segmen ts. I propose therefore to use hereafter for O. Kj crulfi
the generic name Holmia .
1 6 2 MATTHEW ON CAMBRIAN
FIG . 13.— Leperdi tia, Steadi , n . sp.
- 13a,R ight v alVe , natura l s i z e.
— 13b,Long i tudinal section .
— 13c, Transversesection . From Band b‘
, St . John Group. S ee p . 1 6 0 .
PLATE VIII .
1 .— 0 bolus pulcher, n . Sp.
, (dorsal valve) 1a , Embryon ic she l l seen from above. Mag.J1
5.-a ll) , Same, v iew of the
h inge area.— lo
,Same, seen from t he s ide.
— 1d,Another emb ryon ic she llwi t h deeper prev isceral
depress ion . Mag.19 .
— leg Same in section .— lf, Larval shel l , inner half shaded. Mag.
— 1g, Adolescen tshe l l , inner half shaded (wi th larva l and emb ryon ic she l l included. ) Mag.
—1h, Adult shel l showingallthe stages and the outl ine of the v isceral cav i ty . Mag.
— 1i,Interior of dorsal valve showing the
median and lateral ridges, and the muscular scars. Mag.— 1k, Another example less perfectly
preserved, shortened b y pressure.— ll
,Mould of the dorsal valve showing the muscular scars
and the in terna l layers of the shel l partly b roken away . Mag.— 1m
,A nother mould n arrowed b y
pressure, w i th the in ternal layers more completely removed, and showing the vascular l ines more
distinctly. Natura l s i z e. Allfrom Band Caton ’s Island . S e e p . 1 5 1
Obolus pulcher, n . sp., (ven tral valve ) . — 2a, Emb ryon ic she l l seen from ab ove . Mag.
— 2b, Same, showingthe h inge 1ine.
— 26, Sa1n e seen from the s ide.
— 2d, Complete larval shel l (wi th emb ryon ict
shel l in outl ine) .Mag.
s}. Complete adolescen t shel l (wi th emb ryon ic and larval she l l included) . Mag. 2f, Adultshel l showing allthe stages of growth and the outl ine of the v isceral
.
cav i ty .— Qg, View of the h inge in
the larval stage showing a tube and foramen . Mag. ia— Qh,Interior of the ven tral valve, showing the
place of the pedicle, the vascular groves and the scars left b y the muscles. Mag.—2i
,Ven tral Valve
partly decorticated,reveal ing the outl ine of t he ven tral cav ity .
— 2k, Mould of the ven tral valvelateral ly compressed, showing po in ts of attachmen t of the pedicel , the foramen ,
the vascular striae andscars left by the muscles. Mag.
— 2l,Another mould show ing variations in the in ternal mark ings.
Mag. Allfrom Band b H , Caton ’s Is land. See p . 1 5 1 .
3.— Obolus maj or, n . sp. , I n terior of dorsal valve. Natural s i z e. From D iv . 2b
,Basal series, Hanford Brook .
See p . 1 5 5 .
4.— I/ ingulella Martincnsis, n . sp.
,In terior of ven tral valve. Natural s i z e. From Band 1 b 1 St . John Group.
Han ford Brook . See p . 1 5 5 .
5 . Volborthella tenuis, Schm idt.— 5a, Large example . 5 b, Smal ler Specimen showing the septa. Both mag.
ff.
From Band b, St . John group, Be1yea’
s Landing.— 5c, E xample, w i th shel l replaced by hematite.
5d, Same in section to show siphuncle Both mag. g. From D iv . 2b,Basa l series. Han ford Brook .
See p . 1 5 6 .
PLATE IX .
l.— Psammichm
’
lcs gigas, Torre ll . - 1a,Track crossing a sand ridge . Reduced —1 b
,Transverse sect ion of same .
Reduced fia— lc, Track showing cross furrows. Red. a}. showing paired lob es. Red.- lc, Track
w i th lateral furrows. Red. 5 ( N.B.— The track is between la and 2c . ) —lf and lg, Same in section .
- 1h, Track wi th two r idges on ly . Red.— 1 i
, Sa1ne in section .—1k
,Track from th e Eophyton sandstone .
Natural s i z e ; after Torrel l . S ee p . 1 5 7 .
2 — Arcnicoli tcs Lyclli (Torrel l ) var. minor.— 2 a .a .
,b.b.
, c.c. Mouths of three pairs of burrows . ReducedFrom D iv . 1 0 , Basal series. Hanford Brook . See p . 1 5 9 .
3 .— Arcn icoli tcs Lyclli, Torrel l. Constructed from h is description . The two legs of the b urrowshow the
extremes of dimens ions g iven by him. S ee p . 1 5 9 .
4.— A1'cnicoli tes sparsus, Salter, after Salter. Reducedfi —4a
,Burrows in sandstone of the Stiper stones.
— 4b, A . paralleling, Torrel l . Constructed from h is description ; the two legs of the burrow show the
extreme dimens ions he g ives. S ee p . 1 5 9 .
5 ._ Arcnicoltlcs didymus, Salter, after Salter. Reduced, 7} — 5a , Burrows wi th those of A. 8pa7
°
31w —5 b, A.
parallcllus, Torrel l . Smal l variety constructed from h is description. See p . 1 5 9 .
6 .— Chondri tes from Camb rian sandstones ofWales (Harlech After Sa lter. S e e
'
p . 1 5 9 .
S PUN GE S , S I LU R O- CR M B R I A N , L ITTLE M E TI S .
Tran s. R . S . C .
,1 8 8 9 .
Sec . IV. P late I I I .
(From Photographs. )
F igs. I and 2 . Pro tospongia t et ranema , 3. P. mononema, 4 . P. coronata , 5. P. polynema , (Z , P. cyathifo/
rmis,I ‘ 1
’
7 . Cyathospongia Queb ecensis, 8 . Acan thodictya hispida.
ll
L z j J
To I LLUSTRATE S I R W ILL IAM D AWSON’
S PAPER ON FOSS I L Sporxihns .
ff SOCIET
ARTOTYPE, PATENTED: CANADA BANK NOTE CO L IMITED , MONTREAL.
Trans. R. s o 1 88 9 .
PROTOPHYTA ’
Sec. IV. Plate v .
To il lustrate Mr. G . F Matthew’
s paper on Camb rian Organisms.
I EA ND ARTICULATA .
Trans. R . S. C 1 88 9 .
PROTOZ OA’ CRINO D ASec . IV. Plate VI I .
To i l lustrate Mr. G. F Matthew’
s paper on Cambrian Organisms.
Trans . 1 88 9 .
ANNELIDA'
SecIIV. Plate I -X.
To il lustrate Mr. G. F. Matthew’
s paper on Cambrian Organisms.
Quercus plat ania , Heer.
To i l lustrate Sir “Tilliam Dawson’
s Paper on New Foss i l Plan ts from the Northwest .
L. M. LAMBE, DEL.
x and 2 .— Maclurea M an z
'
iobezzn'
S. side of a'
spec imen from PikeH ead and ( 2 ) Front v iew o f ano th‘
en from Kinwow Bay.
3—5 ,
— Cy rtocems Man z’
tobem e. D istorted example from Big Island ; (4 ) Spec imen from D eer Island ; and ( 5 ) Septum o f a
spec imen from Bul l Head. Allthe figuresare o f natural siz e .
CAMBRO—SILURIAN FOSSILS OF MANITOBA .
Trans.R . S. C.,1 8-8 9 .
Sec . IV. P late
SOCI ETY .
LAMBE D EL
l.—0 n cocem s magnum.
—S ide v iew o f a spec imen from East Selk irk .
Oncowm: gz'
bbosum .
Longi tudinal section o f a spec imen from Pike Head ; andSwampy
Island. 4 .
— Cy rtoceras Mam’
tobem‘
e.—Longitudinal sec t ion o f a
(3 ) Part of the test o f ano ther from2 and 3.
spec imen from Bull ’s Head.
LAMBE DEL.
( 1 ) Side view o f the type of the spec ies , sl ightly reduced in si z e ( 2 ) Outline o f t ransverse section
Apsz'
a’
oceras z
'
ns zgne.
o f the same at the larger end.
